Attachment 16661

PROJECT MANUAL
Tehama County Library
for
County of Tehama
Prepared By
JK Architecture Engineering
11661 Blocker Lane #120
Auburn, CA 95603
JKA #15-100
April 18, 2016

TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL DOCUMENTS
Cover
Flyleaf
Table of Contents
Directory
DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 31 33 Hazardous Material Survey
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 Summary of Work
01 41 00 Test Laboratory Services
01 57 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control
01 71 20 Cleaning and Decontamination Procedures
01 71 40 Work Area Clearance
DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 08 10 Removal of Asbestos-Containing Material
02 08 20 Removal of Vinyl Asbestos Floor Tile
02 08 40 Disposal of Asbestos-Containing Waste Material
02 41 19 Selective Building Demolition
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
03 10 00 Concrete Formwork and Accessories
03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
03 54 13 Gypsum Cement Underlayment
DIVISION 04 MASONRY
04 05 00 Mortar and Grout
04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry
DIVISION 05 METALS
05 12 00 Structural Steel
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
05 58 13 Column Covers
DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
06 17 33 Wood I-Joists
06 18 00 Glue Laminated Construction
06 20 23 Finish Carpentry Interior
06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework
06 61 16 Solid Surfacing Fabrications
06 71 13 Structural Composite Lumber
DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 01 51 Preparation for Re-Roofing

County of Tehama Table of Contents
JKA #15-100 TC - 1
07 21 00 Thermal and Acoustical Insulation
07 26 19 Topical Moisture Control System
07 54 19 PVC Roofing
07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal
07 72 00 Roof Accessories
07 84 00 Firestopping
07 90 00 Joint Protection
DIVISION 08 OPENINGS
08 11 00 Steel Doors and Frames
08 14 00 Wood Doors
08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames
08 41 00 Aluminum Storefronts, Entrances and Windows
08 44 00 Curtainwall and Glazed Assemblies
08 62 00 Unit Skylights
08 71 00 Door Hardware
08 71 13 Automatic Door Operators
08 81 00 Glass Glazing
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
09 20 00 Portland Cement Plaster
09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling
09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings
09 60 10 Concrete Slab Moisture Control Coating
09 62 00 Concrete Slab Seal Coating
09 65 00 Resilient Flooring
09 68 10 Carpet Tile
09 72 18 Rigid-Sheet Vinyl Wall Covering
09 84 36 Acoustic Baffles
09 91 00 Painting
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10 11 16 Markerboards and Tackboards
10 14 00 Signage
10 21 15 Phenolic Toilet Compartments
10 28 00 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories
10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties
DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 00 50 Basic Fire Sprinkler Materials and Methods
21 10 00 Fire Protection
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
22 00 50 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods
22 10 00 Plumbing Piping Systems
22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures
22 50 00 Plumbing Equipment
DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 00 50 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
23 80 00 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL

JKA #15-100 TC - 2
26 00 10 Basic Electrical Requirements
26 00 60 Power System Study
26 00 90 Electrical Demolition
26 05 19 Building Wire and Cable
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding
26 05 29 Electrical Hangers and Supports
26 05 31 Conduit
26 05 33 Boxes
26 05 46 Signal Systems Raceway
26 05 53 Electrical Identification
26 09 43 Network Lighting Control System
26 24 13 Switchboards
26 24 16 Panelboards
26 27 16 Cabinets and Enclosures
26 27 19 Surface Raceways
26 27 26 Wiring Devices
26 28 16 Overcurrent Protection Devices
26 28 19 Disconnect Switches
26 29 00 Motor Controls
26 43 13 Surge Protection Devices
26 51 00 Interior Lighting
26 61 13 Fire Lighting
26 65 16 Security Alarm Monitoring System
26 71 13 Telecommunications Cabling Systems
26 73 19 Assistive Listening System
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK
31 00 00 Site Clearing
31 22 00 Site Grading
31 23 33 Trenching and Backfilling
DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses
32 12 16 Asphalt Paving, Striping, Signage
32 13 13 Site Concrete
32 91 13 Landscape Soil Prep
DIVISION 33 UTILITIES
33 11 16 Site Water System
33 40 00 Site Storm Drainage
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

JKA #15-100 TC - 3
DIRECTORY/CERTIFICATIONS
____________________________________________________________________________________
PROJECT
Red Bluff, CA
JKA Project No. 15-100
____________________________________________________________________________________
OWNER
County of Tehama
Red Bluff, CA
ARCHITECT
JK Architecture Engineering
11661 Blocker Lane #120
Auburn, CA 95603
530.888.0998
____________________________________________________________________________________
CONSULTANTS
NorthStar Engineering
111 Mission Ranch Road, Suite 100
Chico, CA 95926
530.893.1600
Buehler & Buehler

600 Q Street, #200
Sacramento, CA 95811
916.443.0303
Capital Engineering Consultants, Inc.

11020 Sun Center Drive, Suite 100
Rancho Cordova, CA 95670
916.851.3500
The Engineering Enterprise

1125 High Street
Auburn, CA 95603
530.886.8556
____________________________________________________________________________________
APPROVALS

County of Tehama DIRECTORY/CERTIFICATIONS
JKA #15-100 D-1
DOCUMENT 00 31 34
PROJECT HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SURVEY
1. INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

1.1. COPY OF THE HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SURVEY IS INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION
1.1.1. Document Title:
1.1.1.1. Asbestos Survey Report Red Bluff Daily News, 545 Diamond Avenue, Red
Bluff, California April 30, 2015. Prepared by Baker Environmental
1.1.2. This document is made available by the County for bidder information, but is not a
warranty of hazardous material conditions. This document is provided as reference
document and is not a contract document. The contract documents are intended to
reflect these conditions. Bidders should visit the site and become familiar with existing
conditions.

County of Tehama HAZ MAT SURVEY
JKA #15-100 00 31 34
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1. Summary of work under this contract
1.1.2. Regulatory Requirements
1.1.3. Contractor use of site and premises.
1.1.4. Owner occupancy.
1.2. SUMMARY OF WORK
1.2.1. Work under this contract includes the following task areas, as shown on the drawings,
specified in the Project Manual, and defined in the project contract documents, including
but not necessarily limited to:
1.2.1.1. Demolition of interior walls and finishes, portions of the exterior walls, roof and
other building systems
1.2.1.1.1. Demolition includes abatement of asbestos containing

materials as defined by the Asbestos Survey Report for 545
Diamond Avenue, Red Bluff, CA April 30, 2015; prepared
by Baker Environmental
1.2.1.2. Installation of new interior walls and finishes, storefront systems, exterior
building elements, roof and other building systems.
1.2.1.3. Installation of items furnished by owner as shown on the drawings including,

but not limited to reclaimed wood boards, book theft prevention system and
kitchen equipment.
1.2.2. Perform all work in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and
related Contract Documents.
1.3. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS.
1.3.1. Perform Work in accordance with the applicable provisions of Parts 1-5, 7, 8, 10 and 12,
Title 24, California Code of Regulations.
1.3.2. During the entire construction period, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to
maintain conditions at the Project Site to meet the requirements of the Federal
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and California occupational
regulations. This provision shall cover the Contractor's employees and all other persons
working upon or visiting the site. The Contractor shall become fully informed of all
applicable standards and regulations and inform all persons and representatives
responsible for work under this Contract.

County of Tehama SUMMARY OF WORK
JKA #15-100 01 11 00 - 1
1.4. CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
1.4.1. Limit use of site and premises to allow:
1.4.1.1. Work by Others and Work by Owner.
1.4.2. Access to Site: Coordinate with Owner.
1.4.3. Building Exits During Construction: Maintain all exits. Do not obstruct at any time.
1.4.4. Time and Construction Schedule Considerations:
1.4.4.1. Schedule all construction operations with Owner.
1.4.4.2. Construction operations generating excessive noise, such as use of

pneumatic tools and powder actuated fastener equipment, shall be scheduled
with the Owner. Permitted hours of operation for demolition and excessive
noise operations are limited to city requirements.
1.4.4.3. Locate all noise generating equipment, such as cut-off saws, in a remote
location away from administrative or classroom areas.
1.4.4.4. Schedule replenishing construction materials only during period of 8:00 AM

to 5:00 PM.
1.4.4.5. Construction operations, such as material deliveries, debris removal, and

crane operations, shall not occur when staff or visitors are present at
construction site.
1.4.4.6. After Owner takes beneficial occupancy of portions of project the Contractor,
subcontractors and all support staff will not be allowed to enter facilities during
hours of operation. Where access is required to complete the work,
coordinate access and scheduling with Owner's representative.
1.4.5. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Provide minimum 5 working days notice of any utility
interruption. No deviation to the commencement nor duration of the outage or shutdown
from the schedule agreed upon is allowed.
1.4.6. For the Owners records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection
reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments,
and similar documents, correspondence and records established in conjunction with
compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
\\Not Used
3. PART 3 - EXECUTION
\\Not Used
END OF SECTION

County of Tehama SUMMARY OF WORK
JKA #15-100 01 11 00 - 2
SECTION 01 41 00
TEST LABORATORY SERVICES - AIR MONITORING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
1.1.1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1.1.2. Air Monitoring: during work area clearance is described in Section 01 71 10 Work Area
Clearance.
1.1.3. Asbestos Survey Report for 545 Diamond Avenue, Red Bluff, CA April 30, 2015;
prepared by Baker Environmental
1.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK
1.2.1. Not in Contract Sum: This section describes work being performed by the Owner. This
work is not in the Contract Sum.
1.2.2. This section describes air monitoring carried out by the owner to verify that the building
beyond the work area and the outside environment remains uncontaminated. This section
also sets forth airborne fiber levels both inside and outside the work area as action levels,
and describes the action required by the Contractor if an action level is met or exceeded.
1.2.3. Air monitoring required by OSHA is work of the Contractor and is not covered in this
section.
1.3. AIR MONITORING:
1.3.1. Work Area Isolation: The purpose of the Owner's air monitoring is to detect faults in the
work area isolation such as:
1.3.1.1. Contamination of the building outside of the work area with airborne asbestos
fibers,
1.3.1.2. Failure of filtration or rupture in the differential pressure system,
1.3.1.3. Contamination of air outside the building envelope with airborne asbestos
fibers.
1.3.1.4. Should any of the above occur immediately cease asbestos abatement
activities until the fault is corrected. Do not recommence work until authorized
by the Owner's Representative.
1.3.2. Work Area Airborne Fiber Count: The Owner may monitor airborne fiber counts in the
Work Area. The purpose of this air monitoring will be to detect airborne asbestos
concentrations which may challenge the ability of the Work Area isolation procedures to
protect the balance of the building or outside of the building from contamination by
airborne fibers.

County of Tehama AIR MONITORING
JKA #15-100 01 41 00 - 1
1.3.3. Work area clearance: To determine if the elevated airborne fiber counts encountered
during abatement operations have been reduced to an acceptable level, the Owner will
sample and analyze air per Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance.
1.3.4. The Owner may be conducting air monitoring throughout the course of the project.
1.4. STOP ACTION LEVELS:
1.4.1. Inside Work Area: Maintain an average airborne count in the Work Area of less than 0.5
fibers per cubic centimeter. If the fiber counts rise above this figure for any sample taken,
revise work procedures to lower fiber counts. If the Time Weighted Average (TWA) fiber
count for any work shift or 8 hour period exceeds 0.5 fibers per cubic centimeter, stop all
work, leave Pressure Differential System in operation and notify Owner's Representative.
After correcting cause of high fiber levels, do not recommence work for 24 hours unless
otherwise authorized, in writing, by Owner's Representative.
1.4.2. If airborne fiber counts exceed 1.0 fiber per cubic centimeter for any period of time cease
all work except corrective action until fiber counts fall below 0.5 fibers per cubic centimeter
and notify Owner's Representative. After correcting cause of high fiber levels, do not
recommence work for 24 hours unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by Owner's
Representative.
1.4.3. Outside Work Area: If any air sample taken outside of the Work Area exceeds the base
line established below, immediately and automatically stop all work except corrective
action. The Owner's Representative will determine the source of the high reading and so
notify the Contractor in writing.
1.4.4. If the high reading was the result of a failure of Work Area isolation measures initiate the
following actions:
1.4.4.1. Immediately erect new critical barriers as set forth in Section 01526
Temporary Enclosures to isolate the affected area from the balance of the
building. Erect Critical Barriers at the next existing structural isolation of the
involved space (eg. wall, ceiling, floor).
1.4.4.2. Decontaminate the affected area in accordance with Section 01 71 20

Cleaning & Decontamination Procedures.
1.4.4.3. Require that respiratory protection be worn in affected area until area is
cleared for re-occupancy in accordance with Section 01 71 40 Work Area
Clearance.
1.4.4.4. Leave Critical Barriers in place until completion of work and insure that the
operation of the pressure differential system in the Work Area results in a flow
of air from the balance of the building into the affected area.
1.4.4.5. If the exit from the clean room of the personnel decontamination unit enters
the affected area, establish a decontamination facility consisting of a Shower
Room and Changing Room at entry point to affected area.
1.4.4.6. After Certification of Visual Inspection in the Work Area remove critical
barriers separating the work area from the affected area. Final air samples
will be taken within the entire area as set forth in Section 01 71 40 Work Area
Clearance.

JKA #15-100 01 41 00 - 2
1.4.5. If the high reading was the result of other causes initiate corrective action as determined
by the Owner's Representative.
1.4.6. Effect on Contract Sum: Complete corrective work with no change in the Contract Sum if
high airborne fiber counts were caused by Contractor's activities. The Contract Sum and
schedule will be adjusted for additional work caused by high airborne fiber counts beyond
the Contractor's control.
1.4.7. Fibers Counted: The following procedure will be used to resolve any disputes regarding
fiber types when a project has been stopped due to excessive airborne fiber counts.
1.4.8. Large Fibers: "Airborne Fibers" referred to above include all fibers regardless of
composition as counted by phase contrast microscopy (PCM), unless additional analysis
by transmission or scanning electron microscopy demonstrates to the satisfaction of the
Owner's Representative that non- asbestos fibers are being counted. " Airborne Fibers"
counted in samples analyzed by scanning or transmission electron microscopy shall be
asbestos fibers, greater than 5 microns in length and greater that 0.25 microns in diameter.
For purposes of stop action levels, subsequent to analysis by electron microscopy, the
number of "Airborne Fibers" shall be determined by multiplying the number of fibers,
regardless of composition, counted by PCM by a number equal to asbestos fibers counted
divided by all fibers counted in the electron microscopy analysis.
1.4.9. Small Structures: "Airborne Fibers" referred to above include asbestos structures (fibers,
bundles, clusters or matrices) of any diameter and any length greater than 0.5 microns.
1.5. ANALYTICAL METHODS:
1.5.1. The following methods will be used by the Owner in analyzing filters used to collect air
samples. Sampling rates may be varied from printed standards to allow for high volume
sampling.
1.5.1.1. Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) will be performed using the NIOSH 7400
method. This analysis will be carried out in a certified laboratory.
1.5.1.2. Transmission Electron Microscopy will be performed using the analysis

method set forth in the AHERA regulation 40 CFR Part 763 Appendix A.
1.6. SAMPLE VOLUMES:
1.6.1. General: The number and volume of air samples taken by the Owner will be in accordance
with the following schedule. Sample volumes given may vary depending upon the
analytical method used.
1.7. SCHEDULE OF AIR SAMPLES:
1.7.1. Before Start of Work:
1.7.1.1. The Owner may secure the following Air Samples to establish a base line
before start of work.
JKA #15-100 01 41 00 - 3
1.7.1.2. Sample cassettes: Samples will be collected on 25 mm. cassettes as follows:
1.7.1.2.1. PCM: 0.8 micrometer mixed cellulose ester.
1.7.1.2.2. TEM: 0.45 micrometer mixed cellulose ester or 0.40

micrometer polycarbonate, with 5.0 micron mixed cellulose
ester backing filter.
1.7.1.3. Sampling sensitivity in the table below refers to:
1.7.1.3.1. Detection Limit for PCM analysis as set forth in the analytical
method used
1.7.1.3.2. Analytical Sensitivity for TEM analysis as set forth in the

analytical method used or the AHERA regulation
__________________________________________________________
Location Number Analysis Sampling Minimum Rate

Sampled of Method Sensitivity Volume LPM
Samples Fibers/cc. (Liters)
____________________________________________________________
Each Work 1 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10

Area
Each Work 1 hold for TEM 0.005 1,300 1-10

Area
Outside Each 5 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10

Work Area
Outside Each 1 hold for TEM 0.005 1,300 1-10

Work Area
Outside Bldg 5 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10
Outside Bldg 1 hold for TEM 0.005 1,300 1-10

____________________________________________________________
1.7.2. Base Line: an action level expressed in fibers per cubic centimeter which is twenty-five
percent greater than the largest of the followin
1.7.2.1. Average of the PCM samples collected outside each Work Area
1.7.2.2. Average of the PCM samples collected outside the building
1.7.2.3. 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter
1.7.3. Samples collected for TEM analysis will be held without analysis. These samples will be
analyzed under the conditions and terms set forth in "Fibers Counted" and "Affect On
Contract Sum".
1.7.4. From start of work through the work of Section 01711 Project Decontamination, the Owner
may be taking the following samples on a daily basis.

JKA #15-100 01 41 00 - 4
1.7.5. Samples will be collected on 25 mm. cassettes with the following filter media:
1.7.6. PCM: 0.8 micrometer mixed cellulose ester.
____________________________________________________________
Location Number Analysis Sampling Minimum Rate
Sampled of Method Sensitivity Volume LPM
____________________________________________________________
Each Work 2 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10

Area or as required by conditions
Outside Each 1 hold for TEM 0.005 1,300 1-10

Work Area at
Critical Barrier
Clean Room 1 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10
Equip Decon 1 hold for TEM 0.005 1,300 1-10
Outside Bldg 1 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10
Output Pressure 1 hold for TEM 0.005 1,300 1-10

Differential
1.7.7. Additional samples may be taken at Owner's or Owner's Representatives discretion. If

airborne fiber counts exceed allowed limits additional samples will be taken as necessary
to monitor fiber levels.
1.8. LABORATORY TESTING:
1.8.1. The services of a testing laboratory may be employed by the Owner to perform laboratory
analyses of the air samples. A technician will be at the job site, and samples will be sent
daily by carrier for next day delivery, so that verbal reports on air samples can be obtained
within 24 hours. The Contractor will have access to all air monitoring tests and results.
1.9. ADDITIONAL TESTING:
1.9.1. The Contractor may conduct his own air monitoring and laboratory testing. If he elects to
do this the cost of such air monitoring and laboratory testing shall be at no additional cost
to the Owner.
1.10. PERSONAL MONITORING:
1.10.1. Owner will not be performing air monitoring to meet Contractor's OSHA requirements for
personnel sampling or any other purpose.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 01 41 00 - 5
SECTION 01 57 13
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SCOPE OF WORK:
1.1.1. PERMIT IS REQUIRED: The project is more than 1 acre and WILL require a formal permit
from the state.
1.1.2. General: Provide all materials, equipment and labor necessary to furnish and install straw
wattles or silt fence barriers at locations shown on the Drawings and on Contractors Storm
Water Pollution Prevention Plan.
1.1.3. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan: Prepare a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
(SWPPP) tailored to the Contractor's operations, methods and equipment for the purpose
of obtaining a WDID# from the State Water Resources Control Board. Comply with State
Water Resources Control Board requirements. The SWPPP shall be provided by the
Contractor prior to the start of work. The SWPPP shall be tailored to the contractors
approach to the work in this contract. The Contractor shall as a minimum address:
1.1.3.1. Cut and fill operations.
1.1.3.2. Temporary stockpiles.
1.1.3.3. Vehicle and equipment storage, maintenance and fueling operations.
1.1.3.4. Concrete, plaster, mortar and paint disposal.
1.1.3.5. Dust Control
1.1.3.6. Tracking of dirt, mud on off-site streets.
1.1.3.7. Pipe flushing.
1.1.4. It is the Contractors responsibility to comply with all the requirements as outlined in the
General Permit for storm water discharges associated with construct and land disturbance
activities Order 2010-0014-DWQ NPDES No. CAS000002, including but not limited to
inspections, REAPS, sampling, annual reports and the notice of termination. The
Contractor shall be responsible for providing the necessary labor and materials for
implementing the BMPs as specified by the SWPPP and for taking the appropriate
measures to assure compliance with the California General Permit requirements
pertaining to storm water discharges.
1.2. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1. General: Comply with governing codes and regulations.

County of Tehama TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
JKA #15-100 01 57 13 - 1
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.1. SWPPP: Contractors Qualified SWPPP Developer (QSD) shall work with the Legally
Responsible Person (LRP) to submit to the State Water Resources Control Board via
Storm water Multi Application and Report Tracking System (SMARTS) prior to beginning
work on site.
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. MATERIALS
2.1.1. Straw Wattles: Shall be new manufactured straw roles in compliance with state
requirements for sediment control.
2.1.2. Silt Fences: Shall be new manufactured silt fence in compliance with state requirements
for sediment control.
2.1.3. Filter Bag: Shall be as required by local jurisdiction.
3.1. INSTALLATION
3.1.1. Straw Wattles: Shall be installed per the drawings and/or as required by the SWPPP.
3.1.2. Silt Fences: Shall be installed per the Drawings and/or as required by the SWPPP. Silt
Fences shall not be used around inlets.
3.1.3. Filter Bags: Shall be installed as required by manufacturers requirements.
3.2. MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL:
3.2.1. General: Maintain and repair existing and new erosion control facilities throughout the
construction period. Remove silt build up at straw wattles and/or silt fences as needed.
Repair damage to earth slopes and banks. Erosion control measures shall be left in place
until final paving and landscaping are complete.
3.2.2. Monitoring: Provide monitoring of erosion control measures as required by the General
Permit for storm water discharges associated with construct and land disturbance
activities Order 2010-0014-DWQ NPDES No. CAS000002. This includes all necessary
inspections, REAPS, sampling and annual reports. Update the SWPPP continuously
throughout construction period.
3.2.3. Cleaning: Keep area clean of debris.
3.2.4. Remove erosion control measures prior to placing finish landscaping. Once all disturbed
areas are stabilized with significant growth file the Notice of Termination (NOT).
END OF SECTION

County of Tehama TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
JKA #15-100 01 57 13 - 2
SECTION 01 71 20
CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK:
1.2.1. The extent of cleaning and decontamination work is the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.2.2. Work Area Clearance: Specified in Section 01 71 40 Work Area Clearance
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. (NOT APPLICABLE)
3. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. GENERAL:
3.1.1. Complete the following before start of work of this section:
3.1.1.1. Regulated Areas
3.1.1.2. Respiratory Protection
3.2. WET CLEANING:
3.2.1. Accomplish wet cleaning during decontamination with paper towels or disposable rags:
3.2.1.1. Immerse paper towel or rag in container of water with surfactant, or diluted
removal encapsulant.
3.2.1.2. Wring out; fold into quarters; wipe surface once and refold to a fresh face of
cloth. Proceed in this manner until all available faces of paper towel or rag
have been used.
3.2.1.3. Dispose of paper towel or rag. Do not place rag back in container to rinse out
or for any other purpose. If a used towel or rag comes in contact with water,
empty container and refill.
3.2.1.4. Material adhered to a surface with removal encapsulant may require the
application of additional removal encapsulant to facilitate cleaning.

County of Tehama DECONTANIMINATION
JKA #15-100 01 71 20 - 1
3.3. REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING DEBRIS
3.3.1. It is the abatement contractors sole responsibility to promptly cleanup any debris,
asbestos-containing or otherwise, that is generated by contractor during the project.
3.3.2. Remove asbestos-containing debris and decontaminate the area involved using the
following sequence:
3.3.2.1. Shut down all ventilation into room.
3.3.2.2. Seal entry to work area with 6 mil polyethylene. Slit polyethylene for entry.
Install a flap to cover the slit automatically; tape slit closed after entry.
3.3.2.3. Remove all small debris with the HEPA vacuum.
3.3.2.4. HEPA vacuum surfaces of all pieces too large to be removed by the suction
of the HEPA vacuum.
3.3.2.5. Pick up such pieces and place in the bottom of a 6 mil polyethylene disposal
bag conforming to the requirements of Section 02084 Disposal of Asbestos-
Containing Waste Material. Place pieces in the bag without dropping and
avoiding unnecessary disturbance and release of material.
3.3.2.6. Remove all remaining visible debris with HEPA vacuum
3.3.2.7. HEPA vacuum an area 3 feet beyond the location in which any visible debris
was found in two directions each at right angles to the other.
3.3.3. Place a 6 mil polyethylene drop cloth immediately on top of the HEPA vacuumed area
before performing any repair work on site from which fall-out occurred.
3.3.3.1. HEPA vacuum the site from which material fell removing all loose material
which can be removed by the vacuums suction.
3.3.3.2. Repair or remove remaining material.
3.3.3.3. HEPA vacuum ladder and/or any tools used and pass out of the work area.
3.3.3.4. HEPA vacuum all surfaces in the room starting at the top of wall and working
downward to the floor. Then start at corner of floor farthest from Work Area
entrance and work towards entrance.
3.3.4. HEPA vacuum the floor using a floor attachment with rubber floor seals and adjustable
floor to attachment height. Adjust the height so that the rubber seals just touch the floor
if carpeted and are within 1/16" of hard surface floors. Vacuum the floor in parallel passes
with each pass overlapping the previous by one-half the width of the floor attachment. At
the completion of one cleaning vacuum the floor a second time at right angles to the first.
3.4. CLEANING AND DECONTAMINATING OBJECTS
3.4.1. Perform all work of decontaminating objects wherever possible on a plastic drop sheet
3.4.1.1. HEPA vacuum all surfaces of object and immediate area before moving the
object.
3.4.1.2. Pick-up object, if possible, and HEPA vacuum all surfaces.

JKA #15-100 01 71 20 - 2
3.4.1.3. Hand to off-sheet worker who will wet-clean object, if possible, and place in
storage location.
3.4.1.4. Decontaminate area where object was located by HEPA vacuuming twice, in
two perpendicular directions. Wet clean if necessary to remove any debris.
3.4.1.5. Return object to its original location.
3.5. DECONTAMINATION OF ROOMS, ATTICS AND OTHER SPACES:
3.5.1. Shut down all ventilation into space.
3.5.2. Seal entry to Work Area with 6 mil polyethylene. Slit polyethylene for entry. Install a flap
to cover the slit automatically; tape slit closed after entry.
3.5.3. Install Differential Pressure System.
3.5.4. HEPA vacuum all surfaces in the room starting at the ceiling, then top of wall and working
downward to the floor.
3.5.5. HEPA vacuum the floor using a floor attachment with rubber floor seals and adjustable
floor to attachment height. Adjust the height so that the rubber seals just touch the floor
if carpeted and are within 1/16" of hard surface floors. Vacuum the floor in parallel passes
with each pass overlapping the previous by one half the width of the floor attachment. At
the completion of one cleaning, vacuum the floor a second time at right angles to the first.
3.5.6. Operate HEPA filtered fan unit in space for 24 hours minimum.
3.5.7. Secure area from occupancy until air monitoring results per Section 01 71 40 Work Area
Clearance indicate area is safe for re-occupancy.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 01 71 20 - 3
SECTION 01 71 40
WORK AREA CLEARANCE
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1.1. Visual Inspection: required as a prerequisite of air testing, is set forth in

Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination.
1.1.1.2. Air Monitoring: performed by the Owner during abatement work, is described
in Section 01 41 00 Test Laboratory Services.
1.2. SUMMARY
1.2.1. Not in Contract Sum: This section describes work being performed by the Owner. This
work is not in the Contract Sum.
1.2.2. This Section sets forth required post-abatement airborne asbestos concentrations in the
Work Area and describes testing procedures the Owner will use to measure these levels.
1.3. CONTRACTOR RELEASE CRITERIA:
1.3.1. The Asbestos Abatement Work Area is Cleared when the Work Area is visually clean and
airborne asbestos structure concentrations have been reduced to the level specified
below.
1.4. VISUAL INSPECTION:
1.4.1. Work of this Section will not begin until the visual inspection described in Section 01 71
10 Project Decontamination is complete and has been certified by the Project
Administrator.
1.5. AIR MONITORING:
1.5.1. To determine if the elevated airborne asbestos structure concentration encountered

during abatement operations has been reduced to the specified level, the Owner will
secure samples and analyze them according to the following procedures.
1.5.1.1. Aggressive sampling procedures as described below will be followed.
1.5.1.2. PCM samples will be secured as indicated below. If the area meets the PCM
clearance criteria TEM sampling will not proceed.

County of Tehama WORK AREA CLEARANCE
JKA #15-100 01 71 40 - 1
1.5.1.3. TEM samples will be secured as indicated below for work areas where TEM
samplings are required under AHERA regulations for clearance sampling.
Owners Project Representative shall determine areas requiring TEM
clearance sampling.
1.5.1.4. Work Area Clearance: upon meeting the TEM or PCM Clearance
requirements the work of Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination can
continue.
1.6. AGGRESSIVE SAMPLING:
1.6.1. All Air Samples will be taken using aggressive sampling techniques as follows:
1.6.1.1. Before sampling pumps are started the exhaust from forced-air equipment
(leaf blower with an approximately 1 horsepower electric motor) will be swept
against all walls, ceilings, floors, ledges and other surfaces in the room. This
procedure will be continued for 5 minutes per 10,000 cubic feet of room
volume.
1.6.1.2. One 20 inch diameter fan per 10,000 cubic feet of room volume will be
mounted in a central location at approximately 2 meters above floor, directed
toward ceiling and operated at low speed for the entire period of sample
collection.
1.6.1.3. Air samples will be collected in areas subject to normal air circulation away
from room corners, obstructed locations, and sites near windows, doors of
vents.
1.6.1.4. After air sampling pumps have been shut off, fans will be shut off.
1.7. SCHEDULE OF AIR SAMPLES:
1.7.1. General: The number and volume of air samples taken and analytical methods used by
the Owner will be in accordance with the following schedule. Sample volumes given may
vary depending upon the analytical instruments used.
1.8. PHASE CONTRAST MICROSCOPY:
1.8.1. In each homogeneous Work Area after completion of all cleaning work, a minimum of 7
samples will be taken and analyzed as follows:
1.8.1.1. Samples will be collected on 25 mm. cassettes with the following filter media:
1.8.1.1.1. PCM: 0.8 mixed cellulose ester in a cassette with a

conductive extension cowl.

JKA #15-100 01 71 40 - 2
_____________________________________________________
Location Number Analysis Detection Minimum Rate
Sampled of Method Limit Volume LPM
_____________________________________________________
Each Work 5 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10

Area
or
Each Room 1 (5 min) PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10
of Work Area
Work Area 1 PCM 0.01 0 **
Blank
Lab Blank 1 PCM 0.01 0 ***
_____________________________________________________
** open for 30 seconds
*** do not open
1.8.1.1.2. Analysis: Fibers on each filter will be measured using the

NIOSH Method 7400 entitled "Fibers" published in the
NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, 3rd Edition, Second
Supplement, August 1987.
1.8.1.1.3. Fibers: referred to in this section include fibers regardless of

composition as counted by the phase contrast microscopy
method used.
1.8.1.1.4. Split Sample: One Work Area sample will be split and both
halves analyzed separately for duplicate analysis.
1.8.1.1.5. Release Criteria: Decontamination of the work site is

complete when every Work Area sample is at or below the
Detection Limit above. If any sample is above the Detection
Limit then the decontamination is incomplete and recleaning
per section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination is required.
1.9. TRANSMISSION ELECTRON MICROSCOPY:
1.9.1. In each homogeneous work area after completion of all cleaning work, a minimum of 13
samples will be taken and analyzed as follows:

JKA #15-100 01 71 40 - 3
_____________________________________________________
Location Number Analysis Detection Minimum Rate
Sampled of Method Limit Volume LPM
_____________________________________________________
Each Work 5 TEM 0.005 1,300-1,800 1-10

Area
Outside each 5 TEM 0.005 1,300-1,800 1-10

Work Area
Work Area 1 TEM 0.005 0 **

Blank
Outside Blank 1 TEM 0.005 0 **
Lab Blank 1 TEM 0.005 0 ***

_____________________________________________________
** open for 30 seconds
*** do not open
1.9.2. Analysis will be performed using the analysis method set forth in the AHERA Regulation
40 CFR Part 763 Appendix A.
1.9.3. Asbestos Structures referred to in this Section include asbestos fibers, bundles, clusters
or matrices, as defined by method of analysis.
1.9.4. Release Criteria: Decontamination of the work site is complete if either of the following
two sets of conditions are met:
1.9.4.1. Work Area Samples are below filter background levels
1.9.4.1.1. All Work area sample volumes are greater than 1,199 liters
for a 25 mm. sampling cassette.
1.9.4.1.2. The average concentration of asbestos on the five Work Area

Samples does not exceed the filter background level of 70
structures per square millimeters of filter area.
1.9.4.2. Work Area Samples are not statistically different from Outside Samples.
1.9.4.2.1. All sample volumes except for blanks are greater than 560
liters for a 25 mm. sampling cassette.
1.9.4.2.2. The average asbestos concentration of the three blanks is

below the filter background level of 70 structures per square
millimeter of filter area.

JKA #15-100 01 71 40 - 4
1.9.4.2.3. Average asbestos concentrations in Work Area Samples are
not statistically different from Outside Samples, as
determined by the Z-test calculation found in 40 CFR Part
763, Subpart E, Appendix A (Z is less than or equal to 1.65).
1.9.4.3. If these conditions are not met then the decontamination is incomplete and
the cleaning procedures of Section 01 71 10 shall be repeated.
1.9.4.4. Termination of Analysis: If the arithmetic mean (average) asbestos

concentration on the blank filters exceed 70 structures per square millimeter
of filter area the analysis will cease and new samples collected.
1.10. LABORATORY TESTING:
1.10.1. PHASE CONTRAST MICROSCOPY:
1.10.1.1. The services of a testing laboratory will be employed by the Owners

Representative to perform laboratory analysis of the
1.10.1.2. air samples. A technician will be at the job site, and samples will be sent daily
by overnight delivery, so that
1.10.1.3. verbal reports on air samples can be obtained within 24 hours (next regular
laboratory work day).
1.10.1.4. A complete record, certified by the testing laboratory, of all air monitoring tests
and results will be furnished to the Owner's Representative, the Owner and
the Contractor.
1.10.2. TRANSMISSION ELECTRON MICROSCOPY:
1.10.2.1. Samples will be sent by overnight courier for analysis by Transmission

Electron Microscopy. Samples will not be carried on weekends, so that
samples shipped on Friday will arrive on the following Monday. Verbal results
will normally be available during the 5th working day after receipt of samples
by the laboratory. The laboratory is capable of analyzing a maximum of 13
such samples from this project at any one time. All transmission Electron
Microscopy results will be available to the Contractor.
1.11. EXCEPTION TO COSTS:
1.11.1. Owner shall be responsible for all laboratory costs associated with initial PCM and PCM
and or TEM clearance air samples. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs
associated with follow-up PCM and TEM clearance samples when initial clearance air
samples fail to meet clearance levels specified in these SPECIFICATIONS. Contractor
shall also be responsible for all costs associated with same day delivery of clearance
samples to laboratory. Only laboratory approved by Owners Representative shall be
utilized for clearance sample analysis.
1.11.2. Contractors costs for follow up PCM and TEM clearance sample analysis shall include
Consultant, Air Monitoring Technician, sample shipping and laboratory analysis costs.
Rates and analysis charges shall be invoiced to Contractor at rates specified in
Consultants agreement with Owner. All sample collection and shipping shall be
conducted by Owners Consultant and submitted to Owners laboratory for analysis.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 01 71 40 - 5
SECTION 02 08 10
REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
1.2.1. Installation of Critical and Primary Barriers, and Work Area Isolation Procedures are set
forth in Section 01 52 60 Temporary Enclosures.
1.2.2. Project Decontamination procedures after removal of the Secondary Barrier are specified
in Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination.
1.3. SUBMITTALS:
1.3.1. Before Start of Work: Submit the following to the Owner's Representative for review. Do
not start work until these submittals are returned with Owner's Representative's action
stamp indicating that the submittal is returned for unrestricted use.
1.3.2. Surfactant: Submit product data, use instructions and recommendations from
manufacturer of surfactant intended for use. Include data substantiating that material
complies with requirements.
1.3.3. Removal Encapsulant: Submit product data, use instructions and recommendations from
manufacturer of removal encapsulant intended for use. Include data substantiating that
material complies with requirements.
1.3.4. Mastic Remover: Floor tile mastic shall be removed from concrete floors using, Sentinel
Products, Inc. Soy-Based Mastic Remover Formula 909TM or equivalent approved by
Owners Representative. Shot or bead blasting is not allowed in this project.
1.3.5. NESHAP Certification: Submit certification from manufacturer of surfactant or removal

encapsulant that, to the extent required by this specification, the material, if used in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions, will wet Asbestos-Containing Materials to
which it is applied as required by the National Emission Standard for Hazardous Pollutants
(NESHAP) Asbestos Regulations (40 CFR 61, Subpart M).
1.3.6. Material Safety Data Sheet: Submit the Material Safety Data Sheet, or equivalent, in
accordance with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) for
each surfactant, encapsulating material and solvent proposed for use on the work. Include
a separate attachment for each sheet indicating the specific worker protective equipment
proposed for use with the material indicated.

County of Tehama ASBESTOS REMOVAL
JKA #15-100 02 08 10 - 1
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1. WETTING MATERIALS: FOR WETTING PRIOR TO DISTURBANCE OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING

MATERIALS USE EITHER AMENDED WATER OR A REMOVAL ENCAPSULANT:
2.1.1. Amended Water: Provide water to which a surfactant has been added. Use a mixture of
surfactant and water which results in wetting of the Asbestos-Containing Material and
retardation of fiber release during disturbance of the material equal to or greater than that
provided by the use of one ounce of a surfactant consisting of 50% polyoxyethylene ester
and 50% polyoxyethylene ether mixed with five gallons of water.
2.1.2. Removal Encapsulant: Provide a penetrating type encapsulant designed specifically for
removal of Asbestos-Containing Material. Use a material which results in wetting of the
Asbestos-Containing Material and retardation of fiber release during disturbance of the
material equal to or greater than that provided by water amended with a surfactant
consisting of one ounce of a mixture of 50% polyoxyethylene ester and 50%
polyoxyethylene ether in five gallons of water.
2.1.3. Polyethylene Sheet: Provide flame resistant polyethylene film that conforms to
requirements set forth by the National Fire Protection Association Standard 701, Small
Scale Fire Test for Flame-resistant Textiles and Films. Provide largest size possible to
minimize seams, 4.O or 6.0 mil thick as indicated, frosted or black as indicated.
2.1.4. Duct Tape: Provide duct tape in 2" or 3" widths as indicated, with an adhesive which is
formulated to stick aggressively to sheet polyethylene.
2.1.5. Spray Cement: Provide spray adhesive in aerosol cans which is specifically formulated
to stick tenaciously to sheet polyethylene.
2.1.6. Disposal Bags: Provide 6 mil thick leak-tight polyethylene bags labeled as required by
Section 02084 Disposal of Asbestos Containing Waste Material.
2.1.7. Fiberboard Drums: Provide heavy duty leak tight fiberboard drums with tight sealing
locking metal tops.
2.1.8. Paper board Boxes: Provide heavy duty corrugated paper board boxes coated with plastic
or wax to retard deterioration from moisture. Provide in sizes that will easily fit in disposal
bags.
2.1.9. Felt: Standard felt approximately 1/16" thick and 36" to 72" in width.
3.1. SECONDARY BARRIER:
3.1.1. Secondary Barrier: Over the Primary Barrier, install as a drop cloth a clear 6 mil sheet
plastic in all areas where asbestos removal work is to be carried out. Completely cover
floor with sheet plastic. Where the work is within 10'-0" of a wall extend the Secondary
Barrier up wall to ceiling. Support sheet plastic on wall with duct tape, seal top of
Secondary plastic to Primary Barrier with duct tape so that debris is unable to get behind
it. Provide cross strips of duct tape at wall support as necessary to support sheet plastic
and prevent its falling during removal operations.
3.1.2. Install Secondary Barrier at the beginning of each work shift. Install only sufficient plastic
for work of that shift.

JKA #15-100 02 08 10 - 2
3.1.3. Remove Secondary Barrier at end of each work shift or as work in an area is completed.
Fold plastic toward center of sheet and pack in disposal bags. Keep material on sheet
continuously wet until bagged.
3.1.4. Install Walkways of black 6 mil plastic between active removal are as and decontamination
units to protect Primary Layer from tracked material. Install walkways at the beginning of,
and remove at the end of, each work shift.
3.2. WORKER PROTECTION:
3.2.1. Before beginning work with any material for which a Material Safety Data Sheet has been
submitted provide workers with the required protective equipment. Require that
appropriate protective equipment be used at all times.
3.3. WET REMOVAL:
3.3.1. Thoroughly wet to satisfaction of Owner's Representative Asbestos Containing Materials

to be removed prior to stripping and/or tooling to reduce fiber dispersal into the air.
Accomplish wetting by a fine spray (mist) of amended water or removal encapsulant.
Saturate material sufficiently to wet to the substrate without causing excess dripping.
Allow time for amended water or removal encapsulant to penetrate material thoroughly. If
amended water is used, spray material repeatedly during the work process to maintain a
continuously wet condition. If a removal encapsulant is used, apply in strict accordance
with manufacturer's written instructions. Perforate outer covering of any installation which
has been painted and/or jacketed in order to allow penetration of amended water or
removal encapsulant, or use injection equipment to wet material under the covering.
Where necessary, carefully strip away while simultaneously spraying amended water or
removal encapsulant on the installation to minimize dispersal of asbestos fibers into the
air.
3.3.2. Mist work area continuously with amended water whenever necessary to reduce airborne
fiber levels.
3.3.3. Remove saturated Asbestos-Containing Material in small sections from all areas. Do not
allow material to dry out. As it is removed, simultaneously pack material while still wet into
disposal bags. Twist neck of bags, bend over and seal with minimum three wraps of duct
tape. Clean outside and move to Wash Down Station adjacent to Material
Decontamination Unit. Evacuate air from disposal bags with a HEPA filtered vacuum
cleaner before sealing.
3.3.4. Active Electrical Equipment: Do not wet materials in the vicinity of active electrical
equipment. Dry remove any Asbestos-Containing Materials in the vicinity of active
electrical equipment.
3.3.4.1. Restrict Access: Maintain existing access restrictions to areas with active
electrical equipment. Allow access to area only to qualified trade persons
with prior experience in the installation and repair of involved equipment.
3.3.4.2. Warning Signs: Post warning signs at the entry point to active electrical
equipment as required by OSHA or other applicable regulation.
3.3.4.3. Personnel: Work on active electrical equipment is to be performed by

qualified trade persons with prior experience in the installation or repair of the
involved equipment. Restrict access to electrical equipment.
3.3.4.4. Electrical Isolation: Cover exposed conductors with a minimum 1/8" thick
neoprene blanket draped over the conductor and surrounding area.
JKA #15-100 02 08 10 - 3
3.3.4.5. Protective Equipment: Provide workers working on or in the vicinity of active
electrical with appropriate protective equipment including insulating gloves,
boots, and non-conductive tools.
3.3.4.6. Work Procedures: Perform removal work using "Localized Control of Material
Release" and "Local Ventilation and Collection System" procedures
described below.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 02 08 10 - 4
SECTION 02 08 20
REMOVAL OF VINYL ASBESTOS FLOOR TILE
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
1.2.1. Installation of Critical and Primary Barriers, and Work Area Isolation Procedures are set
forth in Section 01 52 60 Temporary Enclosures.
1.2.2. Project Decontamination procedures after removal of the Secondary Barrier are specified
in Section 01 71 10 Project Decontamination.
1.3. SUBMITTALS:
1.3.2. Surfactant: Submit product data, use instructions and recommendations from
manufacturer of surfactant intended for use. Include data substantiating that material
complies with requirements.
1.3.3. Removal Encapsulant: Submit product data, use instructions and recommendations from
manufacturer of removal encapsulant intended for use. Include data substantiating that
material complies with requirements.
1.3.4. Mastic Remover: Floor tile mastic shall be removed from concrete floors using, Sentinel
Products, Inc. Soy-Based Mastic Remover Formula 909TM or equivalent approved by
Owners Representative. Shot or bead blasting is not allowed in this project.
1.3.5. NESHAP Certification: Submit certification from manufacturer of surfactant or removal

encapsulant that, to the extent required by this specification, the material, if used in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions, will wet Asbestos-Containing Materials to
which it is applied as required by the National Emission Standard for Hazardous Pollutants
(NESHAP) Asbestos Regulations (40 CFR 61, Subpart M).
1.3.6. Material Safety Data Sheet: Submit the Material Safety Data Sheet, or equivalent, in
accordance with the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200) for
each surfactant, encapsulating material and solvent proposed for use on the work. Include
a separate attachment for each sheet indicating the specific worker protective equipment
proposed for use with the material indicated.

County of Tehama ASBESTOS FLOOR TILE REMOVAL
JKA #15-100 02 08 20 - 1
2.1. WETTING MATERIALS: FOR WETTING PRIOR TO DISTURBANCE OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING

MATERIALS USE EITHER AMENDED WATER OR A REMOVAL ENCAPSULANT:
2.1.1. Amended Water: Provide water to which a surfactant has been added. Use a mixture of
surfactant and water which results in wetting of the Asbestos-Containing Material and
retardation of fiber release during disturbance of the material equal to or greater than that
provided by the use of one ounce of a surfactant consisting of 50% polyoxyethylene ester
and 50% polyoxyethylene ether mixed with five gallons of water.
2.1.2. Removal Encapsulant: Provide a penetrating type encapsulant designed specifically for
removal of Asbestos-Containing Material. Use a material which results in wetting of the
Asbestos-Containing Material and retardation of fiber release during disturbance of the
material equal to or greater than that provided by water amended with a surfactant
consisting of one ounce of a mixture of 50% polyoxyethylene ester and 50%
polyoxyethylene ether in five gallons of water.
2.1.3. Polyethylene Sheet: Provide flame resistant polyethylene film that conforms to
requirements set forth by the National Fire Protection Association Standard 701, Small
Scale Fire Test for Flame-resistant Textiles and Films. Provide largest size possible to
minimize seams, 4.O or 6.0 mil thick as indicated, frosted or black as indicated.
2.1.4. Duct Tape: Provide duct tape in 2" or 3" widths as indicated, with an adhesive which is
formulated to stick aggressively to sheet polyethylene.
2.1.5. Spray Cement: Provide spray adhesive in aerosol cans which is specifically formulated
to stick tenaciously to sheet polyethylene.
2.1.6. Disposal Bags: Provide 6 mil thick leak-tight polyethylene bags labeled as required by
Section 02084 Disposal of Asbestos Containing Waste Material. Inner bag shall be woven
polyethylene type bag to prevent tearing of outer labeled bags by sharp edges of tile.
2.1.7. Fiberboard Or Metal Drums: Provide heavy duty leak tight fiberboard or metal drums with
tight sealing locking metal tops.
2.1.8. Paper board Boxes: Provide heavy duty corrugated paper board boxes coated with plastic
or wax to retard deterioration from moisture. Provide in sizes that will easily fit in disposal
bags.
2.1.9. Felt: Standard felt approximately 1/16" thick and 36" to 72" in width.
2.1.10. Mastic Solvent: Provide a sufficient amount of a biodegradable, low-odor, organic type
mastic solvent to remove all gross amounts of mastic from vinyl floor tile substrate.
Provide workers with suitable organic-cartridge respiratory protection.
3.1. SECONDARY BARRIER:
3.1.1. Vinyl asbestos floor tile shall be removed under full containment with negative-pressure
differential as specified in these SPECIFICATIONS.
3.1.2. Baseboards and door sill shall be removed to verify that all VAT has been removed
3.1.3. All electrical boxes attached to the flooring shall be labeled and saved for the owner with
all screws, nuts, bolts, etc., for re-attachment.
JKA #15-100 02 08 20 - 2
3.1.4. Contractor is not responsible for wall marks as a result of poly attachment. Contractor is
responsible for damage to all finish wall surfaces. Contractor should take photos of all
walls in the vicinity of his work and give a duplicate set of photos to the project manager.
Contractor will be required to repair and refinish to the satisfaction of the Owner and his
representative any and all damage to wall surfaces that he can not show was existing prior
to his work. There will be no exceptions to this understanding.
3.2. WORKER PROTECTION:
3.2.1. Before beginning work with any material for which a Material Safety Data Sheet has been
submitted provide workers with the required protective equipment. Require that
appropriate protective equipment be used at all times.
3.3. WET REMOVAL:
3.3.1. Thoroughly wet to satisfaction of Owner's Representative VAT prior to stripping and/or
tooling to reduce fiber dispersal into the air. Accomplish wetting by a fine spray (mist) of
amended water or removal encapsulant. Saturate material sufficiently to wet to the
surface without causing excess dripping. If amended water is used, spray material
repeatedly during the work process to maintain a continuously wet condition. If a removal
encapsulant is used, apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3.2. Contractor may remove VAT from wood substrate by removing VAT and substrate as a
single unit. Care shall be exercised not to damage building subfloor during this removal
process. Contractor will be responsible for replacing or repairing any damaged subfloor
materials to Owners satisfaction. This process shall require utilization of wet removal
procedures identified in these SPECIFICATIONS for VAT/Mastic removal.
3.3.3. Mist work area continuously with amended water whenever necessary to reduce airborne
fiber levels.
3.3.4. All VAT must be placed into burlap or heavy nylon woven sacks prior to double bagging
into poly bags. An acceptable alternative is disposal of VAT into poly bags placed into
drums for disposal. VAT and wood substrate removed as a single unit shall be wrapped
with a minimum of two layers of 4 or 6 mil polyethlylene sheeting prior to disposal. Bulk
wrapped materials shall be limited in size and weight to allow removal by workers without
use of forklifts or other heavy equipment that might damage building floors or entries.
3.3.4.1. Evacuate air from disposal bags with a HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner before
sealing.
3.3.5. The mastic layer layer on concrete surfaces is to be removed either by solvent or other
method acceptable to Owners Representative. Bead or shot blasting will not be permitted
for this project. If a solvent is used, the exhaust of the negative air unit shall be directed
downwind as a much as possible or a sufficient length of exhaust hose will be required to
prevent re-entrainment of vapors. Removal workers shall be supplied with the appropriate
organic filters for respiratory protection.
3.3.6. Mastic Solvent Cleanup: Mastic shall be removed in such a manner that remaining mastic
residual shall not exceed 5%. Owners Representative shall have sole discretion as to
determination when mastic has been adequately removed.
3.3.7. Contractor shall thoroughly wash floor areas with adequate clean water to remove any
mastic residue and solvent that can typically cause odors. Each building area containing
floor tile and mastic to be removed during this project shall be thoroughly washed with
clean water and allowed to air out to reduce odors.

JKA #15-100 02 08 20 - 3
3.3.8. Active Electrical Equipment: Do not wet materials in the vicinity of active electrical
equipment. Dry remove any Asbestos-Containing Materials in the vicinity of active
electrical equipment.
3.3.8.1. Restrict Access: Maintain existing access restrictions to areas with active
electrical equipment. Allow access to area only to qualified trade persons
with prior experience in the installation and repair of involved equipment.
3.3.8.2. Warning Signs: Post warning signs at the entry point to active electrical
equipment as required by OSHA or other applicable regulation.
3.3.8.3. Personnel: Work on active electrical equipment is to be performed by

qualified trade persons with prior experience in the installation or repair of the
involved equipment. Restrict access to electrical equipment.
3.3.8.4. Electrical Isolation: Cover exposed conductors with a minimum 1/8" thick
neoprene blanket draped over the conductor and surrounding area.
3.3.8.5. Protective Equipment: Provide workers working on or in the vicinity of active

electrical with appropriate protective equipment including insulating gloves,
boots, and non-conductive tools.
3.3.9. Contractor shall carefully review the Scope of Work for these projects to determine the
appropriate specification for asbestos-containing mastics on concrete floor substrates.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 02 08 20 - 4
SECTION 02 08 40
DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING WASTE MATERIAL
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK:
1.2.1. This section describes the disposal of Asbestos-Containing Materials. Disposal includes
packaging of asbestos- containing waste materials. Disposal may be accomplished either
by landfilling or converting asbestos containing materials to non-asbestos waste.
1.3. SUBMITTALS:
1.3.1.1. Copy of state or local license for waste hauler.
1.3.1.2. Name and address of landfill where asbestos-containing waste materials are
to be buried. Include contact person and telephone number.
1.3.1.3. Chain of Custody form and form of waste manifest proposed
1.3.1.4. Sample of disposal bag and any added labels to be used.
1.3.1.5. On a weekly basis submit copies of all manifests and disposal site receipts to
Owner's Representative.
2.1. DISPOSAL BAGS: PROVIDE 6 MIL THICK LEAK-TIGHT POLYETHYLENE BAGS OR OTHER
APPROVED CONTAINERS WITH FOLLOWING TEXT CLEARLY PRINTED ON EACH BAG OR
CONTAINER WHEN FRIABLE ASBESTOS-CONTAINING WASTES ARE TO BE DISPOSED:
DANGER
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
AVOID BREATHING AIRBORNE ASBESTOS, TREMOLITE, ANTHOPHYLLITE,
ACTINOLITE, CROCIDOLITE, AMOSITE, OR CHRYSOTILE FIBERS
RQ, ASBESTOS,
CLASS 9
NA 2212

County of Tehama ASBESTOS DISPOSAL
JKA #15-100 02 08 40 - 1
HAZARDOUS WASTE
STATE AND FEDERAL LAW PROHIBITS IMPROPER

DISPOSAL. IF FOUND, CONTACT THE NEAREST POLICE
OR PUBLIC SAFETY AUTHORITY
2.2. ALL ASBESTOS WASTE CONTAINERS MUST BE VISIBLY LABELED WITH GENERATOR'S NAME
AND ADDRESS.
3.1. GENERAL:
3.1.1. All waste is to be hauled by a waste hauler with all required licenses form all state and
local authority with jurisdiction.
3.1.2. Load all asbestos-containing waste material in disposal bags or leak-tight drums. All
materials are to be contained in one of the following
3.1.2.1. Two 6 mil disposal bags or
3.1.2.2. Two 6 mil layers of poly or
3.1.2.3. Two 6 mil disposal bags and a fiberboard drum or
3.1.2.4. Sealed steel drum with no bag
3.1.3. Label all containers with the name of the owner of the material and the point of origin.
3.1.4. Protect interior of truck or dumpster with Critical and Primary Barriers.
3.1.5. Carefully load containerized waste in fully enclosed dumpsters, trucks or other appropriate
vehicles for transport. Exercise care before and during transport, to insure that no
unauthorized persons have access to the material. Truck shall be posted with asbestos
DANGER warning signs during loading of bags and other containers.
3.1.6. Do not store containerized materials outside of the Work Area. Take containers from the
Work Area directly to a sealed truck or dumpster.
3.1.7. Do not transport disposal bagged materials on open trucks. Label drums with same
warning labels as bags. Uncontaminated drums may be reused. Treat drums that have
been contaminated as asbestos-containing waste and dispose of in accordance with this
specification.
3.1.8. Advise the landfill operator, at least ten days in advance of transport, of the quantity of
material to be delivered.
3.1.9. At disposal site unload containerized waste:
3.1.9.1. At a disposal site, sealed plastic bags may be carefully unloaded from the
truck. If bags are broken or damaged, return to work site for rebagging. Clean
entire truck and contents using procedures set forth in section 01 71 10
Project Decontamination.

JKA #15-100 02 08 40 - 2
3.1.10. Retain receipts from landfill for materials disposed of.
3.1.11. At completion of hauling and disposal of each load submit copy of waste manifest, chain
of custody form, and landfill receipt to Owner's Representative.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 02 08 40 - 3
SECTION 02 41 19
SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION AND RENOVATION
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1. Remove asbestos containing materials refer to Asbestos Survey Report for 545
Diamond Avenue, Red Bluff, CA April 30, 2015; prepared by Baker Environmental
and sections 02 08 10 through 02 08 40.
1.1.2. Remove designated building equipment and fixtures.
1.1.3. Remove designated doors and frames.
1.1.4. Remove ceiling systems and components.
1.1.5. Remove partitions and components.
1.1.6. Remove floor coverings.
1.1.7. Remove multiple layers of roofing material down to roof sheathing.
1.1.8. Remove electrical systems and components required to implement the work of this
contract. Reinstall or replace as shown on drawings..
1.1.9. Remove mechanical and plumbing systems and components required to implement
the work of this contract. Reinstall or replace as shown on drawings..
1.1.10. Remove designated doors, frames and related assemblies.
1.1.11. Renovate designated doors and frames.
1.1.12. Repair and renovate existing surfaces in preparation for final finish, and as necessary
to restore to original functional condition.
1.1.13. Salvage of existing finishes, equipment and components where shown, and relocation
of existing building equipment and fixtures to permit demolition and renovation
operation.
1.1.14. Disposal of debris and rubbish.
1.2. SUBMITTALS
1.2.1. Demolition Schedule: Provide schedule, in Architect approved format, illustrating

demolition schedule, utility disconnect/connection schedule, coordination with roofing
system installation, and all other aspects of the work.
1.2.1.1. Coordinate schedule with Owner.
1.2.1.2. Illustrate number of shifts, staff per shift, and total duration of removal.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama SELECTIVEBUILDINGDEMOLITIONANDRENOVATION
JKA#15100 0241191
1.2.2. Certification:
1.2.2.1. Provide certification that all required permits, disposal site location and
arrangements for transportation and disposal have been obtained.
1.3. QUALIFICATIONS
1.3.1. Demolition Firm:
1.3.1.1. Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum 5

years documented experience.
1.4. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
1.4.1. Convene a pre-installation conference one week prior to commencing work of this
Section. Attendance by installers of adjacent work affected by work of this section is
mandatory.
1.4.2. Review adjacent work installation procedures and coordination required with work of
this Section.
1.5. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1. Do not remove existing exterior envelope systems when weather conditions threaten
the integrity of the building, contents, or intended continued occupancy.
1.5.2. Maintain continuous temporary protection during, and prior to, installation of new
exterior envelope systems.
1.5.3. Do not perform any demolition activities when building is occupied.
1.6. COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
1.6.1. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 11 00.
1.6.2. Schedule work to coincide with commencement of installation of new exterior envelope
systems.
1.6.3. Unless otherwise scheduled, remove only that amount of existing exterior envelope
systems that can be protected or replaced prior to completion of each day's work.
1.6.4. Coordinate work with affected mechanical and electrical work associated with exterior
penetrations.
1.6.5. Superintendent shall be present on job at all times.
1.6.6. Schedule equipment and storage areas on Project site, approved by Construction
Manager.
1.7. EXISTING CONDITIONS
1.7.1. Maintain protected egress and access at all times.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0241192
Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws and ordinances regarding hazardous
materials, including lead based coatings.
2.1. PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK
2.1.1. General:
2.1.1.1. Unless noted otherwise, provide products matching existing finish, color,
dimension, and assembly.
2.1.1.2. All products shall be new, unless specifically noted otherwise.
2.1.1.3. Provide asbestos free materials.
2.1.1.4. Maintain all fire resistance ratings of existing assemblies and materials.
2.1.1.5. Maintain water and weather tight characteristics of assemblies and

materials.
2.1.2. Comply with requirements as specified in applicable specification sections for materials
used in repairing and extending existing work.
2.2. OWNERS SALVAGED ITEMS
2.2.1. Products, fixtures and equipment designated as salvage for Owners use are shown on
drawings. Where designated, comply with the following requirements.
2.2.2. Owners Representative's Responsibilities:
2.2.2.1. Identify and tag in place all items designated as Owners salvage items.
2.2.2.2. Arrange and designate location for delivery of salvaged items.
2.2.2.3. On delivery, inspect items jointly with Contractor, and identify any damage
resulting from Contractors negligent handling or transportation.
2.2.2.4. Arrange for all storage, security and maintenance of salvaged items after
delivery.
2.2.3. Contractor's Responsibilities:
2.2.3.1. Review all items designated as salvage. Prepare summary report of

condition of each item, establishing general surface condition and quality,
functional status, inventoried spare parts and supplies, and related
description. Obtain Owners Representatives approval of summary report.
2.2.3.2. Remove designated items as specified below.
2.2.3.3. Properly prepare salvaged items for transport and storage.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0241193
2.2.3.4. Provide all required equipment to load, transport and off-load at location
designated by Owners Representative. Coordinate time and delivery
schedule.
2.3. MINOR DRYWALL AND PLASTER REPAIR MATERIALS
2.3.1. In areas where work requires minor access to or penetration of existing surfaces,
provide all materials, including lath and accessories, for repairing and filling voids in
existing drywall and plaster interior surfaces.
2.3.1.1. Material shall contain no asbestos.
2.3.1.2. Provide assembly thickness, construction and finish equal to existing

finish.
2.3.1.3. Comply with Sections 09 20 00 and 09 21 16 of this Project Manual.
2.3.1.4. Provide gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum board systems in accordance
with applicable portions of Section 09 21 16 of this Project Manual.
2.4. TEMPORARY PROTECTION PRODUCTS
2.4.1. Provide fire retardant reinforced polyethylene sheeting, 6 mil minimum thickness.
2.5. OTHER MATERIALS
2.5.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the
approval of the Architect.
3.1. SURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
Verify all such work is complete to the point where this installation may
properly commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this Section may be installed in strict accordance with
the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent
portions of the referenced standards.
3.1.1.3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
3.1.1.4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2. DOCUMENTATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS
3.2.1. Prior to beginning any alterations, including surface demolition or fixture removal,
prepare a record of existing improvements affected by the work of this contract,
including but not limited to the following:
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0241194
3.2.1.1. Exterior paving improvements, identifying all evidence of existing
settlement, cracking, and other signs of damage, distress or failure.
3.2.1.2. Condition of adjacent construction designated to remain, including finish

materials. Clearly identify all evidence of existing settlement, cracking,
alignment and other signs of damage, distress or failure.
3.2.1.3. Condition of landscaping, including canopy overhang, shrubbery and

grass/groundcover. Clearly identify all evidence of existing trunk damage,
grass compaction, crushed and broken shrubs and other signs of distress
or failure.
3.2.2. Format
3.2.2.1. Prepare record document using digital color DVD, with verbal annotation
describing location and condition, and any other means of documentation
necessary to describe existing condition.
3.2.2.2. Prepare DVD at such scale and detail as required to document existing
damage occurred prior to beginning work. If the record documents do not
clearly show damage as a pre-existent condition, Contractor shall be
responsible for repair or replacement of such damaged improvements.
3.2.2.3. Obtain Owners' Inspector of Record certification that documents were

prepared prior to beginning construction. Deliver DVD and associated
documentation to Owner prior start of construction.
3.3. PREPARATION
3.3.1. Protect existing items not designated for removal.
3.3.1.1. Protect existing surfaces of adjacent buildings with barriers, protective

panels, tarps and other devices as necessary to avoid damage.
3.3.2. Repair all underground utilities and services damaged during construction, including
utilities and services documented by Contractor at no additional cost to Owners
Representative.
3.4. UTILITY AND BUILDING SERVICES REMOVAL AND RE-INSTALLATION
3.4.1. Where encountered, remove conduit and conductors, piping, drains, and other
associated system components within the limits of the work and not covered by other
requirements of the contract documents. Include all utilities and services documented
by Contractor.
3.4.2. Utility and Service Termination
3.4.2.1. Locate and identify existing utility, service and irrigation system
components affected by work of this contract. Review existing record
drawings, conduct site investigations, contact Underground Service Alert
and other qualified cable/pipe/line locator services, and implement all
other means necessary to define the location of underground systems.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0241195
3.4.2.2. Prior to beginning any demolition, properly disconnect all water, gas and
electrical power supply at appropriate disconnect locations. Obtain all
necessary releases and approvals from serving utility companies.
3.4.2.3. Mark location of disconnected systems. Identify and indicate stub-out

locations on Project Record Documents.
3.4.3. Remove all conductors from conduit at all abandoned electrical circuits.
3.4.4. Seal off ends of all piping, drains and other components as directed by Architect and
serving utility.
3.4.5. Where necessary to maintain service to existing utility and building systems, relocate
or redirect all conduit and conductors, piping, drains, and associated system
components.
3.4.5.1. Re-circuit all electrical as required.
3.5. DEMOLITION
3.5.1. Demolish components in an orderly and careful manner.
3.5.1.1. Limit heavy equipment used to perform demolition and to transport debris
as specified in other contract documents.
3.5.1.2. Use enclosures to minimize airborne dust and debris.
3.5.2. Coordinate with Owners Representative the time of day and route to remove
demolished materials from premises.
3.5.3. Remove items designated as salvage in manner to prevent damage. Store and protect
under provisions of Article 2.2 of this Section and as follows:
3.5.4. Unless designated as salvage on drawings, all remaining items to be demolished or

removed are designated as scrap and become the property of the Contractor.
3.5.5. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work,
leave areas of work in clean condition.
3.5.6. Fixture and Equipment Removal:
3.5.6.1. All existing building system equipment shall be removed as identified and
shown on drawings and required by Architect.
3.5.6.2. Prior to beginning any system removal, properly disconnect all water, gas
and electrical power supply at appropriate disconnect locations. Obtain all
3.5.6.3. Where designated as demolished, remove all accessible conduit and

conductors, piping, drains, and other associated building system
components located above grade. Remove all conductors from conduit at
all abandoned circuits, including those in concealed spaces above grade.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0241196
3.5.7. Remove concrete slab by saw-cutting. At areas where existing curb or wall line
prevents saw use, carefully jack-hammer concrete slab as required to provide new
concrete. Saw cut all reinforcing bars - Do not torch.
3.5.8. Remove, store, protect and re-install existing materials and equipment as shown on
drawings.
3.6. EXTERIOR ENVELOPE SYSTEM DEMOLITION
3.6.1. Demolition of exterior wall interior surface/drywall assembly
3.6.1.1. Remove interior finish materials, including gypsum wall board, vinyl
covered tackboards and other finishes at exterior wall surface and at
intersecting interior walls as shown on drawings. Remove to supporting
substrate/structure, including all underlayment, accessory trim, clips,
battens and closures.
3.6.1.2. Remove all fasteners, screws and attachment hardware.
3.6.1.3. Remove all exterior wall insulation, including vapor barriers.
3.6.2. Demolition of exterior wall window assemblies
3.6.2.1. Remove exterior windows, including screens, flashing, sill covers and
hardware. Remove to supporting substrate/structure, including all
underlayment, accessory trim, clips, battens and closures.
3.6.3. Demolition of exterior wall door frames and doors.
3.6.3.1. Remove exterior door frames. Remove to supporting substrate/structure,

including all flashing, accessory trim, clips, and closures.
3.6.3.2. Remove exterior doors, including all door hardware and thresholds.
3.6.4. Upon completion of work, leave areas of work in clean condition
3.6.5. Termination of isolated pipe or conduit penetrations:
3.6.5.1. Terminate all penetrations below slab surface. Remove concrete slab as
close as possible to penetration by saw-cutting. Saw cut all reinforcing
bars - Do not torch.
3.6.5.2. Seal or cap all penetrations in Architect approved manner.
3.6.5.3. Provide non-shrink portland cement grout to slab level, troweled smooth.
3.6.6. Slab on grade demolition and replacement.
3.6.6.1. Comply with this Section for repair of slab at isolated penetrations.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0241197
3.6.6.2. Carefully sawcut and remove existing slab (including bonded finishes
where applicable) at locations as shown on drawings or required to
implement work under this contract. Coordinate with work shown on
plumbing and electrical drawings. Protect existing adjacent finish flooring
designated to remain.
3.6.6.3. Remove approximately 3 inches of existing grade or base below bottom

of slab elevation, extending each side of sawcut approximately 2 inches.
3.6.6.4. Roughen cut face of slab, and chip bottom edge back at approximately 45
degrees.
3.6.6.5. Apply bonding agent specified in Section 03 33 10 to face of existing

concrete.
3.6.6.6. Place polymer modified concrete fill as specified in Section 03 33 10.

Trowel slab surface as specified for subsequent floor finish materials.
3.6.6.7. Where slab replacement exceeds 12 feet in any direction, provide tooled
control joint at approximately 6 feet on center at right angles to saw-cut.
3.6.7. Topping Slab over structural concrete deck demolition and preparation for
replacement.
3.6.7.1. Comply with criteria in this Section repair of slab at isolated penetrations.
3.6.7.2. Carefully sawcut and remove existing slab (including bonded finishes
where applicable) at locations as shown on drawings or required to
implement work under this contract. Coordinate with work shown on
plumbing and electrical drawings. Protect existing adjacent finish flooring
designated to remain.
3.6.7.3. Mechanically remove existing cleavage or waterproof membrane as

required to expose existing structural slab.
3.6.7.4. Scarify slab surface to remove laitance and surface paste, exposing fine
aggregates.
3.6.7.5. Place slab per Section 03 30 00.
3.7. WALL AND FRAMING DEMOLITION:
3.7.1. Remove existing framed walls and ceiling structural members as designated on
drawings. Remove concrete curbs as specified in this Section.
3.7.2. Remove all fasteners, anchor clips, saddles and hangers originally required for
demolished framing.
3.7.3. Remove all hanger wires at point of attachment to structure.
3.8. EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL AND ROOF FRAMING REPAIR
3.8.1. Examine existing wall and roof framing after removal of exterior wall finishes as
specified in this section.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0241198
3.8.2. Identify plywood sheathing, framing elements, connectors and other components of
the wall and roof assembly exhibiting defects or damage, including the following:
3.8.2.1. Split or delaminated veneer.
3.8.2.2. Crushed panel edges, panel gaps exceeding 1/8 inch, open "boats", and
panel edges displaced more than 1/8 inch.
3.8.2.3. Evidence of dry-rot, mold, embrittlement or other organic defects in

sheathing and framing.
3.8.2.4. Rusted, corroded, missing or defective fasteners.
3.8.3. Obtain direction from Architect on repair or removal of identified defects.
3.8.4. Where repairs or replacement is necessary, a contract adjustment will be made for
direct cost and schedule impact of such work. However, no cost increase will be
accepted for consequential or indirect costs.
3.9. FLOOR FINISH DEMOLITION
3.9.1. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing adjacent surfaces and
finishes. Do not grind.
3.9.2. Comply with all applicable regulations concerning removal of flooring assemblies
containing asbestos material.
3.9.3. Remove all adhesive, residue, fasteners, tack strips and related floor finish
components.
3.9.4. Remove adjacent wall base where designated on drawings. Do not delaminate wall
facing or finish.
3.10. WALL AND CEILING FINISH DEMOLITION
3.10.1. Miscellaneous Materials/Gypsum Board/Plaster
3.10.1.1. Remove finishes to supporting substrate/structure, including all accessory

trim, clips, battens and closures.
3.10.1.3. Prepare substrate as required to provide suitable surface for designated

finish.
3.10.1.4. Provide backing or reinforcing as required to properly support cut edges

of surface materials.
3.10.2. Wall covering
3.10.2.1. Remove existing vinyl wall covering and similar finishes where shown on
drawings.
3.10.2.2. Use methods required to minimize damage to substrate.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0241199
3.10.2.3. See Section 09 21 16 for surface finish requirements.
3.11. ACOUSTICAL CEILING DEMOLITION
3.11.1. Remove existing acoustical ceiling panels where designated on drawings.
3.11.2. Remove suspended acoustical panel grid system where designated on drawings.
3.11.3. Remove all fasteners, anchor clips, saddles and hangers originally required for
demolished grid. Remove all hanger wires at point of attachment to structure.
3.12. PAINTING
3.12.1. Paint repaired surfaces at locations shown on drawings.
3.12.2. Prepare existing surface as recommended by manufacturer for substrate. Clean of all
dirt, dust, and oily films.
3.12.3. Paint existing surface with specified coatings. Unless noted otherwise on drawings,
paint entire surface where crack repair occurs. Painting crack repair only is not
acceptable.
3.12.4. Provide one coat of specified primer, and two coats of specified finish paint.
3.13. DISPOSAL
3.13.1. Dispose of all demolished material, trash, debris, and other materials not used in the
work in accordance with the regulations of jurisdictional authority. Remove demolished
materials and debris from site on a daily basis.
3.14. ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION
3.14.1. Take particular care at connection between structures designated to remain. Use hand
tools only to remove all portions designated as demolished.
3.14.2. Where foundations occur adjacent to demolished structure, provide all required
underpinning or shoring support.
3.14.3. Provide appropriate wall and roof repair detailing to maintain long term water and
weather-proof assembly at structures designated to remain.
3.14.3.1. Maintain fire resistance of original assembly. Maintain materials and

finishes of original assembly.
3.14.3.2. Provide multiple materials, lapped and counterflashed as required to

properly shed water without creating traps.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 02411910
SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Requirements of Division 1 apply to all work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Design, furnish and install forms for concrete as indicated on drawings and specified here.
Remove forms and shores at specified time. Clean up.
1.3 RELATED WORK (See also Table of Contents)
A. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03 21 00.
B. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.
C. Structural Steel: Section 05 12 00.
D. Metal Fabrications: Section 05 50 00.
E. Rough Carpentry: Section 06 10 00.
F. Items relating solely to mechanical or electrical work are included under those Divisions,
except as specifically indicated otherwise on Drawings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General:
1. Conform to all requirements of ACI 347 and ACI 318 Section 6.1 and 6.2.
2. Concrete formwork shall be designed and constructed to safely support fluid concrete and
superimposed construction loads without excessive deflection or concrete leakage.
Provide bracing to maintain accurate alignment and to resist all anticipated lateral loads.
Forms shall conform with drawings as to shape, line, and dimension. Design, engineering
and construction of forms shall be Contractor's responsibility. Formwork for exposed
concrete shall be constructed to tolerances indicated in ACI 303R.
3. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades who furnish and/or install piping, conduit,
reglets, anchors, inserts, sleeves, hangers, etc., as their work requires; including
provisions for recesses and chases.
B. Submittals: (Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00)

1. Product Data. Provide manufacturers data and installation instructions for the following:
a. Tie rods and spreaders.
b. Formwork for exposed concrete.
c. Form coatings and release agents.
C. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted)

1. 2013 California Building Code (CBC).
2. American Concrete Institute (ACI).
a. ACI 303R - Guide to Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete Practice
b. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
c. ACI 347 - "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork
3. Standard Grading and Dressing Rules #17, West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (For
Douglas Fir Form Lumber).
4. U.S. Product Standard PS 1-83 (For Plywood Form Lumber).
CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 11 00 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Form Material:
1. Smooth Concrete exposed to view: 5/8 inch minimum APA Plyform or steel.
2. Concrete concealed from view: 5/8 inch minimum APA Plyform, steel or clean and sound
1 x 8 Standard Grade Douglas Fir.
B. Fiber Forms: Tubular column forms spirally constructed of laminated plies of fiber. Plies shall
be laminated using a non-water sensitive adhesive and surface wax impregnated for moisture
protection. Forms shall give a smooth and seamless appearance to the cast concrete. Provide
reveals, as shown on the drawings, as supplied by the form manufacturer. Forms shall be as
manufactured by Sonoco Products, plastic lined; Burke Smoothtube by Burke Co.; or
approved equal.
C. Form Clamps: Assembly to have cone washers, (1 inch break back) 3/8 inch center rod.
D. Form Ties:
1. Concrete exposed to view: Snap ties allowing full 1 inch break back.
2. Concrete concealed from view: Snap ties or wire.
3. Verify special spacing requirements with architectural drawings at exposed concrete.
E. Spreaders: Metal (no wood).
F. Form Coating: Non-grain and non-staining types of form coating that will not leave a residual
matter on the face of the concrete or adversely affect proper bonding of any subsequent paint
or other surface applications.
1. Form coating containing mineral oils or other non-drying materials will not be permitted for
any concrete work.
G. Joint Tape: No. 471 plastic film tape 3 inches wide, as manufactured by the Industrial Tape
Division of 3M Company.
H. Expansion Joint Filler (Preformed): inch thick; Flexcell by Celotex Corporation, Elastic Fiber
Expansion Joint by Phillip Carey Mfg. Co., or Sealtight Fiber Expansion Joint by W.R.
Meadows, Inc.
I. Extruded Polystyrene Foam: ASTM C578 type IV. Dow Chemical Corp. "Styrofoam", UC
Industries "Foamular", or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORM CONSTRUCTION
A. Construct substantial forms to the shapes, lines, grades and elevations shown, sufficiently
tight to prevent leakage of mortar, and tied, clamped and braced to prevent spreading, shifting
or settling. Plywood joints shall be square and tight; plywood shall be arranged in such
manner as to minimize number of joints and to provide a smooth, attractive finished concrete
surface.
B. Apply form coating to forms before reinforcing steel is in place.
C. Sleeves, anchors and bolts, including those for angle frames, supports, ties and other
materials in connection with concrete construction, shall be secured in position before the
concrete is placed.
D. Proper provisions shall be made for openings, blockouts, sleeves, offsets, sinkages, recesses
and depressions required by other trades and suppliers prior to placing concrete.
1. The Contractor shall also see that sleeves have been installed and other provisions have
been made for the installation of mechanical, electrical and other equipment.
2. Coordinate with all trades to insure proper placement of all items in forms and to provide
proper blockouts wherever required.
E. Concrete work out of alignment, level or plumb will be cause for rejection of the whole work
affected and, if so rejected, such work shall be removed and replaced, as directed by
Architect, with no additional cost to the Owner.
F. Form Not Required: Concrete footings may be poured directly against cut earth where
feasible and when the Architects approval has been obtained.
1. See structural drawings for requirements for placing concrete footings directly against
earth without forms.
G. Use inch minimum wood chamfer strips typical at all exposed corners unless noted
otherwise on drawings.
3.2 CLEANING OF FORMS
A. All dirt, chips, sawdust, rubbish, water, etc. shall be completely removed from form by water
hosing and air pressure before any concrete is deposited therein. No wooden ties or blocking
shall be left in concrete except where indicated for attachment of other work.
B. Thoroughly clean and patch all holes in formwork and re-coat as required before reusing.
Forms not suited to obtain concrete surfaces and tolerances in conformity with Contract
requirements will be rejected by Architect.
1. Reuse of forming materials shall be limited only as required to produce the finishes as
specified, free from blemishes and other defects unless covered by other building
materials in which case blemish free concrete is not required.
3.3 INSPECTION OF FORMS
A. Notify the Architect at least 48 hours in advance of the beginning of pouring operations and at
the completion of formwork and location of all construction joints. An inspection of forms and
joints will be made for approval of finished work and general layout only. The foregoing
inspection shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility of design and safety or
formwork, bulkheads and shorings.
3.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SHORING
A. Do not remove forms until concrete has attained sufficient strength to support its weight and
any construction loading. Concrete must be allowed to cure long enough to avoid damage
during form removal. Contractor or his representative in charge of concrete construction shall
be present during removal of forms and shores, and shall be personally responsible for safety
of this operation at all times and under all conditions.
B. As a minimum, formwork and shoring shall remain in place for the following periods:
1. Concrete on grade: 24 hours
2. Walls and Columns: 3 days
3. Formwork may be removed and reshores installed before the times indicated above,
provided the concrete has cured sufficiently to avoid damage when formwork is removed.
Shores must be immediately replaced with reshores in a sequence designed to avoid
inducing stress in the concrete member.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Upon completion of this Work, clean up and remove from Site all equipment and debris
resulting from this work.
B. Surfaces to be painted shall be smooth and free of substances such as dirt, wax, excessive
latence, grease or materials that would prevent proper bonding of finishes.
1. Removal of foregoing contaminants, and complete removal of parting and curing
compounds affecting proper paint bond, shall be responsibility of this Section of Work.
Sandblast cleaning shall not be employed without specific approval of Structural
Engineer.
END OF SECTION 03 10 00
SECTION 03 21 00
REINFORCING STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Requirements of Division 1 apply to all work of this Section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Unless noted otherwise, furnish and install reinforcing for all concrete, including dowels,
chairs, spacers, bolsters, etc., necessary for supporting and fastening reinforcement in place
as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
A. Concrete Formwork: Section 03 10 00.
B. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.
C. Concrete Unit Masonry: Section 04 22 00.
A. General:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Regularly engaged in the manufacture of steel bar and welded
wire fabric reinforcing.
2. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be done only by an installation firm normally
engaged in this business. All work shall be performed by qualified mechanics working
under an experienced supervisor.
3. Welding Qualifications: Welding procedures, welding operators and welders shall be
qualified in accordance with AWS D1.4 - "Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel".
a. Welders whose work fails to pass inspection shall be re-qualified before performing
further welding.
4. Reinforcement Work shall conform to ACI 301 and ACI 318 Chapter 7, as minimum
standards.
5. Allowable Tolerances:
a. Fabrication:
1) Sheared length: 1 inch.
2) Depth of truss bars: Plus or minus -inch.
3) Ties: Plus or minus -inch.
4) All other bends: Plus or minus 1 inch.
b. Placement:
1) Concrete cover to form surfaces: Plus or minus -inch.
2) Minimum spacing between bars: Plus or minus -inch.
3) Crosswise of members: Spaced evenly within 2 inches of stated separation.
4) Lengthwise of members: Plus or minus 2 inches.
c. Maximum bar movement to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or
embedded items: 2 bar diameters.
B. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted):

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI).

a. ACI 301 - "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
REINFORCING STEEL 03 21 00 - 1
b. ACI 315 - "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcing".
c. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
a. ASTM A82 - "Cold Drawn Wire for Concrete Reinforcement".
b. ASTM A185 - "Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement".
c. ASTM A615 - "Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement".
d. ASTM A706 Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) - "Manual of Standard Practice".
5. American Welding Standard (AWS).
a. AWS D1.4 - "Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel".
C. Submittals: (Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00)

1. Shop Drawings: Prepare in accordance ACI 315. Indicate bending diagrams, assembly
diagrams, splicing and laps of bars and shapes, dimensions and details of bar reinforcing
and assemblies. Correctness of all reinforcing requirements and work is the responsibility
of Contractor. Identify such shop drawings with reference thereon to sheet and detail
numbers from Contract Drawings.
a. Do not use scaled dimensions from Contract Drawings in determining the lengths of
reinforcing bars.
b. No reinforcing steel shall be fabricated without approved shop drawings.
c. Any deviations from the contract documents must be clearly indicated as a deviation
on the shop drawings.
d. Areas of high congestion, including member joints and embed locations shall be fully
detailed to verify clearances and assembly parameters and coordination with other
trades.
2. Certified mill test reports of supplied reinforcing indicating chemical and physical analysis.
Tensile and bend tests shall be performed by the mill in accordance with ASTM A615.
3. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for splice devices.
b. Bar Supports.
4. Certificates of Compliance with specified standards:
a. Reinforcing bars.
b. Welded wire fabric.
c. Welding electrodes.
5. Samples: Only as requested by Architect.
D. Tests and Inspections:

1. A testing program is required prior to start of construction. Testing program to be done in
compliance with the CBC requirements and in collaboration with Testing Laboratory,
Design team, contractor, owner and submitted for review by the agency in charge of
building enforcement. Requirements below are minimum requirements; additional
requirements may be required in final testing program.
2. All reinforcing steel whose properties are not identifiable by mill test reports shall be
tested in accordance with ASTM A615. One Series of tests for each missing report to be
borne by the Contractor.
3. When inspections are indicated for reinforcement placement on the Structural drawings, a
special inspector shall be employed to inspect reinforcing placement per CBC Section
1704.
4. When tests are indicated for reinforcing steel on the structural drawings, the reinforcing
steel used shall be tested in accordance with ASTM A615. One tensile and one bend test
for each 2-1/2 tons of steel or fraction thereof, shall be made.
5. Inspect shop and field welding in accordance with AWS D1.4, including checking
materials, equipment, procedure and welder qualification as well as the welds. Inspector
will use non-destructive testing or any other aid to visual inspection that he deems
necessary to assure himself of the adequacy of the weld.
6. Tests and inspection shall be performed by Owners testing agency except when needed
to justify rejected work, in which case the cost of retests and reinspection shall be borne
by the Contractor.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver reinforcement to project site in bundles marked with metal tags indicating bar size and
length.
B. Handle and store materials to prevent contamination.

1. Store reinforcement in a manner that will prevent excessive rusting or coating with grease,
oil, dirt, and other objectionable materials. Storage shall be in separate piles or racks so
as to avoid confusion or loss of identification after bundles are broken.
C. Deliver and store welding electrodes in accordance with AWS D1.4.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 for all bars.

1. Bar reinforcement to be welded shall meet chemical requirements of ASTM A706.
2. Longitudinal reinforcement in column and beams of special moment-resisting frames shall
meet the chemical requirements of ASTM A706.
B. Stirrups and Ties: ASTM A615, Grade 60 for all bars.
C. Steel Dowels: Same grade as bars to which dowels are connected.
D. Welded wire Fabric: ASTM A185.
E. Tie Wires: FS-QQ-W-461, annealed steel, black, 16 gauge minimum.
F. Welding Electrodes: AWS D1.4, low hydrogen, E70XX series.
G. Bar Supports:
1. Typical, unless noted otherwise; CRSI Class 2 wire supports.
a. Do not use wood, brick or other objectionable materials.
b. Do not use galvanized supports.
2. Supports placed against ground: Pre-cast concrete blocks not less than 4 inches square
with embedded wire.
H. Mechanical Couplers: Comply with ACI 318 section 12.14.3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate reinforcement to meet requirements of Drawings.
B. Fabricate reinforcement in accordance with the requirements of ACI 315 where specific
details are not shown or where Drawings and Specifications are not more demanding.
C. Steel reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material.
Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings shall not be used. Heating of bars for
bending will not be permitted.
D. Reinforcing shall not be field bent or straightened without structural engineers review.
E. Provide offsets in rebar (1:6 maximum) where required to maintain clearances.
3.2 CONDITION OF SURFACES
A. Examine surfaces and conditions receiving or affecting the work. Do not proceed until
unsuitable conditions have been corrected.
3.3 GENERAL
A. Concrete shown without reinforcing shall be reinforced as similar parts shown with reinforcing
except where concrete is specifically noted to be unreinforced.
3.4 PLACEMENT
A. All reinforcement shall be accurately set in place, lapped, spliced, spaced rigidly and securely
held in place and tied with specified wire at all splices and crossing points. All wire tie ends
shall point away from the form. Carefully locate all dowel steel to align with wall and column
steel.
1. Bars shall be in long lengths with laps and splices as shown. Offset laps in adjacent bars.
Place steel with clearances and cover as shown. Bar laps shall be as indicated on the
Drawings. Tie all laps and intersections with the specified wire.
2. Maintain clear space between parallel bars not less than 1-1/2 times nominal diameter,
but in no case shall clear space be less than 1-1/2 times maximum size concrete
aggregate.
3. Reinforcing dowels for slabs shall be placed as detailed. Sleeves may be used if reviewed
by the Structural Engineer before installation. Install dowel through all construction and
expansion joints for all slabs on grade.
B. Bar Supports: Support and securely fasten bars with chairs, spacers and ties to prevent
displacement by construction loads or placement of concrete beyond the tolerances specified.
Conform to CRSI as a minimum standard.
C. Steel Adjustment:
1. Move within allowable tolerances to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel,
conduits, or embedded items.
2. Do not move bars beyond allowable without concurrence of Structural Engineer.
3. Do not heat, bend, or cut bars without concurrence of Structural Engineer.
4. Reinforcement shall not be bent after being embedded in hardened concrete.
D. Splices:
1. Splice reinforcing as shown.
2. Lap Splices: Tie securely with wire to prevent displacement of splices during placement of
concrete.
3. Splice Devices: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Obtain
Structural Engineers review before using.
4. Do not splice bars except at locations shown without concurrence of Structural Engineer.
a. Where splices in addition to those indicated are required, indicate location on shop
drawings clearly and highlight "for Engineers approval".
E. Welding:
1. Welding is not permitted unless specifically detailed on Drawings or approved by
Engineer.
2. Employ shielding metal-arc method and meet requirements of AWS D1.4.
3. Welding is not permitted on bars where the carbon equivalent is unknown or is
determined to exceed 0.55.
4. Welding shall not be done within two bar diameters of any bent portion of a bar which has
been bent cold.
5. Welding of crossing bars is not permitted.
F. Welded Wire Fabric: Install in long lengths, lapping 24 inches at end splices and one mesh at
side splices. Offset laps in adjacent widths. Place fabric in approximately the middle of the
slab thickness unless shown otherwise on the Drawings by dimension. Wire tie lap joints at
12-inch centers. Use concrete blocks to support mesh in proper position.
G. Reinforcement shall be free of mud, oil or other materials that may reduce bond at the time
concrete is placed. Reinforcement with tightly adhered rust or mill scale will be accepted
without cleaning provided that rusting has not reduced dimensions and weights below
applicable standards. Remove loose rust.
H. Protection against rust:

1. Where there is danger of rust staining adjacent surfaces, wrap reinforcement with
impervious tape or otherwise prevent rust staining.
2. Remove protective materials and clean reinforcement as required before proceeding with
concrete placement.
I. Drawing Notes: Refer to notes on Drawings for additional reinforcement requirements.
J. Mechanical and Electrical Drawings: Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Drawings for formed
concrete requiring reinforcing steel. All such steel shall be included under the work of this
Section.
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Requirements of Division 1 apply to all Work of this Section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Furnish, place and finish cast in place concrete and related work as indicated on the Drawings
and specified here.
1. Install miscellaneous metal and other items furnished by other trades to be installed in
concrete work.
2. Provide facilities for job curing of test cylinders and transporting to Testing Laboratory.
B. Provide grouting of steel base plates as indicated on the Drawings and specified here.
B. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03 21 00.
C. Mortar and Grout: 04 05 00.
D. Structural Steel: Section 05 12 00.
E. Metal Decking: Section 05 30 00.
F. Metal Fabrications: Section 05 50 00.
A. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted)

2. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
a. ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
b. ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight,
and Mass Concrete
c. ACI 211.2 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight
Concrete
d. ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings
e. ACI 302 Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
f. ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting
g. ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting
h. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
i. ACI 360 Design of Slabs-On-Ground
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM C31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
b. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates
c. ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
d. ASTM C42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete
e. ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
f. ASTM C109 Test of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1
g. ASTM C143 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
h. ASTM C150 Portland Cement
i. ASTM C172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method
j. ASTM C192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory
k. ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
l. ASTM C330 Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete
m. ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
n. ASTM C618 Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral
Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete
o. ASTM C685 Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing
p. ASTM C1157 Hydraulic-Cement
B. Submittals: (Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00)

1. Concrete mix designs. See Mix Design below. Include results of test data used to
establish proportions.
2. Certificates of Compliance from Manufacturer
a. Cement certificates
b. Aggregates
c. Admixtures.
3. Data regarding hardeners and sealers.
4. Grout samples for sacked surface textures and colors upon Architects request only.
5. Layout drawings for construction, control and expansion joints.
6. Transit-mix delivery slips:
a. Keep record at the job site showing time and place of each pour of concrete, together
with transit-mix delivery slips certifying contents of the pour.
b. Make the record available to the Architect for his inspection upon request.
c. Upon completion of this portion of the work, deliver the record and the delivery slips to
the Architect.
7. See Section 03 21 00 for reinforcing steel submittals.
C. Tests and Inspections:

Compliance with the CBC requirements and in collaboration with Testing Laboratory,
Design team, contractor, owner and submitted for review by the agency in charge of
building enforcement. Requirements below are minimum requirements; additional
requirements may be required in final testing program.
2. The following tests shall be made by a recognized testing laboratory selected by the
Owner and approved by the governing agency. All tests shall be in accordance with the
previously mentioned standards and ACI 318 Section 5.6. A complete record of all tests
and inspections shall be kept per CBC Section 1903.1.
a. Compressive Strength: Make and cure in accordance with ASTM C-31. Test in
accordance with ASTM C-39 and ACI 318 Section 5.6.
1) A record shall be made of time and of locations of concrete from which samples
were taken.
2) Four identical cylinders shall be taken from each pour of 150 cubic yards or 5000
square feet or part thereof, being placed each day per ACI 318 Section 5.6.2.
One cylinder shall be tested at age 7 days, and two at age 28 days unless
otherwise specified. Preserve remaining cylinder for future use.
b. Drying Shrinkage: (applies to lightweight concrete only unless noted otherwise)
1) A record shall be made of time cylinders and of locations of concrete from which
samples were taken.
2) Three identical 4" x 4" x 11" specimens shall be made from same concrete as
used in structure. Percent of shrinkage shall be reported at 21 days after 7 day
moist curing period. Average results of 3 specimens shall be used as the
accepted value. The value for laboratory cast specimens shall not exceed .075%.
If field test specimens are used in lieu of laboratory specimens, a tolerance of
+33% may be used.
3) Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C157.
c. Concrete consistency (slump) shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C143.
3. Provide full time inspection per CBC Section 1704.3 during the taking of test specimens
and during the placing of all concrete and embedded steel.
4. See Section 03 21 00 for reinforcing steel tests and inspections.
5. Provide concrete batch plant inspections per ASTM C685.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II or Type V. One brand of cement shall be used
throughout to maintain uniform color for all exposed concrete.
B. Concrete Aggregate: Fine and coarse aggregates shall be regarded as separate ingredients.
Each size of coarse aggregate, as well as combination of sizes when two or more are used,
shall conform to grading requirements of appropriate ASTM Standards and ACI 318.
1. Concrete Aggregates for Standard Weight Concrete: ASTM C 33. Aggregate shall be
crushed granite or Perkins type.
2. Concrete Aggregates for Lightweight Concrete: ASTM C330 to produce concrete
weighing no more than 115 pcf at 28 days. Aggregate shall be vacuum saturated
expanded shale as produced through the rotary kiln method.
C. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acids, alkali, organic matter and other
deleterious substances; suitable for domestic consumption.
D. Admixtures shall be subject to prior approval by the Architect, in accordance with ACI 318
Section 3.6. Calcium Chloride is not permitted.
1. Water Reducing
a. ASTM C494 Type A - for use in cool weather.
b. ASTM C494 Type D - for use in hot weather.
2. Air Entraining
a. Conform to ASTM C 260
3. Fly Ash
a. Conform to ASTM C 618
4. Mid-Range Water-Reducers
a. Master Builders Polyheed or approved equal.
5. Fly Ash Pozzolan
a. Conforming to ASTM A-618 Class F
E. Slab on Grade Vapor Retarder

1. Vapor Retarder must have the following qualities:
a. 15 mil thickness minimum
b. WVTR less than 0.008 as tested by ASTM E 96
c. ASTM E 1745 Class A (Plastics)
2. Vapor Retarder Products
a. Stego Wrap Vapor Retarder by STEGO Industries LLC.
b. W.R. Meadows Premoulded Membrane with Plasmatic Core.
c. Zero-Perm by Alumiseal.
3. Vapor Retarder Tape

a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: ASTM E 96, 0.3 perms or lower
b. Minimum 8-mils thick
c. Minimum 3 3/4 inches wide
d. Manufactured from High Density Polyethylene
e. Pressure Sensitive Adhesive
F. Sand: Clean, dry, well graded.
G. Abrasive aggregate for non-slip finish: Fused aluminum oxide grits, graded 12/30. Use
factory-graded rustproof and non-glazing material that is unaffected by freezing, moisture and
cleaning materials.
1. Products offered by manufacturers to comply with the above requirements include: A-H
Alox; Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Co., Toxgrip; Toch Div. - Carboline, or approved equal.
H. Expansion Joint Filler:

1. Joint fill shall be a preformed non-extruded resilient filler, saturated with bituminous
materials and conforming to ASTM D 1751. Products shall be equivalent to Burke "Fiber
Expansion Joint", W.R. Meadows "Fibrated Expansion Joint Filler", or approved equal.
I. Bonding Agent: Sonneborn "Sonobond"; the Euclid Chemical Company "Euco-Weld"; Larsen
Products Corp., "Weld-Crete" or approved equivalent.
J. Concrete Sealer: Cure and Seal, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company "Aqua-
Cure VOX", Sonneborn "Kure-N-Seal WB", Burke "Spartan-Cote",W.R. Meadows "Intex" or
approved equal conforming to ASTM C-309, Type I, Class B requirements, and conforming to
State of California Air Resources Board VOC Regulations.
K. Concrete Hardener/Sealer: Clear, water soluble, sprayable in-organic silicate based

hardener/sealer or acrylic co-polymer resin. Products shall be equal to Euclid Chemical
Company "Eucosil", Burke "Spartan-Cote", Sonneborn "Sonosil", W.R. Meadows "Pena-Lith",
or approved equal and must conform to State of California Air Resources Board VOC
Regulations.
L. Concrete Cure: Water based curing compound conforming to ASTM C-309, Type 1, Class A
and B, and AASHTO Specification M-148; Type 1, Class A and B requirements, and State of
California Air Resources Board VOC Regulations. Product shall be equivalent to Euclid
Chemical Company "Kurez VOX", Burke "No. 1127" or "Aqua-Resin Cure", W.R. Meadows
"1100 Clear", or approved equal.
M. Non-Shrink Grout: See Section 2.2.A.6.
2.2 CONCRETE
A. Concrete Mixes:
1. Type A Concrete:
Strength: 3000 lbs. per square inch at 28 days.
Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inch.
Cement Content: As required by mix design (ACI 318 Section 5.3).
5.0 sacks per yard minimum.
Maximum Water to Cement Ratio: 0.58
Admixture: Water Reducing.
Weight: 145 lbs. per cubic foot
Use for unexposed foundation concrete except as otherwise specified. At Contractor's
option, Type B concrete may be substituted for this.
2. Type B Concrete:
Strength: 3500 lbs. per square inch at 28 days.
Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch.
Minimum Cement Content: As required by mix design. (ACI 318 Section 5.3).
5.5 sacks per yard minimum.
Maximum Water to Cement Ratio: 0.45
Admixture: Water reducing.
Weight: 145 lbs. per cubic foot
Use for building slab on grade
Maximum Fly Ash content as a percentage of total cementitious material: 15%
3. Grout shall be non-shrink, non-metallic, flowable Type "713" or "928" by Master Builders.
a. Metallic grout equivalent to Master Builders "Embeco" may be used only where
covered by earth, concrete, or masonry.
b. Acceptance by Architect required before using.
B. Consistency of Concrete: Concrete slump, measured in accordance with ASTM C 143, shall
fall within following limits.
1. For General concrete placement: 3 inch plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Mixes employing the specified mid-range water reducer shall provide a measured slump
not to exceed 7 inch +1 inch after dosing, 2 inch +1 inch before dosing.
3. Concrete slump shall be taken at point of placement. Use water reducing admixtures as
required to provide a workable consistency for pump mixers. Water shall not be added at
the jobsite without written review by the structural engineer.
C. Mix Design:
1. Initial mix design shall be prepared for all concrete in accordance with ACI 318 Section
5.3. Mix proportions shall be determined in accordance with ACI 318 Section 5.3 or
Section 5.4. In the event that additional mix designs are required due to depletion of
aggregate sources, aggregate not conforming to Specifications or at request of
Contractor, these mixes shall be prepared as above.
2. Contractor shall notify the Testing Laboratory and Architect of intent to use concrete
pumps to place concrete so that mix designs can be modified accordingly.
3. Fly ash shall not exceed fifteen percent of the total cementitious material.
4. Provide 6% air entrainment typical for exterior concrete exposed to freeze-thaw cycles.
5. Owners testing laboratory shall review all mix design before submittal.
D. Mixing:
1. Equipment: All concrete shall be machine mixed. Provide adequate equipment and
facilities for accurate measurement and control of materials.
2. Method of Mixing:
a. Transit Mixing: Comply with ASTM C 94. Ready mixed concrete shall be used
throughout, except as specified below.
b. On-Site Mixing: Use only if method of storing material, mixing of material and type of
mixing equipment is approved by Architect. Approval of site mixing does not relieve
Contractor of any other requirements of Specifications.
c. Mixing shall be in accordance with ACI 318 Section 5.8.
3. Mixing Time: After mix water has been added, concrete shall be mixed not less than 1-1/2
minutes nor more than 1-1/2 hours. Concrete shall be rejected if not deposited within the
time specified.
4. Admixtures:
a. Air entraining and chemical admixtures shall be charged into mixer as a solution and
shall be dispensed by an automatic dispenser or similar metering device. Powdered
admixtures shall be weighed or measured by volume as recommended by
manufacturer. Accuracy of measurement of any admixture shall be within plus or
minus 3%.
b. Two or more admixtures may be used in same concrete, provided such admixtures
are added separately during batching sequence, and provided further that admixtures
used in that combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on
concrete or on properties of each other.
c. All admixtures are to be approved by Structural Engineer prior to commencing this
work.
5. Retempering:
a. Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use. Concrete which has set
shall be discarded, not retempered.
b. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump is prohibited.
c. When concrete arrives at project with slump below that suitable for placing, water may
be added only if neither maximum permissible water-cement ratio nor maximum
slump is exceeded. Water shall be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at least
half of total mixing time required. Any addition of water above that permitted by
limitation of water-cement ratio shall be accompanied by a quantity of cement
sufficient to maintain proper water-cement ratio. Such additions shall only be used if
approved by Architect. In any event, with or without addition of cement, not more than
2 gallons of water per cubic yard of concrete, over that specified in design mix, shall
be added.
6. Cold Weather Batching: When average of the highest and lowest air temperature falls
below 40 degrees F for more than three consecutive days, provide adequate equipment
for heating concrete materials. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be
used. When placed in forms, concrete placed in these temperatures shall have a
minimum temperature based on dimensions of concrete sections placed per ACI 301.
7. Hot Weather Batching: Concrete deposited in hot weather shall have a placing
temperature below 90 degrees F per ACI 301. If necessary, ingredients shall be cooled to
accomplish this.
2.3 FLOOR LEVELING AND FILL MATERIALS
A. Epoxy Concrete Mortar: Floor leveling, non-shrink trowel applied epoxy concrete mortar; TPM
115 General Polymers Corp., A-H Emery Epoxy Topping #170 Anti-Hydro Corp., or approved
equal, where areas to fill are less than 1/4 inch thick.
B. Concrete Mortar: Floor leveling, patching and repair, non-shrink trowel applied concrete
mortar; Master Builders EMBECO 411-A, Euclid EUCO, or approved equal, where areas of fill
are greater than 1/4 inch thick.
C. Cementitious Floor Leveling Material: Shall be self-leveling or trowelable with a minimum 28

day compressive strength of 3000 psi in accordance with ASTM C-109. Material shall be
equal to Quickrete No. 1249, Ardex V-800/K-55, Mapei "Ultra/Flex" or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLACEMENT
A. Before any concrete is placed, the following items of work shall have been completed in the
area of placing.
1. Forms shall have been erected, adequately braced, cleaned, sealed, lubricated if
required, and bulkheaded where placing is to stop.
2. Any wood forms other than plywood shall be thoroughly water soaked before placing any
concrete. The wetting of forms shall be started at least 12 hours before concreting.
3. Reinforcing steel shall have been placed, tied and supported.
4. Embedded work of all trades shall be in place in the forms and adequately tied and
braced.
5. The entire place of deposit shall have been cleaned of wood chips, sawdust, dirt, debris,
hardened concrete and other foreign matter. No wooden ties or blocking shall be left in
the concrete except where indicated for attachment of other work.
6. Reinforcing steel, at the time the concrete is placed around it, shall be cleaned of scale,
mill scale or other contaminants that will destroy or reduce bond.
7. Concrete surfaces to which fresh concrete is to be bonded shall be brush cleaned to
remove all dust and foreign matter and to expose the aggregate, and then coated with the
bonding adhesive herein specified.
8. Prior to placing concrete for any slabs on grade, the moisture content of the subgrade
below the slabs shall be adjusted to at least optimum moisture.
9. No concrete shall be placed until formwork and reinforcement has been approved by
Architect. Clean forms of all debris and remove standing water. Thoroughly clean
reinforcement and all handling equipment for mixing and transporting concrete. Concrete
shall not be placed against reinforcing steel that is hot to the touch. Notify Structural
Engineer 48 hours in advance of concrete pour.
B. Conveying: Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods which will prevent
separation or loss of ingredients. Deposit concrete in forms as nearly as practicable at its final
position in a manner which will insure that required quality is obtained. Chutes shall slope not
less than 4 inches and not more than 6 inches per foot of horizontal run.
C. Depositing: Deposit concrete into forms in horizontal layers not exceeding 24 inches in
thickness around building, proceeding along forms at a uniform rate and consolidating into
previous pour. In no case shall concrete be poured into an accumulation of water ahead of
pour, nor shall concrete be flowed along forms to its final place of deposit. Fresh concrete
shall not be permitted to fall from a height greater than 6 feet without use of adjustable length
pipes or, in narrow walls, of adjustable flexible hose sleeves. Concrete shall be scheduled so
that placing is a continuous operation for the completion of each section between
predetermined construction joints. If any concreting operation, once planned, cannot be
carried on in a continuous operation, concreting shall stop at temporary bulkheads, located
where resulting construction joints will least impair the strength of the structure. Location of
construction joints shall be as shown on the drawings or as approved by Structural Engineer.
The rate of rise in walls shall not be less than 2 feet per hour.
1. Consolidation: Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and worked to all points with solid
continuous contact to forms and reinforcement to eliminate air pockets and
honeycombing. Power vibrators of approved type shall be used immediately following
pour. Spading by hand, hammering of forms or other combination of methods will be
allowed only where permitted by Structural Engineer. In no case shall vibrators be placed
against reinforcing steel or used for extensive shifting of deposited fresh concrete. Provide
and maintain standby vibrators, ready for immediate use.
2. Hot Weather Concreting: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, perform all work in
accordance with ACI 305 when air temperature rises above 75 degrees F and the
following:
a. Mixing Water: Keep water temperature as low as necessary to provide for the
required concrete temperature at time of placing. Ice may be required to provide for
the design temperature.
Aggregate: Keep aggregate piles continuously moist by sprinkling with water.
Temperature of Concrete: The temperature of the concrete mix at the time it is being
placed in the forms shall not exceed 90 degrees F per ACI 301. The method
employed to provide this temperature shall in no way alter or endanger the design mix
or the design strength required.
Dampen subgrade and formwork before placing concrete. Remove all excess water
before placing concrete. Keep concrete continuously wet when air temperature
exceeds 85 degrees F for a minimum of 48 hours after placing concrete. For slab on
grade construction, see Section 3.1.E.
Protection: Minimize evaporation from concrete in place by providing shade and
windbreaks. Maintain such protection in place for 14 days minimum.
3. Cold Weather Concreting: Follow recommended ACI 306 procedures when average of the
highest and lowest air temperature falls below 40 degrees F for more than three
consecutive days, as approved by Architect. Concrete placed in these temperatures shall
have a minimum temperature based on dimensions of concrete sections placed as shown
in ACI 301. No chemicals or salts shall be used to prevent freezing and no accelerating
agents shall be used without prior approval from Architect.
D. Construction Joints: Install only as indicated and noted on Drawings. Joints not indicated on
Drawings shall be so located, when approved, as to least impair strength of structure, and
shall conform to typical details. Construction joints shall have level tops, vertical sides.
Horizontal construction joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened by removing entire
surface film and exposing clean aggregate solidly embedded in mortar matrix. Joints between
concrete and masonry shall be considered construction joints. Vertical construction joints
need not be roughened. See Drawings for doweling and required keys.
1. Roughen construction joints by any of following methods:
a. By sandblasting joint.
b. By thoroughly washing joint, using a high pressure hose, after concrete has taken
initial set. Washing shall be done not less than 2 hours nor more than 4 hours after
concrete has been poured, depending upon setting time.
c. By chipping and wire brushing.
2. All decisions pertaining to adequacy of construction joint surfaces and to compliance with
requirements pertaining to construction joints shall be reviewed with the Structural
Engineer.
3. Just before starting new pour, horizontal and vertical joint surfaces shall be dampened
(but not saturated).
4. Before placing regular concrete mix, horizontal construction joint surfaces shall be
covered with a layer of mortar composed of cement and fine aggregate of same
proportions as that used in prescribed mix, but omitting coarse aggregate.
5. For slabs, construction joints shall be in locations shown on plan. If not shown, locate at
intervals not exceeding 150 feet in each direction. Refer to drawings for proper details for
reinforcing at construction joints.
E. Concrete Slabs on Grade:

1. Exterior and interior concrete slabs on grade shall be poured as required under this
Section. Base shall be accurately leveled and compacted prior to placing of concrete.
2. Typically, interior slabs on grade shall be poured over a minimum of four (4 inch) inches of
compacted crushed rock, unless otherwise indicated, over a vapor retarder.
3. Protect slab on grade subbase from moisture prior to placing concrete. Avoid wetting rock
layer to allow adequate concrete curing and avoid future vapor transmission. If the
subbase has been wet excessively, verify that water has been eliminated prior to
placement of concrete.
4. Vapor Retarder installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers instructions and
ASTM E 1643-98.
a. Unroll Vapor Retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the
pour.
b. Lap Vapor Retarder over footings and seal to foundation walls.
c. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with specified tape.
d. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturers instructions.
e. No penetration of the Vapor Retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and
permanent utilities.
f. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of Vapor Retarder, overlapping
damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape.
F. Control Jointing - Slabs on Grade:

1. Joints shall be in locations indicated on Drawings, or as directed by Architect.
2. Joints in interior slabs shall be made by one of following methods:
a. By use of construction joints laid out in checkerboard pattern; pour and allow alternate
slabs to set; fill out balance of checkerboard pattern with second pour.
b. By use of dummy groove joints at least 1/4 depth of slab, and at least 1/8 inch wide.
These joints may be sawcut as soon as wet concrete can support the weight of the
equipment and operator. Delaying sawcutting past this point will make jointing
ineffective.
3. Control jointing in exterior paving slabs shall be laid out in a checkerboard pattern; pour
as described above, but with joint edges tooled to provide a uniform joint at least 3/8 inch
in depth.
4. Slab reinforcing need not be terminated at control joints.
5. Construction and expansion joints shall be counted as control joints.
G. Expansion Joints :
1. Unless otherwise indicated, use 3/8 inch thick expansion joint filler. See Section 2.1 H
2. Joints in interior slabs on grade shall be only in locations indicated.
3. Joints in exterior slabs on grade shall be installed at each side of structures, at curb
transitions opposite apron joints, at ends of curb returns, at back of curb when adjacent to
sidewalk, and at uniformly spaced intervals not exceeding 20 feet.
4. Edges of concrete at joints shall be edger finished to approximately 3/8 inch radius.
5. Interrupt reinforcing at all expansion joints.
H. Score markings on exterior slabs on grade shall be located as indicated. Where not indicated,
mark slabs into rectangles of not less than 12 square feet nor more than 20 square feet using
a scoring tool which will leave edges of score markings rounded.
3.2 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Curing: Exposed surfaces of all concrete used in structure shall be maintained in a moist
condition for at least 7 days after placing. The following final curing processes shall normally
be considered to accomplish this. Concrete shall be maintained at not less than 50 degrees F
nor more than 100 degrees F for a period of 72 hours after being deposited.
1. Flatwork to be exposed, stained, or painted shall have curing process submitted and
approved by the architect prior to construction.
2. Initial Curing Process - Flat Work:
a. Mist Spraying: As soon as troweling of concrete surfaces is completed, exposed
concrete shall be sprayed continuously with a special atomizer spray nozzle, capable
of producing a fine mist. Spraying shall be done without any dripping of water from
nozzle. Amount of spraying shall be such as to maintain surface of concrete moist
without any water accumulating on surface. Maintain spraying for a minimum of 12
hours, or until such time as hereinafter described curing process is applied. Mist
spraying will not normally be required when the ambient air temperature is below 90
degrees F.
3. Final Curing Process - Flatwork: Except as noted, use any of following:
a. Water Curing: Concrete shall be kept wet by mechanical sprinklers or by any other
approved method which will keep surfaces continuously wet.
b. Saturated Burlap Curing: Finished surfaces shall be covered with a minimum of two
layers of heavy burlap which shall be kept saturated during the curing period.
c. Curing Compounds: Membrane curing compounds of chlorinated rubber or resin type
conforming to ASTM C309 may be used only if specifically approved by Architect.
Use of membrane curing compound will not be permitted on surfaces to be painted, or
to receive ceramic tile, membrane water-proofing or hardeners and sealers.
Membrane curing compound may be used in areas to receive resilient floor tile,
provided it is wax-free, compatible with adhesive used and approved by adhesive
manufacturer. Agitate curing compounds thoroughly by mechanical means
continuously during use and spray or brush uniformly in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Apply immediately following final finishing
operation. All curing compounds shall conform to State of California Air Resources
Board VOC Regulations.
d. Waterproof paper conforming to ASTM C 171, or opaque polyethylene film, may be
used. Concrete shall be covered immediately following final finishing operation.
Anchor paper or film securely and seal all edges in such a manner as to prevent
moisture escaping from concrete.
4. Curing Process - Formed Surfaces: Forms heated by sun shall be kept moist during
curing period. If forms are to be removed during curing period, curing as described for
flatwork shall be commenced immediately.
B. Refer to Drawings for areas of concrete slab not to receive curing compounds or hardening
compounds. Where concrete floors are to receive heavy duty coatings, waterproof coatings
and the like, verify with coating installer the type of finish required for specified coating.
C. Protection: Contractor shall be responsible for protection of finished concrete against injury by
rain, cold, vibration, animal tracks, marking by visitors, vandalism, etc.
D. Provide additional curing agents or compounds, not necessarily listed herein, but as
recommended and or required for use with shake type hardeners or other special coatings
and coverings by their manufacturers for a complete and proper installation.
3.3 FINISHES
A. Formed Surfaces:
1. Rough Form Finish: Surfaces shall be reasonably true to line and plane with no specified
requirements for selected facing materials. Tie holes and defects shall be patched and
fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height shall be rubbed down with wooden blocks. Fins and
other rough spots at surfaces to receive membrane waterproofing shall be completely
removed and the surfaces rubbed smooth. Otherwise, surfaces shall be left with the
texture imparted by forms.
a. Rough finish shall be used for the following areas:
1) Below grade and unexposed surfaces.
2.. Smooth Plywood Form Finish: Finish shall be true to line and plane. Tie holes and defects
shall have been patched and ground with surface fins removed. Arrangement of plywood
sheets shall be orderly, symmetrical, as large as practical and free of torn grain or worn
edges. Surface concrete shall be treated with 1 part muriatic acid, in three parts water
solution, followed immediately by a thorough rinsing with clear water. Surfaces which are
glazed, have efflorescence, or traces of form oil, curing compounds or parting compounds
shall be cleaned or treated to match other formed surfaces, except as otherwise indicated
or specified.
a. Smooth Plywood Form Finish shall be used for the following areas:
1) All surfaces above grade unless otherwise specified.
2) At Contractor's option, may also be used in lieu of rough form finish.
3. Smooth Plastic Liner Finish: Surface shall be smooth, concrete free of honeycombing, air
pockets larger than 1/8 inch in diameter, and fins.
a. This finish shall be used only where indicated on the Drawings.
B. Flatwork:
1. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, flatwork shall have an integral monolithic finish.
2. Integral Monolithic Finish: Apply as soon as freshly poured concrete slabs will bear weight
of workers. Pour slabs full thickness to finish floor elevations indicated. At proper time,
tamp surface repeatedly with a wire mesh or grid tamper in a manner to force aggregate
down below surface and to bring sufficient mortar to surface to provide for a smooth
coating of cement mortar over entire surface. Allow surface mortar to partially set, then
float with wooden floats and finish with one of following, as required.
a. Broom Finish: Steel trowel surface to a smooth dense surface free of lines, tool
marks, cat faces and other imperfections. After troweling, and before final set, give
surface a broom finish, brushing in direction noted on Drawings, or as directed.
Broom finish shall be used typically on exterior flatwork except as otherwise indicated
or specified and shall be "medium" texture as approved by Architect.
b. Smooth Steel Trowel Finish: Apply 2 steel trowelings to obtain hard, smooth surface.
All lips, irregularities, uneven levels, etc. shall be worked out before last troweling. All
interior flatwork shall have a smooth steel trowel finish unless specified otherwise.
3. Tolerances:
a. For tolerances not indicated, refer to ACI 117.
b. Slabs on grade Comply with FF & FL as specified by Architect, or at a minimum shall
be sufficiently even to contact a 10' long straightedge with a tolerance of 1/8 inch.
c. Concrete over metal deck Refer to Section 05 30 00 for minimum requirements.
d. Elevated slabs Comply with Architectural requirements.
e. Finished surfaces of exterior integral finished flatwork shall not vary more than 1/4
inch from a 10' long straightedge, except at grade changes.
C. Sacked Surfaces: Exposed surfaces that are unacceptable in appearance to the Architect
shall be sacked.
1. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with the referenced standards. Remove any
form release materials by stoning by hand, power grinding or other method approved by
the Architect.
2. Prepare concrete surfaces to receive sack finishing with a light sand blasting.
3. For best results, grout application and rubbing should be performed when areas to be
treated are shaded and during cool, damp weather. When work is to be performed in hot
and dry weather, a fog spray should be available for continuous use.
4. Prepare grout samples for matching of concrete surfaces for approval by the Architect.
These shall be made in the following proportions of gray cement to white cement to sand:
1:1:2, 1:2:3, and 2:1:3, etc. until the correct matching color is obtained on the test areas.
Sand should be fine enough to pass the Number 30 sieve. Mixes should be made to a
good workable consistency in a clean container and the mix with the best color chosen, or
modified if needed.
5. Provide sufficient qualities of sand and cement from the same source for the complete
work at the job site.
6. Mixing and Application:
a. Mixing of grout on the job should be timed for it to be used up within 1 to 1-1/2 hours.
b. Let the grout stand 20 to 30 minutes after mixing, and then remixed before applying.
c. Soak the concrete surface thoroughly with water at least 15 minutes before applying
grout and again just before application so that the surface is adequately wet during
the operation.
d. Apply grout with plasterer's trowel or sponge rubber float in sweeping strokes from the
bottom up. Brush or spray gun applications may be used when approved by the
Architect.
e. Work in freshly applied grout vigorously with a sponge rubber float, then let sit until
some of its plasticity is gone but not until it loses its damp appearance. At this point it
shall be rubbed with clean, dry burlap to remove the excess grout, leaving no visible
film on the surface but filling all air holes.
f. Keep the surface wet for a day after grouting and sack rubbing are completed.
7. Alternate methods of application and materials shall be subject to the approval of the
Architect.
3.4 PATCHING
A. Formed Surfaces:
1. Promptly upon removal of contact forms and after concrete surfaces have been inspected,
form ties shall be removed and all necessary patching and pointing shall be expertly done.
2. Honeycombed areas shall be removed down to sound concrete, coated with a bonding
grout or approved compound and patched using a low shrinkage high bond mortar.
Patched areas shall be cured by being kept damp for at least 5 days.
3. Tie holes shall be cleaned, dampened and filled solid with patching mortar or cement
plugs of an approved variety.
B. Slabs on Grade: After entire slab is finished, shrinkage cracks that may appear shall be
patched as follows:
1. Where slab is not exposed or where appearance is not important, cracks larger than 1/32
inch wide shall be filled with cement grout and struck off level with surface.
2. Where slab is exposed and appearance is important, unsightly cracks shall be repaired in
a manner satisfactory in appearance to Architect. If this cannot be accomplished, concrete
shall be considered defective.
3.5 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective concrete shall mean any of the following:

1. Concrete not meeting 100 percent of the specified 28 day compressive strength.
2. Concrete exhibiting rock pockets, voids, spalls, streaks, cracks, exposed reinforcing to
extent that strength, durability, or appearance is adversely affected.
3. Concrete significantly out of place, line, or level.
4. Concrete not containing the required embedded items.
B. Upon determination that concrete strength is defective:

1. Should cylinder tests fall below minimum strength specified, concrete mix for remainder of
work shall be adjusted to produce required strength. Core samples shall be taken and
tested from cast-in-place concrete where cylinders and samples indicate inferior concrete
with less than minimum specified strength.
a. Cores of hardened concrete shall be taken and tested in accordance with ASTM C 42
and C 39. Number and location of such cores shall be subject to the approval of
Architect.
b. Cost of core sampling and testing will be paid for by the Contractor.
c. 85 percent reduction in ACI 318 Section 5.6.5.4 will not justify low cylinder tests.
C. Upon determining that concrete surface is defective, Contractor may restore concrete to
acceptable condition by cutting, chipping, pointing, patching, grinding, if this can be done
without significantly altering strength of structure. Permission to patch defective areas will not
be considered a waiver of the right to require removal if patching does not, in the opinion of
the Architect, satisfactorily restore quality and appearance.
D. If core tests indicate that concrete is below the strength specified, or if patching does not
restore concrete to specified quality and appearance, the concrete shall be deemed defective,
and shall be removed and replaced without additional cost to the Owner.
E. No repair work shall begin until procedure has been reviewed by the Architect and Structural
Engineer.
3.6 SURFACE HARDENER AND SEALER
A. Seal all interior exposed flatwork with clear sealer, except surfaces receiving ceramic tile,
quarry tile, poured flooring or other special finishes specified, or as scheduled on the
Drawings.
1. Apply sealer in 2 or 3 coats, in accordance with manufacturer's directions, using the
maximum quantity recommended.
a. Concrete floors must be thoroughly cured for a minimum of 30 days and completely
dry before treatment.
b. Surfaces to be treated must be clean, free of membrane curing compounds, dust, oil,
grease and other foreign matter.
c. Upon completion, concrete surfaces shall be clean and without discoloration or traces
of excess hardener left on the surface.
B. Apply sprayable hardener/sealer at locations as scheduled or as indicated on the Drawings.
Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's favorably reviewed application instructions and
recommendations.
3.7 GROUTING
A. Prepare and place grout materials at locations as indicated on the Drawings in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions.
B. Pack grout materials solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates as indicated and to
ensure no voids.
3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove all debris, excess materials, tools and equipment resulting from or used in this
operation at completion of this work.
SECTION 03 54 13
GYPSUM CEMENT BASED UNDERLAYMENT
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Preparation of floor surface- under all flooring materials throughout the Library.
1.1.2. Self-leveling gypsum cement based underlayment.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ACI 302.1R, Floor Construction.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.1. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.3.2. Product Data
1.3.2.1. Submit complete list of proposed materials, including manufacturers

recommendations for specific application and equipment.
1.3.2.2. Submit manufacturers written certification of suitability of specified

underlayment for the intended use and finish flooring.
1.3.2.3. Submit written certification that underlayment is free of asbestos

containing materials, in any form.
1.4.1. Provide written certification contractor has installed specified product in similar
applications within the past 2 years.
1.5. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1. Comply with applicable air resources requirements in preparing substrate and installing
work of this section.
1.5.2. Comply with requirements of Title 19, CCR.
1.6. PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1.6.1. Maintain proper temperature and curing environment as necessary for underlayment
to achieve designated strengths within specified time period.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama GYPSUMCEMENTUNDERLAYMENT
JKA#15100 0354131
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. SELF LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
2.1.1. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Ardex are

indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
Architect will consider requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01 25
00.
2.1.2. Type: Self Leveling, portland cement, fluid applied.
2.1.3. Series: K-15.
2.1.4. Characteristics:
2.1.4.1. Cement Content: 80% portland cement content of total binder.
2.1.4.2. Compressive Strength: 4100 psi at 28 days, 2300 psi at 16 hours, per
ASTM C 109 modified.
2.1.4.3. Final Set: Final set achieved within 2 hours per ASTM C 191 at 70 degrees
F.
2.1.5. Accessory Materials:
2.1.5.1. Admixtures: Provide manufacturers recommended admixture suitable for

substrate.
2.1.5.2. Primer: Provide manufacturers recommended primer suitable for

substrate.
2.1.5.3. Crack Repair Material: Provide manufacturers recommended filler suitable

for substrate, including use of epoxy fillers.
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work.
properly commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0354132
3.1.1.2.1. Verify surfaces are in suitable condition to begin
preparation and installation of underlayment.
3.1.1.2.2. Evaluate existing moisture condition of substrate per

manufacturers recommended procedures. Verify existing
moisture levels are suitable for installation of
underlayment.
3.2. PROTECTION
3.2.1. Protect existing materials and surfaces.
3.3. PREPARATION
3.3.1. Evaluate existing floor surface. Prepare surface and apply underlayment to all floor
surfaces exhibiting the following characteristics:
3.3.1.1. Cracks, gouges or holes exceeding 1/16 inch in any dimension.
3.3.1.2. Cracks with adjacent surfaces exceeding 1/16 inch in height.
3.3.1.3. All expansion, weakened plane or construction joints.
3.3.1.4. All surfaces exhibiting rough or abraded texture exceeding 1/16 inch
amplitude.
3.3.1.5. All surfaces with slope exceeding 3/16 inch in 10 feet, or 1/8 inch in 5 feet,
measured using a leveled straight edge, and after grinding of ridges and
high points as specified in 3.3.2.
3.3.2. The reference floor elevation datum is defined by the exterior thresholds elevation.
Remove all high spots and ridges above this elevation by grinding or other approved
means.
3.3.2.1. For purpose of this section, high spots are defined as slab portions with
slope exceeding 3/16 inch in 10 feet, or 1/8 inch in 5 feet, measured using
a leveled straight edge.
3.3.3. Prepare existing concrete substrate as recommended by manufacturer, including

mechanical shot-blasting or equivalent.
3.3.4. Acid etching is not acceptable.
3.3.5. Prepare existing cracks in substrate as recommended by manufacturer.
3.4. INSTALLATION
3.4.1. Apply primer as recommended by manufacturer. Allow to dry before proceeding with
installation of underlayment.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0354133
3.4.2. Mix underlayment in proportions as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and
installation equipment.
3.4.3. Maintain proper water content during mixing and on-going placement.
3.4.4. Place underlayment in thickness as shown on drawings, and as necessary to achieve

tolerances specified in Article 3.5 below.
3.4.5. Smooth and touch up surface. Feather edge all transitions.
3.5. TOLERANCES
3.5.1. Install surface in compliance with the following tolerances:
3.5.1.1. Flat: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, per ACI 302-88.
3.6. PROTECTION
3.6.1. Protect as necessary until surface is ready to receive floor finish.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0354134
SECTION 04 05 00
MORTAR AND GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The requirements of Division 1 apply to all Work of this Section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Provide all materials, labor and accessories as required and specified for complete mortar and
grout installation in masonry walls.
1.3 RELATED WORK (See also Table of Contents):
A. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.
B. Concrete Unit Masonry: Section 04 22 00.
C. Clay Unit Masonry: Section 04 21 00.
D. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03 21 00.
A. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted)

1. ASTM C144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
2. ASTM C150, Portland Cement.
3. ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes
4. ASTM C270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
5. ASTM C404, Aggregates for Grout
6. ASTM C476, Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry
7. ASTM C1019, Method of Sampling and Testing Grout
8. CBC Section 2103
9. 2013 California Building (CBC)
10. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC)
B. Tests and Inspections:

Compliance with the 2013 CBC requirements and in collaboration with Testing
Laboratory, Design team, contractor, owner and submitted for review by the agency in
charge of building enforcement. Requirements below are minimum requirements;
additional requirements may be required in final testing program.
2. All tests and inspections herein are to be performed by an independent testing laboratory
approved by the building official.
3. Mortar and Grout Tests: If mortar and grout tests are indicated as required on the
Structural drawings, at the beginning of Masonry Work, at least 1 test sample each of
mortar and grout shall be taken on 3 successive working days, then once per week with at
least one sample taken for each 5000 square feet of wall area, or fraction thereof.
a. Test specimens shall be made in accordance with ASTM C1019 for grout and ASTM
C780 for mortar.
b. Test specimens shall be continuously stored in moist air until tested.
c. Mortar shall show a compressive strength of not less than 1800 psi at 28 days. Grout
shall show a compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi at 28 days.
MORTAR AND GROUT 04 05 00 - 1

4. If masonry placement and grouting inspection is indicated as required on the Structural
Drawings, a special inspector shall be employed per CBC Section 1704 during the
placement of all units, placement of all reinforcing steel, during all grouting operations and
during taking of all test specimens.
C. Submittals:
1. Mix design for mortar and grout shall be submitted for review.
2. Suppliers certificates indicating materials comply with the specifications below. They shall
include but are not necessarily limited to:
a. Aggregates
b. Cement
c. Admixtures
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, low alkali; natural gray.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Quicklime: ASTM C 5.
D. Lime Putty: Made from hydrated lime or quicklime.

1. If made from quicklime, other than processed pulverized quicklime, slake lime and then
screen through a No. 16 mesh sieve. Before using, store and protect slaked and screened
lime putty for not less than 10 days.
2. Processed pulverized quicklime shall be slaked for not less than 48 hours, and shall be
cool when used.
3. Lime putty prepared from hydrated lime may be used immediately after mixing.
4. Lime putty prepared from quicklime or pulverized quicklime shall have a plasticity figure,
after slaking and screening, of not less than 200, and shall weigh not less than 83 lbs. per
cubic foot. Lime putty prepared from hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C 207, Type S.
E. Aggregate:
1. For Mortar: ASTM C144.
2. For Grout: ASTM C404.
F. Admixture: Sika Grout Aid
G. Water: Suitable for domestic consumption.
2.2 MORTAR
A. Mortar shall be Type S having a 28 day compressive strength of not less than 1800 psi, and
shall conform to CBC Section 2103.
B. Mortar shall be made with admixtures that are proportioned, added and mixed in strict
accordance with manufacturer's directions.
C. Mortar mix shall be proportioned by volume; one part portland cement, not less than 1/4 part
nor more than part lime putty, and sand totaling not less than 2-1/4 nor more than 3 times
sum of volumes of cement and lime used.
1. Total clay content shall not exceed 2% of sand content or 6% of cement content.
2.3 GROUT

A. Grout shall have a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi. Proportion by
volume, and with sufficient water to produce consistency for pouring without segregation so
that grout will flow into masonry joints. Grout shall conform to CBC Section 2103.
B. Fine Grout: 1 part portland cement, to which may be added not more than 1/10 part lime putty,
and 3 parts sand.
1. Fine grout shall be used for all grout spaces less than 3" wide.
C. Coarse Grout: 1 part portland cement, to which may be added not more than 1/10 part lime
putty, 3 parts sand and not less than 1 part nor more than 2 parts pea gravel (3/8 maximum
aggregate size).
1. Coarse grout shall be used in grout spaces 3" wide or more.
D. Add Sika Grout Aid admixture to grout at the rate of 1 pound per 100 pounds cementititous
material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MIXING MORTAR AND GROUT
A. Accurately measure materials in suitably calibrated devices; shovel measurements are not
acceptable. Each 94lb. sack of portland cement will be considered as 1 cubic foot.
B. Place sand, cement and water in mixer in that order and mix for at least 2 minutes; then add
lime putty and continue mixing as long as necessary to secure a uniform mass, but in no case
less than 10 minutes.
C. Use mixers of at least 1 sack capacity; batches requiring fractional sacks will not be permitted
unless cement is weighed for each batch.
3.2 GROUTING PROCEDURES
A. Specified under Sections 04 22 00 and 04 21 00.
3.3 RETEMPERING
A. When necessary to retemper mortar, add water and remix; retempering by dashing water over
mortar will not be permitted.
B. Any mortar which is unused within 30 minutes after initial mixing and any mortar that has
begun to set shall not be used.
3.4 DEFECTIVE MORTAR OR GROUT
A. Should the strength of mortar or grout fall below that specified, remainder of Work shall be
adjusted to reach required strength. Work in place representing inferior grout and mortar and
indicating a strength less than the minimum specified shall be tested by taking and testing
core samples. Number and location of cores shall be determined by Structural Engineer.
B. Should compression tests of cores fail to meet required strength, masonry shall be deemed to
be defective and shall be removed and replaced at no cost to Owner.
C. Costs relative to taking and testing of core samples shall be paid by Owner and will be
deducted from Contract Amount. Cost of patching core holes shall be borne by Contractor.

SECTION 04 22 00
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
A The requirements of Division 1 apply to all Work of this Section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all concrete unit masonry, reinforcement, and all required accessories and
materials as shown on the Drawings and specified here.
1. Cooperate with other trades for embedded items, furnished under those sections and
installed here.
2. Supervise setting of dowels for masonry furnished and installed under Section 03 21 00,
Reinforcing Steel.
1.3 RELATED WORK (See also Table of Contents):
A. Reinforcing Steel: Section 03 21 00.
B. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.
C. Mortar and Grout: Section 04 05 00.
E. Structural Steel: Section 05 12 00.
F. Miscellaneous Metal: Section 05 50 00.
A. Allowable Tolerances: Maximum deviation from indicated line or plane of installed concrete
masonry units shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
B. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted):

1. 2013 California Building Code (CBC)
2. ASTM C90 - Hollow and Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units
3. ASTM C140 - Sampling and Testing of Concrete Masonry Units
4. ASTM C426 - Standard Test Method for Drying Shrinkage Concrete Block.
5. CBC Section 2103.1.
6. Concrete Masonry Design Manual published for the Concrete Masonry Association of
California and Nevada, current Edition.
7. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC)
C. Submittals: Refer to Section 01 33 00 for submitting the following items:

1. Suppliers certificate indicating units comply with material standards indicated below:
2. See Section 03 21 00 for reinforcing steel submittals.

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 1

2. All tests and inspections herein are to be performed by an independent testing laboratory
approved by the Building Official.
3. If masonry tests are indicated as required on the structural drawings, three sample units
will be tested during construction for each 5,000 square feet of wall area. Test also three
sample units prior to construction.
a. Units will be tested for compressive strength on both the net and gross area per
ASTM C140.
b. Units will be tested for linear drying shrinkage per ASTM C426.
4. If masonry placement and grouting inspection is indicated as required on the structural
drawings, a special inspector shall be employed per CBC Section 1704 to inspect the
placement of all units, placement of all reinforcing steel, during all grouting operations and
during taking of all test specimens.
5. See Section 03 21 00 for reinforcing steel tests and inspections.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Scaffolding, runways and ladders required for work under this Section shall be provided by
masonry contractor, and shall be heavy trades type substantially built and in compliance with
State labor laws, safety codes and other regulatory agencies as applicable to this project.
B. Environmental Requirements: Install concrete unit masonry when temperature in area

surrounding work is 40 F or above. Maintain temperature of work above 40 F for at least 48
hours after installation. Grout shall not be placed when air temperatures fall below 20 F.
C. Store masonry units off the ground in a dry location, covered and protected from absorbing
moisture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS
A. Masonry units shall be hollow load bearing masonry units conforming to ASTM C90 and CBC
Section 2103.1.
1. Weight: Light weight.
2. Maximum lineal shrinkage from saturated to oven dry condition of not more than 0.065
percent.
3. Twenty-eight day compressive strength of 1000 psi on gross area and 1900 psi on net
area.
4. Moisture controlled units.
B. Unit Type
1. 8" wide by 8" high x 16" long unless specified otherwise.
C. Provide bond beam units, open end units and other special units as indicated. Use open end
units at cells containing vertical reinforcement wherever possible.
2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT
A. Specified under Section 04 05 00.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 40 or 60, as indicated in Section 03 21 00, deformed
bars.
1. Tie Wire: Black annealed steel wire not lighter than 16 gage.

B. Provide spacers to firmly hold reinforcement in place.
C. Anchor Bolts: All anchor bolts cast in masonry shall be headed bolts with cut threads
conforming to ASTM A307 or ASTM A36 or ASTM A572 gr.50 as indicated on drawings.
D. Expansion Anchors: All expansion bolts installed in masonry shall be Hilti Kwik Bolt 3 as
manufactured by Hilti Inc. See Structural Drawings for installation requirements and tension
testing requirements as applicable. See Drawings for special head requirements as needed.
Substitution of other brands or anchors shall proceed only after written approval from the
Structural Engineer and the Building Official as been obtained.
2.4 JOINTS
A. All joints shall be 3/8 thick joints for concrete block, Tool exposed interior and exterior joints
and concealed exterior joints to produce a dense slightly concave surface that is well bonded
to unit at edges. Tool joints behind room base, switches, and outlet plates to produce a
smooth dense joint flush with the face of adjacent masonry units, where occurring on the job.
Cut joints flush on concealed interior surfaces and surfaces to be plastered.
2.5 SEALER
A. Contractor shall provide and install minimum two coats, Thoroseal masonry sealer at all CMU
walls. Thoroseal product shall meet all state vapor requirements. Sealer shall be clear and
non-gloss product.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive masonry and verify following:

1. That foundation surface is level to permit bed joint with range of 1/4 to 3/4 inch.
2. That edge is true to line to permit projection of masonry to less than 1/4-inch.
3. That projecting dowels are free from loose scale, dirt, concrete, or other bond-inhibiting
substances and properly located.
B. Do not begin work before unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean concrete surfaces to receive masonry. Remove latence or other foreign material lodged
in surfaces by sandblasting or other means as required. Joints between concrete and
masonry shall be considered construction joints. See Concrete specifications.
B. Ensure masonry units are clean and free from dust, dirt, or other foreign materials before
laying.
C. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbances.
D. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until masonry
has set to provide permanent bracing.
3.3 COURSING
A. Erect masonry in accordance with CBC Section 2104.1.2.
B. Place masonry to lines and levels indicated to the following tolerances:

1. Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32-inch max.
2. Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4-inch in 10 feet.
3. Variation from Plumb: 1/4-inch.
4. Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8-inch in 3 feet; 1/4-inch in 10 feet; -inch maximum.
5. Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8-inch in 3 feet.
C. Bond: Unless noted otherwise in Drawings, lay concrete masonry units in running bond with
vertical joints located over score of unit in course below (and vice versa).
D. Maintain masonry courses to uniform width. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of
uniform thickness.
E. Preserve the vertical continuity of cells in concrete unit masonry. The minimum clear
horizontal dimensions of vertical cores shall be 3 x 3 inches for 8-inch wide block.
3.4 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Do not install cracked, broken or chipped masonry units.
B. Lay only dry concrete masonry units.
C. Lay masonry in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. Buttering corners of joints,
and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
1. Block Cap: Lay with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical joints.
2. Install grout cap where and as indicated.
D. Fully bond intersections and external and internal corners.
E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be
made, remove mortar and replace.
F. Remove excess mortar.
G. Perform job-site cutting with proper tools to provide straight unchipped edges. Take care to
prevent breaking masonry unit corners or edges.
H. Step back unfinished work for joining with new work. Do not use toothing.
3.5 JOINTS
A. Horizontal and vertical joints at masonry units shall be 3/8-inch wide and as follows:
1. Point joint tight in unpurged masonry below ground.
2. All end joints shall be fully filled with mortar and joints squeezed in bed joints shall be held
back approximately -inch from cell to provide positive bond with grout.
3. Joints shall be struck flush at all areas to receive plaster finish.
3.6 MASONRY REINFORCEMENT
A. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315, to a tolerance of +/- -inch from specified
location.
B. Reinforcing steel shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material.
Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the plans shall not be used. Heating of bars for
bending will not be permitted.

1. Bars shall conform accurately to the sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown on
drawings and with hooks and beds made as detailed. Bars shall be placed as indicated on
the drawings and centered on grout space.
2. At the time grout is place around it, reinforcing steel shall be clean of mill scale or other
coatings that will destroy or reduce bond.
3. All vertical reinforcing steel shall be installed in one piece, full height of wall, and braced
throughout its height in a manner that will retain the steel in proper position and provide
the proper clearance.
C. Reinforcing steel shall be secured to all foundation dowels and held in place at spacings not
to exceed 192 bar diameters.
3.7 GROUTING
A. General Requirements:
1. All cells shall be grouted solid.
2. Use low lift or high lift grouting at Contractor's option.
3. Use grout pump, hopper or bucket to place grout.
4. Place grout in final position within 1-1/2 hours after introduction of mixing water.
5. Place grout and rod with a 3/4-inch flexible cable vibrator sufficiently to case it to flow into
all voids between the cells and around the reinforcing steel. Slushing with mortar will not
be permitted.
6. Stop grout approximately 1 inches below top of last course; except at top course bring
grout to top of wall.
B. Low Lift Grouting:

1. Do not lay units higher than 48 inches before grouting.
2. If mortar has been allowed to set prior to grouting, remove all fins protruding more than
-inch into grout space.
3. Consolidate each lift twice. Once while placing grout and once more after initial absorption
of water but before set.
C. High Lift Grouting:

1. Lay up walls, subject to maximum height limitations of Masonry Standards Joint
Committee, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures Table 1.16.1.
2. Provide clean out holes at the bottom of every pour in cells containing vertical
reinforcement. Construct clean out courses with open-bottom bond beam units inverted to
permit cleaning of all cells by flushing. Cleanouts shall be not less than 3x4inch openings
cut from one face shell. Do not plug clean out holes until masonry work, reinforcement,
and final cleaning of the grout spaces have been completed and inspected.
3. Clean mortar droppings from the bottom of the grout space and from reinforcing steel.
Remove mortar fins protruding more than -inch into the grout space by dislodging the
projections with a rod or stick as the work progresses or by washing the grout space at
least twice a day during erection using a high pressure stream of water.
4. Do not place grout in hollow unit masonry until mortar joints have set for at least 72 hours
and clean out plugs have cured 48 hours.
5. Place grout in lifts not to exceed 4 feet in height, with a waiting period between lifts,
dependent on weather and absorption rate of the masonry, in order to place the
succeeding lift after the preceding lift becomes plastic but prior to initial set. The first lift
shall be consolidated using mechanical vibrators. After the required waiting period, place
the second lift and consolidate with the vibrator, reconsolidating the lift below to a depth of
12 to 18 inches. Repeat the waiting, placing and consolidating process until the top of the
grout pour is reached. Reconsolidate the top lift after the required waiting period. The
high-lift grouting of any section of wall between lateral flow barriers shall be completed to
the top of a pour in one working day unless a new series of clean out holes is established
and the resulting horizontal construction joint cleaned.

3.8 WEATHER PROVISIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Cold Weather Construction to be in accordance with CBC section 2104.3.
B. Hot Weather Construction to be in accordance with CBC section 2104.4
3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. See drawings for type and location of expansion joints.
3.10 BOND BEAMS
A. Bond beams shall be located where shown and detailed on the drawings, and shall be
reinforced as indicated and as herein after specified.
3.11 BUILT-IN WORK
A. Miscellaneous Embedded Items: All items indicated to be embedded in masonry shall be

carefully located and anchored to prevent movement during grouting operations. Avoid cutting
and patching.
1. Install all anchor bolts and anchors furnished under other sections for wood nailers,
ledgers, etc.
3.12 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or
strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.13 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise
damage, or if units do not match adjoining units.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes and completely fill with
mortar.
C. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set, at each day's work and after final pointing.
D. Leave work and surrounding surface clean and free of mortar spots and droppings.
E. Cleaning: Upon completion of masonry installation, repair all holes. Defective joints shall be
cut out and rejointed. Exposed masonry surfaces shall be cleaned free of mortar, green stain
and effloresence.
3.14 SEALER
A. Contractor shall install sealer as directed by the manufacturer. Coverage and installation rates
shall be as per manufacturers recommendations. Install sealer in minimum two coats at the
rates required.
3.15 DEFECTIVE MASONRY
A. Materials or workmanship not conforming to appearance or strength specified, will be deemed

defective and shall be removed and replaced at no cost to Owner.

B. Defective mortar and grout, as defined under Section 04 05 00; Mortar and Grout shall
constitute defective masonry.

SECTION 05 12 00
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Requirements of Division 1 apply to all Work of this Section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all structural steel as shown and specified including, but not necessarily
limited to the following:
1. Prime coat painting and touch up.
2. All cast-in-place anchor bolts, nuts, plates, etc.
3. 10 gauge steel or 3/4 inch plywood templates for column anchor bolts.
A. Metal Decking: Section 05 30 00.
B. Metal Fabrications: Section 05 50 00.
C. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.
D. Welding of Moment Resisting Frames: Section 05 12 24.
E. Metal Stairs: Section 05 50 10.
A. General:
1. Comply with the referenced ASTM standards for materials.
2. Perform all welding only with AWS certified welders.
3. Verification of accuracy:
a. Engage and pay for a registered civil engineer or licensed land surveyor to check the
alignment, plumbness, elevation, and overall accuracy of the erected framing at
appropriate stages during construction and at completion of erection. Prior to erection,
a survey shall be made of the as-built locations of all anchor rods and other
embedded items associated with the attachment of structural steel. The party
providing the survey shall submit written verification that the entire installation is in
accordance with the contract documents and meets the allowable erection tolerances
as set forth in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
b. Columns shall be verified at each lift. Column shim details and procedures shall be
submitted for review.
4. Paint:
a. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by
same manufacturer as finish coats. Use thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and
use within recommend limits.
b. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which prime paints are to be provided
to ensure compatibility of coatings system for various substrates. Upon request,
furnish information or characteristics of finish materials to be used.
c. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with applicable rules and regulations
of governing agencies for air quality control.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 1
B. Except where other requirements are specified, comply with the following standards by
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) and American Welding Association (AWS):
1. AISC 360-10 "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings".
2. AISC 303-10 "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".
3. AISC 341-10 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings
4. AISC 358-10 Prequalified Connections for Special and Intermediate Steel Moment
Frames for Seismic Applications
5. RCSC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts".

6. AISC 303-10 Section 10, Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel, Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
7. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" latest edition
8. AWS D1.8 Structural Welding Code Seismic Supplement latest edition
9. ASTM A6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet
Piling and Bars for Structural Use".
10. SSPC-Vis 1 Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Structures
11. SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning
12. SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning
13. SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning
14. SSPC-PA2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges

1. Product Data: Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with
specifications (include specified standards). Include certified copies of mill reports
covering chemical and physical properties of each type of structural steel.
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Shop drawings shall include complete details and schedules for fabrication and
assembly of structural steel members, procedures, and diagrams.
b. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate
welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
c. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and
other anchorages to be installed by others.
d. Dimensions required to locate structural steel for manufactured items such as
mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, dock levelers, etc., shall be coordinated
and provided by the General Contractor. General Contractor shall also coordinate and
provide dimensions to locate structural steel for window washing supports such as
davits, tie-backs, etc.
3. Procedures:
a. Provide weld procedures for both prequalified welds and special welds to be
submitted to the Owner's Testing Laboratory and the Architect.
b. Provide installation procedure and inspection for direct tension indicator washers
detailed in supplemental specifications provided by the manufacturer for approval.
c. Procedures shall be submitted for both shop and field welds.

2. Testing Laboratory:
a. An inspection and testing laboratory will be selected by the Owner for testing and
inspection as required by the Contract Documents. The selected laboratory shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM E329 (Recommended Practice for Inspection
and Testing Agencies used in Construction). Documentary evidence of such
conformance shall be submitted to the Owner and the governing agency.
b. All materials, work, methods and equipment shall be subject to inspection at the mill,
fabricating plant and at the building site. Material or workmanship not complying fully
with the Contract Documents will not be accepted. The Contractor shall give the
Testing Laboratory reasonable notice when ready for inspection and shall supply
samples and test pieces and all facilities for inspection without extra charge. The
Owner will assume the expense of making the tests and inspection except as
otherwise specified in Division 1.
3. Cost of Testing and Inspection: Costs of testing and inspection of structural steel, except
as specified hereunder and in Division 1, will be paid for by the Owner.
a. All transportation costs and per diem living costs for inspection at fabricators' plant
further than 75 miles from the job site will be back-charged to the Contractor.
b. It is assumed that all fabrication will take place in one shop location only. All additional
inspection costs will be back-charged to the Contractor.
c. All mill tests and costs of re-test of plain materials shall be at the expense of the
Contractor.
d. Costs of tests required due to Contractor's failure to provide steel identifiable in
accordance with the indicated ASTM designation shall be at the expense of the
Contractor.
4. Structural Steel Testing and Inspection:
a. Structural Steel: If structural steel tests are indicated as required on the structural
drawings, one tension and one bend test shall be made for each size of structural
shape, plate and for each tube and pipe size. Tests to be made in accordance with
requirements of appropriate ASTM designations.
b. If structural steel tests are not indicated as required on the structural drawings, then
for shapes, plates, bars, pipe and tubing, manufacturer's certified mill test reports and
analysis for each heat will be acceptable for steel identifiable in accordance with
indicated ASTM designation. Mill test reports shall indicate the physical and chemical
properties of all structural steel used. Correlate individual heat numbers with each
specified structural section.
c. Unidentifiable Steel:
1) For Fy less than or equal to 36.0 ksi : Provide one tension and elongation test and
one bend for each 5 tons or fraction thereof for each size.
2) For Fy greater than 36.0 ksi : Provide one tension and elongation test and one
bend or flattening for each piece.
d. Costs of retests and additional testing required by the use of unidentifiable steels shall
be the Contractor's responsibility. Additional costs of testing incurred by the Owner
shall be deducted from the Contract Final Payment.
5. Expansion Anchors: Load test as indicated on drawings.
6. Welding Inspection:
a. For Moment Resisting Frame Welding inspection and testing requirements, see
specification Section 05 12 24 - Welding of Moment Resisting Frames.
b. If shop or field welding inspection is indicated on the structural drawings or required
by the applicable referenced standards, shop and field welded operations shall be
inspected in accordance with AISC 360 Section N by a qualified welding inspector
employed by the Testing Laboratory. Such inspector will be a person trained and
thoroughly experienced in inspection of welds. The inspector's ability to distinguish
between sound and unsound welding will be reliably established
c. The welding inspector will make a systematic record of all welds. This record shall
include:
1) Identification marks of welders.
2) List of defective welds.
3) Manner of correction of defects.
d. The welding inspector will check the material, equipment and procedure, as well as
the welds. He will also check the ability of the welder. He will furnish the Architect with
a report, duly verified by him that the welding which is required to be inspected is
proper, and has been done in conformity with the Contract Documents, and that he
has used all means to determine the quality of the welds.
e. All full penetration groove welds will be subject to ultrasonic testing, as per AWS
D1.1, Clause 6 "Inspection, Part "F", Ultrasonic Testing (UT) of Groove Welds. All
defective welds shall be repaired and retested with ultrasonic equipment at the
Contractor's expense.
f. Column Flanges: An area extending 6 inches above and below point where girder
flanges are attached will be inspected. Column flange edges will be inspected visually
and entire area ultrasonically for lamination, plate discontinuities, and non-metallic
inclusions.
g. When ultrasonic indications arising from the weld root can be interpreted as either a
weld defect or the backing strip itself, the Engineer will be notified. The Engineer may
require the removal of backing strip. The backing strip will be removed at the expense
of the Contractor, and if no root defect is visible the weld will be retested. If no defect
is indicated on this retest, and no significant amount of base and weld metal have
been removed, no further repair of welding is necessary. If a defect is indicated, it will
be repaired and retested at Contractor's expense.
h. The ultrasonic instrumentation will be calibrated by the technician to evaluate the
quality of the welds in accordance with AWS D1.1.
i. Other methods of inspection, for example, X-Ray, gamma ray, magnetic particle, or
dye penetrant, may be used on welds if felt necessary by the inspection laboratory,
and with the approval of the Engineer.
j. Base metal thicker than 1-1/2 inches, when subjected to through thickness weld
shrinkage strains, shall be ultrasonically inspected for discontinuities directly behind
such weld before and after joint completion.
k. End-welded studs shall be sampled, tested, and inspected per the requirements of
AWS D1.1, Clause 7 Stud Welding.
l. At the discretion of the owner's testing agency, the ultrasonic testing frequency may
be reduced but may not be less than the following:
m. Initially, all welds requiring ultrasonic testing will be tested at the rate of 100 percent in
order to establish the qualifications of each individual welder. If the reject rate is
demonstrated to be less than 5 percent of the welds tested for each welder, then the
frequency of testing for that welder may be reduced to 25 percent. If the reject rate
increases to 5 percent or more, 100 percent testing will be re-established until the rate
is reduced to less than 5 percent. The percentage of rejects will be calculated for
each welder independently.
n. A sampling of a least 40 completed welds will be made for such reduction evaluation.
Reject rate is defined as the number of welds containing rejectable defects divided by
the number of welds completed. For evaluating the reject rate of continuous welds
over 3 ft in length where the effective throat is 1 or less, each 12 inch increment or
fraction thereof shall be considered as one weld. For evaluating the reject rate of
continuous welds over 3 ft in length where the effective throat is greater than 1, each
6 inch of length or fraction thereof shall be considered one weld.
7. High Strength Bolting Tests and Inspection:
a. Furnish certified test reports for each lot of bolts in accordance with Section 9 of
ASTM A325 and A490. Install bolts under the supervision of a qualified inspector in
accordance with Section 9, Research Council "Specifications for Structural Joints
using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts".
b. If high strength bolting inspection is indicated on the structural drawings or required
by the applicable referenced standards, the testing laboratory shall provide inspection
in accordance with AISC 360 Section N.
c. While the work is in progress, the Inspector shall determine that the requirements of
this Specification are met in the work. The Inspector shall observe the calibration
procedures and shall monitor the installation of bolts to determine that all plies of
connected material have been drawn together and that the selected procedure is
properly used to tighten all bolts.
1) In addition to the requirement of the foregoing paragraph, for all connections
specified to be slip critical (SC), the Inspector shall assure that the specified
procedure was followed to achieve the pretension specified in the AISC. The
pretension shall be verified by the inspector for these bolts.
2) Bolts in connections identified as not being slip-critical nor subject to direct
tension need not be inspected for bolt tension other than to ensure that the piles
of the connected elements have been brought into snug contact.
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members
off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and
packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.
B. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to
members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
1.6 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A. Cooperate and coordinate this work with other trades for anchor bolts, and other required
inserts, templates, etc. Align this work prior to installation of other materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: Except where indicated on drawings.

1. W shapes: ASTM A572-50 or ASTM A992-50 unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
2. Channels and other rolled shapes: ASTM A36 unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
3. Angles, plates and bars: ASTM A36 unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
B. AISC group 4 and 5 shapes and plates greater than 2 inches thick: ASTM A36 and/or ASTM
A572 Grade 50 with supplementary requirements S91 Fine Austenitic Grain Size and S5
Charpy V-Notch Impact Test. For location of Charpy V-Notch test, see ASTM A6
Supplementary Requirement S30. Charpy V-Notch test shall be per ASTM A673, frequency P
and shall meet a minimum average value of 20 ft-lbs absorbed energy at 70o F.
C. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B.
E. Anchor Bolts: All anchor bolts cast in concrete or masonry shall be headed bolts with cut
threads conforming to ASTM F1554 grade 36, 55 (weldable per S1 Supplementary
Requirements), or 105 as indicated on drawings.
F. Machine Bolts: ASTM A307.
G. High Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Install in accordance with requirements for A325 and
A490 slip critical and snug tight conditions as indicated on drawings. Install high strength bolts
with snug tight type connections with threads included in shear plane except as otherwise
noted. Install hardened washers in conformance with AISC Specifications.
1. Bolt Specifications: Bolts shall conform to the requirements of the current edition of the
Specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials for High-Strength Bolts
for Structural Steel Joints, ASTM A325, Heat Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength, ASTM A490 as indicated on drawings.
2. Bolt Geometry: Bolt dimensions shall conform to the current requirements of the American
National Standards Institute for Heavy Hex Structural Bolts, ANSI Standard B18.2.1. The
length of bolts shall be such that the end of the bolt will be flush with or outside the face of
the nut when properly installed.
3. Nut Specifications: Nuts shall conform to the current chemical and mechanical
requirements of the American Society for Testing and Materials Standard Specification for
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts, ASTM A563, Appendix Table X1.1. Provide Grade A Heavy
Hex nuts for Grade 36 and 55 threaded rods. Provide Grade DH or ASTM A194-2H
Heavy Hex nuts for Grade 105 threaded rod.
4. Washers: Flat circular washers and square or rectangular beveled washers shall conform
to the current requirements of the American Society for Testing and Materials Standard
Specification for Hardened Steel Washers, ASTM F436. Washers for base plates shall
conform to ASTM F844 and shall be placed top and bottom of plate.
5. Tension Control Fastener System: Bolts shall conform to the requirements of the current
edition of the Specifications of the American Society for Testing and Materials for Twist
Off Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, ASTM F1852, providing
equivalent properties to ASTM A325 or A490 as indicated on drawings.
H. Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A108 Grade 1015 or 1020 Cold-finished carbon
steel with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications.
1. Tensile strength, 60,000 psi.
2. Elongation in 2 inches, 20 percent
3. Reduction of area, 50 percent.
I. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections per ASTM A563, Appendix Table X1.1.
J. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code, E70 Series minimum. Fabricator to select
proper electrodes according to weld procedures as submitted.
K. Shop Primer See Section 3.4, Painting and Cleaning
L. Powder Driven Fasteners: Tempered steel pins with special corrosive resistant plating or
coating. Pins shall have guide washers to accurately control penetration. Fastening shall be
accomplished by low-velocity piston-driven power activated tool. Pins and tool shall be as
manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems.
M. Expansion Bolts: Hilti Fastening Systems Kwik-Bolt Concrete Expansion Anchors to

concrete; Ramset Dynabolt Sleeve Anchors to masonry or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assembly structural assemblies in shop to
greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC
Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members
where indicated to provide the flattest floor possible. The contractor shall coordinate member
tolerances with finishes.
Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence
which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.
Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of
finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of
markings, burrs, and other defects.
B. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicted. Bolt field connections, except where
welded connections or other connections are indicated.
C. Unless noted otherwise, make holes 1/16 inches larger than the nominal bolt diameter.
D. Welding, Shop and Field: Weld by shielded arc method, submerged arc method, flux cored
arc method, or other method approved by AWS. Perform welding in accordance with AWS
Code. All welders, both manual and automatic, shall be certified in accordance with AWS
"Standard Qualification Procedure" for the Work to be performed. See paragraph "welding"
herein, for detailed requirements. If sizes of fillet welds are not shown on drawings, use AWS
minimum weld size but not less than 3/16 inch fillet welds.
E. Bolt Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel
framing.
Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to receive
other work.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces and remove all burrs. Do not flame
cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
F. AISC Group 4 and 5 shapes and built up members shall meet the requirements for joints in
AISC Sections J1.5, J1.6, J2.7 and M2.2.
G. High Strength Bolts:

1. Installation and Tightening:
a. Handling and Storage of Fasteners: Fasteners shall be protected from dirt and
moisture at the job site. Only as many fasteners as are anticipated to be installed and
tightened during a work shift shall be taken from protected storage. Fasteners not
used shall be returned to protected storage at the end of the shift. Fasteners shall not
be cleaned of lubricant that is present in as-delivered condition.
b. Tension Calibrator: A tension measuring device shall be required at all job sites where
bolts in slip-critical joints are being installed and tightened. The tension measuring
device shall be used to confirm: (1) the suitability to satisfy the requirements of AISC
for the complete fastener assembly, including lubrication if required to be used in the
work, (2) calibration of wrenches, if applicable, and (3) the understanding and proper
use by the bolting crew of the method to be used. The frequency of confirmation
testing, the number of tests to be performed and the test procedure shall be as
specified in 1.d. below, as applicable. The accuracy of the tension measuring device
shall be confirmed through calibration by an approved testing agency at least
annually.
c. Joint Assembly and Tightening of Shear/Bearing Connections: Bolts in connections
not within the slip-critical category shall be installed in properly aligned holes, but
need only be tightened to the snug tight condition. The snug tight condition is defined
as the tightness that exists when all plies in a joint are in firm contact. This may be
attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an
ordinary spud wrench. If a slotted hole occurs in an outer ply, a flat hardened washer
or common plate washer shall be installed over the slot.
d. Joint Assembly and Tightening of Connections Requiring Full Pre-tensioning. Slip-
critical connections shall be installed in properly aligned holes and tightened by one of
the following methods.
1) Turn-of-nut Tightening: When turn-of-nut tightening is used, hardened washers
are not required except as specified in the AISC. A representative sample of not
less than three bolts and nuts of each diameter, length and grade to be used in
the work shall be checked at the start of work in a device capable of indicating
bolt tension. The test shall demonstrate that the method of estimating the snug-
tight condition and controlling turns from snug tight to be used by the bolting
crews develops a tension not less than five percent greater than the tension
required for slip-critical connections.
2) Installation of Alternate Design Bolts: A representative sample of not less
than three bolts of each diameter, length and grade shall be checked at the
job site in a device capable of indicating bolt tension. The test assembly shall
include flat hardened washers, if required in the actual connection, arranged
as in the actual connections to be tensioned. The calibration test shall
demonstrate that each bolt develops a tension not less than five percent
greater than the tension required by AISC. Manufacturer's installation
procedure shall be followed for installation of bolts in the calibration device
and in all connections. When alternate design features of the fasteners
involve an irreversible mechanism such as yield or twist-off of an element,
bolts shall be installed in all holes of the connection and initially brought to a
snug tight condition. All fasteners shall then be tightened, progressing
systematically from the most rigid part of the connection to the free edges in a
manner that will minimize relaxation of previously tightened fasteners prior to
final twist-off or yielding of the control or indicator element of the individual
fasteners. In some cases, proper tensioning of the bolts may require more
than a single cycle of systematic tightening.
e. Mark bolts that have been completely tightened with an identifying symbol.
3.2 WELDING
A. General: Quality of materials and design and fabrication of all welded connections shall
conform to AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel
for Building," "AWS Code for Welding in Building Construction," and requirements of this
section.
Location and type of all welds shall be as shown. Make no other welded splices, except those
shown on drawings, without prior approval of the architect.
B. Automatic Welding: Use electrode wire and flux for automatic and semi-automatic welding
acceptable to Structural Engineer. All methods, sequences, qualification and procedures,
including preheating, and post heating if necessary, shall be detailed in writing and submitted
to the Structural Engineer for review.
C. Qualification of Welders:
1. Structural steel welding: Manual and automatic welds for structural steel construction shall
be made only by operators who have been previous qualified by tests, as prescribed in
AWS D1.1 to perform type of work required.
2. Welders shall be checked by welding inspector. Those not doing satisfactory work may be
removed, and may be required to pass qualification tests again. All qualification testing
shall be at the Contractor's expense.
3. Only welders whose weld procedures and pre-qualification by testing that have passed
shall be considered qualified for such welds.
D. Control cooling process after weld is completed by either step down post heat or thermal
blankets as determined by procedures and prequalification.
E. Box columns and built-up members shall have ultrasonic testing before and after welding.
F. Flame cut surfaces shall be ground to remove contaminated steel layer to provide welds
proper fusion without impurities.
G. Preparation of surface: Surfaces to be welded shall be free of loose scale, slag, rust, grease,
paint, and any other foreign material.
H. Welding equipment: Welding equipment to be used in each case shall be acceptable to

welding inspector. Use equipment with suitable devices to regulate speed, and manually
adjust operating amperage and voltage. The amperage capacity shall be sufficient to
overcome line drop, and to give adequate welding heat.
I. Remove runoff tabs and grind surfaces smooth where the tabs would interfere with
fireproofing and architectural finishes.
J. End-welded studs:
1. Automatic end-welded studs: Automatically end-weld in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations in such a manner as to provide complete fusion
between the end of the stud and the plates. There shall be no porosity or evidence of lack
of fusion between the welded end of the stud and the plate. The stud shall decrease in
length during welding approximately 1/8 inch for 5/8 inch, and 3/16 inch for 3/4 inch
diameter. Stud sizes indicated on drawings represent the finish stud height.
2. Fillet-end welded studs: Studs may be welded using prequalified FCAW, GMAW, or
SMAW processes provided the requirements of the AWS D1.1 Chapter 7 Section 7.5.5
are met as well as any other pertinent requirements of D1.1.
K. Provide mill camber as shown on the construction documents within AISC tolerance. Place
mill tolerance upward for all beams specified no camber.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Structural steel erection: Comply with AISC "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and
Erection of Structural Steel for Building", latest edition.
B. Erection Sequence: Erect steel in accordance with special erection sequences where special
erection sequences are indicated on the contract documents.
C. Before and during erection, keep all structural steel clean. Ship, handle and store steel in
manner to avoid injury to members. Steel members showing evidence to rough handling or
injury will be rejected.
D. Mark each member with erection identification corresponding to mark shown on erection
drawings. Carefully plan erection of structural steel so that no cutting and removal of material
will be necessary. Do not torch burn in the field, unless specifically permitted by Engineer.
E. Provide sufficient bracing, shoring and guys to effect safe and satisfactory erection. Provide
bracing and shoring capable of holding steel work plumb and properly aligned while field
connections are being made, and until lateral force resisting elements are deemed by
Architect capable of bracing structure. Temporary bracing shall be adequate to resist lateral
forces from wind or seismic prior to the completion of the lateral resisting system.
F. Set bearing and base plates with extreme care. Bring level, to line and grade with leveling
plates or by leveling nuts and bolts. Grout solid under plates with a flowable non-shrink grout
per Section 03 30 00 prior to applying vertical load.
G. Field Assembly: Set structural framing accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align
and adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will
be in permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in
elevations and alignment.
Shimming or other adjustments not indicated on drawings shall be approved by the Engineer
prior to installation. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISC
tolerances except as noted herein. Column shimming shall be 1/4 inch.
H. All welds shall be full and clean, and conform to AISC and AWS specifications.
I. Erection Tolerances: Individual pieces shall be erected so that the deviation from plumb, level
and alignment shall not exceed 1 to 500 plus:
1. The maximum displacement of the center line of columns adjacent to elevator shafts, from
the established column line, shall not be more than 1 inch at any point.
2. In order to provide a true, flat plane for the exterior elevations, install all steel framing at
the exterior walls of the building, so that the center lines of such framing does not vary by
more than 1 inch for the length of the building. Also install each vertical member on such
grids so that its vertical center line does not vary by more than 1/2 inch from a vertical line
for each story and 1 inch for its full height.
3. All columns and beams shall adhere to Section M2.7 of the referenced "Specification for
Structural Steel for Buildings" which states that completed members shall be free of
twists, bends, and open joints. Take special care that column base plates are parallel and
perpendicular to faces of columns and that bolt holes are accurately placed.
J. Temporary Flooring:
1. Provide planking and scaffolding necessary in connection with erection of structural steel,
support of erection machinery, and construction materials. Temporary floors and use of
steel shall be as required by applicable regulatory requirements.
2. If steel decking is used as a working platform, it shall be temporarily tack-welded to
supports to extent necessary for such use in accordance with applicable regulatory
requirements. The concentrated loading from welding machines and other heavy
machinery required for steel erection shall be distributed by planking or other approved
means. Metal decking that becomes damaged as the result of being used as a working
platform shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
K. Tower Crane: The design for the support and bracing for a tower crane shall be the
responsibility of the General Contractor. The design shall be prepared by a structural engineer
licensed in the state of California. Drawings and calculations shall be stamped and signed by
the structural engineer. Concentric, torsional, and/or eccentric loading to the main structure
shall be resolved by the addition of structural steel for shear tabs, stiffeners, drag ties, bracing
struts, etc., Such items shall be designed, detailed, furnished and installed by the contractor.
3.4 PAINTING AND CLEANING
A. Prior to prime coat application, clean all loose rust, mill scale, oil, dirt, and all other materials
from all steel to be left exposed. Use hand tool, power tool, sandblasting, chemical cleaning,
and any other method necessary to provide a smooth, sound surface for painting.
B. Shop prime all steel except the following:

1. Steel encased in concrete.
2. Contact surfaces for slip-critical (sc) high strength bolts.
3. Areas within 4 inches of field welds.
4. Tops of members to receive metal decking.
5. Steel to be fireproofed.
6. Surfaces to be galvanized.
C. Use the following Type A shop painting systems on all normal environment interior steelwork:
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning.
Where jobsite exposure is expected to exceed 6 months, SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast
Cleaning is required.
2. Application: Follow coating manufacturer's printed directions.
3. Material: Type A Tnemec Company, Inc., Series V10; Sherwin Williams Steel Spec
Universal; Metal Case 94-231 Series or approved equal
4. Number of Coats: One
5. Dry Film Thickness: 2.0 mils minimum.
6. Volume Solids: 56.0 +/- 2.0% minimum
7. Generic Description: Modified Alkyd.
D. Unless noted otherwise in subsection H, use the following Type B shop painting systems on
all exterior steelwork and interior steelwork subjected to wet conditions or fumes (see
subsection H for additional requirements)
1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning
2. Application: Follow coating manufacturer's printed directions.
3. Material: Type B Tnemec 90-97 Tneme-Zinc primer or approved equal
5. Dry Film Thickness: 2.5 to 3.5 mils
6. Volume Solids: 63% +/- 2%
7. Generic Description: Zinc-Rich Urethane
E. Unless noted otherwise in subsection H, use the following finish painting systems on all
exterior steelwork and interior steel work subjected to wet conditions or fumes (see subsection
H for additional requirements):
1. Application: Follow coating manufacturers printed directions. Apply over Type B primer
system above.
2. Material: Tnemec Series 750 UVX paint or approved equal
4. Dry Film Thickness: 2.5 to 5 mils
5. Volume Solids: 72% +/- 2%
6. Generic Description: Polyfunctional Hybrid Polyurethane
F. Primers and paints shall meet all federal and state environmental and air quality requirements.
G. Apply two shop prime coats to areas which will be inaccessible after erection.
H. All exterior steelwork and all interior steelwork subjected to wet conditions or fumes, including
all welds, bolts, washers and other connection components, shall be primed and painted or
hot-dip galvanized, as specified by the Architectural finish specifications. In the absence of
Architectural finish specifications, all exterior steelwork and all interior steelwork subjected to
wet conditions and fumes, including all welds, bolts, washers and other connection
components, shall be hot-dip galvanized, conforming to the requirements set forth in ASTM
A123/A123M and ASTM A153/A153M.
I. Clean contact surfaces of high strength bolts of all burrs and material which might prevent
solid seating of the parts. Steel to receive bolts shall be primer painted except beneath the
contact area of slip-critical bolts.
J. After erection, field touch up all welded areas, high strength bolts and damaged areas. For all
steel to remain exposed, remove all blemishes, paint drips, and touch up prime coat.
3.5 HOISTING AND BRACING
A. Provide all hoisting and erecting equipment and power.
B. Provide and maintain any and all safety railings, toe boards, etc., required for the erection of
steel framing and metal decking.
C. Brace the erected frame in a manner which will assure safety and proper alignment to receive
the metal decking and until the concrete slabs have been poured and have set.
D. Erect building frame true and level. Erect columns in a manner to allow for movement due to
welding shrinkage and thermal expansion and contraction of framing. Check plumbness after
erection of each level. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection. Provide temporary
bracing where necessary to maintain frame stability and to support required loads, including
equipment and its operation.
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SECTION INCLUDE
1.1.1. Miscellaneous fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized, plated, and prime painted.
1.1.2. Access ladders.
1.1.3. Miscellaneous fabricated structural connectors and clips
1.1.4. Custom Perforated Metal Image Panels
1.2. PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
1.2.1. Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.3. REFERENCES
1.3.1. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
1.3.2. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
1.3.3. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
1.3.4. ASTM A283 Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates.
1.3.5. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.
1.3.6. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Round and Shapes.
1.3.7. ASTM A 653, Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron-Alloy Coated

(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
1.3.8. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols.
1.3.9. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
1.3.10. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.2. Product Data: Provide data on material, finishes and attachment.
1.4.3. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit criteria for preparation and application.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama METALFABRICATIONS
JKA#15100 0550001
1.4.4. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing,
anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings,
elevations, and details where applicable.
1.4.5. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net
weld lengths.
1.5.1. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have produced the specified system or products for
a period of one (1) year prior to beginning work of this section, and shall have the
capability to produce the specified products to the delivery and quantity criteria of the
project.
1.5.2. Staff:
1.5.2.1. Use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
skills required and have installed similar applications of the specified
products within one year prior to beginning work of this section.
1.5.2.2. Use only staff who are completely familiar with the manufacturers'
recommended methods of installation as well as the requirements of this
work.
1.5.3. Welders Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00, certifying welders
employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.6. FIELD MEASUREMENTS
1.6.1. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products, where named in this Section, are
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. Architect
will consider requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01 25 00.
2.2. MATERIALS
2.2.1. Plates and Bars: ASTM A283, Grade D or approved equal.
2.2.2. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40, (pressure test not required), unless noted
otherwise.
2.2.3. Tube: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
2.2.4. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 653, gage and profile indicated, galvanized to G90 finish in
accordance with ASTM A 653.
2.2.5. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized
components.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0550002
2.2.6. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
2.2.7. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: VOC approved primer.
2.2.8. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc rich Type.
2.2.9. Copper: ASTM B370, temper H00 (cold rolled) or 060 (soft), 16 ounce unless noted
otherwise.
2.2.10. Solder: 50% pig lead and 50% block tin.
2.2.11. Flux: Rosin, muriatic acid neutralized with zinc or an approved soldering paste.
2.2.12. Fastening Devices for Copper: Hard copper, brass or bronze. Screws shall be round
headed with lead washers.
2.3. FABRICATION
2.3.1. Fit and shop assemble in each item in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
2.3.2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
2.3.3. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
2.3.4. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed
joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
2.3.5. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively

located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
2.3.6. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and
related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where
specifically noted otherwise.
2.3.7. Fabricate radiused components by cold-rolled process, using equipment and

techniques resulting in crimp free surfaces. Verify component wall thickness is suitable
for rolling without flattening or crimping.
2.3.8. In addition to above criteria, fabricate components for exposed architectural

appearance conditions.
2.3.8.1. Remove all weld splatter, grind and sand all weld joints uniformly smooth,
without visible scratches, gouges, or patch marks. Conform to Finish #2
of National Ornamental and Miscellaneous Metals Association Joint
Finish Guidelines.
2.3.8.2. All visible welds shall be continuous; bead or spot welding not acceptable.
2.3.8.3. Provide tube closures at all tube and pipe components.
2.3.8.4. Grind edges of all bent and fabricated components smooth to a 1/4 inch
radius.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0550003
2.4. FINISHES
2.4.1. Galvanize all exterior components, after fabrication, in accordance with ASTM A123 or
A386. Provide minimum 2.00 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. Fill vent holes after
galvanizing.
2.4.1.1. Where steel is designated as painted in finished project, do not water

quench or apply chromate conversion coatings as a part of the galvanizing
process. Contractor shall notify steel galvanizing fabricator of all steel
designated as painted.
2.4.2. Prime paint interior items with one coat rust inhibitive VOC approved primer compatible
with finish specified in Section 09 91 00.
2.4.2.1. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC SP 2.
2.4.2.2. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding
is required.
2.5. PERFORATED METAL IMAGE PANELS
2.5.1. Manufacturer: Zahner, www.azahner.com, or equal.
2.5.2. Series/Type: Imagewall
2.5.3. Material: 16GA stainless steel panels with custom perforations based upon imagery to
be provided by the Owner.
2.5.4. Sizes: As shown on the documents.
2.6. INSTALLATION OF PERFORATED METAL IMAGE PANELS
2.6.1. Install steel support structure as shown on drawings
2.6.2. Mount panels to support structure with manufactured assembly. Finish to match.
2.6.3. Install in accordance with manufacturer
2.7. ERECTION TOLERANCES
2.7.1. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
2.7.2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
2.8. SCHEDULED FABRICATION
2.8.1. The following is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not
specifically scheduled.
2.8.2. Ladders: Fabricate as shown on drawings, with steel mounting brackets and
attachments; prime paint at interior locations; galvanized finish for exterior locations.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0550004
2.8.3. Miscellaneous Anchorages: Anchor bolts, machine bolts, eye bolts, dowels, threaded
rods, plates, inters, and other fastenings to be installed in concrete or masonry; provide
as detailed or indicated.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0550005
SECTION 05 58 13
COLUMN COVERS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Aluminum column covers
1.1.2. Support and attachment accessories.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.1. Submit product data, samples, and shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.3.2. Indicate on shop drawings component details, anchorage, type and location of
fasteners, and accessories or items required for a complete installation.
1.3.3. Submit 3 samples, 3 x 5 inches in size indicating finish.
1.3.4. Submit manufacturers installation instructions.
1.4.1. Qualifications: Manufacturer specializing in manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum

column covers with minimum 5 year document experience.
1.5. DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.5.1. Deliver to and store on site in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 60 00.
1.5.2. Store products in upright position, off ground, in such manner as to prevent damage.
1.6. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
1.6.1. Coordinate installation with adjacent work, do not install column covers until after
completion of Work of Section 09 21 16.
2.1. FIBERGLASS COLUMN COVER
2.1.1. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Edon Fiberglass

are indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The
00.
2.1.2. Series: EC101-E
2.1.3. Joint Type: Exposed butt joint

County of Tehama COLUMN COVERS
JKA #15-100 05 58 13 - 1
2.1.4. Material: Fiberglass reinforced polyester plastic
2.1.5. Finish: Prefinished, Satin gelcoat. Color to match Sherwin Williams SW6083 Sable
2.2. ACCESSORIES
2.2.1. Support and Connection Accessories: Aluminum or galvanized steel, size and
configuration to resist imposed loads.
2.3. FABRICATION
2.3.1. Fabricate in two or more sections with vertical butt joints
2.3.2. Form cover sections to indicated radius.
2.3.3. All connection and fastening to be concealed with tight hairline joints.
proper installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval
of the Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection
properly commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the
original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions
of the referenced standards.
3.2. ERECTION
3.2.1. Erect support framing plumb and in conformance with manufacturers instructions.
3.2.2. Firmly attach connection devices to building structure using anchors indicated in the
shop drawings. All connections at to be concealed.
3.2.3. Connect support framing to anchorage devices using screws or bolts: 'pop rivets' are not
acceptable.
3.2.4. Install toe kick, reveals, and covers in sections using manufacturers concealed
attachment devices.
3.2.5. Install covers level and plumb with tight hairline joints.

JKA #15-100 05 58 13 - 2
3.2.6. After installation, remove masking and other packaging materials immediately. Provide
barrier protection as required to protect column covers.
3.3. CLEANING
3.3.1. Clean work provisions of Section 01 77 19.
3.3.2. Wash surfaces of column covers.
3.4. PROTECTION
3.4.1. Protect finished work against abrasion and damage under the provisions of Section 01
77 19.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 05 58 13 - 3
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The requirements of Division I apply to all Work of this Section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, facilities and equipment required for the fabrication and
installation of rough carpentry and associated items (except that which is specified elsewhere)
indicated on Drawings and necessary to complete the Work. Items include, but are not
necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Blocking, backing, stripping, furring, and nailers.
2. Rough hardware.
3. Wood framing.
4. Wood sheathing.
5. Preservative treatment.
6. Drilling, saw cuts, knock-outs and framing for ventilation.
7. Wood sheathing backing at tile walls.
B. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.
C. Structural Steel: Section 05 12 00.
D. Wood I-Joists: Section 06 17 33.
E. Open Web Wood Chord Joist: Section 06 17 36.
F. Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses: Section 06 17 53.
G. Glued Laminated Construction: Section 06 18 00.
H. Structural Composite Lumber: Section 06 71 13.
A. General:
1. Coordinate the work of all trades to ensure proper placement of all materials, anchors,
etc., as well as providing for openings and anchors for the installation of surface mounted
materials and equipment.
2. Qualifications for Workmen: Provide sufficient skilled workmen and supervisors who shall
be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work and who shall be
thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and the materials and techniques
specified.
3. Rejection: In the acceptance or rejection of rough carpentry, no allowance will be made
for lack of skill on the part of the workmen.
B. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless otherwise noted)

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1
2. Lumber: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB); Standard Grading Rules for
West Coast Lumber No. 17.
3. Lumber: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA); Western Lumber Grading Rules
05.
4. Redwood: Redwood Inspection Service (RIS); Standard Specifications for Grades of
California Redwood Lumber.
5. Wood Sheathing: The Engineered Wood Association; Specifications and Grades.
a. Structural Plywood: United States Product Standard PS1, Group 1 Douglas Fir.
b. APA rated sheathing: United States Product Standard PS2.
6. Wood Preservative: American Wood-Preservers Association (AWPA):
a. U1, Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood.
b. M4, Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products.
7. 2012 National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS).

1. Certification:
a. Preservative Treated Wood: Certification for waterborne preservative and that
moisture content was reduced to 19 percent maximum, after treatment.

2. If indicated on the Structural Drawings, load test expansion and epoxy anchors as
indicated on the drawings.
A. Protection:
1. After delivery, store all materials off the ground, covered, and in such a manner as to
ensure proper ventilation and drainage and to protect against damage and the weather.
Maintain wood at the maximum moisture levels indicated in Materials Section.
2. Keep all material clearly identified with all grade marks legible; keep all damaged material
clearly identified as damaged, and separately store to prevent its inadvertent use. Do not
allow installation of damaged or otherwise non-complying material.
3. Use all means necessary to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
4. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Sawn Lumber:
1. Lumber (Wood Framing): Meet requirements of following minimum grades. All grades to
WCLIB Grading Rules No. 17. Species shall be Douglas Fir - Larch
Maximum Moisture
Item Sizes Grade Content at Initial Use Notes
All Material 2x No. 2 19% Unless Noted Otherwise
All Material 3x,4x No. 2 30% Unless Noted Otherwise
All Material 6x No. 1 30% Unless Noted Otherwise
Decking 2x Select Dex 19%
2. At initial use shall be that point at which nails, screws, bolts, split rings, shear plates or
other fasteners or the holes for said fasteners are placed in the wood.
3. All sawn lumber is assumed to be enclosed in the dry building envelope in the final
service condition, unless noted otherwise, and free to dry to moisture content less than
19%.
4. The Contractor shall use whatever means necessary, including site drying to ensure that
the moisture contents above are not exceeded.
5. All studs, plates, joists, rafters and beams 3x and thicker shall be free of heart center in
accordance with the specified grading standards.
B. Wood Sheathing:
1. Roof and Wall Structural Sheathing: PS1 and PS2 APA rated sheathing with exterior glue.
Thickness type and grade shall be as indicated on Drawings.
2. Where indicated on the Architectural Drawings as interior wall backing behind tile and in
all toilet rooms behind sheet rock, to be C-C APA rated sheathing with exterior glue.
Thickness shall be 5/8-inch at all locations.
3. Flooring: C-C APA Performance rated tongue and groove with exterior glue. Thickness
type and grade shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Building Paper: Fed. Spec. UU-B-790a, Type I, Grade B (15 lb. min. unless noted
elsewhere.).
D. Rough Hardware Fastenings and Connections: All types including bolts, lag screws, nails,
spikes, screws, washers and other rough hardware, of kinds that may be purchased and that
require no further fabrication, shall be furnished and installed for all finish and rough carpentry
and shall conform to 2012 NDS Standards and dimensions. All hardware exposed to weather
shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A153 Standards. All nails used into pressure treated
lumber shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A153 or stainless steel.
1. Common wire nails or spikes unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Box nails and
sinker nails are not permitted. Vinyl coating is permitted on nails when not exposed to
weather.
2. Bolts: Bolt material shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade A. Bolt dimensions shall conform
to ANSI/ASME B18.2.1 with hex head of sizes indicated.
3. Lag Screws: Lag screws shall conform to ASTM 307, Grade A. All lag screws shall have
hex heads where exposed.
4. Washers: Standard flat washers shall conform to ANSI B18.22.1, Type A, Wide Pattern.
Steel plate washers shall be Simpson BP or BPS or equivalent. Malleable iron washers
shall be standard malleable iron washers.
5. Powder Driven Fasteners: Tempered steel pins with special corrosive resistant plating or
coating. Pins shall have guide washers to accurately control penetration. Fastening shall
be accomplished by low-velocity piston-driven power activated tool. Pins and tool shall be
as manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems or equivalent. See Drawings for size, type
and embedment.
6. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 30 00 for anchors to concrete and Section 04 20 00
for anchors to masonry.
7. Adhesive Anchors: See Section 03 30 00 for anchors to concrete and Section 04 20 00
for anchors to masonry.
8. Fabricated Metal Timber Framing Connectors: Connectors shall be punched for nailing
and bolting. Nails and nailing shall conform to the manufacturer's instructions with a nail
provided for each punched hole. All connectors must have specific ICC approval. Types
as noted on Drawings are Simpson Strong-Tie. Hardware suppliers other than Simpson
shall submit a comparative material list itemizing product designation, load rating and
supported member size for review by the enforcement agency and the Structural
Engineer.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Lumber:
1. All lumber shall be air or kiln-dried to the maximum moisture content indicated in Materials
Section.
2. Furnish S4S unless otherwise noted.
3. Size to conform to rules of governing standard. Sizes shown are nominal unless
otherwise noted.
B. Wood Treatment:
1. Preservative Treatment: The treating process and results thereof shall conform to the
appropriate AWPA Standards for exterior, above ground use (3B) and as indicated in
CBC Section 2303.1.8.
2. After treatment and prior to shipping, air or kiln-dry lumber to maximum 19 percent
moisture content.
3. All treated wood shall be identified with a label meeting the requirements of CBC Section
2303.1.8.1.
4. The amount of preservative to be injected into the wood shall be as required by the AWPA
standard for each type of installation.
5. All wood in contact with concrete or masonry shall be preservative treated.
6. Cut surfaces and bored holes in pressure treated wood shall be protected in accordance
with AWPA Standard M4.
C. Fire Treatment: All fire-retardant-treated wood shall be identified with a label meeting the
requirements of CBC Section 2303.2.4. The treating process and results thereof shall meet
the requirements of CBC Section 2303.2. Moisture content of fire-retardant-treated wood shall
meet CBC Section 2303.2.8. Treater shall submit design and fastener valves for treated wood
to Structural Engineer for review. See Drawings for location of fire-retardant-treated wood.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Grade Mark each piece of lumber. Marking must be done by recognized agency.
1. Douglas Fir shall bear WCLIB or WWPA grade stamp.
2. Pressure treated Douglas Fir shall bear AWPA Quality mark.
B. Wood Sheathing: Each panel shall be legibly identified as to type, grade and specie by APA
grade. If plies are spliced, the slope of the scarf shall not be steeper than 1:8. White pockets
will not be permitted in face plies.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection:
1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and
verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly
proceed.
2. Verify that rough carpentry may be performed in strict accordance with the original design
and all pertinent codes and regulations.
B. Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with
installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: All rough carpentry shall produce joints true, tight, and well nailed with all members
assembled in accordance with the Drawings and with all pertinent codes and regulations.
B. Selection of Lumber Pieces: Carefully select all members. Select individual pieces so that
knots and obvious defects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing or making
proper connections. Cut out and discard all defects which will render a piece unable to serve
its intended function.
C. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for excessive
warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting.
D. Shimming: do not shim any framing component.
E. Care shall be taken that notching and boring of members is in strict conformance with the
Drawings and that there are no over-cuts.
3.3 FASTENING
A. Nailing: Except as otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified, all nailing shall be as

required by CBC Table 2304.9.1 - Fastening Schedule.
1. Nails or Spikes shall be common wire unless noted otherwise. Penetration of nails or
spikes shall be one-half the length of the nail or spike into the piece receiving the point.
However, to connect pieces 2" in thickness, 16d nails shall be used unless noted
otherwise.
a. Bore holes for nails wherever necessary to prevent splitting.
b. Use finish or casing for finish work.
c. Use of machine nailing is subject to a satisfactory installation of nails. Minimum edge
distances shall be maintained. Nails installed through sheathing with nail guns shall
not penetrate into the outer plies deeper than hand nailing. Submittal of guns and
nails is required.
d. All nailing into Pressure-Treated lumber shall utilize hot-dipped zinc coated
galvanized nails or stainless steel nails per CBC Section 2304.9.5.
B. Bolts and Lag Screws: Bolts shall be sizes indicated on Drawings. Holes for bolts shall be
1/16-inch larger than the bolt diameter. Malleable, Steel plate or standard flat washers shall
be used where heads or nuts would otherwise bear directly on wood surfaces. Malleable or
plate washers shall be used on all anchor bolts. Cut washers are not permitted. Lag screws
shall be screwed (not driven) into place. For the shank, holes shall be bored the same depth
and diameter as shank. For threaded portion, holes shall be pre-drilled as follows:
Lag Screw Size Thread Portion Pre-Drill

1/2 diameter 1/4 diameter
1 diameter 5/8 diameter
Soap Lag screws prior to installation. Tighten all bolts and screws before closing in.
C. Framing Devices: Install according to the manufacturers instructions unless otherwise noted.
3.4 FRAMING AND ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. Sills: Shall be in long lengths of sizes shown, fastened with anchor bolts as indicated, a
minimum of two anchor bolts per piece. Place steel plate washers (but not standard flat or
malleable iron washers) under nuts bearing on wood. Set sills level and true.
B. Studs, Posts and Columns: Shall be full length. Corners shall be as detailed. Partitions or
walls containing plumbing, heating or other piping shall be so formed as to give proper
clearance for materials. Cut members as required to provide full bearing at ends. Connect to
structure as indicated.
C. Plates: Shall be full length of wall segment or 12-foot minimum and spliced as shown.
D. Blocking: Blocking shall be same thickness and width of studs or joists unless shown
otherwise. Blocking shall not be spaced over 8'-0" c.c. Install fire blocking in accordance with
CBC. Horizontal fire blocking in walls shall be placed at floor lines and ceiling lines unless
noted otherwise. Install blocking at all plywood joints where noted on the Drawings. Install wall
width full height solid blocking at floor joists beneath all posts in walls. Blocking shall be
installed around all wall, floor and roof penetrations.
E. Joists and Beams: Shall be full span length and spliced over bearings unless shown
otherwise. Install with crown side up. Beams or headers indicated to be built up of two or more
joists shall be fabricated on the job using full length members. For two piece 2x members,
stitch nail pieces together with 16d common nails spaced not over 12 inches c.c. and
staggered. Clinch nails protruding through members. For three or more piece members, stitch
bolt pieces together with " bolts spaced not over 12 inches c.c. and staggered.
1. Provide double joists and headers at all openings through roof unless otherwise shown on
Drawings.
2. Provide typical headers at all openings through walls where one or more studs are
required to be cut. For penetration through walls narrower than stud spacing, provide solid
blocking on all sides for fastening finish materials.
F. Wood Sheathing: Install to pattern indicated and provide blocking at joints where noted on the
Drawings. Center all joints over bearing supports. Nail to framing as indicated. Install wood
sheathing with face plies perpendicular to joists or studs unless indicated otherwise. Wall
wood sheathing shall continue uninterrupted by ceilings or soffit from floor to floor or floor to
roof unless specifically detailed on the Structural Drawings.
G. Wood Furring, Stripping: Install as shown or required to provide nailing materials or passage
of pipes, conduits, etc., not otherwise accommodated including ceiling stripping for gypsum
drywall construction.
H. Bridging: Space not over 8'-0" c.c. for spans over 16'-0". Joists 8 inches or less in depth shall
not require bridging unless specifically indicated.
I. Solid Wood Backing: Solid wood backing shall be provided for all wall and ceiling finishes and
for supporting of mounted items for all trades, including but not limited to metal toilet
partitions, toilet room accessories, frames, cabinets, casework, mirrors, trim, applied wall
finishes, athletic equipment, food service equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, etc. Contractor
shall coordinate placement of backing and supports with Subcontractor supplying mounted
items.
J. Building Paper: Install in all locations indicated except where included in other sections of the
specifications.
K. Cant Strips and Crickets: Shape to sizes shown. Rigidly fasten to construction. Form neat
mitered corners.
L. Wood Sheathing Backing: All toilet rooms, restrooms, single or joint occupancy shall have all
walls backed with 5/8-inch thick wood sheathing with no surface voids. Install sheathing
between the framing members and wallboard. The same wood sheathing shall also be
provided and installed at all tile locations. At tile locations wood sheathing shall be installed
between the framing members and the resin-cement backing board.
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY WORK
A. Install all items under other sections specified to be furnished and installed in other sections
which relate to the rough carpentry work.
B. Miscellaneous Carpentry Work not included under other sections but, indicated or required yet
not specified elsewhere shall be furnished and installed hereunder, including appropriate
fastening devices. Contractor shall provide miscellaneous carpentry work for all sections and
divisions of work identified.
C. Wood Curbs for Equipment: Construct all wood curbs for roof mounted equipment as detailed.
Provide all miscellaneous blocking, bracing, supports, and other wood items as shown or
required to complete the work.
D. Plywood Backing for Electrical, telephone, and similar types of wall mounted equipment shall
be provided hereunder where required. Plywood shall be 3/4-inch thick exterior A-C plywood
with 'A' face exposed.
E. Fire/Draft Stops: Construct fire and drafts stops in furred attic spaces where indicated or
required by CBC code. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings construct of not less than 5/8-
inch Type 'X' gypsum wallboard or " wood sheathing, adequately supported by 2x4s at 24
inches c.c., braced diagonally to the roof structure. Draft stop and installation work shall
conform to code requirements.
F. Shoring and Bracing: Shore or brace for temporary support of all work as required during the
construction period except any shoring and bracing specified and included under other
sections of these specifications.
G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide and maintain all barricades and enclosures required to
protect the work in progress.
H. Protect all work in progress and all work installed, as well as the work of all other trades. Any
work damaged as a result of the work under this section shall be corrected to its original
condition or replaced if directed by the Architect at no increase in cost to the Owner.
J. Ventilation: Contractor shall include all labor and materials necessary to provide ventilation
requirements of roof overhangs, eaves, attics, and all other components of the building
required by codes to be ventilated. Work shall include removing knock-outs in wood I-joists for
cross ventilation, drilling of blocking, wood sheathing, and other wooden components of the
structure necessary to comply with requirements of the CBC for ventilation of buildings.
SECTION 06 17 33
WOOD I-JOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SCOPE
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, appliances, facilities and equipment required for the
fabrication, delivery and erection of all Wood I-joists.
1. All Wood I-Joists, joist blocking, bridging, etc., for the installation of joists.
2. Clips, angles, straps, hangers, etc., incidental to installation of joists.
3. Nails, bolts, washers and other fasteners used for erecting and securing of Wood I-joists.
A. Structural Steel: Section 05 12 00.
B. Rough Carpentry: Section 06 10 00.
C. Glued Laminated Construction: Section 06 18 00.
A. General Qualifications of Manufacturer: The fabricator shall have been engaged in the
continuous manufacturing of Wood I-Joists for a minimum of five years.
B. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless specified otherwise)

2. ASTM D5055, Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood I-Joists.
C. Submittals: (Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00).

1. Where indicated on Drawings, show erection plans, sizes, types and location of wood I-
joists. Drawings shall also indicate sizes and location of blocking, hangers, etc., with
sufficient detailing to ensure correct installation.
2. Substantiation of Load Capacity by one of the following methods:
a. Structural calculations proving capacity to carry the loads shown on the drawings.
Calculations shall be signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the state in
which the project is located.
b. Direct comparison of I-joists proposed and I-joists specified proving equal or better
structural properties and direct comparison of hardware proposed and hardware
specified proving equal or better capacities.
3. ICC ES Report for supplied joist.

2. Manufacturing facility shall be approved by an independent inspection agency approved
by the International Accreditation Service, Inc. (IAS).
WOOD I-JOISTS 06 17 33 - 1
3. All joists shall bear a stamp indicating the plant number, independent inspection agency,
logo and ICC ES Report number.
A. If joists must be stored prior to erection, they shall be stored in a vertical position off the
ground and covered and protected from weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wood I-Joists: Wood I-joists as indicated on drawings are Red Built or I-level designations
and are for reference to indicate required depth, spacing and capacity only. Wood I-joists
shall have specific ICC approval, and may be used only if equivalent, in the Architect's
opinion, to Wood I- joists specified. Structural capacities shall be evaluated by ASTM D-5055.
B. Lumber:
1. Wood Flanges: Laminated Veneer Lumber or Machine Stress Rated lumber. Species and
thickness shall be such that the specified nailing capacity is not reduced.
2. Wood Webs: U.S. Product Standard PS1 or PS2. Webs shall be constructed from
Structural 1 plywood or OSB as indicated in manufacturers ICC ES Report.
C. Adhesive:
1. According to manufacturers ICC ES Report.
D. Types:
1. Sizes, properties and additional information as shown on the Drawings.
E. Accessories to be furnished and installed as indicated on the Drawings are as follows:

1. Blocking, hangers, brackets, straps, ties, etc., shown on Drawings.
2. Miscellaneous accessories incidental to erection and installation of joists.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication shall be in compliance with manufacturers ICC ES Report.

1. Fabrication shall be in accordance with best practices with adequate plant equipment and
under supervision of properly qualified personnel.
2. Moisture content of components at time of gluing shall comply with the manufacturers
ICC ES Report.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Prior to installation of the work of this Section, carefully inspect and verify that the installed
work of all other trades is complete to the point where this installation may properly
commence.
B. Verify that specified items may be installed in accordance with the approved design.
C. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed in discrepant areas
until discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect work and materials of this Section during installation, and protect the installed work
and materials of other trades.
B. In the event of damage, make all repairs and replacement necessary to the approval of the
Architect at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.3 HANDLING
A. Use equipment and methods that avoid damages that may impair strength of wood I-joists.
Sharp instruments and unprotected wire rope, chain slings and the like shall not be permitted.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Wood I-joists are to be erected and installed in accordance with the Drawings and
manufacturers recommendations. Comply with all manufacturers recommendations
concerning temporary construction loads.
B. Erection bracing in addition to specified bridging is to be provided as detailed to keep the joist
products straight and plumb as required and to assure adequate lateral support for the
individual members and the entire system until the sheathing material has been applied.
3.5 CLEANUP
A. Keep premises free from accumulated waste materials, rubbish and debris resulting from this
Work. Upon completion, remove tools, appliances, surplus materials, waste materials,
rubbish, debris and accessory items used in or resulting from said Work, and legally dispose
of off the site.
SECTION 06 18 00
GLUED LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SCOPE
fabrication and delivery to job site of all glued laminated wood members.
1.3 RELATED WORK INCLUDED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06 10 00.
B. Wood I-Joists: Section 06 17 33.
C. Structural Composite Lumber: Section 06 71 13.
A. General:
1. Qualifications of Manufacturer: The fabricator shall have been engaged in the continuous
manufacturing of glued laminated timbers for a minimum of at least two years and shall
have the authority to use the AITC "Quality Inspected Stamp". Each timber member shall
be stamped and placed in such a position not to be visible on finished erected members.
B. Submittals: (Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00):

1. Shop drawings showing full dimensions of each member and layout of entire structural
system.
2. Show large scale details of connections, connectors and other accessories.
3. Indicate species and laminating combination, adhesive type, and other variables in
required work.
C. Tests and Inspections:

2. Each structural glued-laminated member shall be stamped with an identifying mark. Mark
shall include all pertinent data, such as grade and species of lumber, type of glue,
extremes of moisture content and other such information as may be required.
3. Certificate of compliance with the above data.
D. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless specified otherwise)

2. 2012 National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS).
3. American Institute of Timber Construction, "Standard Specifications for Structural Glued
Laminated Timber of Softwood Species, AITC 117.
4. ANSI/AITC Standard A190.1
5. ASTM D3737 Design and Manufacture of Structural Glued Laminated Timber.
GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 06 18 00 - 1
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver undamaged products to site in manufacturer's protective wrappings with legends

intact. Store on site secure from weather, soil and physical damage.
B. Transport, handle and store in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Use padded, non-marring slings.
C. Architectural Appearance Grade members shall be shipped, handled and stored with
complete weather and damage protection wrapping. Maintain wrappings in place until
immediately prior to deck installation.
D. Industrial Appearance Grade glued laminated timber members shall be wrapped in a water
resistant covering during transit. Contractor shall be responsible for protection during hauling
and unloading at job site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber:
1. Lumber used for laminating structural members shall be well manufactured and shall
conform to requirements of Standard Grading and Dressing Rules No. 17, West Coast
Lumber Inspection Bureau. Such lumber shall be inspected, identified by individual piece,
and certified as meeting requirements of said standard specifications by an approved
lumber grading agency. It is assumed that each lamination is graded on basis of
requirement for nominal size of individual lamination. When lumber is resawn, it shall be
regraded on basis of new size.
B. Type: Glued Laminated Timber Protected from Weather

1. Species: Douglas Fir or Western Larch
2. Stress Grade: AITC Combination 24F-V4 for simple beams, 24F-V8 for cantilever or
continuous beams.
3. Extreme fiber bending - Fb = 2400 psi
4. Adhesives: Wet use
5. Appearance Grade: AITC Industrial for concealed uses, Architectural appearance at
exposed uses.
6. Preservative Treatment: Portions of beams exposed to weather shall be preservative
treated.
7.. Laminations: Provide outer tension laminations or proof load testing as required by
ANSI/AITC A190.1.
8. Sealing: Shop seal all surfaces with 2 coats of clear penetrating sealer.
C. Type: Glued Laminated Timber Exposed to Weather

1. Species: Alaskan Yellow Cedar
2. Stress Grade: AITC Combination 20F-V12 for simple beams, 20F-V13 for cantilever or
continuous beams.
3. Extreme fiber bending - Fb = 2000 psi
4. Adhesives: Wet use
5. Appearance Grade: Architectural
6. Laminations: Provide outer tension laminations or proof load testing as required by
ANSI/AITC A190.1.
7. Sealing: Shop seal all surfaces with 2 coats of clear penetrating sealer.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication shall be in compliance with the above standards and references.

1. Fabrication shall be in accordance with best practices with adequate plant and equipment
and under supervision of properly qualified personnel.
2. Laminations shall be machine finished to a smooth surface, but not sanded, and to a
uniform thickness with a maximum allowable variation of 1/64 inch. Warp, twist, or other
characteristics which will prevent intimate contact of adjacent glued faces or interfere with
uniform bending to a required curvature when under clamping pressure shall not be
permitted. Surfaces to be glued shall be clean and free from oil, dust and other foreign
material which would be detrimental to satisfactory gluing.
3. Moisture content of lumber at time of gluing shall be not less than 7 percent nor more than
12 percent.
4. Slips, misses, and wane are not permitted.
5. Boring of holes in members shall be in strict conformance with the Drawings. Notching is
prohibited except where specifically detailed.
6. Field cuts and holes in preservative treated members shall be preservative treated and
sealed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
commence.
C. In the event of a discrepancy, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed in discrepant areas
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect work and materials of this Section prior to and during installation, and protect the
installed work and materials of other trades.
B. In the event of damage, make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the
3.3 HANDLING
A. Use equipment and methods that avoid scarring corners and faces or otherwise injuring
members. Sharp instruments and unprotected wire rope, chain slings and the like shall not be
permitted.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Glued Laminated members are to be erected and installed in accordance with the Drawings
and manufacturers recommendations.
3.5 CLEANUP
of off the site.
SECTION 06 20 23
FINISH CARPENTRY INTERIOR
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Interior wall paneling.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. AWS Architectural Woodwork Standards, 1st Edition, 2009.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.1. Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.3.2. Submit shop drawings indicating materials, component profiles, fastening methods,
jointing details, finishes, and accessories.
1.3.3. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.3.4. Samples
1.3.4.1. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.3.4.2. Submit four samples 4 x 6 inch in size illustrating specified finish for each type
of millwork.
1.4.1. Perform work in accordance with Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), Section 6,
and as required by this Section.
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.5.1. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
1.5.2. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00
1.5.3. Store materials in ventilated, interior locations under constant minimum temperatures of
60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent.
1.5.4. Deliver work in this section only at such time as the work is ready and suitable for
installation.
1.5.5. Comply with requirements of AWS Section 2, Care and Storage.
2.1. INTERIOR WALL PANELING OWNER FURNISHED
2.1.1. Reclaimed Wood Boards

County of Tehama FINISH CARPENTRY INTERIOR
JKA #15-100 06 20 23 - 1
2.1.1.1. Species: Pine
2.1.1.2. Finish: Stained per Section 09 91 00; Reclaimed Wood Planks & Oil.
2.1.1.3. Thickness: ~1/2 rough-sawn
2.1.1.4. Board Width: 4
2.1.1.5. Unfinished, reclaimed boards will be provided by owner, contractor to finish,

cut, trim and install.
2.1.2. Nails:
2.1.2.1. Interior: Finish nail, bright finish, length as required to suit application.
2.1.3. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Blind Fasteners, Lags, and Screws: Size and type to suit
application; finish as for nails.
2.1.4. Wood Filler: Tinted to match surface finish color.
2.2. LUMBER
2.2.1. Sleepers and toe kicks: Douglas fir, pressure treated when in direct contact with concrete
slab-on-grade.
2.2.2. Uses not otherwise specified: Hardwood or softwood; grade in accordance with AWS
Section 2 and 3 as required for use.
2.3. FASTENERS:
2.3.1. Provide fasteners of size and type to suit application and complying with AWS
Architectural Woodwork Standards.
2.4.1. Provide all other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and proper
installation of this work, as selected by the contractor and subject to the approval of the
Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect previously installed work. Verify
all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly
commence.
JKA #15-100 06 20 23 - 2
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Before installation, apply approved sealer to all unexposed surfaces per Section 09 91 00.
3.2.2. Before installation, seal all edges of paneling with approved sealer per Section 09 91 00.
3.3. INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install work in accordance with AWS Section 6 Premium quality standards and as
specified.
3.3.2. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
3.3.3. Install components and trim with fasteners as shown or required.
3.3.4. Vertically scarf all intermediate joints.
3.3.5. Set fasteners with proper size tool. Do not damage surface. Use of staples or T-nails not
permitted.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 06 20 23 - 3
SECTION 06 41 00
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Custom fabricated cabinet units.
1.1.2. Cabinet preparation for utilities.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.2. National Particleboard Association, NPA 9-87, Voluntary Standard for Formaldehyde
Emission from Medium Density Fiberboard.
1.2.3. National Particleboard Association, ANSI/A 208.1, current edition, Wood Particleboard.
1.2.4. National Particleboard Association, ANSI/A 208.2, current edition, Medium Density
Fiberboard for Interior Use.
1.2.5. ASTM E 84- Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.2.6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LD.3 High Pressure Decorative
Laminates.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.2. Product and Material Data
1.3.2.1. Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly

methods, joint details, accessory listings, and schedule of finishes. Include
seaming plan of all countertop materials.
1.3.2.2. Provide written certification of current approval of fabrication and anchorage

method where deviation from contract documents is proposed.
1.3.2.3. Submit written certification of compliance with specified particleboard or

fiberboard product criteria.
1.3.3. Provide Woodwork Institute (AWS) Certified Compliance documents as specified.
1.3.3.1. Provide AWS Certified Compliance label on shop drawings.
1.3.3.2. Provide AWS Certified Compliance Certificate prior to delivery to job site.
1.3.3.3. Provide AWS Certified Compliance Label on all casework and countertops.

County of Tehama ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
JKA #15-100 06 41 00 - 1
1.3.4. After completion, issue written certification, on Contractors letterhead, and signed by
Contractor and casework subcontractor, that all that casework materials, fabrication and
installation fully meet all the requirements of the AWS Grade specified.
1.3.5. Samples:
1.3.5.1. Prior to fabricating mock-up, provide complete color chip/sample ring of

laminated plastic, PVC edging and prefinished panel colors for Architects
color selection.
1.3.5.2. Prior to fabricating mock-up, provide hinge, handle and lock samples for
Architects review.
1.3.5.3. Incorporate all selections in mock-up.
1.4.1. The Owner reserves the right to obtain a AWS inspection of completed casework
installation.
1.4.1.1. Where such inspection determines the installed casework is not in compliance
with specified standards, correct or replace as directed by Architect at no
additional cost to Owner.
1.4.1.2. In the event the installed casework is not in compliance with specified
standards, payment for inspection cost will be back-charged to the Contractor.
1.4.2. After completion, issue written certification, on Contractors letterhead, and signed by
Contractor and casework subcontractor, that all that casework materials, fabrication and
installation fully meet all the requirements of the AWS Grade specified.
1.4.3. Perform work in accordance with AWS Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), Section
10 Casework, Section 11 Countertops, and as required by this Section.
1.4.3.1. Where more restrictive than referenced standards, comply with requirements
of this Section.
1.4.4. Issue a AWS Certified Compliance Certificate prior to delivery certifying that products fully
meet all the requirements of the AWS Grade specified.
1.4.5. After completion, issue a AWS Certified Compliance Certificate for Installation certifying
that products fully meet all the requirements of the AWS Grade specified.
1.5.1. Comply with seismic attachment requirements, Chapter 16A, Part 2, Title 24, CCR.
1.6. MOCKUP
1.6.1. Prepare mockup under provisions of Section 01 45 00.
1.6.2. Provide full size base cabinet, upper cabinet, and each counter type indicated, in specified
finish with hardware installed.
1.6.3. Units will be examined to ascertain quality and conformity to AWS standards.
1.6.4. Units will establish a minimum standard of quality for this work.
JKA #15-100 06 41 00 - 2
1.6.5. Approved units may be used as part of the Work.
1.7. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
installation.
1.7.2. Comply with requirements of AWS Section 2 requirements for care and storage of
millwork.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.2. PLASTIC COVERED CASEWORK
2.2.1. Type: Flush Overlay, Style A Frameless
2.2.1.1. Provide casework conforming to AWS Premium grade, modified as specified

in this Section, and in accordance with approved fabrication methods.
2.2.2. Construction Type: Type I
2.2.3. Construction:
2.2.3.1. Casework Cores: Provide Roseburg Medite II or equal, phone (541)-679-

3311, Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), Type MD, per ANSI A 208.2, latest
edition and NEMA LD3-85.
2.2.3.2. Cabinet Door Cores: Provide Roseburg Medite II or equal, phone (541)-679-
3311, Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), Type MD, per ANSI A 208.2, latest
edition and NEMA LD3-85.
2.2.3.2.1. Provide Scientific Certification Systems certification that

product is manufactured from 92 percent recovered and
recycled wood fiber content and contains no added
formaldehyde .
2.2.3.3. Drawer bottoms, sides, backs, and sub - fronts: MDF as specified in this
Section.
2.2.3.4. Casework Core Visible Edges: Unless noted otherwise, high pressure
laminate, minimum 0.028 inches thickness, color to match laminated plastic.
2.2.3.5. Shelving: Provide MDF core as specified in this Section, 3/4 inch thick
minimum, thickness as required for 50 pound per square foot loading per
AWS Section 10 and AWS Appendix B.
2.2.3.5.1. Provide 1 inch thick shelving at all spans in excess of 36

inches.
2.2.3.6. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4-82, oil tempered both sides.

JKA #15-100 06 41 00 - 3
2.2.3.7. Solid Surface sub-base and Countertop Cores: Provide Roseburg Medex or
equal, phone (541)-679-3311, Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF), Type MD
- Exterior, per ANSI A 208.2, latest edition and NEMA LD3-85, 3/4 inch thick
minimum, formed as shown on drawings for specific edge.
2.2.3.7.1. Provide Scientific Certification Systems certification that

product is manufactured from 92 percent recovered and
recycled wood fiber content and contains no added
formaldehyde .
2.2.3.8. Casework core air quality regulation compliance: Comply with CARB ATCM
Rule 93120, Phase I and Phase II emission levels limiting formaldehyde
emissions from all MDF composite cores.
2.2.4. Surface Finish Criteria:
2.2.4.1. Exposed portions: Finish exposed portions with high pressure laminate as
specified in this Section. For purposes of this specification, definition of
exposed portions requiring high pressure laminate includes:
2.2.4.1.1. Interior surfaces of knee space or recesses provided for

movable equipment.
2.2.4.1.2. Tops of cabinets with more than 18 inches clear between

ceiling and cabinet.
2.2.4.1.3. Bottoms of all wall hung cabinets
2.2.4.1.4. All cabinet door surfaces, including edges.
2.2.4.1.5. Exposed exterior surface of all cabinet backs.
2.2.4.1.6. All fixed and adjustable shelving surfaces, including all 4

edges.
2.2.4.2. All door and drawer edges, and all fixed and adjustable shelving edges:
Provide 3 mm PVC edging, hot adhesive bonded, color as selected by
Architect at all door and drawer edges. Provide 1 mm PVC edging at shelving,
including all 4 edges of adjustable shelving.
2.2.4.3. Semi-exposed Portions - As specified in this section.
2.2.4.4. Concealed Portions: As defined in AWS Section 10, as modified in this

section.
2.2.4.5. Filler panels: Provide filler panels as required to accommodate door and
drawer function and allow for scribing cabinet to adjoining surfaces. Unless
noted otherwise, provide 2 inch dimension at wall conditions, and 4 inch
dimension at inside, cabinet to cabinet corner conditions.
2.3. PLASTIC LAMINATE AND FINISH MATERIALS
2.3.1. High Pressure Laminated Plastic:
2.3.1.1. Manufacturer: Provide manufacturer as specified for color. If alternate

manufacturer is proposed, Architect shall be sole judge if color and finish are
acceptable.
JKA #15-100 06 41 00 - 4
2.3.1.2. Manufacturer: Provide Formica or equal.
2.3.1.3. High Pressure Laminated Plastic Series/Type: Provide grades as follows:
2.3.1.3.1. Provide Type HGS per NEMA LD-3, 0.048 inches, at vertical
surfaces designated to receive high pressure laminated
plastic.
2.3.1.3.2. Provide Type HGS per NEMA LD-3, 0.048 inches, at

horizontal surfaces designated to receive high pressure
laminated plastic, including shelving.
2.3.2. Low Pressure Finishes for semi-exposed surfaces:
2.3.2.1. Unless specified otherwise, provide AWS listed low pressure thermosetting
coating.
2.3.3. Backing Sheet: AWS Listed material.
2.3.4. Color/Finish:
2.3.4.1. See finish schedule
2.3.4.2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: maximum of two colors will be selected by Architect

from full color and finish line for semi-exposed surfaces with low pressure
finish.
2.4. ACCESSORIES
2.4.1. Adhesive: Water based type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application.
Solvent based contact and urea resin adhesives are not permitted.
2.4.2. Grommets and guides:
2.4.2.1. Wire Grommets: Bainbridge #1954, 3 inch diameter, Tan and Gray colors.
2.4.3. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application;
stainless steel or cadmium plated steel.
2.4.4. Sleepers and toe kicks: Douglas fir, pressure treated when in direct contact with concrete
slab-on-grade.
2.4.5. Uses not otherwise specified: Hardwood or softwood; grade in accordance with Section 3
and 4, AWS as required for use.
2.5. HARDWARE
2.5.1. Provide in accordance with Resource Guide Appendix to AWS except as noted below.
2.5.2. Shelf Support System: Provide KV 345/346 or equal metal shelf support clips, with Phillips
PHWS at each clip.
2.5.3. Provide Hettich HT 1- 005-767 shelf support and lateral restraint pin, with HT1 005
082 vertical securing stud.
2.5.4. Drawer and Door Pulls: Trimco or equal, loop handle, 4 inch center to center, No. 562-4
inches x US 26D.
JKA #15-100 06 41 00 - 5
2.5.5. RPC or equal, 850 or 370 series, 0.095-inch thickness Heavy duty wrap around, Hospital
Tips, 2-3/4 inch height minimum, width configuration as required for application, color as
selected by Architect from complete line, including powder coating.
2.5.6. Drawer Guides: Unless noted otherwise, provide Accuride Full Extension Model 4034 at
drawers less than 24 inches wide, Model 4032 at drawers 24 inches and wider.
2.5.6.1. Bottom Drawers: Provide Accuride Full Extension Model 3640 at all bottom
drawers.
2.5.6.2. File Drawers: Provide Pendaflex G-6110-04(WH) file railing system at all
drawers marked "file".
2.5.7. Locks:
2.5.7.1. Manufacturer: CompX/National, www.compx.com or equal.
2.5.7.2. Type: Provide specified design, with front loaded removable cylinder
permitting rekeying without total lock disassembly.
2.5.7.2.1. Drawer and door Lock Series: C 8178 series, deadbolt pin
tumbler design, suitable for Owners standard cabinet
keyway, with bar strike. Comply with ANSI A156.11 Grade 1
cycle testing criteria.
2.5.7.2.2. Cam Lock Series: C 8102 series, with retainer staple.
2.5.7.2.3. Sliding Door Lock Series: C 8142 series, pin tumbler design,
plunger lock .
2.5.7.2.4. Sliding Glass Door Lock Series: C 8140, pin tumbler design,
ratchet type .
2.5.7.3. Finish: US 26D.
2.5.7.4. Keying: Key to Owners standard cabinet keyway . Key alike all locks within
each room, and key each room differently.
2.5.7.5. Accessory: Provide Ives IV2A or equal elbow catch at inactive cabinet door
leaf.
2.5.8. Magnetic catches: Provide magnetic catches at all cabinet doors, with maximum 5 pounds
holding power.
2.6. FABRICATION
2.6.1. Construct casework conforming to AWS Premium grade, modified as specified in this
Section, and in accordance with DSA approved fabrication methods.
2.6.1.1. Provide white bumpers.
2.6.1.2. Provide white anchor screw covers/caps.
2.6.1.3. Provide corbels matching countertop material as necessary to support

counter screens.

JKA #15-100 06 41 00 - 6
2.6.1.4. Fabricate all drawers full depth of cabinet. Provide minimum 30 inch deep
drawers at flat file drawers.
2.6.1.9. Provide cabinet locks at the following locations:
2.6.1.9.1. At all workrooms, office areas, administrative areas,

conference rooms, food service areas and janitorial areas.
2.6.2. Construct countertops conforming to AWS Premium grade.
2.6.2.1. Provide waterfall splash top edge, coved back splash and rolled front edge.
Where end splash are required, butt waterfall splash portion into end splash.
2.6.2.2. Provide AWS listed backer sheet.
2.6.2.3. Coordinate with countertop types as specified in Section 06 61 16.
2.6.3. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site. Do not glue any materials on site without
prior approval.
2.6.4. Fit shelves, doors, drawer fronts, and other exposed edges with matching materials. Use
full length pieces only. Provide edging at all edges of adjustable shelves.
2.6.4.1. Where laminated plastic is used with a pattern or design, such as wood grains,
vertically match and align pattern across face of door and drawer fronts..
2.6.5. Plough drawer bottoms into sides, fronts, or sub fronts, and backs. Surface attachment
of bottoms is not acceptable.
2.6.6. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures
and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on - site dimensions. Prime paint or seal
contact surfaces of cut edges.
2.6.7. Install wire grommet at each countertop, located as directed by Architect.
2.6.8. Install door and drawer handle horizontally, spaced as shown on drawings. Do not center
drawer handles in drawer face. Space same distance from top edge of drawer as at doors.
Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection
commence.
JKA #15-100 06 41 00 - 7
3.1.1.2.1. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Set and secure casework in accordance with AWS Premium Grade and Title 24, Chapter
16A, CCR. Provide AWS Certified Compliance Certificate for Installation.
3.2.2. Install separate anchor strips behind cabinet back. Cabinet back shall not be used for
anchorage.
3.2.2.1. Unless shown otherwise on drawings, provide one anchor strip top and
bottom for wall hung cabinets and base cabinets less than four feet high.
Provide three strips for base cabinets over four feet high.
3.2.2.2. Secure anchor strips in compliance with load resistance criteria defined in this
Section.
3.2.2.3. Provide design and detailing for seismic attachment/bracing of all free -
standing library shelving units, including specifying and coordinating all
required embedded shields necessary to comply with DSA requirements.
3.2.3. Scribe cabinets in accordance with AWS standards, Premium Grade, except that use of
cellulose sponge is not acceptable.
3.3. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
3.3.1. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures and other moving or operating parts to function
smoothly and correctly.
3.3.1.1. Adjust doors with mechanical and magnetic catches to limit opening force to
maximum 5 pounds force.
3.3.2. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 06 41 00 - 8
SECTION 06 61 16
SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Solid surfacing countertops and fabrications.
1.1.2. Coordination with fixtures and components specified in other sections.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.2. National Sanitation Foundation standards.
1.2.3. ASTM C 501 - Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber
Abrader.
1.2.4. ASTM D 256 - Impact Resistance of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
1.2.5. ASTM D 570 - Water Absorption of Plastics.
1.2.6. ASTM D 638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics.
1.2.7. ASTM D 696 - Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics.
1.2.8. ASTM D 2583 - Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impresser.
1.2.9. ASTM E 84- Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.2.10. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LD.3 High Pressure Decorative
Laminates.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.2. Product and Material Data
1.3.2.1. Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly

methods, joint details, accessory listings, and schedule of finishes. Include
seaming plan of all countertop materials.
1.3.2.2. Coordinate with fittings, including sinks and faucets specified in other
Sections.
1.3.3. Provide Woodwork Institute (WI) Certified Compliance documents as specified.
1.3.3.1. Provide WI Certified Compliance label on shop drawings.
1.3.3.2. Provide WI Certified Compliance Certificate prior to delivery to job site.

County of Tehama SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS
JKA #15-100 06 61 16 - 1
1.3.3.3. Provide WI Certified Compliance Label on all casework and countertops.
1.3.4. Samples
1.3.4.1. Prior to fabricating mock-up, provide complete color chip/sample ring of solid
surfacing for Architects color selection.
1.3.4.2. Incorporate all selections in mock-up.
1.4.1. Provide fabricator specializing in the fabrication of specified solid surfacing countertops,
be accredited by manufacturer, with a minimum of five years documented experience,
including completion of projects of similar scope within past 12 months.
1.4.2. Perform work in accordance with WI Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), Section
10 Casework, Section 11 Countertops, and as required by this Section.
1.4.2.1. Where more restrictive than referenced standards, comply with requirements
of this Section.
1.4.3. Issue a WI Certified Compliance Certificate prior to delivery certifying that products fully
meet all the requirements of the AWS Grade specified.
1.4.4. After completion, issue a WI Certified Compliance Certificate for Installation certifying that
products fully meet all the requirements of the AWS Grade specified.
1.4.5. Review all fixtures and fittings specified in other sections to verify fit and alignment.
Countertop fabricator is responsible for coordinating all components, including plumbing
and electrical components, into a fully functional assembly complying with specified
criteria.
1.5. MOCKUP
1.5.1. Prepare mockup under provisions of Section 01 45 00.
1.5.2. Provide full size countertop for each type indicated, in specified finish.
1.5.3. Units will be examined to ascertain quality and conformity to AWS standards and
specification.
1.5.4. Units will establish a minimum standard of quality for this work.
1.5.5. Approved units may be used as part of the Work.
1.6. DELIVERY AND STORAGE
installation.
1.6.2. Comply with requirements of AWS, Section 2 and 11, and manufacturers published
criteria.
1.7. CONTRACTORS GUARANTY
1.7.1. Provide Owner with written Guarantee on Contractor's letterhead, and signed by General
Contractor and cast plastic fabricator.
JKA #15-100 06 61 16 - 2
1.7.2. Provide guarantee for a time period of three years, commencing from the date of final
acceptance of the project.
1.7.3. Provide guarantee against defects in fabrication and performance, including cracking and
spalling of surface from contact with hot or cold materials, and against staining in excess
of the specified limits.
1.7.4. Restore the affected areas to the standard of the original specifications as soon as
weather permits.
1.8. MANUFACTURERS WARRANTY
1.8.1. Provide Owner with manufacturers commercial guarantee written on company letterhead,
warranting repair or replacement of cast plastic components.
1.8.2. Provide warranty covering cost of labor in such repair or replacement activities.
1.8.3. Provide warranty against manufacturing defects for a period of 10 years after installation.
2.1. SOLID SURFACE SS-1 AND SS-2
2.1.1. Manufacturer: DuPont, www.dupont.com
2.1.2. Type: Corian
2.1.2.1. Provide solid surfacing conforming to AWS Section 10 and 11, Premium
grade, modified as specified in this Section.
2.1.3. Series: Solid Surface.
2.1.4. Configuration:
2.1.4.1. Thickness: Minimum 1/2 inch, with additional thickness as shown on

drawings.
2.1.4.2. Edge: As shown on drawings.
2.1.4.3. Splash: As shown on drawings.
2.1.5. Product and Performance Characteristics:
2.1.5.1. Flexural Strength: 10,000 psi per ASTM Method D 790.
2.1.5.2. Barcol Hardness: 56 per ASTM D 2583.
2.1.5.3. High Temperature Resistance: No change per NEMA LD-3-3.6.
2.1.5.4. Boiling Water Surface Resistance: No change per NEMA LD-3-3.5.
2.1.5.5. Impact Resistance: No breakage from 1/2 pound ball, 144 inch drop, 1/2
material per NEMA LD3-3.8
2.1.5.6. Light Resistance: No change per NEMA LD 3-3.3.

JKA #15-100 06 61 16 - 3
2.1.6. Chemical Reagent Resistance: Provide chemical and stain resistance as published by
manufacturer for Glacier White color. After exposure to the published reagents, both
covered and uncovered, any stain shall be removed by scrubbing with a wet Scotch Brite
pad and bleaching cleanser. There shall be no permanent marring or crazing of surface.
2.1.7. Fire, Life Safety and Habitability Criteria:
2.1.7.1. Flame Spread: Maximum value of 25, 1/4 inch thickness, per ASTM E 84.
2.1.7.2. Smoke Developed: Maximum value of 25, 3/4 inch thickness, per ASTM E 84.
2.1.7.3. Toxicity: Maximum value of 99 grams, solid colors and 66 grams patterned
colors per Pittsburgh Protocol or approved equivalent.
2.1.7.4. Disinfection Ability: Demonstrated ability to remove HIV from surface.
2.1.7.5. Mold and Fungus Resistance: No mold or fungus growth after 6 month
exposure.
2.1.8. Accessories:
2.1.8.1. Adhesives: Color matched adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
2.1.8.2. Sealants: Silicone type, acid resistant, as recommended by top manufacturer

for fixture applications.
2.1.9. Finish and Color:
2.1.9.1. Finish: Standard
2.1.9.2. Colors: See Finish Schedule
2.2. SOLID SURFACE SS-3
2.2.1. Manufacturer: WilsonArt, www.wilsonartcontract.com.
2.2.2. Type: Cast acrylic
2.2.2.1. Provide solid surfacing conforming to WIC, Custom grade, modified as

specified in this Section.
2.2.3. Series: Solid Surface.
2.2.4. Configuration:
2.2.4.1. Thickness: Minimum 1/2 inch, with additional thickness as shown on

drawings.
2.2.4.2. Edge: As shown on drawings.
2.2.4.3. Splash: As shown on drawings.
2.2.5. Product and Performance Characteristics:
2.2.5.1. Radiant heat: minimum 600 seconds value per NEMA LD-3-3.5.
2.2.5.2. Flexural Strength: 9,300 psi per ASTM Method D 790.

JKA #15-100 06 61 16 - 4
2.2.5.3. Barcol Hardness: 61 per ASTM D 2583.
2.2.5.4. High Temperature Resistance: No change per NEMA LD-3-3.6.
2.2.5.5. Boiling Water Surface Resistance: No change per NEMA LD-3-3.5.
2.2.5.6. Impact Resistance: No breakage from 1/2 pound ball, 144 inch drop, 1/2
material per NEMA LD3-3.03 / ISSFA SST 6.1-00 procedure
2.2.5.7. Light Resistance: No change per ISSFA SST 7-1.00.
2.2.6. Chemical Reagent Resistance: Provide chemical and stain resistance as published by
manufacturer for Arctic White color. After exposure to the published reagents, both
covered and uncovered, any stain shall be removed by scrubbing with a wet Scotch Brite
pad and bleaching cleanser. There shall be no permanent marring or crazing of surface.
2.2.7. Fire, Life Safety and Habitability Criteria:
2.2.7.1. Flame Spread: Maximum value of 20, 1/4 inch thickness, per ASTM E 84.
2.2.7.2. Smoke Developed: Maximum value of 15, 3/4 inch thickness, per ASTM E 84.
2.2.7.3. Toxicity: Maximum value of 99 grams, solid colors and 66 grams Sierra colors
per Pittsburgh Protocol or approved equivalent.
2.2.7.4. Disinfection Ability: Demonstrated ability to remove HIV from surface.
2.2.7.5. Mold and Fungus Resistance: No mold or fungus growth after 6 month
exposure.
2.2.8. Accessories:
2.2.8.1. Adhesives: Color matched adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
2.2.8.2. Sealants: Silicone type, acid resistant, as recommended by top manufacturer

for fixture applications.
2.2.9.1. Finish: Standard
2.2.9.2. Color: See Finish Schedule
Architect.
2.4. FABRICATION
2.4.1. Fabricate solid surfacing conforming to AWS Premium grade and manufactuers
recommendations.
2.4.2. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in
accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers printed instructions and
technical bulletins.
JKA #15-100 06 61 16 - 5
2.4.3. Form joints between components using manufacturers recommended joint adhesive
without conspicuous joints.
2.4.4. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on the
drawings.
2.4.5. Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.
2.4.5.1. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template.
2.4.5.2. Smooth edges.
2.4.6. Countertop Pattern and configuration:
2.4.6.1. As shown on drawings
2.4.6.2. Provide square perimeter edge
2.4.6.3. Provide butt back splash with square top edge
3.1.1. Inspection
commence.
3.2. INSTALLATION - COUNTERTOPS
3.2.1. Set and secure countertops in accordance with AWS, Section 11.
3.2.2. Set all counters level, square and in true alignment. Counters shall fit tightly to walls and
upon completion of installation shall show no marks, indentations, or other defects.
Furnish all fillers, trim and molding required for finished installation.
3.2.3. Install countertops in accordance with manufacturer's procedures and recommendations.
3.2.4. Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 1 inch on either side
of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top.
3.2.5. Install using manufacturers recommended methods for thermoformed flush corners as
shown on drawings.

JKA #15-100 06 61 16 - 6
3.3. CLEANING
3.3.1. Clean surfacing and fixtures per manufacturers instructions and per Section 01 77 19.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 06 61 16 - 7
SECTION 06 71 13
STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SCOPE
fabrication, delivery and erection of all Structural Composite Lumber (SCL).
1. All blocking, bridging, etc., for the installation of members.
2. Clips, angles, straps, hangers, etc., incidental to installation of members.
3. Nails, bolts, washers and other fasteners used for erecting and securing members.
A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06 10 00.
B. Wood I-Joists: Section 06 17 33.
C. Glue-Laminated Construction: Section 06 18 00.
A. General Qualifications of Manufacturer: The fabricator shall have been engaged in the
continuous manufacturing of SCL members for a minimum of five years.
B. Standards and References: (Latest Edition unless specified otherwise)

1. 2013 California Building Code (CBC)
C. Submittals: (Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00).

1. Show erection plans, sizes, types and location of SCL members. Drawings shall also
indicate sizes and location of blocking, hangers, etc., with sufficient detailing to ensure
correct installation.
2. Product Data substantiating compliance with material properties shown on the Drawings.

2. Manufacturing facility shall be approved by an independent inspection agency approved
by the International Accreditation Service, Inc. (IAS).
3. All members shall bear a stamp indicating the grade, plant number, independent
inspection agency, logo and ICC ES report number.
A. If members must be stored prior to erection, they shall be stored in a vertical position off the
ground, covered and protected from weather.
STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER 06 71 13- 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Structural Composite Lumber (SCL): SCL members shall be of the types and sizes indicated
on Drawings and as specified here. Structural composite lumber shall have specific ICC
approval, and shall meet all specified structural design properties. Proposed SCL members
may be used only if equivalent, in the Architect's opinion, to the SCL specified.
B. Lumber
1. Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL): LVL shall be manufactured in accordance with the
manufacturers ICC-ES Report and have properties equal to or greater than as specified
on the Drawings. Lumber species, thickness, etc. shall be such that the nailing capacity is
equal to or better than that specified.
2. Parallel Strand Lumber (PSL): PSL shall be manufactured in accordance with the
on the Drawings. Lumber species, thickness, etc. shall be such that the nailing capacity
is equal to or better than that specified.
3. Laminated Strand Lumber (LSL): LSL shall be manufactured in accordance with the
on the Drawings. Lumber species, thickness, etc. shall be such that the nailing capacity
is equal to or better than that specified.
4. Various SCL products shall only be used where specifically indicated on the Drawings. No
substitutions shall be made without written approval.
C. Adhesive:
1. According to manufacturers ICC ES Report.
D. Types:
1. Sizes, properties and additional information as shown on the Drawings.
E. Accessories to be furnished and installed as indicated on the Drawings are as follows:

1. Blocking, hangers, brackets, straps, ties, etc., shown on Drawings.
2. Miscellaneous accessories incidental to erection and installation of members.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication shall be in compliance with manufacturers ICC ES Report.

1. Fabrication shall be in accordance with best practices with adequate plant equipment and
under supervision of properly qualified personnel.
2. Moisture content of components at time of gluing shall comply with the manufacturers
ICC ES Report.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
commence.
C. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed in discrepant areas

3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect work and materials of this Section during installation, and protect the installed work
and materials of other trades.
B. In the event of damage, make all repairs and replacement necessary to the approval of the
3.3 HANDLING
A. Use equipment and methods that avoid damages that may impair strength of SCL members.
Sharp instruments and unprotected wire rope, chain slings and the like shall not be permitted.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. SCL members are to be erected and installed in accordance with the Drawings and
manufacturers recommendations.
3.5 CLEANUP
of off the site.

SECTION 07 01 51
PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Removal of existing membrane roofing and associated materials in preparation for a new
membrane roof membrane system including asbestos containing materials refer to
Asbestos Survey Report for 545 Diamond Avenue, Red Bluff, CA April 30, 2015;
prepared by Baker Environmental and sections 02 08 10 through 02 08 40.
1.1.2. Repair and renovate existing surfaces in preparation for final finish, and as necessary to
restore to original functional condition.
1.1.3. Disposal of debris and rubbish, including asbestos containing roofing membrane materials
where occurs.
1.2. SUBMITTALS
1.2.1. Demolition Schedule: Provide schedule, in Architect approved format, illustrating

demolition schedule, utility disconnect/connection schedule, coordination with roofing
system installation, and all other aspects of the work.
1.2.1.1. Coordinate schedule with District.
1.2.1.2. Illustrate number of shifts, staff per shift, and total duration of removal.
1.2.2.1. Provide certification that all required permits, disposal site location and
arrangements for transportation and disposal have been obtained.
1.2.2.2. Prior to roof system removal, provide certification of Contractor compliance

with applicable asbestos abatement and air quality regulations, including
licenses, as specified in this Section.
1.2.2.3. Provide submittal demonstrating all training and worker certification has been
completed, including respirator fit tests.
1.2.2.4. Provide documentation demonstrating all staff have received medical

examinations consistent with 8 CCR, Article 4, Section 1529.
1.3. QUALIFICATIONS
1.3.1. Demolition/Roof Removal Firm:
1.3.1.1. Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum 5

1.3.1.2. AHERA Accreditation: As a minimum level of qualification, all abatement staff

shall be accredited as Abatement Workers as required by AHERA regulation
40 CFR 763 C to Sub-part E, issued April 30, 1987.

County of Tehama PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING
JKA #15-100 07 01 51 - 1
1.3.1.3. State and local licenses: All abatement staff shall be trained, certified and
accredited as required by state or local codes and regulations, including
Office of Local Assistance registration for work in schools covered by
AHERA.SAB registration Abatement Workers as required by AHERA
regulation 40 CFR 763 C to Sub-part E, issued April 30, 1987.
1.3.1.4. Training: Prior to commencement of work, all abatement staff shall be

instructed in accordance with OSHA Asbestos Standard 29 CFR 1926.1101,
and shall be knowledgeable in asbestos exposure hazards, use and fitting of
respirators, protective clothing, decontamination procedures and all aspects
of asbestos work, procedures and removal.
1.3.2. Safety and Equipment:
1.3.2.1. Contractor is solely responsible for enforcing worker protection requirements

at least equal to the criteria specified in this Section.
1.3.2.2. Contractor shall provide workers with personally issued and marked
respiratory equipment approved by NIOSH and MSHA and accepted by
OSHA for the type of work being performed.
1.3.2.3. Provide respiratory protection as needed from the time of the first operation
involving contact with asbestos containing materials until acceptance of final
visual air clearance by District. Select respirators during abatement
operations in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101(g).
1.3.2.4. Provide workers with sets of disposable clothing as required by the operation,
including full body coveralls, head covers, gloves and foot covers, sized as
required to properly fit each individual worker.
1.4.1. Convene a pre-installation conference one week prior to commencing work of this Section.
Attendance by roofing system manufacturer's representative is mandatory.
1.4.2. Review roof system installation procedures and coordination required with work of this
Section.
1.5.1. Do not remove existing roofing membrane when weather conditions threaten the integrity
of the building, contents, or intended continued occupancy.
1.5.2. Maintain continuous temporary protection during, and prior to, installation of new roofing
system.
1.5.3. Do not perform any demolition activities when building is occupied.
1.6. COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
1.6.2. Schedule work to coincide with commencement of installation of new roofing system.
1.6.3. Unless otherwise scheduled, remove only that amount scope of existing roof system that
can be re-roofed prior to completion of each day's work.

JKA #15-100 07 01 51 - 2
1.6.4. Coordinate work with affected mechanical and electrical work associated with roof
penetrations.
1.6.5. Superintendent shall be present on job at all times.
1.6.6. Schedule equipment and storage areas on Project site, approved by Construction
Manager.
2.1. PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK
2.1.1. General:
2.1.1.1. Unless noted otherwise, provide products matching existing finish, color,
dimension, and assembly.
2.1.1.2. Provide new products, unless specifically noted otherwise.
2.1.1.3. Provide asbestos free materials.
2.1.1.4. Maintain all fire resistance ratings of existing assemblies and materials.
2.1.1.5. Maintain water and weather tight characteristics of assemblies and materials.
2.2. TEMPORARY PROTECTION PRODUCTS
2.2.1. Provide fire retardant reinforced polyethylene sheeting, 6 mil minimum thickness.
Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection
commence.

JKA #15-100 07 01 51 - 3
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Sweep roof surface clean of loose matter. Remove loose refuse, debris and extra
materials. Dispose off site.
3.2.2. Protect existing items designated to remain.
3.2.2.1. Protect utilities designated to remain.
3.2.2.2. Protect existing trees, plant growth, and features.
3.2.2.3. Protect existing surfaces of adjacent buildings with barriers, protective panels,
tarps and other devices as necessary to avoid damage.
3.2.3. Utility and Service Termination:
3.2.3.1. Locate and identify existing utility, service and irrigation system components
affected by work of this contract. Review existing record drawings, conduct
site investigations and implement all other means necessary to define the
location of systems.
3.2.3.2. Prior to beginning any demolition, properly disconnect all water, gas and
electrical power supply at appropriate disconnect locations. Obtain all
3.2.3.3. Prior to demolition or disconnect, obtain Owners approval that such system
does not impact facilities or systems beyond the extent of this contract.
Coordinate the time and duration of all system disconnects with Owner.
3.2.3.4. Mark location of disconnected systems. Identify and indicate stub-out

locations on Project Record Documents.
3.2.4. Dust and Fume Control:
3.2.4.1. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, fumes and
odor as specified.
3.2.4.2. Coordinate location of roofing equipment staging area with Owner.
3.2.4.3. Direct particular attention to the control of fumes, odor, and dust
contamination of interior areas remaining in use. Continuously monitor
contamination control procedures. Notify Owner immediately if containment
system is breached.
3.2.4.4. Seal all openings into interior areas, including but not limited to windows,
doors, air intake grilles with sheet materials as approved by Architect. Seal
all openings between the attic plenum and functional spaces below with sheet
materials as approved by the Architect.
3.2.4.5. Cover equipment and permanent fixtures to remain in work area with sheet
materials and seal.
3.2.4.6. Dispose of demolished roofing materials and similar components in a manner

to minimize dust generation. Enclose all drop chutes and slides used to
remove roofing materials from roof. See paragraph 3.3.2 of this Section for
criteria applicable to removal of ACM.

JKA #15-100 07 01 51 - 4
3.2.4.7. Construct remote decontamination chamber as required by regulation,
located within area marked and posted with asbestos caution barrier tape.
3.2.5. Unless designated as salvage on drawings, all remaining portions of work are designated
as scrap and become the property and responsibility of the Contractor.
3.2.6. Safety Considerations:
3.2.6.1. Take all precautions at all times to insure public safety. Provide safety
barriers around all equipment and material storage areas as required by
construction manager.
3.2.6.2. Locate equipment and materials as required to preclude danger, disturbance

or interference to public safety and traffic.
3.3. ROOF SYSTEM REMOVAL
3.3.1. Demolish existing roof membrane system and associated flashing components. Demolish
in an orderly and careful manner.
3.3.1.1. Remove roofing membrane as necessary to expose existing deck. Remove

all fasteners, pitch/asphalt deposits and other evidence of original roof
system.
3.3.1.2. Remove parapet base flashing, cants, and other detail components from roof
deck to accommodate termination as shown on drawings.
3.3.1.3. Remove existing wood edge/penetration blocking. Replace per Section 06

11 00, 07 32 16 and 07 52 11.
3.3.2. Take all necessary precautions and steps to comply with current applicable federal and
state regulations concerning the removal, handling, and disposal of Asbestos Containing
Materials (ACM).
3.3.2.1. Contractor shall be currently licensed to remove and dispose of ACM.
3.3.2.2. Provide minimum 6 mil poly sheeting on ground around perimeter of building
and ACM disposal container. Sheeting shall extend minimum of 15 feet from
the building face.
3.3.2.3. Remove roof material in a wet state, spray with encapsulant and place in
properly labeled waste containers. Continuously apply amended water to roof
removal area. Use all necessary precautions to avoid water damage to
substrate and interior.
3.3.2.4. Remove all ACM waste bags from roof at end of each day. Roofing material
may be lowered to a dumpster through an enclosed chute so long as the
material is thoroughly wetted and no visible emissions occur.
3.3.2.5. Load all demolished materials into approved containers.
3.3.2.6. Clean remaining surfaces using wet methods and HEPA vacuum equipment.
3.3.2.7. Remove sealed and labeled containers of ACM and transport for disposal at
an approved disposal site.

JKA #15-100 07 01 51 - 5
3.3.3. Coordinate with Owner the time of day and route to remove demolished materials from
premises.
3.3.4. Flashing Maintenance/Repair:
3.3.4.1. Thoroughly clean all flashings, counter-flashings, gravel stops, drains,

gutters, downspouts and related components designated to remain.
3.3.4.2. Provide all required fasteners, drawbands, sealant and related accessories
where missing or damaged.
3.4. EXISTING ROOF DECK REPAIR
3.4.1. Examine existing roof deck after membrane removal.
3.4.2. Identify damaged or defective roof deck substrates including the following defects:
3.4.2.1. Split or delaminated veneer.
3.4.2.2. Crushed panel edges, panel gaps exceeding 1/8 inch, open "boats", and
panel edges displaced more than 1/8 inch.
3.4.2.3. Evidence of dry-rot, mold, embrittlement or other panel integrity defects.
3.4.2.4. Missing or defective fasteners.
3.4.3. Obtain direction from Architect on repair or removal of identified defects.
3.4.4. Where repairs or replacement is necessary, a contract adjustment will be made for direct
cost and schedule impact of such work. However, no cost increase will be accepted for
consequential or indirect costs.
3.5. TEMPORARY PROTECTION AND ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION
3.5.1. Take particular care at connection between structures designated to remain.
3.5.2. Provide appropriate wall and roof repair detailing to maintain long term water- and
weather-proof assembly at structures designated to remain.
3.5.2.1. Maintain fire resistance of original assembly.
3.5.2.2. Maintain materials and finishes of original assembly.
3.5.2.3. Provide multiple materials, lapped and counterflashed as required to properly

shed water without creating traps.
3.5.3. Provide temporary protective sheeting over uncovered deck surfaces.
3.5.3.1. Retain sheeting in position with ballast or temporary fasteners.
3.5.4. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or repaired deck surface.
3.5.5. Protect adjacent roofing areas used as working platforms or over which materials will be
transported. Repair all damaged surfaces as required to restore to watertight and
functional condition.
3.5.6. Remove materials and dispose of offsite in a legal manner.

JKA #15-100 07 01 51 - 6
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 07 01 51 - 7
SECTION 07 21 00
THERMAL AND ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Batt acoustical insulation for interior wall and ceiling construction.
1.1.2. Batt thermal insulation for exterior wall, floor and ceiling construction.
1.1.3. Semi - rigid board acoustical insulation above interior partitions.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method For Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements And
Thermal Transmission Properties By Means Of The Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus
1.2.2. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method For Steady-State Thermal Transmission
Properties By Means Of The Heat Flow Meter Apparatus
1.2.3. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification For Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation
1.2.4. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification For Mineral Fiber Block And Board Thermal
Insulation.
1.2.5. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification For Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation
For Light Frame Construction And Manufactured Housing.
1.2.6. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method For Surface Burning Characteristics Of Building
Materials
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.1. Materials List:
1.3.1.1. Submit materials list in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.3.1.2. Prepare complete materials list identifying specific insulation types and
applications.
1.3.1.3. Provide agency approval documentation, including ICBO ES reports,

State Fire Marshal Listing, or other approvals.
1.4.1. Comply with Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 7, fire resistivity ratings.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama THERMALANDACOUSTICALINSULATION
JKA#15100 0721001
1.5.1. Protection:
1.5.1.1. Deliver, store and handle all products in a manner to prevent damage and
deterioration.
1.5.1.2. Use all means necessary to protect the installed work and materials of all
other trades.
1.5.1.3. Deliver all materials in unopened bundles, labeled with date of

manufacturer and testing agency approval.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
Architect will consider requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section
01 25 00.
2.2. ACOUSTICAL INSULATION: BATT
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Manville, www.jm.com, or equal.
2.2.2. Type: Glass fiber batt, friction fit, unfaced.
2.2.3.1. Blanket: Glass Fiber, Type 1 per ASTM C 665
2.2.3.1.1. Provide formaldehyde free insulation with acrylic binder.
2.2.3.1.2. Provide minimum 25 percent total recycled content, with

minimum 18 percent post-consumer recycled content.
2.2.3.2. Facing: None.
2.2.3.3. Thickness: 4 inch.
2.2.4. 2.1.4 Fire/Habitability Criteria:
2.2.4.1. Flame Spread Classification: Maximum 25 per ASTM E 84
2.2.4.2. Smoke Developed Classification: Maximum of 50 per ASTM E 84
2.2.4.3. Thermal Resistance: Minimum R-11 per ASTM C 177 or C 518.
2.3. THERMAL INSULATION: EXTERIOR WALL
2.3.2. Type: Glass fiber batt, staple flange, faced.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0721002
2.3.3.1. Blanket: Glass Fiber per ASTM C 665.
2.3.3.2. Exposed Facer: Provide reinforced foil facing, with stapling flange, with
maximum 25 flame spread classification and maximum 450 smoke
contributed classification where facer is not in substantial contact with the
unexposed surface of the ceiling finish.
2.3.3.3. Concealed Facer: Provide kraft paper faced insulation without fire and
smoke rating where facer is in substantial direct contact with unexposed
surface of wall finish.
2.3.4. Fire/Habitability Criteria
2.3.4.1. Flame Spread Classification: Maximum 25 per ASTM E 84
2.3.4.2. Smoke Developed Classification: Maximum of 50 per ASTM E 84
2.3.4.3. Thermal Resistance: R-11 [R-19] value, per ASTM C 177 or C 518.
2.3.4.4. Perm Rating (Foil facer): Maximum 0.02 grains/hr/sf/in Hg per ASTM C
665.
2.3.4.5. Perm Rating (Kraft facer): Maximum 1.0 grains/hr/sf/in Hg per ASTM C
665.
2.4. THERMAL INSULATION: ROOF ASSEMBLY @ ENTRY
2.4.2. Type: Glass fiber batt, faced.
2.4.3.1. Blanket: Glass Fiber per ASTM C 665.
2.4.3.1.1. Provide formaldehyde free insulation with acrylic binder.
2.4.3.1.2. Provide minimum 25 percent total recycled content, with

minimum 18 percent post-consumer recycled content.
2.4.3.2. Exposed Facer: Provide reinforced foil facing, with stapling flange, with
maximum 25 flame spread classification and maximum 450 smoke
contributed classification where facer is not in substantial contact with the
unexposed surface of the ceiling finish.
2.4.3.3. Concealed Facer: Provide kraft paper faced insulation without fire and
smoke rating where facer is in substantial direct contact with unexposed
surface of ceiling or floor finish.
2.4.4. Fire/Habitability Criteria:
2.4.4.1. Flame Spread Classification (Batt): Maximum 25 per ASTM E 84
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0721003
2.4.4.2. Smoke Developed Classification (Batt): Maximum of 50 per ASTM E 84
2.4.4.3. Thermal Resistance: R-30 value per ASTM C 177 or C 518.
2.4.4.4. Perm Rating (Foil facer): Maximum 0.02 grains/hr/sf/in Hg per ASTM C
665.
2.4.4.5. Perm Rating (Kraft facer): Maximum 1.0 grains/hr/sf/in Hg per ASTM C
665.
2.4.5. Accessory Products:
2.4.5.1. Wire Lacing: 18 gage pre-stretched steel wire, with approved anchor
system.
2.4.5.2. Insulation Tape: As recommended by manufacturer, maximum flame

spread value of 25.
2.4.5.2.1. R-Value: 8.0
2.5. INSULATION STICK PINS
2.5.1. Provide Midwest or equal stick pin type insulation hangers of proper length to
accommodate insulation thickness, with 2 inch diameter insulation washers with dome
cap finish
2.5.2. Adhesive: Provide manufacturers recommended epoxy adhesive. Self adhesive pins
are not acceptable.
2.6. SEMI-RIGID BOARD INSULATION ASSEMBLY
2.6.1. Acceptable Manufacturer: USG.
2.6.2. Type: Mineral fiber insulation material.
2.6.3. Product Characteristics: Insulation.
Series:USGThermafiberCW80CurtainwallWallInsulation.
2.6.3.1. Type: Mineral fiber insulation.
2.6.3.2. Thickness: 3 inch.
2.6.3.3. Density: Nominal 8.0 PCF.
2.6.3.4. Facing: FSP Foil facing.
2.6.4.1. Flame Spread Classification: Maximum 25 per ASTM E 84.
2.6.4.2. Smoke Developed Classification: Maximum of 5 per ASTM E 84.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0721004
3.1.1. Inspection:
properly commence.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions and as

specified.
3.2.2. Install faced insulation with facing to occupied room side. Install non-rated facing in
contact with unexposed surface of finish materials.
3.2.3. Do not install insulation over recessed light fixtures.
3.2.4. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Fit insulation into crevices, spaces at outlet boxes
and similar penetrations.
3.2.5. Maintain continuous foil faced vapor barrier. Provide fire resistive tape at all edges or
penetrations of foil faced insulation, including batt ends.
3.2.6. Where wall insulation cavity exceeds 8 feet high, provide blocking or other approved
support at 8 feet on center.
3.2.7. Wire Lacing Support Method:
3.2.7.1. Provide wire lacing method at roof insulation where spacing of framing
members exceeds batt width.
3.2.7.2. Provide wire lacing diagonally at bottom of joist cavity, fastened 16 inches
on center, staggered, and fastened to each joist in an approved manner.
3.2.7.3. Adjust lacing as necessary to provide taut and consistent support for
insulation batts.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0721005
3.2.7.4. Install insulation on lacing supports. Provide additional wire lacing at
unsupported ends of batts.
3.2.7.5. Tape all batt ends and penetrations.
3.2.8. Staple Flange Application:
3.2.8.1. Staple batt through flange at wood framing.
3.2.8.2. Keep facer taut and without buckles.
3.2.8.3. Tape all batt ends and penetrations.
3.2.9. Stick Pin Application:
3.2.9.1. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions

and as specified.
3.2.9.2. Space stick pins at 12 inches on center each way with approved adhesive.
3.2.9.3. Install curtain wall insulation over stick pins. Cover all areas. Install with
foil facing to occupied room side. Install washer at all clips.
3.2.9.4. Tape all insulation batt joints with specified foil backed tape.
3.3. RIGID BOARD INSTALLATION

specified.
3.3.2. Provide fire resistive tape at all edges or penetrations of exposed faced insulation.
3.3.3. Trim insulation neatly to fit space between roof sheathing and top of partition. Staple
or otherwise fasten to solid blocking or joist. In addition, provide wire lacing as backing
for boards.
3.3.4. Wire Lacing Support Method:
3.3.4.1. Provide wire lacing diagonally from joist/solid blocking to top of plate at 16
inches on center, fastened in an approved manner. Provide additional
wire lacing at unsupported ends of board.
3.3.4.2. Adjust lacing as necessary to provide taut and consistent support for
insulation batts.
3.3.4.3. Wire insulation to lacing at midpoint of board.
3.3.4.4. Tape all board ends.
3.4. RIGID BOARD INSTALLATION

specified.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0721006
3.4.2. Tape all board ends.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0721007
SECTION 07 26 19
TOPICAL MOISTURE VAPOR MITIGATION SYSTEM
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1. Drawings, general provisions of the Contract, and other related construction
documents such as Division 01, Division 03, and Division 09 specifications that apply
to this Section
1.2. SUMMARY
1.2.1. This Section includes two-coat, 100% solids epoxy moisture management system
formulated to suppress excessive moisture vapor in new or existing concrete prior to
the installation of an ARDEX Topping with sealer, or Underlayment with flooring.
1.2.1.1. ARDEX MC ULTRA Two-Coat Moisture Control System consisting of

two components: (1.) ARDEX MC ULTRA PRIMER and (2.) ARDEX MC
ULTRA SEALER
1.2.1.2. ARDEX V1200 Self-Leveling Underlayment
1.2.1.3. ARDEX ARIDFIX Two-Part, Low Viscosity Rigid Polyurethane
1.2.1.4. ARDEX ARIDSEAL RAPID PLUS Fast Setting Semi-Rigid Joint Sealant
1.2.1.5. ARDEX K 301 Self-Leveling Exterior Concrete Topping
1.2.1.6. ARDEX MRP Moisture Resistant Patch
1.2.2. Related Sections include the following:
1.2.2.1. Division 09 Flooring Sections
1.3. REFERENCES
1.3.1. ASTM F2170 - Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using In Situ Probes
SECTION 07 26 19 - 2 MODIFIED 3/3/2014 TOPICAL MOISTURE MITIGATION
SYSTEM ARDEX ENGINEERED CEMENTS
1.3.2. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient
Flooring
1.3.3. ASTM C1583 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Concrete Surfaces and
the Bond Strength or Tensile Strength of Concrete Repair and Overlay Materials by
Direct Tension
1.3.4. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
County of Tehama TOPICAL MOISTURE VAPOR MITIGATION SYSTEM
JKA #15-100 07 26 19 - 1
1.3.5. ASTM D1308 - Chemical Resistance of Finishes
1.3.6. ASTM F3010 13 Two-Component Resin Based Membrane-Forming Moisture

Mitigation Systems for Use Under Resilient Floor Coverings.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Test Results: Moisture Vapor Emission Test Data
1.4.2. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each
material and product used. Include manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets.
1.4.3. Qualification Data: For Installer
1.4.4. Manufacturer Pre-Installation Checklist
1.5.1. Installation of the ARDEX product must be completed by a factory trained applicator,
such as an ARDEX LevelMaster Elite or ARDEX Choice Contractor, using mixing
equipment and tools approved by the manufacturer. Please contact ARDEX
Engineered Cements (724) 203-5000 for a list of recommended installers.
1.5.2. Manufacturer Experience: Provide products of this section by companies which have
successfully specialized in production of this type of work for not less than 5 years.
Contact Manufacturer Representative prior to installation.
1.6. WARRANTY
1.6.1. 15-Year ARDEX MC ULTRA Moisture Control Warranty
1.6.1.1. Certified applicator must file a pre-installation checklist with the

manufacturer and receive written confirmation of the approval to proceed
in order to obtain the extended 15-year ARDEX MC ULTRA Moisture
Control Warranty.
1.7.1. Deliver products in original packaging, labeled with product identification,

manufacturer, batch number and shelf life.
1.7.2. Store products in a dry area with temperature maintained between 50 and 85 F (10
and 29 C) and Protect from direct sunlight.
1.7.3. Handle products in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations.
1.8. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.8.1. Do not install material below 50 F (10 C) surface and air temperatures. These
temperatures must also be maintained during and for 48 hours after the installation of
products included in this section. Install quickly if substrate is warm and follow warm
weather instructions available from the ARDEX Technical Service Department.
JKA #15-100 07 26 19 - 2
2.1. TOPICAL MOISTURE MITIGATION SYSTEM
2.1.1. Two-Coat Moisture Control System for Concrete to Receive ARDEX Toppings and
Underlayments.
2.1.1.1. Acceptable Products:
2.1.1.1.1. ARDEX MC ULTRA; Manufactured by ARDEX

Engineered Cements: 400 Ardex Park Drive, Aliquippa,
PA 15001 USA 724-203-5000
2.1.1.2. Performance and Physical Properties: Meet or exceed the following values
for material cured at 70 F+/-3F (21 C+/-3C) and 50% +/-5% relative
humidity:
2.1.1.2.1. Application: Roller
2.1.1.2.2. Material Requirements on CSP 3 Prepared Concrete:
2.1.1.2.2.1. Max 170 sq. ft. per mixed unit of ARDEX MC

ULTRA PRIMER.
2.1.1.2.2.2. Max 100 sq. ft. per mixed unit of ARDEX MC

ULTRA SEALER.
2.1.1.2.3. Permeability: 0.02 perms, ASTM E96
2.1.1.2.4. 14 pH solution: No effect, ASTM D1308
2.1.1.2.5. Working Time: 30 minutes
2.1.1.2.6. Pot Life: 30 minutes
2.1.1.2.7. VOC: 0g/l, calculated SCAQMD 1113
2.2. HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
2.2.1. Hydraulic Cement-based Self-Leveling Underlayment
2.2.1.1. Acceptable Products:
2.2.1.1.1. ARDEX V1200; Manufactured by ARDEX Engineered

Cements: 400 Ardex Park Drive, Aliquippa, PA 15001
USA, (724) 203-5000, www.ardexamericas.com
2.2.1.2. Performance and Physical Properties: Meet or exceed the following values
for material cured at 70 F+/-3F (21 C+/-3C) and 50% +/-5% relative
humidity:
JKA #15-100 07 26 19 - 3
2.2.1.2.1. Application: Barrel Mix or Pump
2.2.1.2.2. Flow Time: 10 minutes
2.2.1.2.3. Initial Set: Approx. 30 minutes
2.2.1.2.4. Final Set: Approx. 60 minutes
2.2.1.2.5. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi at 28 days,

ASTM C109M.
2.2.1.2.6. Flexural Strength: 1000 psi at 28 days, ASTM C78.
2.2.1.2.7. VOC: 0 g/l, calculated SCAQMD 1113
2.3. WATER: WATER SHALL BE CLEAN, POTABLE, AND SUFFICIENTLY COOL (NOT WARMER
THAN 70F).
3. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. PREPARATION
3.1.1. Concrete Subfloors: Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3.1.1.1. Prior to proceeding please refer to ASTM F710 Standard Practice for
Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. All concrete
subfloors must be sound, solid, clean, and free of all oil, grease, dirt, curing
compounds and any substance that might act as a bond breaker before
application.
3.1.1.2. Mechanical preparation of the surface is required to obtain a minimum

ICRI concrete surface profile of 3 (CSP 3). This substrate preparation must
be by mechanical means, such as shot blasting.
3.1.1.3. The concrete must have a minimum tensile strength of at least 200 psi
when tested in accordance with ASTM C1583. The concrete surface can
be damp, but must be free of standing water.
3.1.1.4. Prior to beginning the installation, measure the relative humidity within the
concrete (ASTM F2170). For these relative humidity methods, the RH shall
not exceed 98%.
3.1.1.5. If the concrete substrate is too uneven to provide a uniform film thickness
of the ARDEX MC ULTRA (typically CSP 6 or higher), the substrate can
be pre-smoothed using ARDEX K 301 Self-Leveling Exterior Concrete
Topping or ARDEX MRP Moisture Resistant Patch.

JKA #15-100 07 26 19 - 4
3.2. APPLICATION:
3.2.1. Examine substrates and conditions under which materials will be installed. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2.2. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper sequence of construction.
Protect adjacent areas from contact due to mixing and handling of materials.
3.2.3. Mixing: Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions and the following.
3.2.3.1. Each individual unit of ARDEX MC ULTRA PRIMER AND ARDEX MC

SEALER contains separate, premeasured quantities of the hardener (Part
A) and the resin (Part B). The hardening agent (Part A) is added to the
resin (Part B).
3.2.3.2. After opening each container, stir the individual components thoroughly
before blending. The hardening agent (Part B) is added to the resin (Part
A). Pour all of the hardener into the resin portion and stir thoroughly for a
minimum of 3 minutes using a low speed drill and an epoxy mixing paddle.
Once mixed, pour some of the epoxy back into the hardener container, stir
for 10 seconds, and then pour all of the contents back into the resin
container. Mix for an additional 30 seconds before applying.
3.2.4. Application: Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions and the following.
3.2.4.1. Apply the first coat of freshly mixed ARDEX MC ULTRA PRIMER
(yellow) to the prepared concrete surface in a uniform direction at an
application rate of up to 170 sq. ft. per unit to achieve a coating thickness
of 9 - 10 mils. Use a short-nap paint roller or notched squeegee for
smoother surfaces, and a longer nap roller for more uneven substrates.
ARDEX MC ULTRA PRIMER can also be applied with a paintbrush for
hard to reach areas and in corners.
3.2.4.2. While the first coat is still in a fresh state (maximum 30 minutes), broadcast
an excess of fine sand that is less than 1/50 of an inch in gran size (98.5%
passing sieve size #35 or #30) consistently over the entire area. Avoid
standing or walking on the freshly applied sealer when broadcasting the
sand. Allow this coat to dry for a minimum of 6 hours at 70F before
applying the sealer coat.
3.2.4.3. Once an area has been completely covered with sand, the surface of the
sand can be lightly walked on being careful not to expose the sealer at any
time. Use about 1lb. of sand per square foot of area. Once the sand
broadcasting process is complete, avoid all additional traffic over the
surface for a minimum of 6 hours.
Note: When broadcasting the sand use a NIOSH approved dust mask in
conformance with OSHA requirements regarding handling of sand.
3.2.4.4. Working in a direction that is 90 angle to direction that the first coat was
applied, apply the sealer coat of ARDEX MC ULTRA SEALER (green)
at a coverage rate of 100 sq. ft. per unit (14 - 16 mils).
JKA #15-100 07 26 19 - 5
3.2.4.5. While this second coat is still in a fresh state (maximum 30 minutes),
broadcast an excess of fine sand that is less than 1/50 of an inch in grain
size (98.5% passing sieve size #35 or #30) consistently over the entire
area. Avoid standing or walking on the freshly applied sealer when
broadcasting the sand.
3.2.4.6. Once an area has been completely covered with sand, the surface of the
sand can be walked on being careful not to expose the sealer at any time.
Use about 1lb. of sand per square foot of area. Once the sanding process
is complete, avoid all additional traffic over the surface for a minimum of
16 hours.
Note: When broadcasting the sand use a NIOSH approved dust mask in
conformance with OSHA requirements regarding handling of sand.
3.2.4.7. After 16 hours, broom sweep and vacuum the surface to remove all loose
sand. Protect this surface from construction traffic and dirt and debris
using Masonite or similar until the ARDEX or topping is installed.
3.2.4.8. The clean prepared surface of sand is the priming system for the ARDEX
Underlayment, such as ARDEX V1200 Self-Leveling Concrete
Underlayment. No additional priming is required. Install the ARDEX
Underlayment in accordance with printed instructions found in the
corresponding technical brochure.
3.2.4.9. It is not necessary to re-test the substrate for moisture emissions prior to
installing the coating or floor covering.
3.3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.3.1. Where specified, field sampling of the ARDEX products is to be done by taking an
entire unopened bag/unit of the product being installed to an independent testing
facility to perform testing. There is no in-situ test method applicable for this system.
3.4. PROTECTION
3.4.1. Prior to the installation of the finish flooring, the surface of the underlayment should be
protected from abuse by other trades by the use of plywood, Masonite or other suitable
protection course.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 07 26 19 - 6
SECTION 07 54 19
PVC ROOFING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Single ply PVC reinforced roofing membrane system, mechanically fastened.
1.1.2. Single ply PVC reinforced roof flashing membrane, flashing metal, termination bar,
fasteners, prefabricated inside and outside corners, vent pipe boots, and joint coverstrips.
1.1.3. Roof insulation, separation layers and overlayment.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM D 4434 - Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet Roofing.
1.2.2. Part 2, Title 24, California Code of Regulations, including Chapter 15.
1.2.3. Part 6, Title 24, California Code of Regulations.
1.2.4. NRCA - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
1.2.5. FM - Roof Assembly Classifications.
1.2.6. UL - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory.
1.2.7. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
1.3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.3.1. Provide a mechanically-attached, thermoplastic (PVC) membrane including, but not

limited to, flashings and other components to comprise a weathertight roofing system.
1.3.2. Roofing System Wind Design: Provide system successfully tested by a qualified testing
and inspecting agency, including FMG or UL, to resist uplift pressure calculated according
to ASCE 7 as modified by Chapter 16A, Part 2, Title 24, CCR.
1.3.3. Use of EPDM or TPO single ply membrane systems is prohibited.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.2. Product Data:
1.4.2.1. Submit product data indicating membrane and insulation materials, base
flashing materials, and accessories. Include certification of compliance with
specified membrane material thickness.
1.4.2.2. Provide total system breakdown, by layer, in weight and composition.

County of Tehama PVC ROOFING
JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 1
1.4.2.3. Provide letter of certification, signed by roofing manufacturer, that all products
used in completed roof assembly are asbestos free.
1.4.2.4. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions to include fastener spacing

requirement.
1.4.2.5. Provide shop drawing details where proposed installation method varies from
contract documents.
1.4.2.6. Provide letter demonstrating compliance with specified energy conservation

criteria.
1.4.2.7. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products are physically and chemically
compatible with each other and meet listed ASTM or Federal Specifications.
1.4.2.8. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products comply with current safety and
environmental regulations, including hazardous materials labeling and air
quality/VOC regulations.
1.4.2.9. Provide sample copy of the manufacturers and contractors warranty.
1.4.2.10. Provide tapered plan layout for use of tapered insulation to include crickets,
saddles, and related components, etc. along with fastener density per board.
1.4.3. Calculations:
1.4.3.1. Submit engineering test data acceptable to Architect demonstrating

compliance with wind resistance criteria. Provide California registered
structural engineers stamp and seal.
1.4.4. Installation:
1.4.4.1. Installers Certification: Submit written certification from manufacturer that

installer has been trained and is approved to install specified systems under
the specified warranty.
1.4.4.2. Manufacturers Certification: Submit written certification from manufacturer

that roof deck and details comply with manufacturers recommendations and
are suitable for application, climate zone, slope, and code constraints.
1.4.5. Samples:
1.4.5.1. Submit two 8 inch x 12 inch factory samples of sheet roofing materials.
1.4.5.2. Submit 24 inch square sample of completed assembly, showing seams,

flashing transition, and insulation, installed over specified substrates.
1.5.1. Manufacturer:
1.5.1.1. Manufacturer shall have produced or been responsible for the manufacture
of single ply roofing systems for a period of 10 years prior to beginning work
of this Section, and shall have the capability to provide the specified products
in compliance with the delivery and quantity criteria for the Project.

JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 2
1.5.1.2. Manufacturer shall provide evidence of a minimum of 5 roof installations
within 500 miles of the project site, similar in scope of the specified roofing
with a minimum of 10 years of successful performance.
1.5.1.3. Manufacturer shall provide factory trained technical field inspectors for initial,
interim and final inspections. Sales staff may not be used to provide site
inspections.
1.5.2. Installer:
1.5.2.1. Installing company shall have minimum of 5 years experience in roofing work
similar in scope of the specified roofing, and has installed a minimum of 5
projects similar in material system, scope and scale.
1.5.2.2. Installer shall have been trained and is be currently approved by membrane
manufacturer.
1.5.2.3. For installation of work, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the skills required, and who are completely familiar with the
manufacturers' recommended methods of installation as well as the
requirements of this work.
1.5.2.4. Install roofing system under the direction of a full-time supervisor/foreman on

Project site during time roofing work is in progress. Supervisor shall have a
minimum of 5 years experience in roofing work similar to nature and scope of
specified roofing, has been trained within one year by the manufacturer, and
has installed similar applications of the specified products within one year
prior to beginning work of this Section.
1.5.3. Roof Inspection and Quality Assurance Procedures:
1.5.3.1. Owner may elect to have the entire roofing system application reviewed
during application by an inspection service knowledgeable regarding the
application of this type of roofing system, and make written report to Architect
of all variance from Specifications and established roofing practices as
outlined in referenced standards.
1.6.1. Fire Hazard Classification: Provide UL Class A systems.
1.6.2. Provide materials clearly marked with UL labels, CRRC ratings, ASTM standards and
hazardous materials designations.
1.6.3. Comply with all safety and regulations and manufacturers recommendations, including
those associated with cold adhesive product systems.
1.6.4. Wind Resistance:
1.6.4.1. Provide wind resistant roof system in compliance with methods defined by
Section 1609A.6 and 1504.3, Part 2, Title 24, CCR for minimum basic wind
speeds of 90 MPH.

JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 3
1.7.1. Convene a pre-installation conference two weeks prior to commencing work of this
Section. Provide minimum 2 weeks advance notice to Owner and Architect of scheduled
date. Comply with provisions of Section 01 31 13. Attendance by material manufacturer's
representative is mandatory.
1.7.2. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.
1.8.1. Protection:
deterioration. Store membrane rolls lying down on pallets and fully protected
from the weather with clean canvas tarpaulins. Unvented polyethylene
tarpaulins are not acceptable.
1.8.1.2. Provide packaging as recommended by manufacturer. Do not expose to

elements prior to installation.
1.8.1.3. Use all means necessary to protect the installed work and materials of other
trades. Store all adhesives at temperatures between 40 degrees F and 80
degrees F.
1.8.2. Provide materials clearly marked with UL labels, ASTM standards and hazardous
materials designations. All products delivered to the job site are to be in the original
unopened containers or wrappings bearing all seals and approvals.
1.8.3. Comply with all safety and regulations and manufacturers recommendations, including
those associated with adhesive product systems.
1.8.4. Replacements:
1.8.4.1. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of Architect without additional cost to Owner.
1.9.1. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather, or when rain is anticipated
during work period.
1.9.2. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp, wet or frozen deck surface, including
dew/condensate.
1.9.3. Do not apply roofing membrane components designated to remain above freezing when
ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F, or anticipated to fall below 40 degrees F
during work period.
1.9.4. Maintain all roll products above 40 degrees F for 24 hours prior to installation.

JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 4
1.10. WARRANTY/GUARANTEE
1.10.1. Manufacturer's Warranty:
1.10.1.1. Provide Owner with roofing system manufacturer's warranty complying with
the following:
1.10.1.1.1. Type: Non-prorated, unlimited dollar amount of recovery for

labor and material necessary to maintain roof system in a
watertight condition, equal to Sika Sarnafil 20 Year Full
System Warranty. .
1.10.1.1.2. Term: 20 years, including all supplied membrane

components, accessories, overlayment board, insulation,
fasteners, transition flashing, drain and curb flashing, and
expansion joint components.
1.10.1.1.3. Warranty shall have no exclusions of any kind for standing or

ponding water.
1.10.2. Contractor's Guarantee:
1.10.2.1. Provide Owner with written Performance Agreement on Contractor's

letterhead, signed by Contractor and roofing system installer.
1.10.2.2. Include the following requirements in Performance Agreement:
1.10.2.2.1. For a period of 5 years commencing from date of final

acceptance of the Project, we agree to make inspections and
repairs to defects or leaks in the roof system within 24 hours
of receipt of notice from Owner, and restore affected areas to
the standard of the original Specifications as soon as weather
permits.
1.10.2.2.2. Inspections and repairs will be made without additional cost

to Owner, unless it is determined that leaks or defects were
caused by abuse to the roof by others or by failure of work
installed by others not included in this Contract.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.2. ROOFING MEMBRANE
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Sika Sarnafil, Duro-last, Johns Manville, Carlisle or equal
2.2.2. System Type 1: Mechanically attached, single ply membrane, over overlayment board
over insulation assembly over metal deck.
2.2.3. Series: Sarnafil S-327 Series.

JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 5
2.2.4. Membrane Characteristics:
2.2.4.1. Type: Polyester scrim reinforced polyvinyl chloride (PVC), complying with
ASTM D 4434, Classification Type III.
2.2.4.2. Thickness:
2.2.4.2.1. Total Thickness: 80 mils nominal, minimum membrane

thickness at any point of 78 mils, tested per ASTM D 751.
2.2.4.2.2. Membrane thickness above reinforcement: Minimum 22 mils

polymer thickness above reinforcement, tested per ASTM D
4434.
2.2.4.2.3. Provide independent test data documenting required

thickness.
2.2.4.3. Sheet Width: As necessary to minimize field seams.
2.2.5. Membrane Performance Characteristics:
2.2.5.1. Breaking Strength: Minimum 200 lbf/inch per ASTM D 751.
2.2.5.2. Elongation at Break: Minimum 20 percent per ASTM D 751.
2.2.5.3. Seam Strength: Minimum 75 percent of breaking strength per ASTM D 751.
2.2.5.4. Tearing Strength: Minimum 45 lbf per ASTM D 1004.
2.2.5.5. Linear Dimensional Change: Less than 0.5 percent per ASTM D 1204.
2.2.5.6. Low Temperature Bend: Pass at 40 degrees F per ASTM D 2136.
2.2.5.7. Accelerated Weathering Test after 10,000 hours, tested per ASTM G 53 and
ASTM D 2565:
2.2.5.7.1. Cracking (7 x magnification): none.
2.2.5.7.2. Discoloration (by observation): negligible.
2.2.5.7.3. Crazing (7 x magnification): none.
2.2.5.8. Retention of Properties after Heat Aging of Membrane after 168 hours at 194
degrees F per ASTM D 3045:
2.2.5.8.1. Breaking Strength (D 751): Minimum 90 percent of original.
2.2.5.8.2. Elongation (D 751): Minimum 90 percent of original.
2.2.5.9. Weight Change after water immersion: Maximum 3 percent per ASTM D 570.
2.2.5.10. Static Puncture resistance: Pass at 33 lbs per ASTM 5602.
2.2.5.11. Dynamic Puncture resistance: Pass at 20 lbs per ASTM 5635.
2.2.6. Membrane Fire/Safety/Habitability Characteristics:

JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 6
2.2.6.1. Wind Classification: Minimum Factory Mutual, Class I, I-90 Classification or
as required to comply with specified wind loads.
2.2.6.2. Fire Hazard Classification: UL Class A.
2.2.6.3. Energy Conservation Criteria for main roof membrane and flashings:
2.2.6.3.1. Color: Energy Smart White
2.2.6.3.2. Listing: Provide Cool Roof Rating Council listing.
2.2.6.3.3. Reflectivity (aged): Minimum value of 0.70, certified per

Section 118 and 143, Part 6, Title 24, CCR.
2.2.6.3.4. Emissivity (aged): 0.75, certified per Section 118 and 143,
Part 6, Title 24, CCR.
2.3. ROOF INSULATION
2.3.1. Manufacturer/Supplier: Sarnafil.
2.3.2. Series/Type: Sarnatherm, tapered, polyisocyanurate insulation board with approved

facers.
2.3.2.1. Minimum insulation assembly thickness: 5 1/4 inches.
2.3.2.2. Provide tapered insulation as required to achieve R - 30 value, consisting of

layers made up of maximum board thickness as established by insulation
manufacturer.
2.3.2.3. Where required, provide insulation tapered at 3/8 inch per foot slope, tapered
as shown on drawings
2.3.2.4. Where required to create roof curb transitions and crickets, provide insulation
transitions, shaped as required.
2.3.3.1. R-Value: Minimum 6.0 based on one inch thickness, conditioned per ASTM
C 518 and Ric/TIMA Bulletin 281-1.
2.3.3.2. Density: Minimum 2.0 pounds/cubic foot per ASTM D 1622
2.3.3.3. Fire Rating: UL Listed and Classified as a part of a Class A listed Roof
Assembly.
2.4. OVERLAYMENT BOARD
2.4.1. Provide Georgia Pacific, Dens-Deck or equal, glass mat faced gypsum panel, minimum
1/4 inch thick.

JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 7
2.5. ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
2.5.1. Membrane and Insulation/overlayment board Fastener: Factory-coated steel fasteners

and metal plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, heavy duty,
designed for resistance to back-out, designed for fastening roofing membrane
components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength to achieve
specified wind resistance, and provided by the roofing system manufacturer.
2.5.2. Termination Stop: Extruded aluminum, 6063-T-6, 1/8 inch thickness. .
2.5.3. Miscellaneous fasteners, termination bars, anchors, nails, straps, bars:
2.5.3.1. Provide corrosion resistant hot dip galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless
steel.
2.5.3.2. Provide non-reactive separators to galvanic corrosion.
2.5.3.3. Metal to masonry/concrete fasteners: Provide expansion type fasteners with

stainless steel pins, with minimum embedment of 1-1/4 inch and approved for
such use by the fastener manufacturer.
2.5.3.4. Wood fasteners; Provide fasteners with minimum embedment of 1 inch and
approved for such use by the fastener manufacturer.
2.6. FLASHING MEMBRANES
2.6.1. Provide PVC membrane systems compatible with specified system and as recommended
by roofing system manufacturer.
2.6.2. Provide reinforced flashing membranes unless non-reinforced flashing materials are
specifically approved by Architect.
2.6.3. Where required by application, provide PVC-coated, heat-weldable sheet metal: 25

gauge, G90 galvanized metal sheet with a 20 mil unsupported PVC membrane laminated
on one side, white color.
2.6.4. Provide prefabricated inside and outside corners, pipe boots, penetration pans and related
components, minimum 0.060 inch thick.
2.7. WALKWAY PROTECTION
2.7.1. Provide Sarnafil Crossgrip Walkway, with Sarnafil loop attachment to membrane.
2.8. ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS
2.8.1. Provide adhesives, sealants, sealers, cleaners and related system components as
recommended by roof membrane manufacturer, compliant with local VOC criteria, and
subject to Architects approval.
2.9. NAILERS AND CANTS
2.9.1. Provide pressure treated Douglas Fir per Section 06 10 53 for all nailers and blocking.
2.9.2. Where required for transitions, provide manufacturers approved cant, with minimum 3 inch
nominal face.
JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 8
2.10. OTHER PRODUCTS
Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection:
commence.
3.1.1.2.1. Verify that deck is supported and secured.
3.1.1.2.2. Verify that deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions,

waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains, valleys or
eaves.
3.1.1.2.3. Verify all roof drainage systems are functioning.
3.1.1.2.4. Verify that surface substrate is properly prepared and dry.
3.1.1.2.5. Verify that roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and
vents through roof are solidly set, and blocking and cant
strips are in place.
3.1.1.2.6. Verify that PVC membrane will not be in contact with heavy
oils, asphalt, bitumen residue, or other contaminants.
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Install wood nailers at perimeter of openings.
3.2.2. Conduct fastener pullout tests in accordance with the latest revision of the SPRI/ANSI
Fastener Pullout Standard to verify condition of deck/substrate and to confirm expected
pullout values. Report discrepancies and results to Architect and membrane manufacturer
before proceeding.
3.2.3. Provide approved UL approved fire extinguishers readily accessible at areas of roofing
work. Strictly comply with all state, local, and federal fire and safety regulations.
3.2.4. Cover roof drains to prevent debris entry. Remove cover at end of each days work.

JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 9
3.2.5. Verify crickets and transitions are constructed in compliance with roof deck criteria. Fill all
voids, splits and holes.
3.2.6. Verify roof drainage provides minimum 1/4 inch per foot fall at all areas, including cricket
valleys.
3.2.7. Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly constructed roofing as a walking surface or
for equipment movement and storage. Where such access is absolutely required, provide
all necessary protection and barriers to segregate the work area and to prevent damage
to adjacent areas. Provide protection path consisting of plywood over polyester felt or
insulation board for all new and existing roof areas which receive rooftop traffic during
construction.
3.3. BOARD INSULATION AND OVERLAYMENT APPLICATION
3.3.1. Install insulation and overlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as
specified.
3.3.2. Place boards so that all joints are staggered 12 inches minimum in each direction.
3.3.3. Lay boards in moderate contact without forcing. Cut to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and
around penetrations in roof.
3.3.4. Install all insulation in a minimum of 2 layers, fastening as specified.
3.3.5. Mechanically fasten insulation and overlayment board to deck in accordance with
specified wind resistance criteria. Utilize fasteners at spacing intervals as recommended
by the roofing manufacturer and in compliance with Factory Mutual wind resistance
calculations.
3.3.6. Where insulation is designated as tapered, install as required to provide continuous

smooth drainage flow. Shape all joints to avoid edges and gaps.
3.3.7. Do not apply more insulation and overlayment board than can be covered with membrane
in same day.
3.3.8. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
3.4. FIELD MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
3.4.1. General:
3.4.1.1. Install single ply roofing system per manufacturers specification and as
described in this Section.
3.4.1.2. Shingle membrane overlaps with the flow of water where possible.
3.4.1.3. Tack welding of PVC membrane full or half-width rolls for purposes of
temporary restraint during installation on windy days is not permitted.
3.4.1.4. Install only when temperature is a minimum of 40 degrees F., and rising.
3.4.1.5. Observe all safety, ventilation, and fire hazard requirements.
3.4.2. Membrane Installation:

JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 10
3.4.2.1. Unroll membrane roofing and position without stretching membrane and allow
membrane to relax.
3.4.2.2. Install membrane parallel with the perimeter edge.
3.4.2.3. The number of adjacent half-rolls shall be in accordance with Factory Mutual
requirements.
3.4.2.4. In corner areas where perimeter half-rolls intersect, add rows of fasteners and
plates over the top of the half-rolls and weld a PVC coverstrip above them for
water tightness
3.4.2.5. Remove creased or damaged sections of membrane.
3.4.2.6. Provide minimum six inches wide seam overlaps, except for hand-welding of
certain details and flashings.
3.4.2.7. Install fasteners around all perimeters, at the base curbs, vent pipes, and all
other roof penetrations according to perimeter rate of attachment and in
accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3.4.3. Welding of Overlaps:
3.4.3.1. Use hot air welding equipment as approved by membrane manufacturer.
3.4.3.2. Weld only clean and dry membrane.
3.4.3.3. Use only automatic welding machines for hot-air welding of field seams. Use
of hand-held welding tools to perform field seaming is prohibited.
3.4.3.3.1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and local codes for

electric supply, grounding and over current protection
observed.
3.4.3.3.2. Provide dedicated circuit for welding machines. Do not

operate other equipment off dedicated circuit.
3.4.3.3.3. Metal tracks may be used over the deck membrane and
under the machine welder to minimize or eliminate wrinkles.
3.4.3.4. Use hand-held welding tools for detail/flashing applications only.
3.5. FLASHING SYSTEM INSTALLATION:
3.5.1. PVC Membrane Flashings:
3.5.1.1. Install membrane flashings concurrently with roof membrane as work

progresses.
3.5.1.2. Use of handheld hot air equipment is acceptable. Hot air weld all seams in
two stage process as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
3.5.1.3. Extend flashings a minimum of 8 inches above roofing level.
3.5.1.4. Extend PVC membrane flashings 2-1/2 inches past the discs and hot-air weld
to the field membrane.

JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 11
3.5.1.5. Cut and hot-air weld all interior and exterior corners and miters into place.
Ensure there is no bitumen contact with the PVC membrane.
3.5.1.6. Mechanically fasten all flashing membranes along the counter-flashed top
edge with anchor bar at 6-8 inches on center.
3.5.1.7. Terminate membrane flashing in accordance with membrane manufacturer's

standard details.
3.5.2. PVC Clad Metal Flashing
3.5.2.1. Form and install PVC clad metal flashings per roof membrane manufacturers
requirements.
3.5.2.2. Provide metal transitions at all peaks, valleys and slope intersections where
the net change in slope exceeds 1-1/2 inches in 12 inches.
3.5.2.3. Fasten all metal flashings with two rows of post galvanized flat head annular
ring nails, 4 inches on center staggered. Penetrate nailer minimum of 1 inch
with fasteners.
3.5.2.4. Install metal to provide adequate resistance to bending and allow for normal
thermal expansion and contraction.
3.5.2.5. Space adjacent sheets of clad metal 1/4 inch apart. Cover the joint with 2 inch
wide aluminum tape. Hot-air weld a 4 inch minimum wide strip of PVC flashing
membrane over the joint. Provide Fascia Plate to conceal the 4 inch wide
membrane flashing strip.
3.5.2.6. Make metal joints watertight, stagger over nailer joints to prevent joints in
nailers and joints in metal from lining up.
3.5.2.7. Securely fasten metal flashings and terminations in the plane of roof deck with
fasteners recommended by membrane manufacturer.
3.5.2.8. Fabricate metal to form hemmed edges to prevent sharp metal edges from
cutting the membrane.
3.5.3. Metal Counter Flashing:
3.5.3.1. Install metal flashing in accordance with membrane manufacturer's detail

drawings and per Section 07 60 00.
3.5.3.2. Complete all metal work concurrently with roofing and flashings so a
watertight condition exists daily.
3.6. WATERSTOPS:
3.6.1. Install temporary cutoffs around incomplete edges of roofing assembly at end of each
day's work and when work must be postponed due to inclement weather.
3.6.2. Seal membrane roofing to deck using manufacturers approved method. Remove
temporary seals completely when work resumes, cutting out the contaminated membrane,
sealant, and insulation fillers from the work area and properly dispose off-site.

JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 12
3.7. WALKWAY INSTALLATION:
3.7.1. Provide walkways as shown on drawings and in areas where routine rooftop maintenance
occurs and in areas where regular rooftop traffic is expected.
3.7.2. Install walkway material loose laid over clean, dry membrane surfaces.
3.7.3. Heat-weld loops and attach properly-positioned walkway material.
3.8. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
3.8.1. Provide manufacturer's field services under provisions of Section 01 45 00 and as

specified.
3.8.2. Technical representative shall provide field inspection of roof substrate prior to beginning
membrane installation, at outset of installation, and at completion of membrane work.
3.8.3. Contractor shall forward Technical representatives written report on observations of each
inspection to the Architect.
3.9.1. Testing:
3.9.1.1. Hose test membrane flashing system after curing has been reached, and at
a time mutually agreed to by Architect. Base test on mutually approved
methods. Repair all leaks and retest until free of defects. Do not flood roof
deck.
3.9.1.2. Certification: Contractor shall provide written certification that all products
were installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and
specifications.
3.9.2. Quality Control of Seams:
3.9.2.1. Check all welded seams for continuity using a rounded screwdriver.
3.9.2.2. Field test cuts of welded seams shall be made daily by the Contractor to
locations as directed by the Owners Representative. Take one inch wide
cross-section samples of welded seams at least three times a day. Test to
ensure that membrane shears prior to weld separation.
3.9.2.2.1. Patch each test cut by the Contractor at no extra cost to the
Owner.
3.9.2.3. If any one test cut fails, Architect will prepare additional test protocols.
Contractor shall perform all testing and make all repairs at no additional cost
to Owner.
3.10. CLEANING
3.10.1. Remove all adhesive, spills, scrap materials, and other debris from Project site.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 07 54 19 - 13
SECTION 07 60 00
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Coping, parapet, scupper and cap flashings.
1.1.2. Reglets and counter-flashings over bituminous base flashings.
1.1.3. Counter-flashings.
1.1.4. Sheet metal gutters and downspouts.
1.1.5. Steel pipe downspouts.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ANSI/ASTM B 32 - Solder Metal.
1.2.2. ASTM A 53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
1.2.3. ASTM B 370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction
1.2.4. ASTM A 653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process..
1.2.5. ASTM A 924 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot Dip Process.
1.2.6. ASTM D 4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
1.2.7. FS O-F-506 - Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid.
1.2.8. FS QQ-Z-100 - Zinc Alloy.
1.2.9. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association)-Roofing Manual.
1.2.10. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 1993 edition.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.1. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.3.2. Describe material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, and
installation details.
1.3.3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.4.1. Fabricator: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with 5 years minimum
experience.

County of Tehama FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
JKA #15-100 07 60 00 - 1
1.5.1. Store products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
1.5.2. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and
to provide ventilation.
1.5.3. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or
damage.
1.6. GUARANTEE
1.6.1.1. Provide Owner with written Guarantee on Contractor's letterhead, and signed
by General Contractor and flashing system subcontractor.
1.6.1.2. Provide guarantee against the following defects for a time period of three
years, commencing from the date of final acceptance of the project.
1.6.1.2.1. Flashing blow-off or permanent deformation from wind.
1.6.1.2.2. Water intrusion through flashing joints into building interior.
1.6.1.3. Make inspections and emergency repairs to defects or leaks in the roof
system within twenty-four (24) hours of receipt of notice from the Owner.
1.6.1.4. Restore the affected areas to the standard of the original specifications as
soon as weather permits.
2.1. SHEET MATERIALS
2.1.1. Galvanized Steel:
2.1.1.1. Classification: Per ASTM A 653 and A 924.
2.1.1.2. Finish: Hot Dip galvanized, G90 coating. Provide Paint-Grip finish over
galvanizing at all painted flashings.
2.1.1.3. Gage: As specified and shown on drawings. If not shown on drawings, provide
minimum 24ga.
2.1.2. Downspouts: Steel pipe, ASTM A 53, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, unless otherwise
shown or specified.
2.2. ACCESSORIES
2.2.1. Fasteners: Galvanized steel with soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners. Finish
exposed fasteners same as flashing metal.
2.2.2. Sealant: Type specified in Section 07 90 00.
2.2.3. Flashing Cement: Approved for use with PVC roofing membrane
2.2.4. Solder: ANSI/ASTM B 32; type with less than 0.2% lead.
JKA #15-100 07 60 00 - 2
2.2.5. Flux: FS O-F-506.
2.2.6. Provide water resistant underlayment per Section 09 20 00.
2.2.7. Provide elastomeric flashing per Section 07 13 00.
2.3. PREFABRICATED COMPONENTS
2.3.1. Prefabricated Reglet Assembly:
2.3.1.1. Manufacturer and Series: Fry, www.fryreglet.com , or equal, Type as required

for condition shown on drawings.
2.3.1.1.1. For purpose of establishing required level of quality,

characteristics of products manufactured by Fry are
specified.
2.3.1.2. Counter-Flashing: Galvanized Steel, with windlocks at 32 inches on center

and at each corner. Provide prefinished counter-flashing where adjacent to
prefinished metal roofing or siding
2.3.1.3. Corners: Provide factory prefabricated corner assemblies.
2.4. FABRICATION
2.4.1. Provide sheet metal work as shown on Drawings and not specified under other Sections.
Fabricate as indicated. Where specific details are not shown, fabricate according to
applicable SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" criteria.
2.4.2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
Match profiles at connections. Provide ribs, cleats, and reinforcement necessary to make
sections rigid and substantial. Allow for expansion and contraction.
2.4.3. Unless noted otherwise, fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet,
minimum 2 inches wide, interlocked with fabrication.
2.4.4. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. Locate joints of fascias, roof edges, and other
sheet metal work exposed to view with respect to panel joints or other architectural
features as indicated on Drawings, or as directed by Architect.
2.4.5. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form
drip and cleat interlock.
2.4.6. Generally, provide shop joints single locked and soldered, or lapped, riveted and soldered.
Provide field joints designed to permit expansion, with joint covers or lapped joints with
"S" clips. Do not solder.
2.4.6.1. Provide lapped, riveted and soldered joints at gutter conditions.
2.4.6.2. Provide all concealed stiffeners and bracing at roof edge trim, fascia and
gutter cover as required by Architect.
2.4.6.3. Provide 10 gage x 1-1/2 inch wide gutter bracket support, wrapping
completely around gutter, located at 32 inches on center and fastened to solid
blocking with 2 No. 12 wood screws. Provide 16 gage x 1-1/2 inch gutter
strap at 32 inches on center, extending minimum 6 inches under roofing
system.
JKA #15-100 07 60 00 - 3
2.4.6.4. Provide gutter flashing in compliance with SMACNA Chapter 1, including
"rectangular Gutter Design criteria" page 1.8, 5th edition. Provide fully welded
two, three and four way gutter intersections, with expansion joints fabricated
and located per Figure 1-5 and 1-6.
2.4.7. Form material with flat lock seams unless noted otherwise. Overlap seams in direction of
flow with finished width of lock seams and soldered lap seams not less than 1 inches, and
finished width of unsoldered lap seams not less than 3 inches.
2.4.8. Where specified, solder and seal metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash
solder joints clean. Provide smooth even surface on exposed soldering on finished
surfaces.
2.4.9. Provide shop formed transition and corner pieces with locked and soldered corners.
Locate field joints not less than one foot nor more than three feet from actual corner.
Shortest length dimension of any corner piece leg shall not be less than one foot.
2.4.10. Locate parapet coping expansion joints 20 feet on center maximum, and as otherwise
required to permit expansion and contraction.
2.4.11. Fabricate flashing assemblies as specified in this Section and as shown on Drawings.
2.5. FINISH
2.5.1. Paint flashing applications as specified below in off-site shop location.
Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection:
commence.
3.1.1.2.1. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents

through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place,
and nailing strips located.
3.1.1.2.2. Verify roof membrane, elastomeric flashing, waterproof

underlayment and base flashings are in place, sealed, and
secure.

JKA #15-100 07 60 00 - 4
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.
3.2.2. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
3.2.3. Except at prefinished material, pre-paint all copings, gutters, expansion joint flashings,
counter-flashings and related flashing assemblies when visible from any location in final
project. Pre-paint in off-site shop location, complying with paint system specified in
Section 09 91 00. Touch up after installation.
3.3. INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Support all flashings with firm and stable attachments, anchored into solid backing as
required.
3.3.2. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and
lines accurate to profiles.
3.3.3. Where required by installation, solder metal joints watertight for full metal surface contact.
After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water.
3.3.4. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in
locations approved by Architect.
3.3.5. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.6. Coping Installation:
3.3.6.1. Install coping with cleats and clips as specified and as shown on drawings.
Provide continuous cleat at exterior surface. Provide approved fasteners at
inside (roof) surface at 24 inches on center.
3.3.6.2. Install coping intermediate joints per Schedule, Article 3.4 of this Section.
Locate as shoe.
3.3.6.3. Provide waterproof underlayment over wall framing and under coping
flashing. Provide elastomeric flashing at all coping joints, extending 12 inches
each side of joint. Coordinate with plaster underlayment installation.
3.3.7. Gutter, Scupper, And Downspout Installation:
3.3.7.1. Secure gutters and covers and downspouts in place as detailed.
3.3.7.2. Coordinate with waterproof membrane underlayment installation.
3.3.7.3. Connect downspouts to downspout boots and seal connection.
3.3.8. Roof Membrane Flashing:
3.3.8.1. Provide and install in coordination with roofing work, all flashing, counter-
flashing, sleeves, and related components as required to provide a watertight
installation.
JKA #15-100 07 60 00 - 5
3.3.8.2. Set sheet metal installed on or adjoining roofing in continuous bed of
approved roofing cement.
3.3.9. Aluminum Components Installation:
3.3.9.1. Provide di-electric separation at all components, including fasteners.
3.3.9.2. Provide expansion sleeves at end of radiused components. Do not splice at

mid-point of radius.
3.3.9.3. Attach coping with welded connections, mechanical fasteners, clips, and
brackets. Do not solder.
3.4. FABRICATION SCHEDULE
3.4.1. Coping:
3.4.1.1. Material and Gage: Galvanized Steel:
3.4.1.1.1. Flashing with an exposed vertical face of 8" or less: 24 gage.
3.4.1.1.2. Flashing with an exposed vertical face of 8" to 10": 22 gage.
3.4.1.2. Finish: As specified in this Section, painted.
3.4.1.3. SMACNA Reference: Table 3-1, with J9 drive cleat, flat lock seam joint
design, C1 corner, and E1 edge.
3.4.2. Prefabricated and Fabricated Reglet Counterflashing:
3.4.2.1. Material and Gage: Galvanized steel, 22 gage, painted.
3.4.3. Miscellaneous flashing, roof flashing, metal flashing assemblies and counterflashing:
3.4.3.1. Material and Gage: Galvanized Steel:
3.4.3.1.1. Flashing with an exposed vertical face of 8" or less: 24 gage.
3.4.3.2. Finish: As specified in this Section, painted, including factory prefinished

where adjacent to material specified in Section 07 41 13.
3.4.4. Gutters:
3.4.4.1. Material and Gage: Galvanized steel, 22 gage.
3.4.4.3. SMACNA Reference: Hanging Gutter Installations-Sloped Roofs, Figure 1-

19B, with minimum 4 inch flashing flange beneath roof flashing system.
JKA #15-100 07 60 00 - 6
3.4.4.4. SMACNA Reference: Hanging Gutter Installations-Sloped Roofs, Figure 1-
19A, with minimum 4 inch flashing flange beneath roof flashing system.
3.4.4.5. SMACNA Reference: Concealed Hanging Gutters, Figure 1-15C, with

minimum 4 inch flashing flange beneath roof flashing system.
3.4.4.6. Provide downspout connection per SMACNA Figure 1-33, with basket
strainer.
3.4.5. Through-Parapet Overflow Scuppers:
3.4.5.2. Finish: Painted.
3.4.5.3. SMACNA Reference: Figure 1-30, with minimum 4 inch flashing flange
beneath parapet wall finish.
3.4.6. Fabricated Sheet Metal Downspouts - Round:
3.4.6.3. SMACNA Reference: Figure 1-32A smooth, round, with hangers per Figure
1-35D.
3.4.7. Fabricated Sheet Metal Downspouts - Rectangular:
3.4.7.3. SMACNA Reference: Figure 1-32B smooth, rectangular, with hangers per
Figure 1-35B.
3.4.8. Conductor Heads:
3.4.8.3. SMACNA Reference: Figure 1-25C.
3.4.9. Steel Pipe Downspout:
3.4.9.1. Material and Gage: ASTM A 53, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, unless
otherwise shown or specified.
3.4.9.2. Finish: Painted per Section 09 91 00, Painting..
3.4.10. Transition at plaster finished wall intersecting adjacent plaster wall: Provide 22 gage fully
soldered fabricated transition. Fabricate transition to extend beneath plaster finish at all
surfaces 4 inches. Coordinate transition with coping and underlayment as directed by
Architect.

JKA #15-100 07 60 00 - 7
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 07 60 00 - 8
SECTION 07 72 00
ROOF ACCESSORIES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Prefabricated roof penetration flashings.
1.1.2. Prefabricated duct support flashings.
1.1.3. Prefabricated pipe support flashings.
1.1.4. Prefabricated mechanical equipment support curbs.
1.1.5. Prefabricated roof hatches with hardware and counterflashing.
1.1.6. Access Ladder
1.2. SUBMITTALS
1.2.2. Provide shop drawings of each installation application. Include general construction,
configurations, jointing methods and locations when applicable, and fastening
methods. Show field based dimensions accommodating existing roof slope and
insulation.
1.2.3. Coordinate with type and dimension of equipment, duct and building system
piping/conduit component shown on drawings.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
00.
2.2. ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT/BUILDING SYSTEMS SUPPORTS
2.2.1. Manufacturer: RPS Corporation, www.rpscurbs.com, or equal
2.2.2. Application: Pipe/Conduit Support:
2.2.2.1. Series: PMP Series, pipe mounting pedestals, with length as required to
accommodate pipe runs as shown on drawings.
2.2.2.2. Height: Minimum 12 inches of adjustment, horizontally and vertically,

fabricated to accommodate roof slope and provide accurate elevation.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama ROOFACCESSORIES
JKA#15100 0772001
2.2.2.3. Flange: Minimum 3 inches, sized as required to accommodate anchor as
shown on drawings.
2.2.2.4. Gage: 18 gage shell, base plate, and counter flashing.
2.2.2.5. Pipe/conduit Roller Assembly:
2.2.2.5.1. Provide 1-5/8 inch galvanized Uni-strut type channel

equipment rail with welded tabs bolted to equipment
support shell.
2.2.2.5.2. Provide two 12 inch long galvanized rods per pipe, with
adjustable cast iron roller chair support, dimension as
required to accommodate pipe or conduit diameter.
Provide adjustable bracket connection to channel.
2.2.2.5.3. Provide removable top pipe/conduit retainer bracket.
2.2.3. Application: HVAC Duct Penetration Curb:
2.2.3.1. Series: RC Series with fully welded corners, built-in metal cant.
2.2.3.2. Height: Minimum 12 inches, fabricated to accommodate roof slope and

provide level curb elevation.
2.2.3.3. Flange: Minimum 3 inches, sized as required to accommodate anchor as

shown on drawings.
2.2.3.4. Gage: 18 gage galvanized shell, base plate, and counter flashing.
2.2.3.5. Metal Cover: As specified in Section 07 60 00 and shown on drawings.
2.3. ROOF PENETRATION FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
2.3.1. Manufacturer: S.B.C. Industries or equal (no known equal), phone 1-800-228-2580.
http://www.sbcflashings.com/
2.3.1.1. Field fabricated flashing assemblies matching configuration of specified

product are approved.
2.3.2. Application: Conduit, Pipe and Plumbing Vent Penetration:
2.3.2.1. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, including mechanical and plumbing

documents, provide specified flashing assembly at all penetrations
through built up roofing.
2.3.2.2. Type: Stainless steel factory fabricated assembly, presoldered seam at

stack to base flashing. Adjust stack to base angle to reflect roof slope.
Provide separate counterflashing collar.
2.3.2.3. Series: As recommended by manufacturer, with sealant cover.
2.3.2.4. Size: Fabricate with counterflashing collar minimum 5 inches above roof
membrane, and with minimum 3-1/2 inch flashing flange.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0772002
2.3.3. Application: Duct Support Structural Members:
2.3.3.1. Type: Stainless steel factory fabricated assembly, presoldered seam at

stack to base flashing, configured for field soldering of base flashing.
2.3.3.2. Series: ER Series, type as required for application. Provide sealant cover
at each type. Minimum 12 inches adjustable horizontal and vertical.
2.3.3.3. Size: Fabricate with flashing collar minimum 8 inches above roof
membrane, and with minimum 3-1/2 inch flashing flange.
2.4. PIPE AND CONDUIT PENETRATION CURBS
2.4.1. Manufacturer: RPS Corporation, www.rpscurbs.com, or equal.
2.4.2. Application: Multiple and Single Pipe/Conduit Penetration:
2.4.2.1. Series: Pipe Portal System, with RC-2A curb complying with specified
dimensional criteria. Provide curb length as required for single or multiple
pipe penetrations as shown on drawings.
2.4.2.2. Curb Height: Minimum 11 inches, fabricated to accommodate roof slope

and provide level curb elevation.
2.4.2.3. Curb Flange: Minimum 3 inches, sized as required to accommodate

anchor as shown on drawings.
2.4.2.4. Gage: 18 gage shell, base plate, and counter flashing.
2.4.2.5. Cover: ABS plastic, acrylic coated, with anchor flange.
2.4.2.6. Rubber Cap: EPDM rubber, style as required for number of penetrating
items, with stainless steel swivel clamp. Maximum number of penetrations
per cap limited to two.
2.4.2.7. Insulation Fill: Provide fiber glass insulation, 1.5 PCF density, at insulated
pipe penetrations, installed as shown on drawings.
2.5. ROOF ACCESS HATCH
2.5.1. Manufacturer: Bilco www.bilco.com or equal.
2.5.2. Series: Type S-20 with Bil-Guard Railing System RL-S
2.5.3. Size : 30 inch x 36 inch.
2.5.4.1. Curb: 14 gage galvanized prime painted steel; integral cap flashing to
receive roof flashing system; extended flange for mounting.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0772003
2.5.4.2. Cover: 14 gage galvanized prime painted steel; fiber insulation retained by
22 gage steel. Continuous neoprene vinyl gasket to provide weatherproof
seal. Cover shall be designed to resist 40 pound per square foot live load
without failure or permanent set.
2.5.4.3. Curb Insulation: Provide rigid insulation at all sides of curb suitable for roof
system flashing membrane termination.
2.5.5. Hardware:
2.5.5.1. Operator: manually operated type with compression spring operators,

positive snap latch with turn handles inside and out; automatic hold-open
arm with vinyl covered grip handle for easy release.
2.5.5.2. Provide padlock eye for regular roof hatches.
2.5.5.3. Hinges: Manufacturer's recommended type. Heavy duty, galvanized steel.
2.5.6. Finish:
2.5.6.1. Provide zinc plated and chromate sealed hardware.
2.5.6.2. Provide galvanized and primed finish at roof hatch.
2.5.7. Ladder Safety Post: Bilco, or equal.
2.5.7.1. Model and Finish: Model No. LU-4 Aluminum, mill finish.
2.5.7.2. Performance Characteristics:
2.5.7.2.1. Tubular post shall lock automatically when fully extended.
2.5.7.2.2. Safety post shall have controlled upward and downward

movement.
2.5.7.2.3. Release lever shall disengage the post to allow it to be

returned to its lowered position.
2.5.7.2.4. Post shall have adjustable mounting brackets to fit ladder

rung spacing up to 14 on center and clamp brackets to
accommodate ladder rungs up to 1-3/4 in diameter.
2.5.7.3. Post: Shall be manufactured of high strength square tubing. A pull up loop
shall be provided at the upper end of the post to facilitate raising the post.
2.5.7.4. Balancing spring: A stainless steel spring balancing mechanism shall be

provided to provide smooth, easy, controlled operation when raising and
lowering the safety post.
2.5.7.5. Hardware: All mounting hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
2.5.8. Parapet Access Ladder:
2.5.8.1. Manufacturer: OKeeffes Inc, or equal.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0772004
2.5.8.2. Model: 502 Tubular Rail Low Parapet Access Ladder with Roofover
Extensions
2.5.8.3. Size: As required to fit parapet heights
2.5.8.4. Performance characteristics:
2.5.8.4.1. Finish: Clear anodized
2.5.8.4.2. Installation: Mount to CMU parapet walls with expansion

anchors as specified by manufacturer. Attachments shall
not penetrate any roofing material.
3.1.1. Inspection:
3.1.1.1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all
other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where
this installation may properly commence.
3.2. ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORT AND PENETRATION INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with installation of

roofing system and related flashings. Provide weathertight installation.
3.2.2. Apply bituminous paint on metal surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials
and dissimilar metals.
3.2.3. Roof Mounted Equipment Supports:
3.2.3.1. Fasten to roof deck with corrosion resistant fasteners, type and size as
shown on drawings and as specified.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0772005
3.2.3.2. Anchorage: Provide fasteners at each side of accessory/shell, 6 inches
from each end and at 18 inches maximum on center, minimum of 2 per
side.
3.2.4. Pipe And Conduit Penetration Curbs:
3.2.4.1. Fasten to roof deck with corrosion resistant fasteners, type and size as
shown on drawings and as specified.
3.2.4.2. Anchorage: Provide fasteners at each side of accessory/shell, 6 inches

from each end and at 18 inches maximum on center, minimum of 1 per
side.
3.2.4.3. Carefully cut cap, properly selected for penetration diameter. When cut,
cap shall fit tight against penetration, fastened with specified adjustable
clamp without puckers or gaps.
3.2.4.4. Where insulated pipe occur, fill cap cavity with specified insulation
supported as shown on drawings.
3.2.5. Roof Penetration Flashing Assemblies:
3.2.5.1. Install roof penetration flashings coordinated with roof membrane

installation.
3.2.5.2. Where required, field solder base to form watertight seam.
3.2.5.3. Install complete with sealant, neoprene tape, and sealant cover.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0772006
PFM STANDASECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Firestopping materials and accessories for the following applications:
1.1.1.1. Duct, cable, conduit, and piping penetrations through fire-resistive ceiling,
floor and wall assemblies.
1.1.1.2. Openings between fire-resistive floor assemblies and non-load bearing walls.
1.1.1.3. Penetrations of fire resistive vertical service shafts, including annular space
at duct penetrations.
1.1.1.4. Gaps, separations, and openings resulting from construction and

penetrations in fire-resistive ceiling, floor and wall assemblies, including the
intersection of such components.
1.1.1.5. Additional locations where specifically shown on the Drawings or where

specified in other Sections of the Project Manual.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards
conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern.
1.2.2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1.2.2.1. E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
1.2.2.2. E 119 Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
1.2.2.3. E 136 Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at
750F
1.2.2.4. E 814 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
1.2.2.5. E 1399 Cyclic Movement and Measuring Minimum and Maximum Joint
Widths
1.2.2.6. E 1966 Test Method for Resistance of Building Joint
1.2.2.7. E 2174 Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops
1.2.2.8. E 2393 Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stop Joint
Systems.
1.2.2.9. E 2307 Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Endurance of
Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using the Intermediate-Scale, Multi Story Test
Apparatus (ISMA)

County of Tehama FIRESTOPPING
JKA #15-100 07 84 00 - 1
1.2.3. Factory Mutual (FM) Research: FM Approval Standard of Firestop Contractors Class
4991
1.2.4. Firestop Contractors International Association (FCIA): M.O.P. Manual of Practice
1.2.5. International Firestop Council (IFC):
1.2.5.1. Reference 1: Recommended IFC Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop

Engineering Judgments (April 2001)
1.2.5.2. Reference 2: Inspectors Field Pocket Guide
1.2.6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1.2.6.1. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code
1.2.6.2. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
1.2.6.3. NFPA 221 - Fire Walls and Fire Barriers (preliminary to be released)
1.2.6.4. NFPA 251 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
1.2.7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1.2.7.1. UL Qualified Firestop Contractor Program
1.2.7.2. UL 263 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
1.2.7.3. UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
1.2.7.4. UL 1479 Fire-Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
1.2.7.5. UL 2079 Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems
1.3. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1. Provide system materials and installation for through membrane penetration of rated
assemblies with a fire resistance rating equal to that of the assembly penetrated, based
on referenced testing methods, and in compliance with referenced regulations. Provide
firestopping systems designed to resist the spread of fire, and the passage of smoke and
other gases according to requirements indicated, including but not limited to the following:
1.3.1.1. Use of exceptions based on size of penetrating items as defined by ICC

Chapter 7 is not acceptable. Firestop all penetrations, regardless of size, with
material complying with specified criteria.
1.3.1.2. Firestop all penetrations passing through fire resistance rated wall and floor
assemblies and other locations as indicated on the drawings.
1.3.1.3. Provide and install complete penetration firestopping systems that have been
tested and approved by third party testing agency.
1.3.1.4. F - Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-

penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per
ASTM E 814, but not less than one hour or the fire-resistance rating of the
construction being penetrated.

JKA #15-100 07 84 00 - 2
1.3.1.5. T - Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide firestop systems
with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where
indicated by Code.
1.3.1.6. L Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide firestop systems

with L ratings, in addition to F and T ratings, as determined per UL 1479,
where indicated by Code.
1.3.2. Perimeter Fire Containment Systems: Provide interior perimeter joint systems with fire-
resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 2307, but not less than the fire-
resistance rating of the floor construction.
1.3.3. Fire-Resistive Joints: Provide joint systems with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as
determined per UL 2079, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the construction in
which the joint occurs.
1.3.4. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide
appropriate firestop systems for these conditions.
1.3.5. Where there is no specific third party tested and classified firestop system available for a
particular firestop configuration, the firestopping contractor shall obtain from the firestop
manufacturer, an Engineering Judgment (EJ) or Equivalent Fire Resistance Rated
Assembly (EFFRA) for submittal.
1.3.6. System shall comply with performance criteria and characteristics as specified in this
Section.
1.4. QUALIFICATIONS
1.4.1.1. Produced the specified or equivalent products for a period of five (5) years
prior to beginning work of this Section.
1.4.1.2. Has successfully used firestopping products on a minimum of 10 projects of

similar scale and application within one (1) year prior to beginning work of this
Section.
1.4.1.3. Has capability to produce the specified products to the delivery and quantity
criteria of the project.
1.4.1.4. Provide local distributor or manufacturers representative completely familiar

with products selected and available on-site within 4 hours.
1.4.1.5. Provide capability to provide manufacturers technical engineering support

available on-site within 48 hours.
1.4.2. Installer Qualifications:
1.4.2.1. Approved by the firestopping system manufacturer.
1.4.2.2. Thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required
1.4.2.3. FM Approved in accordance with FM Standard 4991 Approval of Firestop

Contractors.
1.4.2.4. UL Qualified Firestop Contractor

JKA #15-100 07 84 00 - 3
1.4.2.5. Installed a minimum of 5 similar applications of the specified products within
one year prior to beginning work of this Section.
1.4.2.6. Completely familiar with the manufacturers' recommended methods of

installation applicable to the requirements of this work.
1.5.1. Conform to requirements of the manufacturer.
1.5.2. Provide ventilation in areas of work in conformance with manufacturers recommendations.
1.5.3. Provide control of noxious or objectionable odors as specified in Section 01 50 00.
1.6. SUBMITTALS
1.6.1. Firestop Schedule
1.6.1.1. Review firestopping conditions and applications required by work.
1.6.1.2. Prepare written firestop schedule identifying specific types of penetrating

items, wall/ceiling assembly, and proposed system firestopping system,
incorporating systems as shown on drawings, schedule as specified in this
Section and all other conditions not identified. Coordinate with conditions
shown on mechanical and electrical drawings.
1.6.1.3. Where specific application is not covered by current test results, submit all
necessary engineering documentation required to establish equivalent fire-
resistance values and obtain approval.
1.6.1.4. Provide agency approval documentation, including ICC ES reports, State Fire
Marshal Listing, or other approvals.
1.6.1.5. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.6.2. Shop Drawings/Details:
1.6.2.1. Accompanying Firestopping Schedule, submit Shop Drawings/Details

illustrating proposed firestopping assemblies. Include dimensions, damming
material requirements, and related assembly data.
1.6.3. Certification and Approval
1.6.3.1. Submit written certification that all assemblies comply with listing and rating
requirements.
1.6.3.2. Obtain local jurisdictional authority review and approval of schedule and shop
drawings prior to submittal to Architect.
1.7.1. Protection
deterioration.

JKA #15-100 07 84 00 - 4
1.7.1.2. Use all means necessary to protect the installed work and materials of all
other trades.
1.7.1.3. Deliver all materials in unopened containers, labeled with date of

manufacturer and testing agency approval.
2.1. FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
2.1.1. Manufacturer
2.1.1.1. All firestopping products for any one type of assembly shall be supplied by
one manufacturer.
2.1.1.2. Firestopping assemblies shall represent an integrated series of materials,

coordinated to provide required ratings for project specific conditions.
2.1.1.3. Manufacturers complying with qualifications criteria and additional specified

requirements are acceptable.
2.1.2. Standards and Regulatory Criteria
2.1.2.1. Provide systems listed under UL Fire Resistance Directory categories as

shown on drawings, current edition or approved equivalent.
2.1.2.2. Test Standards: Provide firestopping systems in accordance with the

following:
2.1.2.2.1. F - Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide

through-penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated,
as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than one hour
or the fire-resistance rating of the construction being
penetrated.
2.1.2.2.2. T - Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide

firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as
determined per ASTM E 814, where indicated by Code.
2.1.2.2.3. L Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide

firestop systems with L ratings, in addition to F and T ratings,
as determined per UL 1479, where indicated by Code.
2.1.3. Performance Characteristics
2.1.3.1. Cold Smoke Barrier: Provide system with sealant component capable of
preventing cold smoke penetration through firestopping.
2.1.3.2. Assembly Construction: In non-symmetrical wall assemblies, select system

based on least fire-resistive side.
2.1.3.3. Movement capability:
2.1.3.3.1. Provide system with sufficient resiliency and elastomeric

properties to accommodate anticipated thermal movements
of penetrating item without compromising firestopping
function.
JKA #15-100 07 84 00 - 5
2.1.3.3.2. Provide system with sufficient resiliency and elastomeric
properties to accommodate anticipated vibration and cyclic
movement of penetrating item without compromising
firestopping function.
2.1.3.4. Habitability
2.1.3.4.1. For applications within or adjacent to occupied spaces,

provide system complying with current air quality VOC
regulations, and without objectionable odor or harmful fumes.
Comply with Section 01 50 00.
2.1.3.4.2. Do not utilize systems generating explosive or flammable

gas, including hydrogen, during installation or curing.
2.1.3.4.3. Provide systems without asbestos containing materials,

including safing and damming materials.
2.1.3.4.4. Provide material with flow characteristics resulting in smooth,

non-sag joints.
2.1.3.4.5. Provide permanent protection of floor joints against damage

when firestopping is unprotected.
2.1.3.5. Compatibility:
2.1.3.5.1. Verify compatibility of selected system with substrate and

penetrating item.
2.1.3.5.2. Do not use systems with materials that stain or bleed into
substrate or deposit films on surface of firestopping.
2.1.3.5.3. At insulated piping applications, select systems that do not

require removal of insulation materials.
2.1.3.6. Fire Safety
2.1.3.6.1. Flame Spread: Maximum value of 25 per ASTM E 84.
2.1.3.6.2. Smoke Contributed: Maximum value of 50 per ASTM E 84.
2.1.3.6.3. Damming Materials: Provide non-combustible damming

materials for permanent installation conditions.
2.1.3.6.4. Where T ratings are required in corridor and floor conditions,

select system providing maximum flexibility for type and size
of penetrating item.
installation of this work, as selected by the Contractor and subject to the approval of the
Architect.

JKA #15-100 07 84 00 - 6
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to work of this Section, carefully inspect previously installed work. Verify
commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this Section may be installed in strict accordance with the
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, and loose material, or other matter which
may effect bond of firestopping material.
3.2.2. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond.
3.2.3. Provide curing and ventilation environment as required for system installation.
3.3. INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install selected systems in accordance with listing requirements and the manufacturers
recommendations.
3.3.2. Provide firestopping at annular space around duct penetrations and damper frames. Do
not provide at fire dampers unless damper includes firestopping in listing application.
3.3.3. Where large openings are created for duct, cable tray, bus duct, and other similar
penetrations, close unused portions with firestopping tested for large opening conditions.
3.3.4. Where wall framing meets uneven surface, such as fluted metal deck, irregular masonry
block finish, and similar materials, select system suitable for closing gap and openings.
3.3.5. Tool sealant to give surface a smooth concave appearance.
3.4. CLEANING
3.4.1. Clean Work under provisions of Section 01 77 00.
3.4.2. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.5.1. Manufacturer's representative shall inspect initial installation of each type of firestop
system to verify installation procedures.
3.5.2. At completion of work, inspect all firestopping applications to verify compliance with listing
requirements.
JKA #15-100 07 84 00 - 7
3.5.3. Provide written certification that all firestopping systems were installed in accordance with
listing requirements and approved schedule.
3.6. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
3.6.1. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 50 00.
3.6.2. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
3.7. FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE
3.7.1. Provide a Firestopping Schedule that includes firestopping assemblies as shown on

drawings and all firestopping selections as required to comply with applicable regulations.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 07 84 00 - 8
SECTION 07 90 00
JOINT PROTECTION
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Sealants and joint treatment necessary to provide a positive barrier against passage of
moisture and air.
1.1.2. Sealants at material joints necessary to provide closure for ease of cleaning and
maintenance.
1.1.3. Sealants at all penetrations of sound rated walls and floors.
1.2. SUBMITTALS
1.2.1. Materials List/Product Data: Submit complete materials list, including catalogue data, of
all materials, equipment, and products.
1.2.2. Samples: Accompanying Materials List, submit two (2) samples of each type of specified
sealant, including color range available.
1.2.3. Test Data:
1.2.3.1. Staining: Provide test data, performed on concrete, demonstrating no staining

or discoloration of adjacent substrate from sealant or primer.
1.2.4. Certifications: As a condition of acceptance, submit certification stating that sealants and
joint treatments are installed per submittal and are complete and ready for intended
function.
1.3.1. Qualifications: Provide adequate numbers of skilled staff, thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary craft and installation methods associated with the specified
products.
1.4. COORDINATION
1.4.1. Coordination: Sequence all work to assure an orderly progress in the project, without
removal of previously installed work, and so as to prevent damage to finishes and
products.
1.5.1. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect work in this Section before, during and
after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
1.5.2. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.5.3. Product Storage: Do not retain on site any material which has exceeded the shelf life
recommended by the manufacturer.
County of Tehama JOINT PROTECTION
JKA #15-100 07 90 00 - 1
1.6. GUARANTEE
1.6.1.1. Provide Owner with written Guarantee per Section 00 65 36 on Contractor's

letterhead, and signed by General Contractor and sealant system
subcontractor.
1.6.1.2. Provide guarantee for a time period of five years, commencing from the date
of final acceptance of the project, against the following defects:
1.6.1.2.1. Adhesive or cohesive sealant joint failure.
1.6.1.2.2. Pin holes or blistering of sealant joint.
1.6.1.2.3. Staining of adjacent substrate or surrounding material.
1.6.1.2.4. Chalking or color change exceeding manufacturers

published data.
1.6.1.3. Make inspections and emergency repairs to defects or leaks in the sealant
system within twenty-four (24) hours of receipt of notice from the Owner.
1.6.1.4. Restore the affected areas to the standard of the original specifications as
soon as weather permits.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The Architect
2.2. SEALANTS
2.2.1. General:
2.2.1.1. All sealants for any one Type shall be the product of a single manufacturer,
suitable for the intended use, and per the following product characteristics.
2.2.1.2. Unless noted otherwise, use sealants in application as defined below.
2.2.1.3. For other applications provide products especially formulated for the
proposed use and approved in advance by the Architect.
2.2.2. Product Characteristics:
2.2.2.1. Type 1: Unless noted otherwise, at exterior openings, joints, material

transitions, bedding, and other conditions where anticipated joint movement
will be plus/minus 25% or less.
2.2.2.1.1. Products: Dow Corning 795, Pecora 895, Tremco Tremsil

600, or equal.

JKA #15-100 07 90 00 - 2
2.2.2.2. Type 2: At all exposed metal to metal wall and roof flashing conditions, all
exposed prefinished metal roofing and flashing conditions; storefront
perimeter conditions, and all other conditions where anticipated joint
movement will be plus/minus 25 - 50%.
2.2.2.2.1. Products: Dow Corning 795, GE Silicones Silglaze II, Tremco

Spectrum 2, or equal.
2.2.2.3. Type 3: At horizontal concrete paving joints exposed to pedestrian and

vehicular traffic, and all joints subject to immersion:
2.2.2.3.1. Products: Pecora DynaTred, Tremco Vulkem 45SSL,

Sonneborn NP2, or equal.
2.2.2.4. Type 4: Exterior application in conjunction with wood products:
2.2.2.4.1. Tremco Vulkem 116, Sika Sikaflex-1a, Sonneborn NP1, or

equal.
2.2.2.5. Type 5: Pipes and conduits penetrating underground walls:
2.2.2.5.1. Sealant compatible with waterproofing system.
2.2.2.6. Type 6: Interior applications in conjunction with sanitary conditions (non-food

use):
2.2.2.6.1. Products: General Electric Silicone Sanitary Sealant 1702,

Dow Corning 786, Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant, or
equal.
2.2.2.7. Type 7: Interior sound control applications.
2.2.2.7.1. Products: USG Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant, Pecora AC-20

FTR, Tremco Acoustical Sealant, or equal.
2.2.2.8. Type 8: Unless noted otherwise, at interior openings, joints, material

transitions and bedding, at locations shown on drawings, and other conditions
where anticipated joint movement will be 25% or less.
2.2.2.8.1. Products: Pecora 864, Dow Corning 795, Sonneborn

Omniseal, or equal.
2.2.2.9. Type 9: At all concealed prefinished metal roofing and flashing conditions,
provide butyl sealant as recommended by metal roofing manufacturer.
2.2.2.10. Type 10: At all metal flashing and gutter joints subject to periodic or
continuous water immersion:
2.2.2.10.1. Products: Dow Corning 799, Pecora 863, or equal.
2.2.2.11. Type 11: At joints in acoustical laminated glass:
2.2.2.11.1. Products: Dow Corning 795, Pecora 895, Tremco Tremsil

600, or equal.
2.2.2.12. For other applications provide products especially formulated for the
proposed use and approved in advance by the Architect.
JKA #15-100 07 90 00 - 3
2.2.3. Colors:
2.2.3.1. Colors for each sealant application will be selected by the Architect from
standard colors normally available from the manufacturers complete line of
running line colors, including premium and special color lines for each
specified product.
2.2.3.2. Should such standard color not be available from the approved manufacturer
except at additional charge, provide such colors at no additional cost to the
Owner.
2.2.3.3. In concealed installations, and in partially or fully exposed installations where

approved by the Architect, use standard gray or black sealant.
2.3. FIRE RATED SEALANTS
2.3.1. Per Section 07 84 00.
2.4. WALL TO STOREFRONT MULLION CLOSURE
2.4.1. Pre-compressed Joint Filler: Provide Willseal 600 or equal, precompressed joint filler
material, full width of wall, thickness sized for 20% compression.
2.4.2. Closure Filler: Provide high density neoprene backer, 1/4 inch thickness, both sides with
adhesive backing.
2.5. ACCESSORIES
2.5.1. Pre-compressed Joint Filler: Provide Willseal 600 or equal, precompressed joint filler
material, full width of wall, thickness sized for 20% compression.
2.5.2. Primers: Provide primer as specifically recommended for this installation by the
manufacturer of the sealant used and have been tested for staining, adhesion and
durability on all applicable surfaces.
2.5.3. Back-Up Materials: Use only those backup materials which are specifically recommended
for this installation by the sealant manufacturer, non-absorbent and non-staining.
2.5.4. Masking Tape: For masking around joints, provide an appropriate masking tape which will
effectively prevent application of sealant on surfaces not scheduled to receive it, and which
is removable without damage to substrate.
2.6.1. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection:
commence.

JKA #15-100 07 90 00 - 4
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces:
3.2.1.1. Install only on surfaces which are dry, sound, and well brushed, wiping free
from dust.
3.2.1.2. At open joints, remove dust by mechanically blown compressed air if so

required.
3.2.1.3. To remove oil and grease, use sandblasting or wire brushing.
3.2.1.4. Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment by
sandblasting or wire brushing.
3.2.1.5. Remove laitance and mortar from joint cavities.
3.2.2. Steel Surfaces:
3.2.2.1. Unprimed or unfinished steel surfaces in contact with sealant:
3.2.2.2. Sandblast as required to achieve acceptable surface for bond.
3.2.2.3. If sandblasting is not practical, or would damage adjacent finish, scrape the
metal or wire brush to remove mill scale and rust.
3.2.2.4. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean white
rags only.
3.2.2.5. Remove protective coatings on steel by sandblasting or by using a solvent

which leaves no residue.
3.3. INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORY MATERIALS
3.3.1. When using backup of tube or rod stock, avoid lengthwise stretching of material. Do not
twist or braid hose or rod backup stock.
3.3.2. Prime joints in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
3.3.3. Provide an approved bond-breaker where recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3.4. INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS
3.4.1. Prior to start of installation in each joint, verify the joint type according to details on the
drawings, or as otherwise directed by the Architect, and verify that the required proportion
of width of joint to depth of joint has been secured.
3.4.2. Equipment:
JKA #15-100 07 90 00 - 5
3.4.2.1. Apply sealant under pressure with power-actuated hand gun or manually-
operated hand gun, or by other appropriate means.
3.4.2.2. Use guns with nozzle of proper size, and providing sufficient pressure to
completely fill the joints as designed.
3.4.2.3. Do not use pourable sealant installation method at hardscape paving joints.
3.4.3. Thoroughly and completely mask joints where the appearance of primer or sealant on
adjacent surfaces would be objectionable.
3.4.4. Install the sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,
thoroughly filling joints to the recommended depth.
3.4.4.1. Use of sealant dams contained within the hardscape joint is not permitted.
Install sealant without interruption from end to end of joint.
3.4.5. Tool joints to the profile shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise required if such profiles
are not shown on the Drawings.
3.4.5.1. Tool joints to a smooth and consistent transition. Do not leave ripples, strings,
or surface tooling marks in sealant.
3.4.6. Unless otherwise specified, at all sound rated wall and floor assemblies, seal penetrations
and recessed items through the floors and walls with Type 7 sealant. Seal all penetrations
such as electrical device cover plates, pipes, fire extinguisher cabinets and similar
penetrations in room surfaces.
3.5. CLEANING
3.5.1. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled.
3.5.2. Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealant as the installation progresses, using solvent or
cleaning agent recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant used.
3.5.3. Upon completion of the work of this Section, promptly remove from the job site all debris,
containers, and surplus material derived from this portion of the Work.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 07 90 00 - 6
SECTION 08 11 00
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Hollow metal rolled steel doors, non-rated and rated for fire resistance.
1.1.2. Hollow metal rolled steel door frames, non-rated and rated for fire resistance.
1.1.3. Hollow metal rolled steel borrowed lite and window frames, non-rated and rated for fire
resistance.
1.2.1. Certification of Labeled Construction: After notifying Architect of oversize

requirements, furnish inspection certificate certifying component construction
conforms to UL rating requirements.
1.2.2. Hollow metal supplier shall be a qualified direct distributor of specified products.
1.2.2.1. Distributor shall employ an A.H.C./C.D.C. or person of equivalent

experience who will be available at reasonable times to consult with the
architect and owner regarding all matters affecting work of this Section.
1.2.3. Hollow metal supplier shall be a member of the Steel Door Institute or Hollow Metal
Manufacturers Association Division of NAAMM.
1.2.4. Perform work in accordance with standards of the Steel Door Institute and as required
by this Section.
1.2.4.1. Where more restrictive than referenced standards, comply with

requirements of this Section.
1.2.5. Provide written certification all doors conform to Level 'A' criteria of ANSI-A-250.4 ,
including testing to 2,000,000 operating cycles.
1.2.6. Provide written certification all door frames conform to Level 'A' criteria of ANSI-A-
250.5 , including testing to 1,000,000 operating cycles.
1.2.7. Where exterior window wall frames and mullions occur, design for wind load resistance
in accordance with Chapter 16A, Title 24, CCR.
1.2.7.1. Provide engineering based on Wind Speed of 70 miles per hour, Exposure
C condition.
1.3.1. Conform to Chapters 7 and 10, Part 2, Title 24, CCR for fire rated frames and doors.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama METALDOORSANDFRAMES
JKA#15100 0811001
1.3.2. Construct fire rated door panel and frame construction in conformance with NFPA 252.
1.3.3. Install fire rated frame and door assemblies in conformance with NFPA 80, UL/WH
approval listing and manufacturers instructions.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 01.
1.4.1.1. Provide shop drawings illustrating system and component dimensions,

components within assembly, framed opening requirements and
tolerances, anchorage and fasteners; glass and infills; and affected related
work.
1.4.1.2. Provide, where required, shown or specified, custom modifications to

manufacturers or referenced standard, including material gage,
anchorage, dimension and fabrication criteria.
1.4.1.3. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and listing requirements.
1.4.2. Samples:
1.4.2.1. Provide one 12 inch square sample of each type of door, cut at corner,
showing edge treatment and core material. Indicate compliance with
specified requirements.
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
1.5.1. Deliver doors and frames cardboard wrapped, crated, palletized or otherwise protected
during transit and site storage.
1.5.2. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired
provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and accepted by the
Architect; otherwise remove and replace damaged items.
1.5.3. Store doors and frames at the building site in a dry secure place.
1.5.3.1. Place units on minimum 4 inch high wood blocking.
1.5.3.2. Store in vented shelters.
1.5.3.3. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately.
1.5.3.4. Provide 1/4 inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
1.6.1. Order and deliver all doors and frames so as not to delay progress of work of other
Sections.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0811002
2.1. STEEL DOORS HOLLOW METAL
2.1.1. Manufacturer: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Curries Company

www.curries.com are indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and
performance. The Architect will consider requests for substitutions, under the
provisions of Division 01.
2.1.2. Type/Series:
2.1.2.1. Type: Flush, Hollow metal, with core material and vertical steel channel
stiffeners as indicated herein.
2.1.2.2. Series:
2.1.2.2.1. Interior: 707T.
2.1.2.2.2. Exterior: 747T.
2.1.2.3. Style: As shown on drawings.
2.1.3.1. Grade:
2.1.3.1.1. Interior Doors: Level 2 per ANSI 250.8.
2.1.3.1.2. Exterior Doors: Level 3 per ANSI 250.8.
2.1.3.2. Material: Cold Rolled Steel per ASTM A 653, CS grade, A 60 galvanized
at interior doors, G 90 galvanized at exterior doors, extra smooth.
2.1.3.3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inch.
2.1.3.4. Face Sheet Gauge
2.1.3.4.1. Exterior Doors: 16 gage.
2.1.3.4.2. Interior Doors: 16 gage.
2.1.3.5. Edge Seams: Continuously welded and ground smooth. Filler not
acceptable.
2.1.3.6. Core:
2.1.3.6.1. Exterior Doors: Provide fiberglass between stiffeners,

minimum .75 pcf density.
2.1.3.6.2. Interior Doors: Provide foamed in place polyurethane

core, minimum 1.0 pcf density, R value of 12.5.
2.1.3.6.3. Fire Rated Doors: Provide core as required to comply with

rating shown on drawings.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0811003
2.1.3.7. Vision Glass Frame: Anemostat Series FGS-75, www.anemostat.com, or
equal, factory primed and finish painted per Section 09900. Refer to
Section 08800 for glazing.
2.1.3.8. Louvers: As specified in this Section.
2.1.3.9. Transom (where shown): Same construction and finish as door.
2.1.4. Electric Through-wired Doors:
2.1.4.1. Where indicated on schedule, doors to be prepped for electrified

hardware: Provide doors in these openings with through-wires in a factory
prepared, concealed channel within the door.
2.1.4.1.1. Manufacturer shall engineer concealed channel (drilled

core) to travel from locking device to center hinge[s] of
opening system.
2.1.4.1.2. Through-wires to be UL Listed, and factory installed in

door before shipped to jobsite.
2.1.4.2. Coordinate wire runs with electrified locking devices.
2.1.4.2.1. Match number of wires for each electrified device per

opening condition. Accommodate up to twelve wires.
2.1.4.2.2. Each end of wires to be directly connected to the

electrified hardware and the electric hinge.
2.1.5. Finish:
2.1.5.1. At exterior doors, provide Hot Dip Galvanized finish per ASTM A 653, A
90 classification, extra smooth.
2.1.5.2. Provide spray applied primer at all interior doors per ANSI A250.10.
2.1.6. Fire Criteria:
2.1.6.1. Provide rated doors per referenced standards and as scheduled on

drawings.
2.2. STEEL DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES HOLLOW METAL
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Curries Company,

Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers listed in this
Section, and requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Division 01.
2.2.2. Type: Unless noted otherwise, wrap around, double rabbet, flush frames, fully welded
as specified.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0811004
2.2.3.1. Material: Cold Rolled Steel per ASTM A 653, CS Grade, A 60 galvanized,
extra smooth.
2.2.3.2. Face Dimension: 2 inches, unless otherwise shown on drawings.
2.2.3.3. Gage
2.2.3.3.1. Exterior: 14 gage.
2.2.3.3.2. Interior: 16 gage.
2.2.3.4. Gasketing/Weatherseal: As specified in this Section.
2.2.3.5. Glazing: Per Section 08 81 00.
2.2.4. Finish:
2.2.4.1. At exterior frames, provide Hot Dip Galvanized finish per ASTM A 653, G
90 classification, extra smooth.
2.2.4.2. Provide spray applied primer at all interior frames per ANSI A224.1.
2.2.4.3. Provide bituminous paint coating at interior surface of grout filled frames.
2.2.5. Anchors:
2.2.5.1. Provide minimum 18 gage head and jamb anchors suitable for wall
condition and in configuration for welded in place installation.
2.2.6. Glass Stops:
2.2.6.1. Manufacturer's standard glass stop, minimum 5/8 inch high for glass area
under 500 square inches and minimum 3/4 inch high for glass area over
500 square inches.
2.2.6.2. Glass stop shall be attached with countersunk Phillips head screws. .
2.2.6.3. Adjust glass stop size as required to accommodate listing requirements

for fire rated glazing specified in Section 08 81 00.
2.2.7. Fire Criteria:
2.2.7.1. Provide rated frames per referenced standards and as scheduled on

drawings.
2.3. FABRICATION
2.3.1. General
2.3.1.1. Fabricate all doors and frames in accordance with ANSI 250.8 except
where more stringent requirements are specified.
2.3.1.2. Supply only doors and frames manufactured by a single manufacturer.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0811005
2.3.2. Door Construction
2.3.2.1. Unless otherwise required by hardware specified in other Sections, bevel

vertical lock edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
2.3.2.2. Door lock edge reinforcing: one-piece, full height 14 gage channel.
2.3.2.3. Closer reinforcing: one-piece, minimum 12 gage plate.
2.3.2.4. Door hinge edge reinforcing: one-piece, full height 12 gage channel,
formed and tapped for hinges, with additional 7 gage reinforcement at
each hinge.
2.3.2.5. Weld both hinge and lock channels to each door face sheet.
2.3.2.6. Provide minimum 16 gage top and bottom channels, flush or inverted, and
welded to face sheets.
2.3.2.6.1. Close tops of outswinging exterior doors flush by the

addition of steel top channel filler.
2.3.3. Frame Construction
2.3.3.1. Fully weld all frame intersections. Weld face trim, tabs and frame soffit
with continuous fillet weld. Grind all welds smooth. Repair specified finish.
2.3.3.2. At all openings provide continuous welds at all horizontal to vertical

sections, including stop sections and rabbets on exterior side. Weld face
trim, tabs, rabbets, and frame soffit with continuous fillet weld.
2.3.3.3. Provide temporary shipping bars for protection from damage during transit
and handling.
2.3.3.4. Remove temporary spreaders before setting frames.
2.3.3.5. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels
fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.
2.3.3.6. Prepare door frame for silencers. Provide three single rubber silencers for
single doors on strike side, and two single silencers on frame head at
double doors without mullions.
2.3.3.7. Where required by listing, attach fire rated label to each frame unit
requiring such rating.
2.3.3.8. Supply welded in mortar guards at all hardware cutouts in frames built into
masonry or grouted.
2.3.3.9. Fabricate window frames for glass thickness as shown on drawings or

specified. Provide roll formed integral stop portion of frame on interior side
of frame.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0811006
2.3.3.10. Provide loose glass stops, located on exterior of exterior window frame.
Fasten using Phillips/spanner head screws, located as necessary to
assure compression of glass against weatherseal.
2.3.4. Frame Anchors
2.3.4.1. Wall anchors for drywall/frame partitions:
2.3.4.1.1. Provide steel or wood stud anchors sized to

accommodate frame jamb depth and face dimension on
all welded frames.
2.3.4.2. Provide frame jamb anchors at 30 inches on center (or fractional portion)
on each jamb.
2.3.4.3. Floor anchors:
2.3.4.3.1. Where access to back of frame is possible, provide angle

clip type, 16 gage minimum, welded to the bottom of each
jamb.
2.3.4.3.2. Where stud framed wall occurs at concrete curb, provide

additional jamb anchor at each jamb, installed at
approximately 7 inches above finish floor.
2.3.5. Hardware Preparation
2.3.5.1. Reinforcement: reinforce components for hardware installation in accord

with ANSI A 250.8 and A250.6 and the following criteria.
2.3.5.1.1. Provide 'box' type lock reinforcing, minimum 16 gage.
2.3.5.1.2. Provide minimum 7 gage hinge reinforcing, welded to

minimum 12-gage full height channel.
2.3.5.1.3. Provide minimum 12 gage closer reinforcement.
2.3.5.1.4. Provide minimum 12 gage reinforcement at other

hardware locations.
2.3.5.2. Locate factory prepared hardware locations in compliance with

"Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames", as adopted by The Steel Door Institute.
2.4. GASKET AND WEATHERSEAL
2.4.1. Type 1: Provide wet seal at exterior window assemblies, using Type 1 sealant per
Section 07 90 00 silicone sealant at exterior, and approved glazing tape at interior,
color as selected by Architect. Alternate weatherseal methods may be approved by
Architect.
2.4.2. Type 2: Provide dry seal installation at Interior window assemblies, using glazing tape,
thickness as necessary for installation, in accord with fire rating requirements.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0811007
2.4.3. Accessories: Provide neoprene setting blocks, edge blocks and other accessories as
necessary for complete installation in accordance with referenced standards.
proper installation of this work, as selected by the Contractor and subject to the
3.1.1. Inspection
properly commence.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Set all frames in accord with SDI 105 and as specified.
3.2.1.1. Use of wire tie method is not acceptable.
3.2.2. Set welded frames in position prior to beginning partition work. Brace frames until
permanent anchors are set.
3.2.2.1. Use of KD frames not permitted.
3.2.3. Set anchors for frames as work progresses. Install anchors at hinge and strike levels.
3.2.3.1. Where frame is accessible from back, install sill/floor anchors to slab or
floor assembly.
3.2.3.2. Where wall framing is installed on concrete curb, install jamb anchor at
approximately 7 inches above floor level.
3.2.3.3. Install two head anchors per frame with width exceeding 3 feet and less
than 6 feet wide. Install three anchors, equally spaced, at wider frames.
3.2.4. Use temporary setting spreaders at all locations. Use intermediate spreaders to assure
proper door clearances and header braces for grouted frames.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0811008
3.2.5. Install all fire rated frames in accord with NFPA-80 requirements, UL listing and
manufacturers installation requirements.
3.2.6. Fill all voids in door and window frames at exterior framed walls with R-11 unfaced
insulation as specified in Section 07 21 00 and detailed on drawings.
3.2.7. Where hollow metal window frames are shown at exterior conditions, install stops at
glass with wet seal method at exterior:
3.2.7.1. Provide heel sealant bead at joint between glass and integral frame stop.
3.2.7.2. Provide sealant cap bead at joint between glass and loose stop, tooled
neatly per Section 07 90 00.
3.2.8. Provide preformed gasket or tapes at interior window assemblies.
3.3. DOOR INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install hollow metal doors in frames using specified hardware.
3.3.2. Clearance at edge of doors:
3.3.2.1. Between door and frame at head and jambs: 1/8 inch.
3.3.2.2. Meeting edges of doors and mullions: 1/8 inch.
3.3.2.3. Transom panels, without transom bars: 1/8 inch.
3.3.2.4. Sills without thresholds: 5/8 inch maximum above finish floors.
3.3.2.5. Sills with thresholds: 1/8 inch above threshold.
3.4. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
3.4.1. Remove dirt and excess sealants, mortar, or glazing compounds from exposed
surfaces.
3.4.2. Adjust moving parts for smooth operation. Use shims if necessary to allow for proper
closing.
3.4.3. Where approved by Architect, fill all dents, holes, and similar defects with epoxy metal
filler. Where required by Architect, fill all dents, holes and similar defects with weld
material. After filling, grind smooth and flush with adjacent surface. Provide approved
zinc rich primer at all galvanized products.
3.4.4. Touch up abrasions with primer.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0811009
SECTION 08 14 00
WOOD DOORS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Wood doors, non-rated.
1.1.2. Modifications to existing doors and frames to accommodate new hardware
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests and Door Assemblies.
1.2.2. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
1.2.3. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods for Fire Assemblies.
1.2.4. California Building Code (CBC), as adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1.2.5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
1.2.6. UL 10B and 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.2.6.1. Doors shall be tested and listed per UL10C. Furnish letter of compliance
from each manufacturer in the submittals for each type of rated opening.
1.2.7. WDMA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A-2004
1.2.8. ANSI A115. W Series, Wood Door Hardware Standards.
1.2.9. FSC Forest Stewardship Council
1.2.10. SCS Scientific Certification Systems
1.2.11. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), Architectural Woodwork Institute
1.2.12. Intertek Testing Services-Warnock Hersey (ITS-WH)
1.3.1. Conform to requirements of WDMA I.S.1-A, Premium grade.
1.3.2. Doors of all types shall be manufactured by a single source.
1.3.3. Door supplier shall be a qualified direct distributor of specified products.
1.3.3.1. Distributor shall employ an A.H.C./C.D.C. or person of equivalent

experience who will be available at reasonable times to consult with the
Architect and Owner regarding all matters affecting work of this Owner.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama WOODDOORS
JKA#15100 0814001
1.4.1. Conform to Chapters 7 and 10, Part 2, Title 24, CCR as applicable for fire rated
assemblies.
1.4.2. Fabricate and install all fire rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80, UL/WH approval
listing, and manufacturers requirements.
1.5. SUBMITTALS
1.5.2. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
1.5.3. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings,
undercuts required, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, cutouts
for openings.
1.5.3.1. Shop drawings shall bear the WI Certified Compliance Label.
1.5.4. Samples:
1.5.4.1. Submit one sample of door construction, 12 inch square in size cut from
bottom corner of door.
1.5.4.2. Submit two samples of door veneer, 6 x 11 inch in size illustrating wood
grain, stain color, and sheen.
1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
1.6.1. Protect products under provisions of General Conditions, this Section and as
recommended by manufacturer.
1.6.2. Protect doors with opaque resilient packaging, sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Break
seal on site to permit ventilation.
1.6.3. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired
provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and accepted by the
Architect; otherwise remove and replace damaged items.
1.6.4. Store doors at the building site in a dry secure place.
1.6.4.1. Place door units flat on minimum 4 inch high wood blocking.
1.6.4.2. Store in humidity and temperature controlled shelter.
1.6.4.3. Provide 1/4 inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
1.6.4.4. Seal all edges of non-factory finished doors immediately after delivery to
site with sealer compatible with subsequent finish.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0814002
1.7. WARRANTY
1.7.1. Provide Life of Installation manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section

01 77 19.
1.7.2. Submit written warranty on manufacturer's standard form signed by an official of the
door manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which exhibit the
following defects:
1.7.2.1. Delamination in any degree.
1.7.2.2. Warp or twist of 1/4 inch or more in any 3'-6" x 7'-0" plane of door face.
1.7.2.3. Telegraphing of stile, rail or core through face to cause surface variation
in excess of 1/100 inch in any 3 inch span.
1.7.3. Warranty shall include refinishing and reinstallation as required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
1.7.4. Warranty Period - Interior Doors: Life of the original installation.
1.7.5. Warranty Period - Exterior Doors: Five (5) years.
1.7.6. Warranty shall not apply to any field finished doors improperly sealed on all edges and
faces.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance.
01 25 00.
2.2. NON RATED WOOD DOORS
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Marshfield Door Systems, www.marshfielddoors.com, or equal.
2.2.2. Types: Non-rated, flush face, solid core door with vision glass, louvers or transom
panel.
2.2.3. Door Series/Style: DSP-1.
2.2.4.1. Standard: WDMA I. S. 1-A Premium Series.
2.2.4.2. Adhesive: AWS Type I, waterproof, formaldehyde free.
2.2.4.3. Core: Mat formed particle board conforming to ANSI A208.1-LD-2, with
no added urea formaldehyde.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0814003
2.2.4.9. Visible Edge Bands: Hardwood matching veneer species, without finger
joints, minimum 3/4 inch thick over hardwood stiles.
2.2.4.10. Veneer:
2.2.4.10.1. Grade/Species: White Birch, WDMA Grade 1 (Premium)

Grade, Transparent Finish, per WIC section 5.
2.2.4.10.2. Veneer Thickness: 1/50 inch minimum.
2.2.4.10.3. Veneer Cut: Plain Sliced per WDMA

IS 1-A.
2.2.4.10.4. Veneer Grain Match: Balance match.
2.2.4.10.5. Use of rain forest products in veneer, crossbands or

backs is not acceptable.
2.2.4.11. Vision Glass Frame: Anemostat or equal, Series FGS-75, factory primed
and finish painted per Section 09900. Refer to Section 08 81 00 for
glazing.
2.2.4.12. Louvers: Anemostat or equal, Series AFDL, factory primed and finish
painted per Section 09 91 00.
2.2.5. Finish:
2.2.5.1. Finish: Factory prefinish all doors at factory in accordance with WDMA
I.S.1A or AWS Quality Standards.
2.2.5.2. System: Provide water based stain with ultraviolet (UV) cured
polyurethane sealer, complying meet or exceed performance standards of
UV cured polyurethane (TR-6 per WDMA) or (System 9 per AWS).
2.2.5.3. Color/gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturers standard stain

color line.
2.3. FABRICATION
2.3.1. General
2.3.1.1. Fabricate all doors in accordance with referenced standards unless more
stringent requirements are specified.
2.3.1.2. Supply each door type manufactured by a single manufacturer.
2.3.2. Where required by hardware application and fire rating listing, provide minimum 5-1/2
inch wide top blocking, minimum 10 inch wide intermediate/lock blocking, and
minimum 5-1/2 inch wide bottom blocking for hardware backing and reinforcement.
2.3.3. Coordinate with all finish flooring materials as required to provide proper clearance.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0814004
2.3.4. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements
and dimensions and with referenced standards. Do not machine for surface hardware.
Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware.
2.3.5. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.
2.3.6. Where specified, cut and configure exterior door edge to receive recessed weather
stripping devices.
2.3.7. Provide edge clearances to cut outs and hardware preparation in accordance with
listing requirements and specified references.
2.3.7.1. Prepare door and all machining in compliance with NFPA 80.
2.3.8. Provide factory applied labels on all rated doors.
2.3.9. Existing Door and Frame Modifications
2.3.9.1. Modify existing doors and frames as indicated on Door Schedule with
specified hardware.
2.3.9.1.1. Carefully remove and store existing hardware.
2.3.9.1.2. Prepare frames and doors for new hardware, including

reinforcing.
2.3.9.1.3. Provide approved wood filler at all recesses and holes left
exposed.
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to work of this Owner, carefully inspect previously installed work.
properly commence.
3.1.1.2. Verify that work of this Owner may be installed in strict accordance with
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0814005
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install doors in accordance with AWS Section 9.
3.2.1.1. Do not field trim doors without prior approval.
3.2.1.2. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.
3.2.1.3. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. Trim
fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating
requirements.
3.2.1.4. Machine cut for field applied hardware in compliance with listing.
3.2.1.5. Sand all edges of doors, including top edge, after fabrication and field
adjustment to a smooth and uniform surface.
3.2.2. Coordination.
3.2.2.1. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in

Section 08 11 00 and hardware specified in Section 08 71 00.
3.2.2.2. Coordinate installation of glazing, including all trims, sealants and labeling
requirements.
3.2.2.3. Coordinate sealer installation at cut-outs and hardware preparation.
3.2.3. Install door louvers plumb and level. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
3.2.4. Before finishing, remove handling marks and exposure markings from all surfaces and
edges with a complete block sanding using at least 150 grit sandpaper. Ease all edges.
Steam out all scratches before sanding.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0814006
SECTION 08 31 13
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Access doors and frames.
1.2.1. Manufacture fire rated access doors and frames to conform to UL 10B, and Title 24,
CCR, Part 2.
1.2.2. Provide labels indicating rating.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.2. Submit schedule indicating location of access panels per Article 2.1 below. Provide
shop drawings defining clearances and alignment with other finish materials and
components, including light fixtures, mechanical air registers, and related items.
2.1. ACCESS DOOR UNITS
2.1.1. Manufacturer: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Karp, Inc. are

01 25 00. Milcor is an acceptable manufacturer.
2.1.2. Applications and Series
2.1.2.1. Non-Rated Wall/Ceiling Exposed face: Style DSC-214M.
2.1.2.2. Non-Rated Gypsum board ceiling Concealed Face: Style RDW.
2.1.2.3. Non-Rated Acoustical tile ceiling concealed face: Style DSC-210.
2.1.2.4. Non-Rated Plaster ceiling concealed face: Style DSC-214PL.
2.1.2.5. Rated Wall/Ceiling exposed face: Style KRP-150 FR.
2.1.3. Size and Location:
2.1.3.1. Provide at all locations necessary to access all electrical components,

valves, controls, damper resetting mechanisms, and other components
requiring maintenance, inspection, adjustment, or reset.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama ACCESSDOORSANDFRAMES
JKA#15100 0831131
2.1.3.2. Provide panels of such size as necessary to remove largest single
component requiring maintenance or replacement. Unless noted
otherwise on drawings, provide minimum 18 x 18 inches square panel size
at all locations.
2.1.4. Hinge and Locking Mechanism:
2.1.4.1. Provide continuous piano hinge with stainless steel pin.
2.1.4.2. At areas accessible to public, provide cylinder lock with latch.
2.1.4.3. Provide flush latch release ring at all fire rated access doors in non-public
areas.
2.1.4.4. Provide flush cam lock configured for screwdriver operation at all non-
rated access doors in non-public areas.
2.1.4.5. Provide three keys for each lock configuration. Coordinate with keying
criteria defined by Owner.
2.1.4.6. Provide release latch accessible from push side of access panel.
2.1.5. Fire Resistivity:
2.1.5.1. Fire Rating: UL Labeled 1-1/2 hour B fire rating at panels installed in rated
assemblies.
2.1.5.2. Temperature Rating: Temperature rise limited to 250 degrees F maximum

at 30 minutes.
2.1.6. Finish:
2.1.6.1. Provide stainless steel, Type 304, Number 4 finish at the following areas:
2.1.6.1.1. All exterior surfaces.
2.1.6.1.2. All janitor and laundry areas.
2.1.6.1.3. All shower/toilet rooms.
2.1.6.2. Provide prime coat paint finish at all other applications.
2.1.7. Options
2.1.7.1. Provide continuous 1/16 inch x 3/8 inch neoprene gaskets at all non-fire
rated access panels.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0831132
3.1.1. Inspection:
properly commence.
3.2. ACCESS PANEL LOCATIONS
3.2.1. Review all portions of the work, including electrical, mechanical, plumbing, and fire
protection systems.
3.2.2. Based on such review, provide all access panels necessary, whether shown on
drawings or not, required to comply with product characteristics defined in this Section.
3.2.3. Coordinate location and alignment of access panels with finish materials and other
construction. Verify all alignment issues with Architect.
3.3. INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install frame plumb and level in wall and ceiling openings. Locate in proper position
and alignment, providing convenient access to concealed components.
3.3.2. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.3. Prior to closing of work, obtain Districts inspector approval of panel size and location
selection by an actual reach and removal test. Relocate or replace panels not
providing acceptable access or service capability.
3.3.4. Paint all exposed fasteners, frames and hardware to match adjacent construction.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0831133
SECTION 08 41 00
ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS, ENTRANCES AND WINDOWS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. WORK INCLUDED
1.1.1. Aluminum storefront, entrances and entrance frames.
1.1.2. Aluminum windows, fixed and operable.
1.1.3. Anchors, brackets, and attachments.
1.1.4. Perimeter sealant.
1.2. WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
1.2.1. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
1.3. REFERENCES
1.3.1. ANSI/ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel.
1.3.2. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
1.3.3. ASTM A 653 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
1.3.4. ANSI/ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Profiles,
and Tube.
1.3.5. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
1.3.6. ASTM E 283 Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen
1.3.7. ASTM E 330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls
and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
1.3.8. ASTM E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
1.3.9. FS TT-P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type.
1.4.1. Manufacturer
1.4.1.1. Manufacturer shall have produced the specified system or products for a
period of one (1) year prior to beginning work of this section, and shall have
the capability to produce the specified products to the delivery and quantity

County of Tehama ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS, ENTRANCES AND WINDOWS
JKA #15-100 08 41 00 - 1
1.4.2. Staff
1.4.2.1. Use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills
required and have installed similar applications of the specified products
within one year prior to beginning work of this section.
work.
1.5. SUBMITTALS
1.5.2. Include system and component dimensions; components within assembly; framed
opening requirements and tolerances; anchorage and fasteners; glass and infills; door
hardware requirements; and affected related work.
1.5.4. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.5.5. Submit four samples, 3 x 5 inches in size, illustrating prefinished aluminum surface.
1.6.1. Deliver and handle system components under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
1.6.2. Store and protect system components under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
1.6.3. Provide wrapping to protect prefinished aluminum surfaces.
1.7. WARRANTY
1.7.1. Warranty
1.7.1.1. Provide, in Architect approved form, the Owner with a guarantee against the
following specific defects or failures for a period of three (3) years after Notice
of Substantial Completion:
1.7.1.1.1. Broken, cracked or otherwise damaged glass not resulting

from vandalism or glass failure.
1.7.1.1.2. Water intrusion through storefront system.
1.7.1.1.3. Sealant failure.
2.1. ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM
2.1.1. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Kawneer Company

Architect will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers listed in this
Section, and requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01610.
2.1.1.1. Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers: EFCO Corp., Traco, or equal.

JKA #15-100 08 41 00 - 2
2.1.1.2. Drawings and specifications indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements, and are based upon the specific products indicated in this
Section. Do not modify intended aesthetic effect, as judged solely by the
Architect, except with Architects approval and only to the extent needed to
comply with performance requirements. Submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review where modifications are proposed.
2.1.2. Type: Centerset, flush glazed storefront system, glass captured on four sides, with
aluminum entrance frames and doors.
2.1.3. Interior Storefront Framing System:
2.1.3.1. Series: InFrame Interior Framing System
2.1.3.2. Size: 2 x 6 inch profile.
2.1.3.2.1. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by

aluminum storefront manufacturer for strength, corrosion
resistance, and application of required finish and not less
than 0.070" (1.8 mm) wall thickness at any location for the
main frame and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy
and temper.
2.1.3.2.2. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other

materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum
framing members, trim hardware, anchors, and other
components.
2.1.3.2.3. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic

stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with
ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other
suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand
design pressure indicated.
2.1.3.2.4. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless

steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with
ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or
zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for
SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating;
provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure
indicated.
2.1.3.2.5. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated storefront

system, provide permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-
migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for
joint size and movement.
2.1.3.2.6. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and

other cross-sectional dimensions of storefront members are
nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and
Data.
2.1.3.3. Accessories
2.1.3.3.1. Sill aprons, column covers and other aluminum finish shall be
brake formed or extruded, prefinished to match storefront,
and attached with concealed fasteners.
JKA #15-100 08 41 00 - 3
2.1.3.3.2. Provide all reinforcing and stiffeners, including concealed
steel fabrications, required to comply with specified loading
criteria and within profiles and design as shown on drawings.
2.1.4. Exterior Storefront Framing System:
2.1.4.1. Series: Trifab 601T Framing System
2.1.4.2. Size: 2 x 6 inch profile.
2.1.4.2.1. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by

aluminum storefront manufacturer for strength, corrosion
resistance, and application of required finish and not less
than 0.070" (1.8 mm) wall thickness at any location for the
main frame and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy
and temper.
2.1.4.2.2. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other

materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum
framing members, trim hardware, anchors, and other
components.
2.1.4.2.3. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic

stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with
ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other
suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand
design pressure indicated.
2.1.4.2.4. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless

steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with
ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or
zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for
SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating;
provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure
indicated.
2.1.4.2.5. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated storefront

system, provide permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-
migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for
joint size and movement.
2.1.4.2.6. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and

other cross-sectional dimensions of storefront members are
nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and
Data.
2.1.4.3. Performance:
2.1.4.3.1. Base design load on 85 MPH wind speed, (3 second gust)

Exposure C, and per Chap. 16A, Part 2, Title 24, CCR.
2.1.4.3.2. Deflection: Assembly limited to 1/175 at 20 PSF static air

load per ASTM E 330.

JKA #15-100 08 41 00 - 4
2.1.4.3.3. Breakage: At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the
specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in
the framing members in excess of 0.2 percent of their clear
spans shall occur.
2.1.4.3.4. Air Infiltration: Assembly limited to 0.06 CFM per square foot
at 6.24 PSF in accordance with ASTM E 283.
2.1.4.3.5. Water Resistance: No water penetration of assembly at 8.00

PSF in accordance with ASTM E 331 and AAMA 501.
2.1.4.3.6. Thermal Movement: No damage to system or components

resulting from expansion and contraction within system
components caused by a cycling temperature range of 170 F
degrees.
2.1.4.3.7. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing

channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to
exterior.
2.1.4.4. Accessories
2.1.4.4.1. Sill aprons, column covers and other aluminum finish shall be
brake formed or extruded, prefinished to match storefront,
and attached with concealed fasteners.
2.1.4.4.2. Provide continuous aluminum sill flashing at all storefront sill

conditions. Extend sill flange up wall 2 inches at wall
terminations.
2.1.4.4.3. Provide all reinforcing and stiffeners, including concealed

steel fabrications, required to comply with specified loading
criteria and within profiles and design as shown on drawings.
2.1.5. Finishes:
2.1.5.1. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces:
2.1.5.1.1. Finish Type: Clear anodized coating, AA-A41 designation.
2.1.5.2. Concealed Steel Items: Prime with VOC compliant primer.
2.1.5.3. Protection of Contact Surfaces: Coat contact surfaces of aluminum surfaces

in contact with dissimilar metals or with incompatible materials such as
concrete, masonry or plaster with alkali-resistant bituminous paint coating
before installation, or isolate with approved tape or gaskets.
2.1.5.4. When all components prefinished in a single color or finish can not be
completed in the same day, label and bundle separately all such components
so as to maintain maximum color match.
2.1.6. Entrance Door System
2.1.6.1. Series: Series 350 Tuffline, modified as specified below.
2.1.6.2. Mounting: Off-set, single acting

JKA #15-100 08 41 00 - 5
2.1.6.3. Head rail Dimension: 6 inches high, and as necessary to accommodate
specified closer.
2.1.6.4. Bottom rail Dimension: 10 inches high.
2.1.6.5. Glass stops: Square.
2.1.6.6. Finish: Prefinished to match storefront system.
2.1.7. Entrance Door Hardware
2.1.7.1. Weatherstripping: Polyurethane or silicone inserts in locations as shown on

drawings.
2.1.7.2. Balance of hardware as specified in Section 08710.
2.2. GLASS
2.2.1. Per Section 08 81 00.
2.3. SEALANTS
2.3.1. Per Section 07 90 00.
2.4. FABRICATION
2.4.1. Fabricate doors and frames allowing for minimum clearances and shim spacing around
perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation.
2.4.2. Accurately miter and fit all members to hairline joints. Make joints and connections flush,
hairline, and weatherproof.
2.4.3. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with screw and spline internal reinforcement.
Weld or mechanically fasten along entire line of contact on the unexposed side. No
discoloration on face will be permitted after aluminum finishing.
2.4.4. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior.
2.4.5. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchorage items.
2.4.6. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and jointing to ensure concealment from view.
2.4.7. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for all door and window hardware.
Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection

JKA #15-100 08 41 00 - 6
commence.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. General
3.2.1.1. Install doors, frames, glazing and hardware in accordance with

3.2.1.2. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain

continuity of thermal barrier.
3.2.1.3. Install all members with adequate provision for settlement, expansion, and
contraction to occur without breaking glass.
3.2.1.4. Protection of Contact Surfaces: Aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar

metals or with incompatible materials such as concrete, masonry, and plaster,
shall be painted on contact surfaces with a protective coating of alkali-
resistant bituminous paint before installation or, isolated in an approved
manner with nonabsorbative tape or gaskets.
3.2.1.5. Expansion and Contraction: Construct and install all aluminum work so as to
avoid distortion and/or stress of parts and fastenings resulting from thermal
expansion and contraction.
3.2.2. Fitting and anchorage
3.2.2.1. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly
dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
3.2.2.2. Provide aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel screws, bolts, nuts, and
other fastening devices. Use manufacturers approved anchorage devices to
securely attach frame assembly to structure.
3.2.2.3. Furnish all necessary accessories, including closures, flashings, and backing
as indicated and required for a complete installation.
3.2.3. Sealant
3.2.3.1. Thoroughly apply sealant and other waterproofing materials to all joints as
required to maintain specified air and water performance values.
3.2.3.2. Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07
90 00.
3.2.4. Hardware Installation

JKA #15-100 08 41 00 - 7
3.2.4.1. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 08 71 00 for
installation requirements.
3.2.4.2. Provide required cutouts, recesses, mortising or milling operations for

hardware. Reinforce with backing plates as required to ensure adequate
strength of connection.
3.2.4.3. Adjust operating hardware.
3.2.5. Glass Installation
3.2.5.1. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 81 00, using
manufacturers approved methods.
3.3. TOLERANCES
3.3.1. Variation from Plane: 0.03 inches per foot maximum or 0.25 inches per 30 feet, whichever
is less.
3.3.2. Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 0.015 inches.
3.4. CLEANING
3.4.1. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces.
3.4.2. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied
with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
3.4.3. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to
sealant manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 08 41 00 - 8
SECTION 08 44 00
CURTAINWALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. The curtainwall system for this work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, design,
engineering, and installation of all glass and aluminum curtainwall, support system,
and structural embedded items required to comply with criteria specified below.
1.1.2. Provide aluminum framing work including the following:
1.1.2.1. Wall system design;
1.1.2.2. Gaskets and air seals;
1.1.2.3. Sealants, internal and exterior, for sealing system components and system
to building interfaces;
1.1.2.4. Primary and secondary anchors and clips, and framing as required to
secure the framing to the structure;
1.1.2.5. Embedded inserts for anchorage of system components;
1.1.2.6. Mock ups and tests;
1.1.2.7. Doors and related hardware within the glazing system;
1.2.1. Design Qualifications of Curtainwall Manufacturer/Fabricator
1.2.1.1. All curtainwall systems shall be designed, engineered, stamped, and

fabricated in accordance with the specified criteria. Curtainwall
manufacturer/ fabricator shall have designed and installed at least two
systems of equal complexity and character within past two years.
1.2.1.2. Curtainwall design shall be engineered by a structural engineer currently

licensed in the State of California.
1.2.1.3. Consultant: The Owner or Architect may elect to engage the services of
a Consultant who may perform any or all of the following:
1.2.1.3.1. Review submittals, such as bid proposals and shop

drawings.
1.2.1.3.2. Monitor the installation.
1.2.1.3.3. Observe laboratory and/or field testing.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama CURTINWALLANDGLAZEDASSEMBLIES
JKA#15100 0844001
1.2.2. Qualifications of Installers:
1.2.2.1. For the actual fabrication and installation of the curtainwall system, use
only mechanics who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the
fabrication and installation of this material and who are completely familiar
with the manufacturer's recommended fabrication and installation
methods. Installers shall have had not less than 5 years experience with
systems of similar complexity.
1.2.2.2. Fabricator/installer shall be approved or licensed by manufacturer to install

specified products and systems.
1.2.2.3. Welders shall be currently approved by jurisdictional authority and

qualified per AWS D1.1.
1.2.3. Finishing
1.2.3.1. All aluminum shall be prefinished by an applicator experienced in finishing

with Kynar 500 resin coatings. Applicator shall be currently approved by
manufacturer of approved coating system.
1.3. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
1.3.1. General
1.3.1.1. The responsibility for the Curtainwall System is totally the Contractor's. All
designs and resolutions proposed in the shop drawings, calculations, and
related documentation and certification must be demonstrated not only by
accepted testing data, as approved by the Owner and Architect, but also
throughout the warranty periods specified.
1.3.1.2. Contractor's responsibility shall also include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1.3.1.2.1. Submit written notification to the Architect of any

deficiencies of discrepancies that would affect the proper
or timely installation of the work of this Section.
1.3.1.2.2. Coordinate bench marks for elevations and building line

offset marks for alignment.
1.3.1.2.3. Coordinate and verify, by measurement at the jobsite, all

dimensions affecting work of this Section.
1.3.1.2.4. Obtain decisions regarding any corrective measures from

the Architect prior to the refabrication and/or modification
of items affected by field conditions which vary with those
on the approved shop drawings and/or contract
documents. Obtain decisions on those items which are
detrimental to the proper and timely installation of the
systems.
1.3.1.2.5. Ensure the compatibility of adjacent items and materials

that relate to work of this Section.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0844002
1.3.2. Design Responsibility
1.3.2.1. System and material requirements shown on drawings and specified

establish basic dimensions, profiles, sightlines and appearance, and
govern the work. Within the limitations established by the drawings and
specifications, the Contractor is responsible for design of the work of this
Section, and for required jurisdictional authority approvals and permits and
all costs thereof.
1.3.2.1.1. Design for work of this Section shall start at the structural
steel members of the building frame and the edges of
concrete slabs and shall include all braces, kickers, and
like ancillary framing members required for structural
integrity of the work of this Section, and shall also include
connectors to be embedded in concrete for attachment of
work of this Section.
1.3.2.1.2. Ancillary struts, braces, kickers and like members shall be

designed to impose no torque loads on building structural
steel beams, and without interference with interior work or
finishes.
1.3.2.1.3. Minor dimension and profile adjustments to those shown

may be made in the interests of fabrication or erection
methods or techniques, weatherability factors, and the
ability of the design to satisfy the performance
requirements, provided the visual design concept and
intent of this Section are maintained and such
adjustments are approved by the Owner and Architect.
1.4. REFERENCES
1.4.1. Codes and Standards
1.4.1.1. Part 2, Title 24, CCR.
1.4.2. Organization and Trade Standards
1.4.2.1. AA - Aluminum Association
1.4.2.1.1. Specification for Aluminum Structures.
1.4.2.1.2. Aluminum Standards and Data.
1.4.2.2. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association
1.4.2.2.1. Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual.
1.4.2.2.2. AAMA 501 - Methods of Test for Exterior Walls.
1.4.2.2.3. AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain

Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0844003
1.4.2.2.4. AAMA 605.2 Voluntary Specification for High
Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
1.4.2.3. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
1.4.2.3.1. ASTM E 283 - "Test Method for Determining the Rate of

Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors under Specified Pressure Differences across the
Specimen."
1.4.2.3.2. ASTM E 330 - "Test Method for Structural Performance of

Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform
Static Air Pressure Difference."
1.4.2.3.3. ASTM E 331 - "Test Method for Water Penetration of

Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform
Static Air Pressure Difference."
1.4.2.3.4. ASTM E 783 - " Test Method for Field Measurement of Air
Leakage through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors."
1.4.2.4. Glazing Association of North America (GANA):
1.4.2.4.1. Glazing Manual.
1.4.2.4.2. Sealant Manual.
1.4.2.5. American Welding Society (ASW):
1.4.2.5.1. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
1.5. SUBMITTALS
1.5.1. Shop Drawings
1.5.1.1. Show all joinery techniques, provision for horizontal and vertical
expansion, glass and metal thicknesses, and framing and anchor member
profiles.
1.5.1.2. Show all finishes, sizes, profiles, moldings, dimensioned locations of

hardware items with reinforcement, methods of anchoring, assembly, and
erection, internal drainage, isolation, glazing and reglazing procedures
and materials, and caulking.
1.5.1.3. Include manufacturer's technical and structural data.
1.5.1.4. Identify all materials.
1.5.1.5. Show relative layout of all adjacent walls, beams, columns, and slabs, all
correctly dimensioned to each other and grid lines.
1.5.1.6. Dimension the position of glass edge relative to metal daylight.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0844004
1.5.1.7. Include die drawings for all gaskets, weatherstrips, and aluminum
extrusions, showing full-size details.
1.5.1.8. Prepare schedule of sealants, primers, back-up materials, tapes, gaskets,

separators and related items including the designation of locations where
each material is to be used; methods of application, special instructions,
cross references to the Shop Drawings and explanatory details as
required, to insure and appraise complete application of all sealants.
1.6. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.6.1. General
1.6.1.1. Use all means necessary to protect curtainwall materials before, during
and after installation and to protect the installed work of other trades.
1.6.1.2. In the event of damage immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the satisfaction of the Architect, and at no additional cost to
the Owner.
1.7. GUARANTEE
1.7.1. Contractor shall provide written guarantee, in Architect approved form, guaranteeing
curtainwall system free from the following defects or failures, for a period of five years
from Date of Notice of Substantial Completion.
1.7.1.1. Water intrusion, in any form, through curtainwall.
1.7.1.2. Broken, cracked or otherwise damaged glass, not resulting from

vandalism or misuse.
1.7.1.3. Joint separation in curtainwall frame or permanent deformation in excess

of specified tolerances.
1.7.1.4. Sealant failure, including adhesive or cohesive failure.
1.7.1.5. Prefinished coating failure, including chalking and fading in excess of

referenced standard.
2.1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1. General
2.1.1.1. All components, assemblies and completed work of this Section shall
conform to the following performance standards and comply with
applicable sections of the regulations of governing agencies having
jurisdiction. Except when applicable codes make other provisions, or as
noted below, loads shall act in combinations that provide the most
unfavorable conditions.
2.1.1.2. Wind loadings need not be considered as additive to seismic loads.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0844005
2.1.2. Basis of Design:
2.1.2.1. Design entire system for flexural, shear and torsional stresses resulting
from positive and negative wind pressures acting normal to the plane of
the system. Pressures shall be in accordance with the applicable code.
2.1.3. Wind Load Criteria:
2.1.3.1. Base design load on 85 MPH wind speed, (3 second gust) Exposure C,
and per Chap. 16A, Part 2, Title 24, CCR.
2.1.4. Maximum Permissible Deflections and Stresses (as follows):
2.1.4.1. Normal to the plane of the wall, deflection of framing members shall not
exceed 1/200 of span length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less.
2.1.4.2. Breakage: At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design
load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in
excess of 0.2 percent of their clear spans shall occur.
2.1.4.3. In plane of the wall, deflection of the framing members when carrying their
full design deadload shall not reduce the glass or panel bite below 75% of
the design dimension, and shall not reduce the glass or panel edge
clearance below 25% of the design dimension or 1/8 inch, whichever is
greater. Restrict deflection further if required for proper assembly and fit
and performance of components.
2.1.4.4. At connection points of framing members to anchors, anchor deflection in

any direction shall not exceed 1/16 inch. Where connection points are not
clearly defined, maximum anchor deflection shall not exceed 1/16 inch.
2.1.4.5. Stresses must take into account interaction and shall not exceed the
allowable values established by the documents listed under Article
"References." In no case shall allowable values exceed the yield stress.
2.1.4.6. At 1-1/2 times the design pressure, permanent deflections of framing

members must not exceed 1/1000 of span length, and components must
not experience failure or gross permanent distortion. At the connection
points of framing members to anchors, anchor deflection in any direction
shall not exceed 1/8 inch and permanent set shall not exceed 1/16 inch.
Where connection points are not clearly defined, maximum anchor
deflection and permanent set shall not exceed 1/8 inch and 1/16 inch,
respectively.
2.1.5. Thermal Movement:
2.1.5.1. Provide and/or make allowances for free and noiseless vertical and
horizontal thermal movement due to the contraction and expansion of
component parts, for an ambient temperature range of +20oF to +180oF.
Buckling, opening of joints, glass breakage, undue stress on fasteners,
sealant failure, or any other detrimental effects due to thermal movement
of component parts is not permitted. Fabrication, assembly, and erection
procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature range at the
time of the respective operation.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0844006
2.1.6. Seismic Forces:
2.1.6.1 Seismic lateral force requirements shall comply with the minimum
requirements as established by Chapter 16, Part 2, Title 24, CCR for
Zone 4. The curtainwall framing must accommodate floor drift and
seismic acceleration without contacting edges of the glass or failure of
any wall assembly.
2.1.7. Air Infiltration:
2.1.7.1. When the system is tested according to ASTM E283 at 6.24 psf, air
infiltration at the perimeter of operating doors shall not exceed 0.25 cfm
per foot of door perimeter. Air infiltration, in fixed glazed areas including
curtainwall, shall not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot of wall area. In
calculating wall area, areas of operating doors and windows are not
included.
2.1.8. Water Infiltration:
2.1.8.1. Includes appearance of water on roomside surface of any part of system,

other than condensation. System design shall include provisions to drain
to the exterior any leakage of water occurring at joints and/or condensation
taking place within the System construction by way of gutters designed for
this purpose.
2.1.8.1.1. Static pressure: No water infiltration under static pressure

when the construction is tested per ASTM E331 at
differential static pressure of 15.0 psf.
2.2. CURTAINWALL SYSTEM
2.2.1. General
2.2.1.1. All curtainwall system components shall represent an integrated

assembly.
2.2.1.2. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by

Kawneer Company are indicated to establish required level of quality,
appearance, and performance. The Architect will consider comparable
products by alternate manufacturers listed in this Section, and requests for
substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01 25 00.
2.2.1.2.1. Acceptable Alternate Manufacturers: Arcadia, U S

Aluminum, Vistawall, or equal.
2.2.1.2.2. Drawings and specifications indicate sizes, profiles,

colors, and dimensional requirements, and are based
upon the specific products indicated in this Section. Do
not modify intended aesthetic effect, as judged solely by
the Architect, except with Architects approval and only to
the extent needed to comply with performance
requirements. Submit comprehensive explanatory data to
Architect for review where modifications are proposed.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0844007
2.2.2. System Characteristics: Framing System
2.2.2.1. Curtainwall Series: Kawneer 1600 Wall System 1 Series with Steel
Reinforcement
2.2.2.2. Sightline dimension: 2-1/2 inch
2.2.2.3. Mullion depth: Varies (7 and 10 )
2.2.2.4. Finish: Factory mill finish or other approved finish suitable for coating
system specified in this Section.
2.3. GLAZING
2.3.1. Per Section 08 81 00.
2.4. FINISH
2.4.1.1. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces:
2.4.1.1.1. Finish Type: Clear anodized coating, AA-A41

designation.
2.4.1.2. Concealed Steel Items: Prime with VOC compliant primer.
2.4.1.3. Protection of Contact Surfaces: Coat contact surfaces of aluminum

surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals or with incompatible materials
such as concrete, masonry or plaster with alkali-resistant bituminous paint
coating before installation, or isolate with approved tape or gaskets.
2.4.1.4. When all components prefinished in a single color or finish can not be
completed in the same day, label and bundle separately all such
components so as to maintain maximum color match
2.5. GLAZING MATERIALS
2.5.1. Gaskets and Weatherstrips:
2.5.1.1. Sponge gaskets - Extruded black neoprene with a hardness of 50+/-5

durometer shore A and conforming to ASTM C509. Design sponge
gaskets to provide 20% to 30% compression.
2.5.1.2. Dense gaskets - Extruded black neoprene with a shore A hardness of

75+/-5 for hollow profiles, and 60+/-5 for solid profiles, and conforming to
NAAMM SG-1-70. Dense gaskets of EPDM are also acceptable for flame
propagation.
2.5.1.3. Corners - Mold all corners of all interior gaskets, where compatible with
installation procedure. Contractor is responsible to provide gaskets of a
hardness and design such that they will be in contact at all times with
adjacent elements during dynamic loading, building and thermal
movements, and provide a watertight seal as required to meet the
performance criteria. They shall be sized in length to prevent pullback at
corners.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0844008
2.5.2. Setting Blocks:
2.5.2.1. Setting blocks shall be a black solid extruded neoprene with hardness of
85+/-5 durometer shore A, a minimum length of four inches, and a
minimum width corresponding to glass thickness. Locate setting blocks
as recommended by GANA, Glazing Manual. Shims used in conjunction
with setting blocks must be of the same material, hardness, length, and
width as the setting blocks. Secure setting blocks and setting block chairs
against migration.
2.5.3. Edge Blocks:
2.5.3.1. Provide edge blocks to limit lateral movement of each lite. Blocks shall be
65+/-5 durometer shore A solid neoprene. Blocks shall be sized and
located as recommended by GANA, Glazing Manual.
2.6. SEALANTS
2.6.1. General Sealant Requirements
2.6.1.1. Conform to Section 07 90 00 and requirements specified in this section.
2.6.1.2. Locate and identify all sealants by product name on the shop drawings.
2.6.1.3. All sealants shall be tooled as a separate operation after application, to fill
joints and provide a smooth surface.
2.6.1.4. In using the specified sealants or approved alternates, strictly observe

printed instructions of the sealant manufacturer regarding joint size
limitations, mixing, priming, and application.
2.6.1.5. Where the printed instructions are indefinite on the use of a primer, consult
sealant manufacturer. Unless printed instructions advise to the contrary,
do not apply sealants when substrates are wet or when the temperature is
below 40oF.
2.6.2. Sealants:
2.6.2.1. Glazing sealants - Silicone. Dow Corning "983" or "795", or General

Electric "SCS 1200", or Tremco "SpecTrem 2", or Rexnord/Sonneborn
Building Products "Neutral Cure" (color as selected by the Architect).
2.6.2.2. Perimeter sealants - Silicone or multi-component polyurethane as

manufactured by Dow Corning, General Electrical, Tremco, or
Rexnord/Sonneborn Building Products (custom color to match Architect's
sample).
2.6.2.3. Primers - Furnish for all locations where recommended by the sealant
manufacturer for improved adhesion.
2.6.2.4. Joint backing rod - Closed cell polyurethane, sized at 130% of the average
joint width, unless otherwise recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0844009
2.7. STEEL REINFORCEMENT
2.7.1. Per manufacturer
2.8. FASTENERS
2.8.1. Type, size, alloy, quantity, and spacing of all fasteners and anchorage devices shall
be as required for the performance. All screws, bolts, nuts, washers and rivets in wet
locations shall be 300 series non-magnetic stainless steel only. Fasteners in non-wet
locations may be cadmium or zinc plated. All anchor bolts and nuts shall have self-
locking devices incorporating nylon inserts or patches similar to those manufactured
by Nylock Fastener Div. of USM Corp. Welded studs (KSM Capacitor Discharge Type)
shall be aluminum or aluminum substrate. No distortion or discolor shall be permitted
on the exposed surfaces.
2.9. SLIP PADS
2.9.1. Provide approved slip pad between moving components at all expansion connections.
2.10. FLASHINGS/COPINGS/SILL COVERS
2.10.1. Flashings, copings, and related components in direct relationship with the aluminum
framing systems shall be of 5052 alloy aluminum in a thickness not less than 0.050
inch. All exposed flashings shall have hemmed edges where exposed to view to
provide stiffness and a retainer for splice sleeves. Flashings shall be fluoropolymer
paint finished in accordance with the aluminum framing systems and as shown on
drawings.
2.11. SHIMS, BLOCKING AND SPACERS
2.11.1. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, metals used for shims, blocking, and spacers
shall be prime painted steel, incorporating separators for dissimilar materials and at
dynamic connections. Do not use aluminum or plastic shims at structural connections
or horseshoe (U) shaped shims at dynamic or other connections where they could work
free.
2.12. FABRICATION/SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.12.1. Curtainwall Test Assembly
2.12.1.1. In the event that fabricator/manufacturer does not have data from
previously tested assemblies demonstrating compliance with specified
criteria, fabricator/manufacturer shall employ services of an independent
testing laboratory to test proposed assembly in accordance with
recognized procedures and specified criteria.
2.12.1.2. Test assembly shall be constructed with fabricators staff.
2.12.1.3. Air infiltration test shall conform to ASTM E 283. Differential static test
pressure shall be 1.57 and 6.24 psf. Chamber leakage shall be accurately
determined, not estimated.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 08440010
2.12.1.4. The occurrence of condensation during water infiltration tests is
acceptable. Other water leakage is acceptable only if all of the following
conditions are satisfied: (a) the water is contained and drained to the
exterior; (b) there is no wetting of surface that would be visible to the
building occupants; and (c) there would be no staining or other damage to
any part of the completed building or its furnishings. This definition of
water leakage shall govern over other definitions which may appear in
referenced documents. State criteria of temperature and humidity.
2.12.1.5. Where the test sequence or test failures requires successive water
infiltration tests, the only means used to drain water from internal cavities
shall be gravity drainage through the weep system for a minimum of 15
minutes. Air pressure, removal of parts or other means of draining water
shall not be used.
2.12.1.6. Static water infiltration test shall conform to ASTM E331. Differential test
shall be 15 psf. There shall be no unacceptable water leakage as defined
herein.
2.12.1.7. Structural test shall conform to ASTM E330. Deflection gauges shall be
set to zero prior to each application of pressure at 50, 75, 100 and 150
percent of design pressures, both negative and positive. Deflection gauge
readings shall be recorded after application of pressure. Deflection
measurements are not required for the initial preload.
2.12.1.7.1. Typical deflection of loads will be measured with

computer or micrometer dial indicators. Allowable
deflections of metal framing members at design load is
limited to 1/175 or 3/4 inch maximum, whichever is less.
2.12.1.7.2. Supplementary loads per ASTM E330 shall achieve 150

percent of both positive and negative design pressures.
No failures, glass breakage nor permanent set in excess
of 1/1000 allowed. Deflections are not normally
measured.
2.13.1. All other materials required for a complete and watertight installation shall be new, as
selected by contractor, and subject to approval of Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to installation of curtainwall, carefully inspect the installed work of all
3.1.1.2. Verify that all work can be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent
codes and regulations, the original design, reviewed submittals, and
manufacturers' recommendations.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 08440011
3.1.2. Acceptance of Surface Conditions
3.1.2.1. Provide Architect with written acceptance of surface conditions, certifying

that all surfaces are suitable for work of this section to proceed.
3.2. FABRICATION AND FINISH
3.2.1. Fabrication:
3.2.1.1. Accurately machine, properly fit and fill all joints, corners and miters.
Rigidly weld full depth of joints. Match work to produce consistent
continuity of line and design.
3.2.1.2. Make all fastenings concealed where practicable. Use Phillips flat head
countersunk type screws in exposed finished surfaces requiring exposed
fastening. Screw head finish to match adjacent material.
3.2.1.3. Fabricate, assemble and fit all parts in the shop insofar as practicable,
ready for erection at the site. Trial fit at the shop work that cannot be shop
assembled, to insure a proper and expeditious field assembly.
3.2.1.4. Make all joints and connections in exterior metal watertight with metal joint
sealant specified. Provide properly designed watertight expansion joints
as required.
3.2.1.5. Design and anchor curtainwall so that it will not be distorted nor the
fastenings adversely stressed from the expansion and contraction of the
metal. Provide slotted holes for erection adjustment.
3.2.1.6. Welding shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Code for Arc
and Gas Welding of the American Welding Society. Welds shall be of
adequate strength and durability, with jointing tight, flush, smooth and
clean.
3.2.1.7. Weld behind finished surfaces so as to cause no distortion and/or

discoloration on the finished side. Remove all weld splatter and welding
oxides on finished surfaces.
3.2.1.8. Grind welds flush and smooth on exposed surfaces and polish to match
and blend with adjacent parent metal.
3.2.1.9. Reinforce corner joints and anchorage locations. Conceal and secure in
place reinforcement and brackets at joints without visible fastenings.
3.2.1.10. Provide not less than 1/4" diameter weep holes for pressure equalization
which will drain all internal spaces. Locate weep holes where they will not
be affected by updraft.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 08440012
3.2.1.11. Fabrication shall be such that no parts or fasteners will be unduly strained
under normal conditions of use. Surfaces shall be smooth and free from
buckles or waves. Edges shall be straight, true, and square, and joints
shall be even, true and weathertight.
3.2.1.12. Joints shall be made by approved mechanical fasteners, located on

concealed surfaces. All joints in mullions, trim, and other members shall
be flush and held together at joints by concealed sleeves of trim shapes.
3.2.1.13. Furnish all exposed surfaces of aluminum with smooth surfaces free of
scratches, stains or other defects. After fabrication but prior to application
of finish, clean and degrease all work using approved, inhibited mild
alkaline cleaner.
3.2.1.14. Carefully match all exposed work to produce continuity of line and design.
All joints in exposed metal work, unless otherwise shown or specified, shall
be accurately fitted and rigidly secured.
3.2.2. Prefinishing
3.2.2.1. All aluminum system components shall be prefinished in accordance with

PPG recommendations and as specified.
3.2.2.2. When all components prefinished in a single color can not be completed
in the same day, label and bundle separately all such components so as
to maintain maximum color match.
3.2.2.3. Protect all prefinished aluminum components from damage during

shipping, fabrication, and handling as necessary.
3.3. INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Perform all work by skilled workmen, especially trained and experienced in this type of
work. Curtainwall contractor shall not subcontract the installation work.
3.3.2. Erect curtainwall plumb, square and at proper elevation and plane. Anchor securely
to receiving surfaces and provide all reinforcing, anchor plates, and angles.
3.3.3. Provide anchorage of curtainwall to structure with supporting embedments and

brackets designed to provide three dimensional adjustment and accurate location of
wall components. Fasten adjustable anchorage connections after wall is properly
positioned.
3.3.4. Perform all welding by skilled mechanics qualified or licensed in accord with local
building regulations, and conform to the recommended practices of the American
Welding Society. Welds and adjoining areas shall be thoroughly wire brush cleaned
and painted with field galvanizing compound. Special care shall be taken to protect
glass and other finished surfaces from damage and to prevent causing fires.
3.3.5. Erect work free from sags, waves, buckles, or other objectionable defects. Anchorage
shall be adequate to resist safely all stresses to which the curtainwall shall normally be
subjected.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 08440013
3.3.6. Coat aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of zinc chromate
primer made with a synthetic resin vehicle. Dry primer before the installation. Coat
aluminum in contact with concrete with one coat of alkali-resistant, bituminous paint
before installation.
3.3.7. Design the curtainwall to accommodate structural tolerances reasonably expected in

a steel framed building. Provided structural irregularities do not exceed specified
tolerances, and clearances shown on approved shop drawings are maintained, all
parts of the metal curtainwall, when completed, shall be within the following tolerances:
3.3.7.1. Maximum variation from plane or location shown on approved shop

drawings: 1/8 inch per 12 feet of length or 1/4 inch in any total length.
3.3.7.2. Maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members
abutting end to end in line: 1/32 inch.
3.3.7.3. Deviation from theoretical position in plan or elevation, including deviation

from plumb, level, or dimensioned angle shall not exceed 3/8 inch total at
any location. Change in deviation shall not exceed 1/8 inch for 12 foot run
in all directions.
3.3.7.4. Maximum offset between glass framing members at corners of glazing

pocket shall not exceed 1/32 inch.
3.3.7.5. Provide accurate bench marks for use in wall erection. Promptly correct
errors in inconsistencies.
3.3.7.6. Tolerances for building frame and other work are specified in other
Sections. Design curtainwall to accommodate these tolerances.
3.3.7.7. Curtainwall components shall accommodate a live load floor deflection of

not less than 1/2 inch, upward or downward, per story. This is additive to
any joint and to erection, fabrication, and thermal expansion tolerances.
3.4. PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
3.4.1. Provide whatever means are necessary to protect finish. Take particular care to
protect all exposed aluminum work from damage to finish as a result of other work
subsequently performed or from other causes. Any material becoming damaged prior
to acceptance of project, and which is not subject to repair as reviewed or authorized
by Architect, shall be removed and replaced with new work, at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.5. FIELD TEST
3.5.1. Provide field test of completed installation in accordance with AAMA 501.2 "Field
Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water
Leakage." Correct all deficiencies and retest as necessary.
3.6. CLEAN-UP
3.6.1. Remove all protective materials from the curtainwall system and clean all exposed
members, using plain water or a cleaner specifically recommended by the
manufacturer of the system.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 08440014
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 08440015
SECTION 08 62 00
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Prefabricated tubular skylight system.
1.2. SUBMITTALS
1.2.2. Include general construction, configurations, jointing methods and locations when
applicable, and fastening methods.
1.3. WARRANTY
1.3.1. Contractor shall provide written guarantee, in Architect approved form, guaranteeing
system free from the following defects or failures, for a period of five years from Date of
Notice of Substantial Completion.
1.3.1.1. Water intrusion, in any form, through skylight system.
1.3.1.2. Broken, cracked or otherwise damaged glazing material not resulting from
vandalism or misuse.
1.3.1.3. Joint separation in frame or permanent deformation in excess of specified

tolerances.
1.3.1.4. Sealant failure, including adhesive or cohesive failure.
1.3.1.5. Prefinished coating failure, including chalking and fading in excess of

2.1. PREFABRICATED SKYLIGHT
2.1.1. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Solatube,

http://www.solatube.com/ are indicated to establish required level of quality, appearance,
and performance. The Architect will consider requests for substitutions, under the
provisions of Section 01 25 00.
2.1.2. Skylight Type 1.
2.1.2.1. Brighten Up Series: Solatube Model 290 DS: 14 Inch (350 mm) Daylighting
System:
2.1.2.1.1. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant

dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube

County of Tehama UNIT SKYLIGHTS
JKA #15-100 08 62 00 - 1
2.1.2.1.1.1. Outer Dome Glazing: Type DA, 0.125 inch
(3.25 mm) minimum thickness impact resistant
injection molded acrylic classified as CC2
material; UV inhibiting (100 percent UV C, 100
percent UV B and 98.5 percent UV A), impact
modified acrylic blend.
2.1.2.1.1.2. Raybender 3000: Variable prism optic molded

into outer dome to capture low angle sunlight
and limit high angle sunlight. Frame: Aluminum,
with all required gaskets, fasteners and
flashings.
2.1.2.1.2. Flashing Base: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing

functioning as base support for dome and top of tube.
2.1.2.1.2.1. Base Material: Sheet steel, corrosion resistant,

meeting ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A
463/A 463M or ASTM A792/A 792M, 0.028 inch
(0.7 mm) plus or minus .006 inch (.015 mm)
thick
2.1.2.1.2.2. Base Flat: Flat Type F4, no pitch 4 inches (102

mm) high.
2.1.2.1.3. Tube Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0.090 inch (2.3
mm) nominal thickness injection molded high impact acrylic;
to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing
and channel condensed moisture out of tubing.
2.1.2.1.4. Reflective Extension Tube: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.015

inch (0.4 mm).
2.1.2.1.4.1. Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity high

reflectance specular finish on exposed
reflective surface. Visible spectrum (400 nm to
760 nm) greater than 99 percent. Total solar
spectrum (400 nm to 2500 nm) less than 80.2
percent.
2.1.2.1.4.2. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color

model) shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than
minus 2 as determined in accordance to ASTM
E 308.
2.1.2.1.4.3. Tube Diameter: Approximately 14 inches (356

mm).
2.1.2.1.5. Reflective 30 degree Adjustable tube: Aluminum sheet,

thickness .015 inch (0.4 mm)
2.1.2.1.5.1. Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity high

reflectance specular finish on exposed
reflective surface. Visible spectrum (400 nm to
760 nm) greater than 99 percent. Total solar
spectrum (400 nm to 2500 nm) less than 80.2
percent.
JKA #15-100 08 62 00 - 2
2.1.2.1.6. Ceiling Ring: Injection molded impact resistant acrylic.
Nominal thickness is 0.110 inches (2.8 mm).
2.1.2.1.7. Dual Glazed Diffuser Assembly for tubes penetrating

ceilings: (Hard-lid Ceiling)
2.1.2.1.7.1. Lower glazing with integral injection molded

acrylic Dress Ring classified as CC2 material.
Nominal thickness is 0.110 inches (2.8 mm):
2.1.2.1.7.2. Classic OptiView (Fresnel Lens) Diffuser:

Molded polycarbonate plastic classified as CC1
material, nominal thickness 0.022 inches (0.61
mm) with injection molded acrylic Diffuser Trim
Ring. Type L1.
2.1.2.1.8. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Not Penetrating Ceilings

(Open Ceiling): Diffuser attached directly to bottom of tube.
2.1.2.1.8.1. Lens: Type L1 OptiView Fresnel lens design to

maximize light output and diffusion. Visible
Light Transmission shall be greater than 90
percent at 0.022 inch (0.6 mm) thick. Classified
as CC2.
2.1.2.1.9. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: (Lay-in

Tile Ceiling): Ceiling mounted box transitioning from round
tube to square ceiling assembly, supporting light transmitting
surface at bottom termination of tube 23.8 inches by 23.8
inches (605 mm by 605 mm) square frame to fit standard
suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings.
2.1.2.1.9.1. Round to square transition box made of opaque

polymeric material, classified as CC2, Class C,
0.110 inch (2.8 mm) thick.
2.1.2.1.9.2. Lens: Type L1 OptiView Fresnel lens design to

maximize light output and diffusion with
extruded aluminum frame and EPDM foam seal
to minimize condensation and bug, dirt and air
infiltration per ASTM E 283. Visible Light
Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent
at 0.022 inch (0.6 mm) thick. Classified as CC2.
2.2.1. Provide all other materials necessary for a complete and watertight installation.
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this
installation may properly commence.
JKA #15-100 08 62 00 - 3
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with installation of

roofing system and related flashings. Provide weathertight installation.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 08 62 00 - 4
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions of Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required
for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the
same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.
B. This Section includes the following, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Door Hardware.
2. Storefront and Entrance door hardware.
3. Thresholds, gasketing and weather-stripping.
4. Door silencers or mutes.
C. Related Sections: The following sections are noted as containing requirements that relate to
this Section, but may not be limited to this listing.
1. Division 8: Section - Steel Doors and Frames.

2. Division 8: Section - Wood Doors.
3. Division 8: Section - Aluminum Storefront
4. Division 28: Section - Fire/Life-Safety Systems & Security Access Systems.
1.03 REFERENCES (USE DATE OF STANDARD IN EFFECT AS OF BID DATE.)
A. 2013 California Building Code, CCR, Title 24.
B. BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
C. CCR California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State Accessibility
Standards.
D. DHI Door and Hardware Institute
E. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives

2. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
F. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
1. UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware

County of Tehama DOOR HARDWARE
JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 1
G. WHI - Warnock Hersey Incorporated
H. SDI - Steel Door Institute
1.04 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
sections.
B. Submit product data (catalog cuts) including manufacturers' technical product information for
each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and
finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.
C. Submit six (6) copies of schedule organized vertically into Hardware Sets with index of
doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or
opening. Include following information:
1. Include a Cover Sheet with;

a. Job Name, location, telephone number.
b. Architects name, location and telephone number.
c. Contractors name, location, telephone number and job number.
d. Suppliers name, location, telephone number and job number.
e. Hardware consultant's name, location and telephone number.
2. Job Index information included;
a. Numerical door number index including; door number, hardware heading number and
page number.
b. Complete keying information (referred to DHI hand-book "Keying Systems and
Nomenclature"). Provision should be made in the schedule to provide keying
information when available; if it is not available at the time the preliminary schedule is
submitted.
c. Manufacturers' names and abbreviations for all materials.
d. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes used in the schedule.
e. Mounting locations for hardware.
f. Clarification statements or questions.
g. Catalog cuts and manufacturers technical data and instructions.
3. Vertical schedule format sample:
Heading Number 1 (Hardware group or set number HW -1)
(a) 1 Single Door #1 - Exterior from Corridor 101 (b) 90 (c) RH
(d) 3' 0"x7' 0" x 1-3/4" x (e) 20 Minute (f) WD x HM
(g) 1 (h) (i) ea (j) Hinges - (k) 5BB1HW 4.5 x 4.5 NRP (l) TMS (m) 626 (n) IVE
2 6AA 1 ea Lockset - ND50PD x RHO x RH x 10-025 x JTMS 626 SCH
(a) - Single or pair with opening number and location. (b) - Degree of opening (c) - Hand
of door(s) (d) - Door and frame dimensions and door thickness. (e) - Label requirements
if any. (f) - Door by frame material. (g) - (Optional) Hardware item line #. (h) - Keyset
Symbol. (i) - Quantity. (j) - Product description. (k) - Product Number. (l) - Fastenings
and other pertinent information. (m) - Hardware finish codes per ANSI A156.18. (n) -
Manufacture abbreviation.

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 2
D. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Substitution requests must be
made prior to bid date. Include product data and indicate benefit to the project. Furnish
samples of any proposed substitution.
E. Wiring Diagrams: Provide product data and wiring and riser diagrams for all electrical
products listed in the Hardware Schedule portion of this section.
F. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final
instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
G. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the
installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate
provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated
requirements.
H. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with close-out documents, including keying schedule

and transcript, wiring/riser diagrams, manufacturers installation and adjustment and
maintenance information.
I. Fire Door Assembly Testing: Submit a written record of each fire door assembly to the
Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for future building
inspections.
A. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, exit devices, etc.) from a
single manufacturer.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing

facilities in the project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for
supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this project
and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to
Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for
consultation.
1. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware.

2. Meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.
To maintain the integrity of patented key systems provide a letter of authorization from
the specified manufacturer indicating that supplier has authorization to purchase the key
system directly from the manufacturer.
3. Stock parts for products supplied and are capable of repairing and replacing hardware
items found defective within warranty periods.
C. Hardware Installer: Company specializing in the installation of commercial door hardware

with five years documented experience.
D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with
NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only
items of door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given
type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers,
approved-bearing hinges and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not.
1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with supplementary
marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit
Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 3
E. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special
knowledge or effort.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate locations (shop or field)
for installation.
B. Hardware items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers original containers,

complete with proper fasteners. Clearly mark packages on outside to indicate contents and
locations in hardware schedule and in work.
C. Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals,
etc.
D. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware
installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties of respective manufacturers regular terms of sale from day of final
acceptance as follows:
1. Locksets: L Series - Three (3) years; ND Series - Ten (10) years.

2. Electronic: One (1) year.
3. Closers: 4000 Series - Thirty (30) years; 1260 - Twenty (20) years; Concealed High
Security - Fifteen (15) years; Exception: electronic closers shall be Two (2) years.
4. Exit devices: Three (3) years.
5. All other hardware: Two (2) years.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
1.09 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to beginning work of this
section.
B. Attendance: Architect, Construction Manager, Contractor, Security Contractor, Hardware

Supplier, Installer, Key District Personnel, and Project Inspector.
C. Agenda: Review hardware schedule, products, installation procedures and coordination

required with related work. Review District's keying standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Item Manufacturer Acceptable Substitutes
Hinges Hager Stanley

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 4
Locks, Latches &
Cylinders Schlage None
Exit Devices Corbin Russwin None
Closers LCN Or Approved Equal
Push, Pulls &

Protection Plates Trimco None
Flush Bolts Trimco None
Dust Proof Strikes Trimco None
Coordinators Trimco None
Stops Trimco None
Thresholds Pemko National Guard
Seals & Bottoms Pemko National Guard
MATERIALS
A. Hinges: Exterior out-swinging door butts shall be non-ferrous material and shall have
stainless steel hinge pins. All doors to have non-rising pins.
1. Hinges shall be sized in accordance with the following:

a. Height:
1) Doors up to 42" wide: 4-1/2" inches.
2) Doors 43" to 48" wide: 5 inches.
b. Width: Sufficient to clear frame and trim when door swings 180 degrees.
c. Number of Hinges: Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7'-5" in height. Add one for each
additional 2 feet in height.
2. Furnish non-removable pins (NRP) at all exterior out-swing doors and interior key lock
doors with reverse bevels.
B. Continuous Hinges: As manufactured by Markar, an Assa Abloy Company. UL rated as

required.
C. Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: Schlage "ND" Series as scheduled with "Rhodes"
design, fastened with through-bolts and threaded chassis hubs.
1. Locksets to comply with ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1; tested to exceed 3,000,000
cycles. Locksets shall meet ANSI A117.1, Accessible Code.
2. Chassis: One piece modular assembly and multi-functional allowing function interchange
without disassembly of lockset.
3. Spindle shall be deep-draw manufactured not stamped. Spindle and spring cage to be
one-piece integrated assembly.
4. Anti-rotation plate to be interlocking to the lock chassis. Lock design utilizing bit-tabs are
not acceptable.
5. Lever Trim: Accessible design, bi-directional, independent assemblies.

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 5
6. Locks shall be of such construction that when locked, the door may be opened from
within by using lever and without the use of a key or special knowledge.
7. Thru-bolts to secure anti-rotation plate without sheer line. Fully threaded thru-bolts are
not acceptable.
8. Spring cage to have double compression springs. Manufacturers utilizing torsion springs
are not acceptable.
9. Latchbolt to be steel with minimum throw deadlatch on keyed and exterior functions;
throw anti-friction latchbolt on pairs of doors.
10. Strikes: ANSI curved lip,1-1/4 x 4-7/8, with 1 deep dust box (K510-066). Lips shall be
of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
D. Exit devices: Corbin Russwin as scheduled.
1. Provide certificate by independent testing laboratory that device has completed over
1,000,000 cycles and can still meet ANSI/BHMA A156.3 - 2001 standards.
2. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions.
3. Device shall bear UL label for fire and or panic as may be required.
4. Removable Mullions: Removable with single turn of building key. Securely reinstalled
without need for key.
5. Furnish glass bead kits for vision lites where required.
6. All Exit Devices to be sex-bolted to the doors.
7. Panic Hardware shall comply with CBC Section 11B.404.2.7 and shall be mounted
between 34" and 44" above the finished floor surface.
E. Closers: LCN as scheduled. Place closers inside building, stairs, room, etc.
1. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction with double heat
treated pinion shaft to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout
the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test
requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing
successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided.
2. All door closers shall be fully hydraulic and have full rack and pinion action with a shaft
diameter of a minimum of 11/16 inch and piston diameter of 1 inch to ensure longevity
and durability under all closer applications.
3. All parallel arm closers shall incorporate one piece solid forged steel arms with bronze
bushings. 1-9/16 steel stud shoulder bolts, shall be incorporated in regular arms, hold-
open arms, arms with hold open and stop built in. All other closers to have forged steel
main arms for strength, durability, and aesthetics for versatility of trim accommodation,
high strength and long life.
4. All parallel arm closers so detailed shall provide advanced backcheck for doors subject to
severe abuse or extreme wind conditions. This advanced backcheck shall be located to
begin cushioning the opening swing of the door at approximately 45 degrees. The
intensity of the backcheck shall be fully adjustable by tamper resistant non-critical screw
valve.
5. Closers shall be installed to permit doors to swing 180 degrees.
6. All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120 degrees F. to
-30 degrees F. without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close
the door.
7. Provide the manufactures drop plates, brackets and spacers as required at narrow head
rails and special frame conditions. NO wood plates or spacers will be allowed.
8. Maximum effort to operate closers shall not exceed 5 lbs., such pull or push effort being
applied at right angles to hinged doors. Compensating devices or automatic door
operators may be utilized to meet the above standards. When fire doors are required,
the maximum effort to operate the closer may be increased but shall not exceed 15 lbs.
when specifically approved by fire marshal. All closers shall be adjusted to operate with

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 6
the minimum amount of opening force and still close and latch the door. These forces do
not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that hold
the door in a closed position. Per 11B-404.2.8.1, door shall take at least 5 seconds to
move from an open position of 90 degrees to a position of 12 degrees from the latch
jamb.
F. Flush Bolts & Dust Proof Strikes: Automatic Flush Bolts shall be of the low operating force
design. Utilize the top bolt only model for interior doors where applicable and as permitted by
testing procedures.
1. Manual flush bolts only permitted on storage or mechanical openings as scheduled.

2. Provide dust proof strikes at openings using bottom bolts.
G. Door Stops:
1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate fasteners.
Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor type. If neither can be used, provide
overhead type.
2. Do not install floor stops more than four (4) inches from the face of the wall or partition
(CBC Section 11B-307).
3. Overhead stops shall be made of stainless steel and non-plastic mechanisms and
finished metal end caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.
H. Protection Plates: Fabricate either kick, armor, or mop plates with four beveled edges.
Provide kick plates 10" high and 2" LDW at single doors and 10 high and 1 LDW at pairs of
doors. Sizes of armor and mop plates shall be listed in the Hardware Schedule. Furnish with
machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless to match other hardware.
I. Thresholds: As Scheduled and per details.
1. Thresholds shall not exceed 1/2" in height, with a beveled surface of 1:2 maximum slope.
2. Set thresholds in a full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying
with requirements in Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection.
3. Use fasteners, red-head flat-head sleeve anchors (SS/FHSL).
4. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 11B-404.2.5.
J. Seals: Provide silicone gasket at all rated and exterior doors.
1. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252.
Coordinate with selected door manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers'
requirements.
2. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door manufacturer. Furnish
fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with UL10C Classified
complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252. Where required, intumescent seals vary in
requirement by door type and door manufacture -- careful coordination required.
3. Smoke & Draft Control Doors, Provide UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA
252 for use on S labeled Positive Pressure door assemblies.
K. Door Shoes & Door Top Caps: Provide door shoes at all exterior wood doors and top caps at
all exterior out-swing doors.
L. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of
doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door assemblies.
2.02 KEYING

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 7
A. A detailed keying schedule is to be prepared by the owner and/or architect in consultation
with a representative of Allegion or an Authorized Key Center or Authorized Security Center.
Each keyed cylinder on every keyed lock is to be listed separately showing the door #, key
group (in BHMA terminology), cylinder type, finish and location on the door.
B. Extend the original Schlage masterkey system established for the project named
________________________ located in ____________________under Schlage Structure #
_________
C. Furnish all cylinders in the Schlage Full Size Interchangeable Core (FSIC). Pack change keys
independently (PKI)
D. Furnish construction keying for doors requiring locking during construction.
1. For FSIC systems provide 23-030-ICX Full Size Construction Cores

2. For FSIC systems provide ten 48-101-ICX Construction Keys
3. For FSIC systems provide two 48-056-ICX Control Keys (const.)
4. For FSIC systems provide two control keys for installing the permanent cores (49-056 for
Classic keyways, 48-052-XP for Classic Primus) (49-003 for Everest Conventional,
48-005XP for Everest Primus)
E. Furnish all keys with visual key control.
1. Stamp key Do Not Duplicate.
F. Furnish all cylinders with visual key control.
1. Stamp unique owner supplied code on cylinder side. (VKC) (6 character maximum).
G. Furnish mechanical keys as follows:
1. Furnish 2 cut change keys for each different change key code.
2. Furnish 1 uncut key blank for each change key code.
3. Furnish 6 cut masterkeys for each different masterkey set.
4. Furnish 3 uncut key blanks for each masterkey set.
5. Furnish 2 cut control keys cut to the top masterkey for permanent I/C cylinders.
6. Furnish 1 cut control key cut to each SKD combination.
H. Furnish Keying Transcript (50-123) to owner. End-user to provide letter of authorization to

hardware dealer to allow Schlage to mail transcript (bitting list) to the end-user or designated
representative.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Generally to be satin chrome US26D (626 on bronze and 652 on steel) unless otherwise
noted.
B. Furnish push plates, pull plates and kick or armor plates in satin stainless steel US32D (630)
unless otherwise noted.
C. Door closers shall be powder-coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.
D. Aluminum items to be finished anodized aluminum except thresholds which can be furnished
as standard mill finish.

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 8
2.04 FASTENERS
A. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat head, countersunk type, provide
machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood.
B. Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread type.
C. Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts and spray
painted to match closer finish.
D. Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry.
E. All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head.
F. Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or other adjacent work.
G. All Exit Devices and Lock Protectors shall be fastened to the door by the means of sex bolts
or through bolts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to receive work and
dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
C. Fire-Rated Door Assembly Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, all fire door
assemblies shall be inspected to confirm proper operation of the closing device and latching
device and that only the manufacturers furnished fasteners are used for installation and that
it meets all criteria of a fire door assembly per NFPA 80 (Standard for Fire Doors and Other
Opening Protectives) 2013 Edition. A written record shall be maintained and transmitted to
the Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The inspection of
the swinging fire doors shall be performed by a certified FDAI (Fire Door Assembly Inspector)
with knowledge and understanding of the operating components of the type of door being
subjected to the inspection. The record shall list each fire door assembly throughout the
project and include each door number, an itemized list of hardware set components at each
door opening, and each door location in the facility.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of DHI.
B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Mounting heights for hardware shall be as recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute.
Operating hardware will to be located between 34" and 44" AFF.
D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 9
F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber sealant.
G. If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in hardware at no

additional cost.
H. Hardware Installer shall coordinate with security contractor to route cable to connect
electrified locks, panic hardware and fire exit hardware to power transfers or electric hinges at
the time these items are installed so as to avoid disassembly and reinstallation of hardware.
I. Hardware Installer shall also be present with the security contractor when the power is turned
on for the testing of the electronic hardware applications. Installer shall make adjustments to
solenoids, latches, vertical rods and closers to insure proper and secure operation.
J. All wiring for electro-mechanical hardware mounted on the door shall be connected through
the power transfer and terminated in the interface junction box specified for in the Electrical
Section.
K. Conductors shall be minimum 18 gage stranded, multicolored. A minimum 12 in. loop of

conductors shall be coiled in the interface junction box. Each conductor shall be permanently
marked with its function.
L. If a power supply is specified in the hardware sets, all conductors shall be terminated in the
power supply. Make all connections required for proper operation between the power supply
and the electro-mechanical hardware. Provide the proper size conductors as specified in the
manufacturers technical documentation.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation
or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and
smoothly as intended for the application made.
B. Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation.
C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy, return to that work area and make final check and adjustment of
all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore
proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate
for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware finishes,

during the final adjustment of hardware.
E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the completion of the
project, the Contractor accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to
the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper functions of doors and
hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the
maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to
faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current
and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.
3.04 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A. Conform to CCR, Title 24, Part 2; and ADAAG; and the drawings for access-compliant
positioning requirements for the disabled.

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 10
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Hardware supplier is responsible for providing the services of an Architectural Hardware

Consultant (AHC) or a proprietary product technician to inspect installation and certify that
hardware and its installation have been furnished and installed in accordance with
manufacturers instructions and as specified herein.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. The items listed in the following schedule shall conform to the requirements of the foregoing
specifications.
B. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each door.
Manufacturers Abbreviations (Mfr.)
C-R = Corbin Russwin Exit Devices

HAG = Hager Hinges
IVE = Ives Silencers
LCN = LCN Door Closers
MAR = Markar Continuous Hinges
PEM = Pemko Thresholds, Gasketing & Weather-stripping
SCH = Schlage Lock Company Locks, Latches & Cylinders
TRI = Trimco Kickplates, Pull & Push Plates, Wall & Floor
Stops
VON = Von Duprin Exit Devices
ZER = Zero International Thresholds, Gasketing & Weather-stripping
SPEXTRA: 254334
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE HG305 629 MAR
1 EA EXIT DEVICE ED4200S X N859 626 C-R
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE KO050 10" X 2"LDW B4E 630 TRI
1 EA FLOOR STOP 1214CK X 1268A-CK 626 TRI
1 SET SEAL PER ALUMINUM DOOR/FRAME MFR
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 315CN AL PEM
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
EACH TO HAVE:
1 EA EXIT DEVICE ED4800 M52 626 C-R

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 11
1 EA EXIT DEVICE ED4800 X N855 M52 626 C-R
2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 626 SCH
2 EA KICK PLATE KO050 10" X 1" LDW B4E 630 TRI
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02A
EACH TO HAVE:
1 EA SURF. AUTO 9542 MS ANCLR LCN
OPERATOR
4 EA ACTUATOR, WALL 8310-853T 630 LCN
MOUNT
1 EA KEY SWITCH 653-04 L2 630 SCE
EACH TO HAVE:
1 EA VANDL CLASSROOM ND94RD RHO 626 SCH
LOCK

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 12
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA HINGE BB1168 4.5 X 4.5 26D HAG
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70RD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA WALL STOP 1270WV 626 TRI
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
EACH TO HAVE:
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN
EACH TO HAVE:
1 EA FLOOR STOP 1211 626 TRI
EACH TO HAVE:
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK ND40S RHO 626 SCH

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 13
EACH TO HAVE:
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80RD RHO 626 SCH
EACH TO HAVE:
1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE ND50RD RHO 626 SCH
LOCK
1 SET SEALS S88D DKB PEM
EACH TO HAVE:
1 EA PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 626 SCH
EACH TO HAVE:

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 14
EACH TO HAVE:
EACH TO HAVE:
1 EA PUSH PLATE 1001-3 630 TRI
1 EA PULL PLATE 1018-3B 630 TRI
EACH TO HAVE:
EACH TO HAVE:

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 15
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA SILENCER PER ALUMINUM DOOR/FRAME MFR
EACH TO HAVE:
3 EA HINGE BB1168 5 X 4.5 26D HAG
EACH TO HAVE:
1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P 630 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1 626 IVE
1 EA VANDL STOREROOM ND96RD RHO 626 SCH
LOCK
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE
2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB 689 IVE
2 EA OH STOP & HOLDER 450H J 630 GLY

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 16
EACH TO HAVE:
1 BALANCE OF HARDWARE EXISTING
EACH TO HAVE:

JKA #15-100 08 71 00 - 17
SECTION 08 71 13
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Automatic swinging door operator systems, interior.
1.1.2. Anchors, brackets, and attachments.
1.1.3. Hardware as specified.
1.2.1. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have produced the specified system or products for a
period of one (1) year prior to beginning work of this section, and shall have the capability
to produce the specified products to the delivery and quantity criteria of the project.
1.2.2. Staff: Use only factory certified and trained personnel who have installed similar
applications of the specified products within one year prior to beginning work of this
section.
1.2.3. Service Availability: Manufacturer shall have a trained and authorized service
representative within 4 hours travel of the installation.
1.3. REFERENCES
1.3.1. ANSI/ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
1.3.2. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
1.3.3. ANSI/ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,
Structural (Physical) Quality.
1.3.4. ANSI/ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube.
1.3.5. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
1.3.6. FS TT-P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type.
1.3.7. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
1.3.8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.; UL 325 Standards for Electric Door, Drapery, Gate,
Louver and Window Operators and Systems.
1.3.9. ANSI/BHMA A156.10.
1.3.10. Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines.
1.3.11. Uniform UBC Standard 10-1 edition.
1.3.12. NFPA 80 - Installation of Fire Doors.

County of Tehama AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
JKA# 15-100 08 71 13 - 1
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.2. Shop Drawings: Show all operator and component dimensions; components within
assembly; framed opening requirements and tolerances; anchorage and fasteners; glass
and infills; door hardware requirements; and affected related work.
1.4.3. Product Data: manufacturers' specification, roughing diagrams, wiring diagrams,

installation instructions, parts lists, maintenance instruction and general published
recommendations for each component of the systems required.
1.4.4. Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams and other data to fabricators and
installation of related work as needed for coordination of automatic swing door operators
with electrical work, doors, frames and hardware. Provide conduit and wiring manifest
for electrical work with special attention to coordination with integrated hardware and fire
alarm system specified elsewhere.
1.4.6. Submit four samples, 3 x 5 inches in size, illustrating prefinished aluminum surface.
1.5.1. Deliver and handle system components under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
1.5.2. Store and protect system components under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
1.5.3. Provide wrapping to protect prefinished aluminum surfaces.
1.6. WARRANTY
1.6.1. Contractor shall provide under provisions of Section 01 77 19 the Owner with a guarantee
against defects or failures for a period of three years after final project completion .
1.6.2. Guarantee shall cover complete system for failure to meet specified requirements,
including improper opening sequence or operation resulting in opening delay, jamming or
binding.
2.1. AUTOMATIC SWINGING DOOR OPERATOR SYSTEM (AT DESIGNATED DOORS)
2.1.1. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific LCN Power Operators manufactured by

Ingersoll Rand, www.lcnclosers.com are indicated to establish required level of quality,
appearance, and performance. The Architect will consider and requests for substitutions,
under the provisions of Section 01 25 00.
2.1.5. Type: Surface applied, transom mounted, electric self contained swing door operator for
fire rated door assemblies.
2.1.6. Model/Series: Senior Swing, 2800/9500 Series.
2.1.7. Operation:

JKA# 15-100 08 71 13 - 2
2.1.7.1. Normal Automatic Operation: Upon actuating door control switch, door
automatically swings open. After door delay time period expires, door
automatically closes.
2.1.7.2. Fire Mode Operation: After receiving signal from fire detection system, latch
actuator is engaged. Provide "Fail-Safe" power loss design for latch actuator,
engaging latch when power to latch retraction device is removed.
2.1.8. Power Characteristics:
2.1.8.1. Power Supply: Provide 115 VAC, 15 amp. service. Extend conduit and four
conductor wires to operator header for control switches.
2.1.8.2. Operator Motor: DC motor, with maximum operator current load of 4 amps.
2.1.9. Controls:
2.1.9.1. Control Circuit: Provide solid state control circuit with automatic power shut-
off if operator is activated while door is locked. Provide adjustable time delay
from 2 to 30 seconds. Provide ON-OFF-Reset switch with adjustable opening
speed, closing speed and back-check.
2.1.9.3. Door Control Switches: Provide Push Plate recessed push button accessible
switches, 6 inch diameter stainless steel plate for each door operator.
2.1.10. Fire and Life Safety Criteria
2.1.10.1. Provide automatic door operators which comply with requirements for fire
doors and emergency exits as certified by the manufacturer for the application
shown.
2.1.10.2. Provide all required interconnection of fire alarm and detection devices
necessary to actuate latch relaease.
2.1.10.3. Closing Speed: Comply with applicable criteria of ADA Architectural

Guideliness, including Section 4.13.10.
2.1.11. Accessories:
2.1.11.1. Panic Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00.
2.1.11.2. Smoke detector system: As specified in Division 26.
2.1.12.1. Operator enclosure: Provide clear anodized finish complying with AAMA
AAC22A31.
Architect.

JKA# 15-100 08 71 13 - 3
3.1.1. Inspection
commence.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install complete automatic operator system in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
3.2.2. Coordinate installation with surfaces provided and available space.
3.2.3. Coordinate the installation of all operating equipment as well as electrical and other work
directly involved in door operation.
3.3. ADJUST AND CLEAN.
3.3.1. Prior to acceptance by Owner, complete the following adjustment cycle.
3.3.1.1. Operate assembly for 300 cycles.
3.3.1.2. Test latch system with fire alarm notification as directed by jurisdictional
authority.
3.3.1.3. Adjust controls and operation to comply with specified criteria.
3.3.2. Manual: In accordance with Section 01 77 19, provide two copies of manual indicating
maintenance requirements, service requirements and parts.
3.3.3. Lubricate operating equipment and clean exposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION

JKA# 15-100 08 71 13 - 4
SECTION 08 81 00
GLASS AND GLAZING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Glass and glazing for windows and doors.
1.1.2. Glass film.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM C-1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
1.2.2. ASTM C- 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass.
1.2.3. Glass Association of North America (GANA) (formerly FGMA) - Glazing Manual.
1.2.4. Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 24, current edition.
1.3.1. Conform to GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods.
1.3.2. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have produced the specified system or products for a
period of one (1) year prior to beginning work of this section, and shall have the capability
to produce the specified products to the delivery and quantity criteria of the project.
1.3.3. Staff:
1.3.3.1. Use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills
required and have installed similar applications of the specified products
within one year prior to beginning work of this section.
work.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Submit in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.4.2. Materials List: Provide complete list of all proposed materials and accessories, including
product data on performance criteria.
1.4.3. Samples: Accompanying materials list, submit three 12 inch square samples of each glass
type. Grind and seal all edges.
1.4.4. Shop Drawings: Provide complete shop drawings indicating glass type, installation
method, and materials used.

County of Tehama GLASS AND GLAZING
JKA #15-100 08 81 00 - 1
1.5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
1.5.1. Deliver products to site under provisions of the General Conditions.
1.5.2. Store and protect products under provisions of the General Conditions.
1.6. WARRANTY
1.6.1. Warranty:
1.6.1.1. Provide, in Architect approved form, the Owner with a guarantee against the
following specific defects or failures for a period of three (3) years after Notice
of Substantial Completion:
1.6.1.1.1. Broken, cracked or otherwise damaged glass not resulting

from vandalism.
1.6.1.1.2. Water intrusion through sealant/glass joint.
1.6.1.1.3. Sealant failure.
1.6.1.1.4. Fogging or delamination at laminated glass.
1.6.2. Insulating Glass Warranty:
1.6.2.1. Provide, in Architect approved form, the Owner with manufacturers warranty
against the following specific defects or failures for a period of ten (10) years
after Notice of Substantial Completion:
1.6.2.1.1. No material obstruction of vision through glass caused by

accumulation of dust, moisture or film on the internal surface
of glass caused by insulating seal failure.
1.6.2.1.2. Water intrusion through sealant/glass joint.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.2. TEMPERED VISION GLASS SINGLE LITE - GL-1
2.2.1. Manufacturer: PPG, www.ppgglass.com, or equal.
2.2.2. Type:
2.2.2.1. Type: Clear, single vision, fully tempered, float glass.
2.2.3.1. Total Thickness: 1/4 inch minimum, and as required by code.

JKA #15-100 08 81 00 - 2
2.2.3.2. Characteristics: Type 3 Clear
2.2.3.2.1. Strength: Fully Tempered (Kind FT) per ASTM C 1048 and
ASTM C 1036. Permanently label all tempered glass.
2.2.3.2.2. Type: Condition A - uncoated, Type 1 - transparent, Class 1

- clear, q3 quality - glazing select, float glass.
2.2.3.2.3. Light Transmission: 89% visible light.
2.2.3.2.4. Shading Coefficient: 0.94.
2.2.3.2.5. Safety Standards: Comply with Chapter 24, Part 2, Title 24,
CCR safety glazing requirements.
2.3. SPANDREL GLASS GL-3:
2.3.1. Glass Manufacturer: PPG, www.ppgglass.com/, or equal.
2.3.2. Type: Type 4: Opaque, heat strengthened, float glass, spandrel application.
2.3.3.1. Total Thickness: 1/4 inch minimum, and as required by code.
2.3.3.2. Characteristics: Type 4 Opaque
2.3.3.2.1. Strength: Heat Strengthened (Kind HS) per ASTM C 1048

and ASTM C 1036. Permanently label heat strengthened
glass.
2.3.3.2.2. Type: Type 1 - transparent, Class 1 - clear, q3 quality -

glazing select, float glass.
2.3.3.2.3. Light Transmission: Opaque.
2.3.3.2.4. Spandrel Opacifier: Provide polyester film with solvent based

adhesive, color as selected from manufacturers dark
brown/gray line.
2.3.3.2.5. Safety Standards: Comply with Chapter 24, Part 2, Title 24,
CCR safety glazing requirements.
2.4. INSULATING GLASS UNIT, FULLY TEMPERED GL-02
2.4.1. Fabricator: Fabricator: Oldcastle Glass, www.OldcastleGlass.com, or equal.
2.4.2. Series/Type: Dual glazed glass units, fully tempered.
2.4.2.1. Exterior Lite: 1/4-inch PPG Caribia with Solarban 70XL on Surface 2.
2.4.2.2. Interior Lite: 1/4 inch PPG clear.
2.4.3. Total Thickness: One inch, and as required by code, with 1/2 inch air space.

JKA #15-100 08 81 00 - 3
2.4.4.1. Strength: Each lite fully Tempered (Kind FT) per ASTM C 1048 and ASTM C
1036. Permanently label all tempered glass.
2.4.4.2. SHGC: 0.23.
2.4.4.3. Visible Light Transmission: 47 percent.
2.4.4.4. Shading Coefficient: 0.26.
2.4.4.5. U-value Summer Daytime: 0.26.
2.4.4.6. U-value Winter Night: 0.28.
2.4.4.7. Safety Standards: Comply with CBC Chapter 24, safety glazing requirements.
2.4.4.8. Seal Classification: Class CBA per ASTM E 773/774, with third party
validation required.
2.4.5. Accessories:
2.4.5.1. Capillary Tubes: Provide capillary tubes at units as recommended by

manufacturer for installed altitude conditions.
2.5. GLASS DESIGN CRITERIA
2.5.1. Provide glass thickness, edge support, "bite," and other engineering criteria per
referenced standards and Chapter 24, Title 24, Part 2, CCR.
2.5.2. Provide glass that has been produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal
thermal movement and wind loading, without failure, including loss or breakage of glass,
failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and
glazing materials and other defects in the work.
2.5.2.1. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from a consequent

temperature range of +10 degrees F to +180 degrees F within glass and glass
framing members.
2.5.3. Provide glass thickness in minimum thickness specified and as required by Chapter 16A,
Title 24, Part 2, CCR and the following criteria:
2.5.3.1. Wind Speed: 85 MPH wind speed, (3 second gust)
2.5.3.2. Exposure: Exposure C.
2.5.4. Provide safety glazing complying with at all locations as required by Chapter 24, Part 2,
Title 24.
2.5.4.1. Provide permanent etched or ceramic fired label on all safety glazing, visible
after installation.
2.6. GLAZING ACCESSORIES
2.6.1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM with a Shore A Durometer value of 85 +_ 5.
2.6.2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene with a Shore A Durometer value of 50.

JKA #15-100 08 81 00 - 4
2.6.3. Foam Glazing Tapes / Beads: Provide manufacturers recommended system, UV
Stabilized, black color.
2.6.4. Glazing putty/sealant: Provide DOW or equal, Series 795 structural silicone sealant for
repair of existing window system glazing. Color as selected by Architect from standard
color line.
2.7. GLAZING FILM
2.7.1. Manufacturer: 3M or equal.
2.7.2. Type: Decorative Film
2.7.3. Series: Dusted Crystal 7725-314
2.7.4. Application: Apply to inside face of glass, see plans for locations
Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection
commence.
3.1.1.2.1. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean and

free of obstructions.
3.1.1.2.2. Verify insulating glass unit sealant is compatible with window

system glazing methods specified in Section 08520.
3.2. GLASS INSTALLATION
3.2.1. General
3.2.1.1. Install all glass at proper ambient temperatures.
3.2.1.2. Do not glaze assemblies when damp or wet due to rain, dew, condensation,
or other moisture sources.

JKA #15-100 08 81 00 - 5
3.2.1.3. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling
block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners.
3.2.1.4. Do not impact glass with metal framing.
3.2.1.5. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass
with a pry bar.
3.2.1.6. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which would
occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening.
3.2.1.7. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other
imperfections of the type that, when installed, weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
3.2.1.8. Install all glass within ambient temperature limits established by glass
manufacturer.
3.2.1.9. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow, and
similar characteristics.
3.2.2. Install all glass products in accordance with referenced codes, standards, and approved
submittals. Install per recommendations of manufacturer, and as specified in related
sections.
3.2.3. Install in accordance with Listing and labeling requirements.
3.2.3.1. Install wire glass with mesh pattern aligned vertically and horizontally.
3.2.4. Rest glass on setting blocks per referenced standard.
3.2.4.1. Install neoprene or EPDM setting blocks. No lead setting blocks permitted.
3.2.4.2. Provide minimum 4 inch long setting block, and as required by glass
manufacturer. Install at quarter points unless otherwise approved.
3.2.4.3. Provide setting block width 1/16 to 1/8 inch less than the width of the glazing
pocket, and a minimum of 1/8 inch wider than glass thickness.
3.2.4.4. Provide edge blocking at all jamb conditions of captured pocket glazing.
3.2.5. Repair of existing glazing system.
3.2.5.1. Where shown on drawings, repair existing glazing assemblies.
3.2.5.2. Remove all existing putty or sealant by approved means, providing

satisfactory surface for sealant installation.
3.2.5.3. Install glass on approved setting blocks with specified sealant. Install in
accordance with sealant manufacturers recommendations.
3.2.6. Glazing Film installation:
3.2.6.1. Apply glazing film to all glass within Room CR08 and at all other locations
shown on drawings.
3.2.6.2. Cut film sharply and without gaps, waves, or tears to fit tight against frame.
JKA #15-100 08 81 00 - 6
3.2.6.3. Apply without wrinkles, bubbles, or gaps at edges.
3.3. PROTECTION AND CLEANING
3.3.1. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed streamers
attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply tape or marking of any kind
to glass surface. Remove non-code required and non-permanent labels.
3.3.2. Remove tape after work is completed.
3.3.3. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact
with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
3.3.4. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior plaster, concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month,
for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence
of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
Remove tape after work is completed.
3.3.5. Do not store materials or any kind against interior or exterior surfaces of glass or glass
frame. Remove tape after work is completed.
3.3.6. Immediately prior to completion of the Work, clean all glass using manufacturers approved
methods.
3.4. REPLACEMENT
3.4.1. Immediately remove all glass delivered to site with manufacturing or fabrication defects.
3.4.2. Remove and replace all glass broken, cracked, abraded or damaged in any other way
during construction period due to construction, vandalism, natural occurrences or other
causes.
3.4.3. Remove and replace all glass broken, cracked, abraded or damaged in any other way
during construction period due to construction, vandalism, natural occurrences or other
causes.
3.4.3.1. Comply with scratch tolerances specified below for all glass.
3.4.4. Immediately remove all glass delivered to site with manufacturing or fabrication defects
defined as follows:
3.4.4.1. Based on inspection from a distance of 6 feet, pinholes exceeding 1/16 inch
in diameter are not acceptable.
3.4.4.2. Based on inspection from a distance of 6 feet, clusters of pinholes less than
1/16 inch in diameter shall not occur in the central 80 percent of the glass.
3.4.4.3. Based on inspection from a distance of 10 feet, scratches exceeding 2 inches

are not acceptable, except scratches up to 3 inches in length will be
acceptable if located a maximum of 3 inches of glass edge.
3.4.4.4. Concentrated scratched or abraded areas are not acceptable at any part of
glass panel.

JKA #15-100 08 81 00 - 7
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 08 81 00 - 8
SECTION 09 20 00
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Metal lath.
1.1.2. Portland cement plaster system, exterior.
1.1.3. Plaster accessories.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortars.
1.2.2. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
1.2.3. ASTM C 206 - Finishing Hydrated Lime.
1.2.4. ASTM C 926 Application of Portland Cement Plaster
1.2.5. ASTM C 1063 Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior
Portland Cement Based Plaster
1.2.6. ASTM E119 - Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials.
1.2.7. California Building Code, Part 2, Title 24, CCR.
1.2.8. Tech Bulletins and References as Published by Technical Services Information Bureau
(TSIB), www.tsib.org.
1.2.9. Portland Cement Plaster Stucco Resource Manual by Northwest Walls and Ceilings
Bureau www.nwcb.org
1.3.1. Applicator: Company specializing in cement plaster work with 10 years documented
experience in non-residential projects of similar scope.
1.3.2. Supervision: Plaster assembly shall be installed under the full time supervision of a
foreman with 10 years documented experience in non-residential projects of similar
scope .
1.3.3. Integrated Installation: Plaster assembly shall be installed under a single contract,
responsible for all underlayment, lathing and plastering operations.
1.3.4. Manufacturer: Where provided, company specializing in manufacturing premixed and

engineered plaster products for a minimum of 10 years.

County of Tehama PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
JKA #15-100 09 20 00 - 1
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.2. Provide product data on plaster, lathing, and furring materials, characteristics and
limitations of products specified.
1.4.3. Provide complete mix design for each application.
1.4.4. Prior to beginning plaster operations, construct on-site a movable 4 foot x 8 foot high
mock-up to enable the Architect to review and adjust the plaster texture, color and
pattern. Include fog coat in mock-up.
1.4.4.1. Based on initial review of mock-up, modify texture, color and pattern as
directed by Architect. All subsequent plaster mix designs and installation
shall reflect approved mock-up.
1.5.1. Apply plaster materials when substrate or ambient air temperature is within
manufacturers temperature ranges.
1.5.2. Maintain manufacturers minimum recommended ambient temperature during and after
installation of plaster. Provide barriers, heaters and all other temporary facilities as
required.
1.5.3. Take all precautions required to protect plaster from drying winds and other
environmental impacts.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
00.
2.2. FIELD MIX PLASTER MATERIALS
2.2.1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II Portland Cement, low alkali.
2.2.1.1. Use of plastic cement is not permitted.
2.2.2. Lime: ANSI/ASTM C206, Type S.
2.2.3. Aggregate: Clean sharp plastering sand, complying with ASTM C144 and ASTM C897.
2.2.4. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect
plaster.
2.2.5. Glass Fiber Reinforcing: Fibermesh Harbourite, AR type, complying with ASTM C
1116, with glass fiber, length, proportion and density per manufacturer's
recommendations.

JKA #15-100 09 20 00 - 2
2.2.6. Admixture: Larsen Acrylic Ad-Mix 101 or equal, bonding agent admixture at
masonry/concrete plaster mix applications.
2.2.7. Plaster Bonding Agent: Larsen Weld-Crete or equal, surface application bonding
agent.
2.3. PREMIXED PLASTER ALTERNATIVE
2.3.1. Premixed Basecoat Plaster: As a field mix alternate, provide LaHabra Basic926
sanded, BMI 690, or equal, with integral fiber reinforcing, complying with ASTM C 926
and IBC Chapter 25.
2.3.2. Premixed Finishing Coat: La Habra or equal, Exterior Stucco Color Coat, 20/30 mesh
silica sand, premixed integral color finish coat.
2.3.2.1. Provide number pf integral color to match number of different paint colors
for exterior plaster as provided in Section 09 91 00.
2.4. LATH
2.4.1. Self Furred Metal Lath: Cemco or equal, Cem-Lath, 3.4 lb/sq. yd, G40 galvanized
finish, self-furring.
2.4.1.1. Combination lath and underlayment may be used with Architects prior
approval.
2.4.2. Lath at plaster soffit: Cemco, Cem-Lath D, 3.4 lb/sq yd, expanded metal lath, non-
furring style at spaced framing, G40 galvanized finish, with Grade D paper backing.
2.4.3. Lath at plaster soffit: Cem-Lath D 3.4 lb/sq yd, expanded metal lath, non-furring style,
G40 galvanized finish, with Grade D paper backing.
2.2.3 Use of rib lath is not permitted.
2.5. UNDERLAYMENT
2.5.1. Underlayment: Fortiber or equal, Super Jumbo Tex, exceeding FS-UU-B-790, type I,
Grade D as specified:
2.5.1.1. Water vapor transmission: minimum 11 perms per ASTM E 96, method A
2.5.1.2. Water Resistance: Minimum 60 minutes per ASTM D 779.
2.5.1.3. Tensile Strength: Minimum 70 lb/inch MD/60 lb/inch CD.
2.6. ACCESSORIES
2.6.1. Corner Reinforcing Lath: 2.7 lb/sq yd expanded metal lath, G40 galvanized, or
approved equivalent at all openings.
2.6.2. Expansion and edge accessories:
2.6.2.1. Manufacturer: Provide manufacturer as indicated or approved equal.

JKA #15-100 09 20 00 - 3
2.6.2.1.1. Aluminum Accessories: Provide products manufactured
by Fry Reglet Corporation, www.fryreglet.com, or equal.
2.6.2.1.2. Steel brake Metal Accessories: Unless noted otherwise,

provide products manufactured by Stockton Products,
http://www.stocktonproducts.com, or equal.
2.6.2.2. Outside Lath/Corner Bead: Cemco 1-A series.
2.6.2.3. Control Joint/Reveal - Type 1: Cemco # XJ-15.
2.6.2.4. Casing Bead/Edge Termination - Type #:
2.6.2.4.1. Stockton, SFC with expanded lath, 26 gage, galvanized,

at lath application, ground dimension as required for
plaster thickness.
2.6.2.4.2. Stockton SFC, 26 gage, galvanized, at masonry/concrete

surfaces, ground dimension as required for plaster
thickness.
2.6.2.5. Weep Screeds:
2.6.2.5.1. Stockton #7 sill screed, 26 gage, with weep holes,

galvanized, with 5-1/2 inch leg, ground as required for
plaster thickness.
2.6.2.5.2. Stockton J-B sill screed, 26 gage, with weep holes,

galvanized, with 5-1/2 inch leg, ground as required for
plaster thickness.
2.6.3. Wire Ties: Soft annealed steel, galvanized; 18 gage.
2.6.4. Anchorage: Nails, staples, or other metal supports conforming to requirements of

referenced standards, galvanized, of type and size to suit application and conforming
to requirements of CBC Chapter 25 for conditions as required to rigidly secure lath,
underlayment and associated accessories in place.
2.7. CEMENT PLASTER MIXES
2.7.1. Field Mix: Mix and proportion cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C 926, Table
3, for type C portland cement plaster. Do not add plasticizers of any kind. Incorporate
specified fiber reinforcing in mix design.
2.7.2. Mix only as much plaster as can be used in one hour.
2.7.3. Protect mixtures from frost, contamination, and evaporation.
2.7.4. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.
2.8. METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
2.8.1. Type: Runner and furring channel grid system.

JKA #15-100 09 20 00 - 4
2.8.2. Components
2.8.2.1. Main Runner: Provide hot rolled channels, size as shown on drawings,
minimum 1-1/2 inch deep, minimum 1.12 pounds per linear foot minimum,
hot dip galvanized.
2.8.2.2. Cross-Furring: Provide hot rolled channels, size as shown on drawings,

minimum 1 inch deep, minimum 0.410 pounds per linear foot, hot dip
galvanized.
2.8.2.3. Vertical Hanger Wire: Prestretched steel wire, Number 8, galvanized.
2.8.2.4. Saddle Tie Wire: Prestretched steel wire, Number 16, galvanized.
2.9. ELASTOMERIC FLASHING
2.9.1. Manufacturer: Fortifiber, www.fortifiber.com, or equal.
2.9.2. Type: SBS Modified Asphalt membrane, with polyethylene film facer.
2.9.3. Series: Fortiflash .
2.9.4.1. Thickness: 0.040 inches (40 mils) nominal.
2.9.4.2. Width: as required to achieve specified laps and as recommended by

manufacturer.
2.9.4.3. Facing Color: White
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.2.1. Grounds and Blocking: Verify items within walls for other
Sections of work have been installed.

JKA #15-100 09 20 00 - 5
3.1.1.2.2. Mechanical and Electrical: Verify services within walls
have been tested and approved.
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Protect surfaces near the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.2.1.1. Install line wire backing at framing without sheathing.
3.2.1.2. Comply with special inspection criteria specified in this Section.
3.2.2. Underlayment at framed wall applications:
3.2.2.1. Unless specified otherwise, install Grade D underlayment.
3.2.2.1.1. Coordinate underlayment placement with Section 09 30

13.
3.2.2.2. Install first course of underlayment shingle fashion, perpendicular to studs,

attaching to studs with approved fasteners. Lap edges and ends 6 inches.
Do not tear. Seal vertical edges with tape.
3.2.2.3. Install second course of underlayment per 3.2.2.2, shingle fashion, with
joints offset 6 inches from first course.
3.2.2.4. Install two layers of waterproof underlayment over top of framed walls. Do
not fasten through top of wall. Shingle lap over wall underlayment.
3.2.2.5. Weather lap underlayment and elastomeric flashing with sheet metal
flashing conditions.
3.2.2.6. Install self adhesive elastomeric flashing as sill, head and jamb flashing at
openings and at sloped plaster surfaces in compliance with manufacturers
recommendations, weather lapping each course. Lap elastomeric flashing
at opening; lap over head and jamb flashing and under sill flashing.
3.2.2.6.1. Do not anchor through horizontal or sloped surface.

Extend up vertical surfaces of opening and beneath sills
a minimum of 6 inches.
3.2.2.7. Coordinate underlayment placement with installation of elastomeric

flashing conditions.
3.2.2.8. Install approved sealant over tears, holes and all fasteners not located at
framing members.
3.2.3. Provide water-resistant underlayment as specified at plaster accessory installation.
3.2.4. Concrete/Masonry wall applications:

JKA #15-100 09 20 00 - 6
3.2.4.1. Provide surface treatment of masonry and concrete surfaces as required
to achieve proper bond and adhesion.
3.2.4.2. Remove all surface coatings, dirt, glossy or smooth finishes limiting plaster
adhesion.
3.2.4.3. Where necessary, sandblast concrete surfaces to remove surface paste

film.
3.2.5. Metal suspension system:
3.2.5.1. Install in accordance with CBC Chapter 7A and as required by DSA.
3.3. LATH INSTALLATION AT VERTICAL AND SLOPED FRAMING
3.3.1. Apply specified metal lath over underlayment.
3.3.1.1. Install with metal lath in contact with metal lath. Ensure paper selvage
edges are properly lapped. Do not permit lath to be sandwiched or
covered by underlayment.
3.3.2. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. Install lath a
minimum of 1/4 inch from backing with approved fasteners, anchored through
sheathing into framing or blocking only. Do not fasten lath to sheathing.
3.3.3. Lap metal lath edges minimum 1-1/2 inches, lapped as recommended by manufacturer
and secure with tie wire at 6 inches on center.
3.3.4. Attach metal lath to supports in conformance with CBC Chapter 25 and ASTM C 1063.
3.3.4.1. Install approved sealant over tears, holes and all fasteners not located at
framing members.
3.3.4.2. Install lath using approved drilled in mechanical fasteners where lath is
shown extending over masonry or concrete, including wall curbs.
3.3.5. Continuously reinforce internal angles with specified corner expansion screeds.
Fasten at perimeter edges only.
3.3.6. Install specified outside corner reinforcing. Fasten only at flange or outer edges.
3.3.7. Place 4 x 12 inch strip of corner reinforcing lath diagonally at corners of openings.
Secure rigidly in place.
3.3.8. Place 4 inch wide strips of corner reinforcing lath centered over junctions of dissimilar
backing materials. Secure rigidly in place.
3.4. LATH INSTALLATION AT HORIZONTAL SOFFITS
3.4.1. Apply paper backed metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports in
accordance with CBC Chapter 25, including Section 2507.3.
3.4.1.1. Ensure paper selvage edges are properly lapped. Do not permit lath to be
sandwiched or covered by underlayment.

JKA #15-100 09 20 00 - 7
3.4.2. Lap ends and sides of metal lath minimum 1-1/2 inches. Secure laps with tie wire
where they occur between supports.
3.4.3. In addition to fastening methods required by CBC Chapter 25, provide 9 gage ring
shank hook staple over 10d nail, at 27 inches on-center along joist support, and located
not more than 3 inches from edge of lath.
3.4.4. Place 4 x 12 inch strip of corner reinforcement lath diagonally at corners of openings
and recessed light fixture frames. Secure rigidly in place.
3.5. PLASTER ACCESSORIES AND CONTROL JOINTS
3.5.1. Place specified plaster accessories at terminations of plaster finish per ASTM C 1063.
3.5.1.1. Neatly miter or cope, corners and intersections of accessories to fit

exposed edges.
3.5.1.2. Caulk drip screeds and other exterior accessories at joints and
intersections
3.5.1.3. Secure in place by wire tying to lath. Do not anchor to plywood sheathing
or supports without Architects prior approval.
3.5.1.4. Where available from manufacturer, provide manufacturer's

recommended connector clip and sealant bedding at all accessory
intersections and joints.
3.5.1.5. Where available from manufacturer, provide manufacturer's end cap at

locations where accessories terminate against door frames, wall surfaces
and similar conditions.
3.5.2. Install specified weep screed at bottom edge of plaster. Fasten to backing or sill with
fully seated screws at 16 inches on center. .
3.5.3. Install accessories to proper lines and levels. Provide 1/8 inch spacing at joints. Align
intersections.
3.5.4. Establish control and expansion joints with specified joint devices. Do NOT allow lath
to continue behind or through expansion joint.
3.5.5. Coordinate joint placement with naturally occurring joints of other related work. Do not
extend lath across expansion or control joints in substrate.
3.5.6. Lath and Underlayment Installation at Accessories
3.5.6.1. Provide additional layer of water-resistant underlayment behind all

accessories, 12 inches wide, centered on accessory. Apply over lower
layer of wall underlayment.
3.5.6.2. In horizontal applications at wall conditions, install lath and underlayment

over upper flange of accessory. Install lath over lower flange of accessory.
Extend wall underlayment a minimum of 6 inches above upper flange.

JKA #15-100 09 20 00 - 8
3.5.6.3. In vertical applications at wall conditions and soffit conditions, install lath
over flange of accessory. Maintain wall underlayment behind accessory.
3.5.7. Provide joints as shown on drawings. Where joints not shown, provide as directed by
Architect in compliance with the following criteria:
3.5.7.1. Extend screeds and accessories into niches and recesses, around interior
and exterior wall corners, and around all sides of columns and similar
building elements. Continue control joint patterns and molding alignments
on walls of arcades, passages and all similar locations to match or extend
those shown on exterior elevations, whether or not individual conditions
are specifically shown, noted or elevated.
3.5.7.2. Provide wall control joint at edge of door and window frames, extended
from drip screed to continuous horizontal control joint.
3.5.7.3. Provide vertical wall control joints as necessary to limit plaster area to
approximately 140 square feet, with maximum joint spacing dimension of
18 feet, and with maximum 2-1/2 to 1 aspect ratio. Coordinate area limit
with horizontal joint location. Final location as directed by Architect.
3.5.7.4. Provide horizontal wall control joint in coordination with vertical joint
spacing as necessary to limit plaster area as defined for vertical joints.
Final location as directed by Architect.
3.5.7.5. In plastered ceilings and soffits, provide control joints as necessary to limit
plaster area to approximately 75 square feet. Final location as directed by
Architect.
3.5.8. Coordinate joint placement with coursing and layout for thin brick tile specified in
Section 09 31 34. Place joints at brick module. Joints placed in such a location as to
require cutting of thin brick tile at non-module locations will result in plaster substrate
rejection. .
3.6. PLASTERING
3.6.1. Apply plaster in accordance with referenced TSIB Tech Bulletins, CBC Chapter 25 and
ASTM C 926.
3.6.2. Framed wall application:
3.6.2.1. Apply three-coat plaster assembly, resulting in minimum 7/8 inch nominal
thickness.
3.6.2.2. Apply scratch coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch.
3.6.2.3. Apply brown coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch. Texture as required
to comply with specified texture.
3.6.2.4. Rod surface of brown coat with a 10 foot straight edge to produce a true
plane. Texture as required to comply with specified texture.
3.6.2.5. Apply finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch.

JKA #15-100 09 20 00 - 9
3.6.3. At soffits and ceilings, provide a combined thickness of 7/8 inch thickness at scratch
and brown coats prior to application of finish coat.
3.6.4. Curing:
3.6.4.1. Moist cure scratch coat a minimum of 5 days prior to application of brown
coat.
3.6.4.2. Dampen surface of scratch coat prior to application of brown coat.
3.6.4.3. Moist cure brown coat a minimum of 5 days, and cure for a total of 10 days
prior to application of finish coat.
3.6.4.4. Moist cure finish coat for minimum period of 72 hours.
3.6.5. Finish Coat:
3.6.5.1. After brown coat curing time has elapsed, apply finish coat. Dampen base
coat prior to applying finish coat.
3.6.5.2. Exterior Surfaces:
3.6.5.2.1. Apply finish coat in fine sand float as illustrated in "Plaster

Textures" published by TSIB and matching approved
sample.
3.7. TOLERANCES
3.7.1. Exposed finish plaster: Maximum variation from true plane limited to 1/4 inch plus or
minus, in 10 feet, non-cumulative.
3.8. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
3.8.1. Protect all aluminum frames, accessories, glass and thresholds from plaster
application with complete waterproof protective sheeting or tape.
3.8.1.1. Verify tape compatibility with all prefinished coatings.
3.8.1.2. Do not allow tape or protection sheeting to contact glass.
3.8.1.3. Remove all covering and tape within two weeks of plaster completion in
any one area.
3.8.2. During plaster operations, provide plywood or other approved protection at all roofing,
walkways, and concrete paving.
3.8.2.1. Lap and tape edges as necessary to prevent water infiltration to

unprotected plywood sheathing below.
3.8.3. Remove all traces of spilled or splashed plaster from surfaces and landscaping. Do
not discharge plaster wash-off into planter areas.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 09 20 00 - 10
SECTION 09 21 16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Gypsum board.
1.1.2. Joint treatment and surface finishes.
1.1.3. Metal support and furring systems.
1.1.4. Cementitious backer board for ceramic tile.
1.1.5. Metal suspension system for drywall ceiling assemblies.
1.2. WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
1.2.1. Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames.
1.3. REFERENCES
1.3.1. ASTM C 36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
1.3.2. ASTM C 442 - Specification for Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard.
1.3.3. ASTM C 630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
1.3.4. ASTM C 645 Nonstructural Steel Framing Members
1.3.5. ASTM C 1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or
Metal Plaster Bases.
1.3.6. ASTM C 1177 Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.
1.3.7. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the
Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
1.3.8. ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
1.3.9. Gypsum Association, "Levels of Gypsum Board Finish"
1.3.10. ASTM C 28 - Gypsum Plasters.
1.3.11. ASTM C 36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
1.3.12. ASTM C 37 - Gypsum Lath.
1.3.13. ASTM C 588 and C 587 - Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster and Gypsum Veneer
Plaster.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama GYPSUMBOARDASSEMBLIES
JKA#15100 0921161
1.4.1. Conform to IBC Chapter 7 / CBC Chapter 7A, Part 2, Title 24, CCR for fire rated
assemblies.
1.4.2. Conform to IBC Chapter 25 / CBC Chapter 25A, Part 2, Title 24, CCR for finish
materials installation.
1.5. SUBMITTALS
1.5.1. Provide submittals under provisions of Division 01.
1.5.2. Submit product data indicating materials, joint toppings and finish materials, and
accessories.
1.5.3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.5.4. Submit a hanger and seismic bracing plan for all drywall suspension ceiling
assemblies.
1.6.1. Manufacturer: Provide company who has produced the specified products for a period
of 5 years prior to beginning work of this Section and maintains the capability to provide
the specified products in compliance with the delivery and quantity criteria for the
Project.
1.6.2. Installer: For installation of work, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the skills required, have installed similar applications of the specified
products within one year prior to beginning work of this Section, and who are
completely familiar with the manufacturers' recommended methods of installation as
well as the requirements of this work.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
00.
2.2. GYPSUM BOARD
2.2.1. Manufacturer: United States Gypsum (USG), www.usg.com, Georgia-Pacific (G-P)

www.gpgypsum.com or equal.
2.2.2. Board Type:
2.2.2.1. Non-Rated: USG Regular per ASTM C36.
2.2.2.1.1. Edge: SW Tapered.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0921162
2.2.2.1.2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2.2.2.2. Fire Rated: USG FireCode Core (Type X) per ASTM C36.
2.2.2.2.1. Edge: SW Tapered.
2.2.2.3. Water Resistant: USG Mold Tough FireCode Core, Type X, per ASTM
C1396.
2.2.2.3.1. Edge: Tapered.
2.2.2.4. Exterior Sheathing: Georgia-Pacific DensGlass Exterior Sheathing

Fireguard Type X per ASTM C1177 and ASTM D3273
2.2.2.4.1. Edge: Square.
2.2.2.4.3. Moisture and mold resistant treated core and coated

fiberglass mat on face, back and long edges with 12-
month warranty against in-place weather exposure
damage.
2.2.2.4.4. When tested for mold growth per ASTM D3273, product
shall score the highest possible rating: 10.
2.2.2.5. Acoustical Gypsum Board at Acoustical Rated Wall and Ceiling

Assemblies: per ASTM C36.
2.2.2.5.1. Manufacturer: Suppress Products, or equal.
2.2.2.5.2. Series: Sound-Engineered Drywall, 1/2 inch SED1248.
2.2.2.5.3. Edge: Square.
2.2.2.5.4. Thickness 1/2 inch.
2.2.2.5.5. Performance characteristics: For acoustical assembles

of STC 50 for single stud walls; STC 55 staggered stud
walls; STC 61 double stud walls; in accordance with
ASTM E90.
2.3. ACCESSORIES
2.3.1. Acoustical Sealant: USG, Non-hardening, non-skinning, conforming to ASTM C557

and C919, for use in conjunction with non-rated gypsum board assemblies.
2.3.2. Drywall Joint and Edge Accessories:
2.3.2.1. Corner Bead: USG or approved alternate, paper faced metal.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0921163
2.3.2.2. Edge Trim: USG or approved alternate, paper faced metal.
2.3.2.3. Expansion Joint: USG 093 or approved alternate, metal.
2.3.2.4. Drywall Reveal: Fry, DRM Series, reveal dimension as shown on

drawings.
2.3.3. Joint and Finishing Systems:
2.3.3.1. Provide systems produced by same manufacturer as boards.
2.3.3.2. Joint Systems: USG Ready Mixed Compounds, complying with ASTM
C475, vinyl based, certified asbestos free.
2.3.3.3. Finishing System Materials: USG Multi-Purpose or approved alternate,

complying with ASTM C475, non-aggregate, vinyl based, certified
asbestos free.
2.3.3.4. Primer: Manufacturer's approved primer, compatible with finishes

specified in other Sections.
2.3.4. Fasteners:
2.3.4.1. Gypsum board screws: type and length as required by installation and UL
Listing criteria.
2.3.4.2. Gypsum board nails: type and length as required by installation and UL
Listing criteria. Nails not permitted at interior gypsum board applications.
2.3.4.3. Cementitious Backer Unit screws: corrosion resistant, type and length as
required by manufacturer, installation and UL Listing criteria. Nails not
permitted.
2.3.5. Adhesive: Manufacturer's approved adhesive for attachment to concrete surfaces.
2.3.6. Underlayment Membrane: Membrane complying with ANSI A 108.2-3.8.
2.3.7. Metal Furring Components:
2.3.7.1. Resilient Channels: USG, Series RC-1, 1/2 inch depth.
2.3.7.2. Wall Furring Channels: Provide USG Metal Furring Channel, 20 gage,
corrosion resistant steel.
2.3.8. Fire Rated Ceiling Components:
2.3.8.1. Sawn Timber Members: Resilient furring channel as required for

compliance with UL Design L513 Method
2.3.8.2. Truss Members: Furring clip, strap and channel as required for
compliance with UL Design L530 Method
2.3.8.3. Fire Rated Assembly Insulation: Provide 1 inch thick insulation as required
by UL Design L530.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0921164
2.3.9. Fire-Resistive Head of Wall Joint Components: Provide fire-resistive joint sealants, fire
safing insulation, and similar materials as part of head-of-wall joint system specified in
Section 09 51 00 and required by UL Design system designations shown on drawings.
2.4. METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR DRYWALL CEILING ASSEMBLIES
2.4.1. Manufacturer: Armstrong.
2.4.2. Type: Drywall Grid.
2.4.3. Components:
2.4.3.1. Main Beam: Provide hot rolled channels , complying with CBC, Chapter
25, Part 2, Title 24, CCR, including Section 1614A, galvanized.
2.4.3.2. Cross Tees: Provide galvanized hat channels, , complying with CBC,
Chapter 25, Part 2, Title 24, CCR, including Section 1614A.
2.4.3.3. Vertical Hanger Wire: Prestretched steel wire, Number 8, galvanized.
2.4.3.4. Two-piece Perimeter Trim: Axiom Classic 12 and Drywall Bottom Trim
3.1.1. Inspection
properly commence.
3.1.1.2.1. Verify framing members are properly installed and will

comply with specified tolerances.
3.1.1.2.2. Verify that openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and

vents are solidly set, and blocking and backing is in place.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0921165
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Insulation Coordination:
3.2.1.1. Verify insulation is fitted tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind
and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and
to items passing through partitions.
3.2.1.2. Install insulation specified in this Section as a component in rated

floor/ceiling and roof/ceiling systems.
3.2.2. Metal Suspension System:
3.2.2.1. Install metal suspension system for drywall ceiling surfaces in accordance
with USG AC 3152 and CBC Chapter 25.
3.3. GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and designated
system number for fire rated assemblies.
3.3.1.1. Unless noted otherwise, utilize water resistant type for wall surfaces within
four feet of the outermost edge of any plumbing fixture or moisture
generating equipment. Extend water resistant gypsum board full height.
3.3.1.2. Do not use water resistant gypsum board on ceiling applications.
3.3.2. Where gypsum board extends across concrete curbs, install with specified adhesive,
consisting of vertical beads placed at 4 inches on center full height. Bond to curb with
rollers exerting sufficient pressure to assure full contact and surface alignment with
board at framing above.
3.3.3. Use screws of proper length when fastening gypsum board to framing, spaced at 8
inches on center maximum at each support.
3.3.4. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring
over firm bearing.
3.3.5. Double Layer Applications: Place second layer parallel to first layer. Offset joints of
second layer from joints of first layer a minimum of one stud spacing, and as required
by referenced test standard.
3.3.6. Edge and Trim Installation:
3.3.6.1. Install corner beads at all external corners. Use longest practical length.
3.3.6.2. Install corner beads at all conditions where gypsum board abuts dissimilar
materials.
3.3.6.3. Install angle reinforcement at interior corners.
3.3.6.4. Tape and finish joint reinforcement as specified.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0921166
3.3.7. Install acoustical sealant at wall edge perimeter, including floor edge, and at all
penetrations where fire stopping is not required.
3.3.8. Cementitious Backer Unit Installation:
3.3.8.1. Install backer board in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,

including USG Systems Folder SA-934.
3.3.8.2. Apply specified underlayment membrane to framing with approved

adhesive or tape. Lap membrane 4 inches in shingle fashion at all joints.
3.3.8.3. Install backer board with joints over supports. Space ends and edges 1/8
inch apart.
3.3.8.4. Install backer board using screws at maximum 8 inches on center at each
support.
3.3.8.5. Prefill all joints with approved latex fortified mortar meeting ANSI 118.4.
Tape all joints and level.
3.3.9. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing Installation:
3.3.9.1. Install gypsum sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. Install boards with correct side to exterior.
3.3.9.2. Install board with joints over supports. Space ends and edges 1/8 inch
apart.
3.3.9.3. Install board using approved fasteners at maximum 8 inches on center at

each support.
3.3.9.4. Apply approved sealant at sheathing edges and penetrations. Coordinate

all joint treatments with specified air and or water barrier.
3.3.9.5. Entire face of gypsum sheathing shall be covered with weather barrier.
3.3.10. Gypsum Plaster Installation:
3.3.10.1. Provide framing or blocking/backing as required to support lath in

compliance with CBC.
3.3.10.2. Install metal lath in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3.10.3. Apply gypsum scratch and brown coats with finish plaster in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3.10.4. Provide texture as selected by Architect.
3.4. GYPSUM BOARD FINISH AND JOINT TREATMENT
3.4.1. Comply with descriptions and Finish Levels as specified and in accordance with
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0921167
3.4.2. LEVEL 2 Finish: Gypsum board located above ceiling areas, plenums, and similar
surfaces not visible in completed construction:
3.4.2.1. Embed tape at all joints and interior angles in joint compound.
3.4.2.2. Apply one separate coat of joint compound over all joints, angles, fastener
heads, and accessories.
3.4.2.3. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are
acceptable.
3.4.3. LEVEL 3 Finish: Gypsum board designated to receive rigid FRP or solid paneling.
3.4.3.2. Apply two separate coats of joint compound over all joints, angles, fastener
heads, and accessories.
3.4.3.3. All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
3.4.3.4. Apply uniform coat of approved primer over entire surface with roller.
3.4.4. LEVEL 5 Finish - Orange Peel: Gypsum board surfaces receiving a painted finish.
3.4.4.2. Apply three separate coats of joint compound over all joints, angles,
fastener heads, and accessories. Apply uniform coat of approved primer
over entire surface with roller.
3.4.4.3. Apply texture coating over entire surface. Finish in "Orange Peel" texture
as illustrated in USG Construction Handbook. Surface shall be smooth and
free of tool marks and ridges.
3.4.4.4. Apply uniform coat of approved primer over entire surface with roller.
3.5. TOLERANCES
3.5.1. Comply with the following tolerances for level, plumb and flat. Where substrate framing
will not comply with specified tolerances, correct deficiencies as required.
3.5.1.1. Level and Plumb: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative.
3.5.1.2. Flatness: No gaps exceeding 1/8 inch at any point under a 10 foot straight
edge placed on surface in any orientation.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0921168
SECTION 09 30 13
CERAMIC TILE
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Ceramic tile.
1.1.2. Grout, mortar bed and setting materials.
1.1.3. Waterproof underlayment and membranes.
1.1.4. Crack isolation/Sound isolation/Cleavage membranes.
1.1.5. Sealers.
1.1.6. Thresholds and Transitions
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. TCA (Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.1. Samples
1.3.1.1. Submit four samples of specified colors and patterns of each tile, grout,
and accessory units of the specified items.
1.3.1.2. Submit as an assembly in 24 inch square sample.
1.3.2. Materials List/Details: Accompanying samples, submit complete list of all proposed
materials, including details of all joints between tile and adjoining materials.
1.3.3. Mock-up: Prior to beginning tile on typical toilet wall and floor surface, prepare in-place
mock-up of portion of installation and obtain Architect's approval.
1.3.4. Certification
1.3.4.1. Prior to installation of tile in any one area, submit written certification to
Architect certifying that surfaces are properly prepared for specified
installation, and that all depressions and abutting edges are properly
spaced and aligned to permit installation in pattern shown on drawings.
See 3.1 below.
1.3.4.2. Submit certification that selected sealant specified in Section 07 90 00 will

achieve manufacturer's published adhesion values on specified tile.

County of Tehama CERAMIC TILE
JKA #15-100 09 30 13 - 1
1.3.5. Slip Resistance Testing: Test six representative tile from each tile specified, selected
at random from project stock per ASTM C1028 to verify compliance with slip resistance
criteria.
1.4.1. Conform to ANSI A137.1.
1.4.2. Conform to Tile Council of North America (TCNA) Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation methods as defined in this Section.
1.5. QUALIFICATIONS
1.5.1.1. Manufacturer shall have produced tile products of similar type for a period
of five (5) years prior to beginning work of this section, and shall have the
capability to produce the specified products to the delivery and quantity
1.5.2. Staff
1.5.2.1. Use only personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills
required, have installed similar applications of the specified products within
one year prior to beginning work of this section, and are completely familiar
with the manufacturers' recommended methods of installation as well as
the requirements of this work.
1.5.2.2. Staff installing specified grout shall have attended manufacturer's training
sessions and have installed specified grout within the past 12 months prior
to beginning work.
1.6.2. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
1.7.1. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment.
1.7.2. Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials.
1.8. EXTRA STOCK
1.8.1. Provide sufficient field tile of each type and color to cover ten square feet. In addition,
provide ten cove base tile of each type and color.
1.8.2. Package in clearly labeled containers, store as necessary until delivered to Owner.

JKA #15-100 09 30 13 - 2
2.1. CERAMIC TILE
will consider comparable products by alternate manufacturers where listed, and
requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01 25 00.
2.1.1.1. All tile for like applications shall be the product of a single manufacturer as
indicated below.
2.1.2. Product Characteristics: Interior Floor Tile T-1
2.1.2.1. Manufacturer: Dal-Tile www.daltileproducts.com.
2.1.2.2. Series: Ambassador.
2.1.2.3. Size: 12 x 24 (Floor) 6 x 12 (Coved Base)
2.1.2.5. Finish: Unglazed Matte.
2.1.2.5.1. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Minimum 0.60 per ASTM

C1028.
2.1.2.6. Grout Joint: Nominal 1/8 inch, all joints equal, except at expansion joint
conditions. Provide minimum 3/16 inch wide joint at all expansion joint
conditions.
2.1.2.7. Provide coved base tile at floor to wall transition
2.1.3. Product Characteristics: Interior Wall Tile - T-2
2.1.3.1. Manufacturer: Dal-Tile
2.1.3.2. Series: Fabrique.
2.1.3.3. Size: 12 x 24 (Wall) 3 x 12 (Bullnose).
2.1.3.5. Finish: Unpolished
conditions.
2.1.3.7. Provide surface bullnose trim at all open edges or ends. Unglazed or cut
tile edges unacceptable.
2.1.4. Product Characteristics: Interior Wall Tile T-3

JKA #15-100 09 30 13 - 3
2.1.4.1. Manufacturer: Dal-Tile
2.1.4.2. Series: Natural Hues
2.1.4.3. Size: 6 x 12
2.1.4.5. Finish: Matte
conditions.
2.1.5.1. Manufacturer: Dal - Tile
2.1.5.3. Size: 6 x 6
conditions
2.1.6.1. Manufacturer: Dal - Tile
2.1.6.3. Size: 3 x 6
conditions

JKA #15-100 09 30 13 - 4
2.2. PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR
2.2.1. Mortar Bed: Portland Cement and sand mixture, complying with specified method and
ANSI A108.1B.
2.3. PORTLAND CEMENT BOND COAT
2.3.1. Mapei Ultra/Flex II www.mapei.com or equal, polymer-modified one-step mortar per

ANSI A108.5 and A118.4. Provide white cement at all limestone/marble applications.
2.4. GROUT
2.4.1. All grouts shall be produced by same manufacturer.
2.4.2. Sanded Grouts: Mapei Keracolor Floor or equal, with Mapei Plastijoints acrylic grout
additive, complying with ANSI A118.6. Two separate colors as selected by Architect
from Classic or Designer Series color line.
2.4.3. UnSanded Grouts: Mapei Keracolor Wall or equal, with Mapei Plastijoints acrylic grout
additive per ANSI A118.6. Two separate colors as selected by Architect from Classic
or Designer Series color line.
2.4.4. Epoxy Grouts:
2.4.4.1. Manufacturer: Mapei or equal.
2.4.4.2. Series: Kerapoxy, 100 percent solids, two-component, non-sag grout,

complying with ANSI A118.3, formulated for required joint widths.
2.4.4.3. Service Temperature Resistance: 350 degrees F.
2.4.4.4. Color: Three separate colors as selected by Architect from stock 10 color
line.
2.4.4.5. Grout Sealer: Miracle Sealants 511 Impregnator.
2.5. SEALERS AND FINISHES
2.5.1. Grout Sealer: Miracle Sealants 511 Impregnator, phone (800)-350-1901.
2.6. ACCESSORIES
2.6.1. Sealants:
2.6.1.1. Interior sealants: Unless noted otherwise, provide sealants as

manufactured by grout manufacturer.
2.6.1.1.1. Where exposed to pedestrian traffic, provide sealants

rated for pedestrian traffic, with minimum Shore A value
of 35, as manufactured by grout manufacturer.
2.6.1.1.2. Match adjacent grout color.
2.6.1.2. Exterior Ceramic Tile Paving Sealants: As specified in Section 07 90 00.

JKA #15-100 09 30 13 - 5
2.6.1.3. Exterior Ceramic Wall Tile Sealants: As specified in Section 07 90 00.
2.6.2. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 x 2 inch square x 16 gauge welded wire mesh.
2.6.3. Organic Adhesive: Type 1 organic adhesive, complying with ANSI A136.1 and
approved by CTI for application.
2.6.4. Cleavage Membrane: Provide asphalt felt, ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15), or
polyethylene sheet, ASTM D4397, 4.0 mils thick.
2.7. WATERPROOFING AND CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANES
2.7.1. Thin-set Waterproofing Applications (Interior): NobleSeal TS, Dal-Seal TS, or equal
preformed sheet CPE membrane, 30 mil thickness, with facing. Provide preformed
corners and all manufacturers recommended accessories.
2.7.2. Thin-set Joint Isolation Membrane: NobleSeal CIS, Dal-Seal CIS, or equal preformed
sheet CPE membrane, 30 mil thickness, with facing. Provide all manufacturers
recommended accessories.
2.7.3. Mortar Bed Waterproofing Applications: NobleSeal Chloraloy 240, preformed sheet
CPE membrane, 40 mil thickness. Provide preformed corners and all manufacturers
recommended accessories.
2.8. THRESHOLDS/TRANSITIONS
2.8.1. Provide marble thresholds, Grade B, color and profile as selected by Architect.
2.9. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
2.9.1. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for mortar and grout mixes in accordance
with manufacturers requirements.
2.9.1.1. Do not mix more bond coat than can be used within one hour.
2.9.1.2. If bond coat mixture begins to skin, discard and make new batch.
2.10. ACCESSORY TILE
2.10.1. General
2.10.1.1. All accessory tile shall be in matching size, color, and finish.
2.10.1.2. Stretcher tile can be the standard size of the manufacturer.
2.10.1.4. Provide surface bullnose trim at all tile abutting jamb conditions and
extending beyond frame.
2.10.1.5. Provide full curved stretcher tile for all outside corners.

JKA #15-100 09 30 13 - 6
3.1.1. Inspection:
3.1.1.2.1. Verify joints in concrete substrate occur only at sealant

expansion joint locations as specified for ceramic tile.
3.1.1.2.2. Where non-documented substrate cracks occur, obtain

direction from Architect.
3.2. MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Verify slab preparation complies with criteria specified in Section 03 30 00 / 03 30 10.
3.2.1.1. Remove all sealers, curing compounds and other materials affecting
proper bond of membranes with bead blast abrasive equipment.
3.2.2. Cleavage Membrane: Unless otherwise shown on drawings, where mortar bed is
installed over concrete slab on grade at interior applications, provide specified
cleavage membrane.
3.2.3. Waterproofing Membrane Installation:
3.2.3.1. Apply waterproofing membrane per manufacturers recommendations.
3.2.3.1.1. Apply thinset waterproofing membrane using approved

latex modified mortar system.
3.2.3.2. Provide preformed corners. Seal all penetrations with specified sealant.
3.2.3.3. Detail all joints as required by manufacturer and approved submittal.

JKA #15-100 09 30 13 - 7
3.2.3.4. Extend membrane up wall surface as shown on drawings. Coordinate with
wall underlayment.
3.2.3.5. At expansion joints, continue sheet material in looped fashion through joint
to accommodate anticipated joint movement.
3.2.3.6. Allow sufficient time for all seams, transitions and setting beds to cure
before installing subsequent materials. Do not install tile over
waterproofing until waterproofing has been tested to determine that it is
watertight.
3.2.4. Joint isolation membrane installation:
3.2.4.1. Install at all cracks in concrete slab substrates, control and expansion
joints, and at all transitions between dissimilar materials.
3.2.4.2. Extend each side of crack or joint a minimum of 4 times diagonal tile
dimension.
3.2.4.3. Apply using approved latex modified mortar system.
3.2.4.4. At expansion joints, continue sheet material in looped fashion through joint
to accommodate anticipated joint movement.
3.3. MORTAR BED INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Unless noted otherwise, prepare floor substrate as required for complete bond.
Remove all sealers, curing compounds and other materials affecting proper bond of
membranes with bead blast abrasive equipment.
3.3.2. Coordinate lath and mortar bed installation with concrete slab substrate joints. Align
expansion joints in mortar bed and tile with substrate joints.
3.3.3. Install mortar bed in accordance with specified method and referenced ANSI standard.
3.3.4. Where waterproof membrane is provided, do not penetrate membrane. Provide

accessory supports.
3.4. TILE INSTALLATION
3.4.1. Install tile and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TCNA
Handbook methods as specified.
3.4.2. Spread bond coat over area of installation using a notched trowel. Do NOT spread
more bond coat than can be covered with tile within manufacturer's recommended time
periods.
3.4.3. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Utilize
bullnose trim shapes where tile terminates at dissimilar material in the same wall plane.
3.4.3.1. Use saw to cut tile fitting against curved surfaces or edges. Do not use
nippers.
3.4.3.2. Use drill for all pipe or conduit penetrations. Do not split tile.

JKA #15-100 09 30 13 - 8
3.4.4. Place tile joints in uniform width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size.
Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
3.4.5. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
3.4.5.1. Back-butter all exterior tile installations.
3.4.6. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting, or as recommended by
mortar manufacturer.
3.4.7. Grout tile joints. Do not allow grout to harden on face of tile.
3.4.7.1. Install grout at abrasive grit tile using grout bag or grouting machines.
Conventional sponge spread technique not acceptable.
3.4.8. Install sealant under the provisions of Section 07 90 00 and as specified.
3.4.9. Interior Tile Installation:
3.4.9.1. Install wall tile at cementitious backer board per TCNA Method W244C,
and per ANSI A108.5.
3.4.9.1.1. Provide portland cement leveling coat as required to

provide surface complying with 1/8 inch in 8 feet
tolerance.
3.4.9.2. Install wall tile at water resistant gypsum board per TCNA Method W223,
3.4.9.3. Where wall tile installed at prefabricated shower/tub receptor, install per
TCNA B411-09 and ANSI A108.1A.
3.4.9.4. Install wall tile at concrete/masonry wall per TCNA Method W211/222, and
per ANSI A108.1B.
3.4.9.5. Grout all wall joints with specified sanded grout per ANSI A108.10.
3.4.10. Interior Floor Tile Installation:
3.4.10.1. Where tile is installed as a shower receptor, coordinate wall and floor tile
installation per TCNA Method B415-09 and ANSI A108.1B.
3.4.10.2. Install floor tile at waterproofed mortar bed areas per TCNA Method F121
and ANSI A108.1B.
3.4.10.3. Install floor tile at cleavage membrane mortar bed areas per TCNA Method
F111 and ANSI A108.1B.
3.4.10.4. Install floor tile at thinset waterproof membrane per TCNA Method F122,
3.4.10.5. Grout all floor joints with specified epoxy/ grout per ANSI A118.3.

JKA #15-100 09 30 13 - 9
3.4.11. Installation of expansion and control joint assemblies.
3.4.11.1. Provide expansion joints complying with TCNA Detail EJ171 at the
following specified locations and as located and shown on drawings:
3.4.11.1.1. At wall tile to paver/floor tile joints.
3.4.11.1.2. At all expansion and control joints in substrate. Where tile

joint does not occur directly over substrate joint, provide
sealant joint on each side of joint.
3.4.11.1.3. At tile joint at inside vertical corners.
3.4.11.1.4. At interior applications, at approximately 24 feet on center

each way in floor and wall tile surfaces. Adjust to 12 feet
at toilet tile conditions, and 8 feet for dark tile in sunlight
areas.
3.4.11.1.5. At exterior applications, at approximately 12 feet on

center each way in floor and wall tile surfaces. Adjust to
8 feet as necessary for dark tile in sunlight areas.
3.4.11.1.6. Where material transitions occur, comply with

expansion/control joint criteria.
3.4.11.1.7. At conditions where tile extends through doorways,

extend wall cove/floor tile sealant joint across doorway.
3.4.11.1.8. At floor drain/tile edge, column penetrations, tile

terminations against frames and other restraining
elements.
3.4.11.1.9. At tile terminations against curbs, paving or other

restraining elements.
3.5. CLEANING
3.5.1. Clean work under provisions of Section 01 77 19.
3.5.2. Clean tile surfaces in accordance with the tile and grout manufacturer's instructions;
remove all traces of grout scum.
3.5.3. Do not use muriatic acid compounds.
3.5.4. Do not allow traffic on tile for a minimum of 72 hours after installation.
3.5.5. Provide damp cure of all installations per manufacturer's recommendations and per
ANSI A108.
3.5.5.1. Do not damp cure latex modified grout systems unless recommended by
manufacturer.
3.5.6. Sealing

JKA #15-100 09 30 13 - 10
3.5.6.1. Seal all interior toilet floor, base, and wall ceramic tile applications.
3.5.6.1.1. Do not seal epoxy grout applications.
3.5.6.2. Seal per manufacturer's recommendations.
3.6. PROTECTION
3.6.1. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01 50 00.
3.6.2. Provide non-staining protective coverings for all tile in traffic area.
3.6.3. Remove and replace any products that are cracked, scraped, or otherwise damaged
after installation and before acceptance by Owner.
3.7.1. Tolerances
3.7.1.1. Grout joint alignment with adjacent edge: 1/8" in 10 feet.
3.7.1.2. Row and column alignment: 1/8" in 10 feet deviation.
3.7.1.3. Alignment with adjacent tile: 1/16" +/-.
3.7.1.4. Level, plane and/or vertical: 1/8" in 10 feet deviation.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 09 30 13 - 11
SECTION 09 51 00
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
1.1.2. Acoustical panels.
1.1.3. Acoustical tiles.
1.1.4. Perforated Metal Acoustical Panel.
1.1.5. Perimeter trim.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
1.2.2. ASTM E 580 Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical tile and Lay-in
Panels in areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions
1.2.3. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
1.2.4. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.
1.2.5. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.
1.2.6. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
1.3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.3.1. Installed System: Conform to ASTM C635 and C636.
1.3.2. Ceiling Suspension System complying with requirements of Chapter 16A, Part 2, Title
24, CCR, including 1615A.1.1.6, modifications to ASCE 7, Section 13.5.6.
1.4.1. Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience.
1.5. SUBMITTALS

County of Tehama ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
JKA #15-100 09 51 00 - 1
1.5.2. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling
unit and suspension system required.
1.5.3. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long
samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and
4 foot cross tees.
1.5.4. Shop Drawings: Indicate on shop drawings, grid layout and related dimensioning,
junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical
items related to system, and complete suspension system details. Layout and details
of acoustical ceilings. Show items coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings.
1.5.5. Certifications: Provide manufacturer's certification of compliance with specified

requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and
standards. For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry an
approved independent laboratory classification of NRC, CAC, and AC.
1.6.1. Do not install interior ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof; wet work in
place is completed and nominally dry; work above ceilings is complete; and ambient
conditions of temperature and humidity are continuously maintained at values near
those intended for final occupancy.
1.6.2. Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dust and debris
1.7. SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
1.7.1. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided,
dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested,
and approved.
1.7.2. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.
1.8. WARRANTY
1.8.1. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing
to repair or replace acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures
include, but are not limited to:
1.8.1.1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping as a result of defects in materials

or factory workmanship.
1.8.1.2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects
1.8.1.3. Acoustical Panels with BioBlock Plus or designated as inherently resistive

to the growth of micro-organisms installed with Armstrong suspension
systems exhibiting growth of mold/mildew and gram positive and gram
negative odor and stain causing bacteria.
1.8.2. Warranty Period:
1.8.2.1. Acoustical panels: Ten (10) year from date of substantial completion.

JKA #15-100 09 51 00 - 2
1.8.2.2. Grid: Ten years from date of substantial completion.
1.9. EXTRA STOCK
1.9.1. Provide extra quantity of acoustic units under provisions of Section 01 77 19.
1.9.2. Acoustical Panel: Provide five (5) unopened boxes of each type of acoustical panel.
1.9.3. Acoustically Reflective Panel: Provide five (5) of each type of panel.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.2. CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc., www.armstrong.com. ICC ES EST-

1308
2.2.2. Series: Prelude XL
2.2.2.1. Main Runner: 7301
2.2.2.2. Cross Runners: As required for condition and seismic compliance.
2.2.2.3. Face Dimension: 15/16 inches.
2.2.2.4. Edge moldings: "L" shaped,.
2.2.3. Duty Rating: Heavy Duty per ASTM C635.
2.2.3.1. Support/Fastening System: Components of size and type as shown in the

drawings as required to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system with
maximum deflection of 1/360. Use perimeter attachment clips as required
to allow 3/4 inch movement and retain the panel in place.
2.2.4. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Chapter 16A, Part 2, Title 24,
CCR, including 1615A.1.16, modifications to ASCE 7, Section 13.5.6.
2.2.5. Fire Resistance Rating: Non-rated assembly.
2.2.6. Color: Painted finish, as selected from standard line.
2.2.7. Compression Strut: Provide vertical compression strut at grid as shown on drawings
and per DSA IR 25-2.10
2.3. ACOUSTIC PANELS: ACP-1
2.3.1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, www.armstrong.com. USG www.usg.com,

or equal.

JKA #15-100 09 51 00 - 3
2.3.2. Series: Calla
2.3.2.1. Style: Cirrus, 2823.
2.3.2.2. Edge: Tegular, square edge.
2.3.2.3. Size: 24 x 48 x 15/16 inch.
2.3.3.1. Fire Resistance Rating: Class A per ASTM E1264, maximum Flame
Spread of 25, maximum smoke contributed of 450, UL Labeled
2.3.3.2. Noise Reduction: NRC range of 0.85.
2.3.3.3. Light Reflectance: 0.86.
2.3.3.4. Humidity Resistance: Provide manufacturer's HumiGuard Plus.
2.3.3.5. Antimicrobial Resistance: Provide manufacturer's BioBlock Plus factory

applied solution.
2.3.4. Finish: Factory applied paint.
2.3.5. Color: White.
3.1.1. Inspection
properly commence.
3.1.1.2.1. Verify hanger layout will not interfere with other work.

JKA #15-100 09 51 00 - 4
3.2. CEILING GRID INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install system in accordance with ASTM C635 and C636 as modified by CBC Section
1615A.1.16, including required vertical compression struts.
3.2.2. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum.
3.2.3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers
with other work.
3.2.4. Crimp or tightly twist wire ends around wire support. Do not leave ends angled away
from line of wire support.
3.2.5. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers
with other work.
3.2.6. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, install
independent framing below ductwork or equipment from which hangers may be
attached. Hangers are prohibited from being attached to any non structural building
element.
3.2.7. Locate system on room axis leaving equal border units according to reflected ceiling
plan.
3.2.8. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest
practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other
interruptions. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closers to match
edge molding.
3.3. ACOUSTIC UNIT INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.
3.3.2. Install panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and in compliance
with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3.3. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on
flanges of main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting
surfaces. Support edges by wall moldings.
3.3.4. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border
areas and vertical surfaces. Field paint field cut edges exposed to view.
3.4.1. Replace damaged and broken panels.
3.4.2. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch
up of minor finish damage.
3.4.2.1. Where approved by Architect, touch up paint may be used to hide minor
scratches and nicks in the surface.

JKA #15-100 09 51 00 - 5
3.4.3. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
3.5. TOLERANCES
3.5.1. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 09 51 00 - 6
SECTION 09 60 10
CONCRETE SLAB MOISTURE CONTROL COATING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Concrete floor preparation.
1.1.2. Water vapor and alkalinity control system at all concrete floors receiving finish flooring
products.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM D 4541-02 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Testers.
1.2.2. ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1.2.3. ASTM F 710-05 Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.
1.2.4. ASTM F 1869-04 Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission
Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.
1.3. QUALIFICATIONS
1.3.1. System Manufacturer
1.3.1.1. Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

Section with minimum 5 years experience in materials of like design and
application.
1.3.1.2. Representative Projects: System manufacturer shall have installed water

vapor reduction systems in a minimum of ten (10) projects of similar scope
and complexity over the past five years.
1.3.1.3. Representative Projects: Manufacturer shall provide a list of at least ten

(10) projects, certifying successful management of water vapor emission
levels of 10 pounds or more for a minimum period of five years.
1.3.2. Installer:
1.3.2.1. Installer: Company specializing in applying manufacturers systems with

manufacturers water vapor reduction systems in a minimum of ten (10)
projects of similar scope and complexity over the past five years.
1.3.2.2. Installer: Company approved by system materials manufacturer for

specified guarantee.

County of Tehama CONCRETE SLAB MOSTURE CONTROL COATING
JKA #15-100 09 60 10 - 1
1.3.2.3. Installing Foreman: Individual specializing in applying manufacturers
water vapor reduction systems in a minimum of ten (10) projects of similar
scope and complexity over the past five years.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.2. Submit shop drawings indicating procedure for treating joints and cracks in concrete.
1.4.3. Submit product data for system and accessories, including test data indicating
compliance with specified criteria.
1.4.4. Submit moisture level test data complying with specified procedures and schedule.
1.4.5. Submit manufacturers and installers qualifications in compliance with this Section.
1.4.6. Submit vapor control system manufacturers representative's written approval of

selected finish flooring materials, adhesives and installation methods.
1.4.7. Following installation, submit vapor control system manufacturers representative's

written report regarding substrate review and initial installation methods, stating
manufacturers approval of substrate and methods.
1.4.8. Submit finish flooring manufacturers representative's written approval of compatibility

with finish flooring materials, adhesives and installation methods, including
requirements for cementitious topcoats.
1.4.9. Submit manufacturers certificate of liability insurance by product liability insurance

carrier, with minimum A rating from Best or equivalent rating system, in the amount
of $5,000,000 per occurrence, and naming the Owner, Architect and General
Contractor as co-insured.
1.5. WARRANTY
1.5.1. Provide manufacturers standard, non-prorated written warranty against both material
defects and improper installation and complying with the following criteria.
1.5.2. Warranty coverage and exclusions:
1.5.2.1. Coverage shall protect against delamination of flooring from substrate as

a result of moisture vapor penetration or chemical reaction.
1.5.2.2. Coverage may exclude failure due to flooding of floor, seismic damage
occurring after installation, water intrusion due to plumbing leaks, changed
conditions resulting in moisture emission levels exceeding those at time of
system installation.
1.5.2.3. Coverage shall not exclude coverage for
1.5.2.3.1. Concrete shrinkage cracks after application.
1.5.2.3.2. Non-compatibility with specified admixtures.

JKA #15-100 09 60 10 - 2
1.5.2.3.3. Concrete silicates or resin treatments.
1.5.2.3.4. ACI 201 limitations.
1.5.3. Term: Minimum ten years.
1.5.4. Warranty Remedy at no cost to Owner:
1.5.4.1. Replacement of finish flooring material, including removal, materials, labor

and all related accessories.
1.5.4.2. Repair or replacement of moisture vapor control system, including

cementitious topcoating (where required), preparation and installation.
1.6.1. Deliver products to site under provisions of the General Conditions.
1.6.2. Store and protect products under provisions of the General Conditions.
1.6.3. Store materials in a dry, secure area.
1.6.4. Maintain storage temperatures per manufacturers criteria.
1.7.1. Maintain minimum 50 degrees F temperature during installation and with 24 hours of
installation.
1.7.2. Restrict traffic from area where system is installed for a period of 1 day after installation.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
00.
2.2. MOISTURE VAPOR CONTROL SYSTEM TYPE 1
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Koester, www.koesterusa.com or equal.
2.2.2. Type: One Coat Epoxy resin coating.
2.2.3. Series: Koester VAP 1 pH
2.2.4. System Performance:
2.2.4.1. Moisture Vapor Emission Limit: System capable of reducing emission

levels of a maximum of 10 pounds to a maximum of 3.0 pounds per 1,000
square feet tested in accordance with ASTM F1869.

JKA #15-100 09 60 10 - 3
2.2.4.2. Alkalinity Level: System suitable for installation on slabs exhibiting pH
values up to and including 14.0 tested in accordance with ASTM D1308.
2.2.5. Fire/Life Safety/Habitability Criteria
2.2.5.1. Flammability: Provide non-flammable products.
2.2.5.2. Hazard Rating: Materials used shall be rated non-hazardous under OSHA
regulations.
2.2.5.3. Air Quality Compliance: All products used shall comply with local and
federal VOC criteria.
2.2.6. Accessory Products
2.2.6.1. Primers/Joint Detailing: Provide materials as recommended by

manufacturer for application.
2.2.6.2. Cementitious Topcoat: Provide Ardex K-15 by Ardex Engineered

Cements, Inc, 100 percent Portland cement based topcoat system or
equal as recommended by moisture control system manufacturer and per
approved submittal. Use of gypsum or asphalt based systems are not
permitted.
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.2.1. Verify measured moisture content is within floor sealer

and finish flooring material manufacturers acceptable
range.

JKA #15-100 09 60 10 - 4
3.2. TESTING PROCEDURES
3.2.1. Moisture and alkalinity testing
3.2.1.1. Coordinate with moisture testing specified in other Sections.
3.2.1.2. Where values resulting from second set of tests exceed three pounds per
1000 square feet over a 24 hour period, provide vapor control system
specified in this Section.
3.2.1.3. Where values resulting from second set of tests do not exceed three
pounds per 1000 square feet over a 24 hour period, and at Owners sole
discretion, a deductive change order contract adjustment will be made for
slab areas not treated.
3.3. SLAB PREPARATION
3.3.1. Prepare Concrete Slab Surface.
3.3.1.1. Shotblast or scarify substrates to degree of roughness as required by

system manufacturer.
3.3.1.2. Acid etching and grinding is not acceptable.
3.3.1.3. Protect adjacent surfaces prior to beginning slab preparations.
3.3.2. Crack and joint preparation
3.3.2.1. Following slab shotblasting, rout out all divots, gouges, cracks, expansion
joints and control joints in profile as recommended by floor sealer system
manufacturer.
3.3.2.2. Vacuum clean all prepared joints.
3.3.2.3. Fill all joints and seal all floor penetrations such as plumbing piping with
manufacturers urethane sealant.
3.4. FLOOR SEALER SYSTEM INSTALLATION
3.4.1. Clean all floors and apply system in accordance with system manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
3.4.2. Apply system at coverage rate as recommended by manufacturer. Allow to cure, using
ventilation systems as required to accelerate system curing.
3.4.3. Apply cementitious topcoat as required to provide a smooth surface suitable for finish
flooring installation. Allow to cure a minimum of 24 hours before installation of finish
flooring.
3.5. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING PROCEDURES
3.5.1. Floor Finish Adhesives

JKA #15-100 09 60 10 - 5
3.5.1.1. Coordinate with flooring manufacturer and approve all adhesives
proposed for use as compatible with vapor control system.
3.5.2. Moisture testing
3.5.2.1. Following completion of floor sealer system installation, conduct

anhydrous calcium chloride testing per ASTM F 1869 using prepackaged
kit systems approved by flooring manufacturer.
3.5.2.2. Provide minimum 3 tests per 1,000 square feet or less, 6 tests for areas
1,000 to 2,000 square feet, with one additional test for each 1,000 square
feet in excess of 2,000 square feet.
3.5.3. Alkalinity Testing
3.5.3.1. Conduct alkalinity testing of slab surface immediately following removal of

calcium chloride test kit, in accordance with ASTM F 710 procedure.
3.5.4. Submit testing data, including test location mapping, to Architect prior to beginning
flooring installation.
3.5.5. Replacement/Repair: Where test results show values in excess of specified limits,
repair or replace system to comply with specified criteria at no additional cost to Owner.
3.6. PROTECTION
3.6.1. Protect finished installation under provisions of the General Conditions.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 09 60 10 - 6
SECTION 09 62 00
CONCRETE SLAB SEAL COATING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Concrete seal coating at utility, storage and service areas.
1.2.1. Coating Systems Manufacturer: Company specializing in VOC approved coating

systems with five years minimum experience.
1.2.2. Applicator: Company specializing in application of the type of specified coating, with
three years minimum documented experience.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.2. Product data:
1.3.2.1. Include details of product description, tests performed, limitations to

coating, cautionary procedures required during application, and chemical
properties, including percentage of solids.
1.3.2.2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.3.3. Certification
1.3.3.1. Prior to installation of coating in any one area, submit written certification
to Architect certifying that surfaces are properly prepared for specified
installation.
1.4.1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.2. CONCRETE SEAL COATING - CS-1
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Atlas (www.atlastechproducts.com) or equal.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama CONCRETESLABSEALCOATING
JKA#15100 0962001
2.2.2. Type: Abrasion resistant Sealer.
2.2.3. Series: Elite-HS
2.2.4.1. Coats: Two.
2.2.4.2. Strength Improvement: Minimum 12 percent increase in compressive

strength per ASTM C-140.
2.2.4.3. Absorption: Maximum 3.5 percent water absorption per ASTM C-642.
2.2.4.4. Color: Clear
2.2.4.5. Air Quality Regulations: Comply with applicable air quality and VOC
regulations.
2.2.4.6. Gloss: Matte/Low Sheen.
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.2.1. Verify surfaces are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence,

oil, or other matter detrimental to application of coating.
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Remove dust, curing compound, dirt and other contaminants from slab surface.
3.2.2. At smooth troweled slab surfaces, shotblast or abrade to provide slip resistant surface.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0962002
3.2.3. Remove oil or foreign substance using methods that will not affect coating. Apply
neutralizing solution if required by manufacturer.
3.2.4. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry.
3.2.5. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating.
3.2.6. Remove loose particles and foreign matter.
3.2.7. If applied on unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately, by approved method.
3.3. APPLICATION
3.3.1. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.2. Coordinate application with other work.
3.4. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
3.4.1. Protect from foot traffic as required to allow finish time to cure.
3.4.2. Clean surface of residue and curing films where occur in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0962003
SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Resilient tile flooring.
1.1.2. Resilient base.
1.1.3. Resilient sheet flooring.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM D 2047 Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as

Measured by the James Machine
1.2.2. ASTM D 4541-02 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Testers.
1.2.3. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.2.4. ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1.2.5. ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat
Energy Source
1.2.6. ASTM E 662 Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials
1.2.7. ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base
1.2.8. ASTM F 710-05 Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.
1.2.9. ASTM F 1869-04 Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission
Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.
1.3. QUALIFICATIONS
1.3.1. Applicator: Company specializing in flooring systems with 5 years documented

experience, trained and approved by the flooring system manufacturer.
1.3.2. Factory Representative: Resilient Flooring System manufacturer shall provide a factory
representative for substrate review and field installation quality assurance.
Representative shall approve substrate for work to begin, and observe initial
installation methods for a minimum of 8 hours.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama RESILIENTFLOORING
JKA#15100 0965001
1.4.2. Product data
1.4.2.1. Submit product data for flooring materials and accessories.
1.4.2.2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.4.3. Shop drawings.
1.4.3.1. Submit shop drawings indicating layout and dimensions for all seams and
penetrations, including details of flooring termination and transitions.
1.4.3.2. Provide typical detail of inside/outside corner installation of resilient base.
1.4.4. Samples:
1.4.4.1. Submit four samples, 8x11 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for
each floor material specified.
1.4.4.2. Submit four 11 inch long samples of base material for each color specified.
1.4.4.3. Submit three samples, 6 inches long by height as required, showing

resilient flooring flash cove and termination method.
1.4.5. Submit factory representative's report regarding substrate review and initial installation
methods, stating manufacturers approval of substrate and methods.
1.4.6. Submit moisture test results on concrete substrate, including location mapping
coordinated with floor plan and room designations.
1.5. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.5.1. Submit cleaning and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 77 19.
1.6.1. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve
temperature stability.
1.6.2. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to,
during, and 24 hours after installation of materials.
1.7. EXTRA STOCK
1.7.1. Flooring: Provide one box of each color and style of selected flooring in unopened box,
from same run as installation.
1.7.2. Base: Provide 100 linear feet of base, in each color and style selected, with 10 each
matching outside and inside corners, from same run as installation.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0965002
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.2. RESILIENT TILE F-1, F-2, F-3
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Forbo., http://www.forbo.com/flooring.
2.2.2. Series: Marmoleum MCT.
2.2.3. Size/Gage: 13 inch square, 0.10 inch gage.
2.2.4. Fire Resistivity/Habitability Criteria:
2.2.4.1. Critical Radiant Flux: Class 1 per ASTM E648.
2.2.4.2. NBS Smoke Rating: maximum 450 per ASTM E662.
2.2.4.3. Slip Resistance: Greater than 0.50 per ASTM D2047.
2.2.5. Color: See Finish Schedule
2.2.6. Pattern: See Finish Schedule
2.3. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING F-4, F-5
2.3.1. Manufacturer: Forbo., http://www.forbo.com/flooring.
2.3.2. Series: Marmoleum Real.
2.3.3. Size/Gage: Maximum width suitable for installation, 0.10 inch overall thickness
2.3.4.1. Critical Radiant Flux: Class 1 per ASTM E648.
2.3.4.2. NBS Smoke Rating: maximum 450 per ASTM E662.
2.3.4.3. Slip Resistance: Greater than 0.50 per ASTM D2047.
2.3.6. Pattern: See Finish Schedule
2.4. RESILIENT BASE MATERIALS: TYPE B-2, B-3, B-4
2.4.1. Manufacturer: Johnsonite., www.johnsonite.com.
2.4.2. Type: thermoset, extruded, vulcanized rubber.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0965003
2.4.2.1. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM F 1861, Type TP, Group 1 (Solid).
2.4.3. Series: Traditional
2.4.3.1. Coved Toe.
2.4.3.2. Accessories: Provide premolded inside and outside corners matching

base profile.
2.4.4. Size: 6 inch high x coil stock lengths.
2.4.5.1. Fire Resistivity Rating: Class A per ASTM E84.
2.4.5.2. Smoke Density Rating: maximum 450 per ASTM E84.
2.4.6. Color:
2.4.6.1. B-2: 286, Fortune Cookie.
2.4.6.2. B-3: 08 Icicle.
2.4.6.3. B-4: 18 Navy Blue.
2.5. RESILIENT BASE MATERIALS: TYPE B-1, B-2
2.5.1. Manufacturer: Burke Mercer, http://www.burkemercer.com/.
2.5.2. Type: Thermoplastic Rubber, with no recycled products.
2.5.3. Series: Resilient Rubber Type TP
2.5.4. Size: 6 inch high x 100 stock.
2.5.5.1. Fire Resistivity Rating: Class I per ASTM E684.
2.5.5.2. Smoke Density Rating: maximum 450 per ASTM E662.
2.5.5.3. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM F1861, Type TS, Group 1 (Solid).
2.6. REDUCERS/EDGE STRIPS
2.6.1. Provide Pemko, style to fit job conditions and as approved by the Architect, color as
selected from complete line.
2.6.1.1. Carpet to VCT Reducers/Edge Strips: Pemko 173A Saddle.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0965004
2.7. ACCESSORY MATERIALS
2.7.1. Subfloor Filler: Portland cement based, Ardex, http://www.ardex.com/, or equal, type
recommended by flooring material manufacturer. Use of gypsum based filler is
prohibited.
2.7.2. Adhesives shall be approved by the flooring manufacturer prior to Product DATA
submittal
2.7.3. Adhesive: Provide W.F. Taylor [http://www.wftaylor.com/] or equal, Envirotec,

(800)986-3888, low VOC adhesive, Series as recommended by manufacturer.
Adhesive VOC emissions shall not exceed maximum 0.60 mg/square meter/hour after
24 hours per EPA D.E.C. Testing method. Confirm adhesive compatibility with resilient
flooring manufacturer prior to installation.
3.1.1. Inspection
properly commence.
3.1.1.2.1. Verify that surfaces comply with specified tolerances.
3.1.1.2.2. Verify concrete floors comply with specified moisture

content criteria acceptable to the flooring manufacturer,
and do not exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or
dusting.
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Moisture and alkalinity testing
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0965005
3.2.1.1. Conduct alkalinity and anhydrous calcium chloride testing using
prepackaged kit systems approved by flooring manufacturer. Contractor
shall employ an independent testing service or lab for moisture testing
procedure, including placement and removal. Testing service shall be
acceptable to Architect.
3.2.1.2. Provide test at coverage rate required by flooring manufacturer, with

minimum of 3 tests/first 1,000 square feet and 1 test per each 1,000 square
feet after. Distribute uniformly throughout building. Prepare map or
diagram of test locations in each building.
3.2.1.3. Conduct one set of tests 60 days prior to scheduled flooring installation.
Submit test results to Architect within 48 hours of test receipt.
3.2.1.4. Conduct second set of tests 14 days prior to scheduled flooring

installation. Submit test results to Architect within 48 hours of test receipt.

calcium chloride test kit, in accordance with ASTM F 710 procedure.
3.2.3. Submit testing data, including test location mapping, to Architect prior to beginning
flooring installation.
amplitude.
3.2.4.5. All surfaces with gap exceeding 3/16 inch under 10 foot metal straight
edge.
3.2.5. Prepare existing concrete substrate as recommended by manufacturer, including

mechanical shot-blasting or equivalent.
3.2.6. Acid etching is not acceptable.
3.2.7. Prepare existing cracks in substrate as recommended by manufacturer.
3.2.8. Apply filler and trowel to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface.
3.2.9. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. Vacuum clean substrate.
3.3. INSTALLATION RESILIENT TILE FLOORING MATERIALS
3.3.1. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0965006
3.3.2. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
3.3.3. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to
produce tight joints.
3.3.4. Install reducer strips at exposed edges or where flooring material changes to another
type. Trim reducer width as required to achieve proper thickness at edges of abutting
flooring.
3.3.5. Install tile to square grid pattern with all joints aligned.
3.3.6. Unless otherwise directed by manufacturer, lay in step or fan pattern from center grid.
Do not allow tile "run-off".
3.3.7. Provide minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter.
3.3.8. Align tile with tile joints in adjacent room.
3.4. INSTALLATION RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING MATERIALS
3.4.1. Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
3.4.2. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
3.4.3. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to
produce tight joints.
3.4.4. Install reducer strips at exposed edges or where flooring material changes to another
type. Trim reducer width as required to achieve proper thickness at edges of abutting
flooring.
3.4.5. Lay sheet flooring with seams in accordance with seaming plan.
3.4.6. Install sheet flooring to provide a minimum of 1/3 roll width at perimeters. Double cut
sheet and continuously seal seams with manufacturers recommended sealer.
3.4.7. Where shown on drawings, install sheet flooring with integral flash coved base
extending up wall minimum five inches.
3.4.8. Terminate flash cove base in manufacturers recommended aluminum channel

molding. Provide continuous bead of Type 6 sealant at molding and wall joint per
Section 07 90 00.
3.5. INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL
3.5.1. Install in complete lengths, fit joints tight and vertical. Do not piece. Maintain minimum
measurement of 18 inches between joints.
3.5.2. Use premolded units at all outside and inside corners.
3.5.3. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces.
3.5.4. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0965007
3.5.5. Install using a constant level line at top of base.
3.6. PROTECTION AND CLEANING
3.6.1. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
3.6.2. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
3.6.3. Clean floor and base surfaces and buff floor without use of waxes or sealers in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0965008
SECTION 09 68 10
CARPET TILE
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Carpet tile installed by full spread adhesive method.
1.1.2. Accessories.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM D 2859/CPSC FF 1-70 Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor

Covering Materials..
1.2.2. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.2.3. ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat
Energy Source.
1.2.4. ASTM E 662 Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.
1.2.5. Carpet and Rug Institute CRI-104, Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.2. Submit written certification of compliance with manufacturer's and installer's

qualification requirements specified, including listing of compliant installations.
1.3.3. Submit product data for flooring materials and accessories.
1.3.4. Shop drawings.
1.3.4.1. Submit shop drawings indicating layout and dimensions for all tile layout,
including details of flooring termination and transitions.
1.3.5. Samples:
1.3.5.1. Submit three samples, 8x11 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern
for each floor material specified.
1.3.5.1.1. Texture, color range and appearance of substituted

products shall be as close as possible to that specified,
as determined solely by the Architect.
1.3.5.1.2. Substituted products shall be manufacturers running line

goods. Knock-offs or custom runs will not be accepted.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama CARPETTILE
JKA#15100 0968101
1.3.6. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.3.7. Submit factory representative's report regarding substrate review and initial installation
methods, stating manufacturers approval of substrate and methods.
1.3.8. Submit moisture test results on concrete substrate, including location mapping
coordinated with floor plan and room designations.
1.4.1.1. Company with minimum of ten years documented history of producing

carpet tiles complying with the performance criteria of this Section.
1.4.1.2. Company with minimum of five California installations in use for a

minimum of five years using carpet tiles complying with the performance
criteria of this Section.
1.4.2. Installer: Company with 5 years minimum documented experience installing carpet
tiles and approved by the manufacturer.
1.5. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.5.1. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 77 19.
1.5.2. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and

suggested schedule for cleaning and shampooing.
1.6.1. All carpet tiles must be removed from cartons and allowed to adjust to job site
temperatures for 48 hours prior to installation to achieve temperature stability.
1.6.2. Job site temperature must stay within 60 degrees and 85 degrees for 48-72 hours prior
to, during and 48-72 hours after installation.
1.7. WARRANTY
1.7.1. Provide manufacturers standard, printed non pro-rated warranty against the following
defects for the stated period after acceptance of installation:
1.7.1.1. Protection against mold: 20 years
1.7.1.2. Excessive Surface Wear: For a period of 20 years.
1.7.1.3. Substrate Compatibility: 15 years.
1.7.1.4. Excessive Static Electricity, defined as exceeding 3.0 Kilovolts at 20% RH

and 70 degrees F per AATCC 134: 15 years.
1.7.1.5. Manufacturers published warranty for stain release.
1.7.1.6. Manufacturers published warranty for colorfastness.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0968102
1.7.2. Use of chair pads shall not be a pre-condition for warranty coverage
1.7.3. Carpeting exhibiting defects as defined shall be replaced or repaired by the

manufacturer. Secondary warranties involving those other than the manufacturer are
not acceptable.
1.8. CONTRACTORS GUARANTY
1.8.1. Provide guaranty, in Architect approved form, against the following defects for a period
of 5 years after acceptance of installation:
1.8.1.1. Doming, wrinkling or delamination from substrate.
1.8.1.2. Separation, lifting, puckering or other adhesive defects.
1.8.1.3. Loose yarn tufts, strays or other yarn defects.
1.9. EXTRA MATERIALS
1.9.1. Provide 5% of carpeting of each color and pattern specified, minimum 1 carton for all
general field carpet tiles, under provisions of Section 01 77 19.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
00 however all substitutions for Carpet Tile need to be made prior to bid day.
2.2. CARPET TILE: CT-1, CT-6
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Interface, or equal.
2.2.2. Type: Tufted, textured loop pile.
2.2.3. Series/Style: Student Council.
2.2.4.1. Gauge/stitch count: 1/12 inch/10 stitches per inch.
2.2.4.2. Pile Yarn Weight: 18 oz per square yard
2.2.4.3. Pile Height: 0.150 inch
2.2.4.4. Pile Density: 6291
2.2.4.5. Yarn Type: Premium Universal 6,6 nylon, solution dyed.
2.2.5. Recycled Content
2.2.5.1. 51% (2% post-consumer)
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0968103
2.2.6. Backing:
2.2.6.1. Non Woven Polypropylene.
2.2.6.2. Secondary: Fiberglass reinforced, recycled content vinyl composite.
2.2.7.1. Critical Radiant Flux: Class 1 - Minimum 0.45 w/sq cm per ASTM E648,
(Class 1 per CBC Section 804.4.1 ).
2.2.7.2. Smoke Density: 450 or less, per ASTM E 84 or ASTM E 662.
2.2.7.3. Static Propensity: 3.0 KV or less per AATCC 134.
2.3.3. Series/Style: Extra Curricular.
2.3.4.5. Yarn Type: Premium Universal 6,6 nylon, solution dyed.
2.3.5.1. 51% (2% post-consumer)
2.3.6. Backing:
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0968104
2.4. CARPET TILE: CT-5, CT-8, CT-9, CT-10, CT-11, CT-12
2.4.3. Series/Style: Cubic.
2.4.4.1. Gauge/stitch count: 1/12 inch/8.2 stitches per inch.
2.4.4.5. Yarn Type: Aquafil 100% Recycled Content 6,6 nylon, solution dyed.
2.4.5.1. 62% (4% Post-Consumer)
2.4.6. Backing:
2.5.3. Series/Style: SR899.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0968105
2.5.5.1. 60% (4% Post-Consumer)
2.5.6. Backing:
2.6. CARPET TILE: CT-15
2.6.2. Type: Tufted Sheared.
2.6.3. Series/Style: Alliteration.
2.6.5.1. 63% (5% Post-Consumer)
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0968106
2.6.6. Backing:
2.7.2. Type: Tufted Sheared
2.7.3. Series/Style: Palindrome.
2.7.5.1. 63% (5% Post-Consumer)
2.7.6. Backing:
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0968107
2.8.3. Series/Style: Monochrome.
2.8.5.1. 80% (35% Post-Consumer)
2.8.6. Backing:
2.9.3. Series/Style: FP600.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0968108
2.9.5.1. 62% (4% Post-Consumer)
2.9.6. Backing:
2.10. ACCESSORIES
2.10.1. Subfloor Filler: Portland cement based, Ardex, http://www.ardex.com/, or equal, type
recommended by flooring material manufacturer. Use of gypsum based filler is
prohibited.
2.10.2. Transition Strip: Johnson Rubber Company, vinyl type, color as selected.
2.10.3. Adhesives: Provide W.F. Taylor [phone (909) 360-6677] or equal, Envirotec low VOC,
water based, releasable adhesive, Series as recommended by manufacturer.
Adhesive VOC emissions shall not exceed maximum 0.60 mg/square meter/hour after
24 hours per EPA D.E.C. Testing method. Confirm adhesive compatibility with flooring
manufacturer prior to installation. Solvent based adhesives not permitted.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0968109
3.1.1. Inspection
properly commence.
3.1.1.2.1. Verify floor substrate moisture content is within

manufacturers limits as determined by manufacturers
calcium chloride test.
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Moisture testing
3.2.1.1. Conduct anhydrous calcium chloride testing using prepackaged kit

systems approved by flooring manufacturer.
3.2.1.2. Provide test at coverage rate required by flooring manufacturer, with

minimum of 3 tests/first 1,000 square feet and 1 test per each 1,000 square
feet after. Distribute uniformly throughout building. Prepare map or
diagram of test locations in each building.
3.2.1.3. Conduct one set of tests 60 days prior to scheduled flooring installation.
Submit test results to Architect within 48 hours of test receipt.
3.2.1.4. Conduct second set of tests 14 days prior to scheduled flooring

installation. Submit test results to Architect within 48 hours of test receipt.
3.2.1.5. Submit testing results to Architect prior to beginning slab preparation or

flooring work.

calcium chloride test kit, using distilled water and litmus paper procedure
recommended by manufacturer.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 09681010
amplitude.
3.2.3.5. All surfaces with gap exceeding 3/16 inch under 10 foot metal straight
edge.
3.2.4. Filler Installation:
3.2.4.1. Prepare existing concrete substrate as recommended by filler

manufacturer.
3.2.4.2. Acid etching is not acceptable.
3.2.4.3. Prepare existing cracks in substrate as recommended by manufacturer.
3.2.4.4. Apply filler and trowel to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface.
3.2.4.5. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. Vacuum clean substrate.
3.2.5. Floor Preparation:
3.2.5.1. Remove all outlet floor plates and utility covers, door stops, and similar
components. Label and store for re-installation.
3.2.5.2. Remove all curing compounds, waxes, grease, paint and other coatings
by Architect approved means. Vacuum substrate clean.
3.2.5.3. Apply primers as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
3.3. INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Apply carpet tiles and adhesive in accordance with manufacturers instructions, and
CRI-104, Section 13, Carpet Modules (Tiles), and in compliance with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA), Section 4.5.3.
3.3.2. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
Variation in color and texture, as determined solely by the Architect, within a room or
area will not be acceptable.
3.3.3. Install carpet adjacent to wall or casework edges, closely following edge without gaps.
Cut, by parallel or scribe technique, and tightly fit carpet around interruptions, such as
floor outlet boxes, columns and similar penetrations. All cuts shall be done through
the face of the module.
3.3.4. Carpet tiles are to be installed with a full spread of adhesive applied with a nap paint
roller.
3.3.4.1. Adhesive must be applied at all perimeters.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 09681011
3.3.4.2. Grid size shall not exceed 10. Grid size should be adjusted based on
expected traffic flow.
3.3.4.3. A full spread of adhesive must be applied under every cut tile and
any adjoining tile to the cut tile. Full spread is also required in any
area that well be exposed to high foot traffic and/ or heavy rolling
traffic.
3.3.5. Tip tiles into place per manufacturers installation instructions. Do not position tiles by
sliding them across the adhesive.
3.3.6. Install specified edge transition where carpet terminates at other floor finishes.
3.4. CLEANING
3.4.1. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
3.4.2. Clean floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
3.5. PROTECTION
3.5.1. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation.
3.5.2. Provide non-staining, slip resistant traffic path protection until final cleaning.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 09681012
SECTION 09 72 18
RIGID-SHEET WALL COVERING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Protective, prefinished Wall Surfacing.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ANSI/ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.
1.3.1. Applicator: Company specializing in installing wall surfacing with 3 years documented
experience.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.3. Submit four samples of wall covering 8x10 inch in size illustrating each color, finish,
and texture.
1.5.3. Inspect materials on site to verify acceptance.
1.5.4. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling.
1.6.1. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain substrate surface and
ambient temperatures above 60 degrees F, unless required otherwise by
1.6.2. Do not apply adhesive when substrate surface temperature or ambient temperature is
below 60 degrees F or relative humidity is above 40 percent.
1.6.3. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive
wall covering.
1.6.4. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid - height at substrate surfaces.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama RIGIDSHEETVINYLWALLCOVERING
JKA#15100 0972181
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
00.
2.2. PROTECTIVE WALL COVERING: TYPE PL-4
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Formica.
2.2.2. Type: Structural laminate wall covering.
2.2.3. Series/Style: Compact.
2.2.4.1. Thickness: 0.125 inches thick.
2.2.4.2. Size: Maximum sheet length available, height as shown on drawings.
2.2.5.1. Flame Spread: Class 1 per ASTM E84.
2.2.5.2. Smoke Density: Class 1 per ASTM E84.
2.2.5.3. Listing: UL Classified and Labeled.
2.2.5.4. Chemical and Stain Resistance: In compliance with manufacturers

literature.
2.2.6. Color: See Finish Schedule.
2.2.7. Finish: See Finish Schedule
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0972182
2.2.8. Accessory Moldings and Sealant:
2.2.8.1. Provide "T" molding at intermediate vertical joints, color to match panel.
2.2.8.2. Provide Inside Corner molding, color to match panel.
2.2.8.3. Provide color matched silicone sealant.
2.3. PROTECTIVE WALL COVERING: FRP-1
2.3.1. Manufacturer: Marlite
2.3.2. Type: Fiber Reinforced Plastic wall covering.
2.3.3. Series/Style: Standard.
2.3.4.1. Thickness: 0.090 inches thick.
2.3.4.2. Size: Maximum sheet length available, height as shown on drawings.
2.3.5.1. Flame Spread: Class 1 per ASTM E84.
2.3.5.2. Smoke Density: Class 1 per ASTM E84.
2.3.5.3. Listing: UL Classified and Labeled.
2.3.5.4. Chemical and Stain Resistance: In compliance with manufacturers

literature.
2.3.6. Color:
2.3.6.1. Light Grey
2.3.6.2. Finish: Pebble.
2.3.7. Accessory Moldings and Sealant:
2.3.7.1. Provide "T" molding at intermediate vertical joints, color to match panel.
2.3.7.2. Provide Inside Corner molding, color to match panel.
2.3.7.3. Provide color matched silicone sealant.
2.4. ACCESSORIES
2.4.1. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit substrate, UL

Classified for installation, water based type. Use of contact adhesive not permitted.
2.4.2. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers;

compatible with substrate.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0972183
3.1.1. Inspection
properly commence.
3.1.1.2.1. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more

than 1/8 inch in 10 feet nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16
inch per foot.
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Fill cracks and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth.
3.2.2. Sand glossy surfaces. Apply approved stain blocker to marks which may bleed.
3.2.3. Remove electrical, telephone, and wall plates and covers.
3.2.4. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles.
3.2.5. Apply one coat of primer/sealer to substrate surfaces. Allow to dry. Lightly sand
smooth. Vacuum clean.
3.3. INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.2. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets
and ensure full bond to substrate surface by using roller device recommended by
manufacturer.
3.3.3. Provide expansion gap at sheet edges and joints.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0972184
3.3.4. Install wall covering before installation of bases, cabinets, hardware, or items attached
to or spaced slightly from wall surface. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch
below top of resilient base.
3.4. CLEANING
3.4.1. Clean wall covering of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants.
3.4.2. Replace wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this Section.
3.5. PROTECTION
3.5.1. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01 50 00.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 0972185
SECTION 09 84 36
ACOUSTIC BAFFLES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Suspended acoustical sound absorbing panels
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM C 423 - Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation
Room Method
1.2.2. ASTM E 84 - Test Methods for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.2.3. ASTM E 795 Practices for Mounting Test Specimens during Sound Absorption Tests.
1.3.1. Flame spread and smoke development shall comply with ASTM E84 Class 1 values.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Submit manufacturers product data, shop drawings, samples, and installation instructions
in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.4.2. Indicate on shop drawings panel configurations and attachment locations.
1.4.3. Submit four samples of curtain panel, 6 x 6 inches.
1.4.4. Submit manufacturers maintenance and cleaning instructions under the provisions of
Section 01 77 19.
1.5.1. Deliver to site and store in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 60 00.
1.5.2. Store off the ground in a protected area free of excessive moisture or fumes.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.2. ACOUSTIC PANEL (AP):
2.2.1. Manufacturer: MBI Products, or equal.
2.2.2. Type: Fabric wrapped, dimensionally stable fiberglass core

County of Tehama ACOUSTIC DRAPERY
JKA #15-100 09 83 22 - 1
2.2.3. Series/Style: Cloud-Lite, Series 2800F-2065-GGF.
2.2.4. Color; architect to select from full range of colors.
2.2.5.1. Size: 48 inches wide x 96 @ tall ceiling, x 24 @ low ceiling
2.2.5.2. Thickness: 2
2.2.5.3. Core: 1.65 Ecose Fiberglass
2.2.5.4. Surface Finish: Polyester Fabric
2.2.5.5. Panel Attachment: 12 Gauge hanger attachment consistent with bar joist
attachment detail.
2.2.6.1. Flame Spread: Maximum value of 25 per ASTM E84.
2.2.6.2. Smoke Developed: Maximum value of 450 per ASTM E84.
2.2.6.3. NRC Value: 1.01 min. per ASTM C 423 and E795
2.3. ACCESSORIES
2.3.1. Anchors: Type recommended by panel manufacturer to suit substrate.
Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
3.1.1.2.1. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work, and
conform to requirements of the panel manufacturer.

JKA #15-100 09 83 22 - 2
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Clean surfaces free of loose particles.
3.2.2. Install panels in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
3.2.3. Install panels plumb and level in the Generator Enclosure, covering as much wall surface
as possible and mounted 6 inches from top and bottom of walls.
3.2.4. Protect panel under the provisions of Section 01 60 00.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 09 83 22 - 3
SECTION 09 91 00
PAINTING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Surface preparation.
1.1.2. Surface paint and stain finishes as scheduled.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM B 117 Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
1.2.2. ASTM D 16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related
Products.
1.2.3. ASTM D 3359 Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.
1.2.4. ASTM D 4060 Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber
Abraser.
1.2.5. ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.2.6. ASTM G 154 - Practice for Operating Light-and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Fluorescent
UV-Condensation Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.
1.3.1. Submit manufacturer's certification of compliance with local criteria regarding VOC limits
for all applied paints and coatings.
1.4.1. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 5 years
documented experience.
1.4.1.1. Installing Foreman: Individual specializing in applying specified systems with

minimum 10 years documented experience.
1.4.2. Pre-installation conference: Convene a pre-installation conference two weeks prior to

commencing work of this Section. Provide minimum 2 weeks advance notice to Owner
and Architect of scheduled date. Comply with provisions of Section 01 31 13. Attendance
by paint and coating material manufacturer's representative is mandatory. At pre-
installation conference, review installation procedures, inspection/testing procedures and
coordination required with related work.
1.5. SUBMITTALS
1.5.2. Product Data: Submit product data of all proposed products, identifying product series,
material composition, performance characteristics and sheen.
County of Tehama PAINTING
JKA #15-100 09 91 00 - 1
1.5.2.1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products comply with current safety and
environmental regulations, including hazardous materials labeling and air
quality/VOC regulations
1.5.2.2. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products are physically and chemically
compatible with each other and meet listed ASTM or Federal Specifications.
1.5.2.3. Where applicable, provide manufacturer's written evaluation of existing

paint/coating systems, including directions as to surface preparation and
primers compatible with existing systems.
1.5.3. Submit manufacturer's application instructions for each painting system, including surface
preparation.
1.6.3. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
1.6.4. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions
for mixing and reducing.
1.6.5. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum
of 90 degrees F, in an enclosed metal storage container located outside of building, unless
required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
1.6.6. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.7.1. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient
temperatures above 65 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after
application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
1.7.2. Prior to beginning preparation and coating application, provide lighting level of 80 foot
candles measured on substrate surface. Where natural lighting does not provide such
levels, provide temporary lighting.
1.8. EXTRA STOCK:
1.8.1.1. Provide an unopened five gallon container of each color and sheen to Owner.
1.8.1.2. Label each container with color, sheen, and room locations, in addition to the
manufacturer's label.
2.1. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1. Basis of Design: Specific products listed on Schedule in Part 3 of this Section, are
will consider requests for substitutions under the provisions of Section 01 25 00.

JKA #15-100 09 91 00 - 2
2.2. MATERIALS
2.2.1. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings.
2.2.2. Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks
or sags.
2.2.3. Accessory Materials: Provide all admixtures, thinners, flow agents and other materials not
specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified.
2.3. FINISHES/COLOR
2.3.1. See finish schedule
2.3.2. Each coat shall be a perceptibly different tint.
2.3.3. Where no color range is specified, provide single color for each item or component.
Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection
3.1.1.1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other
3.1.1.2.1. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to

commencement of work. Report any condition that may
potentially affect proper application.
3.1.1.2.2. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic

moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture
content of surfaces are below the maximum levels
recommended by the manufacturer:
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Remove dust and debris from existing ceiling and open web roof joists prior to painting

JKA #15-100 09 91 00 - 3
3.2.2. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing
surfaces or finishing.
3.2.3. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.
3.2.4. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
3.2.5. Steel Surfaces:
3.2.5.1. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and
rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous.
3.2.5.2. Bare Steel: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Clean surfaces
with solvent.
3.2.5.3. Galvanized steel: Test all galvanized steel surfaces for evidence of chromate
conversion treatments or other post-galvanizing applications that are not
compatible with paint finishes. Where testing demonstrates presence of such
treatment, brush blast or otherwise mechanically abrade the surface as
required by coating manufacturer.
3.2.6. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair. Remove
drywall texture nibs and other protrusions.
3.2.7. Plaster Surfaces: Repair minor defects, including cracks, in an approved manner.
Remove plaster nibs and other protrusions.
3.2.8. Interior Wood millwork and miscellaneous Items: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming.
Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after
primer has dried. Sand between coats.
3.2.9. Verify weatherstripping at door assemblies is compatible with specified paint finish.
3.2.10. Steel Doors and Door/Window Frames:
3.2.10.1. Provide specified primer at all frames, including frames with fabricators primer
system. Comply with criteria specified in this Section.
3.2.10.2. Prepare frame steel surfaces as required for proper adhesion and
appearance of specified finish coat system.
3.2.10.3. Paint all surfaces of window frames, including surfaces not visible when
operable vent portions are in closed position.
3.3. PROTECTION
3.3.1. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.3.2. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
3.3.3. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from
disfiguring other surfaces.
3.3.4. Remove empty paint containers from site.

JKA #15-100 09 91 00 - 4
3.4. APPLICATION
3.4.1. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4.2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
3.4.3. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
3.4.4. The number of coats specified are minimum. Additional coats shall be applied until finish
is uniform in color and sheen.
3.4.5. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
3.4.6. Obtain Owners Representative approval of each coat prior to applying succeeding coat.
3.4.7. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
3.4.8. Do not paint over labels at fire rated doors, door or window frames or other fire rated
assemblies.
3.4.9. Paint all structural components and surfaces visible through louvers and vents in wall and
soffit surfaces.
3.4.10. Steel Doors: Finish all surfaces of doors, including tops and bottoms.
3.4.10.1. Apply paint to non-factory prefinished doors and frames by spray method
only.
3.4.11. Wood Doors: Finish all surfaces of doors, including tops and bottoms.
3.4.11.1. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into
the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.
3.4.11.2. Apply two coats of approved sealer to all surfaces milled for hardware
preparation, including hinge mortise, latching mechanism cutout and related
door penetrations.
3.4.11.3. Before finishing, remove handling marks and exposure markings from all
surfaces and edges with a complete block sanding using at least 150 grit
sandpaper. Ease all edges. Steam out all scratches before sanding. Comply
with WI Manual Section 1, including use of sanding sealers and fillers.
3.4.12. Exterior surfaces, including plaster, concrete, metal fabrications, structural components
and metal flashings: Unless noted otherwise, apply paints and coatings as specified
below:
3.4.12.1. Unless noted otherwise, do not paint exterior galvanized metals, including
railings, all roof flashings and accessories and all mechanical and electrical
system components.
3.4.12.2. Unless designated prefinished on drawings, apply exterior paint to metal roof
copings, gutters, downspouts and flashings visible to the eye from typically
occupied locations in the finished project.
3.4.12.3. Apply exterior paint to all plaster trim, reveals and accessories.

JKA #15-100 09 91 00 - 5
3.4.12.4. Apply paint to all other exterior components as specified or shown on
drawings.
3.5. FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
3.5.1. Paint shop primed equipment. Paint shop prefinished items exposed to view in non - utility
areas.
3.5.2. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and
electrical components and paint separately.
3.5.3. At interior and exterior applications, prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit,
boxes, mechanical equipment units, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except
where items are prefinished.
3.5.4. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted

accidentally.
3.5.5. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that
are visible through grilles and louvers with flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint
dampers, except fire dampers, exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and
baseboard cabinets to match face panels.
3.5.6. Paint exposed panels, pedestals, boxes, conduit and related electrical equipment
occurring in exterior and interior finished areas.
3.5.7. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to
finishing.
3.5.8. All HVAC ductwork distribution to be protected and left exposed finish.
3.6. CLEANING
3.6.1. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
3.6.2. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials, and debris.
3.6.3. At end of workday remove from building flammable paint, solvents, and reducing agents.
3.6.4. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in
closed metal containers and remove daily from site.
3.7. SCHEDULE
3.7.1. For ease of specifying, unless otherwise noted, product numbers of Sherwin Williams
have been used. Equivalent products of Vista, Frazee, Glidden Professional, Dunn
Edwards, and other manufacturers may be used subject to the substitution provisions
listed under Section 01 25 00.
3.7.2. INTERIOR SURFACES
3.7.2.1. Steel Doors and Frames/Miscellaneous metal - Galvanized - Semi-Gloss
3.7.2.1.1. Solvent clean, etch with PCI 02150 Metal Conditioner

solution and rinse with clear water.

JKA #15-100 09 91 00 - 6
3.7.2.1.2. 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-
310 Series (5.0 mils wet, 2.0 mils dry)
3.7.2.1.3. 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss,
B31-2600 Series
3.7.2.1.4. 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss,
B31-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat)
3.7.2.2. Ferrous metal piping, duct work, miscellaneous metal fabrications, and
related components.
3.7.2.2.1. Solvent clean and rinse with clear water.
3.7.2.2.3. 2nd Coat:S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss,

B31-2600 Series
3.7.2.3. Gypsum Board (Walls) - Low Sheen/Eggshell Paint Finish
3.7.2.3.1. 1st Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer,
B28W2600 (4.0 mils wet, 1.0 mils dry)
3.7.2.3.2. 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-
2600 Series
3.7.2.3.3. 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-
2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat)
3.7.2.4. Gypsum Board (Toilet Rooms) - Semi-Gloss Enamel finish
3.7.2.4.2. 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss,
B31-2600 Series
3.7.2.5. Gypsum Board (Ceilings / Soffits) Flat finish
3.7.2.5.2. 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600
Series
3.7.2.5.3. 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600
Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat)
3.7.2.6. Masonry Wall Surface:

JKA #15-100 09 91 00 - 7
3.7.2.6.1. 1st Coat: S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 (75-125 sq
ft/gal)
3.7.2.6.2. 2nd Coat:S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-
2600 Series
3.7.2.6.3. 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-
2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry per coat)
3.7.2.7. Wood - Transparent Stain and Varnish
3.7.2.7.1. 1st Coat: S-W WoodClassics
3.7.2.7.2. 2nd Coat: S-W Minwax Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish,

Gloss, Semi-Gloss, Satin
3.7.2.7.3. Two S-W Minwax Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, Gloss,

Semi-Gloss, Satin (4.0 mils wet, 1.0 mil dry per coat)
3.7.2.8. Reclaimed Wood Planks Stain and Oil
3.7.2.8.1. 1st Coat: Rubio Monocoat Fumed
3.7.2.8.2. 2nd Coat: Rubio Monocoat Oil 2C Smoke
3.7.2.8.3. Apply per manufacturers instructions
3.7.3. EXTERIOR SURFACES
3.7.3.1. Steel doors and frames, flashings, exposed metal galvanized decking, ferrous
metal piping, trusses, steel canopy members, miscellaneous metal
fabrications, and related components
3.7.3.1.1. Etch with PCI 02150 Metal Conditioner phosphoric acid

solution and rinse with clear water.
3.7.3.1.3. 2nd Coat: S-W Solo Acrylic Semi-Gloss, A76 Series
3.7.3.1.4. 3rd Coat: S-W Solo Acrylic Semi-Gloss, A76 Series (4.0 mils
wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat)
3.7.3.2. Concrete masonry units (CMU) - Flat
3.7.3.2.1. Clean the surfaces. Repair cracks and loose mortar.
3.7.3.2.2. 1st Coat: S-W Loxon Block Surfacer, A24W20 (50-100 sq

ft/gal)
3.7.3.2.3. 2nd Coat: S-W ConFlex XL Elastomeric High Build Coating,

A5-400 Series
3.7.3.2.4. 3rd Coat: S-W ConFlex XL Elastomeric High Build Coating,

A5-400 Series (16.0 mils wet, 7.5 mils dry per coat)

JKA #15-100 09 91 00 - 8
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 09 91 00 - 9
SECTION 10 11 16
MARKERBOARDS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Markerboards
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ANSI A 208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard.
1.2.2. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
1.2.3. ASTM A 424 - Steel Sheet for Porcelain Enameling.
1.2.4. Porcelain Enamel Institute-Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel

Markerboards.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.2. Indicate on shop drawings, wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, and special anchor
details.
1.3.4. Submit two samples 3x4 inches in size, illustrating materials, finish and color of board
surfacing and trim.
1.4. MAINTENANCE DATA
1.4.1. Submit maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 77 19.
1.4.2. Include maintenance information on regular cleaning and stain removal.
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Platinum Visual

Systems, a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc. (www.pvsusa.com) are indicated to
establish required level of quality, appearance, and performance. The Architect will
consider requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01 25 00.
2.1.1.1. Approved alternate manufacturer: Claridge Products and Equipment Co.

http://www.claridgeproducts.com/
2.2. MARKERBOARDS
2.2.1. Type: Porcelain enamel markerboards

County of Tehama MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
JKA #15-100 10 11 16 - 1
2.2.1.1. Series/Style: THS series, manual operation, sliding panels as shown on
drawings, with track configuration as required to permit stacking all panels on
one side.
2.2.1.1.1. Panel operation: Provide top suspension system, nylon ball

bearing rollers at top, with nylon guide rollers at bottom.
2.2.2.1. Size: Refer to Drawings.
2.2.2.2. Writing Surface: Writanium 24 gauge porcelain enamel skin.
2.2.2.3. Core: 1/2 inch particle board.
2.2.2.4. Back: 0.015 inch aluminum sheet.
2.2.2.5. Perimeter Trim: Aluminum channel trim.
2.2.2.6. Adhesives: Type recommended by manufacturer.
2.2.2.7. Fabricate in full lengths, no joints allowed except as shown on drawings.
2.2.3. Finish:
2.2.3.1. Porcelain Enamel: Glass fiber enamel, baked to vitreous surfaces; color as
selected from manufacturer's standard range for standard dry marker
surfaces.
2.2.3.2. Aluminum Frame and Accessories: Clear satin anodized finish.
Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection
commence.

JKA #15-100 10 11 16 - 2
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install markerboards, chalkboards and tackboards in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
3.2.2. Secure units level and plumb.
3.3. CLEANING
3.3.1. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.2. Cover board surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame.
3.3.3. Remove protective covers at Owner occupancy.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 10 11 16 - 3
SECTION 10 14 00
SIGNAGE
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Permanent room or space identification signage
1.1.2. Directional and Informational Signage, site, exterior and interior.
1.1.3. Safety Signage.
1.1.4. Vehicle traffic control signage.
1.1.5. Building identification signage.
1.1.6. Entry Plaque Casting.
1.1.7. Directory.
1.2.1. Comply with signage requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility
Guidelines (ADAAG), as currently amended.
1.2.2. Where different or more restrictive than ADAAG, comply with signage requirements of
Title 24, Part 2, CCR, including amendments.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.2. Shop Drawings:
1.3.2.1. Indicate sign size, message, and mounting.
1.3.2.2. Identify mounting location and alignment with adjacent construction and
features.
1.3.3. Product Data: Provide data on material construction, hardware, and accessories.
1.3.4. Samples:
1.3.4.1. Color range: Submit two brochures or other approved submittal of full color
range available for each signage application.
1.3.4.2. Submit two samples of representative signage illustrating dimensional

characteristics, finish and sheen for Architect selection.
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama SIGNAGE
JKA#15100 1014001
1.3.4.2.1. Submit samples of representative tactile/braille signage
illustrating letter stroke proportions and braille dot size,
spacing and characteristics.
1.3.5.1. Certification: Accompanying submittal, provide sign

fabricator/manufacturers written certification stating signs as designed
comply with applicable criteria of ADAAG and Title 24, including letter
style, spacing and size.
1.3.5.2. Prior to installation, provide sign fabricator/manufacturers written

certification stating tactile and braille signs comply with specified criteria,
including proof-reading requirements.
1.4.1. Deliver products to site. Store and protect under provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
01 25 00.
2.2. PERMANENT ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Advance Corporation http://www.advancecorp.com/ (specified as basis

of design) or equal.
2.2.2. Type: Etched metal signage system.
2.2.3. Series: Etched Zinc Photocast.
2.2.4. Material Characteristics: 0.153 inch thick zinc alloy.
2.2.5. Graphic Image Process: Acid etched process providing raised and braille relief image.
Applied message not acceptable.
2.2.6. Sign Size, Design, Style Criteria:
2.2.6.1. Character size: 5/8 inch minimum, maximum 2 inch height, raised 1/32
inch above surface.
2.2.6.2. Character proportion: Provide width to height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1.
2.2.6.3. Character stroke proportion: Provide stroke width to height ratio between
1:5 and 1:10.
2.2.6.4. Letter Style: Upper case Helvetica Regular.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 1014002
2.2.6.5. Braille criteria: Provide contracted Grade 2 braille, with dots spaced 1/10
inch on center in each cell, and cells spaced 2/10 inch apart, measured
from the second row of dots in the first cell to the first row of dots in the
second cell. Provide dots raised 1/40 inch above surface, with slightly
rounded or eased profile.
2.2.6.6. Design sign with room number on first line, room name on second, braille
message on third line. Center all copy. Provide minimum 1/2 inch clear
space all around braille image.
2.2.6.7. Pictogram Criteria: Where pictograms are specified as room identification

signage, provide pictogram centered in minimum 6 inch high space with
no text or braille within this space. Provide tactile and braille message
centered below pictogram.
2.2.7. Sign Message:
2.2.7.1. RS-1 - Toilet Room Signs: Provide signs at locations shown on drawings.
At toilets, provide symbol of accessibility per details. See Article 2.3 of this
Section for door mounted signage.
2.2.7.2. RS-2 - Room Signs: Provide signs at locations shown on drawings. At all
exterior entrance doors, provide symbol of accessibility per details.
2.2.7.3. RS-3 - Exit Signs: Provide signs at all door locations with exit signs
required by Section 1011.3, Part 2, Title 24, CCR indicating the path of
exit travel within the means of egress system.
2.2.7.4. RS-4 Not An Exit Signs: Provide signs at exit door locations that are not
accessible exits, stating This Is Not An Accessible Exit. Provide
appropriate international symbol with diagonal line on each sign.
Locations are identified in the Door Schedule.
2.2.8. Finish/Contrast/Color:
2.2.8.1. Finish: Provide signs with matte, non-reflective finish, with a maximum 11-
19 degree gloss on 60 degree dosimeter.
2.2.8.2. Contrast: Provide signs with minimum light to dark contrast between
background and message of 70 percent.
2.2.8.3. Color: Provide signs with two colors as selected by Architect from
manufacturers standard color line.
2.2.8.3.1. Background: Color 1, selected from very dark color range.
2.2.8.3.2. Message: Color 2 selected from white or very light color

range.
2.2.8.3.3. International Symbol of Accessibility: White symbol on

Federal Blue background.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 1014003
2.2.8.3.4. Finish System: Mathews acrylic polyurethane coating
system, VOC approved, complying with glare finish
criteria.
2.2.9. Mounting:
2.2.9.1. Exterior: Provide stainless steel spanner head tamper resistant screw in
expansion shields suitable for substrate. Countersink screw flush with
surface.
2.2.9.2. Interior: Unless noted otherwise, provide double stick foam tape mounting,
1/32 inch thick.
2.2.9.3. Where signs are mounted on glass panels, install using structural silicone
sealant method specified in this Section.
2.2.9.4. Verify surfaces with irregular or rough finish have been properly finished
to establish flush and lip free installation.
2.2.10. Fabrication Certification: Prior to installation, provide written certification stating

permanent signage has been proofread by Library of Congress certified readers or
approved alternate.
2.3. DIRECTIONAL AND INFORMATIONAL SIGNAGE
2.3.1. Manufacturer: Advance Corporation http://www.advancecorp.com/ (specified as basis

of design) or equal.
2.3.2. Type: Etched metal signage system.
2.3.3. Series: Etched Zinc Photocast.
2.3.4. Material Characteristics: 0.153 inch thick zinc alloy.
2.3.5. Graphic Image Process: Acid etched process providing raised and braille relief image.
Applied message not acceptable.
2.3.6.1. Character size: As required to comply with viewing distance criteria.

Provide minimum 3 inch height at signs located 80 inches or greater above
finish floor. Provide image raised 1/32 inch above surface.
1:5 and 1:10.
2.3.6.4. Letter Style: Upper case Helvetica Regular.
2.3.6.5. Center all copy in field.
2.3.7. Sign Message:
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 1014004
2.3.7.1. DS-1 Toilet room door symbols: Provide door mounted signs, separate
from room identification signage, complying with 12 inch triangle/circle size
requirements per CBC Section 1115B.5, Part 2, Title 24, CCR. Provide
appropriate international gender symbol on each sign. Do not put tactile
and braille message on sign.
2.3.7.2. DS-2 - Accessible Route Direction Signs: Provide signage with symbol of
accessibility with arrow pointed as directed by Architect. Provide four (4)
signs, located as directed by Architect.
2.3.7.3. DS-3 - Assistive Listening Device: Provide signs indicating availability of

assistive listening devices in compliance with Section 1103B.1, Part 2,
Title 24, CCR and ADAAG 4.30.7. In addition, provide message on sign
stating Contact School Administration to make arrangements for access
to listening device for after school hours use. Provide four (24) signs,
located as directed by Architect.
2.3.7.4. DS-10 - Exterior Access Control Signs: Provide signs stating "No
Entrance". Provide four (4) signs, located as directed by Architect for
exterior door mounting.
2.3.8.1. Finish: Provide signs with matte, non-reflective finish, with a maximum 11-
19 degree gloss on 60 degree dosimeter.

range.

2.3.8.3.4. Finish System: Mathews acrylic polyurethane coating

system, VOC approved, complying with glare finish
criteria.
2.3.9. Mounting:
2.3.9.1. Exterior: Provide stainless steel spanner head tamper resistant screw in
expansion shields suitable for substrate. Countersink screw flush with
surface.
2.3.9.2. Interior: Unless noted otherwise, provide double stick foam tape mounting,
1/32 inch thick.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 1014005
2.3.9.3. Where signs are mounted on glass panels, install using structural silicone
sealant method specified in this Section.
2.4. ACCESSIBLE ENTRANCE SIGN
2.4.1. Provide Vomar http://www.vomarproducts.com/ or equal, 100 Series acrylic die cut
graphic decal, complying with the following criteria:
2.4.1.1. Message: International Symbol of Accessibility.
2.4.1.2. Mounting/Location: Self adhesive, mounted as directed by Architect at

facility entrances.
2.4.1.3. Size: 4 inches square.
2.4.1.4. Color: White image on "Accessible" blue color.
2.4.1.5. Quantity: Two (2).
2.5. INFORMATIONAL SIGNAGE
2.5.1. Manufacturer: Vomar http://www.vomarproducts.com/ or equal.
2.5.2. Type: Non-illuminated flat sign panel, aluminum frame, ground set unless noted
otherwise.
2.5.3. Size and Construction:
2.5.3.1. Sign Image Size: Minimum 9 inches high x 18 inches long. Adjust size as
necessary to accommodate message and character size criteria of
referenced regulations.
2.5.3.2. Mounting Height: 36 inches to top of sign, unless noted otherwise.
2.5.3.3. Sign Panel Material: 0.080 inch Aluminum panel, background painted with
PPG Duranar, Kynar 500 fluoropolymer painted finish complying with
AAMA 605.2-90, over black fiberglass back-up panel.
2.5.3.4. Frame: Aluminum Tube.
2.5.4.1. Character size: As required to comply with viewing distance criteria.

Provide minimum 3 inch height at signs located 80 inches or greater above
finish grade.
1:5 and 1:10.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 1014006
2.5.4.4. Letter Style: Upper case Helvetica Regular.Center all copy in field.
2.5.5. Sign Content:
2.5.5.1. SDS-1: Provide free standing sign with symbol of accessibility, with
directional arrow oriented as directed by Architect. Provide image on both
sides. Provide two (2) signs.
2.5.6. Graphic Process: Silkscreen, surface printing, urethane paint system suitable for
exterior application, with clear urethane overcoat.
2.5.7.1. Finish: Provide signs with matte, non-reflective finish, with a maximum 19
degree gloss on 60 degree dosimeter.

range.

2.5.7.3.4. Frame: Color as selected by Architect.
2.5.8. Mounting:
2.5.8.1. Ground Set: Concrete footing.
2.5.8.2. Exterior Wall: Provide spanner head tamper resistant screw in expansion
shields suitable for substrate.
2.6. SITE VEHICLE CONTROL SIGNAGE
2.6.1. Manufacturer: Western Highway Products www.westernhighway.com or equal.
2.6.2. Provide painted aluminum series, design as shown on drawings and as specified, with
H6-TP spanner head vandal resistant fasteners, H-5 spacer and all required mounting
components. All accessible signs shall be painted with white message on dark blue
background.
2.6.2.1. VS-1 - Accessible Parking Site Entrance Sign: RFH 1824.
2.6.2.2. VS-2 - Accessible Parking Space Sign: RFH 1212PB.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 1014007
2.6.2.3. VS-3 - Van Accessible Parking Space Sign: RFH 1212PB, with 2RFH-VAN
- R12 at van accessible spaces.
2.6.2.4. VS-7 - No Parking-Fire Lane Sign: R26RFL - 12 x 18 inches
2.6.2.5. VS-9 - No Parking Loading Zone: R26PLZ - 12 x 18 inches
2.6.3. Concrete: 3,000 psi concrete in accordance with the provisions of Section 03 30 00 or
03 30 10.
2.6.4. Post: Steel pipe, 3 inch diameter unless noted otherwise, galvanized per Section
05 50 00, finish painted per Section 09 91 00.
2.7. SAFETY SIGNAGE
2.7.1. Exterior Safety Signage: Provide custom painted aluminum series matching Article 2.3
Directional Signage specified above, with spanner head vandal resistant fasteners,
spacer and all required mounting components. Provide signage as shown on
drawings, required by jurisdictional authorities, and related signage, including but not
necessarily limited to, signs with the following message:
2.7.1.1. "Trash Enclosure.
2.7.1.2. "Electrical ".
2.7.1.3. "Meter/Utility Room". Provide one (1) sign.
2.7.1.4. GAS SHUT-OFF VALVE ". Provide one (1) sign, located as directed by
Architect.
2.7.2. Fire Lane Signage and Delineation: Fire lanes must be identified regarding their
entrance and physical location with the placement of signs, gates, curbs, bollards and
similar devices. Specific signage wording and other details must be coordinated with
and approved by local fire authorities.
2.7.3. Interior Safety Signage: Provide signage matching Article 2.3 specified above, with all
required mounting components. Provide signage as shown on drawings, required by
jurisdictional authorities, and related signage, including but not necessarily limited to,
signs with the following message:
2.7.3.1. "Room Occupancy Limit - XXX". Numbers shall be determined by

Architect. Provide two (2) signs, with different occupancy numbers.
2.8. EXTERIOR ALUMINUM LETTERS
2.8.1. Manufacturer: Steel Art or equal.
2.8.2. Type: fabricated aluminum letters, canopy mounted.
2.8.3. Series: Standard Fabricated Aluminum Letters.
2.8.4.1. Size: As shown on Drawings, 10 inch minimum.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 1014008
2.8.4.2. Material: Aluminum.
2.8.5. Graphics and Message
2.8.5.1. Letter Style: Per referenced standard, upper case Gill Sans MT
2.8.5.2. Message:
2.8.5.2.1. As shown on Drawings.
2.8.5.2.2. Street Address Numerals: Provide two, 3 digit number

sets, located as directed by Architect at two separate
locations.
2.8.6. Mounting Hardware: Threaded stud mounted with collars detailed on drawings.
2.8.7. Color: Anodized Satin Aluminum with clear protective coating.
2.9. INTERIOR ALUMINUM LETTERS
2.9.1. Type: 1/8 thick, flat-cut aluminum
2.9.2.1. Size: As shown on Drawings, 10 inch minimum.
2.9.2.2. Material: Aluminum.
2.9.3. Graphics and Message
2.9.3.1. Letter Style: Harrington/Gill Sans MT
2.9.3.2. Message: As shown on Drawings.
2.9.4. Mounting Hardware: Threaded stud mounted with collars detailed on drawings.
2.9.5. Color: Brushed aluminum with clear protective coating.
2.10. DONOR RECOGNITION PLAQUE
2.10.1. Manufacturer: A.R.K. Ramos http://www.arkramos.com/ or equal.
2.10.2. Type: Bronze cast image.
2.10.3. Size and Construction
2.10.3.1. 6 x 12
2.10.3.2. Installation: stud mount flush
2.10.3.3. Plaque Material: Cast Bronze.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 1014009
2.10.3.4. Thickness: approximately 5/8 inch.
2.10.4. Graphics and Finish
2.10.4.1. Letter Style: Raised letters, sans serif, as selected by Architect from
standard line. Base contract on 50% upper and 50% lower case, two
separate letter sizes and two separate letter styles.
2.10.4.2. Message: As shown on drawings. Base contract on 30 letters for each

Board member name.
2.10.4.3. Finish: BR -400.
2.10.4.4. Border: No. 510.
2.10.4.5. Background: Pebble Texture.
3.1.1. Inspection
properly commence.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. General criteria:
3.2.1.1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved

submittals.
3.2.1.2. Coordinate location of all signage with Architect.
3.2.1.3. Install on clean and properly prepared surfaces.
3.2.2. Permanent room, directional and informational signage:
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 10140010
3.2.2.1. Install signs after substrate surfaces receive final finish.
3.2.2.2. Center room identification signage at 60 inches above floor, located on

strike side of door or as directed by Architect.
3.2.2.3. Where signs are installed in sealant method on glass panels, provide back
plate matching sign at opposite side of glass
3.2.2.4. When sign is installed on window surface or other similar recessed

conditions, provide spacer as required to maintain sign face within 3
inches of outermost wall plane.
3.2.3. Exterior site, directional and informational signage:
3.2.3.1. Mount at locations as shown on drawings, level and plumb.
3.2.3.2. Coordinate location with Architect.
3.2.3.3. Mount wall mounted signage fasteners in sealant bedding.
3.2.3.4. Where signs are mounted on gate or fence mesh, sandwich mesh
between sign and backing panel of same material and size as sign. Install
using hex bolt, tamper resistant fasteners, mounted through aluminum
sleeve/spacer.
3.2.3.5. Mount ground set signs in concrete footing, Type II cement
3.2.4. Exterior letters and signs:
3.2.4.1. Mount at locations as shown on drawings, level and plumb.
3.2.4.2. Mount wall mounted signage fasteners in sealant bedding.
3.2.4.3. Coordinate location with Architect.
3.2.5. Clean and polish all signage after installation.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 10140011
SECTION 10 21 15
PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Solid phenolic toilet compartments.
1.1.2. Urinal screens.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip.
1.2.2. NEMA LD - 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.2. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall, floor,
and ceiling supports and door swings.
1.3.3. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.
1.3.4. Samples: Submit one complete set of samples of partition panels, 2 x 3 inch in size
illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen for Architect selection.
1.3.5. Submit four samples of each color and finish selected.
1.3.6. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter

conditions requiring special attention.
1.4. FIELD MEASUREMENTS
1.4.1. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.5. COORDINATION
1.5.2. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall and ceiling.

County of Tehama PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
JKA #15-100 10 21 15 - 1
1.6. GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
1.6.1. Contractors Guarantee:
1.6.1.1. Provide Owner with written guarantee complying with the following criteria:
1.6.1.1.1. Panel Material Replacement: Complete panel material

replacement at no cost to Owner, including shipping to
manufacturer, if panel materials exhibit breakage, surface
crazing, spalling or delamination for a period of 5 years after
installation.
1.6.1.1.2. Hardware Material Replacement: Complete hardware

material replacement at no cost to Owner, including shipping
to manufacturer, if hardware materials break or rust for a
period of 5 years after installation.
1.6.2. Manufacturers Guarantee:
1.6.2.1. Provide Owner with compartment system manufacturers written guarantee

complying with the following criteria:
1.6.2.1.1. Panel Material Replacement: Complete panel material

replacement at no cost to Owner for materials, if panel
materials exhibit breakage, surface crazing, spalling or
delamination for a period of 10 years after installation.
2.1. Compartments
2.1.1. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by Bobrick Washroom

Equipment, Inc. (http://www.bobrick.com/) are indicated to establish required level of
quality, appearance, and performance. The Architect will consider requests for
substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01 25 00.
2.1.2. Type: Solid phenolic floor and ceiling braced compartment system, water and fire
resistant.
2.1.3. Series:
2.1.3.1. Toilet Compartments: Floor and Ceiling anchored Series 1186.67 DuraLine
with Hardware as specified.
2.1.3.2. Urinal Screens: Floor and Ceiling Anchored Series # 1183 DuraLine with
hardware as specified.
2.1.4.1. Solid Phenolic Panel: Water resistant and fire resistant solid phenolic core
with high pressure matte finish melamine laminate veneer.
2.1.4.2. Pilaster Shoe: Formed ASTM A167 type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish,
with adjustable screw jack.
2.1.4.3. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel; tamper proof type;
Continuous stainless steel channel connector between pilaster and panels.
JKA #15-100 10 21 15 - 2
2.1.4.4. Hardware:
2.1.4.4.1. All hardware shall be ADA compliant, Type 304 stainless

steel. Plastic or ZAMAC alloy not acceptable.
2.1.4.4.2. Where manufacturers standard available line does not

include comply with specified characteristics, provide
hardware supplied from alternate sources.
2.1.4.4.3. Stainless steel hinge, with emergency release capability.

Provide self closing feature on all accessible compartments.
2.1.4.4.4. Slide door latch with exterior emergency access feature.
2.1.4.4.5. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper.
2.1.4.4.6. Coat hook.
2.1.4.4.7. Loop style Door pulls for accessible compartment, at inside

and outside of compartment.
2.1.4.4.8. Door Stops at top and bottom of each door panel.
2.1.4.4.9. Continuous Channel at pilaster to panel and panel to wall

connection.
2.1.4.4.10. Provide concealed threaded metal inserts at all hardware

fastened to panels.
2.1.5. Fabrication:
2.1.5.1. Fabricate partitions by forming solid phenolic with high pressure laminate
faces and edges. Finish edges convex.
2.1.5.2. Bevel corners and edges of cut - outs.
2.1.5.3. Doors and Pilasters:
2.1.5.3.2. Door Width: 24 inches unless shown otherwise.
2.1.5.3.3. Door Width at Accessible compartment: 32 inches

minimum clear opening at door located at end of
compartment, 34 inches minimum clear opening at door
located on side of compartment, door swing as shown on
plans.
2.1.5.3.4. Door Height: 58 inches.
2.1.5.4. Panels: 3/4 inch thick, 58 inches high.
2.1.6.1. NFPA Class "B".
2.1.7. Finish/Color:
JKA #15-100 10 21 15 - 3
2.1.7.1. Formica 918-SP Neutral White with Sculpted Finish
2.1.7.2. Stainless Steel: No. 4, Satin.
Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection
commence.
3.1.1.2.1. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.
3.1.1.2.2. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage and

bracing.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.2.2. Install partition system with continuous channel. Maintain 1/4 inch space between channel
and panels. Maintain maximum of 3/16 inch space between door and pilaster.
3.2.3. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with tamper proof through bolts and nuts.
3.2.4. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with panel channels and sockets anchored to floor.
3.2.5. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with
pilaster. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes.
3.2.6. Equip each door with specified hinge system, one door latch, two door pulls, one coat
hook and bumper.
3.2.6.1. Provide accessible compartment doors with pull on both sides, mounted at 34
inches above finish floor to bottom of pull.
3.2.6.2. Provide slide latch mounted at 39 inches above finish floor.

JKA #15-100 10 21 15 - 4
3.2.6.3. Mount coat hook at 48 inches above finish floor in accessible compartments.
Locate as directed by Architect. Do not mount on door panel.
3.2.7. Install door strike and keeper with door bumper on each pilaster in alignment with door
latch.
3.2.8. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. Field touch - up of scratches
or damaged finish will NOT be permitted.
3.3. ERECTION TOLERANCES
3.3.1. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch.
3.3.2. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch.
3.4. ADJUSTING
3.4.1. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 77 19.
3.4.2. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding
3/16 inch.
3.4.3. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 10 21 15 - 5
SECTION 10 28 00
TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Toilet and washroom accessories.
1.1.2. Lavatory and sink trap and piping prefabricated wrap kit.
1.1.3. Attachment hardware.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and
Strip.
1.3.1. Comply with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility
Guidelines (ADAAG), as currently amended.
1.3.2. Where different or more restrictive than ADAAG, comply with requirements of Title 24,
Part 2, CCR, as currently amended.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Submit product data and installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.4.2. Include physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, wall mounting
brackets with mounted measurements, anchorage details, rough-in measurements,
location, and details.
1.4.2.1. Review installation and placement of accessories with regard to such

components as counters and door swings. Identify all potential conflicts
with proposed placement of accessories, including compliance with
disabled access regulations.
1.4.2.2. Provide certification written on manufacturers letterhead, that all

components, such as levers and push buttons, comply with ADA limit of 5
pounds force to operate component when filled and installed. Such
devices will be field tested for compliance.
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
TehamaCountyLibrary
CountyofTehama TOILET,BATHANDLAUNDRYACCESSORIES
JKA#15100 1028001
2.2. WASHROOM AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
2.2.1. Manufacturer: Unless noted otherwise, Bobrick, http://www.bobrick.com/, or equal.
2.2.2. Toilet Area Accessories:
2.2.2.1. Toilet Paper Dispenser.
2.2.2.1.1. Type TPD -1: B-2888, Classic Series, surface mount, with
lock.
2.2.2.1.2. Type TPD-2: B-3474, Classic Series, with lock, recessed

at accessible compartments as required to extend
maximum 3 inches from face of wall and a minimum of 1-
1/2 inches from grab bar tangent point.
2.2.2.2. Seat Cover Dispenser SCD-1: B-221, Classic Series, surface mount.
2.2.2.3. Sanitary Napkin Disposal SPW-1: B-254, Classic Series, surface mount.
2.2.3. Washroom Area Accessories:
2.2.3.1. Paper Towel/Waste Receptacle PTD-3: B-4369, Contura Series, semi

recessed.
2.2.3.2. Mirror.
2.2.3.2.1. Mirror M-1: B-290, size as shown on drawings, 18 x 36

inch size minimum, tempered glass.
2.2.3.3. Soap Dispenser:
2.2.3.3.1. Wall Mount SD-1: B-2112, Classic Series, liquid type, with
maximum 5 lbf operating force.
2.2.3.4. Sanitary Napkin Dispenser SPD-1: B-3500, TrimLine Series, recessed

mount, coordinate coin mechanism with Owner.
2.2.4. Miscellaneous Accessories
2.2.4.1. Mop Rack: B-223-36.
2.2.5. Accessories:
2.2.5.1. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel or equivalent corrosion

resistant, size and type as required for application. Provide tamper and
vandal resistant heads at exposed fasteners.
2.2.5.2. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and
fittings.
2.2.5.3. Provide anchor plates, adapters, and clips and all other components
required for installation.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 1028002
2.2.5.4. Keying: Where accessories are keyed, key all accessories alike and as
directed by Architect. Supply 5 keys to Owner.
2.2.6. Finish: No. 4 satin luster, unless noted otherwise.
2.3. GRAB BARS
2.3.1. Manufacturer: Bobrick, http://www.bobrick.com/, or equal .
2.3.2. Toilet Compartment Grab Bar GB-Series, size and configuration as shown on
drawings: B 5806 Series, concealed mounting, set screw flange cover, satin finish.
2.3.3. Shower Compartment Grab Bar SGB-1: B 5806, size and configuration as shown on
drawings, modified to provide full length grab bar at shower side and back walls,
concealed mounting, set screw flange cover, satin finish. Do not extend grab bar past
edge of fold down seat.
2.4. TRAP AND PIPING WRAP
2.4.1. Provide Plumberex www.plumberex.com prefabricated trap and piping insulation kit,
Handy Shield MaXX series, color white, and complying with CBC Section 719.3 and
2603. Provide heavy duty security snaps and all required accessory fittings. Provide
at all lavatory and sink trap and supply fittings, including cold water supply.
3.1.1. Inspection
properly commence.
3.2. PREPARATION
3.2.1. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in.
3.2.2. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 1028003
3.2.3. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
3.2.4. Where installing Owner furnished items (OFCI), schedule meeting with Owner as
necessary to obtain all required installation criteria from Owner, including accessory
size, fastener locations and other requirements for a complete an secure installation.
Schedule meeting so as to not delay installation of required rough-in services, blocking,
backing and embeds.
3.2.5. Where Owner will provide and install accessories (OFOI), schedule meeting with
Owner as necessary to obtain all required installation criteria from Owner, including
accessory size, fastener locations and other requirements in order to install all required
backing, blocking, and support framing for a complete and secure installation.
Schedule meeting so as to not delay installation of required rough-in services, blocking,
backing and embeds.
3.3. INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
3.3.2. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
3.3.3. Mount in accordance with referenced accessibility regulations and as shown on

drawings.
3.3.3.1. Mount shower coat hooks at 48 inches above finish floor, located as
directed by Architect.
3.3.4. Clean and polish all accessories after installation.
END OF SECTION
TehamaCountyLibrary
JKA#15100 1028004
SECTION 10 44 00
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
1.1.2. Fire extinguishers.
1.1.3. Wall bracket.
1.2. SUBMITTALS
1.2.1. Submit product data and installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1.2.2. Include physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, wall mounting brackets
with mounted measurements, anchorage details, rough-in measurements, location, and
details.
1.2.3. Verify extinguisher size and type with Architect.
2.1. CABINETS
2.1.1. Basis of Design: Characteristics of specific products manufactured by J.L Industries are
Architect will consider requests for substitutions, under provisions of Section
01 25 00.
2.1.2. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets must comply with CBC Sections 1117B.6 and 1118B.
2.1.3. Type:
2.1.3.1. Type 1: Recessed stainless steel cabinet, flat edge trim and bubble door,
located in kitchen area only.
2.1.3.2. Type 2: Semi - Recessed painted steel cabinet, rolled edge return trim and
wire glass door, located at framed walls.
2.1.3.3. Type 3: Surface mounted painted steel cabinet, recessed pull, rolled edge
return trim and wire glass door, located at concrete and masonry wall
applications.
2.1.4. Type 1 Cabinet
2.1.4.1. Series/Model Number: Clear Vu 2535-F25.
2.1.4.2. Door Style: Clear Bubble.
2.1.4.3. Glazing: Clear Acrylic, with FE letters, red.

County of Tehama FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
JKA #15-100 10 44 00 - 1
2.1.4.4. Finish/Color: Stainless Steel.
2.1.5.1. Model Number: Ambassador # 1817-F13.
2.1.5.2. Door Style: Full glass.
2.1.5.3. Glazing: Clear wire glass, with FE letters, red.
2.1.5.4. Finish/Color: White Color Epoxy Coated tub and frame.
2.1.6.1. Model Number: Ambassador # 1812-F13, with ADAC recessed pull.
2.1.6.2. Door Style: Full glass.
2.1.6.3. Glazing: Clear wire glass, with FE letters, red.
2.1.6.4. Finish/Color: White Color Epoxy Coated tub and frame.
2.2. EXTINGUISHER
2.2.1. Manufacturers: J.L. Industries, www.jlindustries.com, or equal.
2.2.2. Types:
2.2.2.1. Type 1: Dry Chemical - UL Rating 40B:C, for use in Kitchen areas in Type 1
Cabinet. Provide sodium bicarbonate type only per Title 19, Chapter 5,
Section 566, CCR.
2.2.2.2. Type 2: Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical - UL Rating 2A-10B:C, for use in other
areas in Type 2 and 3 cabinet.
2.2.3. Approvals:
2.2.3.1. Approved for intended use by California State Fire Marshal.
2.2.4. Color: Red Enamel (for dry chemical extinguishers) and Stainless Steel (for wet chemical
extinguishers).
2.3. BRACKET
2.3.1.1. Where cabinet is not identified on drawings, provide approved bracket

mounting for extinguisher.
Architect.

JKA #15-100 10 44 00 - 2
3.1.1. Inspection
commence.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, with cabinet and extinguisher handle
located at maximum 48 inches above finish floor.
3.2.2. Secure rigidly in place.
3.2.3. Inspect, tag, and charge extinguishers not more than ten days nor less than one day
before actual date of Notice of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 10 44 00 - 3
SECTION 12 20 00
WINDOW TREATMENTS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1. Roller shade system
1.2. SUBMITTALS
1.2.1. Submit manufacturers data, samples, and certificates of flammability under the provisions
of Section 01 33 00.
1.2.2. Samples:
1.2.2.1. Provide complete color range of specified product series for Architects color
selection. Submit vertical blind vanes and fabric swatches in 4 x 4 minimum
dimension. Submit horizontal blind colors on manufacturers actual metal
samples.
1.2.2.2. Following selection, provide 3 samples of each selection in size directed by

Architect.
1.2.2.3. Provide drapery hardware assembly, including track and operating system,
mounted as required to demonstrate operation.
1.2.3. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings of all installations, including mounting, relationship
to adjacent materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly methods, joint
details, accessory listings, and schedule of finishes.
1.2.4. Submit California State Fire Marshal certificate of Fire Resistance Listing.
1.3.1. Drapery fabricator: Company specializing in the fabrication of window treatment with 5
1.4.1. Submit California State Fire Marshal Certificate of Flame Resistance Listing.
1.5. DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.5.1. Deliver to and store products on site in conformance with Section 01 60 00.
1.5.2. Do not deliver window treatments until interior finish work is complete and painted surfaces
are fully cured. Do not deliver drapery fabrics until rods are in place and ready for
draperies to be hung.

County of Tehama WINDOW TREATMENTS
JKA #15-100 12 20 00 - 1
2. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
Architect will consider requests for substitutions, under the provisions of Section 01 60 00.
2.2. ROLLER SHADE SYSTEM
2.2.1. Manufacturer: MechoSystems
2.2.2. Series/Style: Mecho/5
2.2.3. Shadecloth
2.2.3.1. Series 0100 Equinox Blackout
2.2.3.2. Fabric Type: PVC-free fiberglass with opaque acrylic backing
2.2.3.3. Stock Width: 98 inches
2.2.3.4. Flame Resistance: Inherently flame resistant, per Title 19, CCR, Division 1,
Chapter 8, complying with NFPA 701.
2.2.3.5. Fade resistant
2.2.3.6. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range of colors.
Architect.
3.1.1. Inspection
commence.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

JKA #15-100 12 20 00 - 2
3.2.2. Securely attach brackets to studs or backing and install level to full length of window frame
or pocket.
3.3.1. Adjust shades to fall without creases or buckles
3.3.2. Clean all treatments of loose thread, lint, and dust.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 12 20 00 - 3
SECTION 21 00 50
BASIC FIRE SPRINKLER MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1 Electric motors.
1.1.2 Motor starters.
1.1.3 Access doors.
1.1.4 Expansion loops.
1.1.5 Insulation.
1.2.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2.2 This Section is part of each Division 21 Section.
1.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 Furnish and install incidental work not shown or specified necessary to provide a
complete and workable system.
1.3.2 Make temporary connections required to maintain services during the course of the
Contract without additional cost to Owner. Notify Owner seven days in advance before
interrupting services.
1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS
1.4.1 Where material or equipment is specified to conform to referenced standards, it shall be

assumed that the most recent edition of the standard in effect at time of bid shall be
used.
1.4.1.1 ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
1.4.1.2 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
1.4.1.3 CCR - California Code of Regulations.
1.4.1.3.1 Title 8 - Division of Industrial Safety, Subchapter 7; General

Industry Safety Orders, Articles 31 through 36.
1.4.1.4 NCPWB - National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau.
1.4.1.5 CEC - California Electrical Code.
1.4.1.6 NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers' Association.

County of Tehama BASIC FIRE SPRINKLER MATERIALS AND METHODS
JKA #15-100 210050 - 1
1.4.1.7 NFPA - National Fire Protection Association, as amended by the CBC.
1.4.1.8 OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act.
1.4.1.9 UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
1.5 DRAWINGS
1.5.1 Examine Contract Documents prior to bidding of Work and report discrepancies in
writing to Architect.
1.5.2 Contractor shall visit Project site and examine existing conditions in order to become
familiar with Project scope. Verify dimensions shown on Drawings at Project site. Bring
discrepancies to the attention of Architect. Failure to examine Project site shall not
constitute basis for claims for additional work because of lack of knowledge or location
of hidden conditions that affect Project scope.
1.5.3 Drawings showing location of equipment and materials are diagrammatic and job
conditions will not always permit installation in location shown. The fire protection
Drawings show general arrangement of equipment and materials, etc., and shall be
followed as closely as existing conditions, actual building construction, and work of other
trades permit.
1.5.3.1 Architectural and structural Drawings are part of the Work. These Drawings
furnish Contractor with information relating to design and construction of the
Project. Architectural Drawings take precedence over fire protection
Drawings.
1.5.3.2 Because of the small scale of fire protection Drawings, not all offsets,
fittings, and accessories required are shown. Investigate structural and
finish conditions affecting the Work and arrange Work accordingly. Provide
offsets, fittings, and accessories required to meet conditions. Inform
Architect immediately when job conditions do not permit installation of
equipment and materials in locations shown. Obtain Architects approval
prior to relocation of equipment and materials.
1.5.3.3 Relocate equipment and materials installed without prior approval of

Architect. Remove and relocate equipment and materials at Contactors
expense upon Architects direction.
1.5.3.4 Minor changes in locations of equipment, piping, ducts, etc., from locations
shown shall be made when directed by the Architect at no additional cost to
the Owner providing such change is ordered before such items of work, or
work directly connected to same are installed and providing no additional
material is required.
1.5.4 Execute work mentioned in Specifications and not shown on Drawings, or vice versa,
the same as if specifically mentioned or shown in both.
1.6 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
1.6.1 The publications listed below form part of this Specification. Comply with provisions of
these publications except as otherwise shown or specified.
1.6.1.1 California Building Code, 2013.
1.6.1.2 California Electrical Code, 2013.

JKA #15-100 210050 - 2
1.6.1.3 California Energy Code, 2013.
1.6.1.4 California Fire Code, 2013.
1.6.1.5 California Green Building Standards Code, 2013.
1.6.1.6 California Mechanical Code, 2013.
1.6.1.7 California Plumbing Code, 2013.
1.6.1.8 California Code of Regulations, Title 24.
1.6.1.9 California Health and Safety Code.
1.6.1.10 CAL-OSHA.
1.6.1.11 California State Fire Marshal, Title 19 CCR.
1.6.1.12 National Fire Protection Association.
1.6.1.13 Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
1.6.1.14 Other applicable state laws.
1.6.2 Nothing in Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming
to these codes, or to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. It is not the intent of
Drawings or Specifications to repeat requirements of codes except where necessary for
clarity.
1.6.3 Comply with State of California 2013 Energy Code for systems, equipment, and
construction.
1.6.4 When Contract Documents differ from governing codes, furnish and install larger size or
higher standards called for without extra charge.
1.6.5 No material installed as part of the Work shall contain asbestos.
1.7 FEES AND PERMITS
1.7.1 Obtain and pay for permits and service required in installation of the Work. Arrange for
required inspections and secure approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Comply
with the requirements of Division 1.
1.7.2 Arrange for utility connections and pay charges incurred, including excess service
charges.
1.8 UTILITY CONNECTIONS
1.8.1 Bear the cost of construction related to utility services, from point of connection to utility
services shown on Contract Documents. This includes piping, excavation, backfill,
meters, boxes, check valves, backflow prevention devices, general service valves,
concrete work, and the like, whether or not Work is performed by Contractor, local
water/sanitation district, public utility, other governmental agencies or agencies assigns.
1.9 FRAMING, CUTTING AND PATCHING

JKA #15-100 210050 - 3
1.9.1 Special framing, recesses, chases and backing for Work of this Section, unless
otherwise specified, are covered under other Specification Sections.
1.9.2 Contractor is responsible for placement of pipe sleeves, hangers, inserts, supports, and
location of openings for the Work.
1.9.3 Cutting, patching, and repairing of existing construction to permit installation of

equipment, and materials is responsibility of Contractor. Repair or replace damage to
existing work with skilled mechanics for each trade.
1.9.4 Cut existing concrete construction with a concrete saw. Do not utilize pneumatic
devices.
1.9.5 Core openings through existing construction for passage of new piping and conduits.
Cut holes of minimum diameter to suit size of pipe and associated insulation installed.
Coordinate with building structure, and obtain Structural Engineer's approval prior to
coring through existing construction.
1.10 SUBMITTALS
1.10.1 Provide submittal of materials proposed for use as part of this Project. Product names in
Specifications and on Drawings are used as standards of quality. Furnish standard
items on specified equipment at no extra cost to the Contract regardless of disposition of
submittal data. Other materials or methods shall not be used unless approved in writing
by Architect. Architect's review will be required even though "or equal" or synonymous
terms are used. Refer to Division 01 for complete instructions.
1.10.1.1 Partial or incomplete submittals will not be reviewed.
1.10.1.2 Quantities are Contractor's responsibility and will not be reviewed.
1.10.1.3 Provide materials of same brand or manufacturer for each class of

equipment or material.
1.10.1.4 Identify each item by manufacturer, brand, trade name, number, size, rating,
or other data necessary to properly identify and review materials and
equipment. Words "as specified" are not sufficient identification.
1.10.1.5 Identify each submittal item by reference to items Specification Section

number and paragraph, by Drawing and detail number, and by unit tag
number.
1.10.1.6 Organize submittals in same sequence as in Specification Sections.
1.10.1.7 Show physical arrangement, construction details, finishes, materials used in

fabrications, provisions for piping entrance, access requirements for
installation and maintenance, physical size, mechanical characteristics,
foundation and support details, and weight.
1.10.1.7.1 Submit shop drawings, performance curves, and other

pertinent data, showing size and capacity of proposed
materials.
1.10.1.7.2 Specifically indicate, by drawn detail or note, that equipment

complies with each specifically stated requirement of
Contract Documents.

JKA #15-100 210050 - 4
1.10.1.7.3 Drawings shall be drawn to scale and dimensioned (except
schematic diagrams). Drawings may be prepared by
vendor but must be submitted as instruments of Contractor,
thoroughly checked and signed by Contractor before
submission to Architect for review.
1.10.1.7.4 Catalog cuts and published material may be included with

supplemental scaled drawings.
1.10.2 Review of submittals will be only for general conformance with design concept and
general compliance with information given in Contract Documents. Review will not
include quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes, construction
methods, coordination with work of other trades, or construction safety precautions,
which are sole responsibility of Contractor. Review of a component of an assembly
does not indicate acceptance of an assembly. Deviations from Contract Documents not
clearly identified by Contractor are Contractors responsibility and will not be reviewed by
Architect.
1.10.3 Within reasonable time after award of contract and in ample time to avoid delay of
construction, submit to Architect shop drawings or submittals on all items of equipment
and materials provided. Provide submittal in at least seven copies and in complete
package.
1.10.3.1 Shop drawings and submittals shall include Specification Section,

Paragraph number, and Contract Drawing unit symbol or detail number for
reference. Organize submittals into booklets for each Specification section
and submit in loose-leaf binders with index. Deviations from Contract
Documents shall be clearly identified and appear at the beginning of
submittal package, and shall be referenced to applicable Contract
Documents requirements.
1.10.4 Provide layouts for fire protection systems, for inclusion in coordinated layout specified
in Section 23 80 00. Comply with requirements for layouts specified in Section 23 80 00.
1.10.5 Provide coordination drawings for fire protection systems in accordance with the
requirements of Specification Section 21 10 00.
1.10.6 Furnish to Project Inspector complete installation instructions on material and equipment
before starting installation.
1.10.7 Product Data for California Green Building Standards Code Compliance: For adhesives
and sealants, including primers, documentation of compliance including printed
statement of VOC content and chemical components.
1.10.8 Pipe, pipe or plumbing fittings, fixtures, solder and flux installed in a system providing
water for human consumption shall comply with lead free requirements of the California
Health and Safety Code Section 116875. Provide submittal information for products
third-party certified by an approved laboratory as complying with California Health and
Safety Code Section 116875.
1.10.9 Delegated-Design Submittal: For supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints indicated
to comply with performance requirements and design criteria.
1.10.9.1 Calculations performed for use in selection of supports, anchorages, and

seismic restraints shall utilize criteria indicated in Structural Contract
Documents.

JKA #15-100 210050 - 5
1.10.9.2 Supports, anchorage and seismic restraints for piping and equipment shall
be an OSHPD pre-approved system such as Tolco, Afcon, ISAT, Badger,
Mason, or equal. Pipes and equipment shall be seismically restrained in
accordance with requirements of current edition of California Building Code
and NFPA 13. System shall have current OPA number and shall meet
additional requirements of authority having jurisdiction. Provide supporting
documentation required by the reviewing authority and the Architect and
Engineer. Provide layout drawings showing piping, ductwork and restraint
locations.
1.10.9.2.1 Bracing of Piping and Equipment: Specifically state how

bracing attachment to structure is accomplished. Provide
shop drawings indicating seismic restraints, including details
of anchorage to building. In-line equipment must be braced
independently of piping, and in conformance with applicable
building codes. Provide calculations to show that pre-
approval numbers have been correctly applied in
accordance with general information notes of pre-approval
documentation.
1.10.9.3 In lieu of the above or for non-standard installations not covered in the
above pre-approved systems, Contractor shall provide layout drawings
showing piping, equipment, and seismic restraint locations, and detailing
supports, attachments and restraints, and furnish supporting calculations
and legible details sealed by a California registered structural engineer, in
accordance with California Building Code and NFPA 13.
1.10.9.4 Additional Requirements: In addition to the above, conform to State and

local requirements.
1.11 SUBSTITUTIONS
1.11.1 Refer to Division 01 for complete instructions. Requirements given below are in addition
to or are intended to amplify Division 1 requirements. In case of conflict between
requirements given in this Section and those of Division 01, Division 01 requirements
shall apply.
1.11.2 It is the responsibility of Contractor to assume costs incurred because of additional work
and or changes required to incorporate proposed substitute into the Project. Refer to
Division 01 for complete instructions.
1.11.3 Substitutions will be interpreted to be manufacturers other than those specifically listed
in Contract Documents by brand name, model, or catalog number.
1.11.4 Only one request for substitution will be considered for each item of equipment or
material.
1.11.5 Substitution requests shall include the following:
1.11.5.1 Reason for substitution request.
1.11.5.2 Complete submittal information as described herein; see Submittals.
1.11.5.3 Coordinated scale layout drawings depicting position of substituted

equipment in relation to other work, with required clearances for operation,
maintenance and replacement.

JKA #15-100 210050 - 6
1.11.5.4 List optional features required for substituted equipment to meet functional
requirements of the system as indicated in Contract Documents.
1.11.5.5 Explanation of impact on connected utilities.
1.11.5.6 Explanation of impact on structural supports.
1.11.6 Installation of reviewed substitution is Contractors responsibility. Any mechanical,

electrical, structural, or other changes required for installation of substituted equipment
or material must be made by Contractor without additional cost to Owner. Review by
Architect of substituted equipment or material, will not waive these requirements.
1.11.7 Contractor may be required to compensate Architect for costs related to substituted
1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.12.1 Instruct Owner's authorized representatives in operation, adjustment, and maintenance

of mechanical equipment and systems. Provide three copies of certificate signed by
Owner's representatives confirming that instruction is completed.
1.12.2 Furnish three complete sets of Operating and Maintenance Manual bound in hardboard
binder, and one compact disc containing complete Operating and Maintenance Manual
in searchable PDF format. Provide Table of Contents. Provide index tabs for each
piece of equipment in binder and disc. Start compiling data upon approval of submittals.
1.12.2.1 Sets shall incorporate the following:
1.12.2.1.1 Service telephone number, address and contact person for

each category of equipment or system.
1.12.2.1.2 Complete operating instructions for each item of fire

sprinkler system.
Original manual of NFPA-25 for fire

sprinkler system.
1.12.2.1.3 Copies of guarantees/warrantees for each item of

equipment or systems.
1.12.2.1.4 Test data as specified.
1.12.2.1.5 Typewritten maintenance instructions for each item of

equipment listing lubricants to be used, frequency of
lubrication, inspections required, adjustment, etc.
1.12.2.1.6 Manufacturers' bulletins with parts numbers, instructions,

etc., for each item of equipment.
1.12.2.1.7 Check test and start reports for each piece of fire protection
equipment provided as part of the Work.
1.12.2.1.8 Commissioning and Preliminary Operation Tests required

as part of the Work.
1.12.3 Post service telephone numbers and addresses in an appropriate place designated by
Architect.
JKA #15-100 210050 - 7
1.13 SITE CONDITIONS
1.13.1 Information on Drawings relative to existing conditions is approximate. Deviations from

Drawings necessary during progress of construction to conform to actual conditions shall
be approved by Architect and shall be made without additional cost to Owner. The
Contractor shall be held responsible for damage caused to existing services. Promptly
notify Architect if services are found which are not shown on Drawings.
1.14 EXISTING MATERIALS
1.14.1 Remove existing equipment, piping, wiring, construction, etc., which interferes with Work
of this Contract. Promptly return to service upon completion of work in the area.
Replace items damaged by Contractor with new material to match existing.
1.14.2 Removed materials which will not be re-installed and which are not claimed by Owner
shall become property of Contractor and shall be removed from Project site. Consult
Owner before removing any material from Project site. Carefully remove materials
claimed by Owner to prevent damage and deliver to Owner-designated storage location.
1.14.3 Existing piping and wiring not reused and are concealed in building construction may be
abandoned in place and all ends shall be capped or plugged. Remove unused piping
and wiring exposed in Equipment Rooms or occupied spaces. Material shall be
removed from Project premises. Disconnect power, water, gas, pump or any other
active energy source from piping or electrical service prior to abandoning in place.
1.14.4 Existing piping and equipment modified or altered as part of this Work shall comply with
the most recent applicable code requirements.
1.15 WARRANTY
1.15.1 Refer to Division 01 for warranty requirements, including effective date of warranty.
Refer to specific items of equipment specified herein for warranty duration if different
from that specified in Division 01.
1.15.2 Repair or replace defective work, material, or part that appears within warranty period,
including damage caused by leaks.
1.15.3 On failure to comply with warranty requirements within a reasonable length of time after
notification is given, Architect/Owner shall have repairs made at Contractor's expense.
1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS
1.16.1 Refer to Division 01, Record Documents, for requirements governing Work specified
herein.
1.16.2 Upon completion of the Work and as precedent to final payment, deliver to Architect the
following:
1.16.2.1 Originals of drawings showing the Work exactly as installed.
1.16.2.2 One complete set of reproducible drawings showing the Work exactly as
installed.
1.16.2.3 One compact disc with complete set of drawings in PDF format showing the
Work exactly as installed.
1.16.2.4 Provide Contractors signature, verifying accuracy of record drawings.

JKA #15-100 210050 - 8
1.16.3 Obtain signature of Project Inspector for record drawings.
1.17 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
1.17.1 Protect equipment and materials delivered to Project site from weather, humidity and
temperature variations, dirt, dust and other contaminants.
1.18 COORDINATION
1.18.1 General:
1.18.1.1 Coordinate Work in this Section with trades covered in other Specification
Sections to provide a complete and operable installation of highest quality
workmanship.
1.18.2 Electrical Coordination:
1.18.2.1 Refer to the Electrical Drawings and Specifications, Division 26, for service
voltage and power feed wiring for equipment specified in this Section.
Contractor has full responsibility for the following items of work:
1.18.2.1.1 Review the Electrical Drawings and Division 26

Specifications to verify that electrical services provided are
adequate and compatible with equipment requirements.
1.18.2.1.2 If additional electrical services are required above that

indicated on Electrical Drawings and in Division 26, such as
more control interlock conductors, larger feeder, or separate
120 volt control power source, include cost to furnish and
install additional electrical services as part of bid.
1.18.2.1.3 Prior to proceeding with installation of additional electrical

work, submit detailed drawings indicating exact scope of
additional electrical work.
1.18.3 Mechanical Coordination:
1.18.3.1 Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots and openings in building structure
during progress of construction, to accommodate mechanical system
installation.
1.18.3.2 Coordinate installation of supporting devices. Set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components during progress of construction.
1.18.3.3 Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items
requiring access where concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels
and doors are specified in Division 08 Section Access Doors and Frames.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Materials or equipment of the same type shall be of the same brand wherever possible.
All materials shall be new and in first class condition.
2.1.2 All sizes, capacities, and efficiency ratings shown are minimum.

JKA #15-100 210050 - 9
2.1.3 Refer to Section 21 10 00 for specific system piping materials.
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 California Green Building Code Compliance:
2.2.1.1 Fire protection equipment shall not contain CFCs.
2.2.1.2 Fire protection equipment shall not contain Halons.
2.3 ELECTRIC MOTORS
2.3.1 U.S. Motors, Century Electric, General Electric, Lincoln, Gould or equal. Minimum
efficiencies shall be as defined by IEEE 112 Test Method B and NEMA MG1. Provide
NEMA 3R enclosure where exposed to outdoors.
2.4 MOTOR STARTERS
2.4.1 Square D, Allen Bradley, or equal, in NEMA Type 1 enclosure, unless otherwise
specified or required. Minimum starter size shall be Size 1. Provide NEMA 3R
enclosure where exposed to outdoors.
2.4.2 Where three phase motors are provided for two-speed operation, provide two speed
motor starters.
2.4.2.1 All three-phase starters shall have the following:
2.4.2.1.1 Provide magnetic motor starters for equipment provided

under the fire protection Work. Starters shall be non-
combination type. Provide part winding or reduced voltage
start motors where shown or as hereinafter specified.
Minimum size starter shall be Size 1.
2.4.2.1.2 Cover mounted hand-off-automatic switch. Starters

installed exposed in occupied spaces shall have key
operated HOA switch.
2.4.2.1.3 Three ambient compensated thermal overload.
2.4.2.1.4 Fused control transformer (for 120 or 24 volt service).
2.4.2.1.5 Pilot lights, integral with starters. Starters located outdoors

shall be installed in NEMA IIIR enclosures.
2.5 ACCESS DOORS
2.5.1 Where floors, walls, or ceilings must be penetrated for access to fire protection
equipment or devices, provide access doors, 14 inch by 14 inch minimum size in usable
opening. Where entrance of a serviceman may be required, provide 20 inch by 30 inch
minimum usable opening. Locate access doors/panels for non-obstructed and easy
reach.
2.5.1.1 Access doors less than 7'-0" above floors and exposed to public access
shall have keyed locks.
2.5.2 Access doors shall match those supplied in Division 08, except as noted in this Section.

JKA #15-100 210050 - 10
2.5.3 Provide stainless steel access doors for use in toilet rooms, shower rooms, kitchens and
other damp areas. Provide steel access doors with prime coat of baked-on paint for
other areas.
2.5.4 Do not locate access doors in highly visible public areas such as lobbies, waiting areas,
and primary entrance areas. Coordinate with Architect when access is required in these
areas.
2.5.5 Where specific information or details relating to access panels different from the above
is shown or given on Drawings or other Divisions of work, that information shall
supersede this specification.
2.5.6 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products which may be incorporated into the Work include Milcor, Karp,
Nystrom, or Cesco, equal to the following:
2.5.6.1 Milcor:
2.5.6.1.1 Style K (plaster).
2.5.6.1.2 Style DW (gypsum board).
2.5.6.1.3 Style M (masonry).
2.5.6.1.4 Style "Fire Rated where required.
2.6 EXPANSION LOOPS
2.6.1 Manufactured assembly consisting of inlet and outlet elbow fittings, two sections of
flexible metal hose and braid, and 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible
hose. Flexible hose shall consist of corrugated metal inner hose and braided outer
sheath.

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following, or equal:
Metraflex Inc., Fireloop series.
Unisource Manufacturing, Inc., V series.
2.7 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
2.7.1 Identify each piping system and indicate the direction of flow by means of Seton, Inc.,
Marking Services Inc., Reef Industries, Inc., or equal, pre-tensioned, coiled semi-rigid
plastic pipe labels formed to circumference of pipe, requiring no fasteners or adhesive
for attachment to pipe.
2.7.2 The legends and flow arrows shall conform to ASME A13.1.
2.8 INSULATION WORK
2.8.1 General:
2.8.1.1 Adhesives shall comply with testing and product requirements of South
Coast Air Quality Management District, Rule 1168.
2.8.1.2 The term "piping" used herein includes pipe, valves and fittings.
JKA #15-100 210050 - 11
2.8.1.2.1 Apply insulating cement to fittings, valves and strainers and
trowel smooth to equal the thickness of adjacent covering.
Cover with jacket to match piping. Extend covering on
valves up to bonnet. Leave strainer cleanout plugs
accessible.
2.8.1.2.2 Provide pre-formed PVC valve and fitting covers.
2.8.1.2.3 Provide Calcium Silicate rigid insulation and sheet metal

sleeve, 18 inch minimum length at each pipe hanger. Seal
ends of insulation to make vapor tight with jacket.
2.8.1.3 Test insulation, jackets, and lap-seal adhesives as a composite product and
confirm flame spread of not more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of
not more than 50 when tested in accordance with UL723, ASTM E84, or
NFPA 255.
2.8.1.4 Clean thoroughly, test and have approved, piping and equipment before
installing insulation and/or covering.
2.8.1.5 Repair damage to existing pipe insulation whether or not caused during
Work of the Contract, to match existing adjacent insulation for thickness and
finish, but conforming to flame spread and smoke ratings specified above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION
3.1.1 Refer to Division 01 Sections Cutting and Patching and/or Selective Demolition for
general demolition requirements and procedures.
3.1.2 Disconnect, dismantle and remove fire protection systems, equipment, and components
indicated to be removed. Coordinate with all other trades.
3.1.2.1 Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed

and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
3.1.2.2 Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping to
remain with same or compatible piping material.
3.1.2.3 Equipment to Be Removed: Drain down and cap remaining services and
remove equipment.
3.1.2.4 Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services

and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall,
reconnect, and make equipment operational.
3.1.2.5 Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services

and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
3.1.3 If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is

unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new
products of equal capacity and quality.
3.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

JKA #15-100 210050 - 12
3.2.1 Provide adequate working space around electrical equipment in compliance with the
California Electrical Code. Coordinate the fire protection Work with the electrical Work to
comply.
3.2.2 Furnish necessary control diagrams and instructions for controls. Before permitting
operation of equipment which is furnished, installed, or modified under this Section,
Contractor shall review associated electrical work, including overload protection devices,
and assume complete responsibility for correctness of electrical connections and
protective devices. Motors and control equipment shall conform to the Standards of the
National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. Equipment and connections exposed to
weather shall be installed in NEMA IIIR enclosures with factory wired strip heaters in
each starter enclosure and temperature control panel where required to inhibit
condensation.
3.2.3 All line voltage and low voltage wiring and conduit associated with fire protection system
are included in this Section. Wiring and conduit shall comply with Division 26.
3.2.4 Electric Motors:
3.2.4.1 Motors shall be rated for continuous operation at 115% of nameplate

amperage but shall be selected to operate at less than nameplate amperage
throughout entire operating cycle. Motors found to exceed nameplate
amperage shall be promptly replaced at no cost to Owner. Horsepower
shown is minimum and shall be increased as necessary to comply with
above requirements. Furnish motors with splash-proof or weatherproof
housings, where required or recommended by motor manufacturer. Match
the nameplate voltage rating with electrical service supplied. Check
electrical Drawings. Provide transformer for each motor not wound
specifically for system voltage.
3.2.5 Motor Starters:
3.2.5.1 Provide magnetic motor starters for equipment provided under the fire
protection Work. Starters shall be non-combination type. Provide
part-winding or reduced voltage start motors on motors 50 HP and larger,
or where shown or as hereinafter specified. Minimum size starter shall be
Size 1. Three-phase starters shall have the following:
3.2.5.1.1 Cover-mounted hand-off-automatic switch. Starters

3.2.5.1.2 Three ambient compensated thermal overload.
3.2.5.1.4 Pilot lights, integral with the starters. Starters located

outdoors shall be in NEMA IIIR enclosures.
3.2.5.2 Starters for single-phase motors shall have thermal overloads,

Westinghouse Type MSTOLSLIP, Square D, or equal, toggle-operated with
pilot light, NEMA I enclosure for starters located indoors, NEMA IIIR
enclosure for starters located outdoors.
3.2.5.3 Provide OSHA label indicating that the device starts automatically.
3.3 PIPING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

JKA #15-100 210050 - 13
3.3.1 Drawing plans, schematic and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as
indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
3.4 PRIMING AND PAINTING
3.4.1 Perform all priming and painting on the equipment and materials as specified herein.
3.4.2 Priming:
3.4.2.1 Exposed ferrous metals, including piping, which are not galvanized or
factory-finished shall be primed. Black steel pipe exposed to weather shall
be painted one coat of Rust-Oleum #1069 primer for black steel piping or
Rust-Oleum #5260, Kelly Moore, or equal, primer for galvanized piping.
3.4.2.2 Metal surfaces of items to be jacketed or insulated except piping shall be

given two coats of primer unless furnished with equivalent factory finish.
Items to be primed shall be properly cleaned by effective means free of rust,
dirt, scale, grease and other deleterious matter and then primed with the
highest grade zinc rich primer. After erection or installation, primed surfaces
shall be properly cleaned of foreign or deleterious matter that might impair
proper bonding of subsequent paint coatings. Abrasion or other damage to
shop or field prime coat shall be properly repaired and touched up with
same material used for original priming.
3.4.2.3 Where equipment is provided with nameplate data, the nameplate shall be
masked off prior to painting. When painting is completed, remove masking
material.
3.4.3 See Painting Section for detailed requirements.
3.5 EXCAVATING
3.5.1 Perform excavating required for Work of this Section. Provide the services of a
pipe/cable locating service prior to excavating activities to determine location of existing
utilities.
3.5.2 Unless shown otherwise, provide 3 foot minimum cover for fire piping, or 1 foot below
frost line, whichever results in deepest installation. Trim trench bottom by hand or
provide a 4 inch deep minimum bed of sand to provide a uniform grade and firm support
throughout entire length of pipe. For PVC pipe, bed pipe in 4 inch deep minimum sand
bed. Pipe bedding materials should be clean crushed rock, gravel or sand of which 100
percent will pass a 1 inch sieve. For pipes that are larger than 10 inches in diameter, at
least 95 percent should pass a 3/4 inch sieve, and for pipes 10 inches in diameter or
smaller, 100 percent should pass a 1/2 inch sieve. Other materials should have
minimum sand equivalent of 50. Only a small proportion of native soils will meet these
requirements without extensive processing; therefore, importation of pipe bedding
materials should be anticipated. Pipe bedding materials shall be compacted in lifts not
exceeding 6 inches in compacted thickness. Each lift shall be compacted to not less
than 90 percent relative compaction at or above the optimum moisture content, in
accordance with ASTM Specification D2940, except that bedding materials graded such
that less than 100 percent will pass a No. 200 sieve shall be compacted in 6 inch lifts
using a single pass of a flat-plate, vibratory compactor or vibratory drum. Pipe bedding
materials should extend at least to the spring line.
3.5.3 Maintain warning signs, barricades, flares, and red lanterns as required.
JKA #15-100 210050 - 14
3.5.4 For trenches 5 feet or more in depth, submit copy of permit, and detailed drawings
showing shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for worker protection
from hazard of caving ground during excavation of such trenches. Obtain a permit from
Division of Industrial Safety prior to beginning excavations. A copy of permit shall be
available at the Project site.
3.6 BACKFILLING
3.6.1 Backfill shall comply with applicable provisions of Division 31 of these Specifications.
3.6.2 Except under existing or proposed paved areas, walks, roads, or similar surfaces,
backfill for other types of pipe shall be made using suitable excavated material or other
approved material. Place backfill in 8 inch layers, measured before compaction, and
compact with impact hammer to at least 90 percent relative compaction per ASTM
D2940.
3.6.2.1 Backfill plastic pipe and insulated pipe with sand for minimum distance of 12
inches above the top of pipe. Compact using mechanical tamping
equipment.
3.6.3 Entire backfill for excavations under existing or proposed pavements, walks, roads, or
similar surfaces, under new slabs on grade, shall be made with clean sand compacted
with mechanical tamping equipment vibrator to at least 90 percent relative compaction
per ASTM D2940. Remove excess earth. Increase minimum compaction within
uppermost two feet of backfill to 95 percent.
3.6.4 Replace or repair to its original condition sod, concrete, asphalt paving, or other
materials disturbed by trenching operation. Repair within warranty period.
3.6.5 Thrust Blocks:
3.6.5.1 Provide concrete anchors or thrust blocks on PVC and cast iron water lines
installed underground. Install thrust blocks at changes in direction and at
connections to mains 1-1/2 inches and larger. Form thrust blocks by
pouring concrete between pipes and trench wall. Thrust blocks shall be
adequate in size and placed to take thrusts created by the maximum internal
water pressure; sizing and placement shall be per manufacturer's
recommendations and in accordance with requirements of NFPA 24.
3.6.5.2 Anchor piping to building construction.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
3.7.1 At time of final connection, and prior to opening valve to allow pressurization of water
piping from existing systems, on site or off site, perform a pressure test to indicate static
pressure of existing systems. If pressure on fire protection piping is greater than 175
psi, inform Architect immediately. Do not allow piping systems to be pressurized without
written consent of the Architect.
3.7.2 General:
3.7.2.1 Piping shall be concealed unless shown or otherwise directed. Allow

sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
3.7.2.2 Installation of piping shall be made with appropriate fittings. Bending of

piping will not be accepted.

JKA #15-100 210050 - 15
3.7.2.3 Install piping to permit application of insulation where required and to allow
valve servicing.
3.7.2.4 Where piping or conduit is left exposed within a room, the piping or conduit
shall be run true to vertical, horizontal, or intended planes. Where possible,
uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and/or adjacent
wall, floor, or ceiling surfaces.
3.7.2.5 Horizontal runs of pipes and/or electrical conduit suspended from ceilings
shall provide for maximum headroom clearance. The clearance shall not be
less than 6'-6" without written approval from Architect.
3.7.2.6 Close ends of pipe immediately after installation. Leave closure in place
until removal is necessary for completion of installation.
3.7.2.7 Each piping system shall be thoroughly flushed and proved clean before
connection to equipment.
3.7.2.8 Install exposed polished or enameled connections with special care showing
no tool marks or threads at fittings.
3.7.2.9 Install horizontal valves with valve stem above horizontal.
3.7.2.10 Use reducing fittings; bushings shall not be allowed. Use eccentric reducing
fittings wherever necessary to provide free drainage of lines and passage of
air.
3.7.2.11 Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
3.7.2.12 Service Markers: Mark location of each plugged or capped pipe with 4 inch
round by 30 inch long concrete marker, set flush with finished grade.
Provide 2-1/2 inch diameter engraved brass plate as part of service marker.
3.7.2.13 Where piping is installed in walls within one inch of face of stud, provide 16
gauge sheet metal shield plate on face of stud. The shield plate shall
extend minimum 1-1/2 inches beyond outside diameter of pipe.
3.7.3 Expansion Loops:
3.7.3.1 Install expansion loops where piping crosses building expansion or seismic
joints, between buildings, between buildings and canopies, and as indicated
on Drawings.
3.7.3.2 Install expansion loops of sizes matching sizes of connected piping.
3.7.3.3 Install grooved-joint expansion joints to grooved-end steel piping.
3.7.3.4 Materials of construction and end fitting type shall be consistent with pipe
material and type of gas or liquid conveyed by piping system in which
expansion loop is installed.
3.7.4 Sleeves:
3.7.4.1 Install AMI Products, Adjus-to-Crete, Pipeline Seal and Insulator, or equal,
pipe sleeves of sufficient size to allow for free motion of pipe, 24 gauge
galvanized steel. The space between pipe and sleeves through floor slabs
on ground, through outside walls above or below grade, through roof, and
JKA #15-100 210050 - 16
other locations, as directed, shall be caulked with oakum and mastic and
made watertight. The space between pipe and sleeve and between sleeve
and slab or wall shall be sealed watertight.
3.7.4.2 At Contractor's option, Link-Seal, Metraflex Metraseal, or equal, casing

seals may be used in lieu of caulking. Wrap pipes through slabs on grade
with 1 inch thick fiberglass insulation to completely isolate pipe from
concrete.
3.7.5 Floor, Wall, and Ceiling Plates:
3.7.5.1 Fit pipes, with or without insulation, passing through walls, floors, or ceilings,
and hanger rods penetrating finished ceilings with chrome-plated or
stainless escutcheon plates.
3.7.6 Firestopping:
3.7.6.1 Pack annular space between pipe sleeves and pipe through floors and walls
with UL listed fire stop, and seal at ends. Pipe penetrations shall be UL
listed, Hilti, 3M Pro-Set, or equal.
3.7.6.1.1 Install fire caulking behind fire protection services installed

within fire rated walls, to maintain continuous rating of wall
construction.
3.7.6.2 Provide SpecSeal Systems UL fire rated sleeve/coupling penetrators, or

equal, for each pipe penetration or fixture opening passing through floors,
walls, partitions or floor/ceiling assemblies. Penetrators shall comply with
UL Fire Resistance Directory (Latest Edition), and with Chapter 7, CBC
requirements.
3.7.6.3 Sleeve penetrators shall have built in anchor ring for waterproofing and
anchoring into concrete pours or use special fit cored hole penetrator for
cored holes.
3.7.6.4 Copper and steel piping shall have SpecSeal plugs, or equal on both sides
of penetrator to reduce noise and to provide waterproofing.
3.7.6.5 All above systems to be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
3.7.6.6 Alternate firestopping systems are acceptable if approved as equal.

Contractor is responsible for determining suitability of alternate products for
their intended use, and shall assume all risks and liabilities in connection
with the use of alternate products.
3.7.7 Hangers and Supports:
3.7.7.1 General: Support equipment and piping so that it is firmly held in place by
approved iron hangers and supports and special hangers as required.
Hangers and supports shall be UL listed for fire protection service.
Components shall support weight of equipment, pipe, fluid, and pipe
insulation based on spacing between supports with minimum factor of safety
of five based on ultimate strength of material used. Do not exceed
manufacturer's load rating. Pipe attachments or hangers, shall be of same
size as pipe or tubing on which used, or nearest size available. Architect
shall approve hanger material before installation. Do not support piping with
JKA #15-100 210050 - 17
plumbers' tape, wire rope, wood, or other makeshift devices. Where
building structural members do not match piping support spacing, provide
trapeze (bridging) support members attached to building structural
members by methods approved by structural Engineer.
3.7.7.1.1 Materials, design, and type numbers per Manufacturers'

Standardization Society (MSS), Standard Practice (SP)-58.
3.7.7.2 Hanger components shall be provided by one manufacturer. B-Line,

Grinnell, Tolco, Afcon, Loos & Co., Uni-Strut, or equal.
3.7.7.3 Hanger and Supports:
3.7.7.3.1 Vertical Piping: Tolco Fig. 6, or equal, clamps attached to

pipe above each floor to rest on floor. Provide intermediate
support for vertical piping greater than 25 feet in length.
3.7.7.3.2 Individually Suspended Piping: Tolco Fig. 200 or Fig. 1

Clevis, complete with threaded rod, or equal.
Pipe Size Rod Size
4" and Smaller 3/8"
5" to 6" 5/8"
3.7.7.3.3 Trapeze Suspension: Sch-10 or Sch-40 steel pipe trapeze

member in accordance with NFPA 13- published load
ratings.
3.7.7.3.4 Pipe Clamps and Straps: B-Line B2000 or B2400, Tolco,

Fig. 200 or Fig. 1, or equal. Where used for seismic support
systems, provide B-line B2400, Tolco fig. 69 series retainer
pipe straps, or equal.
3.7.7.3.5 Concrete Inserts: B-line B221 continuous insert or B2500

spot insert, or equal. Do not use actuated fasteners for
support of overhead piping unless approved by Architect.
3.7.7.3.6 Steel Connectors: Tolco Fig. 65 beam clamps with Fig. 69

retainer straps, or equal.
3.7.7.3.7 Deck Connectors: Afcon Fig. 610 steel ceiling plate, or

equal, where approved by structural Engineer.
3.7.7.4 Support to Structure:
3.7.7.4.1 Wood Structure: Provide and install wood blocking as

required to suit structure. Provide lag screws or through
bolts with length to suit requirements, and with size
(diameter) to match the size of hanger rods required.
Do not install Lag screws in tension without

written review and acceptance by Structural
Engineer.

JKA #15-100 210050 - 18
Side Beam Angle Clip B-Line B3062 MSS Type 34
Side Beam Angle Clip B-Line B3060
Ceiling Flange B-Line B3199
Blocking for support of piping shall be not

less than 2 inch thick for piping up to 2 inch
size. Provide 3 inch blocking for piping up
through 5 inch size, and 4 inch blocking for
larger piping. Provide support for blocking
in accordance with Structural Engineers
requirements.
Where lag screws are used, length of screw

shall be 1/2 inch less than the wood
blocking. Pre-drill starter holes for each lag
screw.
3.7.7.4.2 Steel Structure: Provide and install additional steel bracing

as required to suit structure. Provide through bolts with
length to suit requirements of structural components.
Burning or welding on structural member may only be done
if approved by Architect.
3.7.7.5 Pipe hanger and support spacing: Locate hangers and supports at each
change of direction, within one foot of elbow, and spaced per NFPA 13, and
per pipe manufacturer's listing, except as noted below.
3.7.7.6 Provide rigid insulation and a 12 inch long, 18 gauge galvanized sheet iron
shield between the covering and the hanger whenever hangers are installed
on the outside of the pipe covering.
3.7.7.7 Insulate copper piping from ferrous materials and hangers with two layers of
3 inch wide, 10 mil polyvinyl tape wrapped around pipe.
3.7.7.8 Provide a support or hanger close to each change of direction of pipe either
horizontal or vertical and as near as possible to concentrated loads.
3.7.7.9 Suspend rods from concrete inserts with removable nuts where suspended
from concrete decks. Power actuated inserts will not be allowed.
3.8 UNIONS AND FLANGES
3.8.1 Install Watts, Epco, Nibco, or equal, dielectric unions or flanges at points of connection
between copper or brass piping or material and steel pipe or material. Bushings or
couplings shall not be used.
3.8.2 Install unions in piping NPS 2 and smaller and flanges in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger
whether shown or not at each connection to equipment and tanks, and at connections to
automatic valves.
3.8.3 Locate unions for easy removal of equipment, tanks, or valves.
3.9 ACCESS DOOR

JKA #15-100 210050 - 19
3.9.1 Furnish and install access doors wherever required whether shown or not for easy
maintenance of fire protection systems. Access doors shall provide for complete
removal and replacement of equipment.
3.10 CONCRETE WORK
3.10.1 Concrete work required for Work of this Section shall be included under another section
of the Specification, unless otherwise noted, including reinforced concrete bases for
pumps, tanks, compressors unless the work is specifically indicated on Drawings to be
furnished under this Section.
3.10.2 Thrust blocks, underground anchors, and pads for cleanouts, valve access boxes and
washer boxes are included under this Section of the Specifications. Concrete shall be
3000 psi test minimum. Refer to Division 03 for concrete types.
3.11.1 Provide temporary identification of each pipe installed, at time of installation. Temporary
identification shall be removed and replaced with permanent identification as part of the
Work.
3.11.2 Apply legend and flow arrow at valve locations; at points where piping enters or leaves a
wall, partition, cluster of piping or similar obstruction, at each change of direction, and at
approximately 20'-0" intervals on pipe runs. Variations or changes in locations and
spacing may be made with approval of Architect. There shall be at least one marking in
each room. Markings shall be located for maximum visibility from expected personnel
approach.
3.11.3 Wherever two or more pipes run parallel, markings shall be supplied in the same relative
location on each.
3.11.4 Apply markings after painting and cleaning of piping and insulation is completed.
3.12 EXPANSION ANCHORS IN HARDENED CONCRETE:
3.12.1 Refer to Structural Drawings.
3.13 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
3.13.1 Test installations in accordance with the following requirements and all applicable codes:
3.13.1.1 Project Inspector should witness tests of piping systems.
3.13.1.2 Notify Architect at least seven days in advance of tests.
3.13.1.3 Notify local fire department of time and date of fire systems testing.
3.13.1.4 Piping shall be tested at completion of roughing-in, or at other times as

directed by Architect.
3.13.1.5 Furnish necessary materials, test pumps, gases, instruments and labor
required for testing.
3.13.1.6 Isolate from system equipment that may be damaged by test pressure.
3.13.1.7 Make connections to existing systems with flanged connection. During

testing of new work, provide a slip-in plate to restrict test pressure to new
JKA #15-100 210050 - 20
systems only. Remove plate and complete connection to existing system at
completion of testing.
3.13.1.7.1 Project Inspector shall witness final connection to system.
3.13.2 Test Schedule: No loss in pressure or visible leaks shall show after four hours at
pressures indicated:
System Tested Test Pressure PSI Test With
Fire Sprinkler Piping 200 Water
3.13.2.1 Piping, including underground piping, connected to fire sprinkler system

shall be tested and certified in accordance with NFPA requirements, except
where requirements listed in this Section exceed requirements of NFPA.
3.13.3 Should material or work fail in any of these tests, it shall be immediately removed and
replaced with new material, and portion of work replaced shall again be tested by
Contractor at his own expense.
3.13.4 Lubricate each item of equipment, including motors, before operation.
3.14 TRACER WIRES
3.14.1 Provide tracer wire for non-metallic water pipe in ground outside of buildings. Use AWG
#12 tracer wire with blue colored low density high molecular weight polyethylene
insulation, and lay continuously on pipe so that it is not broken or stressed by backfilling
operations. Secure wire to the piping with tape at 18 inch intervals. Solder all joints.
3.14.2 Terminals: Precast concrete box and cast iron locking traffic cover, Brooks 3TL, or
equal; cover marked with name of service; 6 inches of loose gravel below box. Plastic
terminal board with brass bolts; identify line direction with plastic tags. Test for continuity
between terminals, after backfilling, in presence of Inspector.
3.14.3 Alternate: (use of this alternate material requires approval of authority having
jurisdiction): Use electronically detectable plastic tape with metallic core, Terra Tape D,
manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc., Seton, Inc., Marking Services, Inc., or equal; tape
2 inches wide, continuously imprinted "CAUTION WATER LINE BELOW". Install, with
printed side up, directly over pipe, 18 inches below finish grade. Backfill material shall
be as previously specified for the particular condition where pipe is installed, but avoid
use of crushed rock or of earth with particles larger than l/2 inch within the top 12 inches
of backfill. Take precautions to insure that tape is not damaged or misplaced during
backfill operations. Terminal boxes not required.
3.15 CHECK, TEST AND START REQUIREMENTS
3.15.1 An authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer shall perform check, test
and start of each piece of fire protection equipment. The representative may be an
employee of the equipment manufacturer, or a manufacturer-certified contractor. Submit
written certification from the manufacturer stating that the representative is qualified to
perform the check test and start of the equipment.
3.15.1.1 As part of the submittal process, provide a copy of each manufacturers

printed startup form to be used.

JKA #15-100 210050 - 21
3.15.1.2 Some items of specified equipment may require that check, test and start of
equipment must be performed by the manufacturer, using manufacturers
employees. See specific equipment Articles in these Specifications for this
requirement.
3.15.1.3 Provide all personnel, test instruments, and equipment to properly perform
the check, test and start work.
3.15.1.4 When work has been completed, provide copies of reports for review, prior
to final observation of work.
3.15.2 Provide copies of the completed check, test and start report of each item of equipment,
bound with the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
3.15.3 Upon completion of the work, provide a schedule of planned maintenance for each piece
of equipment. Indicate frequency of service, recommended spare parts and methods for
adjustment and alignment of all equipment components. Provide a copy of the schedule
with each operating and maintenance manual. Provide a copy of certification from the
Owners representative indicating that they have been properly instructed in
maintenance requirements for the equipment installed.
3.16 COMMISSIONING AND PRELIMINARY OPERATIONAL TESTS
3.16.1 Prior to observation to determine final acceptance, put fire protection systems into
service and check that work required has been done, including but not limited to the
following condensed check list. Provide indexed report to tabulating the results of tests.
3.16.1.1 Equipment has been started, checked, lubricated and adjusted in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.16.1.2 Correct rotation of motors and ratings of overload heaters are verified.
3.16.1.3 All manufacturers certificates of start-up specified have been delivered to

Owner.
3.16.1.4 All equipment has been cleaned, and damaged painted finishes touched up.
3.16.1.5 Missing or damaged parts have been replaced.
3.16.1.6 Flushing of piping systems has been completed and water treatment
equipment, where specified, is completed.
3.16.1.7 Equipment labels, pipe marker labels, ceiling markers and valve tags are
installed.
3.16.1.8 Valve tag schedules, corrected control diagrams, sequence of operation lists
and start-stop instructions have been posted.
3.16.1.9 Maintenance manuals have been delivered and Owner training has been
completed.
3.16.2 Review of Contractor's Tests:
3.16.2.1 Tests made by Contractor or manufacturers' representatives are subject to

observation and review by Owner. Provide timely notice prior to start of
each test, in order to allow for observation of testing. Upon completion of
tests, provide letter to confirm that testing has been successful.
JKA #15-100 210050 - 22
3.16.3 Test Logs:
3.16.3.1 Maintain test logs listing the tests on mechanical systems showing dates,
items tested, inspectors' names, remarks on success or failure of tests.

JKA #15-100 210050 - 23
SECTION 21 10 00
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1 Sprinkler heads.
1.1.2 Pipe and Fittings.
1.1.3 Valves.
1.1.4 Water flow alarm switch.
1.2.2 Section 21 00 50 Basic Fire Sprinkler Materials and Methods.
1.3 REFERENCES
1.3.1 It is the intent of these Specifications to provide for complete and operating fire
protection automatic sprinkler system in full compliance with the following standards:
1.3.1.1 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard No. 13, 2010, as
amended by the CBC.
1.3.1.2 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard No. 13, 2013, as
amended by the CBC.
1.3.1.3 CBC Chapter 9 (as amended).
1.3.1.4 NFPA No. 20, 2013
1.3.1.5 NFPA No. 24, 2013 (as amended).
1.3.1.6 NFPA No. 25, 2011 (California Edition).
1.3.2 The work shall also be in accordance with all local or state requirements that apply.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.4.1 Work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.4.2 An existing fire sprinkler system is in place, consisting of a fire sprinkler riser for each
zone with the main supply line and zone control valve for each floor, branch lines, and
tees to each sprinkler head. Extend and modify the existing system as required to
properly protect the building in accordance with NFPA 13 criteria.
1.4.3 Furnish all labor, design drawings, calculations, materials, tools, and equipment to install
the wet pipe automatic fire sprinkler system as described in this Specification Section.
County of Tehama FIRE PROTECTION
JKA #15-100 211000 - 1
System shall be hydraulically calculated and designed for the building occupancy
classification as determined by NFPA 13.
1.4.3.1 This work includes, but is not limited to the following:
1.4.3.1.1 Complete automatic fire risers, including valves, fire

department connections, flow switches, pressure switch and
service mains as indicated.
1.4.3.1.2 Complete interior wet type automatic fire protection spray

type sprinkler distribution system, including overhead
service and branch mains, lateral supply piping, supports,
hangers, seismic bracing, and heads
1.4.3.1.3 Required tests and inspections.
1.4.3.1.4 Provide electrical work required to complete the system.

Contractor shall be responsible for providing complete and
operable systems, including electrical wiring. Install wiring
in conduit, in accordance with Division 26.
1.4.3.1.5 Protected areas shall include areas above and below the
finished ceilings, exterior exposure, canopies, stairways,
rooms, areaways, entry, etc, and other areas requiring
sprinklers. Thoroughly examine architectural and other
drawings as required to satisfy this requirement.
1.4.3.1.6 Tags, identification labels and instruction manuals for

proper operation and maintenance.
1.4.4 Provide fire sprinklers to protect combustible building overhangs greater than 4 feet
wide, as required by local authority.
1.4.5 Determine the static and residual pressure for the site as required for accurate
determination of system requirements. Base system calculations on the lowest
expected static and residual pressure for the area.
1.4.5.1 Test data for static and residual pressure shall be obtained from water
district or local fire department; test shall be made within the last six months
prior to start of work.
1.4.5.2 Provide calculations based on 10 percent minimum safety factor. For

hydraulically calculated fire sprinkler systems the maximum velocity in the
building and the fire main piping shall not exceed 15 feet per second.
1.5 DRAWINGS
1.5.1 Contractor shall thoroughly examine architectural, structural, and other Drawings
provided as part of this Contract.
1.5.2 Number of sprinkler heads indicated on Contract Drawings shall not be reduced.
Provide additional heads required for coordination and to obtain approvals. Coordinate
suitable head locations and spacing with Architect.

JKA #15-100 211000 - 2
1.6.1 Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection products, of
types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
1.6.2 Installer: A firm with at least five years of successful installation experience on projects
with fire sprinkler piping systems similar to that required for this Project.
1.6.2.1 A State of California Fire Protection Contractors license (C-16) is required.
1.6.3 Design Criteria: Provide complete fire protection systems as indicated and as required
by authority having jurisdiction.
1.6.3.1 When there is conflict between requirements of authority having jurisdiction

or requirements of other standards agencies and these Drawings and
Specifications, requirements of authority having jurisdiction and
recommendations of standards agencies shall govern.
1.6.3.2 Design and install entire system in accord with applicable codes, standards,
and regulations.
1.6.3.3 The automatic sprinkler system shall conform to requirements of the 2007
edition of the National Fire Protection Association, Standard No. 13, as
amended by the CBC. Contractor shall hydraulically calculate sprinkler
system in accordance with NFPA 13.
1.6.3.4 Drawings are diagrammatic only to indicate rooms/areas of sprinkler

protection and piping clearances when appropriate. Rerouting of pipe and
addition, deletion or relocation of heads may be necessary. Submit
proposed layout for approval prior to start of installation.
1.6.3.5 FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual Approval Guide.
1.6.3.6 Supply equipment and accessories in accordance with requirements of all

applicable national, state and local codes.
1.6.3.7 Items of a given type shall be the products of the same manufacturer.
1.6.3.8 Scheduled equipment performance is minimum capacity required.
1.6.3.9 Scheduled electrical capacity shall be considered as maximum available.
1.7 COORDINATION
1.7.1 Coordinate Work in this Section with trades covered in other Sections of Specifications
to provide a complete and operable installation of highest quality workmanship.
1.7.2 Coordinate location of fire protection piping, mains and branches, to avoid interference
with work by other trades. Plumbing drainage piping and ductwork shall have right-of-
way over fire protection piping. Wherever conflicts exist, fire protection piping shall be
offset or rerouted at no additional cost to Owner. Provide locations of piping for use in
Coordinated Layout called for in Specification Section 23 80 00.
1.7.3 Piping shall be concealed, except where so indicated or where absolutely necessary to
be exposed. Exposed piping shall be placed as approved by Architect prior to
installation. Heads shall be fully coordinated with architectural reflected ceiling plan and
placed in center of ceiling tiles.

JKA #15-100 211000 - 3
1.7.4 On-site measurement of pipe will be required. Offsets, pipe, fittings, drains, etc.,
required to meet job conditions shall be furnished and installed at no extra cost to
Owner.
1.7.5 Additional heads required by NFPA 13 regulations shall be provided at no extra cost, if
required as a result of Contractors coordination. Location of heads and mains shall not
be changed unless approved by Architect.
1.7.6 Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction penetrating
ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
1.7.7 The Architect shall decide any differences or disputes concerning coordination,
interference or extent of work, and his decision shall be final.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
1.8.1 Samples: Provide one sample of each sprinkler head type.
1.8.2 Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 01, and as follows:
1.8.2.1 Prepare Drawings, calculations, and product data of fire protection systems
indicating pipe sized, pipe locations, fittings, shutoffs, equipment, etc. Note,
in bold type, any piping which will project beyond finished surfaces of
normally occupied rooms, exterior of the building or other locations which
will expose the system to view.
1.8.2.2 Manufacturer's data on each item of material or equipment used.
1.8.2.3 Layout drawings and flow calculations approved by agencies having

jurisdiction.
1.8.2.4 Drawings and calculations shall be stamped and signed by a State of

California licensed professional engineer prior to submission to the
Architect. Engineer shall be qualified for this work.
1.8.3 Test Reports: As indicated in paragraph Tests.
1.8.3.1 Sprinkler pressure test.
1.8.3.2 Alarm system test.
1.8.3.3 Underground piping test.
1.8.4 Operation and Maintenance Manual:
1.8.4.1 Operation and Maintenance Manual in accordance with Section 21 00 50.

Include an original manual of NFPA 25, California edition, in Operation and
Maintenance Manual for fire sprinkler system.
1.8.4.2 Guarantees in accordance with Division 01.
1.8.5 Deferred Approval Documents: Do not proceed with fabrication or installation of fire
sprinkler system until deferred approval documents have been approved by regulatory
agencies.
1.8.5.1 General: Provide detailed drawings, specifications, and calculations

prepared by a State of California licensed professional engineer.
JKA #15-100 211000 - 4
1.8.5.2 Architect Review: Make additions, changes and corrections as directed by
Architect and resubmit.
1.8.5.3 Agency Review: Architect will submit documents to Agency or Authority

Having Jurisdiction. Make additions, changes and corrections required by
Agency / Authority at no cost to Owner and resubmit to Architect.
1.8.5.4 Agency Approval: Architect will submit documents to Agency / Authority for
final approval.
1.9 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
1.9.1 The following publications form a part of this specification:
1.9.1.2 ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
1.9.1.3 UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Fire Resistance Directory.
1.9.1.4 CBC - California Building Code.
1.9.1.5 NFPA National Fire Protection Standards as amended by the CBC.
1.9.1.6 CFC - California Fire Code.
1.9.1.7 CPC - California Plumbing Code.
1.10 SUPERVISION
1.10.1 Keep a competent superintendent on the job that shall coordinate the activities of the
crafts and maintain the progress of the work to the satisfaction of the Architect.
1.11.1 Verify all dimensions at the building site and check existing conditions before beginning
work. Make changes that are necessary to coordinate the work with other trades, after
review by the Architect.
1.12 REGULATIONS
1.12.1 All work shall be installed in strict conformity with California Building Code (CBC),
California Plumbing Code (CPC), and California Electric Codes (CEC), Industrial Safety
Orders, California Mechanical Code (CMC), California Fire Code (CFC), and other laws
and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.13.1 Take out permits and pay fees and charges required in connection with the Work.
1.14 TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS
1.14.1 Temporary connections required to maintain services during the course of the Contract
shall be made without additional cost to Owner. The normal function of the building
must not be interrupted; notify Owner minimum seven days in advance before
interrupting any service.

JKA #15-100 211000 - 5
1.15.1 Existing equipment, piping, construction, etc., which interferes with work of the Contract
shall be removed and promptly returned to service. Damaged items shall be replaced
with new material to match existing.
1.15.2 Removed materials which will not be reused and which are not claimed by the Owner
shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the premises.
Consult Owner before removing any material from premises. Materials claimed by
Owner shall be removed carefully to prevent damage and delivered on the site where
directed.
1.15.3 Existing piping not to be reused and which is concealed in the building construction may
be capped and abandoned in place but such piping and wiring which is exposed in
equipment rooms or occupied spaces shall become property of Contractor and shall be
removed from the premises.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be standard product of
manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required,
these units shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, component parts of
system need not be products of the same manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
2.2.1 Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, specified, or directed by Architect, materials and
equipment used in installation of sprinkler systems shall be listed as approved by FM or
UL for fire protection systems, and shall be the latest design of the manufacturer.
2.3 SPRINKLER HEADS
2.3.1 Provide spray pattern type sprinkler heads, of ordinary degree temperature rating,
except that sprinkler heads for installation in vicinity of heating equipment, and in other
areas noted on Drawings, shall have temperature ratings required for such locations by
NFPA 13.
2.3.2 Sprinkler heads shall be upright, pendent, or sidewall, as required.
2.3.2.1 Heads in ceilings of occupied spaces with recessed lights shall be chrome
plated, semi-recessed pendent type, with white escutcheon.
2.3.2.2 Sprinkler heads in rooms with surface mounted lights shall be chrome plated
pendant style, with two-piece white escutcheon.
2.3.2.3 Provide head guards in equipment rooms and storage rooms and all other
locations where subject to damage.
2.3.2.4 Upright heads in areas with no ceilings shall be rough bronze finish.
2.3.2.5 Provide quick response type heads in light and ordinary hazard
occupancies.
2.3.2.6 Side wall heads may be used (except in extended coverage type) to cover
special areas where overhead piping and heads are impractical or a
JKA #15-100 211000 - 6
considered visual problem by the Architect or Owner. Side wall heads shall
be chrome finish.
2.3.2.7 Outdoor heads, if required shall be dry or freeze resistant.
2.3.2.8 Adjustable drop nipples are not acceptable.
2.3.3 Recessed sprinkler heads shall have chrome finish and adjustable chrome finish
escutcheons; exposed pendent heads in finished ceilings shall have chrome finish and
white ceiling escutcheons. Concealed (flush) heads shall be all brass, with white cover
plate.
2.3.3.1 Provide oversized escutcheons where required to meet the requirements of

ASCE 7.
2.3.4 Spare Heads: Furnish spare heads equal to one percent of total number of heads
installed under Contract, but not less than twelve. Spare head types furnished shall be
representative of types and temperature ratings of heads installed, and in proportion to
number of each type and temperature rating of heads installed. Furnish not less than
two sprinkler head wrenches, with at least one wrench for each type of sprinkler head
installed. Place spare heads and wrenches in wall mounted box manufactured for this
purpose.
2.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.4.1 For Installation Aboveground: 150 PSI, Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM A-135 or A-53
with UL approved ductile or cast iron screwed fittings.
2.4.1.1 Schedule 10 UL approved pipe with UL approved grooved fittings and

associated couplings may be used for pipe sizes 2 inches and greater.
Threading of piping will not be accepted.
2.4.2 For Installation Underground to 12 inches Above Ground: Ductile cast iron AWWA C111
and C151. Outside the building, J.M. Blue Brute Class 200 UL, P.W. Pipe, or equal,
C900, PVC pressure pipe, approved for fire protection use. Install in accordance with
NFPA 24 and AWWA standards. Provide concrete thrust blocks at each change or
direction. Fittings shall be ductile iron, ASME B16.1, Class 125 inside building; PVC
Class 200 Ring-Tite outside building. Pipe shall be approved for fire protection use.
2.4.3 Mechanical tees, saddle fittings, bushings and mechanical sprinkler head fittings shall
not be used.
2.5 VALVES
2.5.1 Angle, Check, and Globe Valves: Fed. Spec WW-V-51; Class A, type as suitable for
application.
2.5.1.1 Select check valves for installation in vertical lines recommended by

manufacturer as suitable for vertical installation. Install in vertical lines only
where flow is upward.
2.5.2 Gate Valves:
2.5.2.1 Sizes 1-1/2 inches or less: Fed. Spec WW-V-54, Class A.
2.5.2.2 Sizes above 1-1/2 inches: Fed. Spec WW-V-58, Class A, designation OS or
OF, as required. Provide OS&Y type, 175 pound rated working pressure.
JKA #15-100 211000 - 7
2.5.2.3 Furnish and deliver to Owner one wrench of each size required for operating
underground valves.
2.5.3 Drain Valves: angle, or globe. Fed. Spec WW-V-51; Class A, type as suitable for
application.
2.5.3.1 UL listed and FM approved combination test and drain fittings may be used.
2.5.4 Zone Control Valves: UL listed, outside screw and yoke or butterfly. Valves shall be
sealed open with approved seal. Provide weatherproof actuator housing, with two single
pole, double throw switches.
2.5.4.1 Supervisory Switch: Fit the control valves on the fire sprinkler risers with
supervisory switch, with single pole double throw switch actuator installed to
change switch position when valve is being closed.
2.6 WATER FLOW ALARM SWITCH
2.6.1 UL listed water flow alarm switch suitable for variable pressure, complete with
instantaneous recycling retard and two single pole double throw electrical contacts.
Provide continuously monitored water flow alarm switch and trouble sensor,
automatically transmitted to an approved control alarm station.
2.7 UNION AND FLANGES
2.7.1 Size and Type:
2.7.1.1 Steel 2 inches and smaller: 150 pound screwed black or galvanized
malleable iron, match pipe, ground joint, brass to iron seat.
2.7.1.2 Steel 2-1/ inches and larger: 150 pound black flange union, flat faced, full
gasket.
2.7.2 Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick rubber Garlock #122, Johns-Manville, or equal.
2.7.3 Flange Bolts: Open hearth bolt steel, square heads, with cold pressed hexagonal nuts,
cadmium plated in ground. Provide copper plated steel bolts and nuts or brass bolts and
nuts for brass flanges.
2.8 GAUGES
2.8.1 Marsh "Quality Gage", U.S. Gage, Danton 800, or equal, with bronze bushed movement
and front recalibration. Dials shall be white with black numerals, 3-1/2 inch dial face.
Normal reading shall be at midscale. Provide a three-way valve on each gauge
connection.
2.9 SEISMIC SEPARATION ASSEMBLY
2.9.1 Provide seismic separation assembly as defined in NFPA 13 at locations where piping
crosses building seismic joints and at locations where required to prevent pipe breakage
due to building movement.
2.9.1.1 At Contractors option, provide Metraflex Fireloop UL listed assembly, or

equal at each seismic joint location, in lieu of seismic separation assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

JKA #15-100 211000 - 8
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Installation of the sprinkler system shall not be started until complete plans and
specifications (including water supply information and type of existing sprinkler system, if
any) have been approved by the State Fire Marshal.
3.1.1.1 Piping shall be concealed unless shown or otherwise directed.
3.1.1.2 Where piping is left exposed within a room, it shall be run true to vertical,
horizontal or intended planes. Where possible, uniform margins shall be
maintained between parallel lines and/or adjacent wall, floor or ceiling
surfaces.
shall provide for maximum headroom clearance. This clearance shall not be
less than 7'-6" without written approval from Architect.
3.1.1.4 Minor changes in locations of equipment, piping, etc., from locations shown
shall be made when directed by Architect at no additional cost to Owner,
providing such change is ordered before such items of work, or work directly
connected to same, are installed and providing no additional material is
required.
3.1.1.5 Grade all piping as required by NFPA 13.
3.1.1.6 Close ends of pipe immediately after installation; leave closure in place until
removal is necessary for completion of installation.
3.1.1.7 Piping systems shall be thoroughly flushed and proved clean before
3.1.1.8 Pipe discharge of each drain valve to floor sink or drain.
3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
3.2.1 General: Support piping so that it is firmly held in place by approved iron hangers and
supports and by special hangers as required in accordance with NFPA 13. Hangers
shall support loads specified in NFPA 13, and, in addition, shall support weight of pipe,
fluid and pipe insulation, based on spacing between supports with a minimum factor of
safety of five based on ultimate strength of material used. Do not exceed manufacturer's
load rating. Pipe attachments, or hangers, shall be of same size as pipe or tubing on
which used, or nearest larger size available. Materials, design, and type numbers per
Manufacturers' Standardization Society (MSS) Standard Practice SP-58, provide branch
line restraints where hangers exceed 6 inches long, in accordance with NFPA 13. Install
concrete anchors required. Hanger material shall be approved by Architect before
installation. Do not support piping by plumbers' tape, wire, rope, wood or other
makeshift devices.
3.2.2 Suspend rods from angle clips, in accordance with Section 21 00 50.
3.3 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
3.3.1 Comply with CBC, Volume 2, Chapter 16A and CBC Chapter 9 and NFPA 13.
3.3.2 Seismic bracing system shall be a complete pre-engineered bracing system.

Pre-engineered bracing system shall include plan layout, brace selection, specification,

JKA #15-100 211000 - 9
and calculations. Complete system shall be submitted to Architect for review. See
Delegated Design Submittal paragraph in article, Submittals, in Section 21 00 50.
3.3.3 Anchorage for various manufactured and fabricated items is detailed and scheduled on
the drawings or specified.
3.3.3.1 For proposed changes to anchorage shown, or specified, submit proposed

methods of anchorage with calculations prepared by a California Registered
Structural Engineer. Design of anchorage shall comply with the above
regulations using minimum coefficients, CP, listed CBC Chapter 16A.
3.3.4 It is not intended that prototype or non-standard equipment or equipment frames be

provided. However, items of equipment shown or specified to be anchored shall
maintain integrity at point of anchor after being subjected to accelerations equivalent to
those established herein.
3.3.5 Anchors: Piping shall be provided with anchors for protection of piping against damage
due to earthquakes, as required by CBC Chapter 16A, NFPA 13, and other sections of
this specification.
3.4 TESTS
3.4.1 At various stages and upon completion, the system must be tested in the presence of
the enforcing agency.
3.4.2 Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the installation, subject the entire new
system to the tests required in NFPA 13, and shall furnish the Owner with certificates as
appropriate.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
3.5.1 Coordinate requirements with the authority having jurisdiction.
3.5.2 Provide brass valve tags at each system valve, indicating valve service.
3.5.3 Provide signage at each sprinkler valve, with sign indicating specific portion of system
controlled by valve.
3.5.4 Provide signage at each outdoor alarm device, with sign indicating which authority to call
if device is activated.
3.5.5 Prior to final acceptance, Contractor shall provide accurate color-coded Building Plan at
riser location, clearly depicting fire protection system area of coverage, location of
inspectors test/drain connection and auxiliary drain connections. Provide this
information at each system or building at riser location for building. Plan(s) shall be
size and plastic laminated.
3.5.6 Provide hydraulic data signage permanently attached to risers, indicating location, basis
of design, water supply and pressure requirements of system.
3.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING
3.6.1 Coordination of wiring systems is part of this work. Contractor shall ensure that the
following is completed.
3.6.1.1 Work provided in other Specification Sections:

JKA #15-100 211000 - 10
3.6.1.1.1 Supervised wiring to fire alarm control panel.
3.6.1.1.2 Supervised wiring from main waterflow indicator to fire

alarm panel.
3.6.1.1.3 Supervised wiring from sprinkler flow switches to fire alarm

panel.
3.6.1.1.4 Supervised wiring from valve water flow alarm switches to

fire alarm panel.
3.6.1.2 Work provided in this Specification Section:
3.6.1.2.1 Wiring diagrams for devices.
3.6.1.2.2 Other wiring not specified to provide an operating system.
3.7 SPRINKLER HEADS
3.7.1 Heads shall be placed upright where on exposed piping, unless otherwise noted, and in
pendant position on concealed piping, unless noted otherwise, with deflectors parallel to
the ceiling or roof slope. Clearance between deflectors and ceilings, electric, or heating
equipment, or other obstruction shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA
13. Provide sprinkler head guards where heads are subject to mechanical damage, for
example, at mechanical rooms, and storage rooms and gymnasiums.
3.7.2 Mount box containing spare sprinkler heads and wrenches on wall in location selected
by Owner.
3.7.3 Do not install pendant sprinkler heads until flushing of the piping has been completed.
3.7.4 Provide return bend as illustrated in NFPA 13 (NFPA exceptions do not apply) for each
sprinkler head installed in finished ceiling.
3.8 PIPING JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
3.8.1 Pipe shall be assembled in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13.
3.8.2 Flange and spigot piece at the base of sprinkler riser shall be secured to the
underground elbow at the base of riser with tie-rods which are properly coated, or
stainless steel to protect against corrosion. Set-screw type flange adapters and
mechanical joint retainer glands are not an acceptable substitute for tie-rods. Provide
concrete thrust blocks in accordance with NFPA 24 and CBC.
3.9 VALVES
3.9.1 All valves shall be identified by permanent metal tags or other approved means.
3.10 DRAINS
3.10.1 Auxiliary drains shall be installed on low points in each system.
3.10.1.1 Five or fewer trapped gallons will not require a drain valve but may be
drained through a plugged fitting. Drain valves shall be in accordance with
the requirements of NFPA 13.

JKA #15-100 211000 - 11
3.10.2 Install one inspector's test drain on sprinkler system. Extend drain to outside in location
approved by Architect. Water discharge shall be positioned such that landscaping will
not be damaged.
3.10.3 Drain valves shall be piped to a safe place of discharge and discharge shall be visible
either by open-end drainpipe or sight drain fitting.
3.10.4 Provide flushing connections at ends of cross-mains.
3.11 SLEEVES
3.11.1 Install AMI Products, Adjus-to-Crete, or equal, pipe sleeves of sufficient size to allow for
free motion of pipe, 24 gauge galvanized steel. The space between pipe and sleeves
through floor slabs on ground, through outside walls above or below grade, through roof,
and other locations as directed shall be caulked with oakum and mastic and made
watertight. The space between pipe and sleeve and between sleeve and slab or wall
shall be sealed watertight.
3.11.2 Holes through existing concrete walls or floors shall be core drilled. The space between
pipe and hole through floor slabs on ground, through outside walls above or below
grade, through roof and other locations as directed shall be made watertight.
3.11.3 At walls below grade Link-Seal casing seals, or equal, may be used in lieu of caulking.
Pipes penetrating walls below grade shall be anchored at wall.
3.12 FLOOR, WALL, AND CEILING PLATES
3.12.1 Fit pipes with or without insulation passing through walls, floors, or ceilings and hanger
rods penetrating finished ceilings with chrome plated or stainless steel plates.
3.13 FIRESAFING
3.13.1 The annular space between pipe sleeves and pipe passing through all floors and walls
shall be packed with incombustible mastic or other suitable material, in accordance with
U.L. Fire Resistance Directory.
3.13.2 Penetrations in fire rated assemblies shall also be protected in accordance with CBC
Chapter 7, Section 712, and UL Fire Resistance Directory.
3.14 UNION AND FLANGES
3.14.1 Install unions whether shown or not at each connection to equipment and at one
connection to each valve or cock.
3.14.2 Locate the unions for easy removal of the equipment or valve.
3.15 CLEANING
3.15.1 Upon completion of tests, clean equipment, piping, etc., installed under this Section of
the Specifications.
3.16 FLUSH
3.16.1 Entire system shall be flushed out and cleaned after completion of piping, and prior to
installation of sprinkler heads. Flush shall be continued until water runs clear at drain
connections.

JKA #15-100 211000 - 12

JKA #15-100 211000 - 13
SECTION 22 00 50
BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.3 Valves and fittings.
1.1.4 Valve boxes.
1.1.5 Thermometers.
1.1.6 Access Doors.
1.1.7 Insulation.
1.2.2 This Section is a part of each Division 22 Section.
1.3.1 Furnish and install any incidental work not shown or specified which is necessary to
provide a complete and workable system.
1.3.2 Make all temporary connections required to maintain services during the course of this
Contract without additional cost to the Owner. Notify the Owner seven days in advance
before disturbing any service.

assumed that the most recent edition of the standard in effect at the time of bid shall be
used.
1.4.1.1 CSA Canadian Standards Association International.
1.4.1.3 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
1.4.1.4 CCR - California Code of Regulations.

Industry Safety Orders, Articles 31 through 36.

County of Tehama BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHODS
JKA #15-100 220050 - 1
1.4.1.5 NCPWB - National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau.
1.4.1.6 CEC - California Electrical Code.
1.4.1.7 NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers' Association.
1.4.1.8 NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
1.4.1.9 OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act.
1.5 DRAWINGS
1.5.1 Examine Contract Documents prior to bidding of work and report discrepancies in writing
to Architect.
1.5.2 Contractor shall visit Project site and examine existing conditions in order to become
familiar with Project scope. Verify dimensions shown on Drawings at Project site. Bring
discrepancies to the attention of Architect. Failure to examine Project site shall not
constitute basis for claims for additional work because of lack of knowledge or location
of hidden conditions that affect Project scope.
conditions will not always permit installation in location shown. The Plumbing Drawings
show general arrangement of equipment and materials, etc., and shall be followed as
closely as existing conditions, actual building construction, and work of other trades
permit.
1.5.3.1 Architectural and Structural Drawings shall be considered part of the Work.
These Drawings furnish Contractor with information relating to design and
construction of the Project. Architectural Drawings take precedence over
Plumbing Drawings.
1.5.3.2 Because of the small scale of Plumbing Drawings, not all offsets, fittings,
and accessories required are shown. Investigate structural and finish
conditions affecting the Work and arrange Work accordingly. Provide
offsets, fittings, and accessories required to meet conditions. Inform
Architect immediately when job conditions do not permit installation of
equipment and materials in the locations shown. Obtain the Architects
approval prior to relocation of equipment and materials.
1.5.3.3 Relocate equipment and materials installed without prior approval of the
1.5.3.4 Minor changes in locations of equipment, piping, etc., from locations shown
shall be made when directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the
Owner providing such change is ordered before such items of work, or work
directly connected to same are installed and providing no additional material
is required.
1.5.4 Execute work mentioned in Specifications and not shown on Drawings, or vice versa,
the same as if specifically mentioned or shown in both.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 2
1.6.1 The publications listed below form part of this specification; comply with provisions of
1.6.1.10 CAL-OSHA.
1.6.2 Nothing in Drawings or specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming
to these codes, or to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. It is not the intent of
Drawings or specifications to repeat requirements of codes except where necessary for
clarity.
1.6.3 Comply with State of California 2013 Energy Code for all systems, equipment, and
construction.
1.6.5 No material installed as part of this Work shall contain asbestos.
1.7.1 Obtain and pay for all permits and service required in installation of this work; arrange
for required inspections and secure approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with requirements of Division 01.
charges.
1.7.3 Prior to the start of construction, contact local gas company representative and
coordinate location of gas meter and piping. In addition, coordinate time required for
installation, in order to avoid delay to the Project.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 3
1.8 UTILITY CONNECTIONS
1.8.1 Bear the cost of construction related to utility services, from point of connection to utility
services shown on Contract Documents. This includes piping, excavation, backfill,
meters, boxes, check valves, backflow prevention devices, general service valves,
concrete work, and the like, whether or not Work is performed by Contractor, local
water/sanitation district, public utility, other governmental agencies or agencies assigns.
1.9.1 Special framing, recesses, chases and backing for Work of this Section, unless
otherwise specified, are covered under other Specification Sections.
1.9.3 Cutting, patching, and repairing of existing construction to permit installation of

equipment, and materials is the responsibility of Contractor. Repair or replace damage
to existing work with skilled mechanics for each trade.
1.9.4 Cut existing concrete construction with a concrete saw. Do not utilize pneumatic
devices.
1.9.5 Core openings through existing construction for passage of new piping and conduits.
Cut holes of minimum diameter to suit size of pipe and associated insulation installed.
1.10 SUBMITTALS
1.10.1 Submittal packages may be submitted via email as PDF electronic files, or as printed
packages. PDFs shall be legible at actual size (100 percent). Provide seven copies of
printed submittal packages.
Specifications and on Drawings are used as standards of quality. Furnish standard
items on specified equipment at no extra cost to the Contract regardless of disposition of
1.10.2.1 Partial or incomplete submittals will not be considered.
1.10.2.3 Provide materials of the same brand or manufacturer for each class of

number.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 4
1.10.2.7.1 Submit Shop Drawings, performance curves, and other

materials.

Contract Documents.

schematic diagrams). Drawings may be prepared by
vendor but must be submitted as instruments of Contractor,

1.10.3 Review of submittals will be only for general conformance with design concept and
general compliance with information given in Contract Documents. Review will not
include quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes, construction
methods, coordination with work of other trades, or construction safety precautions,
which are sole responsibility of Contractor. Review of a component of an assembly
does not indicate acceptance of an assembly. Deviations from Contract Documents not
clearly identified by Contractor are Contractors responsibility and will not be reviewed by
Architect.
construction, submit to Architect Shop Drawings or submittals on all items of equipment
and materials provided. Provide submittal in at least seven copies and in complete
package.
1.10.4.1 Shop Drawings and submittals shall include Specification Section,

Paragraph number, and Drawing unit symbol or detail number for reference.
Organize submittals into booklets for each Specification section and submit
in loose-leaf binders with index. Deviations from the Contract Documents
shall be prominently displayed in the front of the submittal package and
referenced to the applicable Contract requirement.
1.10.5 Furnish to the Project Inspector complete installation instructions on material and
equipment before starting installation.
and sealants, including primers, documentation of compliance including printed
statement of VOC content and chemical components.
1.10.7 Provide product data for insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings,
jackets, adhesives, sealants, and coatings, indicating compliance with requirement that
these products contain less than 0.1 percent (by mass) polybrominated diphenyl ethers
(PBDEs) in penta, octa, or deca formulations.
JKA #15-100 220050 - 5
1.10.9 Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic supports, anchorages, and restraints indicated
1.10.9.1 Calculations performed for use in selection of seismic supports, anchorages,

and restraints shall utilize criteria indicated in Structural Contract
Documents.
1.10.9.2 Supports, anchorage and restraints for piping, ductwork, and equipment
shall be an OSHPD pre-approved system such as Tolco, Afcon, ISAT,
Badger, Mason, or equal. Pipes, ducts and equipment shall be seismically
restrained in accordance with requirements of current edition of California
Building Code. System shall have current OPM number and shall meet
additional requirements of authority having jurisdiction. Provide supporting
locations.
1.10.9.2.1 Bracing of Piping and Equipment: Specifically state how

bracing attachment to structure is accomplished. Provide
shop drawings indicating seismic restraints, including details
of anchorage to building. In-line equipment must be braced
independently of piping, and in conformance with applicable
building codes. Provide calculations to show that pre-
approval numbers have been correctly applied in
accordance with general information notes of pre-approval
documentation.
1.10.9.3 In lieu of the above or for non-standard installations not covered in the
above pre-approved systems, Contractor shall provide layout drawings
showing piping, ductwork, and restraint locations, and detail supports,
attachments and restraints, and furnish supporting calculations and legible
details sealed by a California registered structural engineer, in accordance
with 2013 California Building Code
1.10.9.4 Additional Requirements: In addition to the above, conform to all state and
local requirements.
1.11 SUBSTITUTIONS
to or are intended to amplify Division 01 requirements. In the case of conflict between
requirements given herein and those of Division 01, Division 01 requirements shall
apply.
1.11.3 Substitutions will be interpreted to be all manufacturers other than those specifically
listed in the Contract Documents by brand name, model or catalog number.
1.11.4 Only one request for substitution will be considered for each item of equipment or
material.
JKA #15-100 220050 - 6

1.11.6 Installation of reviewed substitution is the Contractors responsibility. Any mechanical,

electrical, structural, or other changes required for installation of reviewed substituted
equipment or material must be made by the Contractor without additional cost to the
Owner. Review by the Architect of the substituted equipment or material, including
dimensioned Drawings will not waive these requirements.
1.11.7 Contractor may be required to compensate the Architect for costs related to substituted
1.12.1 Furnish three complete sets of Operation and Maintenance Manual bound in hardboard
binder, and one compact disc containing complete Operation and Maintenance Manual
in searchable PDF format. Provide Table of Contents. Provide index tabs for each
piece of equipment in binder and disc. Start compiling data upon approval of submittals.

1.12.1.1.2 Complete operating instructions for each item of plumbing

equipment.
1.12.1.1.3 Copies of guarantees/warrantees for each item of

equipment or systems.
1.12.1.1.4 Test data and system balancing reports.


1.12.1.1.7 Control diagrams and literature.
1.12.1.1.8 Check test and start reports for each piece of plumbing
JKA #15-100 220050 - 7
1.12.1.1.9 Commissioning and Preliminary Operation Tests required
as part of the Work.
1.12.2 Post service telephone numbers and/or addresses in an appropriate place as

designated by the Architect.

be approved by the Architect and shall be made without additional cost to the Owner.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for damage caused to existing services.
Promptly notify the Architect if services are found which are not shown on Drawings.
of this Contract. Promptly return to service upon completion of work in the area.
Replace items damaged by Contractor with new material to match existing.
shall become property of Contractor and shall be removed from Project site. Consult
Owner before removing any material from Project site. Carefully remove materials
claimed by Owner to prevent damage and deliver to Owner-designated storage location.
abandoned in place and all ends shall be capped or plugged. Remove unused piping
and wiring exposed in Equipment Rooms or occupied spaces. Material shall be
removed from Project premises. Disconnect power, water, gas, pump or any other
active energy source from piping or electrical service prior to abandoning in place.
1.14.4 Existing piping, ductwork, and equipment modified or altered as part of this Work shall
comply with the most recent applicable code requirements.
1.15 WARRANTY
1.15.1 Refer to Division 01 for warranty requirements, including effective date of warranty.
Refer to specific items of equipment specified herein for warranty duration if different
from that specified in Division 01.
1.15.2 Repair or replace defective work, material, or part that appears within the warranty
period, including damage caused by leaks.
1.15.3 On failure to comply with the above warranty within a reasonable length of time after
notification is given, the Architect/Owner shall have the repairs made at the Contractor's
expense.
herein.
1.16.2 Upon completion of the work, deliver to Architect the following:

JKA #15-100 220050 - 8
installed.
1.16.3 Provide Contractors signature, verifying accuracy of record drawings.
1.16.4 Obtain the signature of the Project Inspector for all record drawings.
1.17.1 Protect equipment and piping delivered to Project site from weather, humidity and
1.18 COORDINATION
1.18.1 General:
1.18.1.1 Coordinate Work in this Section with trades covered in other Specifications
Sections to provide a complete, operable and sanitary installation of the
highest quality workmanship.
voltage and power feed wiring for equipment specified under this section.


install additional electrical services as part of the bid.

installation.

concrete and other structural components during progress of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
JKA #15-100 220050 - 9
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.2 All sizes, capacities, and efficiency ratings shown are minimum, except that gas capacity
is maximum available.
2.1.3 Refer to Sections 22 10 00 and 23 80 00 for specific system piping materials.
2.2 ELECTRIC MOTORS
2.2.1 General Motor Requirements: Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2.1.1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include the following, or equal:
2.2.1.1.1 U.S. Motors.
2.2.1.1.2 Century Electric.
2.2.1.1.3 General Electric.
2.2.1.1.4 Lincoln.
2.2.1.1.5 Gould.
2.2.2 Motor Characteristics: Designed for continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg.
C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. Capacity and torque shall be sufficient to
start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude
and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate
ratings or considering service factor.
2.2.2.1 Motors exceeding the nameplate amperage shall be promptly replaced at no

cost to the Owner. Horsepower shown is minimum and shall be increased
as necessary to comply with above requirements. Furnish motors with
splash-proof or weatherproof housings, where required or recommended by
the manufacturer. Match the nameplate voltage rating with the electrical
service supplied. Check Electrical Drawings. Provide a transformer for
each motor not wound specifically for system voltage.
2.2.3 Polyphase Motors: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor, efficiency as

defined in NEMA MG 1. Select motors with service factor of 1.15. Provide motor with
random-wound, squirrel cage rotor, and permanently lubricated or regreasable, shielded,
antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. Temperature rise shall
match insulation rating. Provide Class F insulation.
2.2.3.1 Multispeed motors shall have separate windings for each speed.
2.2.4 Polyphase Motors with Additional Requirements:
2.2.4.1 Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match

wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads.
Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 10
2.2.4.2 Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers:
2.2.4.2.1 Separately Connected Motors: Ratings, characteristics, and

features coordinated with and approved by controller
manufacturer.
2.2.4.2.2 Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant

insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient
spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses
produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.
2.2.4.2.3 Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature

rise; Class F insulation.
2.2.4.2.4 Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H

insulation.
2.2.4.2.5 Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements

for thermally protected motors.
2.2.4.3 Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service
factor.
2.2.5 Single-Phase Motors:
2.2.5.1 Select motors with service factor of 1.15.
2.2.5.2 Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting
torque and requirements of specific motor application:
2.2.5.2.1 Permanent-split capacitor.
2.2.5.2.2 Split phase.
2.2.5.2.3 Capacitor start, inductor run.
2.2.5.2.4 Capacitor start, capacitor run.
2.2.5.3 Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
2.2.5.4 Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable

for radial and thrust loading.
2.2.5.5 Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
2.2.6 Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to
motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating
of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor
temperature returns to normal range.
2.3 MOTOR STARTERS
2.3.1 Square D, Allen Bradley, or equal, in NEMA Type 1 enclosure, unless otherwise
specified or required. Minimum starter size shall be Size 1. Provide NEMA 3R
enclosure where exposed to outdoors.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 11
2.3.2 Provide magnetic motor starters for equipment provided under the Mechanical Work.
Starters shall be non-combination type. Provide part winding or reduced voltage start
motors where shown or as hereinafter specified. Minimum size starter shall be Size 1.
2.3.2.1 All starters shall have the following:
2.3.2.1.1 Cover mounted hand-off-automatic switch. Starters

2.3.2.1.2 Ambient compensated thermal overload.

2.3.2.2 Where three phase motors are provided for two-speed operation, provide
two speed motor starters.
2.3.2.3 Starters for single-phase motors shall have thermal overloads. NEMA I
enclosure for starters located indoors, NEMA IIIR enclosure for starters
located outdoors.
2.3.2.4 Provide OSHA label indicating the device starts automatically.
2.4 VALVES AND FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS
2.4.1 General:
2.4.1.1 Provide valves and fittings conforming to lead-free requirements of

California Health and Safety Code Section 116875.
2.4.1.1.1 Provide valves listed to NSF/ANSI 61-G or NSF/ANSI 372

for valve materials for potable-water service.
2.4.1.1.1.1 Exception: Main distribution gate valves

above 1-1/2 inches located underground
outside building are not required to conform
lead-free requirements of California Health
and Safety Code Section 116875.
2.4.2 Gate Valves:
2.4.2.1 General: Furnish valves in copper lines with adapters to suit valve/line
requirements.
2.4.2.2 1-1/2 inches and smaller: Minimum 200 psi CWP, bronze body, threaded
bonnet, rising or non-rising stem, solid wedge, threaded or solder ends,
conforming to MSS SP-80. Milwaukee UP148, UP149, Nibco T-113-LF, S-
113-LF, or equal.
2.4.2.3 2 inches through 3 inches: Minimum 200 psi CWP, bronze body, threaded
bonnet, non-rising stem, solid wedge, threaded or solder ends, conforming
to MSS SP-80. Nibco T-113-LF, S-113-LF, or equal.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 12
2.4.2.4 Main distribution gate valves underground outside building above 1-1/2
inches:
2.4.2.4.1 Underground valves 2 inches thru 12 inches: 250 psi, iron

body, Non-rising stem, bolted bonnet, resilient wedge
valves, conforming to AWWA C509, equipped with
operating nuts, Mueller Series 2360, Nibco F-619-RW-SON,
or equal.
2.4.2.4.1.1 Underground valves 3 inches and smaller

may be furnished with operating nuts or
hand-wheels, and with Ring-Tite joint ends.
2.4.2.4.1.2 Furnish and deliver to Owner one wrench of

each size required for operating
underground valves.
2.4.3 Ball Valves:
2.4.3.1 2 inches and smaller: 600 psi CWP, cast bronze or brass body, full port,
two piece, threaded ends, and reinforced PTFE seal, conforming to MSS
SP-110. Nibco T-685-80-LF, Milwaukee UPBA400, Apollo 77C-LF10, Kitz
868, or equal.
2.4.3.2 2-1/2 inches: Apollo 77C-LF10, or equal.
2.4.4 Swing Check Valves:
2.4.4.1 Minimum 200 psi CWP, bronze or brass body, suitable for regrinding,
threaded ends, conforming to MSS SP-80. Milwaukee UP509, Nibco T-
413LF, Kitz 822T, or equal.
2.5 VALVES AND FITTINGS FOR GAS SYSTEMS
2.5.1 Building Gas Shut-Off Valve:
2.5.1.1 2 inches and smaller: Provide 175 psi SWP ball valve, CSA listed, full port,
lockwing type, with AGA painted grey finish. Jomar 175-LWN, or equal.
2.5.1.2 Above 2 inches: Provide ReSun D-126, Key Port, or equal, lubricated plug
cock, CSA listed, rectangular port, full pipe area, 125 psi SWP, flanged
ends. Provide T-Handle socket wrench and adapter fittings as required for
operation of valves. Provide one package of spare lubricant sticks, sizes as
required for valve sizes. Lubricant shall be the product recommended by
valve manufacturer for use with type of gas conveyed by the piping system.
2.5.1.3 Provide valves same size as upstream piping. Make any reduction in size of
gas piping downstream of shutoff valves.
2.5.2 Gas Shut-off Valve Above Grade:
2.5.2.1 2 inches and smaller: Provide Milwaukee BB2-100, Jomar T-100NE, or

equal, ball valve, CSA listed, full port.
2.5.2.2 Above 2 inches: Provide ReSun D-126, Key Port, or equal, CSA listed,
rectangular port, full pipe area, 125 psi SWP, flanged ends. Provide T-
Handle socket wrench and adapter fittings as required for operation of
JKA #15-100 220050 - 13
valves. Provide one package of spare lubricant sticks, sizes as required for
valve sizes. Lubricant shall be the product recommended by valve
manufacturer for use with type of gas conveyed by the piping system.
2.5.2.3 Provide valves same size as upstream piping. Make any reduction in size of
gas piping downstream of shutoff valves.
2.5.3 For Gas Service Below Grade:
2.5.3.1 Lubricated plug cocks: ReSun Model D-126, Key Port, or equal, lubricated
plug cock, CSA listed, rectangular port, full pipe area, 125 psi SWP, flanged
ends. Provide extended lubrication stem, arranged to allow for lubrication of
the valve from grade. The extension must be constructed to allow for
lubrication of the valve and for operation of the valve from grade. Provide T-
Handle socket wrench and adapter fittings as required for operation of
valves. Provide one package of spare lubricant sticks, sizes as required for
valve sizes. Lubricant shall be the product recommended by valve
manufacturer for use with type of gas conveyed by the piping system.
2.5.3.1.1 Provide flanged ends on valves installed below grade.

Connect to polyethylene piping with flanges and stainless
steel bolts.
2.5.3.1.2 Anchor each valve flange to valve box with welded angle
iron, or provide vertical stiff leg, minimum 18 inches into
earth.
2.5.3.1.3 Provide Central Double O Seal Transition Fittings, or equal,

flanged style for connection between valve and piping
system.
2.5.3.1.4 Wrap valve, flanges and exposed pipe with Pabco, or equal
tape wrap, installed in accordance with requirements listed
under Pipe Protection.
2.5.3.2 Molded polyethylene body ball valve: Nordstrom Valves - Polyvalve II for
sizes 1-1/4 inches to 2 inches, and Polyvalve for sizes 2 inches and larger,
or equal. Valves 1 inch and smaller shall be listed lubricated plug cocks,
with transition fittings..
2.5.3.2.1 Provide stub ends to match SDR of the piping, arranged for
butt fusion welding. Provide valve body material to suit the
adjacent piping system.
2.5.3.2.2 Provide wrench to suit the valve operator.
2.5.4 Seismic Gas Shut-Off Valve: Certified by State of California and compliant with ASCE
25. Provide standard or high pressure model as required to match site gas pressure.
Provide unit arrangement per Drawings schedule and details.
2.5.4.1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

by one of the following:
2.5.4.1.1 Little Firefighter Corporation, models NAGV, VAGV, and

AGV.
2.5.4.1.2 Seismic Safety Products, LLC, Northridge series.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 14
2.6 JOINING MATERIALS
2.6.1 Refer to Division 22 and 23 piping sections for special joining materials not listed below.
2.6.2 Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
2.6.2.1 ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum

thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated
2.6.2.1.1 Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast iron and cast
bronze flanges.
2.6.2.1.2 Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast iron

and steel flanges.
2.6.2.2 AWWA C111, rubber, flat face, 1/8-inch (3.2mm) thick, unless otherwise
indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless other indicated.
2.6.2.3 Flange Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111, carbon steel, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.6.2.4 Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts and Nuts: Type and material
recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6.3 Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 100 percent lead free alloys. Include water-flushable
flux according to ASTM B813.
2.6.4 Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCup-5 Series, copper-phosphorus unless otherwise
indicated. Sil-Fos 15, or equal.
2.6.5 Welding Filler Metals: Comply with ASME B31.1 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.6.6 Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
2.6.6.1 CPVC solvent cement shall have VOC content of 490 g/L or less.
2.6.6.2 Adhesive primer shall have VOC content of 550 g/L or less.
2.6.6.3 Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with testing and product
requirements of South Coast Air Quality Management District, Rule 1168.
2.6.7 Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to
ASTM F 656.
2.6.7.1 PVC solvent cement shall have VOC content of 510 g/L or less.
2.6.7.2 Adhesive primer shall have VOC content of 550 g/L or less.
2.6.7.3 Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with testing and product
requirements of South Coast Air Quality Management District, Rule 1168.
2.7 VALVE BOXES
2.7.1 General:

JKA #15-100 220050 - 15
2.7.1.1 Where several valves or other equipment are grouped together, provide
larger boxes of rectangular vault type adequately sized for condition and
similar in construction to those specified above.
2.7.1.2 Provide valve box extensions as required to set bottom of valve box tight up
to top of piping in which valve is installed.
2.7.1.3 Provide a tee handle wrench for each size, Alhambra Foundry Co. #A-3008,
or equal.
2.7.2 Valve Boxes in Traffic Areas: Provide Christy No. G5 traffic valve box, Brooks, or equal,
10-3/8 inches inside diameter with extensions to suit conditions, with cast iron or steel
locking cover. Provide Owner with set of special wrenches or tools as required for
operation of valves.
2.7.3 Valve Boxes in Non-Traffic Areas: Provide Christy No. F22, Brooks, or equal, 8 inches
inside diameter by 30 inches long, with cast iron or steel locking cover. Provide Owner
with set of special wrenches or tools as required for operation of valves. Cut bottom of
plastic body for operation of valves.
2.7.4 Valve Box (Rectangular Vault Type): Precast concrete or cast iron with cast iron or steel
locking type covers lettered to suit service Brooks No. 3-TL, Christy No. B3, Fraser No.
3, Alhambra A-3004 or A-3005, Alhambra E-2202, or E-2702, or equal, with extension to
suit conditions.
2.8 THERMOMETERS
2.8.1 Marsh, Taylor, Palmer, or equal, 5 inch diameter bimetal dial, adjustable from face, with
adjustable positioner, located to be easily read from normal personnel approach.
Normal reading shall be at mid-scale.
2.8.1.1 Provide extension for insulation.
2.8.1.2 Provide thermometers with steel bulb chambers and brass separable
sockets.
2.8.2 Provide Pete's Plug II, Sisco P/T, or equal, test plug with Nordel core, on inlet and outlet
of each coil, boiler, and heat exchanger and provide two digital electronic test
thermometers for each range of fluid temperature and where shown on Drawings.
2.9 ACCESS DOORS
2.9.1 Where floors, walls, or ceilings must be penetrated for access to mechanical equipment,
provide access doors, 14 inch by 14 inch minimum size in usable opening. Where
entrance of a serviceman may be required, provide 20 inch by 30 inch minimum usable
opening. Locate access doors/panels for non-obstructed and easy reach.
2.9.1.1 All access doors less than 7'-0" above floors and exposed to public access
2.9.2 Access doors shall match those supplied in Division 08 in all respects, except as noted
herein.
other damp areas. Provide steel access doors with prime coat of baked-on paint for all
other areas.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 16
and primary entrance areas. Coordinate with the Architect when access is required in
these areas.
2.9.5 Where specific information or details relating to access panels different from the above
is shown or given on the Drawings or other Divisions of work, then that information shall

offering products which may be incorporated into the Work include Milcor, Karp,
Nystrom, or Cesco, equal to the following:
2.9.6.1 Milcor
2.9.6.1.3 Style M (Masonry).
2.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
2.10.1 Identify each piece of equipment with a permanently attached engraved bakelite plate,
1/2 inch high white letters on black background.
plastic pipe labels formed to circumference of pipe, requiring no fasteners or adhesive
for attachment to pipe.
2.11.2 The legends and flow arrows shall conform to ASME A13.1.
2.12 INSULATION WORK
2.12.1 General:
2.12.1.1 Insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets,

adhesives, sealants and coatings shall not contain polybrominated diphenyl
ethers (PBDEs) in penta, octa, or deca formulations in amounts greater than
0.1 percent (by mass).
2.12.1.2 Adhesives and sealants shall comply with testing and product requirements
of South Coast Air Quality Management District, Rule 1168.
2.12.1.3 The term "piping" used herein includes pipe, valves, strainers and fittings.
2.12.1.4 Apply insulating cement to fittings, valves and strainers and trowel smooth
to the thickness of adjacent covering. Cover with jacket to match piping.
Extend covering on valves up to the bonnet. Leave strainer cleanout plugs
accessible.
2.12.1.5 Provide pre-formed PVC valve and fitting covers.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 17
2.12.1.6 Provide Calcium Silicate rigid insulation and sheet metal sleeve, 18 inch
minimum length at each pipe hanger. Seal ends of insulation to make vapor
tight with jacket.
2.12.1.7 Urethane insulation will not be allowed above ground or on hot water piping.
2.12.1.8 Test insulation, jackets and lap-seal adhesives as a composite product and
not more than 50 when tested in accordance with UL723 or ASTM E84.
2.12.1.9 Clean thoroughly, test and have approved, all piping and equipment before
2.12.1.10 Repair all damage to existing pipe and equipment insulation whether or not
caused during the work of this contract, to match existing adjacent insulation
for thickness and finish, but conforming to flame spread and smoke ratings
specified above.
2.12.2 Insulation of Piping:
2.12.2.1 Insulate domestic hot and tempered water with 1 inch thick 3-1/2# minimum
density fiberglass with ASJ-SSL jacket for sizes up to and including 3/4
inches. For larger sizes, provide 1-1/2 inch thick 3-1/2# minimum density
fiberglass insulation and ASJ-SSL jacket.
2.12.2.2 Insulate domestic hot water piping under slab on grade and cold water
piping exposed to the weather with 3/4" thick Therma-Cel, Armaflex, or
equal; seal water tight per manufacturer's directions.
2.12.2.3 Insulate horizontal, overhead rainwater leaders and condensate drains

within the building envelope with 1 inch thick, 3-1/2# density fiberglass, with
ASJ-SSL jacket.
2.12.2.4 Insulate domestic cold water piping outside of insulation envelope in outside
walls, vented attic spaces, and unheated spaces, including equipment
rooms and below raised floor with 1 inch thick molded fiberglass, minimum
density 3-1/2# per cubic foot, with ASJ-SSL jacket.
2.12.2.5 Exposed insulated piping within the building shall have a Zeston 2000
25/50, Proto Lo-Smoke, or equal, PVC jacket and fitting cover installed over
the insulation, applied per manufacturer's instructions. Verify suitability with
manufacturer of insulation. Insulation with pre-applied polymer jacket may
be substituted at Contractors option.
2.12.2.6 Where insulated piping is exposed to the weather apply aluminum jacket
secured with 1/2 inch aluminum bands on 12 inch centers. Cover fittings
with glass cloth and two coats of Foster's Sealfas 30-36, Zeston 2000, or
equal, PVC fitting covers. Insulation shall be vapor tight before applying
metal jacket or PVC covers.
2.12.2.6.1 Pipes 10 inches diameter and smaller: Minimum .016 inch

thick jacket.
2.12.2.6.2 Pipes 12 inches diameter and larger: Minimum .020 inch

thick jacket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
JKA #15-100 220050 - 18
3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION
3.1.1 Refer to Division 01 Sections Cutting and Patching and Selective Demolition for
3.1.2 Disconnect, dismantle and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components

remain with same or compatible piping material. Refrigerant system must
be evacuated per EPA requirements.
remove equipment.

3.1.2.5 Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services

and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
3.1.3 If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is

unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new
products of equal capacity and quality.
California Electrical Code. Coordinate the Mechanical Work with the Electrical Work to
comply.
3.2.2 Furnish necessary control diagrams and instructions for the controls. Before permitting
operation of any equipment which is furnished, installed, or modified under this Section,
review all associated electrical work, including overload protection devices, and assume
complete responsibility for the correctness of the electrical connections and protective
devices. Motors and control equipment shall conform to the Standards of the National
Electrical Manufacturers' Association. All equipment and connections exposed to the
weather shall be NEMA IIIR with factory-wired strip heaters in each starter enclosure
and temperature control panel where required to inhibit condensation.
3.2.3 All line voltage and low voltage wiring and conduit associated with the Temperature
Control System are included in this Section. Wiring and conduit shall comply with
Division 26.
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 19
3.4.2 Priming:
factory-finished shall be primed. Black steel pipe exposed to the weather
shall be painted one coat of Rust-Oleum #1069 primer for black steel piping
or Rust-Oleum #5260, Kelly Moore, or equal, primer for galvanized piping.
3.4.2.2 Metal surfaces of items to be jacketed or insulated except piping shall be

given two coats of primer unless furnished with equivalent factory finish.
Items to be primed shall be properly cleaned by effective means free of rust,
dirt, scale, grease and other deleterious matter and then primed with the
best available grade of zinc rich primer. After erection or installation, all
primed surfaces shall be properly cleaned of any foreign or deleterious
matter that might impair proper bonding of subsequent paint coatings. Any
abrasion or other damage to the shop or field prime coat shall be properly
repaired and touched up with the same material used for the original
priming.
3.4.2.3 Where equipment is provided with nameplate data, the nameplate should be
material.
3.5 EXCAVATING
3.5.1 Perform all excavating required for work of this Section. Provide the services of a
pipe/cable locating service prior to excavating activities to determine location of existing
utilities.
3.5.2 Unless shown otherwise, provide a minimum of 2'-6" cover above top of pipe to finished
grade for all service piping, unless otherwise noted. Trim trench bottom by hand or
provide a 4 inch deep minimum bed of sand to provide a uniform grade and firm support
throughout entire length of pipe. For all PVC pipe and for PE gas pipe, bed the pipe in 4
inch sand bed. Pipe bedding materials should be clean crushed rock, gravel or sand of
which 100 percent will pass a 1 inch sieve. For pipes that are larger than 10 inches in
diameter, at least 95 percent should pass a 3/4 inch sieve, and for pipes 10 inches in
diameter or smaller, 100 percent should pass a 1/2 inch sieve. All other materials
should have a minimum sand equivalent of 50. Only a small proportion of the native
soils will meet these requirements without extensive processing; therefore, importation
of pipe bedding materials should be anticipated. Pipe bedding materials shall be
compacted in lifts not exceeding 6 inches in compacted thickness. Each lift shall be
compacted to not less than 90 percent relative compaction at or above the optimum
moisture content, in accordance with ASTM Specification D2940, except that bedding
materials graded such that less than 100 percent will pass a No. 200 sieve shall be
compacted in 6 inch lifts using a single pass of a flat-plate, vibratory compactor or
vibratory drum. Pipe bedding materials should extend at least to the spring line.
3.5.3 Maintain all warning signs, barricades, flares, and red lanterns as required.
3.5.4 For all trenches 5 feet or more in depth, submit copy of permit detailed drawings
showing shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for worker protection
from the hazard of caving ground during the excavation of such trenches. Obtain a
permit from the Division of Industrial Safety prior to beginning excavations. A copy of
the permit shall be available at the site at all times.
JKA #15-100 220050 - 20
3.6 BACKFILLING
3.6.1 Backfill shall comply with applicable provisions of Division 31 of these Specifications.
3.6.2 Except under existing or proposed paved areas, walks, roads, or similar surfaces,
backfill for other types of pipe shall be made using suitable excavated material or other
approved material. Place backfill in 8 inch layers, measured before compaction, and
compact with impact hammer to at least 90 percent relative compaction per ASTM
D2940.
3.6.2.1 Backfill plastic pipe and insulated pipe with sand for a minimum distance of
12 inches above the top of the pipe. Compact using mechanical tamping
equipment.
3.6.3 Entire backfill for excavations under existing or proposed pavements, walks, roads, or
similar surfaces, under new slabs on grade, shall be made with clean sand compacted
with mechanical tamping equipment vibrator to at least 90 percent relative compaction
per ASTM D2940. Remove excess earth. Increase the minimum compaction within the
uppermost two feet of backfill to 95 percent.
3.6.4 Replace or repair to its original condition all sod, concrete, asphalt paving, or other
materials disturbed by the trenching operation. Repair within the guarantee period as
required.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF VALVES
3.7.1 Install valves as indicated on Drawings and in the following locations:
3.7.1.1 Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, and on
inlet of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.7.1.2 Drain Valves: Install on each plumbing equipment item located to

completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each
riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere indicated
or required to completely drain potable water system.
3.7.1.3 Provide gate or globe valves on inlet and outlet of each water heater or
pump.
3.7.2 General:
3.7.2.1 Valves shall be full line size unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.
3.7.2.2 Install horizontal valves with valve stem above horizontal, except butterfly
valves.
3.7.2.3 Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to
allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system
shutdown.
3.7.2.4 Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where
necessary.
3.7.2.5 Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
no tool marks or exposed threads.
JKA #15-100 220050 - 21
3.7.2.7 Butterfly valves conforming to the paragraph Butterfly Valves may be used
in lieu of gate or globe valves for locations above grade.
3.7.2.8 Ball valves conforming to the paragraph Ball Valves may be used in lieu of
gate valves for locations above grade for services 2-1/2 inches and smaller.
3.7.2.9 Valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller (except ball valves) in nonferrous water
piping systems may be solder joint type with bronze body and trim.
3.7.2.10 Rigidly fasten hose bibbs, hydrants, fixture stops, compressed air outlets,
and similar items to the building construction.
3.7.3 Gate Valves:
3.7.3.1 Furnish valves in copper lines with adapters to suit valve / line requirements.
3.7.3.2 Underground gate valves:
3.7.3.2.1 Underground valves 3 inches and smaller may be furnished

with operating nuts or hand-wheels, and with Ring-Tite joint
ends.
3.7.3.2.2 Furnish and deliver to Owner one wrench of each size

required for operating underground valves.
3.7.4 Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
3.7.5 Gas Shut-Off Valves:
3.7.5.1 Provide line size ball valve in gas line to each appliance.
3.7.6 Valve Adjustment: Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been
tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if
persistent leaking occurs.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
and gas piping from existing systems, on site or off site, perform a pressure test to
indicate static pressure of existing systems. If pressure on water piping is greater than
80 psi, or gas pressure is not as indicated on Contract Documents, inform Architect
immediately. Do not allow piping systems to be pressurized without written consent of
the Architect.
3.8.2 General:
3.8.2.1 All piping shall be concealed unless shown or otherwise directed. Allow
3.8.2.2 Installation of piping shall be made with appropriate fittings. Bending of

piping will not be accepted.
3.8.2.3 Install piping to permit application of insulation and to allow valve servicing.
3.8.2.4 Where piping or conduit is left exposed within a room, the same shall be run
true to plumb, horizontal, or intended planes. Where possible, uniform

JKA #15-100 220050 - 22
margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and/or adjacent wall,
floor, or ceiling surfaces.
shall provide for a maximum headroom clearance. The clearance shall not
be less than 6'-6" without written approval from the Architect.
3.8.2.6 Close ends of pipe immediately after installation. Leave closure in place
until removal is necessary for completion of installation.
3.8.2.8 Pipe the discharge of each relief valve, air vent, backflow preventer, and
similar device to floor sink or drain.
air.
3.8.2.13 Service Markers: Mark the location of each plugged or capped pipe with a 4
inch round by 30 inch long concrete marker, set flush with finish grade.
Provide 2-1/2 inch diameter engraved brass plate as part of monument
marker.
3.8.2.14 Furnish and install anchors or thrust blocks on PVC water lines in the
ground, at all changes in direction of piping, and at all connections or
branches from mains 1-1/2 inch and larger. Form anchors or thrust blocks
by pouring concrete between pipe and trench wall. Thrust blocks shall be of
adequate size and so placed as to take thrusts created by maximum internal
water pressure. Sizing and placement shall be per manufacturer's
recommendations, CPC, and IAPMO installation standards. Anchor piping
to building construction.
3.8.2.15 Sanitary Sewer and Storm Drain: Grade piping inside building uniformly 1/4
inch per foot if possible but not less than 1/8 inch per foot. Run piping as
straight as possible. Make piping connections between building piping and
outside service pipe with cast iron reducers or increasers. Slope sewers
uniformly between given elevations where invert elevations are shown.
3.8.2.16 Where piping is installed in walls within one inch of the face of stud, provide
a 16 gauge sheet metal shield plate on the face of the stud. The shield
plate shall extend a minimum of 1-1/2 inches beyond the outside diameter of
the pipe.
3.8.3 Sleeves:
3.8.3.1 Install Adjus-to-Crete, Pipeline Seal and Insulator, or equal, pipe sleeves of
sufficient size to allow for free motion of pipe, 24 gauge galvanized steel.
The space between pipe and sleeves through floor slabs on ground, through
JKA #15-100 220050 - 23
outside walls above or below grade, through roof, and other locations as
directed shall be caulked with oakum and mastic and made watertight. The
space between pipe and sleeve and between sleeve and slab or wall shall
be sealed watertight.
3.8.3.2 At Contractor's option, Link-Seal, Metraflex Metraseal, or equal, casing

seals may be used in lieu of caulking. Wrap pipes through slabs on grade
with 1 inch thick fiberglass insulation to completely isolate the pipe from the
concrete.
3.8.4.1 Fit all pipes with or without insulation passing through walls, floors, or
ceilings, and all hanger rods penetrating finished ceilings with chrome-plated
or stainless escutcheon plates.
3.8.5 Firestopping:
3.8.5.1 Pack the annular space between the pipe sleeves and the pipe through all
floors and walls with UL listed fire stop, and sealed at the ends. All pipe
penetrations shall be UL listed, Hilti, 3M Pro-Set, or equal.
3.8.5.1.1 Install fire caulking behind mechanical services installed

construction.
3.8.5.2 Provide SpecSeal Systems UL fire rated sleeve/coupling penetrators for

each pipe penetration or fixture opening passing through floors, walls,
partitions or floor/ceiling assemblies. All Penetrators shall comply with UL
Fire Resistance Directory (Latest Edition), and in accordance with Chapter
7, CBC requirements.
3.8.5.3 Sleeve penetrators shall have a built in anchor ring for waterproofing and
anchoring into concrete pours or use the special fit cored hole penetrator for
cored holes.
3.8.5.4 Copper and steel piping shall have SpecSeal plugs on both sides of the
penetrator to reduce noise and to provide waterproofing.
3.8.5.5 All above Systems to be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
3.8.5.6 Alternate firestopping systems are acceptable if approved equal. However,

any deviation from the above specification requires the Contractor to be
responsible for determining the suitability of the proposed products and their
intended use, and the Contractor shall assume all risks and liabilities
whatsoever in connection therewith.
3.8.6 Flashing:
3.8.6.1 Flashing for penetrations of metal or membrane roof for mechanical items
such as flues and pipes shall be coordinated with the roofing manufacturer
and roofing installer for the specific roofing type. The work of this section
shall include furnishing, layout, sizing, and coordination of penetrations
required for the mechanical work.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 24
3.8.6.1.1 Furnish and install flashing and counterflashing in strict
conformance with the requirements of the roofing
manufacturer. Submit shop drawing details for review prior
to installation.
3.8.6.1.2 Furnish and install counterflashing above each flashing

required. Provide Stoneman, or equal, vandalproof top and
flashing combination. Provide vandalproof top for each
plumbing vent through roof. Elmdor/Stoneman Model 1540,
1550, 1570, or equal.
3.8.6.2 For all other types of roofing system, furnish and install around each pipe,
where it passes through roof, a flashing and counterflashing. All flashing
shall be made of four pound seamless sheet lead with 6 inch minimum skirt
and steel reinforced boot. Counterflashing shall be cast iron. For vents,
provide vandalproof top and flashing combination. Elmdor/Stoneman Model
1100-4, 1100-5, 1100-7, or equal.
3.8.7.1 General: Support all equipment and piping so that it is firmly held in place
by approved iron hangers and supports and special hangers as required.
All components shall support weight of equipment and pipe, fluid, and pipe
insulation based on spacing between supports with minimum factor of safety
of five based on ultimate strength of material used. Do not exceed
manufacturer's load rating. Pipe attachments or hangers, of same size as
pipe or tubing on which used, or nearest available. Rigidly fasten hose
faucets, fixture stops, compressed air outlets, and similar items to the
building construction. The Architect shall approve all hanger material before
installation. Do not support piping with plumbers' tape, wire rope, wood, or
other makeshift devices. Where building structural members do not match
piping support spacing, provide all bridging support members as required
firmly attached to building structural members in a fashion approved by the
Structural Engineer.
3.8.7.1.1 Materials, design, and type numbers per Manufacturers'

Standardization Society (MSS), Standard Practice (SP)-58.
3.8.7.2 Hanger components shall be provided by one manufacturer B-Line, Grinnell,

Uni-Strut, Badger, or equal.
3.8.7.3 Pipe Hanger and Support Spacing:
3.8.7.3.1 Vertical piping support spacing: B-line #B3373 clamps

attached to the pipe above each floor to rest on the floor.
Provide with lead or Teflon liners on copper tubing. Provide
additional support at base of cast iron risers and support at
unsupported riser joints and horizontal offsets per 2007
Mason Industries Seismic Restraint Guidelines. Provide
intermediate support for vertical piping, spaced at or within
the following maximum limits.
Pipe Steel Steel Copper Copper CPVC & PVC

Diameter Fluid Vapor Fluid Vapor (Note 2)
1/2 - 1 12 ft. 6 ft. 10 ft. 6 ft. Base and Each

JKA #15-100 220050 - 25
Floor (Note 1)
1-1/4 - 2 12 ft. Each 10 ft. 6 ft. Base and Each

Floor Floor (Note 1)

Over 4 12 ft. Each 10 ft. 10 ft. Base and Each

3.8.7.3.1.1 Note 1: Provide mid-story guides.
3.8.7.3.1.2 Note 2: For PVC piping, provide for

expansion every 30 feet per IAPMO
installation standard.
3.8.7.3.2 Vertical cast iron piping support spacing: Base and each
floor not to exceed 15 feet.
3.8.7.3.3 Horizontal piping, hanger and support spacing: Locate

hangers and supports at each change of direction, within
one foot of elbow, and spaced at or within following
maximum limits.
Pipe Steel Steel Copper Copper CPVC

Diameter Fluid Vapor Fluid Vapor & PVC
1/2 - 1" 6 ft. 6 ft. 5 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft.
1-1/4 - 2" 7 ft. 10 ft. 6 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft.
2-1/2 - 3" 10 ft. 10 ft. 10 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft.
Over 4" 10 ft. 10 ft. 10 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft.
3.8.7.3.4 Horizontal cast iron piping support spacing:
3.8.7.3.4.1 Support piping at every other joint for piping

length of less than 4 feet.
3.8.7.3.4.2 For piping longer than 4 feet, provide

support on each side of the coupling, within
18 inches of each joint.
3.8.7.3.4.3 Hanger shall not be installed on the

coupling.
3.8.7.3.4.4 Provide support at each horizontal branch

connection.
3.8.7.3.4.5 Provide sway brace at 40 foot maximum

spacing for all suspended pipe with no-hub
joints, except where a lesser spacing is
indicated in the 2007 Mason Industries
JKA #15-100 220050 - 26
Seismic Restraint Guidelines. Provide a
brace on each side of a change in direction
of 90 degrees or more. Brace riser joints at
each floor and at 15 foot maximum
intervals.
3.8.7.4 Individually Suspended Piping:
3.8.7.4.1 Individually suspended piping: B-Line B3690 J-Hanger or

B3100 Clevis, complete with threaded rod, or equal. All
hangers on supply and return piping handling heating hot
water or steam shall have a swing connector at point of
support.
Pipe Size Rod Size Diameter
2" and Smaller 3/8"
2-1/2" to 3-1/2" 1/2"
4" to 5" 5/8"
6" 3/4"
3.8.7.4.2 Provide 3/8 inch rod for support of PVC and CPVC and
provide continuous support.
3.8.7.4.3 Trapeze Suspension: B-Line 1-5/8 inch width channel in

accordance with manufacturer's published load ratings. No
deflection to exceed 1/180 of a span.
3.8.7.4.4 Trapeze Supporting Rods: Shall have a safety factor of

five; securely anchor to building structure.
3.8.7.4.5 Pipe Clamps and Straps: B-Line B2000, B2400; isolate

copper pipe with two thicknesses of 2 inches wide 10-mil
polyvinyl tape. Where used for seismic support systems,
provide B-Line B2400 series pipe straps.
3.8.7.4.6 Concrete Inserts: B-line B22-I continuous insert or B2500

spot insert. Do not use actuated fasteners for support of
overhead piping unless approved by Architect.
3.8.7.4.7 Steel Connectors: Beam clamps with retainers.

required to suit structure. Provide lag screws or through
bolts with length to suit requirements, and with size
(diameter) to match the size of hanger rods required.
3.8.7.5.1.1 Do not install Lag screws in tension without

Engineer.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 27
3.8.7.5.1.2 Blocking for support of piping shall be not

size (water filled) or 3 inch size (vapor
filled). Provide 3 inch blocking for piping up
through 5 inch size, and 4 inch blocking for
larger piping. Provide support for blocking
in accordance with Structural Engineers
requirements.
3.8.7.5.1.3 Where lag screws are used, length of screw

screw.

length to suit requirements of the structural components.
Burning or welding on any structural member may only be
done if approved by the Architect.
3.8.7.6 Rubber Neoprene Pipe Isolators:
3.8.7.6.1 Pipe isolators shall comprise an internal rubber or neoprene

material that isolates pipe from hanger and structure. Install
at all piping located in acoustical walls. Refer to
Architectural Drawings for location of acoustical walls.
3.8.7.6.2 Isolation material shall be either a rubber or neoprene

material that prevents contact between the pipe and the
structure. The rubber shall have between a 45 to 55
durometer rating and a minimum thickness of 1/2 inch.
3.8.7.6.3 Acceptable Suppliers:
3.8.7.6.3.1 Vertical runs: Acousto-Plumb or equal.
3.8.7.6.3.2 Horizontal runs: B-Line, Vibraclamp;

Acousto-Plumb or equal.
3.8.7.7 Provide continuous V channel support for all horizontal plastic piping.
3.8.7.8 Provide support for piping through roof, arranged to anchor piping solidly in
place at the roof penetration.
3.8.7.10 Insulate copper tubing from ferrous materials and hangers with two
thicknesses of 3 inch wide, 10 mil polyvinyl tape wrapped around pipe.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 28
3.9 PIPE JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
3.9.1 General:
3.9.1.1 Cutting: Cut pipe and tubing square, remove rough edges or burrs. Bevel
plain ends of steel pipe.
3.9.1.2 Remove scale, slag, dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipe before
assembly.
3.9.1.3 Boss or saddle type fittings or mechanically extracted tube joints will not be
allowed.
3.9.2 Threaded Pipe: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
3.9.2.1 Apply thread compound to external pipe threads: Rectorseal No. 5,

Permatex No. 1, or equal.
3.9.2.2 Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged.
3.9.3 Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size,
type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and
bolts according to ASME B31.9.
3.9.4 Joint Construction for Solvent-Cemented Plastic Piping: Clean and dry joining surfaces.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
3.9.4.1 Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers,
and solvent cements. Apply primer.
3.9.4.2 CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3.9.4.3 PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
3.9.5 Copper Pipe and Tubing (Except pneumatic control piping): All joints shall be brazed
according to ASME Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications, except domestic
water piping 1-1/4 inches and smaller when not buried in the ground or concrete and
type DWV plumbing piping may be soldered.
3.9.5.1 Soldered joints: Apply water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube
and fittings according to ASTM B 828.
3.9.6 Cast Iron Soil Pipe:
3.9.6.1 No-Hub fittings shall be made with a torque wrench.
3.9.6.2 Hub joints shall be with Ty-Seal couplings.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 29
3.9.6.3 Wrought iron, steel, or copper pipe shall have a ring or part of a coupling
screwed on to form a spigot end if caulked into a joint.
3.9.6.4 Connect cast iron sewer piping to outside service pipe with cast iron or
vitrified clay reducers or increasers as required. Caulking of smaller pipe
into the larger without a reducer or increaser will not be permitted.
3.9.7 Clay Sewer Pipe: Joints in bell and spigot clay sewer pipe shall comply with ASTM
C-425, made with an approved type of interlocking, resilient mechanical compression
joint, formed on the pipe at the factory. Lubricate inside of bells and outside of spigots
with a solution as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
3.9.8 Welded Pipe:
3.9.8.1 Make up with oxyacetylene or electric arc process.
3.9.8.2 All welding shall conform to the American Standard Code for Power Piping
ASME B-31.1. When requested by the Architect, furnish certification from
an approved testing agency or National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau that
the welders performing the work are qualified.
3.9.8.3 All line welds shall be of the single "V" butt type. Welds for flanges shall be
of the fillet type.
3.9.8.4 Where the branch is two pipe sizes smaller than the main or smaller,
Bonney Weldolets, Threadolets, Nibco, or equal, may be used in lieu of
welding tees.
3.9.9 PVC Sewer and Drainage Pipe (outside building as allowed only): Four inches and
larger shall be bell and spigot, assembled in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Joint shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D3212. Solvent weld
joints below 4 inches in size, schedule 40 PVC with matching fittings, assembled per
3.9.10 Polyethylene Pipe: Assemble with fusion joints in strict accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.9.11 Make joints in PVC water pipe with PVC couplings and rubber rings, Manville Ring-Tite,
PW Pipe, or equal. Check final location of rubber rings with the couplings with gauge or
as recommended by the manufacturer. Make joints between PVC pipe and cast iron
pipe or fittings using cast iron or PVC adapter fittings, installed as recommended by the
manufacturer. Ring-Tite PVC or cast iron pipe fittings may be used in lieu of standard
fittings. Make connection to valves with cast iron adapters connected to the water pipe
with PVC couplings.
3.9.12 Flexible Connections:
3.9.12.1 Furnish and install Thermo Tech., Inc. F/J/R, Metraflex, or equal, flexible
couplings with limiter bolts on piping connections to all equipment mounted
on anti-vibration bases, on each connection to each base mounted pump
and where shown. Couplings shall be suitable for pressure and type of
service.
3.9.12.2 Anchor piping securely on the system side of each flexible connection.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 30
3.10.1 Install Watts, Epco, Nibco, or equal, dielectric unions or flanges at points of connection
between copper or brass piping or material and steel or cast iron pipe or material except
in drain, waste, vent, or rainwater piping. Bushings or couplings shall not be used.
Dielectric unions installed in potable water systems shall conform to the lead-free
requirements of the California Health and Safety Code Section 116875.
3.10.2 Install unions in piping NPS 2 and smaller, and flanges in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger
whether shown or not at each connection to all equipment and tanks, and at all
connections to all automatic valves, such as temperature control valves. Unions
installed in potable water systems shall conform to the lead-free requirements of the
California Health and Safety Code Section 116875.
3.10.3 Locate the unions for easy removal of the equipment, tank, or valve.
3.11 ACCESS DOOR
maintenance of mechanical systems; for example, at concealed valves, strainers, traps,
cleanouts, dampers, motors, controls, operating equipment, etc. Access doors shall
provide for complete removal and replacement of equipment.
3.12 CONCRETE WORK
3.12.1 Concrete work required for work of this Section shall be included under another section
of the Specification, unless otherwise noted, including poured-in-place concrete work for
installing precast manholes, catch basins, etc., and shall include reinforced concrete
bases for pumps, tanks, compressors, fan units, boilers, unless the work is specifically
indicated on the Drawings to be furnished under this Section.
3.12.2 Thrust blocks, underground anchors, and pads for cleanouts, valve access boxes and
washer boxes are included under this Section of the Specification. Concrete shall be
3000 psi test minimum. Refer to Division 03 for concrete types.
3.13 PIPE PROTECTION
3.13.1 Wrap bare galvanized and black steel pipe buried in the ground and to 6" above grade,
including piping in conduit, with one of the following, or equal:
3.13.1.1 Polyethylene Coating: Pressure sensitive polyethylene coating, "X-

Tru-Coat" as manufactured by Pipe Line Service Corporation or "Green
Line" wrap as manufactured by Roystron Products, or equal.
3.13.1.1.1 Field Joints and Fittings: Protecto Wrap #1170 tape as

manufactured by Pipe Line Service Corporation, or Primer
#200 tape by Roystron Products, or equal. Installation shall
be as per manufacturer's recommendation and instructions.
3.13.1.2 Tape Wrap: Pressure-sensitive polyvinyl chloride tape, "Transtex #V-l0 or

V-20", "Scotchwrap 50", Slipknot l00, Pabco, or equal, with continuous
identification. Tape shall be a minimum of 20 mils thick for fittings and
irregular surfaces, two wraps, 50 percent overlap, 40 mils total thickness.
Tape shall be laminated with a suitable adhesive; widths as recommended
by the manufacturer for the pipe size. Wrap straight lengths of piping with
an approved wrapping machine.
3.13.2 Field Joints: Valves and Fittings: double wrap polyvinyl chloride tape as above. Provide
at least two thicknesses of tape over the joint and extend a minimum of 4 inches over
JKA #15-100 220050 - 31
adjacent pipe covering. Build up with primer to match adjacent covering thickness.
Width of tape of fittings shall not exceed 3 inches. Tape shall adhere tightly to all
surfaces of the fittings without air pockets.
3.13.3 Testing: Test completed wrap of piping, including all epoxy painted piping with Tinker
and Rasor Co. test machine (San Gabriel, CA - 818-287-5259), Pipeline Inspection
Company (Houston, TX - 713-681-5837), or equal.
3.13.4 Cleaning: Clean all piping thoroughly before wrapping.
3.13.4.1 Inspection: Damaged or defective wraps shall be repaired as directed. No

wrapped pipe shall be covered until approved by Architect.
3.13.5 Sleeve copper piping/tubing installed below slab with Polywrap-C polyethylene sleeve,
as manufactured by Northtown Pipe Protection Products, or equal. Sleeve shall be a
minimum of 6 mils thick, colored blue for domestic water piping and orange for other
piping. Install sleeve per manufacturers recommendations and instructions.
3.13.6 Sleeve copper piping/tubing installed outside building below grade with Polywrap-C
polyethylene sleeve, as manufactured by Northtown Pipe Protection Products, or equal.
Sleeve shall be a minimum of 6 mils thick, colored blue for domestic water piping. Install
sleeve per manufacturers recommendations and instructions.
3.13.7 Sleeve cast iron and ductile iron pipe below grade and below slab with Polywrap
polyethylene sleeve, as manufactured by Northtown Pipe Protection Products, or equal.
Sleeve shall be a minimum of 8 mils thick, colored natural. Install sleeve per
manufacturers recommendations and instructions.
3.13.8 Covering: No rocks or sharp edges shall be backfilled against the wrap. When
backfilling with other than sand, protect wrap with an outer wrapping of Kraft paper;
leave in place during backfill.
3.14.1 Provide temporary identification of each pipe installed, at the time of installation.
Temporary identification shall be removed and replaced with permanent identification as
part of the work.
3.14.2 Apply the legend and flow arrow at all valve locations; at all points where the piping
enters or leaves a wall, partition, cluster of piping or similar obstruction, at each change
of direction and at approximately 20'-0" intervals on pipe runs. Variations or changes in
locations and spacing may be made with the approval of the Architect. There shall be at
least one marking in each room. Markings shall be located for maximum visibility from
expected personnel approach.
3.14.3 Wherever two or more pipes run parallel, the markings shall be supplied in the same
relative location on each.
3.14.4 Apply markings after painting and cleaning of piping and insulation is completed.
3.15 EXPANSION ANCHORS IN HARDENED CONCRETE
3.15.1 Refer to Structural Drawings.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 32
3.16.1 Test the installations in accordance with the following requirements and all applicable
codes:
3.16.1.1 Inspector of Record should witness all tests of piping systems.
3.16.1.2 Notify the Architect at least seven days in advance of any test.
3.16.1.3 All piping shall be tested at completion of roughing-in, or at other times as

directed by the Architect.
3.16.1.4 Furnish all necessary materials, test pumps, gases, instruments and labor
3.16.1.5 Isolate from the system all equipment that may be damaged by test
pressure.
3.16.1.6 Make connections to existing systems with flanged connection. During

testing of the new work, provide a slip-in plate to restrict test pressure to
new systems only. Remove plate and complete connection to existing
system at completion of testing.
3.16.1.6.1 Inspector of record shall witness final connection to system.
3.16.2 Test Schedule: No loss in pressure or visible leaks shall show after four hours at the
pressures indicated.
Testing of Sanitary Sewer, Drain, Vent, Storm Drain may be done in segments in order to limit
pressure to within manufacturers recommendations. Test to 10 feet above the highest
point in the system.
System Tested Test Pressure PSI Test With
Sanitary Sewer, Drain, Vent 10 Ft. Hd. Water
Storm Drain, Condensate Drains 10 Ft. Hd. Water
Domestic Water 125 Water
Natural Gas (PE) 60 Air & Non-corrosive

Leak Test Fluid
Natural Gas (Steel) 100 Air & Non-corrosive

Leak Test Fluid
3.16.2.1 Non-corrosive leak test fluid shall be suitable for use with the piping material
specified, and with the type of gas conveyed by the piping system.
3.16.3 Perform operational tests under simulated or actual service conditions, including one
test of complete plumbing installation with all fixtures and other appliances connected,
and one test of complete installation of 48 hours each for heating and cooling with all
equipment connected and operating.
3.16.4 Should any material or work fail in any of these tests, it shall be immediately removed
and replaced for new material, and portion of the work replaced shall again be tested by

JKA #15-100 220050 - 33
3.17 TRACER WIRES
3.17.1 Provide tracer wire for non-metallic gas and water pipe in ground outside of buildings.
Use AWG #12 tracer wire with low density high molecular weight polyethylene
insulation, and lay continuously on pipe so that it is not broken or stressed by backfilling
operations. Secure wire to the piping with tape at 18 inch intervals. Solder all joints.
Tracer wire insulation shall be colored yellow for gas piping, blue for water piping.
3.17.2 Terminals: Precast concrete box and cast iron locking traffic cover, Brooks 3TL, or
equal; cover marked with name of service; 6 inches of loose gravel below box. Plastic
terminal board with brass bolts; identify line direction with plastic tags. Test for continuity
between terminals, after backfilling, in presence of Inspector.
3.17.3 Alternate: Use electronically detectable plastic tape with metallic core, Terra Tape D,
manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc., Seton, Inc., Marking Services, Inc., or equal; tape
2 inches wide, continuously imprinted "CAUTION WATER (GAS, etc.) LINE BELOW".
Install, with printed side up, directly over pipe, 18 inches below finish grade. Backfill
material shall be as specified for the particular condition where pipe is installed, but
avoid use of crushed rock or of earth with particles larger than l/2 inch within the top 12
inches of backfill. Take precautions to insure that tape is not damaged or misplaced
during backfill operations. Terminal boxes not required.
3.18 OPERATION OF SYSTEMS
3.18.1 Do not operate any plumbing equipment for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until
all of the following has been completed:
3.18.1.1 Complete all requirements listed under Check, Test and Start
Requirements.
3.18.1.2 Piping has been properly cleaned. Piping systems shall be flushed and
treated prior to operation.
3.18.1.3 Filters, strainers etc. are in place.
3.18.1.4 Bearings have been lubricated, and alignment of rotating equipment has
been checked.
3.18.1.5 Equipment has been run under observation, and is operating in a

satisfactory manner.
3.18.2 Provide test and balance agency with one set of Contract Drawings, Specifications,
Addenda, Change orders issued, applicable shop drawings and submittals and
temperature control drawings.
3.19.1 An authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer shall perform check, test
and start of each piece of plumbing equipment. The representative may be an
perform the check test and start of the equipment.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 34
requirement.
3.19.1.4 When work has been completed, provide copies of reports for review, prior
to final observation of work.
of equipment. Indicate frequency of service, recommended spare parts (including filters
and lubricants), and methods for adjustment and alignment of all equipment
components. Provide a copy of the schedule with each operating and maintenance
manual. Provide a copy of certification from the Owners representative indicating that
they have been properly instructed in maintenance requirements for the equipment
installed.
3.20 PRELIMINARY OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS
3.20.1 Prior to observation to determine final acceptance, put all mechanical systems into
service and check that work required for that purpose has been done, including but not
limited to the following condensed check list. Provide indexed report to tabulating the
results of all work.
3.20.1.1 All equipment has been started, checked, lubricated and adjusted in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.20.1.3 Specified filters are installed and spare filters have been turned over to
Owner.
3.20.1.4 All manufacturers certificates of start-up specified have been delivered to

the Owner.
3.20.1.7 Flushing and chemical treatment of piping systems has been completed and
water treatment equipment, where specified, is in operation.
installed.
3.20.1.10 Preliminary test and balance work is complete, and reports have been
forwarded for review.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 35
3.20.1.11 Automatic control set points are as designated and performance of controls
checks out to agree with the sequence of operation.
3.20.1.12 Operation and Maintenance Manuals have been delivered and instructions
to the operating personnel have been made.
3.20.2 Prior to the observation to determine final acceptance, operate all mechanical systems
as required to demonstrate that the installation and performance of these systems
conform to the requirements of these specifications.
3.20.2.1 Operate and test all mechanical equipment and systems for a period of at
least five consecutive 8 hour days to demonstrate the satisfactory overall
operation of the project as a complete unit.
3.20.2.2 Commence tests after preliminary balancing and adjustments to equipment

have been checked. Immediately before starting tests, install air filters and
lubricate all running equipment. Notify the Architect at least seven calendar
days in advance of starting the above tests.
3.20.2.3 During the test period, make final adjustments and balancing of equipment,
systems controls, and circuits so that all are placed in first class operating
condition.
3.20.2.4 Where Utility District rebates are applicable, demonstrate that the systems
meet the rebate program requirements.
3.20.3.1 All tests made by the Contractor or manufacturers' representatives are

subject to observation and review by the Owner. Provide timely notice prior
to start of each test, in order to allow for observation of testing. Upon the
completion of all tests, provide a letter to confirm that all testing has been
successful.
3.20.4 Test Logs:
3.20.4.1 Maintain test logs listing the tests on all mechanical systems showing dates,
items tested, inspectors' names, remarks on success or failure of the tests.
3.20.5 Preliminary Operation:
3.20.5.1 The Owner reserves the right to operate portions of the plumbing system on
a preliminary basis without voiding the guarantee.
3.21 CERTIFICATES OF INSTALLATION
3.21.1 Contractor shall complete applicable Certificates of Installation forms contained in the
California Building Energy Efficiency Standards and submit to the authorities having
jurisdiction for approval and issuance of final occupancy permit, as described in the
California Energy Code.
3.22 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
3.22.1 An authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer shall train Owner-

designated personnel in maintenance and adjustment of equipment. The representative
may be an employee of the equipment manufacturer, or a manufacturer-certified

JKA #15-100 220050 - 36
contractor. Submit written certification from the manufacturer stating that the
representative is qualified to perform the Owner training for the equipment installed.
3.22.1.1 As part of the submittal process, provide a training agenda outlining major
topics and time allowed for each topic.
3.22.1.2 Some items of specified equipment require that training must be performed
by the manufacturer, using manufacturers employees. See specific
equipment Articles in these Specifications for this requirement.
3.22.1.3 Contractor shall provide three copies of certification by Contractor that

training has been completed, signed by Owners representative, for
inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manual. Certificates shall include:
3.22.1.3.1 Listing of Owner-designated personnel completing training,

by name and title.
3.22.1.3.2 Name and title of training instructor.
3.22.1.3.3 Date(s) of training.
3.22.1.3.4 List of topics covered in training sessions.
3.22.1.4 Refer to specific equipment Articles for minimum training period duration for
each piece of equipment.

JKA #15-100 220050 - 37
SECTION 22 10 00
PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1 Pipe and fittings.
1.1.2 Water hammer arrestors.
1.1.3 Hose bibbs.
1.1.4 Wall hydrants.
1.1.5 Gas pressure regulating valve.
1.1.6 Relief valves.
1.1.7 Trap primer.
1.1.8 Cleanouts.
1.1.9 Floor drains.
1.1.10 Floor sinks.
1.1.11 Roof drains and overflow drains.
1.2.2 Section 22 00 50 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods.
1.3.2 Coordinate all of work in this Section with all of the trades covered in other Sections of
the Specifications to provide a complete, operable and sanitary installation of the highest
quality workmanship.
1.3.3 All plumbing work required in the course of this contract shall be performed in strict
accordance with all codes and regulations. Plumbing work done under this contract
shall not adversely affect the operation of the existing plumbing systems. All materials
shall be new and shall match existing.
1.4.1 Furnish and install all plumbing work indicated on the drawings and described herein.
County of Tehama PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS
JKA #15-100 221000 - 1
1.5.1 Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing

piping systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
1.5.2 Contractor's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation

experience on projects with piping systems work similar to that required for project.
1.5.3 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: The publications listed below form a part of this
specification; comply with provisions of these publications except as otherwise shown or
specified.
1.5.3.1 Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of California

Plumbing Code pertaining to selection and installation of plumbing materials
and products.
1.5.3.1.1 NSF Compliance:
1.5.3.1.1.1 Pipe, tube, and fittings used in potable water

systems intended to supply drinking water shall
meet the requirements of NSF-61 2010a, Drinking
Water System Components Health Effects.
1.5.3.1.1.2 Plastic potable water-service piping shall meet the

requirements of NSF 14 2010, Plastic Piping
Components and Related Materials.
1.5.3.2 California Health and Safety Code Compliance: For products covered under
the scope of HSC 116875 for potable water service. Products for potable
water service shall be third-party certified by an approved laboratory as
complying with California Health and Safety Code Section 116875.
1.5.3.3 NFPA/ANSI Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in

accordance with latest edition of NFPA 54/ANSI Z223.1 "National Fuel Gas
Code."
1.5.3.4 Utility Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance
with local gas utility company requirements.
1.5.3.5 CPC Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance
with California Plumbing Code.
1.5.3.6 Provide certified gas welder as defined in California Plumbing Code to weld
all joints in welded gas piping.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions
for plumbing piping systems materials and products.
1.6.2 Provide welding certificate for all gas pipe welders.
1.6.3 Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit Record Drawings of installed piping
systems, in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

JKA #15-100 221000 - 2
1.6.4 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for plumbing piping
systems materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and
record drawings in Operation and Maintenance Manual; in accordance with
requirements of Division 01.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
1.7.1 Cooperation with other trades: Coordinate Work of this Section with that of other
Sections to ensure that Work is carried out in an orderly fashion.
1.7.2 Coordinate with other trades all equipment locations, pipe, duct and conduit runs,
electrical outlets and fixtures, air inlets and outlets, and structural and architectural
features. Provide information on location of piping and seismic bracing to all other
trades as required for a completely coordinated project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure
ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Provide materials and
products complying with California Plumbing Code. Where more than one type of
material or product is indicated, selection from materials or products specified is
Contractor's option.
2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS INSIDE BUILDINGS AND BELOW COVERED WALKS AND CORRIDORS
2.2.1 Drain and Waste Pipe Above Grade: Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, asphaltic coated,
conforming to ASTM A888 and Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard (CISPI) 301 and so
marked. Pipe and fittings shall be as manufactured by AB&I, Charlotte, Tyler Pipe, or
equal. Pipe and fittings shall be the products of a single manufacturer. At Contractors
option, vertical piping above floor from lavatories, sinks, and drinking fountains may be
Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with black cast iron drainage fittings, or DWV copper
pipe and fittings.
2.2.1.1 Joints above grade: No-Hub pipe conforming to ASTM A888 and CISPI 301.
Couplings conforming to ASTM 1277 and CISPI 310, with stainless steel
bands. Provide products by ANACO-Husky, Tyler, Ideal or equal. Provide
sway brace at 20'-0" maximum spacing for suspended pipe with No-Hub
joints. Provide a brace on each side of a change in direction of 90 degrees
or more. Brace riser joints at each floor and at 15 foot maximum intervals
(also see Specification Section 22 00 50).
2.2.2 Drain and Waste Pipe Below Grade: Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, asphaltic coated,
conforming to ASTM A888 and CISPI 301 and so marked. Pipe and fittings shall be as
manufactured by AB&I, Charlotte, Tyler Pipe, or equal. Pipe and fittings shall be the
products of a single manufacturer. At Contractors option, hub and spigot cast iron soil
pipe and fittings, asphaltic coated, conforming to ASTM A-74 and so marked, may be
used.

JKA #15-100 221000 - 3
2.2.2.1 Joints below grade: ANACO-Husky SD 4000, Clamp-All 125, or equal
couplings and No-Hub fittings, meeting the requirements of FM 1680, SD
Class I and ASTM C1540.
2.2.2.2 Joints below grade (hub and spigot option): neoprene gaskets conforming
to ASTM C564, as manufactured by Ty-Seal, Dual-Tite, or equal.
2.2.3 Vent Pipe:
2.2.3.1 3 inch and larger: Cast iron soil pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM A888
and Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard 301 and so marked.
2.2.3.2 2-1/2 inch and smaller: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with black cast
iron drainage fittings, or DWV copper pipe and fittings.
2.2.3.3 Vent pipe buried in ground and to 6 inches above ground: Cast iron soil
pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM A888 and Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Standard 301 and so marked. Joints in cast iron vent pipe shall be the
same as specified for cast iron waste pipe below ground.
2.2.4 Type DWV copper tubing or No-Hub cast iron pipe and fittings may be used for
concealed rainwater leaders. Where no-hub piping is used, the fittings and couplings
shall match those used for waste piping.
2.2.5 Water Pipe (Tempered Water, Tempered Water Return, Hot Water, Hot Water Return
and Cold Water): ASTM B88, Type L copper tubing, hard-temper, with wrought copper
fittings. Provide full solder cup for all fittings. Capped or plugged outlets shall be
Schedule 40 screwed brass. Water piping below slab: ASTM B88, Type K copper
tubing, hard temper, with wrought copper fittings. At Contractors option, pipe runs
below slab having no branches may be ASTM B88, Type K annealed copper tubing
without joints. See Section 22 00 50 for pipe protection requirements for below slab
copper piping.
2.2.6 Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve Piping: ASTM B88, Type L copper tubing,
hard-temper, with wrought copper fittings. Provide full solder cup for all fittings. Capped
or plugged outlets shall be Schedule 40 screwed brass.
2.2.7 Gas Pipe: Schedule 40 black steel conforming to ASTM A53, with malleable iron
screwed fittings above grade for piping 2 inch and smaller; welded piping below grade
and for above grade piping larger than 2 inches, with Class 150 welding fittings.
2.2.7.1 Appliance fuel connectors, as defined in 1203 of the CPC, are not
acceptable for connection of equipment, except where specifically indicated
on the Contract Documents.
2.2.7.2 Where Drawings indicate installation of mechanical equipment on spring

isolation rails or spring mounted curbs, provide flexible connection,
Metraflex, Metraloop, Unisource Mfg. Co. V connector, or equal, CSA
listed for 4 inches of movement.
2.2.7.2.1 Provide CSA certification for gas connections.
2.2.7.3 Provide gas tight Schedule 40 conduit to vent gas piping installed below
covered walks and where noted on drawings (per CPC 1211).
2.2.8 Condensate Drain Piping:

JKA #15-100 221000 - 4
2.2.8.1 Inside buildings provide ASTM B88, Type L copper tubing and fittings.
Provide Wye fittings with capped cleanout plug for tubing up to 1 inch size.
Provide wrought or cast DWV fittings for sizes 1-1/4 inch and larger.
2.2.8.2 Outside buildings provide ASTM B88, Type L copper pipe and fittings, cast
iron drain pipe and fittings or Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe and cast
iron drain or vent fittings.
2.2.8.3 Connect condensate drains to mechanical equipment per equipment

manufacturer's recommendations; provide P-trap where required. Slope
piping to drain, with 1 inch in 10 foot minimum pitch. Provide di-electric
couplings or unions at connections to dissimilar materials.
2.2.8.4 Where Drawings indicate installation of mechanical equipment on spring

isolation rails or spring mounted curbs, provide threaded metal connector at
mechanical equipment, Metraflex Model SST or BST, Unisource Mfg. Co.
V connector, or equal, CSA listed for 4 inches of movement. Arrange
flexible connection to insure drainage of condensate under all installation
conditions, and arrange for support of flexible connection at each end of the
connector, to insure alignment at all times.
2.2.8.5 Where condensate drain P-traps are required, install trap using Wye fitting
on inlet and outlet of trap. Provide cap on top of each Wye, made
removable for cleaning and inspection. Drill 1/8 inch diameter hole in cap at
outlet of the trap to allow venting of the system. Minimum depth of trap
should be 4 inches, or as recommended by the manufacturer in printed
literature.
2.2.8.6 Provide cleanout tees or Y at each change in direction.
2.3 PIPING AND FITTINGS OUTSIDE BUILDINGS AND BEYOND COVERED WALKS
2.3.1 Buried Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping:
2.3.1.1 Install piping from street connection to the property line in accordance with
local requirements.
2.3.1.2 4 inches and larger: PVC, ASTM D3034 - SDR 35; use matching Ring Tite
fittings.
2.3.1.3 3 inches and smaller: Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, asphaltic coated,
conforming to ASTM A888 and Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard 301
and so marked. Pipe and fittings shall be as manufactured by AB&I,
Charlotte, Tyler pipe, or equal. Provide ANACO-Husky SD 4000, Clamp-All
125, or equal couplings and No-Hub fittings, meeting the requirements of
FM 1680, SD Class I and ASTM C1540. Pipe and fittings shall be the
product of a single manufacturer.
2.3.2 Water Service Piping:
2.3.2.1 Sizes 2 inches and larger (not under building): Gasket style PVC
conforming to ASTM D2241-SDR21, Class 200 with gasket type fittings or
ductile iron mechanical joint couplings. Gasket fittings shall be one piece
injection molded PVC fittings, equal to Flo-Seal water main fittings for PVC
pressure pipe, 200 psi, ASTM D-3139.

JKA #15-100 221000 - 5
2.3.2.2 Sizes less than 2 inches: Type K copper tubing, hard temper, with wrought
copper fittings. See Section 22 00 50 for pipe protection requirements for
below grade copper piping.

2.3.2.3.1 J.M. Eagle.
2.3.2.3.2 P.W. Pipe.
2.3.2.3.3 Ipex Series Pipe.
2.3.3 Water Service Piping Above Grade:
2.3.3.1 Sizes 2 inches and larger: Class 150 flanged ductile cast iron water pipe
conforming to AWWA/ANSI C150/A21.50 and manufactured in accordance
with AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51. Fittings shall conform to AWWA/AWWA
C110/A21.10, Class 250 pattern. Pipe and fittings shall have factory applied
cement-mortar lining in accordance with AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.4. Flanges
shall conform to ASME/ANSI B16.1.
2.3.3.2 Piping 1-1/2 inches and smaller: Type L copper tubing, hard temper, with
brazed wrought copper fittings.
2.3.4 Gas Piping Underground: Performance Pipe, DriscoPlex 6500 PE 2708 (yellow),
Polypipe, Inc., Polypipe, or equal, polyethylene gas distribution pipe, ASTM D2513,
ASTM D3261, and ASTM D2683 fittings with fusion welded joints. Provide piping
labeled for natural gas in accordance with CPC.
2.3.4.1 Electrically isolate underground ferrous gas piping from the rest of the gas
system with listed or approved isolation fittings installed a minimum of six
inches above grade.
2.3.4.2 Provide Central Plastics Corp., Perfection, or equal, anodeless, single seal
riser for transition from below grade polyethylene to schedule 40 steel piping
above grade. Minimum horizontal length shall be 30 inches. Minimum
vertical length shall be 30 inches, or greater as required. Provide fusion
connection to polyethylene pipe below grade, and screwed connection to
steel pipe above grade.
2.3.5 Gas Piping Aboveground to 30 inches Belowground: Schedule 40 black steel with
beveled ends for welding, with Class 150 welding fittings. Mitering to form elbows or
tees will not be permitted; where branch tee connections of welded piping are required,
Bonney "Weldolet" Allied Pipe Fittings, or equal fittings may be used if the branch is
one-half of the diameter of the main or less.
2.4 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
2.4.1 Refer to specification Section 21 10 00 Fire Protection.
2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
2.5.1 Provide water hammer arrestors conforming to lead-free requirements of California

Health and Safety Code Section 116875, with nesting type bellows contained within a
JKA #15-100 221000 - 6
casing having sufficient displacement volume to dissipate the calculated kinetic energy
generated in the piping system. Water hammer arrestors shall be sized for type and
number of fixtures served. Provide all stainless steel shell construction with stainless
steel bellows and threaded connection to water system.
2.5.2 Water hammer arrestors shall be certified under P.D.I. Standard WH201 and by ASSE
Standard 1010.
2.5.3 Select units in accordance with the requirements of Plumbing and Drainage Institute
Standard P.D.I. WH201. Install above ceilings or behind wall access door at each
plumbing fixture, or where plumbing fixtures are installed in groups, at each group of
fixtures.

2.5.4.1 Josam Company, series 75000.
2.5.4.2 Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co., Hydrotrol 5005-5050.
2.5.4.3 Mifab, series WHB.
2.6 HOSE BIBBS
2.6.1 Hose Bibbs:
2.6.1.1 Manufacturers: Drawing schedules indicate Basis of Design products.

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings, or comparable product by one of the following, or equal:
2.6.1.1.1 Acorn Engineering Co.
2.6.1.1.2 Woodford Manufacturing Co.
2.7 WALL HYDRANTS
2.7.1 Manufacturers: Drawing schedules indicate Basis of Design products. Subject to

compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings, or comparable
product by one of the following, or equal:
2.7.1.1 Acorn Engineering Co.
2.7.1.2 Woodford Manufacturing Co.
2.7.1.3 Mifab, Inc.
2.8 GAS PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES
2.8.1 Provide single-stage, spring-loaded, corrosion-resistant gas pressure regulators, with

die-cast aluminum or cast iron body, complying with ANSI Z21.80. Unit shall be with
atmospheric vent, internal relief overpressure protection, threaded ends for 2 inches and
smaller, flanged ends for 2-1/2 inches and larger. For inlet and outlet gas pressures,
specific gravity, and volume flow refer to Drawings schedule.

JKA #15-100 221000 - 7
2.8.2.1 1/2 inch: Elster (American, Singer) model 1213B.
Itron (Actaris, Slumberger, Sprague) model B42R.
2.8.2.2 3/4 thru 1-1/4inches: Elster (American, Singer) model 1813C.
Sensus (Ivensys, Equimeter, Rockwell) model 143-

80-12
Itron (Actaris, Slumberger, Sprague) models B42R,

B57R, B58R.
2.8.2.3 1-1/2 thru 2 inches: Elster (American, Singer) models 1813, 1813B.
Sensus (Ivensys, Equimeter, Rockwell) model 243.
Itron (Actaris, Slumberger, Sprague) models

B43SR, B34R, B38R.
2.9 RELIEF VALVES
2.9.1 Provide relief valves as indicated, of size and capacity as selected by Contractor for
proper relieving capacity, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
2.9.2 Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever, thermostat,
complying with ANSI A21.22 listing requirements for temperature discharge capacity.
Provide temperature relief at 210 degrees F, and pressure relief at 150 psi.

Watts Regulator Company.
Cash (A.W.) Valve Manufacturing Corporation.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins-Regulator Division.
2.10 TRAP PRIMER

2.10.1.1 MiFab, Inc.
2.10.1.2 Precision Plumbing Products.
2.10.1.3 Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company.
2.11 CLEANOUTS
2.11.1 General: Install cleanouts of same diameter as pipe (4 inch maximum) in all horizontal
soil and waste lines where indicated and at all points of change in direction. Cleanouts
shall be located not less than 18 inches from building construction so as to provide
sufficient space for rodding. No horizontal run over 50 feet inside buildings or 100 feet
outside buildings shall be without cleanout, whether shown on Drawings or not. Provide
JKA #15-100 221000 - 8
two-way cleanouts where indicated on drawings, and where required for satisfactory
use.
2.11.1.1 Provide cleanouts in waste drop from each sink and urinal.
2.11.1.2 Provide one wrench for each size and type of cleanout used. Turn over to
Owner at completion of the project, and obtain receipt. Place receipt in
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
2.11.2 Cleanouts in floor and in concrete sidewalks: Ducco Cast Iron with nickel bronze top,
clamping collar and ABS plastic plug: Zurn ZN-1400-KC, or equal, with square or round
top to suit floor construction.
2.11.3 Cleanouts in composition floors: Zurn ZN-1400-X-DX, or equal (nickel bronze top).
2.11.4 Cleanouts in concealed, aboveground cast-iron soil or waste lines: Zurn Z-1440A, or
equal, with ABS plastic plug.
2.11.5 Cleanouts in walls: Zurn Z-1441 or Z-1443, or equal, with stainless steel cover. Provide
long sweep elbow or combination wye at connection to riser and install with surface of
cleanout within 1/2 inch of front face of finished wall.
2.11.5.1 Where space does not permit the above installation, provide Zurn Z-1446, or
equal, with stainless steel access cover, and vandal resistant screw.
2.11.5.2 Install face of cleanout plug within 1/2 inch of front face of finished wall.
2.11.6 Cleanouts exterior to building in landscaped areas: Zurn Z-1449-BP, or equal, cleanout
ferrule with tapered bronze plug. Where located at grade, provide 18 by 18 by 6 inch
concrete pad; Trowel concrete smooth and edge; set flush with finished grade.
2.11.7 Cleanouts in drive areas: Zurn -1400-HD-KC, or equal, with heavy-duty top and ABS
plastic plug.

2.11.8.1 Zurn.
2.11.8.2 J.R. Smith.
2.11.8.3 Josam.
2.12 FLOOR DRAINS Manufacturers: Drawing schedules indicate Basis of Design products. Subject to
2.12.1.1 Zurn
2.12.1.2 J.R. Smith
2.12.1.3 Josam
2.13 FLOOR SINKS

JKA #15-100 221000 - 9
2.13.1 Floor Sinks: Provide anchoring flange (seepage pan) at all floor sinks, and provide
flashing clamp in locations where floor membrane is used. Provide cast iron "P" trap
and trap primer connection at P-Trap.

2.13.2.1 Zurn
2.13.2.2 J.R. Smith
2.13.2.3 Josam
2.14 ROOF DRAINS AND OVERFLOW DRAINS
2.14.1 See Architectural Drawings for drain style to be used.
2.14.2 Provide offset downspout boots where required for connection of exposed sheet metal
downspouts to underground cast iron or PVC piping.
2.14.3 Provide rainwater leader nozzles on overflow piping. Nozzle body shall be bronze with
threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting holes. Size nozzle to match
connected rainwater leader.

2.14.4.1 J.R. Smith.
2.14.4.2 Mifab.
2.14.4.3 Zurn.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
3.1.1 Examine areas and conditions under which plumbing piping systems are to be installed.
Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Contractor.
3.1.2 Make all arrangements for the utilities required. Pay all costs involved in obtaining the
services including gas service and meter, water meter, pressure reducing valve, access
boxes, street work. Connect to site utilities. Verify the location of all services. No extra
cost will be allowed if services are not as shown.
3.1.3 Determine sanitary sewer and storm drain location and elevation at all points of
connection before installing any piping. Notify Architect immediately if indicated grades
cannot be maintained.
and gas piping from existing systems, on site or off site, perform a pressure test to
indicate static pressure of existing systems. If pressure on water piping is greater than
80 psi, or gas pressure is not as indicated on Contract Documents, inform Architect
JKA #15-100 221000 - 10
immediately. Do not allow piping systems to be pressurized without written consent of
the Architect.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPING
3.2.1 Run all water piping generally level, free of traps or unnecessary bends, arranged to
conform to the building requirements, and to suit clearance for other mechanical work
such as ducts, flues, conduits, and other work. No piping shall be installed so as to
cause unusual noise from the flow of water therein under normal conditions.
3.2.2 Provide manufactured water hammer arrestors, sized and installed in accordance with
Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI WH201.
3.2.2.1 Locate water hammer arrestors at every plumbing fixture, or, where fixtures
are located in groups, at every group of fixtures, and as indicated on
Drawings.
3.2.2.2 Install water hammer arresters above accessible ceilings, or install access
doors for service.
3.2.3 In freezing locations arrange water piping to drain as shown.
3.2.4 Install piping on room side of building insulation.
3.2.5 Check final location of rubber rings within couplings on PVC water piping with gauge or
as recommended by manufacturer. Make connection to valves with cast iron adapters
connected to water pipe with cast iron couplings. Furnish and install anchors or thrust
blocks.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
3.3.1 Make joints in PVC sewer pipe with PVC-type couplings and rubber rings.
3.3.2 Check final location of rubber rings within the couplings with gauge or as recommended
by the manufacturer. Make joints between PVC pipe and cast iron pipe or fittings using
cast iron adapter fittings, installed as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3.2.1 Ring-Tite cast iron pipe fittings may be used in lieu of standard fittings.
Make connection to valves with cast iron adapters connected to the pipe
with PVC couplings.
3.3.3 Sewer Piping: Run all horizontal sanitary drain piping inside of building on a uniform
grade of not less than 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise noted or later approved.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, piping shall have invert elevations as shown and
slope uniformly between given elevations.
3.3.4 Storm Drain Piping: Run all horizontal storm drain piping inside of building on a uniform
grade of not less than 1/4 inch per foot. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, piping
shall have invert elevations as shown and slope uniformly between given elevations.
3.3.5 Install rainwater leader nozzles at exposed bottom of leaders where they spill onto
grade.
3.3.6 Run all drainage piping as straight as possible and provide easy bends with long turns;
make all offsets at an angle of 45 degrees or less.

JKA #15-100 221000 - 11
3.3.7 Grade all vent piping so as to free itself quickly of any water condensation.
3.3.8 Where possible, join groups of vent risers together with one enlarged outlet through roof.
Maintain minimum of 10 foot horizontal or 3 foot vertical clearance from air intakes.
3.3.9 Hubless Cast Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF CLEANOUTS
3.4.1 Cleanouts: Install in piping as indicated, as required by California Plumbing Code, at

each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. Install at maximum intervals
of 50 feet for piping 4 inches and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping inside buildings,
and at base of each conductor.
3.4.2 Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each cleanout
passing through water resistant membrane.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS
3.5.1 Install drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations
indicated. Install floor drains with lip of drain slightly below finished floor to ensure
drainage. Install floor sinks flush with finished floor. Coordinate with other Contractors
to ensure that floor slopes to drain. Provide flashing flange and clamping device with
each drain passing through water resistant membrane.
3.5.2 Install vented P-trap below each drain. Where trap primers are indicated, install trap
primer connection in the P-trap.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAINS AND OVERFLOW DRAINS
3.6.1 Install roof drains and overflow roof drains in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and in locations indicated.
3.6.2 Coordinate with roofing as necessary to interface roof drains with roofing work.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF NATURAL GAS PIPING
3.7.1 Install natural gas piping in accordance with Division 22 Basic Plumbing Materials and
Methods sections.
3.7.2 Use sealants on metal gas piping threads that are chemically resistant to natural gas.
Use sealants sparingly, and apply to only male threads of metal joints.
3.7.3 Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembling piping.
3.7.4 Do not install defective piping or fittings. Do not use pipe with threads that are chipped,
stripped, or damaged.
3.7.5 Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or cap immediately after
installation and retain until continuing piping or equipment connections are completed.
3.7.6 Ground gas piping electrically and continuously within project, and bond tightly to
grounding connection.
3.7.7 Install drip-legs in gas piping where indicated and where required by code or regulation.

JKA #15-100 221000 - 12
3.7.7.1 Install "Tee" fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped at bottom of pipe
risers.
3.7.8 Install piping with 1/64 inch per foot (1/8 percent) downward slope in direction of flow.
3.7.9 Install piping parallel to other piping.
3.7.10 Paint all gas piping installed in exposed exterior locations.
3.7.11 Provide shutoff valve downstream of meter.
3.7.12 Provide exterior shutoff valve at each building. Provide sign affixed to wall at valve
location reading: Gas Shut-Off. Size and location of the sign shall be as required by
the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Where gas piping enters a building in more than one
location, exterior shutoff valves shall have a permanently attached metal tag identifying
the area served by that valve, in addition to sign on wall.
3.7.13 Provide watertight Schedule 40 PVC conduit to protect gas piping installed below
covered walk, covered driveways, and where noted on Drawings. Extend sleeve at least
12 inches beyond any area where it is required to be installed, and terminate with valve
box extended to grade, and marked GAS.
3.8 GAS PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES
3.8.1 Install as indicated; comply with utility requirements. In locations where regulators are
installed in confined spaces, pipe atmospheric vent to outdoors, full size of outlet. Install
gas shutoff valve upstream and downstream of each pressure-regulating valve.
3.9 GAS PIPING EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
3.9.1 Connect gas piping to each gas-fired equipment item, with union, drip leg and shutoff
gas cock full size of supply line shown. Reduce only at connection to equipment.
Comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions.
3.9.1.1 Appliance fuel connectors, as defined in 1203 of the CPC, are not
acceptable for connection of equipment, except where specifically indicated
on the Contract Documents.
3.9.1.2 Route gas vent and gas relief to outside.
3.9.1.3 Gas shutoff valve shall be placed as close as possible to equipment in a

location where it can be serviced. Distance from equipment to valve shall
not exceed 6 feet.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS
3.10.1 Install as indicated in manufacturers printed literature, with 1/2 inch, Type L, hard copper
piping to trap primer connection on floor drains and floor sinks where indicated on
Drawings. At Contractors option, Type K annealed copper tubing without joints may be
used be used below slab only. See Section 22 00 50 for pipe protection requirements
for below slab copper piping/tubing.
3.10.2 Install trap primer piping with 1/4 inch per foot slope, to insure that the line will drain fully
to the floor drain or floor sink.
3.10.2.1 Provide ball valve to the inlet at each trap primer location.
JKA #15-100 221000 - 13
3.10.3 Install trap primer and distribution unit exactly as called for in manufacturers printed
installation instructions. Connect to domestic water piping from the top of the water line,
in order to prevent foreign material from entering directly into primer assembly.
3.10.4 Mount trap primer in wall, in sheet metal box, with Karp or equal access door. Size
access door and box to suit valve operation, and solder all seams of box. Seal all
penetrations to box with non-hardening waterproof sealant. Provide locking door where
installed in occupied spaces.
3.10.5 Where one trap primer will be used for more than one trap, provide a distribution unit
with feeder piping for a maximum of four traps sized for equal pressure drop to each
trap.
3.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
3.11.1 Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of
sizes indicated.
3.11.2 Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system and gas
piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated, and provide with shutoff valve and
union for each connection.
3.12 SPARE PARTS
3.12.1 Furnish to Owner, with receipt, one valve key for each key operated hydrant, bibb, or
faucet installed.
3.13 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM STERILIZATION
3.13.1 Clean and disinfect new or altered hot and cold water piping connected to domestic
water systems using methods prescribed by the Health Authority. If the Health Authority
does not prescribe methods, clean and disinfect new or altered hot and cold water piping
using methods given in the California Plumbing Code.
3.13.1.1 A water treatment company that has a current state EPA license to apply
disinfectant chlorine in potable water shall perform the procedure.
3.14 CARE AND CLEANING
3.14.1 Repair or replace broken, damaged, or otherwise defective parts, materials, and work.
Leave entire work in condition satisfactory to Architect. At completion, carefully clean
and adjust equipment, fixtures, and trim that are installed as part of this work. Remove
labels from stainless steel sinks, except 316 stainless steel sink labels should be
retained to confirm that the correct material has been provided. Leave systems and
equipment in satisfactory operating condition.
3.15 OPERATION TEST
3.15.1 Test each piece of equipment to show that it will operate in accordance with indicated
requirements.
3.16 TESTING AND BALANCING
3.16.1 See Section 23 05 93 of these specifications for testing and balancing requirements.
3.17 CLEANING UP
JKA #15-100 221000 - 14
3.17.1 Upon completion of Work remove materials, equipment, apparatus, tools, and the like,
and leave premises clean, neat, and orderly.

JKA #15-100 221000 - 15
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1 Water supplies and stops.
1.1.2 Plumbing fixture hangers and supports.
1.1.3 Refrigerator ice maker.
1.1.4 Dishwasher air gap fitting.
1.3.2 Coordinate all of work in this Section with all of the Trades covered in other Sections of
1.4.1 Furnish and install all plumbing work indicated on the Drawings and described herein.
1.5.1 Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing fixtures of the type,
style and configuration required. All companies providing products with warranties must
have been engaged in manufacturing of such products for as long as the warranty
states.
1.5.2 Plumbing Fixture Standards: Comply with applicable portions of the following codes and
requirements for all work in this section:
1.5.2.1 California Building Code CBC
1.5.2.2 California Plumbing Code CPC
1.5.2.3 California Health and Safety Code
1.5.2.4 American National Standards Institute - ANSI
1.5.2.5 Federal Standards - F.S.

County of Tehama PLUMBING FIXTURES
JKA #15-100 224000 - 1
1.5.2.6 National Sanitary Foundation NSF International
1.5.3 ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI/NSF 61, Drinking Water System Components
Health Effects.
1.5.4 PDI Compliance: Comply with standards established by Plumbing and Drainage
Institute pertaining to plumbing fixture supports.
1.5.5 UL Labels: Provide water coolers that have been listed and labeled by Underwriters'
Laboratories.
1.5.6 ARI Labels: Provide water coolers that are rated and certified in accordance with
applicable Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standards.
1.5.7 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
1.5.8 California Health and Safety Code Compliance: For products covered under the scope
of HSC 116875 for potable water service. Products for potable water service shall be
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for plumbing fixtures and trim,
including catalog cut of each fixture type and trim item furnished.
1.6.2 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each fixture type and
trim item, including instructions for care of finishes. Include this data in Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
1.7.1 California Green Building Standards Code Requirements:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES
2.1.1 General: Provide factory fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated. For
each type fixture, provide fixture manufacturer's standard trim, carrier, seats, and valves
as indicated by their published product information; either as designed and constructed,
or as recommended by the manufacturer, and as required for a complete, installation.
Where more than one type is dedicated, selection is Contractor's option; but, all fixtures
of same type must be furnished by single manufacturer.
2.1.1.1 Take special care with the roughing-in and finished plumbing where
batteries of fixtures occur.
2.1.1.2 Take location and mounting heights for roughing-in from Architectural
Drawings.

JKA #15-100 224000 - 2
2.1.1.3 Follow schedule on Plumbing Drawings for roughing-in connections. Set
roughing-in for all fixtures exactly as per measurements furnished by the
manufacturers of the fixtures used.
2.1.1.4 Roughing-in for lavatories and sinks shall be brought in through the wall
under the centerline of the drain from the fixture wherever possible and as
close to the fixture as possible.
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 Provide materials that have been selected for their surface flatness and smoothness.
Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, foundry sand holes,
stains, discoloration, or other surface imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
2.2.2 Where fittings, trim and accessories are exposed or semi-exposed, provide, chromium
plated 17 gauge seamless brass and match faucets and fittings. Provide 17 gauge
seamless copper or brass where not exposed.
2.2.3 Handles on all faucets and stops shall be all metal chromium plated.
2.3 PLUMBING FITTINGS, TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
2.3.1 Water Outlets: At locations where water is supplied (by manual, automatic or remote
control), provide commercial quality faucets, valves, or dispensing devices, of type and
size indicated, and as required to operate as indicated.
2.3.1.1 Include manual shutoff valves and connecting stem pipes to permit outlet
servicing without shut-down of water supply piping systems.
2.3.2 P-Traps: Include IAPMO approved removable P-traps where drains are indicated for
direct connection to drainage system. P-Traps shall be less trap screw cleanout, and
incorporate a chrome plated cast brass body, brass connection nuts, 17 gauge
seamless brass wall return and chrome plated wall escutcheon to match trap finish.
2.3.3 Carriers: Provide cast iron supports for fixtures of graphitic gray iron, ductile iron, or
malleable iron as indicated. Where the carrier for wall mounted water closets are
installed more than 6 inches behind the finished wall, provide water closet support for
wide pipe chase.
2.3.4 Fixture Bolt Caps: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fixture bolt caps finished to
match fixture finish.
2.3.5 Escutcheons: Where fixture supplies and drains penetrate walls in exposed location,
provide chrome-plated cast brass escutcheons with setscrews.
2.3.6 Aerators: Provide aerators of types approved by Health Departments having jurisdiction.
Delete aerators where not allowed by CPC for health care occupancies.
2.3.7 Comply with additional fixture requirements contained in Fixture Schedule shown on the
drawings.
2.4 MANUFACTURERS
2.4.1 In accordance with California Plumbing Code, provide indelibly marked or embossed
manufacturers name or logo, arranged so as to be visible after installation.

JKA #15-100 224000 - 3
product by one of the following:
2.4.2.1 Vitrified China Plumbing Fixtures:
2.4.2.1.1 American Standard, U.S. Plumbing Products.
2.4.2.1.2 Crane Plumbing.
2.4.2.1.3 Eljer Plumbingware Div., Wallace-Murray Corp.
2.4.2.1.4 Kohler Co.
2.4.2.1.5 VitrA.
2.4.2.2 Plumbing Trim:
2.4.2.2.1 McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.
2.4.2.2.2 Delta Commercial.
2.4.2.2.3 Chicago Faucet Co.
2.4.2.2.4 T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
2.4.2.3 Flush Valves:
2.4.2.3.1 Sloan Valve Co.
2.4.2.3.2 Zurn Industries, Hydromechanics Div.
2.4.2.3.3 Toto USA, Inc.
2.4.2.4 Faucets:
2.4.2.4.1 Chicago Faucet Co.
2.4.2.4.2 Symmons Scott.
2.4.2.4.3 T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
2.4.2.5 Fixture Seats:
2.4.2.5.1 Church Seat Co.
2.4.2.5.2 Bemis Mfg. Co.
2.4.2.5.3 Beneke Corp.
2.4.2.6 Water Coolers and Drinking Fountains:
2.4.2.6.1 Haws Corporation.
2.4.2.6.2 Halsey Taylor Mfg. Co.

JKA #15-100 224000 - 4
2.4.2.6.3 Elkay Mfg. Co.
2.4.2.6.4 Acorn Aqua.
2.4.2.7 Service Sinks:
2.4.2.7.1 American Standard.
2.4.2.7.2 Kohler Co.
2.4.2.7.3 Williams Serviceptor.
2.4.2.7.4 Florestone.
2.4.2.7.5 Acorn.
2.4.2.8 Stainless Steel Sinks:
2.4.2.8.1 Elkay Mfg. Co.
2.4.2.8.2 Just Mfg. Co.
2.4.2.8.3 Haws Corporation.
2.4.2.9 Fixture Carriers:
2.4.2.9.1 Josam Mfg. Co.
2.4.2.9.2 J. R. Smith.
2.4.2.9.3 Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
2.4.2.9.4 Zurn Industries; Hydromechanics Div.
2.4.2.9.5 Mifab, Inc.
2.5 FLUSH VALVE REQUIREMENTS
2.5.1 Metering flush valves where required and specified shall be non-hold open type with
exposed parts chrome plated. Conform to all codes and manufacturers'
recommendations. All diaphragms are to have multiple filtered bypass and be
chloramine resistant synthetic rubber with internal components suitable for l80 degree
hot water to l50 pounds pressure, plastic or leather diaphragm not acceptable.
2.6 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS
2.6.1 Make connection between fixtures and flanges on soil pipe absolutely gastight and
watertight with neoprene type gaskets (wall hung fixtures) or bowl wax (floor outlet
fixtures). Rubber gaskets or putty will not be permitted.
2.6.2 Provide fixtures not having integral traps with P-traps of chromium-plated 17 gauge cast
brass, with 17 gauge seamless brass wall return, connected to concealed waste in wall
and sanitary fittings. Provide IAPMO approval for trap, and provide less trap screw
cleanout.

JKA #15-100 224000 - 5
2.6.2.1.1 Dearborn Brass, Commercial series with brass nuts.
2.6.2.1.3 McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.
2.6.3 Connections from stacks or horizontal wastes to wall or floor finish for wastes from
lavatories, urinals, sinks, and drinking fountains and connection between floor drains
and traps shall be IPS 85 percent red brass pipe.
2.6.4 Unions on waste pipes on fixture side of traps may be slip or flange joints with soft
rubber or lead gaskets. Traps shall rough in full size to waste and vent connection,
using deep escutcheon plate to cover wall penetration. Compression adaptor
extensions or sweat adaptors are not acceptable.
2.7 WATER SUPPLIES AND STOPS
2.7.1 Provide 85 percent IPS threaded red brass nipple, conforming to the lead-free
requirements of California Health and Safety Code Section 116875, securely anchored
to building construction, for each connection to stops, hose bibbs, etc. Each fixture,
except hose bibbs, shall have stop valves installed on water supply lines.
2.7.2 Provide water supplies to fixtures with compression shut-off stops with IPS inlets and
lock shield-loose key handles. Provide combination fixtures with compression stop and
IPS inlet on each water supply fitting. Provide lock shield-loose key handle for each
stop.
2.7.3 Provide 1/2 inch riser tubes with reducing coupling for fixtures, unless otherwise noted.
2.7.4 Provide cast brass escutcheon.
2.7.5 Furnish shut-off valves on hose bibbs where directly connected to mains with no
intervening valves.

2.7.6.1 BrassCraft Manufacturing model SR37XC stop with 3-12AC riser and 647
escutcheon.
2.7.6.2 McGuire Manufacturing Company, Inc. model LFH2167LK.
2.7.6.3 Watts model LF890 203LK.
2.8 PLUMBING FIXTURE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
2.8.1 Residential type fixture supports are not acceptable.
2.8.2 Install wall mounted water closets with combination support and waste fittings, with feet
of support securely anchored to floor.

JKA #15-100 224000 - 6
2.8.3 Install floor mounted water closets with J.R. Smith, Zurn, or equal government pattern
cast iron closet flanges with brass bolts, nuts, washers, and porcelain caps secured with
Spackle.
2.8.4 Install the following fixtures on concealed support with feet of support securely anchored
to floor. Anchor top of support to wall construction in an approved manner.
2.8.4.1 Wall hung lavatories.
2.8.4.2 Wall mounted urinals.
2.8.4.3 Drinking fountains.
2.9 PLUMBING FIXTURES
2.9.1 Install all plumbing fixtures at height indicated on Architectural Drawings. Where
mounting height is not indicated, install at height required by Code.
2.9.2 Special Requirements For Accessible Fixtures:
2.9.2.1 Operating handle or valve for accessible water closets, urinals, lavatories,
and sinks shall operate with less than 5 pounds force. Metering faucets
shall be adjusted to operate between 10 and 15 seconds.
2.9.2.2 Insulate exposed waste piping and domestic water supplies below
accessible fixtures with CBC access code compliant molded closed-cell
vinyl covers. Covers shall be installed using vandal resistant fasteners and
must be removable. Covers shall meet flame spread rating not to exceed
25 and smoke density not to exceed 50 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E-84, and shall comply with the requirements of California Code of
Regulations, Title 24. Plumberex Handy Shield, Johns Manville Zeston
2000, or equal.
2.9.3 Refrigerator Ice Maker:

2.9.3.1.1 Guy Gray.
2.9.3.1.2 Water-Tite.
2.9.4 Dishwasher Air Gap Fitting:

2.9.4.1.1 Zurn Industries, LLC.
2.9.4.1.2 Dearborn Brass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION

JKA #15-100 224000 - 7
3.1.1 Deliver packaged materials in their original, unopened wrapping with labels intact.
Protect materials from water, the elements and other damage during delivery, storage
and handling.
3.2 PREPARATORY PROVISIONS
3.2.1 The Contractor is responsible for the examination and acceptance of all conditions
affecting the proper construction and/or installation of the Work of this Section. Do not
proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencing work will
be construed as acceptance of all conditions by the Contractor as satisfactory for the
construction and/or installation of the Work.
3.3 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
3.3.1 Examine roughing-in work of domestic water and waste piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. Also examine floors and
substrates, and conditions under which fixture work is to be accomplished. Correct any
incorrect locations of piping, and other unsatisfactory conditions for installation of
plumbing fixtures. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.3.2 Install plumbing fixtures of types indicated where shown and at indicated heights; in
accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, roughing-in drawings.
Ensure that plumbing fixtures comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
Comply with applicable requirements of the National Standard Plumbing Code pertaining
to installation of plumbing fixtures.
3.3.3 Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure; and ensure that
fixtures are level and plumb. Secure plumbing supplies to blocking behind or within wall
construction so as to be rigid, and not subject to pull or push movement.
3.3.4 Install CBC accessible fixtures in accordance with Chapter 4 California Plumbing Code,
and Chapters 11A and 11B California Building Code.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FAUCETS
3.4.1 Provide 85 percent IPS red brass pipe, conforming to lead-free requirements of
California Health and Safety Code Section 116875, securely anchored to building
construction, for each connection to faucets, stops, hose bibbs, etc. Each fixture, except
hose bibbs, shall have a stop valve installed on water supply lines to permit repairs
without shutting off water mains.
3.4.2 Adjust metering faucets to run for 10 to 15 seconds.
3.5 CLEAN AND PROTECT
3.5.1 Clean plumbing fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.
3.5.2 Protect installed fixtures from damage during the remainder of the construction period.
3.5.3 Grout voids between all fixtures and adjacent surfaces with white Dow Silicone Sealant,
arranged to shed water.
3.6.1 Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures and after units are water
pressurized, test fixtures to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.
JKA #15-100 224000 - 8
When possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting.
3.7 EXTRA STOCK
3.7.1 General: Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing
fixtures and trim to Owner with receipt. Furnish one device for every ten units.

JKA #15-100 224000 - 9
SECTION 22 50 00
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1 Commercial electric water heaters.
1.1.2 Expansion tanks.
1.1.3 In-line domestic hot water recirculation pumps.
1.4.1 Furnish and install all plumbing work indicated on the Drawings and described herein.
1.5.1 Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing equipment of type

and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 5 years.
1.5.2 Trade names or catalog numbers stated herein indicates grade or quality of materials
desired.
1.5.3 Dimensions, sizes, and capacities shown are minimum and shall not be changed without
permission of Architect.
1.5.4 UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required
as part of plumbing equipment, which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters
Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards.
1.5.5 CEC Compliance: Comply with California Electrical Code (Title 24, Part 3) as applicable
to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of plumbing
equipment.

County of Tehama PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
JKA #15-100 225000 - 1
1.5.6 ASME Relief Valve Stamps: Provide water heaters with safety relief valves bearing
ASME valve markings.
1.5.7 California Energy Commission Compliance: Provide written confirmation of listing of all
water heaters in the "Appliance Efficiency Database.
1.5.8 California Health and Safety Code Compliance: For products covered under the scope
of HSC 116875 for potable water service. Products for potable water service shall be
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's plumbing equipment specifications, installation and
start-up instructions, capacity and ratings, with selection points clearly indicated.
1.6.2 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each item of plumbing
equipment. Include "trouble-shooting" maintenance guides. Include this data in Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets, adhesives, sealants
and coatings shall not contain polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in penta, octa,
or deca formulations in amounts greater than 0.1 percent (by mass).
2.2 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
2.2.1 General: Provide commercial electric water heaters of size, capacity, and electrical
characteristics indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 for energy efficiency.
Provide UL listing. Relief valve dip tube shall extend to within 3 inches of tank.
2.2.2 Heater: Working pressure of 150 psi, magnesium anode rod; glass lining on internal
surfaces exposed to water.
2.2.3 Heating Elements: Heavy-duty, medium watt density, with incoloy sheath or zinc plated
copper, thermostat stepped through magnetic contactor.
2.2.4 Safety Controls: Double-pole, manual-reset, high-limit, probe type electric water low
water cutoff; both factory wired.
2.2.5 Jacket: Equip with full size control compartments with front panel opening. Insulate
tank with vermin resistant polyurethane or glass fiber insulation. Provide outer steel
jacket with bonderized undercoat and baked enamel finish.
2.2.6 Warranty: Furnish three-year minimum warranty on tank leakage.
2.2.7 Provide the following accessories:

JKA #15-100 225000 - 2
2.2.7.1 Brass drain valve.
2.2.7.2 3/4 inch temperature and pressure relief valve.
2.2.7.3 Thermometer.
2.2.8 Provide equal flow manifold for piping entering and leaving the water heaters. Manifold
shall be provided as a standard option for the heaters proposed.
2.2.9 Controls: Adjustable immersion thermostat or surface mounted therm-o-disc; power

circuit fusing.

2.2.10.1 Bradford White Corporation.
2.2.10.2 Lochinvar Corporation.
2.2.10.3 PVI Industries, LLC.
2.2.10.4 Rheem Manufacturing Company.
2.2.10.5 Smith, A.O. Water Products Co.; a division of A.O. Smith Corporation.
2.3 EXPANSION TANKS
2.3.1 Provide thermal expansion tanks of size and number as indicated on Drawings,
conforming to lead-free requirements of California Health and Safety Code Section
116875. Construct tank of welded steel for working pressure of 125 psi. Provide
specially compounded flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank to permanently
separate air charge from system water, to maintain design expansion capacity.
2.3.1.1 Tanks shall be IAPMO approved and listed for use with domestic water
systems.

2.3.2.1 Amtrol, Inc.
2.3.2.2 A.O. Smith Water Products Company.
2.3.2.3 Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2.4 IN-LINE DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PUMPS
2.4.1 Provide lead-free in-line domestic water recirculation pumps where indicated on
Drawings and of capacities as scheduled on Drawings. Pumps shall be third-party
certified by an approved laboratory as complying with California Health and Safety Code
Section 116875.
2.4.2 Pumps shall be of the centrifugal type with non-overloading characteristics and shall not
overload the motor above its nameplate horsepower rating under any operating
condition. No allowance for service factor shall be used in pump selection. Motor
horsepower shown is minimum; furnish larger motors if necessary to meet the non-
overloading requirements.
JKA #15-100 225000 - 3
2.4.3 Type: Horizontal, designed for 125 thru 150 psi maximum working pressure and 225
degrees F continuous water temperature.
2.4.4 Construction: Bronze casing, non-metallic impeller.
2.4.5 Shaft: Ceramic, supported by carbon bearings. Bearings shall be lubricated by the
pumped water.
2.4.6 Motors shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings. Motors shall meet NEMA
specifications. Motors shall have built-in thermal overload or impedance protection.
2.4.7 Provide control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and pump
control panels as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division 26
sections:
2.4.7.1 Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic Temperature

Controls is work of that section.
2.4.8 Wire pumps to mechanical control circuits to shut down pump when building is not
occupied. Where no control system is installed, furnish pump manufacturers standard
timer to automatically turn off circulating pump when hot water is not required.

2.4.9.1 Grundfos Pumps Corporation.
2.4.9.2 Bell & Gossett, ITT Corporation.
2.4.9.3 Taco Incorporated.
2.4.9.4 Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION
3.1.1 Deliver packaged materials in their original, unopened wrapping with labels intact.
Protect materials from water, the elements and other damage during delivery, storage
and handling.
3.2 PREPARATORY PROVISIONS
3.2.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the examination and acceptance of all conditions
affecting the proper construction and/or installation of the Work of this Section and shall
not proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencing work
shall be construed as acceptance of all conditions by the Contractor as satisfactory for
the construction and/or installation of the Work.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
3.3.1 Install electric water heaters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions and in compliance with applicable codes.
3.3.2 Furnish wiring diagram to Electrical Installer. Refer to Division 26 for wiring of units, not
work of this section.

JKA #15-100 225000 - 4
3.3.3 Connect to hot and cold water lines with shutoff valve, check valve, and dielectric union
in the cold water line, and ASME standard pressure and temperature relief valve and
dielectric union in the hot water line. Connect drain and relief piping as noted on
Drawings.
3.3.4 Start-up, test, and adjust electric water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's
start-up instructions. Check and calibrate controls.
3.3.5 After installation has been completed, seal bottom of heaters without feet to floor with
silicone sealer.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS
3.4.1 Install pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions,
complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that pumps comply with
requirements and serve intended purposes.
3.4.2 Provide access space around pumps for service as indicated, but in no case less than
that recommended by manufacturer.
3.4.3 Install in-line pumps with support from overhead structure on each side of pump, or as
indicated on Drawings.
3.4.4 Support piping from the building structure so as to prevent any strain on the pump
casings. Provide a final check for perfect alignment of the piping connections after
pump has been secured to its base. Provide valves, accessories, gauges, flexible
connections, and supports as indicated.
3.4.5 Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory
mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.
3.4.6 Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal
and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment
start-up until wiring installation is complete and correct.
3.4.7 Check alignment, and where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps within
recommended tolerances by manufacturer.
3.4.8 Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
3.4.9 Increase piping immediately at pump suction and discharge; flexible couplings and all
valves shall be full line size.
3.4.10 Trim pump impeller to obtain the desired water flow after installation, without cost to
Owner.
3.4.11 Pumps shall not be connected to piping before piping is thoroughly flushed and cleaned
of all dirt and grit. After piping connections have been made, systems shall be filled
before starting pumps. Pumps shall not be run dry under any circumstances.
3.5 TRAINING
3.5.1 Provide a minimum of 8 hours of training and orientation of Owners staff in proper care
and operation of Plumbing Equipment.
3.6 CARE AND CLEANING

JKA #15-100 225000 - 5
3.6.1 Repair or replace broken, damaged, or otherwise defective parts, materials, and work.
Leave entire work in condition satisfactory to Architect. At completion, carefully clean
and adjust equipment, fixtures, and trim that are installed as part of this work. Leave
systems and equipment in satisfactory operating condition.
3.7 OPERATION TEST
3.7.1 Test each piece of equipment to show that it will operate in accordance with indicated
requirements.
3.8 CLEANING UP
3.8.1 Upon completion of Work remove materials, equipment, apparatus, tools, and the like,
and leave premises clean, neat, and orderly.

JKA #15-100 225000 - 6
SECTION 23 00 50
BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.3 Access Doors.
1.1.4 Insulation.
1.2.2 This Section is a part of each Division 23 Section.
1.3.1 Furnish and install incidental work not shown or specified necessary to provide a complete
and workable system.
1.3.2 Make all temporary connections required to maintain services, including adequate heat
and cooling, during the course of the Contract without additional cost to Owner. Notify
Owner seven days in advance before disrupting services.
1.3.3 Provide for adjustments or modifications to fan and motor sheaves, belts, damper linkages,
and other components as required to achieve specified air balance at no additional cost to
Owner.

assumed that the most recent edition of the standard in effect at the time of bid shall be
used.
1.4.1.1 CSA Canadian Standards Association International
1.4.1.2 ANSI - American National Standards Institute
1.4.1.3 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
1.4.1.4 CCR - California Code of Regulations

Industry Safety Orders, Articles 31 through 36
1.4.1.5 NCPWB - National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau

County of Tehama BASIC HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS
JKA #15-100 230050 - 1
1.4.1.6 CEC - California Electrical Code
1.4.1.7 NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
1.4.1.8 NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
1.4.1.9 OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act
1.5 DRAWINGS
1.5.1 Examine Drawings prior to bidding of work and report discrepancies in writing to Architect.
1.5.2 Visit Project site and examine existing conditions in order to become familiar with Project
scope. Verify dimensions shown on Drawings at Project site. Bring discrepancies to the
attention of Architect. Failure to examine Project site shall not constitute basis for claims
for additional work because of lack of knowledge or location of hidden conditions that
affect Project scope.
conditions will not always permit installation in location shown. The HVAC Drawings show
general arrangement of equipment and materials, etc., and shall be followed as closely as
existing conditions, actual building construction, and work of other trades permit.
1.5.3.1 Architectural and Structural Drawings shall be considered part of the Work.
These Drawings furnish Contractor with information relating to design and
construction of the Project. Architectural Drawings take precedence over
HVAC Drawings.
1.5.3.2 Because of the small scale of HVAC Drawings, not all offsets, fittings, and
accessories required are shown. Investigate structural and finish conditions
affecting the Work and arrange Work accordingly. Provide offsets, fittings, and
accessories required to meet conditions. Inform Architect immediately when
job conditions do not permit installation of equipment and materials in the
locations shown. Obtain the Architects approval prior to relocation of
equipment and materials.
1.5.3.3 Relocate equipment and materials installed without prior approval of the
1.5.3.4 Minor changes in locations of equipment, piping, ducts, etc., from locations
shown shall be made when directed by the Architect at no additional cost to
the Owner providing such change is ordered before such items of work, or
work directly connected to same are installed and providing no additional
material is required.
1.5.4 Execute work mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or vice
versa, the same as if specifically mentioned or shown in both.
1.6.1 The publications listed below form part of this Specification; comply with provisions of

JKA #15-100 230050 - 2
1.6.1.10 CAL-OSHA.
1.6.2 Nothing in Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to
these codes, or to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. It is not the intent of
Drawings or Specifications to repeat requirements of codes except where necessary for
clarity.
1.6.3 Comply with State of California 2013 Energy Code for systems, equipment, and
construction.
1.6.5 FEES AND PERMITS
1.6.6 Obtain and pay for permits and service required in installation of the Work. Arrange for
required inspections and secure approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Comply
with requirements of Division 01.
charges.
1.7.1 Special framing, recesses, chases and backing for Work of this Section, unless otherwise
specified, are covered under other Specification Sections.
1.7.3 Cutting, patching, and repairing of existing construction to permit installation of equipment,
and materials is the responsibility of Contractor. Repair or replace damage to existing
work with skilled mechanics for each trade.
JKA #15-100 230050 - 3
1.7.4 Cut existing concrete construction with a concrete saw. Do not utilize pneumatic devices.
1.7.5 Core openings through existing construction for passage of new piping and conduits. Cut
holes of minimum diameter to suit size of pipe and associated insulation installed.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
1.8.1 Submittal packages may be submitted via email as PDF electronic files, or as printed
packages. PDFs shall be legible at actual size (100 percent). Provide seven copies of
printed submittal packages.
Specifications and on Drawings are used as standards of quality. Furnish standard items
on specified equipment at no extra cost to the Contract regardless of disposition of
1.8.2.1 Partial or incomplete submittals will not be considered.
1.8.2.3 Provide materials of the same brand or manufacturer for each class of

number.

1.8.2.7.1 Submit Shop Drawings, performance curves, and other

materials.

Contract Documents.

schematic diagrams). Drawings may be prepared by vendor
but must be submitted as instruments of Contractor,

JKA #15-100 230050 - 4
1.8.3 Review of submittals will be only for general conformance with design concept and general
compliance with information given in Contract Documents. Review will not include
quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes, construction methods,
coordination with work of other trades, or construction safety precautions, which are sole
responsibility of Contractor. Review of a component of an assembly does not indicate
acceptance of an assembly. Deviations from Contract Documents not clearly identified by
Contractor are Contractors responsibility and will not be reviewed by Architect.
construction, submit to Architect shop drawings or submittals on all items of equipment
and materials provided. Provide submittal as a complete package.
1.8.4.1 Shop drawings and submittals shall include Specification Section, Paragraph
number, and Drawing unit symbol or detail number for reference. Organize
submittals into booklets for each Specification section and submit in loose-
leaf binders with index. Deviations from the Contract Documents shall be
prominently displayed in the front of the submittal package and referenced to
the applicable Contract requirement.
1.8.5 Provide coordinated layouts for HVAC Ductwork systems, in accordance with
Specification Section 23 80 00.
1.8.6 Furnish to the Project Inspector complete installation instructions on material and
equipment before starting installation.
1.8.7 Have fire damper and fire smoke damper installation instructions available at Project site
during construction for use by Project Inspector.
and sealants, including primers, documentation of compliance including printed statement
of VOC content and chemical components.
1.8.9 Provide product data for insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings,
jackets, adhesives, sealants, and coatings, indicating compliance with requirement that
these products contain less than 0.1 percent (by mass) polybrominated diphenyl ethers
(PBDEs) in penta, octa, or deca formulations.
1.8.10 Provide evidence of equipment certification to California Energy Code Section 110.1 or
110.2, if not providing Electrically Commutated motors for HVAC fans sized below 1 hp
and above 1/12 hp. Refer to specific equipment articles requiring electrically commutated
motors.
1.8.11 Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic supports, anchorages, and restraints indicated
1.8.11.1 Calculations performed for use in selection of seismic supports, anchorages,

and restraints shall utilize criteria indicated in Structural Contract Documents.
1.8.11.2 Supports, anchorage and restraints for piping, ductwork, and equipment shall
be an OSHPD pre-approved system such as Tolco, Afcon, ISAT, Badger,
Mason, or equal. Pipes, ducts and equipment shall be seismically restrained
in accordance with requirements of current edition of California Building Code.
System shall have current OPM number and shall meet additional
requirements of authority having jurisdiction. Provide supporting
JKA #15-100 230050 - 5
locations.
1.8.11.2.1 Bracing of Piping, Ductwork, and Equipment: Specifically

state how bracing attachment to structure is accomplished.
Provide shop drawings indicating seismic restraints,
including details of anchorage to building. In-line equipment
must be braced independently of piping and ductwork, and in
conformance with applicable building codes. Provide
calculations to show that pre-approval numbers have been
correctly applied in accordance with general information
notes of pre-approval documentation.
1.8.11.3 In lieu of the above or for non-standard installations not covered in the above
pre-approved systems, Contractor shall provide layout drawings showing
piping, ductwork, and restraint locations, and detail supports, attachments
and restraints, and furnish supporting calculations and legible details sealed
by a California registered structural engineer, in accordance with 2013
California Building Code
1.8.11.4 Additional Requirements: In addition to the above, conform to all state and
local requirements.
1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS
to or are intended to amplify Division 01 requirements. In case of conflict between
requirements given herein and those of Division 01, Division 01 requirements shall apply.
1.9.3 Substitutions will be interpreted to be manufacturers other than those specifically listed in
the Contract Documents by brand name, model, or catalog number.
1.9.4 Only one request for substitution will be considered for each item of equipment or material.


JKA #15-100 230050 - 6
1.9.6 Installation of reviewed substitution is Contractors responsibility. Any mechanical,
electrical, structural, or other changes required for installation of substituted equipment or
material must be made by Contractor without additional cost to Owner. Review by
Architect of substituted equipment or material, will not waive these requirements.
1.9.7 Contractor may be required to compensate Architect for costs related to substituted
1.10.1 Furnish three complete sets of Operation and Maintenance Manual bound in hardboard
binder, and one compact disc containing complete Operation and Maintenance Manual in
searchable PDF format. Provide Table of Contents. Provide index tabs for each piece of
equipment in binder and disc. Start compiling data upon approval of submittals.

1.10.1.1.2 Complete operating instructions for each item of heating,

ventilating and air conditioning equipment.
1.10.1.1.3 Copies of guarantees/warrantees for each item of equipment

or systems.
1.10.1.1.4 Test data and system balancing reports.


1.10.1.1.7 Temperature control diagrams and literature.
1.10.1.1.8 Check test and start reports for each piece of mechanical
1.10.1.1.9 Commissioning and Preliminary Operation Tests required as

part of the Work.
1.10.2 Post service telephone numbers and addresses in an appropriate place designated by
Architect.

be approved by the Architect and shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. The
Contractor shall be held responsible for damage caused to existing services. Promptly
notify the Architect if services are found which are not shown on Drawings.

JKA #15-100 230050 - 7
of this Contract. Promptly return to service upon completion of work in the area. Replace
items damaged by Contractor with new material to match existing.
shall become the property of Contractor and shall be removed from the Project site.
Consult Owner before removing any material from the Project site. Carefully remove
materials claimed by Owner to prevent damage and deliver to Owner-designated storage
location.
abandoned in place and all ends shall be capped or plugged. Remove unused piping and
wiring exposed in Equipment Rooms or occupied spaces. Material shall be removed from
the premises. Disconnect power, water, gas, pump or any other active energy source
from piping or electrical service prior to abandoning in place.
1.13 WARRANTY
1.13.1 Refer to Division 01 for warranty requirements, including effective date of warranty. Refer
to specific items of equipment specified herein for warranty duration if different from that
specified in Division 01.
1.13.2 Repair or replace defective work, material, or part that appears within the warranty period,
including damage caused by leaks.
1.13.3 On failure to comply with warranty requirements within a reasonable length of time after
notification is given, Architect/Owner shall have repairs made at Contractor's expense.
herein.
1.14.2 Upon completion of the Work, deliver to Architect the following:
installed.
1.14.2.4 Provide Contractors signature, verifying accuracy of record drawings.
1.14.3 Obtain the signature of the Inspector of Record for all Record Drawings.
1.15.1 Protect equipment and materials delivered to Project site from weather, humidity and
1.16 COORDINATION
1.16.1 General:

JKA #15-100 230050 - 8
1.16.1.1 Coordinate Work in this Section with trades covered in other Specifications
Sections to provide a complete, operable and sanitary installation of the
highest quality workmanship.
voltage and power feed wiring for equipment specified under this section.


install additional electrical services as part of the bid.

installation.

concrete and other structural components during construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.2 All sizes, capacities, and efficiency ratings shown are minimum, except that gas capacity
is maximum available.
2.1.3 Refer to Division 22 10 00 and 23 80 00 for specific system piping materials.
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 No material installed as part of this Work shall contain asbestos.
2.2.2 California Green Building Code Compliance:
2.2.2.1 HVAC and refrigeration equipment shall not contain CFCs.

JKA #15-100 230050 - 9
2.2.2.2 HVAC and refrigeration equipment shall not contain Halons.
2.3 ELECTRIC MOTORS
2.3.1 General Motor Requirements: Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.3.1.1.1 U.S. Motors.
2.3.1.1.2 Century Electric.
2.3.1.1.3 General Electric.
2.3.1.1.4 Lincoln.
2.3.1.1.5 Gould.
2.3.2 Motor Characteristics: Designed for continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg. C
and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. Capacity and torque shall be sufficient to
start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude
and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate
ratings or considering service factor.
2.3.2.1 Motors exceeding the nameplate amperage shall be promptly replaced at no

cost to the Owner. Horsepower shown is minimum and shall be increased as
necessary to comply with above requirements. Furnish motors with splash-
proof or weatherproof housings, where required or recommended by the
manufacturer. Match the nameplate voltage rating with the electrical service
supplied. Check Electrical Drawings. Provide a transformer for each motor
not wound specifically for system voltage.
2.3.3 Polyphase Motors: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor, efficiency as defined
in NEMA MG 1. Select motors with service factor of 1.15. Provide motor with random-
wound, squirrel cage rotor, and permanently lubricated or regreasable, shielded,
antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. Temperature rise shall
match insulation rating. Provide Class F insulation.
2.3.3.1 Multispeed motors shall have separate windings for each speed.
2.3.4 Polyphase Motors with Additional Requirements:
2.3.4.1 Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring
connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide
terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.
2.3.4.2 Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers:
2.3.4.2.1 Separately Connected Motors: Ratings, characteristics, and

features coordinated with and approved by controller
manufacturer.
2.3.4.2.2 Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant

insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient
JKA #15-100 230050 - 10
spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced
by pulse-width modulated inverters.
2.3.4.2.3 Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature

rise; Class F insulation.
2.3.4.2.4 Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H

insulation.
2.3.4.2.5 Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements

for thermally protected motors.
2.3.4.3 Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service
factor.
2.3.5 Single-Phase Motors:
2.3.5.1 Select motors with service factor of 1.15.
2.3.5.2 Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque
and requirements of specific motor application:
2.3.5.2.1 Permanent-split capacitor.
2.3.5.2.2 Split phase.
2.3.5.2.3 Capacitor start, inductor run.
2.3.5.2.4 Capacitor start, capacitor run.
2.3.5.3 Motors for HVAC exhaust, transfer, and supply fans larger than 1/12 hp and
smaller than 1 hp shall be the following:
2.3.5.3.1 Electronically Commutated motor (EC type): Motor shall be

electronically commutated type specifically designed for
applications, with heavy duty ball bearings. The motor shall
be speed controllable down to 20% of full speed and 85%
efficient at all speeds.
Exceptions:
Motors in fan-coils and

terminal units that operate
only when providing
heating to the space served.
Motors installed in space

conditioning equipment
certified under 2013
California Energy Code
Section 110.1 or 110.2.
2.3.5.4 Contractors Option: Motors scheduled on Drawings as single-phase, and

larger than 1/12 hp and smaller than 1 hp, for applications other than HVAC
fans, may be EC type.
2.3.5.5 Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

JKA #15-100 230050 - 11
2.3.5.6 Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable
for radial and thrust loading.
2.3.5.7 Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
2.3.5.8 Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply

circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to
temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall
automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
2.4 MOTOR STARTERS
2.4.1 Square D, Allen Bradley, or equal, in NEMA Type 1 enclosure, unless otherwise specified
or required. Minimum starter size shall be Size 1. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure where
exposed to outdoors.
2.4.2 Provide magnetic motor starters for all equipment provided under the Mechanical Work.
Starters shall be non-combination type. Provide part winding or reduced voltage start
motors where shown or as hereinafter specified. Minimum size starter shall be Size 1.
2.4.2.1 All starters shall have the following:
2.4.2.1.1 Cover mounted hand-off-automatic switch. Starters installed

exposed in occupied spaces shall have key operated HOA
switch.
2.4.2.1.2 Ambient compensated thermal overload.

2.4.2.2 Where three phase motors are provided for two-speed operation, provide two
speed motor starters.
2.4.2.3 Starters for single-phase motors shall have thermal overloads. NEMA I
enclosure for starters located indoors, NEMA IIIR enclosure for starters
located outdoors.
2.4.2.4 Provide OSHA label indicating the device starts automatically.
2.5 ACCESS DOORS
2.5.1 Where floors, walls, or ceilings must be penetrated for access to mechanical equipment,
provide access doors, 14 inch by 14 inch minimum size in usable opening. Where
entrance of a serviceman may be required, provide 20 inch by 30 inch minimum usable
opening. Locate access doors/panels for non-obstructed and easy reach.
2.5.1.1 All access doors less than 7'-0" above floors and exposed to public access
2.5.2 Access doors shall match those supplied in Division 08 in all respects, except as noted
herein.

JKA #15-100 230050 - 12
other damp areas. Provide steel access doors with prime coat of baked-on paint for all
other areas.
2.5.4 Where panels are located on ducts or plenums, provide neoprene gaskets to prevent air
leakage, and use frames to set door out to flush with insulation.
2.5.5 Provide insulated doors where located in internally insulated ducts or casings.
and primary entrance areas. Coordinate with the Architect when access is required in
these areas.
2.5.7 Where specific information or details relating to access panels different from the above is
shown or given on the Drawings or other Divisions of work, then that information shall

offering products which may be incorporated into the Work include Milcor, Karp, Nystrom,
or Cesco, equal to the following:
2.5.8.1 Milcor
2.5.8.1.3 Style M (Masonry).
2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
2.6.1 Identify each piece of equipment with a permanently attached engraved bakelite plate, 1/2
inch high white letters on black background.
plastic pipe labels formed to circumference of pipe, requiring no fasteners or adhesive for
attachment to pipe.
2.7.2 The legend and flow arrow shall conform to ASME A13.1.
2.8 INSULATION WORK
2.8.1 General:
2.8.1.1 Insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets,

adhesives, sealants and coatings shall not contain polybrominated diphenyl
ethers (PBDEs) in penta, octa, or deca formulations in amounts greater than
0.1 percent (by mass).
2.8.1.2 Adhesives and sealants shall comply with testing and product requirements
of South Coast Air Quality Management District, Rule 1168.

JKA #15-100 230050 - 13
2.8.1.3 The term "piping" used herein includes pipe, air separators, valves, strainers
and fittings.
2.8.1.4 Apply insulating cement to fittings, valves and strainers and trowel smooth to
the thickness of adjacent covering. Cover with jacket to match piping. Extend
covering on valves up to the bonnet. Leave strainer cleanout plugs
accessible.
2.8.1.5 Provide pre-formed PVC valve and fitting covers for indoor piping.
2.8.1.6 Provide factory-fabricated aluminum valve and fitting covers for outdoor
piping.
2.8.1.7 Provide Calcium Silicate rigid insulation and sheet metal sleeve, 18 inch
minimum length at each pipe hanger. Seal ends of insulation to make vapor
tight with jacket.
2.8.1.8 Urethane insulation will not be allowed above ground or on hot water piping.
2.8.1.9 Test insulation, jackets, and lap-seal adhesives as a composite product and
not more than 50 when tested in accordance with UL723, ASTM E84, or
NFPA 255.
2.8.1.10 Clean thoroughly, test and have approved, all piping and equipment before
2.8.1.11 Repair all damage to existing pipe and duct insulation whether or not caused
during the work of this contract, to match existing adjacent insulation for
thickness and finish, but conforming to flame spread and smoke ratings
specified above.
2.8.2 Insulation of Piping:
2.8.2.1 Exposed insulated piping within the building shall have a Zeston 2000 25/50,
Proto Lo-Smoke, or equal, PVC jacket and fitting cover installed over the
insulation, applied per manufacturer's instructions. Verify suitability with
manufacturer of insulation. Insulation with pre-applied polymer jacket may be
substituted at Contractors option.
2.8.2.2 Insulate refrigerant suction piping and chilled water supply and return piping,
including fittings, with 3-1/2 pound per cubic foot minimum density fiberglass
with factory-applied ASJ-SSL jacket Insulate valves and irregular surfaces to
match adjacent insulation and cover with two layers of Glasfab saturated in
Foster Sealfas 30-36, 3M, or equal, carried 3 inches over the adjoining pipe
insulation. Finish with a coat of Foster Sealfas 30-36, 3M, or equal. The 3
inch wide SSL end laps furnished with the insulation shall be adhered over
the end joints. Seal entire surface of insulation vapor tight, including joints
and ends of PVC or aluminum fitting covers. Insulation thicknesses per
application follow:
2.8.2.2.1 Indoor refrigerant suction piping 3/4 inch diameter and

smaller: 1 inch thick.
2.8.2.2.2 Indoor refrigerant suction piping 1 inch diameter and larger:

1-1/2 inches thick.

JKA #15-100 230050 - 14
2.8.2.2.3 Outdoor refrigerant suction piping; all sizes: 2 inches thick.
2.8.2.3 Where insulated piping is exposed to the weather apply aluminum jacket
secured with 1/2 inch stainless-steel bands on 12 inch centers. Insulation
shall be vapor tight before applying metal jacket, and aluminum fitting covers.
Install jacketing with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Cover
fittings with glass cloth, two coats of Foster Sealfas 30-36, and factory-
fabricated aluminum fitting covers, of same material, finish, and thickness as
jacket.
2.8.2.3.1 Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and

long-radius elbows.
2.8.2.3.2 Tee covers.
2.8.2.3.3 Flange and union covers.
2.8.2.3.4 End caps.
2.8.2.3.5 Beveled collars.
2.8.2.3.6 Valve covers.
2.8.2.3.7 Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting

covers are not available.
2.8.2.4 Jacket thickness:
2.8.2.4.1 Pipes 10 inches diameter and smaller: Minimum .016 inch

thick jacket with smooth finish.
2.8.2.4.2 Pipes 12 inches diameter and larger: Minimum .020 inch

thick jacket with smooth finish.
2.8.3 Duct Insulation:
2.8.3.1 All duct insulation shall meet minimum R-value of R-8 at 3 inch thickness 3/4
pound per cubic foot density for ductwork installed outside the building
insulation envelope. For ductwork installed within the building insulation
envelope, duct insulation shall have a minimum R-value of R-4.2 at 2 inch
thickness, 3/4 pound per cubic foot density.
2.8.3.2 General: Insulation applied to the exterior surface of ducts located in

buildings shall have a flame spread of not more than 25 and a
smoke-developed rating of not more than 50 when tested as a composite
installation including insulation, facing materials, tapes and adhesives as
normally applied. Material exposed within ducts or plenum shall have a
flame-spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke-developed rating of not
more than 50.
2.8.3.3 Wrap all unlined concealed supply and return ducts with fiberglass duct wrap,
manufactured as a blanket of glass fibers factory laminated to a reinforced
foil/kraft vapor retarding facing. Provide 2 inch stapling and taping flange.
Wrap insulation entirely around duct and secure with outward clinching
staples on 6 inch centers. Provide mechanical fasteners at maximum 18 inch
JKA #15-100 230050 - 15
centers for all bottoms of duct which are greater than 24 inches. Lap all
insulation joints 3" minimum. Insulate ducts installed tight against other work
before hanging in place. Seal all seams, both longitudinal and transverse,
and all staple and mechanical fastener penetrations of facing with scrim
backed foil tape or recommended sealant, to provide a vapor tight installation.
2.8.3.4 Provide internal duct lining in accordance with specification section 23 80 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
3.1.1 Refer to Division 01 Sections Cutting and Patching and Selective Demolition for
3.1.2 Disconnect, dismantle and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components

remain with same or compatible piping material. Refrigerant system must be
evacuated per EPA requirements.
3.1.2.3 Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and

cap remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
3.1.2.4 Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
remove equipment.

3.1.2.7 Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
3.1.3 If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,

remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal
capacity and quality.
California Electrical Code. Coordinate the Mechanical Work with the Electrical Work to
comply.
3.2.2 Furnish necessary control diagrams and instructions for the controls. Before permitting
operation of any equipment which is furnished, installed, or modified under this Section,
review all associated electrical work, including overload protection devices, and assume
complete responsibility for the correctness of the electrical connections and protective
devices. Motors and control equipment shall conform to the Standards of the National
Electrical Manufacturers' Association. All equipment and connections exposed to the
JKA #15-100 230050 - 16
weather shall be NEMA IIIR with factory-wired strip heaters in each starter enclosure and
temperature control panel where required to inhibit condensation.
3.2.3 All line voltage and low voltage wiring and conduit associated with the Temperature
Control System are included in this Section. Wiring and conduit shall comply with Division
26.
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
3.4.2 Priming:
factory-finished shall be primed. Black steel pipe exposed to the weather
shall be painted one coat of Rust-Oleum #1069 primer for black steel piping
or Rust-Oleum #5260, Kelly Moore, or equal, primer for galvanized piping.
3.4.2.2 Metal surfaces of items to be jacketed or insulated except ductwork and piping
shall be given two coats of primer unless furnished with equivalent factory
finish. Items to be primed shall be properly cleaned by effective means free
of rust, dirt, scale, grease and other deleterious matter and then primed with
the best available grade of zinc rich primer. After erection or installation, all
primed surfaces shall be properly cleaned of any foreign or deleterious matter
that might impair proper bonding of subsequent paint coatings. Any abrasion
or other damage to the shop or field prime coat shall be properly repaired and
touched up with the same material used for the original priming.
3.4.2.3 Where equipment is provided with nameplate data, the nameplate should be
material.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND DUCT SYSTEMS
3.5.1 General:
3.5.1.1 All piping shall be concealed unless shown or otherwise directed. Allow
3.5.1.2 Installation of piping shall be made with appropriate fittings. Bending of piping
will not be accepted.
3.5.1.3 Install piping to permit application of insulation and to allow valve servicing.
3.5.1.4 Where piping, conduit, or ductwork is left exposed within a room, the same
shall be run true to plumb, horizontal, or intended planes. Where possible,
uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and/or adjacent
wall, floor, or ceiling surfaces.
JKA #15-100 230050 - 17
3.5.1.5 Horizontal runs of pipes, conduits, or ductwork suspended from ceilings shall
provide for a maximum headroom clearance. The clearance shall not be less
than 6'-6" without written approval from the Architect.
3.5.1.6 Close ends of pipe immediately after installation. Leave closure in place until
removal is necessary for completion of installation.
3.5.1.7 At the time of rough installation, or during storage on the construction site and
until final startup of the heating and cooling equipment, all duct and other
related air distribution component opening shall be covered with tape, plastic,
sheet metal, or other methods acceptable to the enforcing agency.
air.
3.5.1.13 Where piping is installed in walls within one inch of the face of stud, provide
a 16 gauge sheet metal shield plate on the face of the stud. The shield plate
shall extend a minimum of 1-1/2 inches beyond the outside diameter of the
pipe.
3.5.2 Sleeves:
3.5.2.1 Install Adjus-to-Crete, Pipeline Seal and Insulator, or equal, pipe sleeves of
sufficient size to allow for free motion of pipe, 24 gauge galvanized steel. The
space between pipe and sleeves through floor slabs on ground, through
outside walls above or below grade, through roof, and other locations as
directed shall be caulked with oakum and mastic and made watertight. The
space between pipe and sleeve and between sleeve and slab or wall shall be
sealed watertight.
3.5.2.2 At Contractor's option, Link-Seal, Metraflex Metraseal, or equal, casing seals

may be used in lieu of caulking. Wrap pipes through slabs on grade with 1
inch thick fiberglass insulation to completely isolate the pipe from the
concrete.
3.5.3.1 Fit all pipes with or without insulation passing through walls, floors, or ceilings,
and all hanger rods penetrating finished ceilings with chrome-plated or
stainless escutcheon plates.
3.5.4 Firestopping:
3.5.4.1 Pack the annular space between the pipe sleeves and the pipe and between
duct openings and ducts through all floors and walls with UL listed fire stop,

JKA #15-100 230050 - 18
and sealed at the ends. All pipe penetrations shall be UL listed, Hilti, 3M Pro-
Set, or equal.
3.5.4.1.1 Install fire caulking behind mechanical services installed

construction.
3.5.4.2 Provide SpecSeal Systems UL fire rated sleeve/coupling penetrators for each
pipe penetration or fixture opening passing through floors, walls, partitions or
floor/ceiling assemblies. All Penetrators shall comply with UL Fire Resistance
Directory (Latest Edition), and in accordance with CBC requirements.
3.5.4.3 Sleeve penetrators shall have a built in anchor ring for waterproofing and
anchoring into concrete pours or use the special fit cored hole penetrator for
cored holes.
3.5.4.4 Copper and steel piping shall have SpecSeal plugs on both sides of the
penetrator to reduce noise and to provide waterproofing.
3.5.4.5 All above Firestopping systems to be installed in strict accordance with

3.5.4.6 Alternate firestopping systems are acceptable if approved equal. However,

any deviation from the above specification requires the Contractor to be
responsible for determining the suitability of the proposed products and their
intended use, and the Contractor shall assume all risks and liabilities
whatsoever in connection therewith.
3.5.5 Flashing:
3.5.5.1 Flashing for penetrations of metal or membrane roof for mechanical items
such as flues, ducts, and pipes shall be coordinated with the roofing
manufacturer and roofing installer for the specific roofing type. The work of
this section shall include furnishing, layout, sizing, and coordination of
penetrations required for the mechanical work.
3.5.5.1.1 Furnish and install flashing and counterflashing in strict

conformance with the requirements of the roofing
manufacturer. Submit shop drawing details for review prior
to installation.
3.5.5.1.2 Furnish and install counterflashing above each flashing

required. Provide Stoneman, or equal, vandalproof top and
flashing combination. Elmdor/Stoneman Model 1540.
3.5.5.1.3 Flues and ducts shall have 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal
storm collar securely clamped to the flue above the flashing.
3.5.5.2 For all other types of roofing system, furnish and install around each pipe,
where it passes through roof, a flashing and counterflashing. All flashing shall
be made of four pound seamless sheet lead with 6 inch minimum skirt and
steel reinforced boot. Counterflashing shall be cast iron. For vents, provide
vandalproof top and flashing combination. Elmdor/Stoneman Model 1100-4.

JKA #15-100 230050 - 19
3.5.6.1 General: Support all ductwork, equipment and piping so that it is firmly held
in place by approved iron hangers and supports, and special hangers as
required. All components shall support weight of ductwork, equipment and
pipe, fluid, and pipe insulation based on spacing between supports with
minimum factor of safety of five based on ultimate strength of material used.
Do not exceed manufacturer's load rating. Pipe attachments or hangers, of
same size as pipe or tubing on which used, or nearest available. Rigidly
fasten hose faucets, fixture stops, compressed air outlets, and similar items
to the building construction. The Architect shall approve all hanger material
before installation. Do not support piping or ductwork with plumbers' tape,
wire rope, wood, or other makeshift devices. Where building structural
members do not match piping and ductwork support spacing, provide all
bridging support members as required firmly attached to building structural
members in a fashion approved by the Structural Engineer.
3.5.6.1.1 Materials, design, and type numbers for support of piping per
Manufacturers' Standardization Society (MSS), Standard
Practice (SP)-58.
3.5.6.1.2 Materials and design for ductwork support shall be per

SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and
Flexible.
3.5.6.2 All hanger components shall be provided by one manufacturer: B-Line,

Grinnell, Uni-Strut, Badger, or equal.
3.5.6.3 Pipe Hanger and Support Spacing:
3.5.6.3.1 Vertical piping support spacing: B-line #B3373 clamps

attached to the pipe above each floor to rest on the floor.
Provide with lead or Teflon liners on copper tubing. Provide
additional support at base of cast iron risers and support at
unsupported riser joints and horizontal offsets per 2007
Mason Industries Seismic Restraint Guidelines. Provide
intermediate support for vertical piping, spaced at or within
the following maximum limits.
Pipe Steel Steel Va- Copper Copper CPVC & PVC

Diameter Fluid por Fluid Vapor (Note 2)
1/2 - 1 12 ft. 6 ft. 10 ft. 6 ft. Base and Each

Floor (Note 1)


Over 4 12 ft. Each 10 ft. 10 ft. Base and Each

Note 1: Provide mid-story guides.

JKA #15-100 230050 - 20
Note 2: For PVC piping, provide for
expansion every 30 feet per IAPMO
installation standard.
3.5.6.3.2 Vertical cast iron piping support spacing: Base and each
floor not to exceed 15 feet.
3.5.6.3.3 Horizontal piping, hanger and support spacing: Locate

hangers and supports at each change of direction, within one
foot of elbow, and spaced at or within following maximum
limits.
Pipe Steel Steel Va- Copper Copper Va- CPVC

Diameter Fluid por Fluid por & PVC
1/2 - 1" 6 ft. 6 ft. 5 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft.
1-1/4 - 2" 7 ft. 10 ft. 6 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft.
2-1/2 - 3" 10 ft. 10 ft. 10 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft.
Over 4" 10 ft. 10 ft. 10 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft.
3.5.6.3.4 Horizontal cast iron piping support spacing:
Support piping at every other joint for piping

length of less than 4 feet.
For piping longer than 4 feet, provide

support on each side of the coupling, within
18 inches of each joint.
Hanger shall not be installed on the

coupling.
Provide support at each horizontal branch

connection.
Provide sway brace at 40 foot maximum

spacing for all suspended pipe with no-hub
joints, except where a lesser spacing is
indicated in the 2007 Mason Industries
Seismic Restraint Guidelines. Provide a
brace on each side of a change in direction
of 90 degrees or more. Brace riser joints at
each floor and at 15 foot maximum intervals.
3.5.6.4 Suspended Piping:
3.5.6.4.1 Individually suspended piping: B-Line B3690 J-Hanger or

B3100 Clevis, complete with threaded rod, or equal. All
hangers on supply and return piping handling heating hot
water or steam shall have a swing connector at point of
support.
Pipe Size Rod Size Diameter

JKA #15-100 230050 - 21
2" and Smaller 3/8"
2-1/2" to 3-1/2" 1/2"
4" to 5" 5/8"
6" 3/4"
3.5.6.4.2 Trapeze Suspension: B-Line 1-5/8 inch width channel in

accordance with manufacturers published load ratings. No
deflection to exceed 1/180 of a span.
3.5.6.4.3 Trapeze Supporting Rods: Shall have a safety factor of five;

securely anchor to building structure.
3.5.6.4.4 Pipe Clamps and Straps: B-Line B2000, B2400; isolate

copper pipe with two thicknesses of 2 inches wide 10-mil
polyvinyl tape. Where used for seismic support systems,
provide B-Line B2400 series pipe straps.
3.5.6.4.5 Above Roof: H frame made from Uni-Strut hot-dipped

galvanized 1-5/8 inch single or double channel with P-2072A
or P-2073A foot secured to roof and surrounded with
waterproof roofed-in sleeper. Secure to sleeper with lag
screws, and secure sleeper to blocking under roof.
3.5.6.4.6 Steel Connectors: Beam clamps with retainers.
3.5.6.5 Duct Hanger and Support Spacing: Conform to Requirements of CMC and
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.

required to suit structure. Provide lag screws or through bolts
with length to suit requirements, and with size (diameter) to
match the size of hanger rods required.
Do not install Lag screws in tension without

Engineer.
Blocking for support of piping shall be not

size (water filled) or 3 inch size (vapor filled).
Provide 3 inch blocking for piping up through
5 inch size, and 4 inch blocking for larger
piping. Provide support for blocking in

JKA #15-100 230050 - 22
accordance with Structural Engineers
requirements.
Where lag screws are used, length of screw

screw.

length to suit requirements of the structural components.
Burning or welding on any structural member may only be
done if approved by the Architect.
3.5.6.7 Rubber Neoprene Pipe Isolators:
3.5.6.7.1 Pipe isolators shall comprise an internal rubber or neoprene

material that isolates pipe from hanger and structure. Install
at all piping located in acoustical walls. Refer to Architectural
Drawings for location of acoustical walls.
3.5.6.7.2 Isolation material shall be either a rubber or neoprene

material that prevents contact between the pipe and the
structure. The rubber shall have between a 45 to 55
durometer rating and a minimum thickness of 1/2 inch.
3.5.6.7.3 Acceptable Suppliers:
Vertical runs: Acousto-Plumb or equal.
Horizontal runs: B-Line, Vibraclamp;

Acousto-Plumb or equal.
3.5.6.8 Provide support for piping through roof, arranged to anchor piping solidly in
place at the roof penetration.
3.5.6.10 Insulate copper tubing from ferrous materials and hangers with two
thicknesses of 3 inch wide, 10 mil polyvinyl tape wrapped around pipe.
3.5.6.13 On chilled or combination hot and chilled water or refrigerant pipes, install the
hangers on the outside of the pipe covering and not in contact with the pipe.
Provide rigid insulation and a 12 inch long, 18 gauge galvanized sheet iron

JKA #15-100 230050 - 23
3.6.1 Install Epco, Nibco, or equal, dielectric unions or flanges at points of connection between
copper or brass piping or material and steel or cast iron pipe or material except in drain
piping. Bushings or couplings shall not be used.
3.6.2 Install unions in piping NPS 2 and smaller 3 or flanges in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger
whether shown or not at each connection to all equipment and tanks, and at all
connections to all automatic valves, such as temperature control valves.
3.6.3 Locate the unions for easy removal of the equipment, tank, or valve.
3.6.4 Do not install unions or flanges in refrigerant piping systems.
3.7 ACCESS DOOR
maintenance of mechanical systems; for example, at concealed valves, strainers, traps,
cleanouts, dampers, motors, controls, operating equipment, etc. Access doors shall
provide for complete removal and replacement of equipment.
3.8.1 Provide temporary identification of each pipe installed, at the time of installation.
Temporary identification shall be removed and replaced with permanent identification as
part of the work.
3.8.2 Apply the legend and flow arrow at all valve locations; at all points where the piping enters
or leaves a wall, partition, cluster of piping or similar obstruction, at each change of
direction, and at approximately 20'-0" intervals on pipe runs. Variations or changes in
locations and spacing may be made with the approval of the Architect. There shall be at
least one marking in each room. Markings shall be located for maximum visibility from
expected personnel approach.
3.8.3 Wherever two or more pipes run parallel, the markings shall be supplied in the same
relative location on each.
3.8.4 Apply the markings after painting and cleaning of piping and insulation is completed.
3.9.1 Test the installations in accordance with the following requirements and all applicable
codes:
3.9.1.1 Notify the Architect at least seven days in advance of any test.
3.9.1.2 Inspector of Record should witness all tests of piping systems.
3.9.1.3 All piping shall be tested at completion of roughing-in, or at other times as

directed by the Architect.
3.9.1.4 Furnish all necessary materials, test pumps, gases, instruments and labor
3.9.1.5 Isolate from the system all equipment that may be damaged by test pressure.
3.9.2 Perform operational tests under simulated or actual service conditions, including one test
of complete plumbing installation with all fixtures and other appliances connected, and

JKA #15-100 230050 - 24
one test of complete installation of 48 hours each for heating and cooling with all
equipment connected and operating.
3.9.3 Should any material or work fail in any of these tests, it shall be immediately removed and
replaced for new material, and portion of the work replaced shall again be tested by
3.9.5 Testing, Evacuating, Charging and Lubrication of Refrigeration Systems:
3.9.5.1 Pressurize with dry nitrogen and/or refrigerant to 300 psig and test all joints
with an electronic detector or halide torch. Release the pressure and attach
a high vacuum pump. Evacuate to 4 mm (4000 microns) and hold for 30
minutes. Break to 5 psig with dry nitrogen and allow to remain in the system
for ten minutes. Evacuate to 2 mm (2000 microns) and hold for 30 minutes.
Use a mercury manometer or electronic vacuum gauge. Do not start timing
until recommended vacuum range is reached.
3.9.5.2 At the end of the evacuation, if the system has been proved leak-free, charge
with refrigerant and fill the crankcase to the oil level specified by the
manufacturer. All refrigerant oil shall be delivered to the location in sealed
containers.
3.9.5.3 Replenish for a period of one year without cost to the Owner all refrigerant
and oil required to maintain the proper levels.
3.10 OPERATION OF SYSTEMS
3.10.1 Do not operate any mechanical equipment for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until
all of the following has been completed:
3.10.1.1 Complete all requirements listed under Check, Test and Start
Requirements.
3.10.1.2 Ductwork and piping has been properly cleaned. Piping systems shall be
flushed and treated prior to operation.
3.10.1.3 Filters, strainers etc. are in place.
3.10.1.4 Bearings have been lubricated, and alignment of rotating equipment has been
checked.
3.10.1.5 Equipment has been run under observation, and is operating in a satisfactory
manner.
3.10.2 Provide test and balance agency with one set of Contract Drawings, Specifications,
Addenda, Change orders issued, applicable shop drawings and submittals and
temperature control drawings.
3.10.3 Operate every fire damper, smoke damper, combination smoke and fire damper under
normal operating conditions. Activate smoke detectors as required to operate the damper,
stage fan, etc. Provide written confirmation that all systems operate in a satisfactory
manner.
3.11 TEMPORARY HEAT

JKA #15-100 230050 - 25
3.11.1 The General Contractor will provide for all temporary heat at such times as may be
required or directed by the Architect and pay all fuel and energy costs incurred.
3.11.2 Temporary heating facilities proposed for use by the Contractor will be subject to review
of the Architect. Prior to use of any equipment for temporary heat, install temporary filters
on all return air inlets, to preclude dust and construction debris from entering the duct
system. In addition, install filters in air handling units, and replace at the completion of
temporary operation.
3.11.3 Filters used for temporary operation of systems shall be as specified for permanent filters
specified herein.
3.11.4 Comply with Check, Test and Start Requirements for start-up of equipment prior to
operation for temporary heat.
3.12.1 An authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer shall perform check, test and
start of each piece of mechanical equipment. The representative may be an employee of
the equipment manufacturer, or a manufacturer-certified contractor. Submit written
certification from the manufacturer stating that the representative is qualified to perform
the check test and start of the equipment.

requirement.
3.12.1.4 When work has been completed, provide copies of reports for review, prior to
final observation of work.
of equipment. Indicate frequency of service, recommended spare parts (including filters
and lubricants), and methods for adjustment and alignment of all equipment components.
Provide a copy of the schedule with each Operation and Maintenance Manual. Provide a
copy of certification from the Owners representative indicating that they have been
properly instructed in maintenance requirements for the equipment installed.
3.13 PRELIMINARY OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS
3.13.1 Prior to observation to determine final acceptance, put HVAC, plumbing, and fire
protection systems into service and check that work required for that purpose has been
done, including but not limited to the following condensed check list. Provide indexed
report to tabulating the results of all work.
3.13.1.1 All equipment has been started, checked, lubricated and adjusted in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including modulating
power exhausts if present.
JKA #15-100 230050 - 26
3.13.1.3 Specified filters are installed and spare filters have been turned over to
Owner.
3.13.1.4 All manufacturers certificates of start-up specified have been delivered to the
Owner.
3.13.1.6 Damaged fins on heat exchangers have been combed out.
3.13.1.8 Flushing and chemical treatment of piping systems has been completed and
water treatment equipment, where specified, is in operation.
installed.
3.13.1.11 Preliminary test and balance work is complete, and reports have been
forwarded for review.
3.13.1.12 Automatic control set points are as designated and performance of controls
checks out to agree with the sequence of operation.
3.13.1.13 Operation and Maintenance Manuals have been delivered and instructions to
the operating personnel have been made.
3.13.2 Prior to the observation to determine final acceptance, operate all mechanical systems as
required to demonstrate that the installation and performance of these systems conform
to the requirements of these specifications.
3.13.2.1 Operate and test all mechanical equipment and systems for a period of at
least five consecutive 8 hour days to demonstrate the satisfactory overall
operation of the project as a complete unit.
3.13.2.2 Include operation of heating and air conditioning equipment and systems for
a period of not less than two 8 hour days at not less than 90 percent of full
specified heating and cooling capacities in tests.
3.13.2.3 Commence tests after preliminary balancing and adjustments to equipment

have been checked. Immediately before starting tests, install air filters and
lubricate all running equipment. Notify the Architect at least seven calendar
days in advance of starting the above tests.
3.13.2.4 During the test period, make final adjustments and balancing of equipment,
systems controls, and circuits so that all are placed in first class operating
condition.
3.13.2.5 Where Utility District rebates are applicable, demonstrate that the systems
meet the rebate program requirements.
3.13.3 Before handing over the system to Owner replace all filters with complete new set of filters.
JKA #15-100 230050 - 27
3.13.4.1 All tests made by the Contractor or manufacturers' representatives are

subject to observation and review by the Owner. Provide timely notice prior
to start of each test, in order to allow for observation of testing. Upon the
completion of all tests, provide a letter to confirm that all testing has been
successful.
3.13.5 Test Logs:
3.13.5.1 Maintain test logs listing the tests on all mechanical systems showing dates,
items tested, inspectors' names, remarks on success or failure of the tests.
3.13.6 Preliminary Operation:
3.13.6.1 The Owner reserves the right to operate portions of the mechanical system
on a preliminary basis without voiding the guarantee.
3.13.7 Operational Tests:
3.13.7.1 Before operational tests are performed, demonstrate that all systems and
components are complete and fully charged with operating fluid and
lubricants.
3.13.7.2 Systems shall be operable and capable of maintaining continuous

uninterrupted operation during the operating and demonstration period. After
all systems have been completely installed, connections made, and tests
completed, operate the systems continuously for a period of five working days
during the hours of a normal working day.
3.13.7.3 This period of continuous systems operation may be coordinated with the
removal of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) from the building prior to
occupancy should the Owner decide to implement such a program.
3.13.7.4 Control systems shall be completely operable with settings properly calibrated
and adjusted.
3.13.7.5 Rotating equipment shall be in dynamic balance and alignment.
3.13.7.6 If the system fails to operate continuously during the test period, the
deficiencies shall be corrected and the entire test repeated.
3.13.8 Pre-Occupancy Building Purge:
3.13.8.1 Prior to occupancy, ventilate the building on 100 percent outside air, 100
percent exhaust for a continuous period determined by a qualified industrial
hygienist (engaged by the Contractor) to reduce V.O.Cs prior to occupancy.
3.13.8.2 Submit report by the industrial hygienist verifying satisfactory completion of

the pre-occupancy purge.
3.14 CERTIFICATES OF INSTALLATION
3.14.1 Contractor shall complete applicable Certificates of Installation forms contained in the
California Building Energy Efficiency Standards and submit to the authorities having
jurisdiction for approval and issuance of final occupancy permit, as described in the
California Energy Code.
JKA #15-100 230050 - 28
3.15 ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS
3.15.1 Contractor shall complete the applicable Acceptance Requirements for Code Compliance
contained in the California Building Energy Efficiency Standards. Refer to forms MCH-01-
E on Drawings for systems having Acceptance testing requirements. Contractor shall
perform Acceptance tests and shall complete the appropriate Certificates of Acceptance
and submit certificates to the authorities having jurisdiction for approval and issuance of
final occupancy permit.
3.15.1.1 Covered Processes: In addition to systems listed in MCH-01-E on Drawings,

complete Acceptance Requirements for the following systems, if applicable to
Project:
3.15.1.1.1 Parking garage ventilation systems.
3.15.1.1.2 Compressed air systems.
3.15.1.1.3 Type 1 Kitchen exhaust systems.
3.16 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
3.16.1 An authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer shall train Owner-designated

personnel in maintenance and adjustment of equipment. The representative may be an
perform the Owner training for the equipment installed.
3.16.1.1 As part of the submittal process, provide a training agenda outlining major
topics and time allowed for each topic.
3.16.1.2 Some items of specified equipment require that training must be performed
by the manufacturer, using manufacturers employees. See specific
equipment Articles in these Specifications for this requirement.
3.16.1.3 Contractor shall provide three copies of certification by Contractor that training
has been completed, signed by Owners representative, for inclusion in
Operation and Maintenance Manual. Certificates shall include:
3.16.1.3.1 Listing of Owner-designated personnel completing training,

by name and title.
3.16.1.3.2 Name and title of training instructor.
3.16.1.3.3 Date(s) of training.
3.16.1.3.4 List of topics covered in training sessions.
3.16.1.4 Refer to specific equipment Articles for minimum training period duration for
each piece of equipment.

JKA #15-100 230050 - 29
SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.2.1 Section Includes:
1.2.1.1 Balancing Air Systems:
1.2.1.1.1 Constant-volume air systems.
1.2.1.2 Balancing Domestic Water Piping Systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
1.3.1 Associated Air Balance Council (AABC)
1.3.1.1 National Standards for Total System Balance, latest edition.
1.3.2 National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB)
1.3.2.1 Procedural Standards for Testing and Balancing of Environmental Systems,

latest edition.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
1.4.1 The intent of this Section is to use the standards pertaining to the TAB specialist
engaged to perform the Work of this Contract, with additional requirements specified in
this Section. Contract requirements take precedence over corresponding AABC or
NEBB standards requirements. Differences in terminology between the Specifications
and the specified TAB organization standards do not relieve the TAB entity engaged to
perform the Work of this Contract of responsibility from completing the Work as
described in the Specifications.
1.4.2 Similar Terms: The following table is provided for clarification only:
Similar Terms
Contract Term AABC Term NEBB Term
TAB Specialist TAB Agency NEBB Certified Firm

County of Tehama TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
JKA #15-100 230593 - 1
TAB Standard National Standards for Testing Procedural Standards for Testing, Ad-
and Balancing Heating, Ventilat- justing, and Balancing of Environ-
ing, and Air Conditioning Sys- mental Systems
tems
TAB Field Su- Test and Balance Engineer Test and Balance Supervisor
pervisor
1.4.3 AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
1.4.4 NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
1.4.5 TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
1.4.6 TAB Organization: Body governing practices of TAB Specialists.
1.4.7 TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the
qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
1.6.1.1 Provide list of similar projects completed by proposed TAB field supervisor.
1.6.1.2 Provide copy of completed TAB report, approved by mechanical engineer of

record for a completed project with similar system types and of similar
complexity.
1.6.2 Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to

Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
1.6.2.1 Submit examinations report with qualifications data.
1.6.3 Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
1.6.4 Interim Reports. Submit interim reports as specified in Part 3. Include list of system
conditions requiring correction and problems not identified in Contract Documents
examination report.
1.6.5 Certified TAB reports.
1.6.5.1 Provide three printed copies of final TAB report. Provide one electronic file
copy in PDF format.
1.6.6 Sample report forms.
1.6.7 Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1.6.7.1 Instrument type and make.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 2
1.6.7.2 Serial number.
1.6.7.3 Application.
1.6.7.4 Dates of use.
1.6.7.5 Dates of calibration.
1.6.7.5.1 Instruments to be used for testing and balancing shall have

been calibrated within a period of one year, or less if so
recommended by instrument manufacturer. and be checked
for accuracy prior to start of work.
1.7.1 Independent TAB Specialist Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or
NEBB.
1.7.1.1 The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of TAB work for
this Project. If TAB specialist loses certification during this period, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect and submit another TAB
specialist for approval. All work specified in this Section and in other related
Sections performed by the TAB specialist shall be invalidated if the TAB
specialist loses certification, and shall be performed by an approved
successor.
1.7.2 To secure approval for the proposed TAB specialist, submit information certifying that
the TAB specialist is either a first tier subcontractor engaged and paid by the Contractor,
or is engaged and paid directly by the Owner. TAB specialist shall not be affiliated with
any other entity participating in Work of this Contract, including design, furnishing
equipment, or construction. In addition, submit evidence of the following:
1.7.2.1 TAB Field Supervisor: Full-time employee of the TAB specialist and
certified by AABC or NEBB.
1.7.2.1.1 TAB field supervisor shall have minimum 10 years

supervisory experience in TAB work.
1.7.2.2 TAB Technician: Full-time employee of the TAB specialist and who is
certified by AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician.
1.7.2.2.1 TAB technician shall have minimum 4 years TAB field

experience.
1.7.3 TAB Specialist engaged to perform TAB work in this Project shall be a business limited
to and specializing in TAB work, or in TAB work and Commissioning.
1.7.4 TAB specialist engaged to perform TAB work shall not also perform commissioning
activities on this Project.
1.7.5 Certified TAB field supervisor or certified TAB technician shall be present at the Project
site at all times when TAB work is performed.
1.7.5.1 TAB specialist shall maintain at the Project site a minimum ratio of one
certified field supervisor or technician for each non-certified employee at
times when TAB work is being performed.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 3
1.7.6 Contractor shall notify Architect in writing within three days of receiving direction
resulting in reduction of test and balance scope or other deviations from Contract
Documents. Deviations from the TAB plan shall be approved in writing by the
mechanical engineer of record for the Project.
1.7.7 TAB Standard:
1.7.7.1 Perform TAB work in accordance with the requirements of the standard
under which the TAB agencies qualifications are approved unless
Specifications contain different or more stringent requirements:
1.7.7.1.1 AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, or
1.7.7.1.2 NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting,

Balancing of Environmental Systems.
1.7.7.2 All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB

standard are mandatory. Use provisions of the TAB standard, including
checklists and report forms, to the extent to which they are applicable to this
Project.
1.7.7.3 Testing, adjusting, balancing procedures, and reporting required for this
Project, and not covered by the TAB standard applicable to the TAB
specialist engaged to perform the Work of this Contract, shall be submitted
for approval by the design engineer.
1.7.8 TAB Conference: Meet with Architect and mechanical engineer on approval of the TAB
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the project
requirements. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor. Provide seven
days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. TAB conference shall
take place at location selected by Architect.
1.7.8.1 Agenda Items:
1.7.8.1.1 The Contract Documents examination report.
1.7.8.1.2 The TAB plan.
1.7.8.1.3 Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
1.7.8.1.4 Coordination of documentation and communication flow,

including protocol for resolution tracking and
documentation.
1.7.8.2 The requirement for TAB conference may be waived at the discretion of the
mechanical engineer of record for the Project.
1.7.9 Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1.7.9.1 Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare
certified TAB reports.
1.7.9.2 Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the
procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
1.7.10 TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB specialist's forms approved by Architect.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 4
1.7.11 Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in
ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."
1.8 WARRANTY
1.8.1 Provide workmanship and performance warranty applicable to TAB specialist engaged
to perform Work of this Contract:
1.8.1.1 AABC Performance Guarantee.
1.8.1.2 NEBB Quality Assurance Program.
1.8.2 Refer to Division 01 Specifications for additional requirements.
1.9 COORDINATION
1.9.1 Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates
and times.
1.9.2 Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems
have been satisfactorily completed.
1.9.3 Coordinate TAB work with work of other trades.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Contract Documents Examination Report:
3.1.1.1 TAB specialist shall review Contract Documents, including plans and
specifications. Provide report listing conditions that would prevent the
system(s) from operating in accordance with the sequence of operations
specified, or would prevent accurate testing and balancing:
3.1.1.1.1 Identify each condition requiring correction using equipment

designation shown on Drawings. Provide room number,
nearest building grid line intersection, or other information
necessary to identify location of condition requiring
correction.
3.1.1.1.2 Proposed corrective action necessary for proper system

operation.
3.1.2 Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks,
thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual
volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
3.1.3 Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
3.1.4 Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
3.1.5 Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
JKA #15-100 230593 - 5
3.1.5.1 Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including
system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
3.1.6 Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
3.1.7 Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
3.1.8 Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are
aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
3.1.9 Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
3.1.10 Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
3.1.11 Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
3.1.12 Report conditions requiring correction discovered before and during performance of TAB
procedures.
3.1.13 Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set
points if different from indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1 Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. TAB plan
shall be specific to Project and include the following:
3.2.1.1 General description of each air system and sequence(s) of operation.
3.2.1.2 Complete list of measurements to be performed.
3.2.1.3 Complete list of measurement procedures. Specify types of instruments to

be utilized and method of instrument application.
3.2.1.4 Qualifications of personnel assigned to Project.
3.2.1.5 Single-line CAD drawings reflecting all test locations (terminal units, grilles,
diffusers, traverse locations, etc.
3.2.1.6 Air terminal correction factors for the following:
3.2.1.6.1 Air terminal configuration.
3.2.1.6.2 Flow direction (supply or return/exhaust).
3.2.1.6.3 Effective area of each size and type of air terminal.
3.2.1.6.4 Air density.
3.2.2 Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
3.2.2.1 Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
3.2.2.2 Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 6
3.2.2.3 Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
3.2.2.4 Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
3.2.2.5 Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
3.2.2.6 Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are
required and access to balancing devices is provided.
3.2.2.7 Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system
operations can be met.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
3.3.1 Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB's
"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems"
and in this Section.
3.3.2 Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
3.3.2.1 After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material
and thickness as used to construct ducts.
3.3.2.2 Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore
insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 238000
Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning.
3.3.3 Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve
position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint
or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
3.3.4 Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
3.4.1 Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet
volumes with required fan volumes.
3.4.2 Test each system to verify building or space operating pressure, including all stages of
economizer cycle. Maximum building pressure shall not exceed 0.03 inches of
pressure.
3.4.3 Except as specifically indicated in this Specification, Pitot tube traverses shall be made
of each duct to measure airflow. Pitot tubes, associated instruments, traverses, and
techniques shall conform to ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC Applications, and ASHRAE
Handbook, HVAC Systems and Equipment.
3.4.3.1 Use state-of-the-art instrumentation approved by TAB specialists governing

agency..
3.4.3.2 Where ducts design velocity and air quantity are both less than 1000
fpm/CFM, air quantity may be determined by measurements at terminals
served.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 7
3.4.4 Test holes shall be placed in straight duct, as far as possible downstream from elbow,
bends, take-offs, and other turbulence-generating devices.
3.4.5 Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow
measurements.
3.4.6 Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
3.4.7 Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
3.4.8 Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
3.4.9 Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
3.4.10 Check for airflow blockages.
3.4.11 Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
3.4.12 Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
3.4.13 Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 238000 Heating, Ventilating,
and Air Conditioning.
3.4.14 Provide for adjustments or modifications to fan and motor sheaves, belts, damper
linkages, and other components as required to achieve specified air balance at no
additional cost to Owner.
3.4.15 Automatically operated dampers shall be adjusted to operate as indicated in Contract

Documents. Controls shall be checked for proper calibration.
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
3.5.1 Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed
listed by fan manufacturer.
3.5.1.1 Measure total airflow.
3.5.1.1.1 Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube

traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets
and inlets and calculate the total airflow. Alternative
methods shall be examined for determining total CFM, i.e.,
Pitot-tube traversing of branch ducts, coil or filter velocity
profiles, prior to utilizing airflow values at terminal outlets
and inlets.
3.5.1.2 Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
3.5.1.2.1 Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the

fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such
as elbows and transitions.
3.5.1.2.2 Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet.
3.5.1.2.3 Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet

duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible
connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.
JKA #15-100 230593 - 8
3.5.1.2.4 Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through
the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.
3.5.1.3 Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-
handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
3.5.1.3.1 Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static
pressures are measured.
3.5.1.4 Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound
traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced
conditions.
3.5.1.5 Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static

pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect
factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.
3.5.1.6 Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower
than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-
handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve
indicated air-handling-unit performance.
3.5.1.7 Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate
dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will
occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any
other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake
horsepower.
3.5.2 Check operation of relief air dampers. Measure total relief air quantity at each stage of
normal, economizer, power exhaust, or power exhaust economizer operation, as
applicable to installed equipment. Adjust relief air dampers to provide 100 percent relief
in economizer mode. Ensure that relief dampers close completely upon unit shutdown.
3.5.3 Check operation of outside air dampers. Measure total outside air quantity at each
stage of normal, economizer, power exhaust, or power exhaust economizer operation,
as applicable to installed equipment. Adjust outside air dampers to provide 100 percent
outside air in economizer mode. Ensure that outside air dampers close completely upon
unit shutdown.
3.5.4 Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to
indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
3.5.4.1 Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
3.5.4.1.1 Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is

unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure
airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total
airflow for that zone.
3.5.4.2 Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper,
and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3.5.4.3 Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within
specified tolerances.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 9
3.5.5 Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
3.5.5.1 Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading digital backflow

compensating hood. Use outlet manufacturer's written instructions and
calculating factors only when direct-reading hood cannot be used due to
physical obstruction or other limiting factors. Final report shall indicate
where values listed have not been obtained by direct measurement.
3.5.6 Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather
than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.
3.5.6.1 Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of
indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations
prescribed by the Contract Documents, if included.
3.5.6.2 Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
Terminal air velocity at five feet above finished floor shall not exceed 50 feet
per minute in occupied air conditioned spaces.
3.5.7 Do not overpressurize ducts.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
3.6.1 Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
3.6.1.1 Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
3.6.1.2 Motor horsepower rating.
3.6.1.3 Motor rpm.
3.6.1.4 Efficiency rating.
3.6.1.5 Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
3.6.1.6 Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
3.6.1.7 Starter manufacturers name, model number, size, type, and thermal-
protection-element rating.
3.6.1.7.1 Starter strip heater size, type, and rating.
3.6.2 Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds
varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove
proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer,
model number, serial number, and nameplate data.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
3.7.1 Verify proper rotation of fans.
3.7.2 Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
3.7.3 Record compressor data.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 10
3.8 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS
3.8.1 Measure pressure drop across each backflow preventer assembly at design flows.
3.8.2 Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-
displacement pumps:
3.8.2.1 Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed.
Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and
correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's
pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller
size.
3.8.2.1.1 If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump

performance, obtain approval from Architect and comply
with requirements in Section 225000 Plumbing Equipment
3.8.2.2 Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential
across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve.
Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.
3.8.2.2.1 Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not

operate motors in overload conditions.
3.8.2.3 Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake

horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance
data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the
pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor
nameplate amperage.
3.8.2.4 Report flow rates that are not within range given in article, Tolerances.
3.8.3 Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
3.8.4 Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
3.8.4.1 System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-

pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
3.8.5 Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow
that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.
3.8.6 Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
3.8.6.1 Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated
flow.
3.8.6.2 Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest
percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest
percentage over indicated flow.
3.8.6.3 Record settings and mark balancing devices.
3.8.7 Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage,
rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air
temperature.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 11
3.8.8 Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of
balancing.
3.8.9 Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
3.9 TOLERANCES
3.9.1 Set HVAC system's air flow rates within the following tolerances:
3.9.1.1 Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 10
percent and minus 0 percent.
3.9.1.2 Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus 5 percent and minus 5 percent.
3.9.1.3 Multiple outlets within single room: Plus 5 percent and minus 0 percent for
total airflow within room. Tolerance for individual outlets within a single
room having multiple outlets shall be as for Air Outlets and Inlets.
3.9.2 Set plumbing systems water flow rates within plus or minus 10 percent.
3.10 REPORTING
3.10.1 Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing
devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend
changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for
performance measuring and balancing devices.
3.10.2 Interim Reports: Prepare periodic lists of conditions requiring correction and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system
and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.11 FINAL REPORT
3.11.1 General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate
sections for tested systems and balanced systems.
3.11.1.1 Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and
sealed by the certified testing and balancing field supervisor. Report shall
be co-signed by the Contractor, attesting that he has reviewed the report,
and the report has been found to be complete and accurate.
3.11.1.2 The certification sheet shall be followed by sheet(s) listing items for which
balancing objectives could not be achieved. Provide explanation for failure
to achieve balancing objectives for each item listed.
3.11.1.3 Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of
calibration.
3.11.2 Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
3.11.2.1 Pump curves.
3.11.2.2 Fan curves.
3.11.2.3 Manufacturers' test data.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 12
3.11.2.4 Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
3.11.2.5 Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop

Drawings and product data.
3.11.3 General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
3.11.3.1 Title page.
3.11.3.2 Name and address of the TAB specialist.
3.11.3.3 Project name.
3.11.3.4 Project location.
3.11.3.5 Project Performance Guaranty
3.11.3.6 Architect's name and address.
3.11.3.7 Engineer's name and address.
3.11.3.8 Contractor's name and address.
3.11.3.9 Report date.
3.11.3.10 Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
3.11.3.11 Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of
the report. Number each page in the report.
3.11.3.12 Summary of contents including the following:
3.11.3.12.1 Indicated versus final performance.
3.11.3.12.2 Notable characteristics of systems.
3.11.3.12.3 Description of system operation sequence if it varies from

the Contract Documents.
3.11.3.13 Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
3.11.3.14 Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the
following:
3.11.3.14.1 Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
3.11.3.14.2 Conditions of filters.
3.11.3.14.3 Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
3.11.3.14.4 Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of

maximum pitch diameter.
3.11.3.14.5 Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
3.11.4 System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
JKA #15-100 230593 - 13
3.11.4.1 Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
3.11.4.2 Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
3.11.4.3 Position of balancing devices.
3.11.5 Air distribution outlets and inlets shall be shown on keyed plans with designation for
each outlet and inlet matching designation used in Contract Documents and TAB test
reports. Room numbers shall be included in keyed plans and test reports. Where
multiple outlets and inlets are installed within a single room, a designation shall be
assigned and listed for each outlet and inlet in addition to room number.
3.11.6 Test Reports General:
3.11.6.1 All test reports containing air or liquid flow data shall record flow values prior
to system adjustment in addition to required data listed for each test report.
3.11.7 Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
3.11.7.1 Fan Data:
3.11.7.1.1 System identification.
3.11.7.1.2 Location.
3.11.7.1.3 Make and type.
3.11.7.1.4 Model number and size.
3.11.7.1.5 Manufacturer's serial number.
3.11.7.1.6 Arrangement and class.
3.11.7.1.7 Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
3.11.7.1.8 Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of

adjustments in inches.
3.11.7.2 Motor Data:
3.11.7.2.1 Motor make, and frame type and size.
3.11.7.2.2 Horsepower and rpm.
3.11.7.2.3 Volts, phase, and hertz.
3.11.7.2.4 Full-load amperage and service factor.
3.11.7.2.5 Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
3.11.7.2.6 Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of

adjustments in inches.
3.11.7.2.7 Number, make, and size of belts.
3.11.7.3 Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

JKA #15-100 230593 - 14
3.11.7.3.1 Total airflow rate in cfm.
3.11.7.3.2 Total system static pressure in inches wg.
3.11.7.3.3 Fan rpm.
3.11.7.3.4 Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
3.11.7.3.5 Suction static pressure in inches wg.
3.11.8 Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a
grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
3.11.8.1 Report Data:
3.11.8.1.1 System and air-handling-unit number.
3.11.8.1.2 Location and zone.
3.11.8.1.3 Traverse air temperature in deg F.
3.11.8.1.4 Duct static pressure in inches wg.
3.11.8.1.5 Duct size in inches.
3.11.8.1.6 Duct area in sq. ft..
3.11.8.1.7 Indicated air flow rate in cfm.
3.11.8.1.8 Indicated velocity in fpm.
3.11.8.1.9 Actual air flow rate in cfm.
3.11.8.1.10 Actual average velocity in fpm.
3.11.8.1.11 Barometric pressure in psig.
3.11.9 Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
3.11.9.1 Unit Data:
3.11.9.1.1 System and air-handling unit identification.
3.11.9.1.2 Location and zone.
3.11.9.1.3 Apparatus used for test.
3.11.9.1.4 Area served.
3.11.9.1.5 Make.
3.11.9.1.6 Number from system diagram.
3.11.9.1.7 Type and model number.
3.11.9.1.8 Size.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 15
3.11.9.1.9 Effective area in sq. ft.
3.11.9.2.1 Air flow rate in cfm.
3.11.9.2.2 Air velocity in fpm.
3.11.9.2.3 Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.
3.11.9.2.4 Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
3.11.9.2.5 Final air flow rate in cfm.
3.11.9.2.6 Final velocity in fpm.
3.11.9.2.7 Space temperature in deg F.
3.11.10 Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves
and include the following:
3.11.10.1 Unit Data:
3.11.10.1.1 Unit identification.
3.11.10.1.2 Location.
3.11.10.1.3 Service.
3.11.10.1.4 Make and size.
3.11.10.1.5 Model number and serial number.
3.11.10.1.6 Water flow rate in gpm.
3.11.10.1.7 Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
3.11.10.1.8 Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.
3.11.10.1.9 Pump rpm.
3.11.10.1.10 Impeller diameter in inches.
3.11.10.1.11 Motor make and frame size.
3.11.10.1.12 Motor horsepower and rpm.
3.11.10.1.13 Voltage at each connection.
3.11.10.1.14 Amperage for each phase.
3.11.10.1.15 Full-load amperage and service factor.
3.11.10.1.16 Seal type.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 16
3.11.10.2.1 Static head in feet of head or psig.
3.11.10.2.2 Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.
3.11.10.2.3 Actual impeller size in inches.
3.11.10.2.4 Full-open flow rate in gpm.
3.11.10.2.5 Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.
3.11.10.2.6 Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.
3.11.10.2.7 Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.
3.11.10.2.8 Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.
3.11.10.2.9 Final water flow rate in gpm.
3.11.10.2.10 Voltage at each connection.
3.11.10.2.11 Amperage for each phase.
3.11.11 Instrument Calibration Reports:
3.11.11.1 Report Data:
3.11.11.1.1 Instrument type and make.
3.11.11.1.2 Serial number.
3.11.11.1.3 Application.
3.11.11.1.4 Dates of use.
3.11.11.1.5 Dates of calibration.
3.12 INSPECTIONS
3.12.1 Initial Inspection:
3.12.1.1 After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and
randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating
according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final
report.
3.12.1.2 Check the following for each system:
3.12.1.2.1 Measure airflow of at least 25 percent of air outlets.
3.12.1.2.2 Measure water flow of at least percent of terminals.
3.12.1.2.3 Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature

sensor. Compare the reading to the set point.
3.12.1.2.4 Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance
position.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 17
3.12.1.2.5 Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final
report.
3.12.2 Final Inspection:
3.12.2.1 After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks

verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented
in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect.
3.12.2.2 The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection
in the presence of Architect.
3.12.2.3 Architect shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final

report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of
the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be
accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.
3.12.2.4 If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements

documented in the final report by more than 10 percent, the measurements
shall be noted as "FAILED."
3.12.2.5 If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the

total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and
balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
3.12.3 TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work
fails, proceed as follows:
3.12.3.1 Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report
and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final
report and request a second final inspection.
3.12.3.2 If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contact the TAB
specialists governing organization for remedial action by the governing
organization under the workmanship and performance warranty. See
article, Warranty.
3.12.3.3 If remedial action is not provided by the TAB specialists governing

organization in a timely manner, Owner may contract the services of another
TAB specialist to complete the TAB Work according to the Contract
Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB
specialists final payment.
3.12.4 Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS
3.13.1 Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak
summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and
winter conditions.

JKA #15-100 230593 - 18
SECTION 23 80 00
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1 Roof mounted air conditioning units.
1.1.2 Split system air conditioning units.
1.1.3 Refrigeration piping and fittings.
1.1.4 Fans.
1.1.5 Exhaust vents.
1.1.6 Air inlets and outlets.
1.1.7 Filters.
1.1.8 Dampers.
1.1.9 Ductwork.
1.2.2 Section 23 00 50, Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.
1.2.3 Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
1.4.1 Work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning work indicated on the drawings and described herein.
1.5.1 Design Criteria:

County of Tehama HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
JKA #15-100 238000 - 1
1.5.1.1 All equipment and accessories to be the product of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in its manufacture. All gas-fired equipment shall be UL, ETL or CSA
listed.
1.5.1.2 Supply all equipment and accessories in accordance with requirements of

applicable national, state and local codes.
1.5.1.3 All items of a given type shall be products of the same manufacturer.
1.5.1.4 Scheduled equipment performance is minimum capacity required.
1.5.1.5 Scheduled electrical capacity shall be considered as maximum available.
1.5.1.6 Scheduled gas BTU input shall be considered as maximum available.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of
selected model clearly indicated, dimensions, weight, corner or mounting point weights,
furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions. Product
data shall include applicable product listings and standards. Refer to Section 23 00 50,
Basic HVAC Material and Methods for additional requirements.
1.6.1.1 Upon approval of submittal, provide manufacturers installation and operating

instructions to the Project inspector for the following:
1.6.1.1.1 Fire dampers, smoke dampers, and combination smoke-fire

dampers.
1.6.2 Roof Curb Data: For roof mounted equipment where combined weight of equipment unit
and roof curb or rail exceeds 400 pounds, submit calculations from manufacturer for roof
curbs proving compliance with the seismic requirements of the California Building Code,
and ASCE 7-10. Manufacturer shall certify that roof curbs are suitable for use indicated
on Drawings and in Specifications for the seismic design category indicated in structural
Contract Documents. Calculations shall be stamped and signed by a State of California
registered structural engineer.
1.6.3 Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD) System Data: For all air-cooled
unitary direct-expansion units equipped with an economizer, provide data for third-party
supplied California Energy Commission certified FDD controller, documenting compliance
with the requirements of California 2013 Building Energy Efficiency Standards. Provide
evidence of certification.
1.6.4 Engineering Data: Submit fan curves and sound power level data for each fan unit. Data
shall be at the scheduled capacity. Data shall include the name of the rating agency or
independent laboratory.
1.6.5 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each piece of equipment,
control, and accessory; including "trouble-shooting guide," in Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
1.6.6 Record Drawings: At project close-out, submit Record Drawings of installed ductwork,
duct accessories, and outlets and inlets in accordance with requirements of Division 01.
and sealants, including primers, documentation of compliance including printed statement
of VOC content and chemical components.
JKA #15-100 238000 - 2
1.6.8 Coordinated Layouts: Submit coordinated layouts. For requirements refer to article,
Coordinated Layouts, in this Section.
1.7 COORDINATED LAYOUT
1.7.1 Coordinated layouts are required to amplify, expand and coordinate the information
contained in the Contract Documents.
1.7.2 Provide minimum 1/4 inch equals one foot scaled coordinated layout drawings showing
plan and pertinent section or elevation views of piping, ductwork, equipment, accessories,
and electrical systems. Drawings shall be reproducible and work of each trade
represented shall be fully coordinated with structure, other disciplines, and finished
surfaces. Drawings shall be presented on a single size sheet. Coordinated layout
drawings shall have title block, key plan, north arrow and sufficient grid lines to provide
cross-reference to design Drawings.
1.7.2.1 Provide a stamp or title block on each drawing with locations for signatures
from all contractors involved, including but not limited to the General, HVAC,
Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Electrical contractors. Include statement for
signature that the contractor has reviewed the coordinated layout drawings in
detail and has coordinated the work of his trade.
1.7.2.2 Show on drawings the intended elevation of all ductwork in accordance with
the following example.
B.O.D. = 9'-0"
OFFSET UP 6"
B.O.D. = 9'-6"
1.7.2.3 Highlight, encircle or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract

Documents on the coordinated layouts. Architect will not be responsible for
identifying deviations from the original Contract Documents.
1.7.3 Since scale of contract drawings is small and all offsets and fittings are not shown,
contractor shall make allowances in bid for additional coordination time, detailing, fittings,
offsets, hangers and the like to achieve a fully coordinated installation. If changes in duct
size are required, equivalent area shall be maintained and the aspect ratio shall not be in
excess of 2 to 1 unless approved by the Engineer. Drawings shall be submitted for review
prior to fabrication and installation. Drawings may be submitted in packages representing
at least one quarter of the building ductwork.
1.7.4 Check routing on all ductwork before fabricating. Report any discrepancies to Architect.
No extra cost will be allowed for failure to conform to above.
1.8 REFERENCES
1.8.1 AABC - Associated Air Balance Council
1.8.2 AFBMA - Anti Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association
1.8.3 CSA Canadian Standards Association International
1.8.4 AMCA - Air Moving and Control Association Inc.
1.8.4.1 Standard 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans

JKA #15-100 238000 - 3
1.8.5 ANSI - American National Standards Institute
1.8.6 ARI - Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
1.8.7 ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
1.8.8 ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
1.8.9 ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials
1.8.10 CCR - California Code of Regulations
1.8.11 CSFM - California State Fire Marshal
1.8.12 NIST - National Institute of Standards and Technology
1.8.13 NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
1.8.14 NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
1.8.15 OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act
1.8.16 SMACNA - Duct Manuals
1.8.17 CBC - California Building Code
1.8.18 UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
1.8.19 CMC - California Mechanical Code
1.8.20 CPC - California Plumbing Code
1.8.21 CEC - California Electrical Code
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Insulation products, including insulation, insulation facings, jackets, adhesives, sealants
and coatings shall not contain polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in penta, octa, or
deca formulations in amounts greater than 0.1 percent (by mass).
2.2 GAS FIRED EQUIPMENT
2.2.1 All gas-fired equipment shall be listed for use as a gas appliance.
2.2.2 All units shall comply with the emissions requirements of the Air Quality Management
District (AQMD) in which they are to be installed.
2.3 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT, ROOF-MOUNTED
2.3.1 Provide factory assembled single packaged outdoor rooftop mounted, electrically
controlled gas heating and electric cooling unit, rated in accordance with ARI Standards
210/240 or 340/360, and ETL or UL listed and labeled, classified in accordance with UL
1995. Provide refrigerant charge R-410A, all internal wiring, piping, controls, and special
features required prior to field startup. Design unit to conform to the following:

JKA #15-100 238000 - 4
2.3.1.1 California NOx emission requirements.
2.3.1.2 ASHRAE 15.
2.3.1.3 ASHRAE 90.1.
2.3.1.4 Insulation, adhesive, and all materials exposed to air stream shall meet NFPA
90A requirements for flame spread and smoke generation.
2.3.1.5 Unit casing shall be capable of withstanding 500-hour salt spray exposure per
ASTM B117 (scribed specimen).
2.3.2 Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI sound standards 270 or 370.
2.3.3 Unit shall be ETL or UL tested and certified in accordance with ANSI Z21.47 Standards
as a total package.
2.3.4 Roof curb shall be designed to conform to NRCA Standards.
2.3.5 Unit shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with ISO 9001.
2.3.6 For unit sizes applicable to Energy Star program, units shall be Energy Star qualified.
2.3.7 Cabinet:
2.3.7.1 Provide galvanized steel unit cabinet, bonderized and coated with a baked
enamel finish.
2.3.7.2 All airstream interior surfaces shall be insulated with a minimum 1/2 inch thick,
1.5 lb density cleanable insulation. Insulation shall be encapsulated with
panel design or have sealed edges.
2.3.7.3 Cabinet panels shall be hinged with integrated non-corrosive hinges. Provide
hinged access panels for the filter, compressors, evaporator fan, and control
box/ heat section areas. Each panel shall have multiple latches and handles.
Each external hinged access panel shall be double-wall construction and
permanently attached to the rooftop unit.
2.3.7.4 Return air filters shall be accessible through a dedicated hinged access panel.
2.3.7.5 Fork lift slots and rigging holes shall be provided in unit base rails. Base rails
shall be minimum 16 gauge.
2.3.7.6 Unit shall have an integral sloped condensate drain pan, providing minimum
3/4 in.-14 NPT connections for horizontal drain configuration. Provide unit
with alternate vertical thru-the-bottom drain connection when furnished as
standard for units sizes scheduled on Drawings. See Drawings for drain
configuration. Pan shall be removable for cleaning and maintenance. All drain
pans shall conform to ASHRAE 62.1 self-draining provisions.
2.3.7.7 Unit shall have standard side and alternate field or factory installed thru-the-
bottom power and control wiring connection capability. Thru-the-bottom
electrical connections shall use manufacturers approved water-tight
connection method.
2.3.7.8 Unit shall be field convertible to, or factory furnished with, horizontal air
discharge, as applicable for unit sizes as scheduled on Drawings.
JKA #15-100 238000 - 5
2.3.8 Fans:
2.3.8.1 Centrifugal supply air blower (evaporator fan) shall have sealed, permanently
lubricated ball bearings, or rigid pillow block bearings, as supplied as standard
equipment for unit sizes scheduled on Drawings. Units supplied with pillow
block bearings shall be furnished with accessible lubricant fittings. Provide
belt-driven double inlet fan wheel, centrifugal type with forward curved blades
and adjustable sheaves. Multiple speed direct drive motors may be utilized
when supplied as standard equipment for efficiency and electrical
requirements as scheduled on the Drawings. Fan wheel shall be steel, with
corrosion resistant finish, dynamically balanced.
2.3.8.2 Condenser fans shall be of the direct-driven propeller type, with corrosion-
resistant aluminum blades. Fans shall be dynamically balanced and
discharge air upwards. Induced-draft blower shall be of the direct-driven,
single inlet, forward-curved, centrifugal type, made from aluminized steel with
a corrosion-resistant finish and shall be dynamically balanced.
2.3.8.3 Induced draft fan shall be of the direct driven, single inlet, forward-curved
centrifugal type. Fan wheel shall be steel, with corrosion resistant finish,
dynamically balanced.
2.3.9 Motors:
2.3.9.1 Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor
windings and shall have line break thermal and current overload protection.
2.3.9.2 Evaporator fan motor shall have permanently lubricated, sealed bearings and
inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection or manual reset
calibrated circuit breakers.
2.3.9.3 Totally enclosed condenser-fan motor shall have permanently lubricated,

sealed bearings, and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection.
2.3.9.4 Induced-draft motor shall have permanently lubricated sealed bearings and
inherent automatic-reset thermal overload protection.
2.3.9.5 For single-phase fan motors sized larger than 1/12 hp and smaller than 1 hp,
refer to Article, Electric Motors, in Section 23 00 50, Basic HVAC Materials
and Methods.
2.3.10 Compressor:
2.3.10.1 Fully hermetic, scroll type with internal high-pressure and temperature
protection.
2.3.10.2 Factory installed rubber shock mounted and internally spring mounted for
vibration isolation.
2.3.10.3 Compressor Anti-Recycle Timer: Compressor shall be prevented from

restarting for a minimum of five minutes after shutdown, with manufacturers
installed compressor cycle delay.
2.3.10.4 Compressor shall have a five year warranty.
2.3.11 Coils:

JKA #15-100 238000 - 6
2.3.11.1 Standard evaporator and condenser coils shall have aluminum plate fins
mechanically bonded to seamless internally finned copper tubes with all joints
brazed.
2.3.11.2 Units shall have face-split type evaporator coils.
2.3.11.3 For units with single compressor, condenser coils shall be single slab, single
pass design. For dual compressor units, condenser coils shall be single slab,
2 pass design.
2.3.11.4 Evaporator coils shall be leak tested at minimum 150 psig, and pressure
tested at minimum 450 psig.
2.3.11.5 Condenser coils shall be leak tested at minimum 150 psig, and pressure
tested at minimum 650 psig.
2.3.12 Heating Section:
2.3.12.1 Induced-draft combustion type with direct-spark ignition system and

redundant main gas valve with 2-stage capability on all 3-phase units.
2.3.12.2 Heat Exchanger:
2.3.12.2.1 The standard aluminized heat exchanger shall be of the

tubular-section type constructed of minimum 20-gage
aluminized steel. Standard heat exchanger shall have a ten
year warranty.
2.3.12.3 Burners shall be of the in-shot type constructed of aluminum-coated steel.
2.3.12.4 All gas piping shall enter the unit at a single location. Gas entry shall be
through side or bottom of unit. See Drawings for gas entry location. When
bottom gas entry is utilized, unit shall be furnished with field installed
conversion kit, arranged so that gas shut-off valve is accessible from the roof.
2.3.12.5 All factory-installed orifices are for operation up to 2,000 feet of altitude. For
altitudes between 2,000 feet and 7,000 feet, a factory certified kit shall be
furnished for field installation.
2.3.12.6 Units shall be suitable for use with natural gas or propane. Provide field-
installed propane conversion kit as required, see schedule on Drawings.
2.3.12.7 The integrated gas controller board shall include gas heat operation fault
notification using an LED (light-emitting diode).
2.3.12.8 Unit shall be equipped with anti-cycle protection with one short cycle on unit
flame rollout switch or 4 continuous short cycles on the high-temperature limit
switch. Fault indication shall be made using an LED.
2.3.12.9 The integrated gas controller board shall contain algorithms that modify
evaporator-fan operation to prevent future cycling on high-temperature limit
switch.
2.3.12.10 The LED shall be visible without removal of control box access panel.
2.3.12.11 Gas burner tray shall be removable for maintenance.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 7
2.3.12.12 Heating section shall be insulated with foil-faced fiberglass insulation.
2.3.13 Refrigerant Components:
2.3.13.1 Each refrigerant circuit shall include:
2.3.13.1.1 Balanced port thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) with

removable power element.
2.3.13.1.2 Solid core refrigerant filter driers with pressure ports.
2.3.13.1.3 Refrigerant pressure gage ports and connections on suction,

discharge, and liquid lines.
2.3.14 Filter Section:
2.3.14.1 Standard filter section shall accommodate 2 inch deep filters. Filters shall
conform to the Air Filters Article in this Specification Section.
2.3.14.2 Filter section shall use standard size filters.
2.3.15 Controls:
2.3.15.1 Unit shall be complete with self-contained low voltage fuse protected control
circuit. Refer to Section 25 50 00, if included, and equipment schedule,
sequence of operation and control diagram on Drawings for additional
requirements.
2.3.15.2 When third party direct digital controls with an Energy Management System
will be utilized, provide electro-mechanical controls with 24V thermostat
interface.
2.3.15.3 When stand-alone thermostat operation is utilized, provide electro-

mechanical controls with 24V thermostat interface or provide microprocessor
controls.
2.3.15.4 When stand-alone thermostat operation is utilized for single-zone VAV units,
provide microprocessor controls.. Units shall have factory mounted supply
fan variable frequency drives.
2.3.15.5 When third party direct digital controls with an Energy Management System
will be utilized for single zone VAV units, provide microprocessor controls with
BACnet or LON interface. Units shall have factory mounted supply fan
variable frequency drives.
2.3.15.6 Electro-mechanical controls shall include the following, as a minimum:
2.3.15.6.1 Service run test capability.
2.3.15.6.2 Provide compressor minimum run time (3 minutes) and

minimum off time (5 minutes).
2.3.15.6.3 Economizer control.
2.3.15.6.4 Unit shall have 35 F low ambient cooling operation.
2.3.15.6.5 Time delay relay.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 8
2.3.15.7 Microprocessor controls shall include the following, as a minimum:
2.3.15.7.1 User diagnostic interface.
2.3.15.7.2 Unit control with standard suction pressure transducers and

condensing temperature thermistors.
2.3.15.7.3 Shall provide a 5 F temperature difference between cooling

and heating set points to meet ASHRAE 90.1 energy
standard.
2.3.15.7.4 Service run test capability.
2.3.15.7.5 Shall accept input from a CO2 sensor (indoor).
2.3.15.7.6 Configurable alarm light shall be provided which activates

when certain types of alarms occur.
2.3.15.7.7 Provide compressor minimum run time (3 minutes) and

minimum off time (5 minutes).
2.3.15.7.8 Service diagnostic mode.
2.3.15.7.9 Economizer control.
2.3.15.7.10 Unit shall have 0 F low ambient cooling operation.
2.3.15.7.11 Time delay relay.
2.3.16 Safeties:
2.3.16.1 Unit shall incorporate a solid-state compressor lockout that provides optional
reset capability at the space thermostat, should any of the following safety
devices trip and shut off compressor:
2.3.16.1.1 Compressor lockout protection provided for either internal or

external overload.
2.3.16.1.2 Low-pressure protection.
2.3.16.1.3 Freeze protection (evaporator coil).
2.3.16.1.4 High-pressure protection (high pressure switch or internal).
2.3.16.1.5 Compressor reverse rotation protection.
2.3.16.1.6 Loss of charge protection.
2.3.16.1.7 Start assist on singe-phase units.
2.3.16.2 Supply-air sensor shall be located in the unit and detect both heating and
cooling operation.
2.3.16.3 Induced draft heating section shall be provided with the following minimum
protections:
2.3.16.3.1 High-temperature limit switch.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 9
2.3.16.3.2 Induced-draft motor speed sensor.
2.3.16.3.3 Flame rollout switch.
2.3.16.3.4 Flame proving controls.
2.3.16.3.5 Redundant gas valve.
2.3.16.4 Phase Protection: Provide unit-mounted SymCom, or equal, Motor Saver

three phase voltage monitor, model 201A or equal, adjustable voltage range
for each unit, install per manufacturer's recommendations, mount in NEMA
3R enclosure if exposed to the weather.
2.3.16.4.1 Units shall provide the following features:
2.3.16.4.1.1 Low voltage fault trip and reset.
2.3.16.4.1.2 Voltage unbalance/phasing fault trip and

reset.
2.3.16.4.1.3 High voltage fault trip and reset.
2.3.16.4.1.4 Transient Protection (Internal).
2.3.16.4.1.5 Automatic restart.
2.3.16.4.2 Provide each unit with 600V socket, SymCom model OT08,
or equal.
2.3.17 Operating Characteristics:
2.3.17.1 Unit shall be capable of starting and running at 125 F ambient outdoor
temperature per maximum load criteria of ARI Standards 210 or 360.
2.3.17.2 Unit will operate in cooling down to an outdoor ambient temperature of 35 F.
2.3.17.3 Unit shall be provided with fan time delay to prevent cold air delivery in heating
mode.
2.3.18 Electrical Requirements:
2.3.18.1 All unit power wiring shall enter unit cabinet at a single location. Both unit
side and bottom power entry provisions shall be provided. Refer to Drawings
schedule for thru-the-bottom power wiring requirement.

2.3.19.1 Carrier Corporation. (basis of design)
2.3.19.2 Trane Inc.
2.3.19.3 Johnson Controls, Inc.
2.3.20 Provide the following additional features and equipment:

JKA #15-100 238000 - 10
2.3.20.1 Roof Curb: Structurally calculated, formed galvanized steel with wood nailer
strip capable of supporting entire unit weight. Provide 3 inch wide bottom
flange.
2.3.20.2 Provide heavy-duty 18 gauge expanded metal coil guard grille to protect all
surfaces of the condensing coil. Coil guard by Micrometl, Canfab, or equal.
2.3.20.3 Modulating Power Exhaust Economizer: Micrometl, Canfab, or equal.

Integrated type capable of simultaneous economizer and compressor
operation.
2.3.20.3.1 Provide self-contained outdoor rooftop system, mounted

directly to the return air compartment of the HVAC packaged
equipment. Provide differential dry bulb economizer control
system and a factory programmed, fully programmable
variable frequency drive package controlled by a differential
pressure transmitter, mounted directly to the return air
compartment of the HVAC packaged equipment. Design the
system to continuously maintain space pressure, and provide
capability of introducing up to 100 percent outdoor air.
2.3.20.3.1.1 Economizer control system shall be certified

as meeting the requirements for Fault
Detection and Diagnostics (FDD) in the 2013
California Building Energy and Efficiency
Standards.
2.3.20.3.2 Provide outside differential pressure tubing termination with

hex style pneumatic filter-muffler, minimum filtration 40
microns, 53 SCFM maximum at 100 psi, as manufactured by
McMaster-Carr, or equal.
2.3.20.3.3 Provide hinged cabinet access doors and include latches to

provide a tool-less entry for servicing.
2.3.20.3.4 Provide door lock on the power exhaust cabinet to meet ETL
safety requirements.
2.3.20.3.5 Outdoor air intake dampers shall be low leak not to exceed 3
percent at 1 inch wg pressure differential and include
stainless steel side seal and neoprene edge seal. Arrange
dampers to close upon loss of power.
2.3.20.3.6 Provide belt driven exhaust blowers, double inlet, forward-

curved centrifugal type. Provide gravity backdraft damper at
fan outlet.
2.3.20.3.7 Provide fully programmable factory programmed variable

frequency drive (VFD) package for each fan, driven by 4 to
20 mA signal from a differential pressure transmitter.
Pressure transmitters shall measure 0 - 0.1 in wg. Install
room sensor tubing with sensor tube termination installed
within the room.
2.3.20.3.7.1 Where direct digital controls are utilized,

provide Belimo, or equal, damper actuator,
complete with spring return and all controls
JKA #15-100 238000 - 11
required to make the system fully
operational.
2.3.20.3.7.2 Where stand-alone controls are utilized,

provide Belimo, or equal, damper actuator,
complete with spring return and all controls,
including logic module, required to make the
system fully operational.
2.3.20.4 Other features, accessories, and equipment scheduled on Drawings.
2.3.21 Replenish for a period of one year without cost to the Owner all refrigerant and oil required
to maintain the proper levels.
2.3.22 Owner Training: Manufacturer shall provide two initial on-site 4-hour training sessions for
Owners maintenance personnel. Manufacturer shall provide one 4-hour follow-up training
session to be scheduled by Owner within one year of the date of the final initial training
session. Training session agenda shall be as follows:
2.3.22.1 First session: Equipment.
2.3.22.2 Second session: Controls.
2.3.22.3 Follow-up session: Agenda by Owner.
2.4 SPLIT SYSTEM AC UNIT
2.4.1 General: Furnish and install split system air conditioner, with R410A refrigerant, and
complete with automatic controls. Equipment shall be shipped factory assembled, wired,
tested, and ready for field connections.
2.4.2 Quality Assurance:
2.4.2.1 Unit shall be ETL or UL listed and labeled.
2.4.2.2 Unit shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001:2000.
2.4.2.3 Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI standard 210.
2.4.3 Delivery, Storage and Handling: Follow manufacturers recommendations.
2.4.4 Cooling System: The total certified cooling capacity shall not be less than scheduled. The
compressor power input shall not exceed that of the unit specified.
2.4.5 Indoor Section: Wall mounted, ceiling surface mounted, or ceiling recessed mounted, as
indicated on Drawings.
2.4.5.1 Cabinet:
2.4.5.1.1 Wall mounted: Molded white high strength plastic.
2.4.5.1.1.1 Provide wall mounted unit with factory

mounting plate.
2.4.5.2 Fans: Double inlet, forward curved, statically and dynamically balanced.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 12
2.4.5.3 Fan Motor: Direct drive, permanently lubricated, with two or 4 speed
operation for unit size scheduled on Drawings.
2.4.5.3.1 For single-phase fan motors sized larger than 1/12 hp and
smaller than 1 hp, refer to Article, Electric Motors, in Section
23 00 50, Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.
2.4.5.4 Air Outlet: With motorized horizontal and vertical vanes.
2.4.5.4.1 Wall and ceiling surface mounted units: Horizontal vane shall
close air outlet upon unit shut-down.
2.4.5.5 Evaporator Coil: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Coils
shall be pressure leak tested.
2.4.5.6 Insulation: Interior surfaces exposed to the airstream shall be fully insulated.
2.4.6 Outdoor Section:
2.4.6.1 Casing: Galvanized steel plate, powder coated with acrylic or polyester.
2.4.6.2 Condenser Fan Grille: ABS plastic.
2.4.6.3 Fan and fan motor: Direct drive, totally enclosed, propeller type, permanently
lubricated, horizontal discharge.
2.4.6.4 Compressor: Variable speed rotary type, with crankcase heater and
accumulator. Compressor shall be capable of operating at 0 degrees F.
Compressor mounted on vibration isolator pads.
2.4.6.5 Coil: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Coils shall be
pressure leak tested. Provide coil with integral metal guard.
2.4.7 Controls: Hard wired, microprocessor based, wall mounted controller with LCD display
shall provide the following functions, as a minimum:
2.4.7.1 7-day programmable timer.
2.4.7.2 Test and check functions.
2.4.7.3 Diagnostic functions.
2.4.7.4 Vane position control.
2.4.7.5 Fan speed adjustment.
2.4.7.6 Temperature adjustment.
2.4.7.7 Automatic restart.
2.4.7.8 Mode selection, including cool/dry/fan.
2.4.7.8.1 Provide lockable enclosure for wall mounted controller.
2.4.8 Safeties: Shall include the following, as a minimum:
2.4.8.1 Five minute compressor anti-recycle timer.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 13
2.4.8.2 High pressure protection.
2.4.8.3 Current and temperature sensing motor overload protection.
2.4.9 Filters: Provide 1 inch thick fiberglass throwaway filters with cardboard holding frames for
indoor unit. Provide sufficient filters for four complete changes for each unit.
2.4.10 Service Access: All components, wiring, and inspection areas shall be completely
accessible through removable panels.
2.4.11 Refrigerant Piping:
2.4.11.1 Provide factory pre-charged and sealed line set piping, length to suit the
location of equipment. Tubing sizes shall be in accordance with
manufacturers written instructions.
2.4.11.2 Provide refrigeration piping in accordance with Article, Refrigerant Piping, in

this Section.

2.4.12.1 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. (basis of design)
2.4.12.2 Carrier Corporation.
2.4.12.3 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd.
2.4.13 Owner Training: Manufacturer shall provide one on-site 2-hour training session for
Owners maintenance personnel.
2.5 REFRIGERATION PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.5.1 Refrigeration gas and liquid piping shall be type ACR hard drawn copper tubing, cleaned
and capped in accordance with ASTM B280, with wrought copper fittings. All joints shall
be brazed with Sil-fos under nitrogen purge. Relief valve discharge piping shall be full
size of relief discharge port.
2.5.1.1 Manufactured, pre-charged and pre-insulated refrigerant line-set refrigerant

piping may be utilized at Contractors discretion.
2.5.2 Refrigeration Piping Specialties: Furnish and install Superior, Sporlan, Alco, Henry, or
equal, stop valves, solenoid valves, adjustable thermal expansion valves, sight glass,
flexible connection, charging valve, and drier with valve bypass in the liquid lines and
Superior DFN shell and cartridge suction line filter sized 2-1/2 times tonnage.
2.5.2.1 Install only those refrigeration piping specialties recommended by

manufacturer of specific installed equipment.
2.6 FANS
2.6.1 All fans shall be Air Moving and Control Association Inc. (AMCA) labeled.
2.6.2 Provide self-aligning, enclosed ball bearings, accessible for lubrication unless specified
otherwise.
2.6.3 Provide variable speed switch for all direct drive fans.
JKA #15-100 238000 - 14
2.6.4 Roof Mounted:
2.6.4.1 Direct or V-belt Drive: Provide one-piece heavy-duty ventilator housings, one
piece heavy gauge spun aluminum construction, with weatherproof assembly
and integral weather shield. Mount ventilators on curbs furnished by the fan
manufacturer. Install with fan assembly level.
2.6.4.2 Fan wheels shall be centrifugal design, statically and dynamically balanced.
Tip speed, rpm and motor horsepower shall not exceed listing in
manufacturer's catalog for unit specified.
2.6.4.3 Fans shall have integral factory formed base and one piece spinning without
welding. Housings shall be provided with wiring channel and are to be of the
direct discharge design. Motor and fan assembly shall be on vibration
isolating mounts. Fans shall have capacity, speeds and motor sizes as
shown.
2.6.4.4 Provide the following accessories:
2.6.4.4.1 Gravity backdraft dampers.
2.6.4.4.2 Aluminum bird screen with a minimum of 85 percent free

area.
2.6.4.4.3 Adjustable motor pulley.
2.6.5 Ceiling Mounted Fans:
2.6.5.1 Acoustic lined cabinet, built-in back draft damper, vibration isolated fan and
motor, variable speed switch.
2.6.5.2 Provide sloped roof or flat roof type roof cap, or wall cap to suit the location
indicated on the Drawings.
2.6.6 Fan Drives:
2.6.6.1 Drive Design: The design horsepower rating of each drive shall be at least
1.5 times, single belt drives 2 times, the nameplate rating of the motor with
proper allowances for sheave diameters, speed ratio, arcs of contact and belt
length.
2.6.6.2 Provide variable speed drives, Dayco, Browning, Woods, or equal. Allow for
replacement of fan and motor drives and belts as required to suit the balance
requirements of the project.
2.6.6.3 Select variable speed drives to allow an increase or decrease of minimum of

ten percent of design fan speed.
2.6.7 Motors:
2.6.7.1 Motors of 25 HP and less shall have adjustable pitch sheaves; sheaves on
motors above 25 HP may be non-adjustable. Change, at no extra cost to
Owner, the non-adjustable sheaves to obtain desired air quantities.
2.6.7.2 For single-phase fan motors sized larger than 1/12 hp and smaller than 1 hp,
refer to Article, Electric Motors, in Section 23 00 50, Basic HVAC Materials
and Methods.
JKA #15-100 238000 - 15
2.6.8 Sheaves: Sheaves shall be cast or fabricated, bored to size or bushed with fully split
tapered bushings to fit properly on the shafts. All sheaves shall be secured with keys and
set screws.
2.6.9 Belts:
2.6.9.1 All belts shall be furnished in matched sets.
2.6.9.2 Provide a minimum of two belts for all drives with motors 5 horsepower motors
and larger.
2.6.9.3 Belts shall be within 1 degree 30 minutes of true alignment in all cases.

2.6.10.1 Greenheck Fan Corporation. (basis of design)
2.6.10.2 Loren Cook Company.
2.6.10.3 PennBarry.
2.6.10.4 American Coolair Corporation.
2.6.11 Owner Training: Manufacturer shall provide one on-site 1-hour training session for
Owners maintenance personnel.
2.7 EXHAUST VENTS
2.7.1 Galvanized steel housing with 1/2 inch mesh screen, counterbalanced backdraft damper
and matching prefabricated curb. Omit backdraft damper on intake vents. Provide pitched
roof curb for relief vents, and install with backdraft damper level.

2.7.2.1 Greenheck Fan Corporation. (basis of design)
2.7.2.2 Lauren Cook Company.
2.7.2.3 PennBarry.
2.7.2.4 American Coolair Corporation.
2.8 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
2.8.1 Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard outlets and inlets where
shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and
components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
2.8.2 Ceiling, wall or floor Compatibility: Provide outlets with border styles that are compatible
with adjacent ceiling, wall or floor systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit
into ceiling, wall or floor module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general
construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems that will contain each
type of air outlet and inlet.
2.8.3 Refer to Schedule on Mechanical Drawings for details of inlets and outlets to be used.
JKA #15-100 238000 - 16
2.9 AIR FILTERS
2.9.1 Provide MERV 8 disposable pleated media type. Refer to specific equipment Articles for
filter depth and for exceptions to this specification. Filters shall conform to the following:
2.9.1.1 Standards:
2.9.1.1.1 ASHRAE Standard 52.2-2007.
2.9.1.1.2 Underwriters Laboratories: U.L. 900, Class 2.
2.9.1.2 Construction:
2.9.1.2.1 Media: Synthetic or cotton-synthetic blend with radial pleats.
2.9.1.2.2 Media Frame: High wet-strength beverage board.
2.9.1.2.3 Media Support: Welded wire or expanded metal grid bonded

to air leaving side of the media.
2.9.1.3 Performance: 2 deep filter shall have a maximum initial air resistance of 0.31
inches w.g.

2.9.2.1 Camfil Farr, Inc., model 30/30.
2.9.2.2 Flanders Corporation, model 40 LPD.
2.9.3 Temporary (Construction Period) Filters:
2.9.3.1 Install new temporary filters in all units that have filter systems installed.
Temporary filters shall match the permanent filters that are specified for the
units. Replace filters as needed, in accordance with manufacturers
directions, in order to provide protection for the unit prior to occupancy by the
Owner.
2.9.3.2 If air handling units are operated during construction of the project, install
temporary filters directly over each return air inlet. Filters shall match the
permanent filters that are specified for the units. Select size of filter to
completely cover the frame of the return air inlet, and tape filters firmly in place
to eliminate any construction debris from entering the duct system or unit.
Remove the temporary filters upon completion of the work, and repair all
damaged paintwork.
2.9.4 Spare Filters:
2.9.4.1 Furnish two new, complete sets of filter cartridges for each filter bank on
completion and acceptance of the work. Install one set of filters in units (prior
to final air balance) and leave the remaining filters in location designated by
the Owner. Provide units designed to accommodate washable, permanent
filters with one washable, permanent filter.
2.10 DAMPERS
2.10.1 Backdraft Dampers: Ruskin CBD2, counterbalanced, Nailer Industries, or equal.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 17
2.10.2 Manual Air and Balance Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multi-blade
type constructed in accordance with SMACNA, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards,"
except as noted herein.
2.10.2.1 Rectangular Ductwork:
2.10.2.1.1 Single damper blades may be used in ducts up to 10 inches

in height. Dampers shall be 16 gauge minimum. Provide
self-locking regulators, equal to Ventlok 641. Provide end
bearings equal to Ventlok 607 at each damper. Provide
continuous solid 3/8 inch square shafts.
2.10.2.1.2 Multiple blade dampers shall be equal to Ruskin CD35

Standard Control Damper. Maximum width for multiple
damper blades for use in rectangular duct shall not exceed 6
inches.
2.10.2.1.3 Where duct velocity may be expected to exceed 1500 fpm,

provide Ruskin CD-50, or equal, low leakage dampers with
airfoil blades.
2.10.2.2 Round Ductwork:
2.10.2.2.1 Single damper blades may be used in ducts up to 12 inches

in diameter. Provide multiple blade opposed blade dampers,
with connected linkage, for ductwork larger than 12 inches in
diameter.
2.10.2.2.2 Damper blades for round ductwork shall be 20 gauge steel

for ducts up to 12 inches diameter and 16 gauge steel for
dampers larger than 12 inches damper. Provide self-locking
regulators, equal to Ventlok 641, Durodyne, or equal for
operation of dampers. Provide end bearings equal to Ventlok
607 and provide continuous solid 3/8 inch square shafts.
2.10.2.3 Where ductwork is externally insulated, provide self-locking regulators equal

to Ventlok 644, Durodyne, or equal for rectangular ductwork, and Ventlok 637,
Durodyne, or equal for round ducts.
2.10.3 Fire Dampers and Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers:
2.10.3.1 Fire dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers shall be listed and
approved by the California State Fire Marshal. Installation shall conform to
the manufacturers UL approved installation instructions.
2.10.3.1.1 Fire dampers shall be UL 555 classified and labeled as

dynamic fire dampers approved for wall and floor installation.
They shall ship from the manufacturer as an assembly with a
minimum 20-gauge factory installed sleeve. Sleeve length
shall suit the requirements of the wall construction. Each
dynamic fire damper/sleeve assembly shall ship complete
with factory roll formed one-piece angles with pre-punched
holes for easy installation. Dynamic fire dampers for vertical
installation must consist of a single section on sizes up to 33
x 36 and a single section on sizes up to 24 x 24 for
horizontal installation. 1-1/2 hour dynamic fire dampers shall

JKA #15-100 238000 - 18
be Ruskin DIBD20, Pottorff, or equal. 3 hour dynamic fire
dampers shall be Ruskin DIBD230, Pottorff, or equal.
2.10.3.1.2 Fire dampers for high pressure/velocity systems where

velocities exceed 2000 fpm and/or 4 w.g. pressure fire
damper shall be Ruskin FD60, Pottorff, or equal
2.10.3.1.3 Fire dampers for ceiling installation shall be UL 555C

classified and labeled as ceiling dampers. They shall be
provided with a thermal insulating blanket to fit the inlet or
outlet condition if required by the application. Ceiling
dampers shall be Ruskin CFD 2, 3, 4 or 5. Ceiling dampers
for ceilings constructed of wood shall have UL tested in
design L501 and shall be Ruskin CFD7, Pottorff, or equal.
2.10.3.1.4 Combination fire/smoke dampers. Dampers shall be UL

classified and labeled as Leakage Class I Smoke Dampers
in accordance with the latest version of UL 555S. Dampers
shall be warranted to be free from defects in material and
workmanship for a period of 5 years after date of shipment.
Damper/actuator assembly shall be tested to full open and
full close at minimum 2000 fpm 250 F heated air and 4 w.g.
with airflow in both directions. (Specified select: 250 / 350,
2000 fpm/3000 fpm). Each damper shall be equipped with
controlled closure quick detect heat actuated release
device to prevent duct and HVAC component damage
resulting from instantaneous damper closure. Release
device shall be EFL type and shall allow reset from outside
the sleeve after moderate temperature exposure.
(Replacement type fusible links not acceptable.)
2.10.3.1.5 Two position combination fire smoke dampers shall be

equipped with one or more factory installed, direct coupled,
120 volt, single phase, electric actuator for energize open
fail close operation. Dampers with multiple actuators shall be
factory wired with single point connection at the EFL heat
release devise for connection to poser. Damper actuator
shall include minimum one-year energized hold open (no
cycles) and spring return (fail) close reliability.
Damper/actuator shall include minimum 20,000 full open-full
close cycle performances.
2.10.3.1.6 Modulating combination fire smoke dampers shall be

equipped with one or more factory installed contact for
modulating signal connection. Damper/actuator shall include
minimum 100,000 full open-full close cycle performances
with spring return (fail) close on loss of power.
2.10.3.1.7 Round combination fire smoke dampers up to 24 diameter

shall be true round type with minimum 2- gauge minimum
galvanized designed for lowest pressure drop and noise
performance. Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeve turning
in an extruded hole in the frame. Blade seals shall be silicone
edge designed to withstand 450 F and galvanized steel
mechanically locked in to the blade edge (adhesive type
seals are not acceptable). Each damper shall be equipped
with a factory-installed sleeve of 17 minimum length and
JKA #15-100 238000 - 19
factory roll formed one-piece angles with pre-punched
holes for easy installation. Dampers shall be Ruskin
FSDR25, Pottorff, or equal.
2.10.3.1.8 Round (larger than 24 diameter) or rectangular combination

fire smoke dampers shall include roll-formed structural hat
channel frame, reinforced at the corners, formed from a
single piece of minimum 16 gauge equivalent thickness
formed from single piece galvanized steel. Bearings shall be
stainless steel turning in an extruded hole in the frame. Blade
edge seals shall be silicone rubber designed to withstand
450 F and galvanized steel mechanically locked in to the
blade edge (adhesive type seals are not acceptable). Each
damper shall be equipped with a factory-installed sleeve of
17 minimum length and factory roll formed one-piece
angles with pre-punched holes for easy installation.
Dampers shall be Ruskin FSD60, Pottorff, or equal.
2.10.3.1.9 3-hour rated combination fire smoke dampers shall be

Ruskin model FSD60-3, Pottorff, or equal.
2.10.3.1.10 All FSD60 type dampers shall be AMCA licensed and shall
bear the AMCA Seal for Air Performance. AMCA certified
testing shall verify pressure drop does not exceed .03 w.g.
at a face velocity of 1,000 fpm on a 24 x 24 damper.
2.10.3.1.11 Wall type fire/smoke damper:
2.10.3.1.11.1 Combination fire/smoke dampers for use in

the wall of exit corridors shall be classified
and labeled as Leakage Class II Smoke
Dampers in accordance with the latest
version of UL 555S. Dampers shall meet the
requirements for combination fire/smoke
dampers in paragraph 3 above except
AMCA certified testing shall verify pressure
drop does not exceed .07 w.g. at a face
velocity of 1,000 fpm on a 24 x 24 damper
and blades shall be single skin galvanized
steel 10 gauge minimum with 3 longitudinal
grooves for reinforcement. Dampers shall
be Ruskin FSD36, Pottorff, or equal.
2.10.3.1.11.2 Front access combination fire/smoke

dampers shall meet all the requirements for
combination fire/smoke dampers in
paragraph 3 above except pressure drop
requirement. In addition the dampers shall
be constructed so that actuators and all
accessories are accessible from the grille
side. Actuators and accessories shall be
housed within an integral cabinet on the side
of the damper frame and shall not be
installed in the air stream in front of the
damper. The damper sleeve shall be
minimum 14 and flanged to accept a steel
framed grille. The sleeve shall be covered
JKA #15-100 238000 - 20
with fire resistant material. Dampers shall
be Ruskin FSD60FA, Pottorff, or equal.
2.10.3.1.12 Ceiling type fire/smoke damper for tunnel type corridor

construction: Combination fire/smoke dampers for use in the
corridor ceiling of tunnel type corridor construction shall be
UL classified and labeled as Corridor Damper. Dampers
shall meet the requirements of paragraph 4a above except
pressure drop testing does not require AMCA certification.
Dampers shall be Ruskin FSD36C, Pottorff, or equal.
2.10.3.1.13 Fusible links shall have temperature rating approximately 50

F above normal maximum operating temperature of the heat
producing appliance.
2.10.3.1.13.1 If project requires re-openable fire/smoke

dampers, provide Ruskin 165 F / 350 F
TS150, NCA or equal. The TS150 firestat
replaces the EFL and allows the damper to
be re-opened from remote location up to 350
F. TS150 shall include full open and full
closed damper position contacts for
interface with remote position indication
panel.
2.10.3.1.13.2 Each fire/smoke damper shall be equipped

with controlled closure quick detect heat
actuated release device to prevent duct and
HVAC component damage. Release device
shall allow easy reset after moderate
temperature rise outside the sleeve. Heat
release device shall be the Ruskin EFL,
NCA or equal.
2.10.3.1.13.3 Unless the system is using a validation

control system, each fire/smoke damper
shall be equipped with a control panel
including blade position indicator lights and
a key operated switch. The panel cover
shall be oversized for flush mount into the
wall or ceiling and shall have a brushed look.
Control panel shall be Ruskin MCP2,
Pottorff, or equal.
2.10.3.2 All actuators used for smoke dampers or combination fire/smoke dampers
shall have a cycle time requirement of not more than every twelve months
and shall be rated for continuous "0n" duty and shall be provided with internal
spring return. Actuators shall be equipped with pilot light, remote key test
switch, end switch and circuitry to activate pilot light on remote key (test)
switch located in corridor ceiling adjacent to damper. Electric motors shall be
Invensys MA-250, MA-253, Honeywell H2000, or equal.
2.10.4 Where required to suit the size of damper required, provide manufacturers standard UL
Classified mullions, arranged to support multiple dampers. Assembly shall be of minimum
16 gauge galvanized steel, complete with all accessory caps and framing members
required for installation.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 21
2.11 DUCTWORK
2.11.1 Construct and install all sheet metal ductwork in accordance with the California
Mechanical Code for 2 inches static pressure for supply air, and 2 inches minimum for
return and exhaust air unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
2.11.1.1 Where not in conflict with the California Mechanical Code, construct and
install all sheet metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible). Where applicable for HVAC
work, construct and install sheet metal work in accordance with SMACNA
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
2.11.1.2 Provide variations in duct size, and additional duct fittings as required to clear
obstructions and maintain clearances as approved by the Architect at no extra
cost to the Owner.
2.11.1.3 Gauges, joints and bracing shall be in accordance with the California
Mechanical Code.
2.11.1.4 Provide beading or cross breaking for all ductwork inside building. Provide
cross breaking for ductwork exposed to weather.
2.11.1.5 At the contractor's option, ductwork may be fabricated using the Ductmate,
Nexus, Quickduct, Transverse Duct Connection (TDC), Pyramid-Loc duct
connection systems, or equal. Fabricate in strict conformance with
manufacturer's written installation instructions and in accordance with
California Mechanical Code.
2.11.1.5.1 Seal flanged ends with pressure sensitive high density,

closed cell neoprene or polyethylene tape gasket, Thermo
440, or equal.
2.11.1.5.2 Provide metal clips for duct connections, except at

breakaway connections for fire dampers and fire smoke
dampers. Provide corner clips at each corner of duct,
through bolted, at all locations except at breakaway
connections for fire dampers and fire smoke dampers.
Where used on locations exposed to weather, provide
continuous metal clip at top and sides of duct, with 1 inch
overhang for top side.
2.11.2 Design and installation standards:
2.11.2.1 SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) for all work in
this section.
2.11.2.2 NFPA Compliance: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 90A, "Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and ANSI/NFPA
90B, "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems."
2.11.2.3 California Mechanical Code.
2.11.3 Fabricate all ductwork with sheet metal. Fiberglass ductwork will not be accepted for use
on this project.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 22
2.11.4 Duct sizes indicated are external sizes.
2.11.5 Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A924 and ASTM A653, Coating
Designation G 90. Provide mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed
to view.
2.11.5.1 Provide mill certification for galvanized material at request of the Project
Inspector.
2.11.6 Duct Sealing:
2.11.6.1 Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
2.11.6.2 Sealant shall comply with testing and product requirements of South Coast
Air Quality Management District, Rule 1168.
2.11.6.3 Seal airtight all joints and seams, including standing seams and manufactured
joints and seams, of all supply, return and exhaust ducts except those
exposed in conditioned space. Provide one part, non-sag, synthetic latex
sealant, formulated with a minimum of 68 percent solids. Sealant shall
comply with ASTM E84, Surface Burning Characteristics.
2.11.6.3.1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include the following, or equal:
2.11.6.3.1.1 Design Polymerics, model DP1010.
2.11.6.3.1.2 Polymer Adhesive Sealant Systems Inc,

model Airseal #11.
2.11.6.3.1.3 McGill Airseal, LLC.
2.11.7 Provide sheet metal angle frame at all duct penetrations to wall, floor, roof, or ceiling.
2.11.8 Duct Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized
steel fasteners, anchors, straps, trim, and angles for support of ductwork.
2.11.9 Rectangular Duct Fabrication:
2.11.9.1 Shop fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with the
more stringent of the following standards, except as noted herein.
2.11.9.1.1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards
2.11.9.1.2 California Mechanical Code
2.11.9.2 Fabricate ducts for 2 inch pressure class with minimum duct gauges and
reinforcement as follows, except as otherwise noted:
Duct Dimension Minimum Gauge Joint Reinforcement Per CMC
Through 12" 26 Not Required
13" through 18" 24 Not Required

JKA #15-100 238000 - 23
19" through 30" 24 C/4
31" through 42" 22 E/4
43" through 54" 22 F/2
55" through 60" 20 G/4
61" through 84" 20 I/2
85" through 96" 20 J/2
Over 96" 18 K/2
2.11.9.3 Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts and to comply with duct
requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated,
fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to 1.5 times associated duct
width. Fabricate to include single thickness turning vane in elbows where
space does not permit the above radius or where square elbows are shown.
Limit angular tapers to 30 degrees for contracting tapers and 20 degrees for
expanding tapers. Turning vanes shall be E-Z Rail II, Durodyne, or equal.
2.11.9.4 Fabricate round supply connections at rectangular, plenum type fittings using
spin-in type fittings, complete with extractor and volume control damper.
Refer to Paragraph DAMPERS for damper requirements.
2.11.9.5 Provide drive slip or equivalent flat seams for ducts exposed in the
conditioned space or where necessary due to space limitations. On ducts
with flat seams, provide standard reinforcing on inside of duct. Duct
connection to outlet on exposed duct shall be full size of outer perimeter of
outlet flange.
2.11.9.6 Ducts exposed in the conditioned space shall be free of dents and blemishes
and be mounted tight against adjacent surface with flat hangers. Remove all
fabrication labels from ductwork.
2.11.9.7 Provide 20 gauge minimum for ductwork exposed within occupied spaces.
2.11.10 Rectangular Internally Insulated Duct Fabrication:
2.11.10.1 Provide internal duct lining where indicated on the Drawings, with a minimum
of 10'-0" length in each direction from the fan, fan casing, or unit casing. Line
all transfer ducts.
2.11.10.1.1 Where ductwork is within the building insulation envelope,

lining shall be 1 thick, 1-1/2 pound density, with R-value of
4.2 minimum.
2.11.10.1.2 Ducts exposed in the conditioned space shall be free of dents

and blemishes and be mounted tight against adjacent
surface with flat hangers. Remove all fabrication labels from
ductwork.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 24
2.11.10.1.3 Where installed exposed in the conditioned space, duct shall
be minimum 20 gauge with 1 inch insulation layer (minimum
R-value R-4.2).
2.11.10.1.4 Cement duct liner in place with nonflammable, non-

hardening duct adhesive. Seal all raw edges of insulation
inside ductwork with adhesive, including longitudinal liner
edges.
2.11.10.1.5 Provide metal nosing at all locations where liner is preceded

by unlined metal.
2.11.10.1.6 Provide sheet metal weld pins and washers or clinch pins and
washers on all ductwork on 12 inch intervals with the first row
within 3 inches of the leading edge of each piece of insulation
and within 4 inches of corners. No use of adhesive mounted
pins will be considered.
2.11.10.1.6.1 Install clinched pin fasteners with properly

adjusted automatic fastening equipment.
Manual installation will not be considered.
2.11.10.1.6.2 Install weld pins with properly adjusted

automatic fastening equipment. Installation
shall not damage the galvanized coating on
the outside of the duct.
2.11.10.1.7 All ductwork, adhesives, lining, sealant, flex duct and the like
shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and developed smoke
rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with one of the
following test methods: NFPA 255, ASTM E84, or UL 723.

Manufacturer: Product:
Johns Manville Duct Liner PM
CertainTeed Corporation
ToughGard
Fosters Adhesive
85-62
Swifts Adhesive
7336
2.11.11 Round and Oval Ductwork Fabrication:
2.11.11.1 Round and oval duct and fittings shall be spiral lockseam or longitudinal seam
as indicated in table below. Provide couplings to join each length of duct.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 25
2.11.11.1.1 At contractors option, round or oval ductwork may be utilized
in place of rectangular ductwork shown on Drawings,
provided available space allows installation of round or oval
ductwork without compromising space required for
installation of products and systems of other trades.
2.11.11.1.1.1 Round or oval ductwork utilized in place of

rectangular ductwork shown on Drawings
shall be sized to have a static pressure loss
equivalent to rectangular duct shown on
Drawings.
2.11.11.1.1.2 Unlined round or oval duct shall not be

utilized in place of rectangular internally
lined ductwork shown on Drawings.
2.11.11.2 Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts and to comply with duct
requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated,
fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to 1.5 times associated duct
width. Provide two-piece, die-stamped, 45-degree to 90-degree elbows for
sizes up to 12 inches; five-piece, 90-degree elbows for sizes 12 inches and
above; conical tees; and conical laterals. All reducers shall be placed after a
tap has been made on the duct main. Reducers shall be long-taper style.
2.11.11.3 Round Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with

ANSI/ASTM A 653 by the following methods and in minimum gauges listed.
Diameter Minimum Gauge Method of Manufacture
Up to 14" 26 Spiral Lockseam
15" to 23" 24 Spiral Lockseam
Over 60" 14 Longitudinal Seam
2.11.11.4 Provide locked seams for spiral duct; fusion welded butt seam for longitudinal
seam duct.
2.11.11.5 Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide

continuous welds along seams at exposed ducts. Provide spot weld bonded
seams at concealed ducts.
Diameter Minimum Gauge
3" to 36" 20

JKA #15-100 238000 - 26
38" to 50" 18
Over 50" 16
2.11.11.7 Provide 20 gauge minimum for ductwork exposed within occupied spaces.
2.11.12 Round Internally Insulated Duct and Fittings: Where ductwork is exposed to weather or
outside the building insulation envelope, construct with outer pressure shell, 2 inch thick
(Minimum R-value = R-8) insulation layer, and perforated inner liner. Where ductwork is
within the building insulation envelope, construct with outer pressure shell, 1 inch thick
(minimum R-value = R4.2) insulation layer, and perforated inner liner. Construct shell and
liner of galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 653, of spiral lockseam
construction (use longitudinal seam for over 59 inches), in minimum gauges listed in table
below. Where installed exposed in the conditioned space: duct and fitting outer pressure
shell shall be minimum 20 gauge with 1 inch insulation layer (minimum R-value = R-4.2),
and perforated inner liner.
Nominal Duct Diameter Outer Shell Inner Liner
3" TO 12" 26 gauge 24 gauge
13" TO 24" 24 gauge 24 gauge
25" to 34" 22 gauge 24 gauge
Over 59" 16 gauge 20 gauge
2.11.12.1 Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide

continuous weld along seams of outer shell at exposed ducts. Provide spot
weld bonded seams at concealed ducts.
Nominal Duct Diameter Outer Shell Inner Liner
Over 48" 16 gauge 24 gauge
2.11.12.2 Inner Liner: Perforate with 3/32 inch holes for 22 percent open area. Provide
metal spacers welded in position to maintain spacing and concentricity.
JKA #15-100 238000 - 27
2.11.12.4 Where installed exposed in the conditioned space, duct shall be minimum 20
gauge with 1 inch insulation layer (minimum R-value R-4.2).
2.11.12.5 All ductwork, adhesives, lining, sealant, flex duct and the like shall have a
flame spread of 25 or less and developed smoke rating of 50 or less when
tested in accordance with one of the following test methods: NFPA 255,
ASTM E84, or UL 723.

2.11.12.6.1 Sheet Metal Div., McGill AirFlow, LLC., Acousti-k27
2.11.12.6.2 Semco Duct and Acoustical Products, Inc.
2.11.12.6.3 Air Systems Manufacturing, Inc. - Las Vegas
2.11.13 Duct Access Doors:
2.11.13.1 Duct Access: Provide hinged access door in rectangular ducts for access to
fire dampers, control equipment, etc. Access door size shall be duct diameter
wide by duct diameter high for all ducts under 24 inches. Ducts over 24 inches
in diameter shall have 24-inch by 18-inch access doors. Minimum size
access doors shall be 6 inches by 6 inches.
2.11.13.2 Provide hinged style access doors for round ductwork, NCA Manufacturing,
Inc., Model AD-RD-87, Pottorff Series 60, or equal. Access doors shall be 16
gauge galvanized steel with continuous piano hinge. Locks shall be plated
steel strike and catch. Provide 1" x 3/8" Polyethylene "Perma Stik" gasket all
around door.
2.11.14 Flexible Air Ducts:
2.11.14.1 Provide exterior reinforced laminated vapor barrier, fiberglass insulation,

encapsulated spring steel wire Helix, and impervious, smooth, non-perforated
interior vinyl liner. Individual lengths of flexible ducts shall contain factory
fabricated steel connection collars.

2.11.14.1.1.1 C.A. Schroeder, Inc., Cal Flex model 2PMJ.
2.11.14.1.1.2 ThermaFlex model M KC.
2.11.14.2 Factory made air ducts shall be approved for the use intended and shall
conform to the requirements of UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Each portion of a
factory-made air duct system shall be identified by the manufacturer with a
label or other suitable identification indicating compliance with UL 181, Class
1. Ducts shall be UL listed Class 1, maximum 25/50 smoke and flame spread
and shall be installed in accordance with the terms of their listing and the
JKA #15-100 238000 - 28
requirements of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and
Flexible). Factory-made air ducts shall have the following minimum R-values:
R-6.0 for ductwork installed within the building insulation envelope, R-8.0 for
ductwork installed outside the building insulation envelope.
2.11.14.3 Flexible ductwork shall be maximum of 8 feet long, and shall be extended to
the fullest possible length, in order to minimize pressure drop in the duct.
2.11.14.4 Flexible ducts shall be selected for minimum of 6 inch positive static pressure
and minimum of 1 inch negative static pressure.
2.11.15 Duct Access Panels:
2.11.15.1.1 Provide duct access panel assembly of the same material

and gauge used for the duct. Duct access panels shall
conform to the following:
2.11.15.1.1.1 Fasteners: Black steel or stainless steel to

match material used for the duct. Panel
fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
2.11.15.1.1.2 Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96, grease-

tight, high temperature ceramic fiber, rated
for minimum 1500 F.
2.11.16 Provide Ventlon, or equal, flexible connections on inlet and outlet of AC Unit, air handler
and exhaust fans. Provide galvanized weather hood over flexible connections exposed
to the weather.
2.12 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
2.12.1 Wiring and Conduit:
2.12.1.1 Wiring shall conform to National Electric Code. All wiring shall be in rigid steel
conduit. Refer to Division 26 for conduit requirements.
2.12.1.2 All conduit and wiring associated with the temperature control system,
regardless of voltage, is included as part of this Section. Contractor shall
obtain power for temperature control devices from the nearest available
adequate source. Furnish all interlocks, power supplies, relays, and the like
required to render the control system complete and functional for the intended
use.
2.12.2 Thermostats:
2.12.2.1 Refer to Drawings for thermostat model. Provide item scheduled on

Drawings, or equal.
2.12.2.2 Provide thermostats where indicated on drawings. Provide all relays,

transformers and the like to render the control system complete and fully
operable.
2.12.2.3 Unless otherwise noted, provide thermostats located in conditioned spaces

with blank front locking covers. Thermostats shall be Underwriters
Laboratories listed under UL934 for use in air plenum applications. Submit
all thermostat locations for review before installation.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 29
2.12.2.3.1 Room thermostats shall be capable of being replaced without
the need for controller recalibration.
2.12.2.3.2 Room thermostats shall have manufactured space

temperature and setpoint signal precision tolerances of no
greater than 1 degree F.
2.12.2.3.3 Unless otherwise indicated, each room thermostat or sensor

shall be provided with a momentary pushbutton for override
of unoccupied operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
3.1.1 Mount and anchor equipment in strict compliance with drawings details. Alternate
anchorage methods will not be considered for roof mounted equipment.
3.1.2 Examine rough-in for roof mounted equipment to verify actual locations of piping and duct
connections prior to final equipment installation.
3.1.3 Verify that piping to be installed adjacent to roof mounted equipment allows service and
maintenance.
3.1.4 Verify that gas piping will be installed with sufficient clearance for burner removal and
service.
3.1.5 Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb and install heavy duty rubber gaskets on
supply and return openings and on full perimeter of curb, or as required for an airtight
installation, prior to setting unit on curb.
3.1.6 Cover roof inside each roof mounted air conditioning unit, heat pump unit, and heating
and ventilating unit roof curb with 2 inch thick, 3 pound density fiberglass insulation board.
3.1.7 Connect supply and return air ducts to horizontal discharge roof mounted equipment with
flexible duct connectors specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
3.1.8 Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under
entire roof curb.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF SPLIT SYSTEM AC UNITS
3.2.1 General:
3.2.1.1 Install units level and plumb.
3.2.1.2 Install evaporator-fan components as detailed on Drawings.
3.2.1.3 Install ground or roof- mounted condensing units as detailed on Drawings.
3.2.1.4 Install seismic restraints as required by applicable codes. Refer to Article,

Submittals, in Section 23 00 50, Basic HVAC Materials and Methods, for
delegated design requirements for seismic restraints.
3.2.1.5 Install and connect refrigerant piping as detailed in unit manufacturers

literature. Install piping to allow access to unit.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 30
3.2.1.6 Install cooling coil condensate primary drain pan piping, and overflow, if
provided, and run to nearest code-compliant receptacle, or as indicated on
Drawings. Install secondary drain pan for units installed over permanent and
suspended-tile ceilings. Install secondary drain pan piping and terminate 1/2
inch below ceiling, with escutcheon, in a readily visible location or as shown
on Drawings.
3.2.1.7 Install air filters at each indoor unit. Install washable, permanent filters at
indoor units designed to accept washable, permanent filters. Refer to
Drawings schedule, and Article, Air Filters, in this Section, for filter
requirements for ducted, above-ceiling units incorporating mixing boxes.
3.2.1.8 Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Article,

Ductwork, in this Section. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of
ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units
with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Article,
Ductwork, in this Section.
3.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING INSTALLATION
3.3.1 General:
3.3.1.1 Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. Install and connect
refrigerant piping as detailed in unit manufacturers literature. Install piping to
allow access to unit.
3.3.1.2 Install piping straight and free of kinks, restrictions or traps.
3.3.1.3 Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints,
elbows, and fittings.
3.3.1.4 Slope horizontal suction piping 1 inch/10 feet towards compressor.
3.3.1.5 Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
3.3.1.6 Piping under raised floors shall be kept 6 inches minimum above ground;
excavate as necessary.
3.3.1.7 Install locking caps on refrigerant access valves located outside building,
including valves located on roofs.
3.3.1.8 Insulate refrigerant piping, including liquid and hot gas pipes when required
by system manufacturer, and including headers, branches, and other
components as detailed in unit manufacturers literature. Refer to Article,
Insulation Work, in Section 23 00 50, Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.
3.3.2 Factory Pre-charged and sealed line set piping:
3.3.2.1 Keep the entire system clean and dry during installation.
3.3.2.2 All tubing shall be evacuated and sealed at the factory. The seal must not be
broken until ready for assembly.
3.3.2.3 If there is any evidence of dust, moisture, or corrosion, the tubing must be
cleaned out by drawing a swab soaked with methyl alcohol through the tubing
as many times as necessary to thoroughly clean the tubing.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 31
3.3.2.4 Where line set piping is used, enclose in iron or steel piping and fittings or in
EMT conduit.
3.3.3 Field Assembled Refrigerant Piping:
3.3.3.1 Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than
system operating pressure.
3.3.3.2 Where subject to mechanical injury, enclose refrigerant piping in EMT conduit.
3.3.3.3 When brazing, remove solenoid valve coils and sight glasses, also remove
valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant
specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FANS
3.4.1 Ceiling Mounted Fans: Mount variable speed switch within fan housing. Mark final
balance point on variable speed switch.
3.4.2 Provide access doors for fans or motors mounted in ductwork.
3.4.3 Mount all fans as detailed on Drawings and in compliance with CBC standards.
3.4.4 Fan motors mounted in air-stream to be totally enclosed.
3.4.5 Completely line supply, return or exhaust fan cabinets with 1 inch thick, 3/4 pound density
acoustic insulation securely cemented in place.
3.4.6 Roof fans shall be mounted level.
3.4.7 Provide heavy-duty rubber gasket between exhaust fan mounting flange and roof curb, or
as required for an airtight installation.
3.5 EXHAUST VENTS
3.5.1 Install exhaust vents to provide a level mounting for backdraft damper.
3.6 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
3.6.1 Provide all air inlets and outlets with gaskets and install so that there will be no streaking
of the walls or ceilings due to leakage. Duct connection to outlet on exposed duct shall
be full size of outer perimeter of outlet flange.
3.6.2 Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, provide rectangular plenum on top of each
diffuser and ceiling return for connection to ductwork. Line plenum with internal insulation
as indicated for lined ductwork. Size plenum to allow full opening into air terminal.
3.6.3 Ceiling-mounted air terminals or services installed in T-Bar type ceiling systems shall be
positively attached to the ceiling suspension main runners or to cross runners with the
same carrying capacity as the main runners.
3.6.3.1 Terminals or services weighing not more than 56 pounds shall have two No. 12
gauge hangers connected from the terminal or service to the structure above.
These wires may be slack.
3.6.3.2 Support terminals or services weighing more than 56 pounds directly from the
structure above by approved hangers. Provide 4 taut 12 gauge wires each,
JKA #15-100 238000 - 32
attached to the fixture and to the structure above. The 4 taut 12 gauge wires,
including their attachment to the structure above must be capable of supporting
4 times the weight of the unit.
3.6.3.3 Secure air inlets and outlets to main runners of ceiling suspension system with
two #8 sheet metal screws at opposing corners.
3.6.4 Furnish all air inlets and outlets with a baked prime coat unless otherwise noted. Provide
off-white baked enamel finish on ceiling-mounted air inlets and outlets. Paint exposed
mounting screws to match the material being secured.
3.6.5 Air inlets and outlets shall match all qualities of these specified including appearance,
throw, noise level, adjustability, etc.
3.7 FILTERS
3.7.1 Mount filters in airtight frames furnished by the filter manufacturer, and install in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.7.2 Air filters shall be accessible for cleaning or replacement.
3.7.3 Identify each filter access door with 1/2 inch high minimum stenciled letters.
3.7.4 Provide temporary filters for all fans that are operated during construction; after all
construction dirt has been removed from the building install new filters at no additional
cost to the Owner. In addition to temporary filters at filter location, provide temporary filters
on all duct openings which will operate under a negative pressure.
3.7.4.1 Filters used for temporary operation shall be the same as permanent filters
for the application. Filters used for duct openings may be 1 inch thick pleated
media disposable type.
3.8 DAMPERS
3.8.1 All dampers automatically controlled by damper motors are specified under "Temperature
Control System" except those specified with items of equipment.
3.8.2 Provide opposed blade manual air dampers at each branch duct connection and at
locations indicated on the drawings and where necessary to control air flow for balancing
system. Provide an opposed blade balancing damper in each zone supply duct. Provide
an access panel or Ventlok flush type damper regulator on ceiling or wall for each
concealed damper.
3.8.3 Install fusible link fire dampers full size of duct at points where shown or required.
3.8.4 Provide 18 inch x 12 inch minimum hinged access doors in ductwork and furring for easy
access to each fire damper; insulated access doors in insulated ducts. Label access doors
with 1/2 inch high red letters.
3.8.4.1 Provide Ventlok Series 100, Durodyne, or equal access doors with hardware
for convenient access to all automatic dampers and other components of the
system, insulated type in insulated ducts. Provide Ventlok #202 for light duty
up to 2 inch thick doors, #260 heavy-duty up to 2 inch thick doors and #310
heavy-duty for greater than 2 inch thick doors. Provide #260 hinges on all
hinged and personnel access doors; include gasketing.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK

JKA #15-100 238000 - 33
3.9.1 Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will
achieve air tight and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems capable of performing
each indicated service. Install each run with minimum of joints. Align ductwork accurately
at connections within 1/8 inch misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth.
Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of type which will
hold ducts true to shape and to prevent buckling. Where possible, install ductwork to clear
construction by 1/4 inch minimum, except at air inlets and outlets. Where ductwork will
not clear construction, secure duct firmly to eliminate noise in the system.
3.9.2 Duct Joints: Install duct sealers, pop rivets or sheet metal screws at each fitting and joint.
Duct sealer shall be fire retardant. Sheet metal screw for joints shall be minimum #10 size
galvanized.
3.9.3 Applicable Leakage Classes:
Pressure Class Leakage Class

Round Duct Rectangular Duct
2"W.G. or less 12 12
4"W.G. or greater 3 6
3.9.4 Upper connection of support to wood structure shall be with wood screws or lag screws in
shear fastened in the upper one half of the wood structural member. Fasteners shall
conform to the following schedule:
For ducts with P/2=30" #10 x 1-1/2" wood screw

For ducts with P/2=72" 1/4"x 1-1/2" lag screw
For ducts with P/2 over 73" 3/8"x 1-1/2" lag screw
3.9.5 Upper connection in tension to wood shall not be used unless absolutely necessary.
Where deemed necessary the contractor shall submit calculations to show the size
fastener and penetration required to support loads in tension from wood in accordance
with the following schedule:
For ducts with P/2=30" 260 pounds per hanger

For duct with P/2 larger than 120" NOT ALLOWED
3.9.6 Upper connection to manufactured truss construction must comply with truss
manufacturers published requirements and Structural Engineers requirements.
3.9.7 Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space between
construction opening and duct or duct plus insulation with sheet metal flanges of same
gauge as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
3.9.8 Support ductwork in manner complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards," hangers and supports sections. Where special hanging of ductwork is
detailed or shown on Drawings, Drawings shall be followed. Angles shall be attached to
JKA #15-100 238000 - 34
overhead construction in a manner so as to allow a minimum of 2 inches of movement in
all directions with no bending or sagging of the angle.
3.9.8.1 Except where modified in individual paragraphs of this Section, provide

hanger support with minimum 18 gauge straps, 1 inch wide. Fold duct strap
over at bottom of duct.
3.9.8.2 Install duct supports to rectangular ducts with sheet metal screws. Provide
one screw at top of duct and one screw into strap at bottom of duct.
3.9.9 Installation of Flexible Ductwork:
3.9.9.1 Provide flexible ducts with supports at 30 inch centers with 2 inch wide, 26
gauge steel hanger collar attached to the structure with an approved duct
hanger. Installation shall minimize sharp radius turns or offsets.
3.9.9.1.1 Supports shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct

Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible).
3.9.9.1.2 Make bends to maintain R/W-1.5.
3.9.9.2 Make connections to rigid duct and units with Panduit style draw band at inner
liner material, and a second draw band over the outer vapor barrier material.
3.9.9.3 Make connection to duct with spin-in fittings, with air scoop and balance
damper.
3.10 DUCTWORK SEALING AND LEAK TESTING
3.10.1 Retrofit Construction, including alterations to existing duct system or space conditioning
equipment: All duct systems (supply, return, outside air intake and exhaust), except those
exposed in the conditioned space, shall be sealed and leak tested in strict conformance
with the requirements of the California Building Energy Efficiency Standards. See
drawings for extent of this work and leakage rate requirements. The leakage rate shall be
confirmed through field verification and diagnostic testing in accordance with the
procedures set forth in the California Building Energy Efficiency Standards .
3.11 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
3.11.1 Provide thermostats where indicated on drawings. All wiring shall be in conduit. Provide
all relays, transformers and the like to render the control system complete and fully
operable. All control conduit to be rigid steel type.
3.12 EQUIPMENT START-UP
3.12.1 Initial start-up of the systems and pumps shall be under the direct supervision of the
Contractor.
3.12.2 Equipment start-up shall not be performed until the piping systems have been flushed and
treated and the initial water flow balance has been completed.
3.12.3 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to assemble and supervise a start-up team
consisting of controls contractor, start-up technician, and test and balance contractor; all
to work in concert to assure that the systems are started, balanced, and operate in
accordance with the design.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 35
3.12.4 After start-up is complete, instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the systems. Obtain from the Owner's representative a signed memo
certifying that instruction has been received.
3.12.5 For additional requirements, refer to article, Check, Test and Start Requirements, in
Section 23 00 50, Basic HVAC Materials and Methods.
3.13 TESTING AND BALANCING
3.13.1 For testing and balancing requirements, refer to Section 23 05 93, Testing and Balancing
for HVAC.
3.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
3.14.1 As each duct section is installed, clean interior of ductwork of dust and debris. Clean
external surfaces of foreign substances that might cause corrosive deterioration of metal
or where ductwork is to be painted.
3.14.2 Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts that are not connected to equipment or air
distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of
polyethylene film or other covering that will prevent entrance of dust and debris until
connections are to be completed.
3.14.3 As each internally lined duct section is installed, check internal lining for small cuts, tears,
or abrasions. Repair all damage with fire retardant adhesive.
3.15 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING
3.15.1 Mount and anchor equipment in strict compliance with Drawings details. Alternate
anchorage methods will not be considered for roof mounted equipment.
3.16 MODULATING POWER EXHAUST START UP
3.16.1 Pre Start Up:
3.16.1.1 Once the power exhaust economizer is installed, remove the access doors
on the exhaust cabinet.
3.16.1.1.1 Route the 1/8 pressure tubing (provided with the

economizer) from the high pressure port on the transmitter to
the occupied building space. Terminate the pressure tubing
in the conditioned space at a port (field provided) shielded
from drafts.
3.16.1.1.2 Route line voltage cable from the VFD to the disconnect or
unit power distribution point as required.
3.16.1.2 Note:
3.16.1.2.1 Check local code requirements prior to installing the line

voltage through ac package unit. A separate disconnect may
be required. See power exhaust name plate for electrical
ratings.
3.16.2 Start Up:

JKA #15-100 238000 - 36
3.16.2.1 Use the MODULATION POWER EXHAUST START-UP REPORT (included
at the end of this section) to record unit information and verification of start up
checks.
3.16.2.1.1 The power exhaust will be energized when the exhaust

control contacts are closed. The contacts will not be closed
until the outside air dampers start to open. Once the contacts
are closed the run signal at the VFD will be enabled. Motor
speed will be dependent upon the building pressure signal
from the pressure transmitter.
3.16.2.2 Check the power exhaust installation is complete, power exhaust is level and
all seams are tight.
3.16.2.3 Check the set screws on the blower wheel hub. Be sure they are tight and the
wheel does not rub the housing.
3.16.2.4 Check the motor and blower pulleys. Be sure they are tight and aligned.
3.16.2.5 Check the belt tension. Assure there is not more than 1/2 of belt deflection.
3.16.2.6 Check all line and low voltage connections for loose or un-connected wires.
3.16.2.6.1 WARNING: Hazard of Electrical Shock! Capacitors in the

VFD retain their charge after the power is removed.
Disconnect incoming power and wait until the voltage
between terminals b+ & b- is 0 vdc before servicing the drive.
3.16.2.7 Verify correct voltage to the disconnect before turning on power to the power
exhaust.
3.16.2.7.1 To check out the blower, temporarily disconnect the jumper

from terminals 13a to 2 on the VFD terminal strip.
3.16.2.7.2 This will place the VFD in keypad/frequency operation.
3.16.2.7.3 Use the arrow keys on the keypad to increase the speed to
60 Hz.
3.16.2.7.4 If the blower is rotating the wrong direction, switch the t1 & t2
motor leads at the VFD to t2 & t1.
3.16.2.7.5 Adjust the motor sheave for the desired blower CFM output
at full speed.
3.16.2.7.6 When the blower check-out is complete, run the speed back
down to 20 Hz and re-connect the jumper between terminals
13a and 2.
3.16.2.8 Adjust the setpoint per job requirements. The VFD will display the pressure
control set point in hundredths of an inch w.g. (Example: 3.0 = .03 w.g.)
3.16.2.8.1 Note: The initial setting at first power up will be 3.0. To adjust
the set point, press the up or down arrow, pic will flash in the
display then the set point will display with a dot in the upper
left corner of the window. Use the up or down arrow to adjust

JKA #15-100 238000 - 37
the set point now. After 5 seconds of inactivity the VFD will
revert to display mode. Use the following chart for reference.
DISPLAY INCHES WATER GAGE
10.0 0.10
9.0 0.09
8.0 0.08
7.0 0.07
6.0 0.06
5.0 0.05
4.0 0.04
3.0 0.03
2.0 0.02
1.0 0.01
0.0 0.00
3.16.2.8.2 To see the frequency output: press mode twice, p50 will
display, press the up arrow until p71 is displayed, press
mode. The display now shows the frequency output. Press
mode to return to the set point display.
3.16.2.8.3 To see the transmitter output: press mode twice, p50 will
display, press the up arrow until p69 is displayed, press
mode. The display now shows the transmitter output signal
level. 0.0=0vdc, 10.0=10vdc. Press mode to return to the set
point display.
3.16.2.8.4 For more advanced features and settings, refer to the VFD
manual.
3.16.2.8.5 Note: to change the OEM settings, parameter p48 must be

set to 01 (user settings). The VFD must be in a stopped state
with --- in the display to change this parameter.
3.16.2.9 Notes:
JKA #15-100 238000 - 38
3.16.2.9.1 Power supply, provide disconnect means and circuit
protection as required. See power exhaust name plate for
electrical ratings. If local codes allow connecting to the HVAC
unit power make sure the disconnect and incoming wiring are
sized to handle the load of both the HVAC unit and the power
exhaust.
3.16.2.9.2 The exhaust contacts (ec) initiate the run/stop signal for the
VFD. When the outside air dampers are fully closed the VFD
is in stop mode. When the dampers start to open the VFD will
go into run mode. The exhaust contacts will be either integral
to the economizer controller or actuator or be a separate end
switch mounted on the damper frame.
3.16.2.9.3 The VFD is factory pre-programmed to accept the 0-10 vdc

signal from the differential pressure transmitter. For custom
programming, first change parameter 48 to user settings.
See instructions in the VFD hand book to set parameters.

JKA #15-100 238000 - 39
3.16.2.9.4 MODULATION POWER EXHAUST START-UP REPORT
PROJECT ____________________________________________________________
AC UNIT MODEL _________________________ UNIT TAG __________________
POWER EXHAUST MODEL ______________________________________________
POWER EXHAUST SERIAL NUMBER ______________________________________
DATE _______________ TECHNICIAN ___________________________________
____ POWER EXHAUST CABINET IS INSTALLED IN AC UNIT (SEAMS ARE TIGHT, POWER
EXHAUST IS LEVEL, NO GAPS)
____ ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ARE TIGHT
____ VERIFY BLOWER ROTATES FREELY AND WHEEL DOES NOT RUB
____ MOTOR SHEAVE, BLOWER SHEAVE AND BLOWER WHEEL SET SCREWS ARE TIGHT.
____ VERIFY PRESSURE TUBING IS RUN TO OCCUPIED SPACE
____ LOW VOLTAGE WIRING IS CONNECTED
____ LINE VOLTAGE WIRING IS CONNECTED
____ VERIFY VOLTAGE ______ L1-L2 ______ L2- L3 ______ L1-L3
______ L1-N ______ L2-N ______ L3-N
____ VERIFY BLOWER ROTATION
____ BLOWER & VFD DATA AT 60HZ __________ CFM ___________ RPM
VFD ______ L1 AMPS ______ L2 AMPS ______ L3 AMPS
MOTOR ______ T1 AMPS _____ T2 AMPS ______ T3 AMPS
MOTOR ______ BHP
____ VERIFY VFD IS OPERATING IN PI MODE
____ PRESSURE SET POINT FOR OCCUPIED SPACE
SAMPLE BLOWER SET UP LABEL TO BE PLACED ON DRIVE SIDE OF BLOWER
MOTOR SHEAVE: 1VL34X.625

BLOWER SHEAVE: AK41H
BLOWER BUSHING: HX.75
BELT: A37
MOTOR SHEAVE ADJUSTMENT
2 TURNS OPEN BLOWER RPM=1167
4 TURNS OPEN BLOWER RPM=987

JKA #15-100 238000 - 40
SECTION 260010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

1. PART - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.Table of Contents, Division 26 - Electrical:
SECTION NO. SECTION TITLE
260010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260060 POWER SYSTEM STUDY
260090 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
260519 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING
260529 ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
260531 CONDUIT
260533 BOXES
260546 SIGNAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY
260553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
260943 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
262413 SWITCHBOARDS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262716 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
262719 SURFACE RACEWAYS
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262816 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
262819 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
262900 MOTOR CONTROLS
264313 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
265100 LIGHTING
266113 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
266516 SECURITY ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM
267113 TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING SYSTEM
267319 ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM
1.1.2.Work included: This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for
Division 26. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this
Section to supplement the requirements specified in Division 01.
1.1.2.1. Quality assurance.
1.1.2.2. Definition of terms.
1.1.2.3. Submittals.
1.1.2.4. Coordination.
1.1.2.5. Record documents.
1.1.2.6. Operation and maintenance manuals.
1.1.2.7. Rough-in.
1.1.2.8. Electrical installation.
1.1.2.9. Cutting, patching, painting and sealing.
1.1.2.10. Field quality control.
1.1.2.11. Cleaning.
1.1.2.12. Project closeout.

County of Tehama BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
JKA #15-100 260010 - 1
1.1.3.Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related Work
and properly coordinate Work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a
complete and operable installation.
1.1.3.1. General and supplementary conditions: Drawings and general provisions of
Contract and Division 01 of the Specifications, apply to all Division 26 Sections.
1.1.3.2. Earthwork: Include trenching, backfilling, boring and soil compaction as required for
the installation of underground conduit, in-grade pull boxes, vaults, lighting pole
foundations, etc. Refer to Division 31, Earthwork.
1.1.3.3. Concrete Work: Include forming, steel bar reinforcing, cast-in- place concrete,
finishing and grouting as required for under ground conduit encasement, light pole
foundations, pull box slabs, vaults, housekeeping pads, etc. Also includes setting of
floor boxes in existing concrete slabs, saw-cutting of existing slabs and grouting of
conduits in saw-cut. Refer to Division 03, Concrete.
1.1.3.4. Miscellaneous metal Work: Include fittings, brackets, backing, supports, rods,
welding and pipe as required for support and bracing of raceways, lighting fixtures,
panelboards, distribution boards, switchboards, motor control centers, etc. Refer to
Division 05, Miscellaneous Metals.
1.1.3.5. Miscellaneous lumber and framing Work: Include wood grounds, nailers, blocking,
fasteners and anchorage for support of electrical materials and equipment. Refer to
Division 06, Rough Carpentry.
1.1.3.6. Moisture protection and smoke barrier penetrations: Include membrane clamps,
sheet metal flashing, counter flashing, caulking and sealant as required for
waterproofing of conduit penetrations and sealing penetrations in or through fire
walls, floors, ceiling slabs and foundation walls. All penetrations through vapor
barriers at slabs on grade shall be taped and made vaportight. Refer to Division 07,
Thermal and Moisture Protection.
1.1.3.7. Access panels and doors: Required in walls, ceilings and floors to provide access to
electrical devices and equipment. Refer to Division 08, Access Doors also, Division
05, Metals.
1.1.3.8. Painting: Include surface preparation, priming and finish coating as required for
electrical cabinets, exposed conduit, pull and junction boxes, etc. where indicated as
field painted in this Division. Refer to Division 09, Painting.
1.1.3.9. Lighting fixture supports: Provide slack fixture support wire for lighting fixtures
installed in acoustical tile or lay-in suspended ceilings. Refer to Division 09,
Acoustical Treatment.
1.1.4.Work furnished and installed under another Division requiring connections under this Division
includes but is not limited to:
1.1.4.1. Electric motors.
1.1.4.2. Package mechanical equipment: fans, fan coil units, pumps, boilers, compressors,
etc.
1.1.4.3. Flow switches and valve monitors for sprinkler system.
1.1.4.4. Pre-wired electrified partition furniture.
1.1.4.5. Temperature control panel(s). (Line voltage only)
1.1.4.6. Irrigation controller(s). (Line voltage only)
1.1.4.7. Kitchen equipment and appliances.
1.1.4.8. Electric signage.
1.1.4.9. Electric door locks.
1.1.4.10. Door hold-open/release devices.
1.1.4.11. Variable frequency drive units.
JKA #15-100 260010 - 2
1.1.5.Items furnished under another Division, but installed and connected under this Division
includes but is not limited to:
1.1.5.1. Wall mounted control stations for motorized roll down and sliding doors.
1.1.5.2. Electric fire sprinkler water flow bells.
1.1.5.3. Speed control switches for ceiling exhaust fans.
1.2.1.Reference to Codes, Standards, Specifications and recommendations of technical societies,
trade organizations and governmental agencies shall mean that latest edition of such
publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid. Such codes or standards
shall be considered a part of this Specification as though fully repeated herein.
1.2.2.When codes, standards, regulations, etc. allow Work of lesser quality or extent than is
specified under this Division, nothing in said codes shall be construed or inferred authority for
reducing the quality, requirements or extent of the Contract Documents. The Contract
Documents address the minimum requirements for construction.
1.2.3.Work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable requirements of the latest edition of
all governing codes, rules and regulations including but not limited to the following minimum
standards, whether statutory or not:
1.2.3.1. California Electric Code (CEC).
1.2.3.2. California Building Code (CBC).
1.2.3.3. California Fire Code (CFC).
1.2.3.4. California Mechanical Code (CMC).
1.2.4.Standards: Equipment and materials specified under this Division shall conform to the
following standards where applicable:
ACI American Concrete Institute
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers
ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
FS Federal Specification
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineer Association
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
UL Underwriters' Laboratories
1.2.5.Independent Testing Agency qualifications:
1.2.5.1. Testing Agency shall be an independent testing organization that will function as an
unbiased authority, professionally independent of Manufacturer, Supplier and
Contractor, furnishing and installing equipment or system evaluated by Testing
Agency.
1.2.5.2. Testing Agency shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment,
devices, installations and systems.
1.2.5.3. Testing Agency shall meet Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) requirements for accreditation of independent testing laboratories, Title 9,
Part 1907.
1.2.5.4. On-site technical personnel shall be currently certified by the International Electrical
Testing Association in electrical power distribution system testing.
1.2.5.5. Testing Agency shall use technicians who are regularly employed by the firm for
testing services.
1.2.5.6. Contractor shall submit proof of above Testing Agency qualifications with bid
documentation upon request.

JKA #15-100 260010 - 3
1.2.6.All base material shall be ASTM and/or ANSI standards.
1.2.7.All electrical apparatus furnished under this Section shall conform to NEMA standards and the
NEC and bear the UL label where such label is applicable.
1.2.8.Certify that each welder performing Work has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re-certification.
1.3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
1.3.1.The following list of terms as used in the Division 26 documents shall be defined as follows:
1.3.1.1. "Provide": Shall mean furnish, install and connect unless otherwise indicated.
1.3.1.2. "Furnish": Shall mean purchase and deliver to Project site.
1.3.1.3. "Install": Shall mean to physically install the items in-place.
1.3.1.4. "Connect": Shall mean make final electrical connections for a complete operating
piece of equipment.
1.3.1.5. "As directed": Shall be as directed by the Owner or their authorized Representative.
1.3.1.6. "Utility Companies": Shall mean the company providing electrical, telephone or
cable television services to the Project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1.Format: Furnish submittal data neatly bound in an 8-1/2" x 11" folder or binder for each
Specification Section with a table of contents listing materials by Section and paragraph
number.
1.4.2.Submittals shall consist of detailed Shop Drawings, Specifications, block wiring diagrams,
"catalog cuts" and data sheets containing physical and dimensional information, performance
data, electrical characteristics, materials used in fabrication and material finish. Clearly
indicate by arrows or brackets precisely what is being submitted on and those optional
accessories which are included and those which are excluded. Furnish quantities of each
submittal as noted in Division 01.
1.4.3.Each submittal shall be labeled with the Specification Section Number and shall be
accompanied by a cover letter or shall bear a stamp stating that the submittal has been
thoroughly reviewed by the Contractor and is in full compliance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents. Cover letters shall list in full the items and data submitted. Failure to
comply with this requirement shall constitute grounds for rejection of data.
1.4.4.The Contractor shall submit detailed Drawings of all electrical equipment rooms and closets if
the proposed installation layout differs from the construction documents. Physical size of
electrical equipment indicated on the Drawings shall match those of the electrical equipment
that is being submitted for review, i.e.: switchboards, panelboards, transformers, control
panels, etc. Minimum scale: 1/4" = 1'- 0". Revised electrical equipment layouts must be
approved prior to release of order for equipment and prior to installation.
1.4.5.As part of the equipment submittals, the Manufacturer shall provide anchorage calculations for
floor and wall mounted electrical equipment so that it shall remain attached to the mounting
surface after experiencing forces in conformance with CCR, Title 24, Table 23P, Part II and
with Section 2312 "Earthquake Regulations" of the "Uniform Building Code" for Seismic Zone
4 Area, Importance Factor of 1.251.5. Structural Calculations shall be prepared and signed by
a California Registered Structural Engineer. Specify proof loads for drilled-in anchors, if used.
1.4.6.The Manufacturer shall recommend the method of anchoring the equipment to the mounting
surface and shall provide the Contractor with the assembly dimensions, weights and
approximate centers of gravity.
1.4.7.All resubmittals shall include a cover letter that lists the action taken and revisions made to
each Drawing and equipment data sheet in response to Submittal Review Comments.
Resubmittal packages will not be reviewed unless accompanied by this cover letter. Failure to
include this cover letter will constitute rejection of the resubmittal package.

JKA #15-100 260010 - 4
1.4.8.Shop Drawings for the following systems must be prepared via a computer aided drafting
(CAD) system for submission by the Contractor. The Engineer can provide files of the
electrical Contract Documents in AutoCAD 2010 format to the Contractor.
1.4.8.1. Fire alarm system, Section 266113.
1.4.8.2. Security system, Section 266513.
1.4.9.Independent Testing Agency report:
1.4.9.1. Testing Agency shall provide 3 copies of the complete testing report.
1.4.9.2. Test report shall include the following:
1.4.9.2.1. Summary of Project.
1.4.9.2.2. Description of equipment.
1.4.9.2.3. Equipment used to conduct the test.
1.4.9.2.3.1. Type.
1.4.9.2.3.2. Manufacturer.
1.4.9.2.3.3. Model number.
1.4.9.2.3.4. Serial number.
1.4.9.2.3.5. Date of last calibration.
1.4.9.2.3.6. Documentation of calibration leading to NIST standards.
1.4.9.2.4. Description of test.
1.4.9.2.5. Test results, as compared to Manufacturers or industry accepted standards
and tolerances.
1.4.9.2.6. Conclusion and recommendation.
1.4.9.2.7. Signature of responsible test organization authority.
1.4.9.3. Furnish completed test report to Engineer no later than 30 days after completion of
testing, unless otherwise directed.
1.4.10. Substitutions:
1.4.10.1. All requests for substitutions shall conform to the general requirements and
procedure outlined in Division 01.
1.4.10.2. Where items are noted as "or equal," a product of equal design, construction and
performance will be considered. Contractor must submit to the Engineer all
pertinent test data, catalog cuts and product information required substantiating that
the product is in fact equal to that specified. Only one substitution will be considered
for each product specified.
1.4.10.3. Manufacturers' names and model numbers used in conjunction with materials,
processes or equipment included in the Contract Documents are used to establish
standards of quality, utility and appearance. Materials, processes or equipment,
which in the opinion of the Engineer is equal in quality, utility and appearance, will
be approved as substitutions to that specified.
1.4.10.4. Whenever any material, process or equipment is specified in accordance with a
Federal specification, an ASTM standard, an ANSI specification, UL rating or other
association standard, the Contractor shall present an affidavit from the Manufacturer
certifying that the product complies with the particular standard specification. When
requested by the Engineer, support test data to substantiate compliance shall be
submitted by the Contractor at no additional cost.
1.4.10.5. Substitutions shall be equal, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, to the specified
product. The burden of proof of such shall rest with the Contractor. When the
Architect/Engineer in writing accepts a substitution, it is with the understanding that
the Contractor guaranteed the substituted article or material to be equal to the one
JKA #15-100 260010 - 5
specified and dimensioned to fit within the construction. Approved substitutions
shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities for the proper execution of the
Work or from any provisions of the Specifications.
1.4.10.6. The Contractor shall be responsible for all expenses in connection with the
substitution materials, processes and equipment, including the effect of the
substitution on the Contractor, Subcontractor's or other Contractor's Work. No
substitution of material, processes or equipment shall be permitted without written
authorization of the Architect/Engineer. Any assumptions on the acceptability of a
proposed substitution prior to acceptance by the Engineer are at the sole risk of the
Contractor.
1.5 COORDINATION
1.5.1.Discrepancies:
1.5.1.1. In the event of discrepancies within the Contract Documents, the Engineer shall be
so notified, within sufficient time, as delineated in Division 01, prior to the Bid
Opening to allow the issuance of an Addendum.
1.5.1.2. If, in the event that time does not permit notification or clarification of discrepancies
prior to the Bid Opening, the following shall apply: The Drawings govern in matters
of quantity and the Specifications govern in matters of quality. In the event of
conflict within the Drawings involving quantities or within the Specifications involving
quantities or within the Specifications involving quality, the greater quantity and
higher quality shall apply. Such discrepancies shall be noted and clarified in the
Contractor's Bid. No additional allowances will be made because of errors,
ambiguities or omissions that reasonably should have been discovered during the
preparation of the Bid.
1.5.2.Project conditions:
1.5.2.1. Examination of Project site: The Contractor shall visit the Project site and
thoroughly review the locale, working conditions, conflicting utilities and the
conditions in which the Electrical Work will take place. Verify all existing conditions
in the field. No allowances will be made subsequently for any costs that may be
incurred because of any error or omission due to failure to examine the Project site
and to notify the Engineer of any discrepancies between Contract Documents and
actual Project site conditions.
1.5.2.2. Protection: Keep conduits, junction boxes, outlet boxes and other openings closed
to prevent entry of foreign matter. Cover fixtures, equipment, devices and apparatus
and protect them against dirt, paint, water, chemical or mechanical damage, before
and during construction period. Prior to final acceptance, restore to original
condition any fixture, apparatus or equipment damaged including restoration of dam-
aged factory applied painted finishes. Protect bright finished surfaces and similar
items until in service. No rust or damage will be permitted.
1.5.2.3. Supervision: Contractor shall personally or through an authorized and competent
representative constantly supervise the Work from beginning to completion and,
within reason, keep the same foreman and workmen on the Project throughout the
Project duration.
1.5.3.Preparation:
1.5.3.1. Drawings:
1.5.3.1.1. Layout: General layout indicated on the Drawings shall be followed except
where other Work may conflict with the Drawings.
1.5.3.1.2. Accuracy: Drawings for the Work under this Section are essentially
diagrammatic within the constraints of the symbology applied.
1.5.3.2. Design-Build systems approach: The Drawings do not fully represent the entire
installation for the systems indicated below. The Contractor is required to complete
the design for these systems as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings.
CAD Shop Drawings shall be submitted for review prior to installation:
JKA #15-100 260010 - 6
1.5.3.2.1. Fire alarm/life safety system: Drawings indicate the location of all control
panel components, initiating devices, annunciating devices, communication
system components, auxiliary equipment control and conduit between
buildings. Conduits, wire and cabling between all system equipment, devices,
etc. are not indicated.
1.5.3.2.2. Security system: Drawings indicate the layout and location of control
console(s) components, as well as location of all security devices, i.e. CCTV
cameras, card readers, door locks and contacts, intercom stations, duress
stations, personal security system receivers, etc. conduits, wire and cabling
between all system components, equipment, devices, etc. are not indicated
1.5.4.Utility company contacts:
1.5.4.1. Contact for electrical service: Dave Moore
PG&E
dmmh@pge.com
1.5.4.2. Contact for telephone service: Brian D. Stone
AT&T Design Engineer
Bs8656@att.com
(530) 527-1905
1.5.4.3. Contact for television service: Charter Spectrum
(530) 988-0011
1.6 RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.6.1.Provide Project Record Drawings as described herein:
1.6.1.1. Drawings shall fully represent installed conditions including actual locations of
outlets, true panelboard connections following phase balancing routines, correct
conduit and wire sizing as well as routing, revised fixture schedule listing
Manufacturers and products actually installed and revised panel schedules.
Contractor shall record all changes in the Work during the course of construction on
blue or black line prints. These prints shall be made subject of monthly review by
the Owner's Representative to ascertain that they are current. If not current monthly
payments may be withheld.
1.6.1.2. Record Drawings shall be the transfer of information on these prints to the
construction documents via computer aided drafting (CAD) process. A set of CAD
files of the electrical documents will be provided to the Contractor in Autocad
Release 2010 file format.
1.6.1.3. Record drawing submissions shall be provided to the Engineer to review upon the
completion of the following phases of Work:
1.6.1.3.1. Final electrical installation.
1.6.1.4. Include in the record drawing submission the following shop drawing submission
with all updated installation information:
1.6.1.4.1. Fire alarm system.
1.6.1.4.2. Security system.
1.6.1.4.3. Telecommunication cabling system
1.6.1.5. A single set of half size prints of the Record Drawings shall be submitted for review.
Upon receipt of the Engineer's review comments, corrections shall be made and the
Contractor shall provide the following:
1.6.1.5.1. Two sets of full size prints.
1.6.1.5.2. Two sets of half size prints.

JKA #15-100 260010 - 7
1.6.1.5.3. A 16GB flash drive with complete set of Record Drawings in electronic format,
including PDF and AutoCAD 2010.
1.6.2.Panel schedules:
1.6.2.1. Typewritten panel schedules shall be provided for panelboards indicating the loads
served and the correct branch circuit number. Schedules shall be prepared on
forms provided by the Manufacturer and inserted in the pocket of the inner door of
each panelboard. See Section 262416: Panelboards for requirements.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1.7.1.Prior to Project closeout furnish to the Owner, six (6) hard back 3-ring binders containing all
bulletins, operation and maintenance instructions, part lists, service telephone numbers and
other pertinent information as noted in each Section all equipment furnished under Division
26. Binders shall be indexed into Division Sections and labeled for easy reference. Bulletins
containing more information than the equipment concerned shall be properly stripped and
assembled.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
3.1 EXCAVATION
3.1.1.General: Cutting and digging shall be under the direct supervision of the General Contractor
and included as necessary for the Work of this Section.
3.1.2.Excavation for underground vaults and electrical structures: Conform to elevations and
dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to
permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation or services, other construction
and for inspection.
3.1.2.1. Excavate, by hand, areas within drip-line of large trees. Protect the root system for
damage and dry-out. Maintain moist conditions for root system and over exposed
roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1 inch in diameter and larger with emulsified
asphalt tree paint.
3.1.2.2. Take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just
before concrete reinforcement is placed.
3.1.3.Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installation as follows:
3.1.3.1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working
room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches clearances on both side of raceways and
equipment.
3.1.3.2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required.
3.1.3.3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which installations can be made and the
trench backfilled within the same day.
3.1.3.4. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill
with a layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of raceways and
equipment. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock
bearing surface and electrical installations.
3.1.4.Backfilling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area
classification, using materials and methods specified in Division 31, Earthwork.
3.1.4.1. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials.
3.2 ROUGH-IN
3.2.1.Contractor shall verify lines, levels and dimensions indicated on the Drawings and shall be
responsible for the accuracy of the setting out of Work and for its strict conformance with
existing conditions at the Project site.

JKA #15-100 260010 - 8
3.2.2.Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements for the
actual equipment to be connected.
3.2.3.Refer to equipment specification in Divisions 22 through 33 for rough-in requirements.
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.3.1.Preparation, sequencing, handling and installation shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's
written instructions and technical data particular to the product specified and/or accepted
equal except as otherwise specified. Comply with the following requirements:
3.3.1.1. Shop Drawings prepared by Manufacturer.
3.3.1.2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3.3.1.3. Arrange for chases, slots and openings in other building components during
progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations.
3.3.1.4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
3.3.1.5. Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of electrical materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment
requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
3.3.1.6. Where mounting height is not detailed or dimensioned, contact the Architect for
direction prior to proceeding with rough-in.
3.3.1.7. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead
utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,
franchised service companies and controlling agencies. Provide required
connection for each service.
3.3.1.8. Install systems, materials and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,
including coordination Drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to
arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the
Work are indicated only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements
conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.
3.3.1.9. Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular
to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished
spaces.
3.3.1.10. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or
replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment
for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
3.3.1.11. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment and materials installations with other
building components.
3.3.1.12. Provide access panel or doors where devices or equipment are concealed behind
finished surfaces. Furnish and install access doors per the requirements of Division
08.
3.3.1.13. Install systems, materials and equipment giving right-of-way priority to other systems
that are required to maintain a specified slope.
3.3.1.14. Conform to the National Electrical Contractor's Association "Standard of Installation"
for general installation practice.
3.4 CUTTING, PATCHING, PAINTING AND SEALING
3.4.1.Structural members shall in no case be drilled, bored or notched in such a manner that will
impair their structural value. Cutting of holes, if required, shall be done with core drill and only
with the approval of the Architect and Structural Engineer.
3.4.2.Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent
installations.

JKA #15-100 260010 - 9
3.4.3.Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components and materials
as indicated, including but not limited to removal of electrical items indicated to be removed
and items made obsolete by the new Work.
3.4.4.Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to
be removed.
3.4.5.Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of
dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
3.4.6.Patch existing surfaces and building components using experienced installers and new
materials matching existing materials and the original installation. For installers' qualifications
refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being
patched.
3.4.7.Application of joint sealers:
3.4.7.1. General: Comply with joint sealer Manufacturers' printed application instructions
applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent
requirements apply.
3.4.7.2. Installation of fire-stopping sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing and
other accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating
floors and walls, to provide fire-stops and fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or
wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements
established by testing and inspecting agency.
3.5.1.General testing requirements:
3.5.1.1. The purpose of testing is to ensure that all tested electrical equipment, both
Contractor and Owner supplied, is operational and within industry and
Manufacturers tolerances and is installed in accordance with design Specifications.
3.5.1.2. Tests and inspections shall determine suitability for energization.
3.5.1.3. Perform tests in presence of the Owner's Representative and furnish test equipment,
facilities and technical personnel required to perform tests.
3.5.1.4. Tests shall be conducted during the construction period and at completion to
determine conformity with applicable codes and with these Specifications.
3.5.2.Tests: In addition to specific system test described elsewhere, tests shall include:
3.5.2.1. Equipment operations: Test motors for correct operation and rotation.
3.5.2.2. Lighting control circuits: Test lighting circuits for correct operation through their
control devices.
3.5.2.3. Alarm and interlock systems: Produce malfunction symptoms in operating systems
to test alarm and interlock systems. In addition, all specific tests described in the fire
alarm system shall be performed.
3.5.2.4. Circuit numbering verification: Select on a random basis various circuit breakers in
the panelboards and cycle them on and off to verify compliance of the typed panel
directories with actual field wiring.
3.5.2.5. Voltage check:
3.5.2.5.1. At completion of job, check voltage at several points of utilization on the
system that has been installed under this Contract. During test, energize all
installed loads.
3.5.3.Contractor shall provide test power required when testing equipment before service
energization and coordinate availability of test power with General Contractor after service
energization. The Contractor shall provide any specialized test power as needed or specified
herein.
3.5.4.Testing safety and precautions:
JKA #15-100 260010 - 10
3.5.4.1. Safety practices shall include the following requirements:
3.5.4.1.1. Applicable State and Local safety operating procedures.
3.5.4.1.2. OSHA.
3.5.4.1.3. NSC.
3.5.4.1.4. NFPA 70E.
3.5.4.2. All tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized and grounded except
where otherwise specifically required ungrounded by test procedure.
3.5.5.Calibration of test equipment:
3.5.5.1. Testing Agency shall have calibration program that assures test instruments are
maintained within rated accuracy.
3.5.5.2. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule:
3.5.5.2.1. Field instruments: Analog, 6 month maximum; Digital, 12 months maximum.
3.5.5.2.2. Laboratory instruments: 12 months.
3.5.5.2.3. Leased specialty equipment: 12 months where accuracy is guaranteed by
lessor.
3.5.5.3. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on test equipment.
3.5.5.4. Records, which show date and results of instruments calibrated or tested, must be
kept up-to-date.
3.5.5.5. Up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures shall be maintained for
test instrument.
3.5.5.6. Calibration standards shall be of higher accuracy than instrument tested.
3.5.5.7. Equipment used for field testing shall be more accurate than instrument being
tested.
3.5.6.Coordinate with General Contractor regarding testing schedule and availability of equipment
ready for testing.
3.5.7.Notify Owner and Engineer one week in advance of any testing.
3.5.8.Any products which fail during the tests or are ruled unsatisfactory by the Owner's
Representative shall be replaced, repaired or corrected as prescribed by the Owner's
Representative at the expense of the Contractor. Tests shall be performed after repairs,
replacements or corrections until satisfactory performance is demonstrated.
3.5.9.Testing Agency shall maintain written record of tests and shall assemble and certify final test
report.
3.5.10. Include all test results in the maintenance manuals.
3.6 CLEANING
3.6.1.Prior to energizing of electrical equipment, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior of
enclosures from construction debris, scrap wire, etc. using Manufacturer's approved methods
and materials.
3.6.2.Upon completion of Project, prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean
both the interior and exterior of all electrical equipment per Manufacturers approved methods
and materials. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris.
3.6.3.Touch-up paint any marks, blemishes or other finish damage suffered during installation.
3.7 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
3.7.1.Training: At the time of completion, a period of not less than 24 hours shall be allotted by the
Contractor for instruction of building operating and maintenance personnel in the use of all
systems. This 24 hours training is in addition to any instruction time called out in the
Specifications for specific systems, i.e., Fire Alarm, etc. All personnel shall be instructed at
JKA #15-100 260010 - 11
one time, the Contractor making all necessary arrangements with Manufacturers
Representative. The equipment Manufacturer shall be requested to provide product literature
and application guides for the users' reference. Costs, if any, for the above services shall be
paid by the Contractor.
3.7.2.Special tools: Provide one of each tool required for proper operation and maintenance of the
equipment provided under this Section. All tools shall be delivered to the Owner at the Project
completion.
3.7.3.Keying: Provide two keys for each lock furnished under this Section and turn over to Owner.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 260010 - 12
SECTION 260060
POWER SYSTEM STUDY

1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY
1.1.1. Work included: Services necessary to complete the system analysis studies required for the
item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:
1.1.1.1. Short circuit study.
1.1.1.2. Protective device evaluation study.
1.1.1.3. Protective device coordination study.
1.1.1.4. Arc flash evaluation study.
1.1.2. Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related Work
and properly coordinate Work specified herein with equipment specified elsewhere to perform
a complete analysis study.
1.2. REFERENCES
1.2.1. Comply with the latest edition of the following applicable Specifications and standards except
as otherwise indicated or specified:
1.2.1.1. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI):
ANSI Z535.4; Product Safety Signs and Labels.
1.2.1.2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
IEEE 1584; Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations.
1.2.1.3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
NFPA 70E; Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
1.3.1. Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 260010: Basic Electrical
Requirements, the following items:
1.3.1.1. The results of the Power System Study shall be summarized in a final report.
Three (3) bound copies of the final report shall be submitted.
1.3.1.2. The report shall include the following Sections:
1.3.1.2.1. Description, purpose, basis and scope of the study and a single
line diagram of that portion of the power system, which is included
within the scope of the study.
1.3.1.2.2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device
ratings versus calculated short circuit duties and commentary
regarding it.
1.3.1.2.3. Protective device time versus current coordination curves,
tabulations of relay and circuit breaker trip settings, fuse selection
and commentary regarding it.
1.3.1.2.4. Fault current calculations including a definition of terms and guide
for interpretation of computer printout.
1.3.1.2.5. Recommended size for power fuses and recommended settings
for ground fault relays and for all adjustable trip relays.
1.3.1.2.6. Tabulations of arc flash evaluation study results and commentary
regarding results.

County of Tehama POWER SYSTEM STUDY
JKA #15-100 260060 - 1
1.3.1.2.7. Sample arc flash warning label.
1.3.1.3. Contractor shall also provide an electronic copy of the report as part of the Record
Document process.
1.3.2. The study shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to final review of the distribution equipment
Shop Drawings, prior to release of equipment for manufacture. If formal completion of the
study may cause delay in equipment manufacture, approval from the Architect may be
obtained for a preliminary submittal of sufficient data to ensure that the selection of device
ratings and characteristics will be satisfactory. Then the formal study will be provided to verify
the preliminary findings.
1.4.1. The system analysis studies shall be performed by the Switchboard/Switchgear
Manufacturer.
2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
3.1. GENERAL
3.1.1. The studies shall include all portions of the electrical distribution system from the main normal
power services down to and including the 208 VAC distribution system. Normal system
connections and those that result in maximum fault conditions shall be adequately covered in
the study.
3.2. SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY
3.2.1. The short circuit study shall be performed with the aid of a computer program and shall be in
accordance with the latest applicable IEEE and ANSI standards.
3.2.2. The study input data shall include the maximum available short circuit contribution, resistance
and reactance components of the branch impedance, the X/R ratios, base quantities selected
and other source impedance.
3.2.3. Short circuit close and latch duty values and interrupting duty values shall be calculated on
the basis of maximum available current at each substation bus, switchgear bus, medium
voltage controller, switchboard, low voltage motor control center, distribution panelboard,
pertinent branch circuit panel and other significant locations through the system. The short
circuit tabulations shall include asymmetrical fault currents, symmetrical fault currents and
X/R ratios. For each fault location, the total duty on the bus, as well as the individual
contribution from each connected branch, shall be listed with its respective X/R ratio.
3.2.4. A protective device evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of circuit
breakers, switches, automatic transfer switches and fuses by tabulating and comparing the
short circuit ratings of these devices with the calculated fault currents. Appropriate
multiplying factors based on system X/R ratios and protective device rating standards shall
be applied. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment due to short circuit currents
shall be promptly brought to the Architect's attention.
3.3. PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
3.3.1. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to provide the necessary
calculations and logic decisions required to select or to check the selection of power fuse
ratings, protective relay characteristics and settings, ratios and characteristics of associated
current transformers, ground fault relays and low voltage breaker trip characteristics and
settings. The studies shall be in accordance with the latest applicable IEEE and ANSI
standards.
3.3.2. The coordination study shall include all medium and low voltage classes of equipment from
the building or plant service protective devices down to and including the largest rated device
in the low voltage motor control centers and panelboards. The phase and ground overcurrent
protection shall be included as well as settings of all other adjustable protective devices,
including the ground fault system devices.

JKA #15-100 260060 - 2
3.3.3. The time-current characteristics of the specified protective devices shall be drawn on log-log
paper. The plots shall include complete titles, representative one-line diagram and legends,
significant motor starting characteristics, complete parameters of transformers, complete
operating bands of low voltage circuit breaker trip curves and fuses. The coordination plots
shall indicate the types of protective devices selected, proposed relay taps, time dial and
instantaneous trip settings, transformer magnetizing inrush and ANSI transformer withstand
parameters, cable thermal overcurrent withstand limits and significant symmetrical and
asymmetrical fault currents. All restrictions of the National Electrical Code shall be adhered
to and proper coordination intervals and separation of characteristic curves shall be
maintained. The coordination plots for phase and ground protective devices shall be
provided on a system basis. A sufficient number of separate curves shall be used to clearly
indicate the coordination achieved.
3.3.4. The selection and settings of the protective devices shall be provided separately in a
tabulated form listing circuit identification, IEEE device number, current transformer ratios and
connection, Manufacturer and type, range of adjustment and recommended settings. A
tabulation of the recommended power fuse selection shall be provided for the medium
voltage fuses where applied in the system. Any discrepancies, problem areas or
inadequacies shall be promptly brought to the Engineer's attention.
3.4. ARC FLASH EVALUATION STUDY
3.4.1. An arc flash evaluation study shall be performed to identify the shock hazard and appropriate
personnel protective equipment (PPE) required at each switchboard, distribution board,
panelboard, etc. in accordance with the referenced standards.
3.4.2. The arc flash evaluation study shall include all voltage classes of equipment from the service
entrance down to and including the panelboards.
3.4.3. The company performing the arc flash evaluation study shall provide arc flash and shock
hazard warning labels for all equipment evaluated. Labeling shall be as follows:
3.4.3.1. Label type:
3.4.3.1.1. 4 x 6 for Hazard Class 1 or less.
3.4.3.1.2. 5 x 7 for Hazard Class greater than 1.
3.4.3.1.3. White vinyl or polyester with orange warning symbol and black
text.
3.4.3.1.4. Industrial grade self-adhesive backing.
3.4.3.1.5. Printed information shall be from the evaluation study results.
3.4.3.1.6. Labeling shall be by Created with Brady PowerMark Sign, Label
Maker or approved equal.
3.4.3.2. Hazard Class 1 label information:
3.4.3.2.1. Equipment name.
3.4.3.2.2. Available short circuit current.
3.4.3.2.3. Flash protection boundary.
3.4.3.2.4. Incident energy at 18 inches expressed in cal/cm.
3.4.3.2.5. PPE required.
3.4.3.3. Hazard Class greater than 1 label information:
3.4.3.3.1. Equipment name.
3.4.3.3.2. Available short circuit current.
3.4.3.3.3. Flash protection boundary.
3.4.3.3.4. Incident energy at 18 inches expressed in cal/cm.
3.4.3.3.5. PPE required.

JKA #15-100 260060 - 3
3.4.3.3.6. Voltage shock hazard.
3.4.3.3.7. Limited shock approach boundary.
3.4.3.3.8. Restricted shock approach boundary.
3.4.3.3.9. Prohibited shock approach boundary.
3.4.4. Labels shall be affixed to all equipment covered under the evaluation study.
3.5. PROTECTIVE DEVICE TESTING, CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENT
3.5.1. The equipment Manufacturer shall provide the services of a qualified field Engineer and
necessary tools and equipment to test and calibrate the protective relays, ground fault relays
and circuit breaker trip devices as recommended in the Power System Study.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 260060 - 4
SECTION 260090
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1. Work included: Labor and equipment necessary to complete the demolition required for
the item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:
1.1.1.1. Selective Electrical demolition
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1. Disconnection, removal and relocation of all wiring, light fixtures, outlets, conduit and all
other types of electrical equipment as described on Drawings.
1.2.2. Purpose is to remove, relocate and extend existing installations to accommodate new
construction.
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
2.1.1. Materials and equipment necessary for patching and extending Work, as specified in
other Sections.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly review conditions in the area of demolition prior to
commencing Work to ensure complete understanding of existing installation in
relationship to demolition Work.
3.2.1. Remove all wiring, light fixtures, outlets, conduit and all other types of electrical
equipment indicated to be removed. Devices that are to be removed may require
reworking conduit and wiring in order to maintain service to other devices. If removed
devices are on walls or ceilings that are to remain, blank coverplates are to be installed
on outlet boxes.
3.2.2. Where remodeling interferes with circuits in areas that are otherwise undisturbed,
circuits shall be reworked as required.
3.2.3. Existing devices and circuiting that are indicated are indicated only for informational
purposes. Contractor shall visit the Project site and shall verify conditions as they exist
and shall remove, relocate and/or rework any electrical equipment or circuits affected
(whether indicated or not) due to removal of existing walls, ceilings, etc. Coordinate all
Work with that of other trades.
3.2.4. All equipment, fixtures, devices, etc., which are removed shall be delivered to the Owner
for disposition. All items which are removed and not wanted by the Owner and which
are not reused shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be legally removed
from the Project site.
3.2.5. Cutting and patching necessary for the removal of Electrical Work shall be included.
3.2.6. Remove and replace lighting fixtures, rework, relocate or replace conduit and wiring and
do other Work required by the installation of new ductwork, piping, etc., above the
ceiling. Coordinate with other trades and verify the extent of the Work.
3.3 LIGHT FIXTURES
3.3.1. Disconnect and remove abandoned light fixtures. Remove conduits, wiring, boxes,
brackets, stems, hangers and other accessories.

County of Tehama ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
JKA #15-100 260090 - 1
3.4 OUTLETS
3.4.1. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if
conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned
outlets that are not removed.
3.5 CONDUIT
3.5.1. Remove abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling
finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors and patch surfaces.
3.6 WIRING
3.6.1. Removed abandoned wiring to source of supply.
3.7 EXISTING SYSTEMS
3.7.1. Electrical distribution system: Disable system only to make switchovers and
connections. Obtain permission from Owner's designated representative at least 24
hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make
temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to Work area.
3.7.2. Fire alarm system: Maintain the existing system in service. Disable system only to
make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to Work area(s).
Notify Owner and Fire Supervisory Service at least 24 hours before partially or
completely disabling the system.
3.7.3. Telephone system: Maintain the existing system in service throughout construction.
Disable system only to make temporary connections where necessary to maintain
service in areas adjacent to Work area(s). Notify Owner and Telephone Utility at least
24 work week hours before partially or completely disabling the system.
3.8 CLEANING AND REPAIR
3.8.1. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that shall remain.
3.8.2. Main Switchboard: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical
connections. Refer to the plans for general requirements for refurbishing the
switchboard.
END OF SECTION

County of Tehama ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
JKA #15-100 260090 - 2
SECTION 260519
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1. Work included: Labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation
required for the item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:
1.1.1.1. Building wire.
1.1.1.2. Cable.
1.1.1.3. Wiring connections and terminations.
1.1.2. Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related
Work and properly coordinate Work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to
produce a complete installation.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1.1. Federal Specifications (FS):
FS J-C-30A; Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed
Installation).
FS W-S-610C; Splice Conductor.
FS HH-I-595C; Insulation Tape, Electrical, Pressure-
Sensitive Adhesive, Plastic.
1.2.1.2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
UL 44; Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables.
UL 62; Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire.
UL 83; Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.
UL 183; Manufactured Wiring Systems.
UL 310; Electrical Quick-Connect Terminals.
UL 486A & B; Wire Connectors.
UL 486C; Splicing Wire Connectors.
UL 486D; Insulated Wire Connector Systems for
Underground Use or in Damp or Wet
Locations.
UL 493; Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground
Feeder and Branch Circuit Cables.
UL 510; Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and
Rubber Insulating Tape.
UL 854; Service-Entrance Cables.
UL 1569; Metal-Clad Cables.
UL 1581; Reference Standard for Electrical Wires,
Cables and Flexible Cords.
1.2.1.3. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA):

County of Tehama BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
JKA #15-100 260519 - 1
NEMA WC-5; Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable for
the Transmission and Distribution of
Electrical Energy.
NEMA WC-7; Cross-Linked Thermosetting Polyethylene
Insulated Wire and Cable for the
Transmission and Distribution of Electrical
Energy.
1.2.1.4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
IEEE 82; Test Procedure for Impulse Voltage Tests
on Insulated Conductors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1.1. Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein, listing all
physical and electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all
listed standards.
1.3.1.2. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and the
proposed application.
1.3.1.3. Submit Manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.3.1.4. Final test results.
1.4.1. All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new,
unused and currently under production.
1.4.2. Only products and applications listed in this Section may be used on the Project unless
otherwise submitted.
1.4.3. Independent Testing Agency qualifications: Refer to Section 260010: Basic Electrical
Requirements.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1. Products furnished by the following Manufacturers shall be acceptable if in compliance with
all features specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.
2.1.1.1. Building wire:
2.1.1.1.1. America Insulated Wire Corp.
2.1.1.1.2. Rome Cable.
2.1.1.1.3. Southwire Company.
2.1.1.2. Metal-CladArmored Cable:
2.1.1.2.1. American Cable Systems.
2.1.1.3. Flexible Cords and Cables:
2.1.1.3.1. Carol Cable Company.
2.1.1.3.2. PWC Corp.
2.1.1.3.3. ITT Royal Electric.
2.1.1.4. Wiring connectors and terminations:
2.1.1.4.1. 3M Company.
2.1.1.4.2. Ideal.

JKA #15-100 260519 - 2
2.1.1.4.3. Blackburn-Holub.
2.1.1.4.4. Burndy.
2.1.1.4.5. Thomas & Betts Corp.
2.1.1.4.6. Beau Barrier.
2.1.2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements.
2.2 BUILDING WIRE
2.2.1. Conductor material:
2.2.1.1. Provide annealed copper for all wire, conductor and cable, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.2.1.2. Wire AWG #8 and larger shall be stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2.1.3. Wire AWG #10 and smaller may be solid or stranded as best suited for the
installation.
2.2.2. Insulation material:
2.2.2.1. All insulated wire, conductor and cable shall be 600 volt rated unless otherwise
noted on the Drawings.
2.2.2.2. Thermoplastic-insulated building wire: NEMA WC 5.
2.2.2.3. Rubber-insulated building wire: NEMA WC 3.
2.2.2.4. Feeders and branch circuits larger than 6 AWG: Type THW, XHHW or dual
rated THHN/THWN.
2.2.2.5. Feeders and branch circuits 6 AWG and smaller: Type TW, THW, XHHW or
dual rated THHN/THWN.
2.2.2.6. Service Entrance: Type RHW or THWN.
2.2.2.7. Control Circuits: Type THW or dual rated THHN/THWN.
2.2.2.8. Identify system conductors as to voltage and phase connections by means of
color-impregnated insulation.
2.3 METAL-CLAD CABLE (MC)
2.3.1. MC cable shall be an armored assembly of two or more dual rated THHN/THWN conductors.
A full sized green insulated ground wire.
2.3.2. MC cable sheath shall be fabricated in continuous lengths from galvanized steel strip,
spirally wound and formed to provide an interlocking design.
2.3.3. Conductors shall be color-coded for the correct phase and voltage as specified herein.
2.3.4. Fittings: Connectors shall be of the single screw clamp variety with steel or cast malleable
iron bodies and threaded male hubs with insulated throats. Fittings shall be UL listed for use
with MC cable type specified.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CORDS AND CABLES (TYPE'S')
2.4.1. Provide flexible cords and cables of size, type and arrangement as indicated on the
Drawings.
2.4.2. Type 'S' flexible cords and cables shall be manufactured in accordance with NEC Article 400
and composed of two or more conductors and a full size green insulated ground wire with an
outer jacket of rubber or neoprene as noted.
2.4.3. Flexible cords and cables shall be fitted with wire mesh strain relief grips either as a integral
component of the connector or as an independently supported unit.
2.4.4. Suspended flexible cords and cables shall incorporate safety spring(s) unless otherwise
noted.
2.5 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
JKA #15-100 260519 - 3
2.5.1. Bolted pressure connectors: Provide wide range-taking connectors with cast bronze
compression bolts, designed for parallel taps, tees, crosses or end-to-end connections.
2.5.2. Electrical spring wire connectors:
2.5.2.1. Provide multi-part construction incorporating a non-restricted, zinc coated
square cross-section steel spring enclosed in a steel sheet with an outer jacket
of plastic and insulating skirt.
2.5.2.2. Self-striping pigtail and tap U-contact connectors shall not be used.
2.5.3. Push-in wire connectors:
2.5.3.1. Multi-port push-in wire connectors for a maximum of 8-wires, as required for
specific application. Connectors are manufactured to accommodate a wide
range of sizes with either solid or stranded conductors, up to a maximum wire
size of #10 AWG. Low insertion force required for ease of installation.
2.5.3.2. Housing shall be 105 degrees C and transparent for visual connection
verification.
2.5.3.3. 600 volt maximum rating with copper contacts.
2.5.3.4. UL Listed to 486C and UL 467 Listed for grounding and bonding applications.
2.5.4. Compression type terminating lugs:
2.5.4.1. Provide tin-plated copper high-compression type lugs for installation with hand
or hydraulically operated circumference-crimping tools and dies as stipulated by
the lug Manufacturer or as indicated on Drawings. Notch or single point type
crimping is NOT acceptable.
2.5.4.2. Two hole, long barrel lugs shall be provided for size (4/0) and larger wire where
terminated to bus bars. Use minimum of three crimps per lug, on sizes where
possible.
2.5.5. Splicing and insulating tape: Provide black, ultraviolet proof, self-extinguishing, 7 mil thick
vinyl general purpose electrical tape with a dielectric strength of 10,000 volts suitable for
temperatures from minus 18 degrees C to 105 degrees C. Federal Spec. HH-I-595, Scotch
33+ or equal minimum.
2.5.6. Insulating putty:
2.5.6.1. Provide pads or rolls of non-corrosive, self-fusing, one-eighth inch thick rubber
putty with PVC backing sheet. Scotch vinyl mastic pads and roll or equal.
2.5.6.2. Use putty suitable for temperatures from minus 17.8 degrees C to 37.8 degrees
C with a dielectric strength of 570-volts/mil minimum.
2.5.7. Insulating resin:
2.5.7.1. Provide two-part liquid epoxy resin with resin and catalyst in pre-measured,
sealed mixing pouch. Scotchcast 4 or equal for wet or underground vaults,
boxes, etc. splices or terminations.
2.5.7.2. Use resin with a set up time of approximately 30 minutes at 21.1 degrees C and
with thermal and dielectric properties equal to the insulating properties of the
cables immersed in the resin.
2.5.8. Terminal strips:
2.5.8.1. Provide box type terminal strips in the required quantity plus 25% spare. Install
in continuous rows in terminal cabinets.
2.5.8.2. Use the box type terminal strips with barrier open backs and with ampere
ratings as required.
2.5.8.3. Identify all terminals with numbering sequence being used for a particular
system.
2.5.9. Crimp type connectors:
JKA #15-100 260519 - 4
2.5.9.1. Provide insulated fork or ring crimp terminals with tinned electrolytic copper-
brazed barrel with funnel wire entry and insulation support
2.5.9.2. Fasten crimp type connectors or terminals using a crimping tool recommended
by the connector Manufacturer.
2.5.9.3. Provide insulated overlap splices with tinned seamless electrolytic copper
barrel with funnel wire entry and insulation support.
2.5.9.4. Provide insulated butt splices with tinned seamless electrolytic copper barrel
with center stop, funnel wire entry and insulation support.
2.5.10. Cable ties: Provide harnessing and point-to-point wire bundling with nylon cable ties. All
cable ties shall be installed using tool supplied by Manufacturer of ties.
2.5.11. Wire lubricating compound:
2.5.11.1. UL listed for the wire insulation and conduit type and shall not harden or
become adhesive.
2.5.11.2. Shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power systems.
2.5.12. Bolt termination hardware:
2.5.12.1. Bolts shall be plated, medium carbon steel heat-treated, quenched and
tempered equal to ASTM A-325 or SAE grade 5; or silicon bronze alloy ASTM
B-9954 Type B.
2.5.12.2. Nuts shall be heavy semi-finished hexagon, conforming to ANSI B18.2.2,
threads to be unified coarse series (UNC), class 2B steel or silicon bronze
alloy.
2.5.12.3. Flat washers shall be steel or silicon bronze, Type A plain standard wide series,
confirming to ANSI B27.2. SAE or narrow series shall not be used.
2.5.12.4. Belleville conical spring washers shall be hardened steel, cadmium plated or
silicon bronze.
2.5.12.5. Each bolt connecting lug(s) to a terminal or bus shall not carry current
exceeding the following values:
2.5.12.5.1. 1/4" bolt - 125 amps
2.5.12.5.2. 5/16" bolt - 175 amps
2.5.12.5.3. 3/8" bolt - 225 amps
2.5.12.5.4. 1/2" bolt - 300 amps
2.5.12.5.5. 5/8" bolt - 375 amps
2.5.12.5.6. 3/4" bolt - 450 amps
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of wire and cable
installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances. Do not
commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
3.2 APPLICATION
3.2.1. All wire, conductor and cable with their respective connectors, fittings and supports shall be
UL listed for the installed application and ambient condition.
3.2.2. Feeders and branch circuits in wet locations shall be rated 75 degree C.
3.2.3. Feeders and branch circuits in dry locations shall be rated 90 degree C.
3.2.4. Minimum conductor size:
3.2.4.1. Provide minimum AWG #12 for all power and lighting branch circuits.

JKA #15-100 260519 - 5
3.2.4.2. Provide minimum AWG #14 for all line voltage signal and control wiring unless
otherwise indicated.
3.2.5. Color coding:
3.2.5.1. For 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire systems:
3.2.5.1.1. Phase A - Black
3.2.5.1.2. Phase B - Red
3.2.5.1.3. Phase C - Blue
3.2.5.1.4. Neutral - White
3.2.5.1.5. Ground - Green
3.2.5.2. For 277/480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire systems:
3.2.5.2.1. Phase A - Brown
3.2.5.2.2. Phase B - Orange
3.2.5.2.3. Phase C - Yellow
3.2.5.2.4. Neutral - Gray
3.2.5.2.5. Ground - Green
3.2.5.3. Switch leg individually installed shall be the same color as the branch circuit to
which they are connected, unless otherwise noted.
3.2.5.4. Travelers for 3-way and 4-way switches shall be a distinct color and pulled with
the circuit switch leg or neutral.
3.3 WIRING METHODS
3.3.1. Install wires and cables in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated
on Drawings and as specified herein.
3.3.2. Install all single conductors in raceway system, unless otherwise noted.
3.3.3. Parallel circuit conductors and terminations shall be equal in length and identical in all ways.
3.3.4. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors
to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than
#10 AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at
the terminal.
3.3.5. 20 amp power and lighting branch circuit containing no more than four (4) current carrying
conductors (phases and neutrals). Use #10 AWG conductor for 120/208 volt circuits located
outside a 75 foot radius of panel source, unless otherwise noted.
3.3.6. 20 amp power and lighting branch circuits containing no more than eight (8) current carrying
conductors (phases and neutrals). Use #10 AWG conductors for 120/208 volt circuits
located outside a 65 foot radius of panel source.
3.3.7. Provide #10 AWG pig tails on all 20A and 30A wiring devices served by #8 AWG conductors
and larger.
3.3.8. Splice cables and wires only in outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, manholes or
handholes. Group and bundle with tie wrap each neutral with it's associated phase
conductor where more then one neutral is present in a conduit.
3.3.9. Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the NEC Article 300. Provide
split wedge type fittings, which firmly clamp each individual cable and tighten due to cable
weight.
3.3.10. Neatly form, train and tie the cables in individual circuits. For panelboards, cabinets,
wireways, switches and equipment assemblies.

JKA #15-100 260519 - 6
3.3.11. Seal cable or wire, entering a building from underground, between the wire or cable and
conduit, where it exits the conduit, with a non-hardening approved compound, i.e. duct seal
or equal.
3.3.12. Provide UL-listed factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of size, ampacity rating,
material, type and class for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with
temperature ratings equal to or greater than the wires that are being terminated.
3.3.13. Stranded wire shall be terminated using fitting, lugs or devices listed for the application.
However, in no case shall stranded wire be terminated solely by wrapping it around a screw
or bolt.
3.3.14. Flexible cords and cables supplied, as part of a pre-manufacturer fixture or unit assembly
shall be installed according to Manufacturers published installation instructions.
3.4 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS
3.4.1. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the
weather and all mechanical Work likely to injure conductors has been completed. Pull all
conductors into a raceway at the same time. Exercise care in pulling conductors so that
insulation is not damaged. Use UL listed, non-petroleum base and insulating type pulling
compound as needed.
3.4.2. Completely mandrel all underground or concrete encased conduits prior to installing
conductors.
3.4.3. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
3.4.4. Do not use block and tackle, power driven winch or other mechanical means for pulling
conductors of size smaller than AWG #1.
3.4.5. Wire pulling:
3.4.5.1. Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting or abrasion of
insulation during pulling of cables.
3.4.5.2. Use rope made of nonmetallic material for pulling feeders.
3.4.5.3. Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven basket grips or pulling
eyes attached directly to the conductors.
3.4.5.4. Pull in together multiple conductors or cables in a single conduit.
3.4.6. Install and test all cables in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and warranty.
3.5 MC CABLE INSTALLATION
3.5.1. The Drawings indicate above suspended ceiling power distribution junction boxes for
conversion from hardwire to MC cable wiring system. Install these boxes such that they are
accessible from below. MC cable shall be run to each device as described in documents.
MC cable runs have not been indicated. Refer to Shop Drawings for installation.
3.5.2. Install MC cable in accordance with Manufacturers instructions and in strict accordance with
NEC Article 334. Follow Manufacturer's explicit instructions when connecting the cable to
fittings and boxes. Connectors shall be firmly secured to the cable, but not over-tightened.
Connector shall be firmly attached to the metal boxes.
3.5.3. Support cables every 6 feet and within 12 inches of boxes, per NEC Article 334, using
separate spring metal clip or metal cable ties (not steel tie wire) for each cable. Cables shall
not be bundled together.
3.5.4. Provide separate drop wire above accessible ceiling, to support MC cables. Suspended
ceiling drop wire may not be used to support MC cables.
3.5.5. Do not rest cables on ceiling tiles or allow contact with mechanical piping systems.
3.5.6. Bend the cable per NEC Article 334.
3.5.7. Provide separate sleeves and/or fire barriers where cable penetrated firewalls, unless cable
is UL listed for the application.

JKA #15-100 260519 - 7
3.6 WIRE SPLICES, JOINTS AND TERMINATION
3.6.1. Join and terminate wire, conductors and cables in accordance with UL 486A, C, NEC and
Manufacturer's instructions.
3.6.2. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
3.6.3. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible
temperature rise.
3.6.4. Splices and terminations shall be made mechanically and electrically secure.
3.6.5. Where it's determined that unsatisfactory splice or terminations have been installed, remove
the devices and install approved devices at no addition cost.
3.6.6. Terminate wires in Terminal Cabinets, relay and contactor panels, etc. using terminal strip
connectors.
3.6.7. Insulate spare conductors with electrical tape and leave sufficient length to terminate
anywhere in the panel or cabinet.
3.6.8. Install cable ties and maintain harnessing.
3.6.9. Encapsulate splices in exterior outlets, pullboxes and junction boxes using specified
insulating resin kits. Make all splices watertight for exterior equipment and equipment in
pump rooms.
3.6.10. Make up all splices and taps in accessible junction or outlet boxes with connectors as
specified herein. Pigtails and taps shall be the same color as the feed conductor. Form
conductor prior to cutting and provide at least six (6) inches of tail and neatly packed in box
after splice is made up.
3.6.11. Branch circuits (#10 AWG and smaller):
3.6.11.1. Connectors: Solderless, screw-on, reusable spring pressure cable type, 600
volt, 105-degree C. with integral insulation, approved for copper conductors.
3.6.11.2. The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover the stripped wires.
3.6.11.3. The number, size and combination of conductors as listed on the
Manufacturers packaging shall be strictly complied with.
3.6.12. Feeder circuits: (#6 to 750 MCM)
3.6.12.1. Join or tap conductors from #6 AWG to 750 MCM using bolted pressure
connectors or insulate mechanical compression (hi-press) taps with pre-
molded, snap-on insulating boots or specified conformable insulating pad and
over wrapped with two half-lapped layers of vinyl insulating tape starting and
ending at the middle of the joint.
3.6.12.2. Terminate conductors from size #6 AWG to 750 MCM copper using bolted
pressure or mechanical compression lugs in accordance with Manufacturer
recommendation or as specified elsewhere.
3.6.12.3. Field installed compression connectors for cable sizes 250 MCM and larger
shall have not less than two clamping elements or compression indents per
wire.
3.6.12.4. Insulate splices and joints with materials approved for the particular use,
location, voltage and temperature. Insulate with not less than that of the
conductor level that is being joined.
3.6.13. Termination hardware assemblies:
3.6.13.1. AL/CU lugs connected to aluminum plated or copper buss, shall be secured
using a steel bolt, flat washer (two per bolt), Belleville washer and nut.
3.6.13.2. Copper lugs connected to copper bus, shall be secured using silicon bronze
alloy bolt, flat washer (two per bolt), Belleville washer and nut.
3.6.13.3. The crown of Belleville washers shall be under the nut.
JKA #15-100 260519 - 8
3.6.13.4. Bolt assemblies shall be torque to Manufacturer recommendation. Where
manufacture recommendation are not obtainable, the following values shall be
used:
3.6.13.4.1. 1/4" - 20 bolt at 80-inch pounds torque.
3.6.13.4.2. 5/16" - 18 bolt at 180-inch pounds torque.
3.6.13.4.3. 3/8" - 16 bolt at 20-foot pounds torque.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
3.7.1. Refer to Section 260553: Electrical Identification for additional requirements.
3.7.2. Securely tag all branch circuits. Mark conductors with specified vinyl wrap-around markers.
Where more than two conductors run through a single outlet, mark each conductor with the
corresponding circuit number.
3.7.3. Color code conductors size #8 and larger using specified phase color markers and
identification tags.
3.7.4. Provide all terminal strips with each individual terminal identified using specified vinyl
markers.
3.7.5. In manholes, pullboxes and handholes, provide tags of the embossed brass type and also
show the cable type and voltage rating. Attach the tags to the cables with slip-free plastic
cable lacing units.
3.8.1. Refer to Specification Section 260800: Electrical Commissioning.
3.8.2. Independent testing: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of an independent
Testing Agency to perform all quality control electrical testing required herein. Independent
Testing Agency shall meet the requirements as outlined in Section 260010: Basic Electrical
Requirements.
3.8.3. Prefunctional testing:
3.8.3.1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
3.8.3.1.1. Compare cable data with Contract Documents.
3.8.3.1.2. Inspect exposed sections of wires and cables for physical damage
and proper connections.
3.8.3.1.3. Verify tightness of accessible bolted connections with calibrated
torque wrench in accordance with Manufacturers published
data.
3.8.3.1.4. Inspect compression applied connectors for correct cable match
and indention.
3.8.3.1.5. Verify visible cable bend meet or exceed ICEA and
Manufacturers minimum allowable bending radius.
3.8.3.1.6. If cables are terminated through window type current
transformers, make an inspection to verify neutral and ground
conductors are correctly placed for operation of protective
devices.
3.8.3.1.7. Ensure wire and cable identification has been installed as
specified herein.
3.8.3.2. Electrical testing:

JKA #15-100 260519 - 9
3.8.3.2.1. Contractor shall perform feeder and branch circuit insulation test
after installation and prior to connection to utilization devices
such as fixtures, motors or appliances. Testing shall be as
follows:
3.8.3.2.1.1. 100% of all feeders 100 amp rated and above.
3.8.3.2.1.2. 50% of all feeders smaller than 100 amps.
3.8.3.2.1.3. 10% of all branch circuits at each individual
panelboard.
3.8.3.2.2. Perform insulation-resistance test using megohm meter with
applied potential of 1000V DC for a continuous duration of 60
seconds. Test conductors phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
Conductors shall test free from short-circuit and ground faults.
3.8.3.2.3. Perform continuity test of all feeder and branch circuits to ensure
correct cable connections. Test all neutrals for improper
grounds.
3.8.3.2.4. Contractor shall furnish instruments, materials and labor for these
tests.
3.8.3.3. Test values: Investigate resistance values less than 50 megohms.
3.8.3.4. Furnish test results in typewritten report form for review and inclusion in the
operation and maintenance manuals.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 260519 - 10
SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING

1. PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Power system grounding.
1.1.1.2. Site lighting grounding.
1.1.1.3. Telecommunication system grounding.
1.1.1.4. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding.
1.1.2.1. Division 05: Building Steel.
1.1.2.2. Division 22: Cold Water Piping.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1. Comply with the latest edition of the following applicable Specifications and standards
except as otherwise indicated or specified:
UL 467; Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
1.2.1.2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
IEEE No. 142; Recommended Practice for Grounding of industrial and Commercial
Power Systems.
IEEE No. 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and
Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System.
1.3.1. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment as described
herein and indicated on Drawings.
1.3.2. Ground each separately derived system neutral as described herein and indicated on
Drawings.
1.3.3. Provide telecommunications system grounding conductor as described herein and
indicate on Drawings.
1.3.4. Provide a safety ground grid and/or mat beneath all electrical switchgear operating at
1000 volts and above, and at emergency generator. Grid/mat shall be poured in the
concrete floor slab and constructed as specified herein.
1.3.5. Except as otherwise indicated, the complete electrical installation including the neutral
conductor, metallic conduits and raceways, cable trays, boxes, cabinets and equipment
shall be completely and effectively grounded in accordance with all code requirements,
whether or not such connections are specifically indicated or specified.
1.3.6. Resistance:
1.3.6.1. Resistance from the main switchboard ground bus through the ground
electrode to earth shall not exceed 5 OHMS unless otherwise noted.
1.3.6.2. Resistance from the farthest panelboard, switchboard, etc. ground bus
through the ground electrode to earth shall not exceed 20 OHMS
County of Tehama GROUNDING AND BONDING
JKA #15-100 260526 - 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1.1. Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein, listing
all physical and electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance
with all listed standards.
1.4.1.2. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and
the proposed application.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1. Products furnished by the following Manufacturers shall be acceptable if in compliance
with all features specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.
2.1.1.1. Ground Rods:
2.1.1.1.1. Weaver.
2.1.1.1.2. Erico "Cadweld" Products, Inc.
2.1.1.2. Ground Wells:
2.1.1.2.1. Christy Concrete Products, Inc.
2.1.1.2.2. Forni Corp.
2.1.1.3. Ground Bushings, Connectors, Jumpers and Bus:
2.1.1.3.1. O-Z/Gedney.
2.2 GROUND CONDUCTORS
2.2.1. Refer to Specification Section 260519: Building Wire and Cable for conductor
specifications.
2.2.2. General purpose insulated:
2.2.2.1. UL approved and code sized copper conductor, with dual rated
THHN/THWN insulation, color identified green.
2.2.2.2. Where continuous color-coded conductors are not commercially available,
provide a minimum 4" long color band with green, non-aging, plastic tape in
accordance with NEC/CEC.
2.2.3. Bare conductors in direct contact with earth or encased in concrete: #2/0 AWG copper
minimum, U.O.N.
2.2.4. Bonding pigtails: Insulated copper conductor, identified green, sized per code and
provide with termination screw or lug. Provide solid conductors for #10 AWG or smaller
and stranded conductors for #8 AWG or larger.
2.3 DRIVEN (GROUND) RODS
2.3.1. Copper clad steel, minimum 3/4-inch diameter by 8 feet long, unless otherwise noted.

JKA #15-100 260526 - 2
2.4 GROUND WELL BOXES FOR GROUND RODS
2.4.1. Precast concrete box nominal 9" throat diameter x 14" deep with light duty concrete
cover for non-traffic areas or steel plate for traffic areas. Cover shall be embossed or
engraved with "GROUND ROD".
2.5 INSULATED GROUNDING BUSHINGS
2.5.1. Plated malleable iron or steel body with 150 degree Centigrade molded plastic insulating
throat and lay-in grounding lug.
2.6 CONNECTIONS TO PIPE
2.6.1. For cable to pipe: UL and NEC/CEC approved bolted connection.
2.7 CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURAL STEEL, GROUND RODS OR SPLICES
2.7.1. Where required by the Drawings, grounding conductors shall be spliced together,
connected to ground rods or connected to structural steel using exothermic welds or
high pressure compression type connectors.
2.7.1.1. Exothermic welds shall be used for cable-to-cable and cable-to-ground rod
and for cable to structural steel surfaces. Exothermic weld kits shall be as
manufactured by Cadweld or equal. Each particular type of weld shall use a
kit unique to that type of weld.
2.7.1.2. High-pressure compression type connectors shall be used for cable-to-cable
and cable-to-ground rod connections.
2.8 EXTRA FLEXIBLE, FLAT BONDING JUMPERS
2.8.1. Where required by Code, indicated on the Drawing, and specified herein.
2.9 BUILDING GROUND BUS REQUIREMENTS
2.9.1. Main building power system ground bus:
2.9.1.1. Provide one 24" wide x 4" high x 1/4" thick copper bus bar as a minimum.
Mount on wall in main electrical room utilizing insulating stand-offs at 18"
above finished floor.
2.9.1.2. Furnish complete with cast copper alloy body lugs for connecting grounding
system conductors. Attach lugs to bus with appropriate size cadmium
bronze bolt, flat washer and Belleville washer. Torque all lug connections.
2.9.1.3. All holes shall be drilled and tapped for single-hole lugs. Provide 6 spare
lugs and lug spaces.
2.9.2. Building power system reference ground bus:
2.9.2.1. The reference ground bus is furnished as part of the main electrical
switchboard for the building, along with neutral disconnect and bus, and is in
addition to the main building power system ground bus outlined above. The
building grounding electrode shall make a direct connection to the building
referenced ground bus in the main switchboard.
2.9.2.2. Provide a #2/0 AWG copper ground conductor connection between the
building reference ground bus in switchboard and the main building ground
bus wall mounted in main electrical room.
2.9.3. Telecommunication system ground bus requirements:
2.9.3.1. Main telecommunication system ground bus: Provide one 18" wide x 4"
high x 1/4" thick copper bus bar as a minimum. Mount on wall in MDF room
utilizing insulating stand-offs at 18" above finished floor.
2.9.3.2. Furnish complete with cast copper alloy body lugs for connecting grounding
system conductors. Attach lugs to bus with appropriate size cadmium
bronze bolt, flat washer and Belleville washer. Torque all lug connections.

JKA #15-100 260526 - 3
2.9.3.3. All holes shall be drilled and tapped for single-hole lugs. Provide 3 spare
lugs and lug spaces.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of grounding
system installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification
tolerances. Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Grounding electrodes:
3.2.1.1. Metal underground water pipe: Cold water metal piping system: Where the
underground cold water service line is metal, indirect contact with the earth
for 10 feet or more, the Contractor shall install a grounding electrode
conductor from the main incoming cold water line ahead of the meter and
extend to the main building reference ground bus in the main electrical
room. The electrode shall be sized per NEC/CEC Article 250. Electrode
connection should be accessible.
3.2.1.2. Concrete encased grounding electrode (UFER ground): Provide a #2/0
AWG minimum bare copper conductor encased along the bottom of
concrete foundation or footings which are in direct contact with the earth and
where there is no impervious water-proofing membrane between the footing
and the soil. The electrode shall extend through a horizontal length of 30
feet minimum and shall be encased in not less than 2 or more than 5 inches
of concrete separating it from surrounding soils. The electrode shall emerge
from the concrete slab through a protective non-metallic sleeve and shall be
extended to the main building reference ground bus.
3.2.1.3. Supplementary grounding electrode (ground ring, grid and driven rods):
Provide, as indicated on the Drawings, driven ground rod(s) installed in
listed ground well box(s) and filled with gravel after connection is made.
Interconnect ground rod with structural steel and adjacent rods with
minimum #4 AWG bare copper conductor. Ground rod shall not be less
than 10 foot from any other electrode of another electrical system or from
adjacent ground rod(s).
3.2.2. Grounding electrode conductor: Provide grounding electrode conductor as indicated on
the Drawings or sized per NEC/CEC Article 250, whichever is greater.
3.2.3. Power system grounding:
3.2.3.1. Provide, unless otherwise indicated, a main building power system ground
bus mounted on the wall in the main electrical room. Connect the following
items using NEC/CEC sized copper grounding conductors to lugs on the
main building ground bus:
3.2.3.1.1. Grounding conductor from building reference ground bus in main service
switchboard.
3.2.3.1.2. Bonding conductor to metallic cold water piping system.
3.2.3.1.3. Bonding conductor to building structural steel.
3.2.3.1.4. Separately derived system grounding conductors in same room.
3.2.3.2. At the building power system reference ground bus in the main service
switchboard, connect the grounding electrode conductor from concrete
encased UFER ground or other grounding electrode systems as indicated
on the Drawing or herein.
3.2.4. Separately derived electrical system grounding:

JKA #15-100 260526 - 4
3.2.4.1. Ground each separately derived system per requirements in NEC/CEC
Article 250 as a minimum, unless greater requirements are required
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
3.2.4.2. Transformers: Provide a dual rated four or six-barrel grounding lug with a
5/8"-11 threaded hole. Drill enclosure with 11/16" bit and attach lug to
enclosure utilizing a torque bolt and a dragon tooth transition washer or
equal. Connect the following when present:
3.2.4.2.1. Grounding electrode conductor from supplemental ground rods.
3.2.4.2.2. Building steel.
3.2.4.2.3. Cold water pipe.
3.2.4.2.4. Primary feeder ground.
3.2.4.2.5. Secondary feeder ground.
3.2.4.2.6. Main bond jumper.
3.2.4.2.7. Isolated ground conductor.
3.2.5. Equipment bonding/grounding:
3.2.5.1. Provide a NEC/CEC sized insulated copper ground conductor in all 120VAC
through 600 VAC feeder and branch circuit distribution conduits and cables.
3.2.5.2. Provide a separate grounding bus at panelboards, switchboards, motor
control centers. Connect all metallic enclosed equipment so that with
maximum fault current flowing, shall be maintained at not more than 35 volts
above ground.
3.2.5.3. Conduit terminating in concentric, eccentric or oversized knockouts at
panelboards, cabinets, gutters, etc. shall have grounding bushings and
bonding jumpers installed interconnecting all such conduits.
3.2.5.4. Provide bonding jumpers across expansion and deflection couplings in
conduit runs, pipe connections to water meters, dielectric couplings in
metallic cold water piping system.
3.2.5.5. Provide internal ground wire in flexible conduit connected at each end via
grounding bushing.
3.2.5.6. Provide external ground wire wrapped around flexible conduit and terminate
to connectors designed for the purpose.
3.2.6. Site lighting grounding: Bond all metallic light poles and bollards. Provide ground rods
where indicated on the Drawings.
3.2.7. Telecommunication system grounding:
3.2.7.1. In addition to grounding noted on the Drawings for the power systems,
provide a telecommunication system ground bus at the MDF room. The
following shall be bonded to the telecommunications system ground bus
bar:
3.2.7.1.1. All equipment cabinets and racks.
3.2.7.1.2. Cable tray.
3.2.7.1.3. Ground bushings on all telecommunication cabling conduits.
3.2.7.1.4. Relay racks and protector blocks.
3.3.1. Independent Testing: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of an
independent Testing Agency to perform all quality control electrical testing required
herein.
JKA #15-100 260526 - 5
3.3.2.1. Provide Testing Agency with Contract Documents for their review prior to
the commencement of ground testing.
3.3.2.2.1. The Testing Agency shall inspect the grounding electrode and connections
prior to concrete encasement, burial or concealment.
3.3.2.2.2. Check tightness and welds of all ground conductor terminations.
3.3.2.2.3. Verify installation complies with the intent of the Contract Documents
3.3.2.3. Obtain and record ground resistance measurements both from electrical
equipment ground bus to the ground electrode and from the ground
electrode to earth. Furnish and install additional bonding and add grounding
electrodes as required complying with resistance limits specified under this
Section of the Specification.
3.3.2.4. A typewritten record of measured resistance values shall be submitted for
review and included with the operation and maintenance manual furnished
to the Owner at the time of Project closeout and before certificate of final
payment is issued.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 260526 - 6
SECTION 260529
ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Conduit supports.
1.1.1.2. Equipment supports.
1.1.1.3. Fastening hardware.
1.1.2.1. Division 03: Cast-in-place concrete. Concrete equipment pads.
1.1.2.2. Division 05: Miscellaneous metals. Hangers for electrical equipment.
1.1.2.3. Division 09: Ceiling suspension systems. Slack fixture support wires.
1.2 REFERENCES
UL 2239; Hardware for the Supports of Conduit, Tubing and Cable.
1.3.1. Provide devices specified in this Section and related Sections for support of electrical
equipment furnished and installed under Division 26.
1.3.2. Provide support systems that are adequate for the weight of equipment, conduit and
wiring to be supported.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1.1. Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein.
1.4.1.2. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and
the proposed application.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Concrete fasteners:
County of Tehama ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
JKA #15-100 260529 - 1
2.1.1.1.1. Hilti Kwik-Bolt TZ
2.1.1.1.2. Phillips "Red-Head".
2.1.1.1.3. Remington.
2.1.1.1.4. Ramset.
2.1.1.2. Concrete inserts and construction channel:
2.1.1.2.1. Unistrut Corp.
2.1.1.2.2. GS Metals "Globe Strut."
2.1.1.2.3. Thomas & Betts "Kindorf" Corp.
2.1.1.3. Conduit straps:
2.1.1.3.1. O-Z/Gedney.
2.1.1.3.2. Erico "Caddy" Fastening Products.
2.1.1.3.3. Thomas & Betts "Kindorf" Corp.
2.2 CONCRETE FASTENERS
2.2.1. Provide expansion-shield type concrete anchors.
2.2.2. Provide powder driven concrete fasteners with washers. Obtain approval by Architect
and Structural Engineer prior to use.
2.3 CONCRETE INSERTS
2.3.1. Provide pressed galvanized steel, concrete spot insert, with oval slot capable of
accepting square or rectangular support nuts of inch to inch diameter thread for rod
support.
2.4 THREADED ROD
2.4.1. Provide steel threaded rod, sized for the load unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or
in the Specifications.
2.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANNEL
2.5.1. Provide 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch, 12 gauge galvanized steel channel with 17/32-inch
diameter bolt holes and 1-1/2 inch on center in the base of the channel.
2.6 CONDUIT STRAPS
2.6.1. One hole strap, steel or malleable iron, with malleable iron clamp-back spacer for
surface mounted wall and ceiling applications.
2.6.1.1. Use malleable strap with spacers for exterior and wet locations.
2.6.1.2. Use steel strap without spacers for interior locations.
2.6.2. Steel channel conduit strap for support from construction channel.
2.6.3. Steel conduit hanger for pendant support with threaded rod
2.6.4. Steel wire conduit support strap for support from independent #12 gauge hanger wires.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of supporting
device installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances.
Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with Division 03, Cast-in-place
concrete.
JKA #15-100 260529 - 2
3.2.2. Layout support devices to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance and to
support the equipment loads.
3.2.3. Where indicated on the Contract Documents, install freestanding electrical equipment on
concrete pads.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Furnish and install supporting devices as noted throughout Division 26.
3.3.2. Electrical device and conduit supports shall be independent of all other system supports
that are not structural elements of the building, unless otherwise noted.
3.3.3. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, outlet and junction boxes to building structure using
precast inserts, expansion anchors, preset inserts or beam clamps.
3.3.4. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster or gypsum board
partitions and walls.
3.3.5. Use expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls.
3.3.6. Use self-drilling anchors, expansion anchor or preset inserts on concrete surfaces.
3.3.7. Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction.
3.3.8. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, conduit or acoustical
ceiling suspension wires.
3.3.9. Do not drill structural steel members unless first approved in writing by the Architect or
Structural Engineer.
3.3.10. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to
present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all
nuts.
3.3.11. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
Provide additional support backing in stud walls prior to sheet rocking as required to
adequately support cabinets and panels.
3.3.12. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush mounted cabinets and
panelboards in stud walls.
3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS
3.4.1. Cut, fit and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment and
elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
3.4.2. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."
3.5 WOOD SUPPORTS
3.5.1. Cut, fit and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking and anchorage accurately in location,
alignment and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
3.6 ANCHORAGE
3.6.1. All floor mounted, free standing electrical equipment such as switchboards, distribution
boards, etc. shall be securely fastened to the floor structure.
3.6.2. Anchorage of electrical equipment shall comply with the seismic requirements as
outlined in Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 260529 - 3
SECTION 260531
CONDUIT
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Rigid steel conduit and fittings.
1.1.1.2. PVC insulated rigid steel conduit and fittings.
1.1.1.1. Intermediate metal conduit and fittings.
1.1.1.2. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings.
1.1.1.3. Rigid non-metallic conduit and fittings.
1.1.1.4. Flexible metallic conduit and fittings.
1.1.1.5. Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit and fittings.
1.1.1.6. Miscellaneous conduit fittings and products.
1.1.2.1. Division 01: Cutting and patching.
1.1.2.2. Division 31: Earthwork. Excavation and backfill for conduit and utilities on Project
site.
1.1.2.3. Division 03: Cast-in-place concrete. Protective envelope for underground conduit
installations.
1.1.2.4. Division 07: Sheet metal flashing and trim.
1.1.2.5. Division 09: Painting. Exposed conduit and other devices.
1.2 REFERENCES
FS WW-C-563; Electrical Metallic Tubing.
FS WW-C-566; Specification for Flexible Metal Conduit.
FS WW-C-581; Specification for Galvanized Rigid Conduit.
FS W-C-1094A; Conduit and Conduit Fittings Plastic, Rigid.
ANSI C80.1; Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated.
ANSI C80.3; Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
UL 1; Flexible Metal Conduit.
UL 6; Rigid Metal Conduit.
UL 360; Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
UL 514B; Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings.

County of Tehama CONDUIT
JKA #15-100 260531 - 1
UL 635; Insulating Bushings.
UL 651; Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
UL 651A; Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE
Conduit.
UL 797; Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel.
UL 1242; Intermediate Metal Conduit - Steel.
NEMA RN1; PVC Externally coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit.
NEMA TC 2; Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit.
NEMA TC 3; PVC Fittings for use with Rigid PVC Conduit.
NEMA TC 6; PVC Plastic Utilities Duct (EB and DB Type)
NEMA TC 9; Fittings for PVC Plastic Utilities Duct (EB and
DB Type)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Requirements the following items:
listed standards.
1.3.1.3. Submit Manufacturer's installation instruction. Provide written instructions for
raceway products requiring glues, special tools or specific installation techniques.
otherwise submitted and approved.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Metal conduit:
2.1.1.1.1. Allied Tube and Conduit Co.
2.1.1.1.2. Triangle PWC, Inc.
2.1.1.1.3. Western Tube and Conduit Corp.
2.1.1.1.4. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
2.1.1.1.5. Occidental Coating Co. (OCAL).
2.1.1.1.6. Alflex Corp.
2.1.1.1.7. American Flexible Metal Conduit Co.
2.1.1.1.8. Anaconda.
2.1.1.2. Nonmetallic conduit:

JKA #15-100 260531 - 2
2.1.1.2.1. Carlon.
2.1.1.2.2. PW Pipe.
2.1.1.3. Fittings:
2.1.1.3.1. Appleton Electric Co.
2.1.1.3.2. OZ/Gedney.
2.1.1.3.5. Occidental Coating Co. (OCAL).
2.1.1.3.6. Carlon.
2.2 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (GRS)
2.2.1. Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot-dip galvanized steel, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL
6.
2.2.2. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings and elbows: Only materials of steel or
malleable iron are acceptable. Locknuts shall be bonding type with sharp edges for digging
into the metal wall of an enclosure.
2.2.3. Three piece couplings: Electroplated, cast malleable iron.
2.2.4. Insulating bushings: Threaded polypropylene or thermosetting phenolic rated 150 degree C
minimum.
2.2.5. Insulated grounding bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with insulated throat and
steel "lay-in" ground lug with compression screw.
2.2.6. Insulated metallic bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with plastic insulated throat
rated 150 degrees C.
2.2.7. All fittings and connectors shall be threaded.
2.3 PVC INSULATED GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (PVC GRS)
2.3.1. Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot-dip galvanized steel, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and
NEMA RN-1 with nominal 20 or 40 mil thermoplastic vinyl coating, heat fused and bonded to
the exterior of the conduit.
2.3.2. Fittings: Conduit couplings and connectors shall be as specified for galvanized rigid steel
conduit and shall be factory PVC coated with an insulating jacket equivalent to that of the
coated material.
2.4 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)
2.4.1. Conduit: Hot dip galvanized steel meeting the requirements of NEC Article 345 and
conforming to ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
2.4.2. Fittings: Conduit couplings, connector and bushing shall be as specified for galvanized rigid
steel conduit. Integral retractable type IMC couplings are also acceptable.
2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
2.5.1. Conduit: Shall be formed of cold rolled strip steel, electrical resistance welded continuously
along the longitudinal seam and hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Conduit shall conform
to ANSI C80.3 Specifications and shall meet UL requirements.
2.5.2. Set screw type couplings: Electroplated, steel or cast malleable iron, UL listed concrete
tight. Use set screw type couplings with four setscrews each of conduit sizes over 2 inches.
Setscrews shall be of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall
of conduit for positive grounding.

JKA #15-100 260531 - 3
2.5.3. Set screw type connectors: Electroplated steel or cast malleable iron UL listed concrete tight
with male hub and insulated plastic throat, 150 degree C temperature rated. Setscrew shall
be same as for couplings.
2.5.4. Raintight couplings: Electroplate steel or cast malleable iron; UL listed raintight and
concrete tight, using gland and ring compression type construction.
2.5.5. Raintight connectors: Electroplated steel or cast malleable iron, UL listed raintight and
concrete tight, with insulated throat, using gland and ring compression type construction.
2.6 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (PVC)
2.6.1. Conduit:
2.6.1.1. Rigid polyvinyl chloride, Schedule 40 or 80 conforming to NEMA TC1 and UL 651,
latest edition. UL listed for exposed and direct-burial applications and for 90
degrees C conductor insulation. Conduit shall include an integral bell fitting at one
end.
2.6.1.2. Rigid polyvinyl chloride, Type EB or DB conforming to NEMA TC 6 and UL 651,
latest edition. UL listed for concrete encased burial and direct burial applications
and for 90 degrees C conductor insulation. Conduit shall include an integral bell
fitting at one end.
2.6.2. Fittings: Couplings, adaptors, transition fittings, etc., shall be molded PVC, slip on, solvent
weld type conforming to NEMA TC3 for Schedule 40 or 80 and NEMA TC 9 for type EB or
DB.
2.7 FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT (FMC)
2.7.1. Conduit: Shall be fabricated in continuous lengths from galvanized steel strip, spirally wound
and formed to provide an interlocking design and conforming to UL 1.
2.7.2. Fittings: Connectors shall be of the single screw clamp variety with steel or cast malleable
iron bodies and threaded male hubs with insulated throats. Exception: Pressure cast screw-
in connectors shall be acceptable for fixture connection in suspended ceilings and cut-in
outlet boxes within existing furred walls.
2.8 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT (LFMC)
2.8.1. Conduit: Shall be fabricated in continuous lengths from galvanized steel strips, interlocking
spirally wound, covered with extruded liquidtight jacket of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and
conforming to UL 360. Provide conduit with a continuous copper-bonding conductor wound
spirally between the convolutions.
2.8.2. Fittings: Connector body and gland nut shall be of cadmium plated steel or cast malleable
iron, with tapered, male, threaded hub; insulated throat and neoprene "O" ring gasket
recessed into the face of the stop nut. The clamping gland shall be of molded nylon with an
integral brass push-in ferrule.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUIT FITTINGS AND PRODUCTS
2.9.1. Watertight conduit entrance seals: Steel or cast malleable iron bodies and pressure clamps
with PVC sleeve, neoprene sealing grommets and PVC coated steel pressure rings. Fittings
shall be supplied with neoprene sealing rings between the body and PVC sleeve.
2.9.2. Watertight cable sealing bushings: One piece, compression molded sealing ring with PVC
coated steel pressure disks, stainless steel sealing screws and zinc plated cast malleable
iron locking collar.
2.9.3. Expansion fittings: Multi-piece unit comprised of a hot dip galvanized malleable iron or steel
body and outside pressure bussing designed to allow a maximum of 4" conduit movement
(2" in either direction). Furnish with external braid tinned copper bonding jumper. Unit shall
be UL listed for wet or dry locations.
2.9.4. Expansion/deflection couplings: Multi-piece unit comprised of a neoprene sleeve with
internal flexible tinned copper braid attached to bronze end couplings with stainless steel
bands. Coupling shall accommodate .75-inch deflection, expansion or contraction in any
direction and allow 30-degree angular deflections. Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight,
JKA #15-100 260531 - 4
moisture and heat resistant molded rubber jacket and stainless steel jacket clamps. Unit
shall comply with UL467 and UL514. Manufacturer shall be OZ/Gedney Type DX, Steel City
Type EDF or equal.
2.9.5. Fire rated penetration seals:
2.9.5.1. UL building materials directory classified.
2.9.5.2. Conduit penetrations in fire rated separation shall be sealed with a UL classified
fill, void or cavity material.
2.9.5.3. The fire rated sealant material shall be the product best suited for each type of
penetration and may be a caulk, putty, composite sheet or wrap/strip.
2.9.6. Standard products not herein specified:
2.9.6.1. Provide listing of standard electrical conduit hardware and fittings not herein
specified for approval prior to use or installation, i.e. locknuts, bushings, etc.
2.9.6.2. Listing shall include Manufacturers name, part numbers and a written description
of the item indicating type of material and construction.
2.9.6.3. Miscellaneous components shall be equal in quality, material and construction to
similar items herein specified.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of conduit system
3.2 APPLICATION
3.2.1. Galvanized rigid steel conduit (GRS) shall be used in the following applications:
3.2.1.1. For feeders and branch circuits located indoors, concealed or exposed above
suspended ceilings, in damp/wet locations, in crawl spaces, in attics, chases,
furred spaces, equipment rooms, loading docks or in hazardous locations in
accordance with NEC and local Codes.
3.2.1.2. For feeders and branch circuits concealed in concrete floors and walls when not in
contact with earth.
3.2.2. PVC insulated galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be used in the following applications:
3.2.2.1. Use 40-mil coating for feeders and branch circuits in damp or wet locations.
3.2.2.2. Use 20 or 40 mil for feeders and branch circuits concealed in concrete walls or
slabs in contact with earth.
3.2.2.3. Use 20 or 40-mil for runs beneath floor slabs on grade.
3.2.2.4. Use 40-mil for all below grade penetrations through floor slabs on grade or
exterior walls.
3.2.3. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC): Shall be used for the same application as galvanized rigid
steel conduit as specified herein.
3.2.4. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall be used exposed or concealed for interior electrical
feeders 4" and smaller, interior power and lighting branch circuits and low tension
distribution system where run above suspended ceilings, in concrete slabs and walls not in
contact with earth; in stud walls, furred spaces and crawl spaces. EMT shall not be installed
exposed below 6 feet above the finish floor except within electrical, communication or signal
rooms or closets.
3.2.5. Rigid non-metallic conduit (PVC): Shall be used in the following applications:

JKA #15-100 260531 - 5
3.2.5.1. Schedule 40 or 80 for feeders and branch circuits run beneath ground floor slab
except that bends and penetrations through the floor must be PVC coated
galvanized rigid steel.
3.2.5.2. Schedule 40 or 80 for exterior branch circuits directly buried in earth, 18"
minimum below grade. PVC may be used below exterior slabs not subject to
vehicular traffic.
3.2.5.3. PVC may be used below exterior slab subjects to vehicular traffic when encased
in a minimum of 2 inches of concrete.
3.2.5.4. Only schedule 80 PVC may be used for above ground conduit extensions on
utility poles.
3.2.5.5. PVC elbows shall be radius sweep type schedule 40 for bends 45or less and
large radius sweep type schedule 80 for bends 46or greater.
3.2.5.6. In general, PVC may not be run exposed in concrete walls or in floor slabs unless
expressly indicated on the Drawings.
3.2.5.7. EB or DB type may be installed in lieu of the above only if encased in a minimum
of 2 inches of concrete.
3.2.5.8. Serving utility electrical and telephone and cable television service entrance
conduits may be EB or DB type conduit only if acceptable by serving utility.
Coordinate in field prior to installation.
3.2.6. Flexible metallic conduit (FMC): Shall be used only in dry locations for connections from an
adjacent outlet box or conduit to all motors, transformers, vibrating equipment or machinery,
controllers, solenoid valves, float and flow switches or similar devices and to lighting fixtures
installed in suspended ceilings, minimum sizes shall be 3/8" for lighting fixtures and control
wiring and 1/2" for motor and transformer connections. U.O.N.
3.2.7. Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit (LFMC): Shall be used in wet or damp locations for
connections from adjacent outlet box or conduit to all motors, transformers, vibrating
equipment or machinery, controllers, solenoid valves, float and flow switches or similar
devices. These areas are typically food preparation and dishwashing areas, sump wells,
loading docks, pump rooms, exterior areas, etc. Minimum sizes shall be 1/2".
3.3 PREPARATION
3.3.1. Locations of conduit runs shall be planned in advance of the installation and coordinated
with ductwork, plumbing, ceiling and wall construction in the same areas and shall not
unnecessarily cross other conduits or pipe, nor prevent removal of ceiling tiles or panels, nor
block access to mechanical or electrical equipment.
3.3.2. Where practical, install conduits in groups in parallel vertical or horizontal runs and at
elevations that avoid unnecessary offsets.
3.3.3. All conduits shall be run parallel or at right angles to the centerlines of columns and beams,
whether routed exposed, concealed above suspended ceiling or in concrete slabs.
3.3.4. Conduits shall not be placed closer than 12 inches to a flue, parallel hot water, steam line or
other heat producing source or three inches from such lines when crossing perpendicular to
the runs.
3.3.5. Exposed conduit installation shall not encroach into the ceiling height headroom of walkways
or doorways. Where possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and below steam
piping.
3.3.6. The largest trade size conduits in concrete floor and wall slabs shall not exceed 1/3 the floor
or wall thickness and conduits shall be spaced a minimum of three conduit diameters apart
unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. All conduits shall be installed in the center of
concrete slabs or wall and shall not be placed between reinforcing steel and the bottom of
floor slabs.

JKA #15-100 260531 - 6
3.3.7. In long runs of conduit, provide sufficient pull boxes inside buildings to facilitate pulling wires
and cables, with spacing not to exceed 150 feet. Support pull boxes from structure
independent of conduit supports. These pull boxes are not indicated on the Drawings.
3.3.8. Provide all reasonably inferred standard conduits fitting and products required to complete
conduit installation to meet the intended application whether noted, indicated or specified in
the Contract Documents or not.
3.3.9. Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum six feet of flexible metal
conduit.
3.4 INSTALLATION
3.4.1. Install conduit in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on
Drawings and as specified herein.
3.4.2. Minimum Conduit Size: Unless otherwise noted herein or on Drawings, minimum conduit
size shall be 1/2" for interior applications and 3/4" for exterior and underground applications.
3.4.3. All conduit sizes indicated on the Drawings are sized for copper conductors with
THHN/THWN insulation. If conductor type or size is changed the Contractor shall be
responsible for resizing conduits upward to meet Code.
3.4.4. In general, all conduit work shall be concealed where possible. Exceptions shall be
electrical, communication and mechanical rooms, exposed ceiling areas, and parking
garages.
3.4.5. Conduit connections to motors and surface cabinets shall be concealed, with the exception
of electrical, communication and mechanical rooms, or unless exposed Work is clearly called
for on the Drawings.
3.4.6. Install conduits in complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.
3.4.7. Install conduit free from dented, bruises or deformations. Remove and replace any
damaged conduits with new undamaged material.
3.4.8. Conduits shall be well protected and tightly covered during construction using metallic
bushings and bushing "pennies" to seal open ends.
3.4.9. In making joints in rigid steel conduit, ream conduit smooth after cutting and threading. Coat
all field-threaded joints with UL approved conductive type compound to ensure low
resistance ground continuity through conduit and to prevent seizing and corrosion.
3.4.10. Clean any conduit in which moisture or any foreign matter has collected before pulling in
conductors. Paint all field-threaded joints to prevent corrosion.
3.4.11. In all empty conduits or ducts, install a True Tape conduit measuring tape line to provide
overall conduit length for determining length of cables/conductors for future use.
3.4.12. Conduit systems shall be mechanically and electrically continuous throughout. Install code
size, insulated, copper, green-grounding conductors in all conduit runs for branch circuits
and feeders. This conductor is not indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Section 260526:
Grounding and Bonding.
3.4.13. Metallic conduit shall not be in contact with other dissimilar metal pipes (i.e. plumbing).
3.4.14. Make bends with standard conduit bending hand tool or machines. The use of any item not
specifically designed for the bending of electrical conduit is strictly prohibited.
3.4.15. A run of conduit between terminations at wire pulling points shall not contain more than the
equivalent of four quarter bends (360 degrees, total).
3.4.16. Emergency power raceway system: Install entirely independent of other raceway systems,
except where specifically allowed by NEC Article 517.
3.5 PENETRATIONS
3.5.1. Locate penetrations and holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections
such as footings, beams, wall, etc. Penetrations are acceptable only when the following
occurs:
JKA #15-100 260531 - 7
3.5.1.1. Where indicated on the Structural Drawings.
3.5.1.2. As approved by the Structural Engineer prior to construction and after submittal of
Drawing showing location, size and position of each penetration.
3.5.2. Cutting or holes:
3.5.2.1. Cut holes through concrete, masonry block or brick floors and floors of structure
with a diamond core drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric,
hand or manual hammer type drills are not allowed, except where permitted by
the Structural Engineer as required by limited working space. Obtain the approval
of the Structural Engineer prior to drilling through structural sections.
3.5.2.2. Provide sleeves or can outs for cast-in-place concrete floors and walls.
Following conduit installation, seal all penetrations using non-iron bearing,
chloride free, non-shrinking, dry-pack grouting compounds; or fire rated
penetration-sealing materials.
3.5.2.3. Cut holes for conduit penetrations through non-concrete and non-masonry walls,
partitions or floors with a hole saw. The hole shall be only as large as required to
accommodate the size of the conduit.
3.5.2.4. Provide single piece escutcheon plates around all exposed conduit penetrations in
public places.
3.5.3. Sealing:
3.5.3.1. Non-rated penetrations: Pack opening around conduits with non-flammable
insulating material and seal with gypsum wallboard taping compound.
3.5.3.2. Fire stop: Where conduits, wireways and other electrical raceways pass through
fire rated partitions, walls, smoke partitions or floor; install a UL classified fire stop
material to provide an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and
gases. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with
the fire stop material.
3.5.4. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal
clearances around the conduit and make watertight as specified in Division 07: Sealants
and Caulking.
3.5.4.1. Install specified watertight conduit entrance seals at all below grade wall and floor
penetrations. Conduits penetrating exterior building walls and building floor slab
shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel.
3.5.4.2. For roof penetrations furnish and install roof flashing, counter flashing and pitch-
pockets as specified under Roofing and Sheet Metal Sections of the
Specifications.
3.5.4.3. Provide membrane clamps and cable sealing fittings for any conduit that
horizontally penetrates the waterproof membrane.
3.5.4.4. Conduits that horizontally penetrate a waterproof membrane shall fall away from
and below the penetration on the exterior side a minimum of two times the conduit
diameters.
3.6 CONCEALED IN CONCRETE
3.6.1. Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that there will be a minimum of 3/4-
inch of concrete around the conduits.
3.6.2. Installation of conduit in structural concrete that is less than three inches thick is prohibited.
Topping slabs, maintenance pads and curbs are exempted.
3.6.3. Tie conduits to reinforcing rods or otherwise secure them to prevent sagging or shifting
during concrete placement. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel with or at right
angles to the main reinforcement; where at right angles to the reinforcement, the conduit
shall be close to one of the supports of the slab.

JKA #15-100 260531 - 8
3.6.4. Where nonmetallic conduit or tubing is used, raceways must be converted to PVC coated
rigid steel conduit before rising above floor.
3.6.5. Make couplings and connections watertight.
3.6.6. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved
portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab.
3.7 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION
3.7.1. Perform trenching, backfilling and compaction operations as specified in Division 31:
Trenching.
3.7.2. Install service utility company underground conduits in strict conformance to each utility
companys requirements. Obtain a copy of each utility companys installation guidelines
prior to commencing Work.
3.7.3. Tops of conduits shall be as follows unless otherwise noted:
3.7.4. Not less than 18 inches below finished grade.
3.7.5. Not less than 24 inches below roadways, paved parking lots, driveways or any surface
subject to vehicular traffic.
3.7.6. Not less than 4 inches below building floor slab for branch circuits. Major feeders and large
signal conduits (2" and greater) at not less than 18 inches.
3.7.7. Depth of service utility conduits shall conform to utility company requirements.
3.7.8. Furnish and install specified underground conduit marker 12" above conduits in trenches
with all buried conduits.
3.8 TERMINATIONS AND JOINTS
3.8.1. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable
for the use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit
fittings except as otherwise indicated.
3.8.2. Raceways shall be joined using specified couplings or transition couplings where dissimilar
raceway systems are joined.
3.8.3. Conduits shall be securely fastened to cabinets, boxes and gutters using two locknuts and
an insulating bushing or specified insulated connectors. Where joints cannot be made tight,
use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Where
terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical
continuity. Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect
conductors. Install grounding bushings or bonding jumpers on all conduits terminating at
concentric or eccentric knockouts.
3.8.4. Conduit terminations exposed at weatherproof enclosures and cast outlet boxes shall be
made watertight using specified connectors and hubs.
3.8.5. Stub-up connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit
may be used 6 inches above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under
this contract, install screwdriver operated threaded flush plugs with floor.
3.8.6. Install specified cable sealing bushings on all conduits originating outside the building walls
and terminating in switchgear, cabinets or gutters inside the building. Install cable sealing
bushings or raceway seal for conduit terminations in all grade level or below grade exterior
pull, junction or outlet boxes.
3.8.7. Raceway seal: Inject into wire filled raceways, a pre-formulated rigid 2 lbs. density
polyurethane foam which expands a minimum 35 times it's original bulk. Foam shall have
the physical properties of water vapor transmission of 1.2 to 3.0 perms; water absorption
less than 2% by volume, fungus and bacterial resistant. Foam shall permanent seal against
water, moisture, insects and rodents. Install raceway sealing foam at the following points:

JKA #15-100 260531 - 9
3.8.7.1. Where conduits enter buildings from below grade.
3.8.8. Install expansion couplings where any conduit crosses a building separation or expansion
joint as follows:
3.8.8.1. Conduits three inches and larger, shall be rigidly secured to the building structure
on opposite sides of a building expansion joint and provided with expansion or
deflection couplings. Install the couplings in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.8.8.2. Conduits smaller than three inches shall be rigidly secured to the building
structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint with junction boxes on
both sides of the joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with 15 inches of slack
flexible conduit. Flexible conduit shall have a copper green ground-bonding
jumper installed. For concrete embedded conduit, use expansion and deflection
couplings as specified above for three inches and larger conduits.
3.8.9. Use short length (maximum of 6ft) of the appropriate FMC or LFMC conduit for connections
to motors and other electrical equipment subject to movement, vibration, misalignment,
cramped quarters or noise transmission. Provide liquidtight flexible metal conduit for
installation in exterior locations, moisture or humidity-laden atmosphere, corrosive
atmosphere, water hose or spray wash-down operations and locations subject to seepage or
dripping of oil, grease or water. Provide a green ground wire with FMC or LFMC conduit.
3.9 SUPPORTS
3.9.1. Provide supports for raceways as specified in Section 260529: Electrical Hangers and
Supports.
3.9.2. All raceways systems shall be secured to building structures using specified fasteners,
clamps and hangers spaced according to the NEC.
3.9.3. Support single runs of conduit using one-hole pipe straps. Where run horizontally on walls in
damp or wet locations, install "clamp backs" to space conduit off the surface.
3.9.4. Multiple conduit runs shall be supported using "trapeze" hangers fabricated from specified
construction channel, mounted to 3/8-inch diameter, threaded steel rods secured to building
structures. Fasten conduit to construction channel with standard one-hole pipe clamps or
the equivalent. Provide lateral seismic bracing for hangers.
3.9.5. Individual 1/2" and 3/4" conduits installed above suspended ceilings may be attached to the
ceiling's hanger wire using spring steel support clips provided that not more than two
conduits are attached to any single support wire.
3.9.6. Support exposed vertical conduit runs at each floor level, independent of cabinets or
switches to which they run, by means of acceptable supports.
3.9.7. Fasteners and supports in solid masonry and concrete:
3.9.7.1. Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in place prior to placing the
concrete.
3.9.7.2. After concrete installation:
3.9.7.2.1. Steel expansion anchors not less than inch bolt size and not less
than 1-1/8 inch embedment.
3.9.7.2.2. Power set fasteners not less than inch diameter with depth of
penetration not less than three inches.
3.9.7.2.3. Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for
attaching to concrete ceilings.
3.9.8. Hollow masonry: Toggle bolts are permitted. Bolts supported only by masonry block are not
acceptable.
3.9.9. Metal structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and
approved for the application.

JKA #15-100 260531 - 10
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 260531 - 11
SECTION 260533
BOXES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1 Work included: Labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation
1.1.1.1. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
1.1.1.2. Pull and junction boxes.
1.1.2 Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related Work
complete installation.
1.1.2.1. Division 08: Access doors. Wall and ceiling access doors.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1 Comply with the latest edition of the following applicable Specifications and standards except
as otherwise indicated or specified.
1.2.1.1. American National Standards Institute/National Electrical Manufacturer Association:
ANSI/NEMA OS-1; Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.
ANSI/NEMA OS-2; Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.
NEMA 250; Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum).
1.2.1.2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
UL 50; Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
UL 514A; Metallic Outlet Boxes.
UL 1773; Termination Boxes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1 Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 260010: Basic Electrical
1.3.1.1. Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein, listing all physical
and electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed standards.
1.3.1.2. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and the proposed
application.
1.4.1 All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new, unused
and currently under production.
1.4.2 Only products and applications listed in this Section may be used on the Project unless
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1 Products furnished by the following Manufacturers shall be acceptable if in compliance with all
features specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.
2.1.1.1. Outlet and junction boxes:

County of Tehama BOXES
JKA #15-100 260533 - 1
2.1.1.1.3. Raco, Inc.
2.1.1.2. Cast boxes:
2.1.1.2.1. Appleton Electric Co.
2.1.1.2.2. Crouse-Hinds.
2.1.1.3. Floor boxes:
2.1.1.3.1. Hubbell Inc.
2.1.1.3.2. Walker.
2.1.1.3.3. Raceway Components, Inc.
2.1.1.4. Pullboxes:
2.1.1.4.1. Circle AW Products.
2.1.1.4.2. Hoffman Engineering Co.
2.1.1.5. Precast concrete boxes:
2.1.1.5.1. Christy Concrete Products, Inc.
2.1.1.5.2. Brooks Products, Inc.
2.1.1.5.3. Forni Corp.
2.1.2 Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements.
2.2 OUTLET BOXES
2.2.1 Standard outlet box:
2.2.1.1. Provide galvanized, one-piece die formed or drawn steel, knockout type box of size and
configuration best suited to the application indicated on the Drawings.
2.2.1.2. 4-inch square by 1-1/2 inch deep shall be minimum box size.
2.2.1.3. ANSI/NEMA OS 1.
2.2.2 Concrete box:
2.2.2.1. Provide galvanized steel, 4-inch octagon rings with mounting lugs, backplate and
adapter ring as required.
2.2.2.2. Select height as necessary to position knockouts above concrete reinforcing steel.
2.2.3 Tile box:
2.2.3.1. Provide outlet boxes for installation in tile or concrete block walls.
2.2.3.2. Standard outlet boxes with raised, square corners and device covers are acceptable.
2.2.4 Cast metal outlet body:
2.2.4.1. Provide four inch round, galvanized cast iron alloy with threaded hubs and mounting
lugs as required.
2.2.4.2. Provide boxes with cast cover plates of the same material as the box and neoprene
cover gaskets.
2.2.5 Conduit outlet body: Provide Cadmium plated cast iron alloy, oblong conduit outlet bodies with
threaded conduit hubs and neoprene gasket, cast iron covers.
2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

JKA #15-100 260533 - 2
2.3.1 Sheet metal pull and junction box:
2.3.1.1. Provide standard outlet or concrete ring boxes wherever possible; otherwise use
minimum 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal, NEMA 1 boxes, sized to Code
requirements with covers secured by cadmium plated machine screws located 6 inches
on centers.
2.3.2 Cast metal pull and junction box: Provide standard cast malleable iron outlet or device boxes
wherever possible; otherwise use cadmium plated, cast malleable iron boxes with bolt-on,
interchangeable conduit hub plates with neoprene gaskets.
2.3.3 Flush mounted pullboxes and junction boxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush head
cover retaining screws, prime coated.
2.3.4 Precast concrete boxes: Provide high density reinforced concrete pull and junction box with
end and side knockouts and non-settling shoulders. Use cast iron lid with hold down bolts or
use traffic rated covers in areas subject to vehicular traffic.
2.4 FLOOR BOXES
2.4.1 Refer to Section 262726: Wiring Devices for floor mounted service boxes.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of box installation to
verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances. Do not commence with
installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1 Install all outlet boxes flush with building walls, ceilings and floors except where boxes are
installed in mechanical and electrical rooms, in cabinetry, above accessible ceilings or where
exposed Work is called for on the Drawings.
3.2.2 Locate pullboxes and junction boxes in concealed locations above removable ceilings or
exposed in electrical rooms, utility rooms or storage areas.
3.2.3 Install outlet boxes at the locations and elevations indicated on the Drawings or specified
herein. Make adjustments to locations as required by structural conditions and to suit
coordination requirements of other trades.
3.2.4 Locate switch outlet boxes on the latch side of doorways unless otherwise indicated.
3.2.5 Locate outlet boxes above hung ceilings having concealed suspension systems, adjacent to
openings for removable recessed lighting fixtures.
3.2.6 Do not install outlet boxes back-to-back, separate boxes by at least 6". In fire rated walls
separate boxes by at least 24" and wall stud.
3.2.7 Adjust position of outlet boxes in finished masonry walls to suit masonry course lines.
Coordinate cutting of masonry walls to achieve neat openings for boxes.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Install boxes in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on Drawings
and as specified herein.
3.3.2 Locate electrical boxes as indicated on Drawings and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,
equipment connections and Code compliance.
3.3.3 Install junction or pullboxes where required to limit bends in conduit runs to not more than 360
degrees or where pulling tension achieved would exceed the maximum allowable for the cable
to be installed. Note that these boxes are not indicated on the Drawings.
3.3.4 Install raised covers (plaster rings) on all outlet boxes in stud walls or in furred, suspended or
exposed concrete ceilings. Covers shall be of a depth to suit the wall or ceiling finish.

JKA #15-100 260533 - 3
3.3.5 Leave no unused openings in any box. Install close-up plugs as required to seal openings.
3.3.6 Provide cast metal boxes with gasketed cast metal cover plates where boxes are exposed in
damp or wet locations.
3.3.7 Provide precast concrete boxes in exterior planting areas, walkways, roads etc.
3.3.8 Provide an access panel in permanent ceiling or wall where boxes are installed and will be
inaccessible.
3.3.9 For boxes mounted in exterior walls, make sure that there is insulation behind outlet boxes to
prevent condensation in boxes.
3.3.10 For outlets mounted above counters, benches or backsplashes, coordinate location and
mounting heights with built-in units. Adjust mounting height to agree with required location for
equipment served.
3.3.11 Use conduit outlet bodies to facilitate pulling of conductors or to make changes in conduit
direction only. Do not make splices in conduit outlet bodies.
3.3.12 Add additional sheet rock as necessary to maintain original fire rating of walls where boxes
are installed.
3.3.13 Install galvanized steel coverplates on boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings
and on surface mounted outlets.
3.4 SUPPORTS
3.4.1 Provide boxes installed in metal stud walls with brackets designed for attaching directly to the
studs or mount boxes on specified box supports.
3.4.2 Mount boxes, installed in suspended ceilings of gypsum board or lath and plaster construction,
to 16 gauge metal channel bars attached to main ceiling runners.
3.4.3 Support boxes independently of conduit system.
3.4.4 Support boxes, installed in suspended ceilings supporting acoustical tiles or panels, directly
from the structure above wherever pendant mounted lighting fixtures are to be installed from
the box.
3.4.5 Support boxes, mounted above suspended acoustical tile ceilings, directly from the structure
above.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 260533 - 4
SECTION 260546
SIGNAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY

1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Telephone and cable television (CATV) service entrance provisions.
1.1.1.2. Signal terminal backboards.
1.1.1.3. Signal systems pullboxes.
1.1.1.4. Telecom/data cabling, television distribution, fire alarm, security, fire alarm/life safety
nurse call, clock, intercom, public address systems conduit, cable tray, "J" hooks and
outlets.
1.1.2. Related work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work
and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a
1.1.2.1. Division 06: Rough Carpentry.
1.2.1. Provide a complete raceway system as indicated on Drawings and herein for the signal
systems referenced above. Raceway systems shall include conduit, cable tray, "J" hooks,
pullboxes, junction boxes, supports, fittings, coverplates, terminal backboards, pull ropes and
other material as required for a complete installation.
1.3.1. All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new, unused
2.1 TERMINAL BACKBOARD
2.1.1. Refer to Division 06: Rough Carpentry.
2.1.2. 4' wide x 8' high x 3/4" thick fire retardant plywood backboard.
2.2 BOXES
2.2.1. Refer to Section 260533: Boxes.
2.2.2. Outlet boxes:
2.2.2.1. Standard electrical knockout boxes 4 11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep.
2.2.2.2. Single gang plaster ring, unless otherwise noted or required for device mounting, in
depth to match wall finish.
2.2.3. Pullboxes: Standard knockout type boxes sized as required.
2.3 OUTLET COVERPLATES
2.3.1. Refer to Section 262726: Wiring Devices.
2.3.2. Where devices or coverplates are not being furnished under another Section, provide blank
coverplates.
2.4 CONDUIT

County of Tehama SIGNAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY
JKA #15-100 260546 - 1
2.4.1. Refer to Section 260531: Conduit.
2.4.2. Provide a conduit system sized and in layout indicated on Electrical Drawings.
2.4.3. Include all fittings and supports as required for a complete system.
2.5 CABLE TRAYS
2.5.1. Refer to Section 260536: Cable Trays.
2.5.2. Provide a cable tray system in the MDF room as indicated on Electrical Drawings. Cable tray
shall support only the signal system cables specifically noted for application in their individual
Specification Section.
2.5.3. Include all accessories, fittings and supports as required for a complete system.
2.6 "J" HOOK HANGER
2.6.1. Manufacturers:
2.6.1.1. Equal products by the following Manufacturers will be considered providing that all
features of the specified product are provided:
2.6.1.1.1. Unistrut Corporation.
2.6.1.1.2. B-Line Systems, Inc.
2.6.1.2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements.
2.6.2. "J" hook hanger:
2.6.2.1. Assembly: Shall be complete to include "J" hook with plastic coating, "T" bolt and nut.
2.6.2.2. Construction: "J" hook, bolt and nut shall be electroplated steel. "J" hook shall be
coated in plastic.
2.6.2.3. Size: 1/4 inch thick x 1 1/2 inch wide x 8 inches in diameter, minimum dimensions.
2.7 PULL ROPE
2.7.1. Provide a polyethylene pulling rope in all empty conduits.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of signal systems
raceway installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Provide a complete raceway system installation for the signal systems as indicated on
Drawings and specified herein, to include all necessary fittings and supports.
3.2.2. Refer to applicable Sections referenced above for specific installation requirements of
equipment specified herein.
3.2.3. Minimum conduit size for signal system shall be 3/4 inch, but not less than size indicated on
Drawings.
3.2.4. Refer to system Shop Drawings prepared by Manufacturer for conduit routing and sizes.
3.2.5. Conduits terminating at signal terminal backboard shall extend a minimum of 4" above
finished floor. For conduits terminating overhead provide a construction channel, in length as
required, across the top of backboard to fasten-down conduits. All conduits terminating at
backboard shall be provided with insulated bushings.
3.2.6. Install fire retardant plywood backboard per the requirements of Division 06 - Rough
Carpentry. Provide in length as indicated on Drawings.
3.2.7. Install a pull rope in all empty conduits.

JKA #15-100 260546 - 2
3.2.8. Wall mounted outlets and/or device served by cable routed exposed above the suspended
ceiling shall consist of an outlet box with plaster ring, 1 1/4" EMT conduit from box to stub-out
above ceiling and a insulated throat connector at each end.
3.2.9. Cable tray shall be installed as indicated on Drawings.
3.3 "J" HOOK HANGERS
3.3.1. Layout:
3.3.1.1. Location of "J" hook hangers shall be planned in advance of the installation and
coordinated with ductwork, plumbing, ceiling and wall construction in the same areas.
Installation shall not unnecessarily cross other conduits or pipes, nor prevent removal
of ceiling tiles or panels, nor block access to mechanical or electrical equipment.
Provide offsets as required to avoid obstructions with other trades.
3.3.1.2. "J" hook hanger runs shall not be placed closer than 12 inches to a flue, parallel hot
water, steam line or other heat producing source or 3 inches from such lines when
crossing perpendicular to the runs.
3.3.1.3. "J" hook hanger runs shall not be placed closer than 3 inches to any feeder or branch
circuit power raceway.
3.3.2.1. Support "J" hook hangers with 1/2 inch threaded rod from structure above via
expansion anchors suitable for construction.
3.3.2.2. Space hangers 4 feet on center within the layout indicated on the Drawings.
3.3.3. Penetrations:
3.3.3.1. "J" hook hanger cables penetrating fire rated walls shall be installed in a solid-bottom
type cable tray with flanged solid cover. Cable shall extend beyond wall 18 inches on
both sides. Cable tray shall be 3" high x 12" wide. Cover shall be sealed and non-
removable.
3.3.3.2. Wall shall be patched around cable tray per the requirements of Division 07.
3.3.3.3. Provide fire rated firestop pillows within solid cable tray to maintain fire separation
rating of wall. Install pillows per the requirements of the Manufacturer in quantities as
required based on opening size. Pillows shall be Nelson type PLW firestop or
approved equal.
3.4 EXPOSED SIGNAL CABLE ROUTING ABOVE CEILING
3.4.1. General:
3.4.1.1. Cable shall be suitable for exposed installations above suspended ceilings. Provide
plenum rated cable where ceiling space is utilized for return air plenum.
3.4.1.2. Install cable in conduit above non-accessible ceilings, in walls and exposed locations.
3.4.2. Cable Support:
3.4.2.1. Support cables leaving "J" hook hanger system at a maximum spacing of 4 feet on
center.
3.4.2.2. Support cables using spring metal cable clips or metal cable ties for each cable.
Suspended ceiling support wires may be used to directly support a maximum of two
cables.
3.4.2.3. Provide separate drop wires above accessible ceiling to support more than two
cables.
3.4.2.4. Do not attach cables to conduits, ducts or pipes.
3.4.2.5. Do not rest cables on ceiling tiles or allow contact with mechanical piping system.
3.4.2.6. Provide separate sleeves and/or fire barriers where individual cables penetrate
firewalls.

JKA #15-100 260546 - 3
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 260546 - 4
SECTION 260553
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
1. PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Electrical equipment nameplates.
1.1.1.2. Panelboard directories.
1.1.1.3. Wire and cable identification.
1.1.1.4. Buried electrical line warnings.
1.1.1.5. Junction box identification.
1.1.1.6. Warning and caution signs.
1.1.1.7. Inscribed device coverplates.
1.1.2.1. Division 09: Painting.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.2.1.1. Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein.
1.2.1.2. Schedules for nameplates to be furnished.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Conduit and wire markers:
2.1.1.1.2. Brady.
2.1.1.1.3. Griffolyn.
2.1.1.2. Inscription Tape:
2.1.1.2.1. Kroy.
2.1.1.2.2. Merlin.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
2.2.1. Type NP: Engraved, plastic laminated labels, Signs and Instruction Plates. Engrave
stock melamine plastic laminate 1/16-inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 square
inches or 8 inches in length; 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved nameplates shall
have white letters and be punched for mechanical fasteners.
2.2.2. Color and letter height as specified in Part 3: Execution.
2.3 LEGEND PLATES

County of Tehama ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
JKA #15-100 260553 - 1
2.3.1. Type LP: Die-stamped metal legend plate with mounting hole and positioning key for
panel mounted operator devices, i.e. motor control pilot devices, hand-off-auto switches,
reset buttons, etc.
2.3.2. Stamped characters to be paint filled.
2.4 BRASS TAGS
2.4.1. Type BT: Metal tags with die-stamped legend, punched for fastener.
2.4.2. Dimensions: 2" diameter 19 gauge.
2.5 PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES (400 AMP OR LESS)
2.5.1. Directories: A 6" x 8" minimum size circuit directory frame and card with clear plastic
covering shall be provided inside the inner panel door.
2.5.2. Circuit numbering: Starting at the top, odd numbered circuits in sequence down the left
hand side and even numbered circuits down the right hand side. Multi-section
panelboards shall have continuous consecutive circuit numbers, i.e. Section 1 (circuit
numbers 1-42), Section 2 (circuit numbers 43-84), Section 3 (circuit numbers 85-126).
2.6 WIRE AND TERMINAL MARKERS
2.6.1. Provide self-adhering, pre-printed, machine printable or write-on, self-laminating vinyl
wrap around strips. Blank markers shall be inscribed using the printer or pen
recommended by Manufacturer for this purpose.
2.7 CONDUCTOR PHASE MARKERS
2.7.1. Colored vinyl plastic electrical tape, 3/4" wide, for identification of phase conductors.
Scotch 35 Brand Tape or equal.
2.8 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT MARKER
2.8.1. 6-inch wide, yellow polyethylene tape, with continuous black imprinting reading "Caution -
Buried Electric Line Below".
2.9 INSCRIBED DEVICE COVERPLATES
2.9.1. Coverplate material shall be as specified in Section 262726: Wiring Devices.
2.9.2. Methods of inscription: (Unless otherwise noted)
2.9.2.1. Type-on-tape:
2.9.2.1.1. Imprinted or thermal transfer characters onto tape lettering system.
2.9.2.1.2. Tape trimmer.
2.9.2.1.3. Matte finish spray-on clear coating.
2.9.2.2. Engraving:
2.9.2.2.1. 1/8" high letters.
2.9.2.2.2. Paint filled letters finished in black.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of
identification device installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and
Specification tolerances. Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made
satisfactory.
3.2 NAMEPLATES
3.2.1.1. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
3.2.1.2. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.

JKA #15-100 260553 - 2
3.2.1.3. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using machine screws.
3.2.2. Provide type 'NP' color coded nameplates that present, as applicable, the following
information:
3.2.2.1. Equipment or device designation:
3.2.2.2. Amperage, KVA or horsepower rating, where applicable.
3.2.2.3. Voltage or signal system name.
3.2.2.4. Source of power or control.
3.2.3. Nameplates for power system distribution equipment and devices are to be black.
3.2.4. Nameplates for signal systems equipment and devices are to be black except as follows:
3.2.4.1. Fire alarm and life safety - Red.
3.2.4.2. Security/card access/CCTV systems - Green.
3.2.5. Minimum letter height shall be as follows:
3.2.5.1. For panelboards, switchboards, etc.: inch letters to identify equipment
designation. Use inch letters to identify voltage, phase, wires, etc.
3.2.5.2. For individual circuit breakers, switches and motor starters in panelboards,
switchboards and motor control centers use 3/8-inch letters to identify equipment
designation. Use 1/8-inch letters to identify all other.
3.2.5.3. For individual mounted circuit breakers, disconnect switches, enclosed switches
and motor starters use 3/8-inch letters to identify equipment designation. Use 1/8"
letters to identify all other.
3.2.5.4. For equipment cabinets, terminal cabinets, control panels and other cabinet
enclosed apparatus use 3/8-inch letters to identify equipment designation.
3.3 LEGEND PLATES
3.3.1. Provide panel-mounted operators devices such as pilot lights, reset buttons, HAND-
OFF-AUTO switches, etc.
3.4 BRASS TAGS
3.4.1. Provide type BT tags for individual ground conductors to exposed ground bus indicating
connection i.e. "UFER", "Cold water bond", etc.
3.4.2. Provide tags for all feeder cables in underground vaults and pull boxes.
3.4.3. Provide tags for empty conduits in underground vault, pull boxes and stubs.
3.5 PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES (400 AMP OR LESS)
3.5.1. Provide typewritten directories arranged in numerical order denoting loads served by
room number or area for each circuit.
3.5.2. Verify room numbers or area designation with Project Manager.
3.5.3. Mount panelboard directories in a minimum 6" x 8" metal frame under clear plastic cover
inside every panelboard.
3.6 WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
3.6.1. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboards, pull boxes, outlet and junction
boxes and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power
and lighting circuits and with control wire number as indicated on equipment
Manufacturer's Shop Drawings for control wiring.
3.6.2. Provide colored phase markers for conductors as noted in Section 260519: Building Wire
and Cable. Apply colored, pressure sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a
distance of 3 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made.
Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Do not
cover cable identification markings by taping.

JKA #15-100 260553 - 3
3.7 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT MARKERS
3.7.1. During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, signal and communications
lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker, located directly above line at 6
to 8 inches below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench or
concrete envelope, do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches; install a single line
marker.
3.8 JUNCTION BOX IDENTIFICATION
3.8.1. The cover of junction, pull and connection boxes for both power and signal systems,
located above suspended ceilings and below ceilings in non-public areas, shall be clearly
marked with a permanent ink felt pen. Identify the circuit(s) (panel designation and circuit
numbers) contained in each box, unless otherwise noted or specified.
3.9 WARNING, CAUTION AND INSTRUCTION SIGNS
3.9.1. Provide warning, caution or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated or
where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical
systems and of the items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic laminated
instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for
system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor
items.
3.9.2. Emergency Operating Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white letters on red
background with minimum 3/8 inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power
transfer, load shedding or other emergency operations.
3.9.3. Elevator Machine Rooms(s): Provide warning sign for each elevator controller
disconnect to read "Warning - Part of the Control Panel is not De-energized by this
Switch."
3.9.4. Elevator car light and fan switch: Provide signage indicating elevator number serving and
function of each switch.
3.10 INSCRIBED DEVICE COVERPLATE
3.10.1. General:
3.10.1.1. Lettering type: Helvetica, 12 point or 1/8" high.
3.10.1.2. Color of characters shall be black.
3.10.1.3. Locate the top of the inscription below the top edge of the coverplate.
3.10.1.4. Inscription shall be centered and square with coverplate.
3.10.2. Application:
3.10.2.1. Provide inscribed coverplates for devices as outlined below:
3.10.2.1.1. Special purpose switches, i.e. projection screens, shades,
exhaust fans, etc.
3.10.2.2. Type-on-tape inscriptions shall be provided for the following devices:
3.10.2.2.1. Receptacles.
3.10.2.2.2. Outlets in surface raceways.
3.10.2.2.3. Telecommunication outlets.
3.10.2.3. Engraved inscriptions shall be provided for the following devices:
3.10.2.3.1. Network lighting control dimmers and swtiches.
3.10.2.3.2. Special purpose switches.
3.10.2.4. Type-on-tape installation:
3.10.2.4.1. Tape shall be trimmed to the height of the letters.
3.10.2.4.2. Trim tape length to 1/4 inch back from each edge of coverplate.

JKA #15-100 260553 - 4
3.10.2.4.3. Contractor hands shall be clean or covered with surgical type
glove prior to application of tape. Tape installations with visible
fingerprints or smudges will not be acceptable.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 260553 - 5
SECTION 260930
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1. Work included: Labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation required
for the item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:
1.1.1.1. Network Software
1.1.1.2. Occupancy Sensors.
1.1.1.3. Daylight Sensors.
1.1.1.4. Power and relay packs.
1.1.1.5. Wall Switches and Dimmers.
1.1.1.6. Scene Controllers.
1.1.1.7. Communications Bridges.
1.1.1.8. Network Controllers.
1.1.1.9. Cat 5 cabling and Class 2 low voltage cabling.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1. Comply with the latest edition of the following applicable Specifications and standards except as
otherwise indicated or specified:
1.2.1.1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronics

Engineers (IEEE):
ANSI/IEEE C62.41; IEEE Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC

Power Circuits.
NEMA 250; Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
NEMA ICS 1; Industrial Control and Systems.
NEMA ICS 6; Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
UL 20; General-Use Snap Switches.

County of Tehama NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
JKA #15-100 260943 - 1
UL 50; Cabinets and Boxes.
UL 489; Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.
NEMA ICS 4; Terminal Blocks and Industrial use.
UL 916; Energy Management.
UL 508; Electric Industrial Control Equipment.
UL 1472; Solid-State Dimming Controls.
1.3.1.1. Provide a time-based, sensor-based (both occupancy and daylight), and manual lighting
control system without the use of any centrally hardwired switching equipment (relay
panels).
1.3.1.2. The system shall be capable of turning lighting loads on/off as well as dimming lights (if
lighting load is capable of being dimmed)
1.3.1.3. All system devices shall be networked together enabling digital communication and shall
be individually addressable.
1.3.1.4. The system architecture shall be capable of enabling stand-alone groups (rooms) of
devices to function in some default capacity even if network connectivity to the greater
system is lost.
1.3.1.5. The system architecture shall facilitate remote operation via a computer connection.
1.3.1.6. The system shall not require any centrally hardwired switching equipment.
1.3.1.7. The system shall be capable of wireless, wired, or hybrid wireless/wired architectures.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements,
the following items:
1.4.1.2. Describe system operation, equipment and dimensions and indicate features of each
component.

JKA #15-100 260943 - 2
application.
1.4.1.4. Shop Drawings:
1.4.1.4.1. Plot plans and building floor plans, showing location of and conduit routing to
all devices.
1.4.1.4.2. Point-to-Point wiring diagram in block or riser format showing all low voltage
switching components, conduit and wire types and sizes with cable legend.
1.4.1.6. Complete bill of material listing all components.
1.4.1.7. Warranty.
1.5.1. Supply operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of in
accordance with the requirements of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements, to include
the following:
1.5.1.1. A detailed explanation of the operation of the system.
1.5.1.2. Instructions for routine maintenance.
1.5.1.3. Pictorial parts list and parts number.
1.5.1.4. Schematic Drawings of wiring system.
1.5.1.5. Telephone numbers for authorized parts and service distributors.
1.5.1.6. Final testing report.
1.6.3. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years continuous experience in manufacturing

architectural lighting control products.
1.7.1. Delivery: Architectural dimming components shall not be delivered to the Project site until
protected storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not
acceptable. Equipment damaged during shipment shall be replaced and returned to
Manufacturer at no cost to Owner.
1.7.2. Storage: Store in a clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature extremes. Maintain
factory wrapping or provide a heavy canvas/plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water,
construction debris and traffic. Provide heat where required to prevent condensation.

JKA #15-100 260943 - 3
1.7.3. Handling: Handle in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. Be careful to prevent
internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Damaged units shall not be
installed. Replace damaged units and return equipment to Manufacturer.
1.8 WARRANTY
1.8.1. Units and components offered under this Section shall be covered by a 5 year parts and labor
warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and workmanship. Warranty shall
begin upon acceptance by the Owner.
1.8.2. Dimming ballast for fluorescent fixtures offered under this Section shall be covered by a 7 year
parts and labor warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and workmanship.
Warranty shall begin upon acceptance by the Owner.
1.9 SYSTEM START-UP
1.9.1. Upon completion of installation, a factory trained dealer service representative shall perform
initial start-up of the dimming system. Sufficient time shall be allowed to properly check the
system out and perform required minor adjustments before the Engineer's witnessed test shall
begin.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1. Products furnished by the following Manufacturers shall be acceptable if in compliance with all
2.1.1.1. Network Lighting Control System:
2.1.1.1.1. nLight/SensorSwitch (basis of design)
2.1.1.1.2. Wattstopper DLM
2.1.1.2. Cat 5 Cable:
2.1.1.2.1. SYSTIMAX Inc.
2.1.1.2.2. Berk-Tek.
2.1.1.2.3. General Cable.
2.2 GENERAL
2.2.1. The components of the network lighting control system shall be Specification grade and shall be
supplied by a single Manufacturer.
2.2.2. Thoroughly review the operational and performance requirements of the system with the
Manufacturer to verify the wiring and equipment requirements.
2.2.3. Refer to the lighting control system riser diagram on Drawings for major components and
interconnections as well as system overview.
2.2.4. System architecture:

JKA #15-100 260943 - 4
2.2.4.1. All switching relays shall be located within either a sensor device, single gang wall
switch device, or power (relay) pack device.
2.2.4.2. All switching and dimming for a specific lighting zone shall take place within the devices
located in the zone itself (i.e. not in a remotely located device).
2.2.4.3. System shall have a primary wall mounted network control gateway device that is
capable of accessing and controlling all other system devices and linking into an
Ethernet LAN.
2.2.4.4. System shall use bridge devices that route communication and distribute power for up
to 8 lighting zones together for purposes of decreasing system wiring requirements.
2.2.4.5. System shall be able to utilize ZigBee wireless mesh networking to facilitate
communication with management software.
2.2.4.6. All devices within a single lighting zone shall be capable of being daisy-chain wired with
CAT-5 low voltage cabling.
2.2.4.7. Communication and Class 2 system power shall be delivered to each device via
standard CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.
2.2.4.8. All system devices shall have at least two RJ-45 ports.
2.2.4.9. All wall mounted user control / gateway devices shall be low voltage, fit within a two
gang switch box, and have a backlit LCD panel. User control shall be made available via
finger-touch buttons with no moving parts.
2.2.4.10. System must have a web-based software management program that enables system
control, status monitoring, and creation of lighting control profiles.
2.2.4.11. Each control gateway device shall be capable of linking 400 devices to the management
software.
2.2.4.12. Individual lighting zones must continue to provide a user defined default level of lighting
control in the event of a system communication failure or the management software
becoming unavailable.
2.2.5. Lighting Control Profiles:
2.2.5.1. Changes to the operation of the system can be made in real-time or scheduled via
lighting control profiles. These profiles are outlines of settings that direct how a
collection of devices function for a defined time period.
2.2.5.2. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being created and applied to a single device,
zone of devices, or customized group of zones.
2.2.5.3. All relays and dimming outputs shall be capable of being scheduled to track or ignore
information regarding occupancy, daylight, and local user switches via lighting control
profiles.
2.2.5.4. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be
configurable via a lighting control profile.
2.2.5.5. All lighting control profiles shall be stored on the network gateway device and on the
softwares host server.

JKA #15-100 260943 - 5
2.2.5.6. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being scheduled to run according to the
following calendar options: start date/hour/minute, end date/hour/minute, and
sunrise/sunset +/- timed offsets.
2.2.5.7. Sunrise/sunset times shall be automatically derived from location information using an
astronomical clock.
2.2.5.8. Daylight savings time adjustments shall be capable of being performed automatically, if
desired.
2.2.5.9. Lighting control profile schedules shall be capable of being given the following
recurrence settings: daily, weekday, weekend, weekly, monthly, and yearly.
2.2.5.10. Software shall provide a graphical tool for easily viewing scheduled lighting control
profiles.
2.2.6. Management Software:
2.2.6.1. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be
available and configurable remotely from the software.
2.2.6.2. The following status monitoring information shall be made available from the software
for all devices for which it is applicable: current occupancy status, current PIR Status,
current Microphonics Status, remaining occupancy time delay(s), current photocell
reading, current photocell inhibiting state, photocell transitions time remaining, current
dim level, device temperature, and device relay state(s).
2.2.6.3. The following device identification information shall be made available from the
software: model number, model description, serial number, manufacturing date code,
custom label(s), and parent network device.
2.2.6.4. A printable network inventory report shall be available via the software.
2.2.6.5. Up to 40 simultaneous user sessions shall be capable of being supported.
2.2.6.6. Software shall require all users to login with a User Name and Password.
2.2.6.7. Software shall provide at least three permission levels for users.
2.2.6.8. All sensitive stored information and privileged communication by the software shall be
encrypted.
2.2.6.9. All device firmware and system software updates must be available for automatic
download and installation via the internet.
2.2.7. Commissioning Features:
2.2.7.1. To facilitate commissioning, all devices daisy-chained together (using CAT-5) shall
automatically be grouped together into a functional lighting control zone.
2.2.7.2. All lighting control zones shall be able to function according to default settings once
adequate power is applied and before any system software is installed.
2.2.7.3. Once software is installed, system shall be able to auto-discover all system devices
without requiring any commissioning.
2.2.7.4. All system devices shall be capable of being given user defined names.

JKA #15-100 260943 - 6
2.2.7.5. All devices within the network shall be able to have their firmware reprogrammed
remotely and without being physically uninstalled for purposes of upgrading functionality
at a later date.
2.3 DEVICES & COMPONENTS
2.3.1. The lighting control system outlined above shall consist of devices of the following types;
occupancy sensors, daylight (photocell) sensors, wall switches, dimming switches, power (relay)
packs, power supplies, communication bridges, network control gateways. Panel based relay
devices are not acceptable.
2.3.2. Occupancy & Photocell Sensors
2.3.2.1. Occupancy sensing technologies shall be completely passive meaning that they will not
emit any radiation that is known to interfere with certain types of hearing aides, or
electronic devices such as electronic white board readers. Passive Infrared (PIR) or
PIR/Microphonic Dual Technology detection technologies shall be acceptable.
Ultrasonic or Microwave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted.
2.3.2.2. Sensors shall be available with zero, one, or two integrated Class 1 switching relays.
2.3.2.3. Sensors shall be available with one or two occupancy poles, each of which provides a
programmable time delay.
2.3.2.4. Sensors shall be available in multiple lens options which are customized for specific
applications.
2.3.2.5. Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via
standard CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.
2.3.2.6. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports.
2.3.2.7. Every sensor parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the software
and locally via the device push-button.
2.3.2.8. Sensors shall be able to function together with other sensors in order to provide
expanded coverage areas by simply daisy-chain wiring together the units with CAT-5
cabling.
2.3.2.9. Sensors shall be equipped with an automatic override for 100 hour burn-in of lamps.
This feature must be available at any time for lamp replacements.
2.3.2.10. Wall Switch Sensors
2.3.2.10.1. Sensor shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI
opening.
2.3.2.10.2. Sensor must meet NEC grounding requirements by providing a dedicated

ground connection and grounding to mounting strap. Line and load wire
connections shall be interchangeable. Sensor shall not allow current to pass
to the load when sensor is in the unoccupied (Off) condition.
2.3.2.10.3. Sensor shall have optional features for photocell/daylight override, vandal
resistant lens, and low temperature/high humidity operation.
2.3.2.10.4. Sensors shall be available in four colors (Ivory, White, Almond, Gray)
2.3.2.11. Ceiling & Corner Mount Sensors

JKA #15-100 260943 - 7
2.3.2.11.1. Sensor shall have optional features for photocell/daylight override, dimming
control, and low temperature/high humidity operation.
2.3.2.11.2. Sensors with dimming control can control 0 to 10 VDC dimmable ballasts by
sinking up to 20 mA of Class 2 current (typically 40 or more ballasts).
2.3.2.11.3. All sensors have at least one or two occupancy poles, each of which provides
a programmable time delay.
2.3.2.12. Daylight (Photocell) Sensors
2.3.2.12.1. Sensor shall provide for an On/Off set-point, and a deadband to prevent the
artificial light from cycling. Delay shall be incorporated into the photocell to
prevent rapid response to passing clouds.
2.3.2.12.2. Sensors set-point and deadband shall be automatically calibrated through the
sensors micro-controller by initiating the Automatic Set-point Programming
subroutine. Further adjustment may be made manually if needed. Deadband
setting shall be verified and modified by the sensor automatically every time
the lights cycle to accommodate physical changes in the space (i.e., furniture
layouts, lamp depreciation, or lamp outages).
2.3.2.12.3. Sensors with dimming control can control 0 to 10 VDC dimmable ballasts by
sinking up to 20 mA of Class 2 current (typically 40 or more ballasts).
2.3.2.12.4. Photocell sensors set point shall be automatically calibrated through the
sensors micro-controller by initiating the Automatic Set-point Programming
subroutine. Min and Max dim settings as well as set-point may be manually
entered.
2.3.2.12.5. Dual zone option shall be available for On/Off Photocell, Automatic Dimming
Control Photocell, or Combination units. The second zone shall be controlled
as an offset from the primary zone and shall be the zone farthest from the
natural light source.
2.3.3. Network System Power (Relay) Packs
2.3.3.1. Power Pack shall incorporate one or more Class 1 relays and contribute low voltage
power to the rest of the system. Secondary Packs shall incorporate the relay(s), shall
have an optional 2nd relay, 0-10 VDC dimming output, or line voltage dimming output,
but shall not be required to contribute system power. Power Supplies shall provide
system power only, but are not required to switch line voltage circuit. Auxiliary Relay
Packs shall switch low voltage circuits only.
2.3.3.2. Power Packs shall accept 120 or 277 VAC (or optionally 347 VAC), be plenum rated,
and provide Class 2 power to the system.
2.3.3.3. All devices shall have two RJ-45 ports.
2.3.3.4. Every Power Pack parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the
software and locally via the device push-button.
2.3.3.5. Power Pack shall securely mount to junction location through a threaded inch chase
nipple or be capable of being secured within a luminaire ballast channel. Plastic clips
into junction box shall not be accepted. All Class 1 wiring shall pass through chase
nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads. Note: UL Listing
under Energy Management or Industrial Control Equipment automatically meets this
requirement, whereas Appliance Control Listing does not meet this safety requirement.

JKA #15-100 260943 - 8
2.3.3.6. When required by local code, Power Pack must install inside standard electrical
enclosure and provide UL recognized support to junction box. All Class 1 wiring is to
pass through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads.
2.3.3.7. Power (Secondary) Packs shall be available that provide up to 16 Amp switching of all
lighting load types as well as 0-10 VDC dimming or fluorescent ballasts/LED drivers.
2.3.3.8. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that provide up to 5 Amps of switching and
can dim 120 VAC incandescent lighting loads or 120/277 VAC line voltage dimmable
fluorescent ballasts (2-wire and 3-wire versions).
can dim 120/277 VAC magnetic low voltage transformers.
can dim 120 VAC electronic low voltage transformers.
2.3.3.11. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that require a manual switch signal (via a
networked Wall Station) in order to close its relay.
2.3.3.12. Specific Power/Secondary Packs shall be available that are UL924 listed for switching of
Emergency Power circuits.
2.3.3.13. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that control louver/damper motors for
skylights.
2.3.3.14. Specific Secondary Packs shall be available that provide a pulse on/pulse off signal for
purposes of controlling shade systems via relay inputs.
2.3.4. Power (Relay) Packs and Supplies
2.3.4.1. Power Packs shall accept 120 or 277 VAC (or optionally 347 VAC), be plenum rated,
and provide Class 2 power to the system.
2.3.4.2. All devices shall have two RJ-45 ports.
2.3.4.3. Every Power Pack parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the
software and locally via the device push-button.
2.3.4.4. Power Pack shall securely mount to junction location through a threaded inch chase
nipple. Plastic clips into junction box shall not be accepted. All Class 1 wiring shall pass
through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads.
Note: UL Listing under Energy Management or Industrial Control Equipment
automatically meets this requirement, whereas Appliance Control Listing does not meet
this safety requirement.
2.3.4.5. When required by local code, Power Pack must install inside standard electrical
enclosure and provide UL recognized support to junction box. All Class 1 wiring is to
pass through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads.
2.3.4.6. Power Pack shall incorporate a Class 1 relay and contribute low voltage power to the
rest of the system. Slave Packs shall incorporate the relay, but shall not be required to
contribute system power. Power Supplies shall provide system power only, but are not
required to switch line voltage circuit. Auxiliary Relay Packs shall switch low voltage
circuits only.
2.3.4.7. Class 1 Relays used in Power (Slave) Packs shall provide 16 Amp switching of all load
types, and be rated for 400,000 cycles.

JKA #15-100 260943 - 9
2.3.5. Network LED Luminaires
2.3.5.1. Networked LED luminaire shall have a mechanically integrated control device
2.3.5.2. Networked LED luminaire shall have two RJ-45 ports
2.3.5.3. Networked LED luminaire shall be able to digitally network directly to other network
control devices (sensors, photocells, switches, dimmers)
2.3.5.4. Networked LED luminaire shall provide low voltage power to other networked control
devices
2.3.5.5. System shall be able to turn on/off LED luminaire without using a relay
2.3.5.6. System shall be able to maintain constant lumen output over the specified life of the
LED luminarie (also called lumen compensation) by varying the input control power (and
thus saving up to 20% power usage).
2.3.5.7. System shall indicate (via a blink warning) when the LED luminaire has reached its
expected life (in hrs).
2.3.6. Network Wall Switches & Dimmers
2.3.6.1. Devices shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening.
2.3.6.2. Devices shall be available with zero or one integrated Class 1 switching relay.
2.3.6.3. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard
CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.
2.3.6.4. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports.
2.3.6.5. All devices shall provide toggle switch control. Dimming control and low
temperature/high humidity operation are available options.
2.3.6.6. Devices shall be available in four colors (Ivory, White, Light Almond, Gray).
2.3.6.7. Devices with dimming control outputs can control 0-10 VDC dimmable ballasts by
sinking up to 20 mA of current (typically 40 or more ballasts).
2.3.6.8. Devices with capacitive touch buttons shall provide audible user feedback with different
sounds for on/off, raise/lower, start-up, and communication offline.
2.3.6.9. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall provide tactile and LED user feedback.
2.3.6.10. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall be made available with custom button
labeling
2.3.6.11. Devices with a single on button shall be capable of selecting all possible lighting
combinations for a bi-level lighting zone such that the user confusion as to which of two
buttons (as is present in multi-button scenarios) controls which load is eliminated.
2.3.7. Network Graphic Wall Station
2.3.7.1. Device shall have a 3.5 full color touch screen for selecting up to 8 programmable
lighting control presets or acting as up to 16 on/off/dim control switches.

JKA #15-100 260943 - 10
2.3.7.2. Device shall enable configuration of lighting presets, switched, and dimmers via
password protected setup screens.
2.3.7.3. Device shall enable user supplied .jpg screen saver image to be uploaded.
2.3.7.4. Device shall surface mount to single-gang switch box
2.3.7.5. Device shall have a micro-USB style connector for local computer connectivity.
2.3.7.6. Device shall have two RJ-45 ports for communication
2.3.7.7. Device shall be the following Sensor Switch model number:
2.3.8. Networked Auxiliary Input / Output (I/O) Devices
2.3.8.1. Devices shall be plenum rated and be inline wired, screw mountable, or have an
extended chase nipple for mounting to a knockout.
2.3.8.2. Devices shall have two RJ-45 ports
2.3.8.3. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard
CAT-5 low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.
2.3.8.4. Specific I/O devices shall have a dimming control output that can control 0-10 VDC
dimmable ballasts or LED drivers by sinking up to 20 mA of current (typically 40 or more
ballasts).
2.3.8.5. Specific I/O devices shall have an input that read a 0-10 VDC signal from an external
device.
2.3.8.6. Specific I/O devices shall have a switch input that can interface with either a maintained
or momentary switch and run a switch event, run a local/remote control profile, or
raise/lower a dimming output
2.3.8.7. Specific I/O devices shall sense state of low voltage outdoor photocells
2.3.8.8. Specific I/O devices shall enable RS-232 communication between lighting control
system and Touch Screen based A/V control systems.
2.3.9. Network Communication Bridges
2.3.9.1. Device shall surface mount to a standard 4 x 4 square junction box.
2.3.9.2. Device shall have either 4 or 8 RJ-45 ports.
2.3.9.3. Device shall be capable of aggregating communication with connected daisy-chains of

system devices.
2.3.9.4. Device shall be powered with Class 2 low voltage supplied locally via a directly wired
power supply or delivered via a CAT-5 cabled connection.
2.3.9.5. Device shall be careful of redistributing power from its local supply and connect lighting
control zones with excess power to lighting control zones with insufficient local power.
This architecture also enables loss of power to a particular area to be less impactful on
network lighting control system.
2.3.10. Network Control Gateway

JKA #15-100 260943 - 11
2.3.10.1. Device shall recess into a two-gang switch box.
2.3.10.2. Device shall provide user control via touch sensitive buttons which have no mechanical
parts.
2.3.10.3. Device shall have a backlit LCD panel.
2.3.10.4. Device shall contain a real-time clock capable of synchronization with a network time
authority.
2.3.10.5. Device shall be capable of communicating on an Ethernet network with a fixed or DHCP
assigned IP address.
2.3.10.6. Device shall have three RJ-45 ports for connection to system devices and one RJ-45
port for connection to Ethernet network.
2.3.10.7. Device shall be powered with Class 2 low voltage supplied locally via a directly-wired
power supply or delivered via a CAT-5 cabled connection.
2.4 MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
2.4.1. Every device parameter (e.g. sensor time delay and photocell set-point) shall be available and
configurable remotely from the software
2.4.2. The following status monitoring information shall be made available from the software for all
devices for which it is applicable: current occupancy status, current PIR Status, current
Microphonics Status, remaining occupancy time delay(s), current photocell reading, current
photocell inhibiting state, photocell transitions time remaining, current dim level, device
temperature, and device relay state(s).
2.4.3. The following device identification information shall be made available from the software: model
number, model description, serial number, manufacturing date code, custom label(s), and parent
network device.
2.4.4. A printable network inventory report shall be available via the software.
2.4.5. A printable report detailing all system profiles shall be available via the software.
2.4.6. Software shall require all users to login with a User Name and Password.
2.4.7. Software shall provide at least three permission levels for users.
2.4.8. All sensitive stored information and privileged communication by the software shall be
encrypted.
2.4.9. All device firmware and system software updates must be available for automatic download and
installation via the internet.
2.4.10. Software shall be capable of managing systems interconnected via a WAN (wide area network)
2.5 SYSTEM ENERGY ANALYSIS & REPORTING SOFTWARE
2.5.1. System shall be capable of reporting lighting system events and performance data back to the
management software for display and analysis.
2.5.2. Intuitive graphical screens shall be displayed in order to facilitate simple viewing of system
energy performance.

JKA #15-100 260943 - 12
2.5.3. An Energy Scorecard shall be display that shows calculated energy savings in dollars, KWHr,
or CO2.
2.5.4. Software shall calculate the allocation of energy savings to different control measures
(occupancy sensors, photocells, manual switching, etc).
2.5.5. Energy savings data shall be calculated for the system as a whole or for individual zones.
2.5.6. A time scaled graph showing all relay transitions shall be presented.
2.5.7. A time scaled graph showing a zones occupancy time delay shall be presented
2.5.8. A time scaled graph showing the total light level shall be presented.
2.5.9. User shall be able to customize the baseline run-time hours for a space.
2.5.10. User shall be able to customize up to four time-of-day billing rates and schedules.
2.5.11. Data shall be made available via a .CSV file
2.6 BMS COMPATIBILITY
2.6.1. System shall provide a BACnet IP gateway as a downloadable software plug-in to its
management software. No additional hardware shall be required.
2.6.2. BACnet IP gateway software shall communicate information gathered by networked system to
other building management systems.
2.6.3. BACnet IP gateway software shall translate and forward lighting relay and other select control
commands from BMS system to networked control devices.
2.7 CAT 5 CABLE:
2.7.1. Application:
2.7.1.1. Suitable for indoor installations, exposed within equipment rooms, above suspended
ceilings and below raised floors in cable trays, hangers or on deck, or within walls. If
space is used as an air plenum, cable shall either be plenum rated or installed in EMT
conduit.
2.7.1.2. Each cable run shall be continuous single cable, homogenous in nature, without splices.
2.7.1.3. Cables shall meet CAT5e performance criteria.
2.7.1.4. Cables shall be non-plenum rated.
2.7.2. Conductors:
2.7.2.1. Insulated conductors: Eight # 24 AWG, solid copper wire insulated with thermoplastic
polyethylene applications.
2.7.2.2. Twisted pairs: Two insulated conductors twisted together to form a pair and four such
paired cables to form a unit with individually color-coded pairs to conform to industry
standards (ANSI/ICEA Publication S-80-576-1994 and EIA-230).
2.7.3. Cable sheath:

JKA #15-100 260943 - 13
2.7.3.1. Outer jacket: Seamless outer jacket, flame-retardant PVC, applied to and completely
covering the internal components (twisted pairs).
2.7.3.2. Flame rating: CMR according to NEC Article 800, tested to UL 1666 and listed as such.
2.7.4. Electrical performance: Meet or exceed TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Enhanced and ISO 11801 Class D
specifications for CAT5e UTP cabling.
2.8 MODULAR CONNECTORS:
2.8.1. Modular connectors shall be 8-position jacks, compliant to TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Addendum 10, and
shall be compatible with the specified cable within this Section, both electrically and physically
2.8.2. Modular connectors shall be T568A wired.
2.8.3. Electrical performance: Meet or exceed TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Enhanced and ISO 11801 Class D
specifications for CAT5e UTP cabling.
2.9 LABELS:
2.9.1. Labels shall be machine printable with a laser printer, ink jet printer, thermal transfer printer or
hand-held printer.
2.9.2. Labels for horizontal cables:
2.9.2.1. Adhesive backed labels and self-laminating feature.
2.9.2.2. Fit the horizontal cables specified herein by fully wrapping around the cable jacket.
2.9.2.3. Size: 2 x .05 printable area, minimum.
2.9.2.4. Color: White.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS:
2.10.1. Velcro cable ties:
2.10.1.1. Width: 0.75.
2.10.1.2. Color: Velcro cable ties the same color as the cable to which it is applied.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of the networked
lighting control system installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install networked lighting control system in accordance with the Manufacturer's written
instructions, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
3.2.2. Provide all devices as required for a complete, functional lighting control system. Not all devices
are necessarily indicated on the plans. Install all control devices in accordance with the
Manufacturer's wiring diagrams.

JKA #15-100 260943 - 14
3.2.3. Locate wall sensors and control switches as indicated on the plans. Refer to Architectural
elevations.
3.2.4. Locate all ceiling sensors in approximate locations as indicated on the plans. Exact location of
sensors shall be verified by the manufacture on the shop drawings, to provide optimal
performance and area coverage, and shall avoid conflicts with other systems.
3.2.5. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and
energy savings.
3.2.5.1. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted for 5 minutes after occupant
leaves area.
3.2.6. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the commissioning of the system

including room by room description including:
3.2.6.1. Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting setpoints.
3.2.6.2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.)
3.2.6.3. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.)
3.2.7. Re-commissioning After 30 days from occupancy re-calibrate all sensor time delays and
sensitivities to meet the Owners Project Requirements. Provide a detailed report to the Architect
/ Owner of re-commissioning activity.
3.2.8. Run all control cables in conduit within walls and in areas where ceiling is exposed to structure.
Cat-5 low voltage cabling may be routed with telecommunications cabling in cable tray above
accessible ceilings, where applicable. Lighting control cables shall be of a different color and
bundled separately from telecommunications cabling and other low voltage wires. Coordinate
with the Telecommunications plans.
3.2.9. Cat 5 cabling:
3.2.9.1. Horizontal cable installation and routing:
3.2.9.1.1. Cable runs shall have continuous sheath continuity, homogenous in nature
with no splicing.
3.2.9.1.2. No cabling shall exceed a cable length of 295 (90m) from the termination point
at the equipment room to the termination at the workstation outlet, including
service slack, when measured using test equipment.
3.2.9.1.3. Place cables within the designated pathways, such as cable tray or basket
tray, cable runway, cable hangers, etc. Do not fasten, support or attach
cables to other building infrastructures (i.e. ducts, pipes, conduits, etc.), other
systems (i.e. ceiling support wires, wall studs, etc.), or to the outside of
conduits, cable trays and non0approved pathway systems.
3.2.9.1.4. Place and suspend cables during installation and termination in a manner to
protect them from physical damage or interference. Place cables with no
kinks, twists, or impact damage to the sheath. Replace cables damaged
during installation or termination at no additional cost.
3.2.9.1.5. Route cables at 90 angles, allowing for bending radius.
3.2.9.1.6. Do not exceed pulling tension of 25 lbs.
3.2.9.1.7. Do not use cable-pulling compounds.

JKA #15-100 260943 - 15
3.2.9.1.8. Do not exceed a minimum bend radius of 6 times the cable diameter during
and after installation.
3.2.9.1.9. Route cables beneath other building infrastructures (i.e. ducts, pipes, conduits,
etc.) in above ceiling applications. Do not route cables over building
infrastructures. The installation shall result in easy accessibility to the cables
in the future.
3.2.9.1.10. Place cables 6 minimum away from power sources to reduce interference
from EMI.
3.2.9.1.11. Do not set 360 service loops in place for slack storage. Instead, set slack as
forward-and-back or as figure eights.
3.2.9.1.12. Place a pull string along with cables where run in conduits and spare capacity
in conduit remains. Tie off ends of the pull string to prevent the string from
falling onto the conduit.
3.2.9.1.13. When exiting the primary pathway, such as cable or basket tray, to the
workstation outlets, exit via the top of the pathway. Secure the cables to the
pathway using an approved cable tie.
3.2.10. Building Management System Integration:
3.2.10.1. The contractor shall coordinate with the controls contractor to determine all wiring and
programming requirements necessary to integrate the lighting control system with the
BMS system.
3.3 PROGRAMMING
3.3.1. Refer to specification section 260800: Electrical Commissioning.
3.3.2. Programming of the networked lighting control system shall be by a factory-authorized agent of
the Manufacturer of the system. All programming, testing, trouble shooting, etc. shall be
included in this contract.
3.3.3. To facilitate start-up, all devices daisy-chained together (using CAT-5) shall automatically be
grouped together into a functional lighting control zone.
3.3.4. All lighting control zones shall be able to function according to default settings once adequate
power is applied and before any system software is installed.
3.3.5. Once software is installed, system shall be able to auto-discover all system devices without
requiring any commissioning.
3.3.6. All system devices shall be capable of being given user defined names.
3.3.7. All devices within the network shall be able to have their firmware reprogrammed remotely and
without being physically uninstalled for purposes of upgrading functionality at a later date.
3.3.8. All sensor devices shall have the ability to detect improper communication wiring and blink its
LED in a specific cadence as to alert installation/startup personnel.
3.3.9. The lighting control system shall be fully integrated with the building management system.

JKA #15-100 260943 - 16
3.4.1. Manufacturer's field service: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of a factory-
authorized service representative to supervise the initial start-up, pretesting and adjustment of
the low-voltage lighting control system.
3.4.2. At least three weeks prior to any testing, notify the Engineer so that arrangement can be made
for witnessing test, if deemed necessary. All pretesting shall have been tested satisfactorily prior
to the Engineer's witnessed test.
3.4.3. Prefunctional resting:
3.4.3.1.1. Inspect for physical damage, defects alignment and fit.
3.4.3.1.2. Perform mechanical operational tests in accordance with Manufacturer's

instructions.
3.4.3.1.3. Compare nameplate information and connections to Contract Documents.
3.4.3.1.4. Check tightness of all control and power connections.
3.4.3.1.5. Check that all covers, barriers and doors are secure.
3.4.3.2. Contractor shall provide all necessary programming assistance to set up and program
the low-voltage lighting control equipment.
3.4.3.3. Electrical tests:
3.4.3.3.1. The system shall be completely tested in accordance with operational

parameters and Manufacturer's instructions. Any problem shall be
documented and corrected.
3.4.3.3.2. Test all control circuits and verify proper operation of all lighting circuits
throughout the control system.
3.4.3.3.3. Ensure the room controls match that of the schedules on the Contract
Documents.
3.4.3.3.4. Verify the proper integration with the mechanical control system for override
control and monitoring of low-voltage lighting control system.
3.4.3.3.5. Provide a complete report listing every device, the date it was tested, the
results and the date retested (if failure occurred during the previous test).
The test report shall indicate that every device tested successfully.
3.4.4. Functional performance testing: Refer to Specification Section 260800: Electrical

Commissioning for requirements of system wide functional performance testing.
3.4.5. Contractor shall replace at no costs to the Owner all devices which are found defective or do not
operate within factory specified tolerances.
3.4.6. Contractor shall submit the testing final report for review prior to Project closeout and final
acceptance by the Owner. Test report shall indicate test dates, devices tested, results,
observation, deficiencies and remedies. Test report shall be included in the operation and
maintenance manuals.
3.5 TRAINING

JKA #15-100 260943 - 17
3.5.1. Factory authorized service representative shall conduct an 4 hour training session for Owner's
Representatives upon completion and acceptance of system. Instruction shall include operation,
programming and maintenance of equipment. The training session shall be video recorded, and
video provided to the owner on a flash drive.
3.5.2. Contractor shall schedule training with a minimum of 7 days advanced notice.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 260943 - 18
SECTION 262413
SWITCHBOARDS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Main service switchboard.
1.1.1.2. Distribution switchboards (800 amps and greater).
1.1.2.1. Division 03: Cast-in-place concrete. Equipment housekeeping pad.
1.1.2.2. Division 09: Painting. Touch-up of painted surfaces.
1.2 REFERENCES
FS W-C-375; Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Service.
ANSI C12; Code for Electricity Metering.
UL 486E; Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum and/or Copper
Conductors.
UL 489; Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit
Breaker Enclosures.
UL 512; Fuseholders.
UL 869A; Service Equipment.
UL 891; Dead-Front Switchboards.
UL 943; Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters.
UL 977; Fused Power-Circuit Devices.UL 1053; Ground-Fault Sensing and
Relaying Equipment.
UL 1066; Low Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in
Enclosures.
UL 1558; Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear.
NEMA AB1; Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
NEMA KS1; Enclosed Switches.
NEMA PB 2; Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.
NEMA PB 2.1; General Instruction for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600
Volts or less.
NEMA PB 2.2; Application Guide Ground Fault Protective Devices for Equipment.
County of Tehama SWITCHBOARDS
JKA #15-100 262413 - 1
NEMA SG5; Power Switchgear Assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
listed standards.
1.3.1.2. Shop Drawings to include:
1.3.1.2.1. Front, plan and side view elevations with overall dimensions.
1.3.1.2.2. Conduit entrance locations and requirements.
1.3.1.2.1. Nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral
and ground.
1.3.1.2.2. Switchboard instrument details and accessories.
1.3.1.2.3. Electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip rating and
withstand ratings.
1.3.1.3. Furnish structural calculations for equipment anchorage as described in Section
260010: Basic Electrical Requirements.
1.3.1.5. Complete Bill of Material listing all components.
1.3.1.6. Final test results.
1.3.1.7. Warranty.
1.3.2. Dimensions and configurations of switchboards shall conform to the space allocated on the
Drawings. The Contractor shall submit a revised layout if equipment furnished varies in size
from that indicated on Drawings for the Engineer's approval.
1.4.1. Supply operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of Section
260010: Basic Electrical Requirements, to include the following:
1.4.1.3. Pictorial parts list and part numbers.
1.4.1.4. Pictorial and schematic Electrical Drawings of wiring systems, including
operating and safety devices, control panels, instrumentation and annunciators.
1.4.1.5. Telephone numbers for the authorized parts and service distributors.
1.4.1.6. Include all service bulletins and torque Specifications for all terminations.
1.4.1.7. Final testing report.
1.5.3. Independent Testing Agency qualifications: Refer to Section 260010: Basic Electrical
Requirements.

JKA #15-100 262413 - 2
1.6.1. Delivery: Switchboard components shall not be delivered to the Project site until protected
storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not
Manufacturer at no cost to Owner. Components shall be properly packaged in factory-
fabricated containers and mounted on shipping skids.
1.6.3. Handling: Handle in accordance with NEMA PB2.1 and Manufacturer's written instructions.
Be careful to prevent internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring.
Damaged units shall not be installed. Replace damaged units and return equipment to
Manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
1.7.1. Units and components offered under this Section shall be covered by a 1 year parts and
labor warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and workmanship.
1.8 SYSTEM START-UP
1.9 EXTRA MATERIAL
1.9.1. Provide one spray can of matching finish paint for touching up damaged surfaces after
installation.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer, to match the existing switchboard.
2.2 SWITCHBOARDS - GENERAL
2.2.1. Enclosure:
2.2.1.1. Each switchboard shall consist of a dead front, completely metal enclosed self-
supporting structure. Construction shall consist of vertical sections of the
universal frame type bolted together and braced with self-tapping bolts. Sides,
top and rear shall be covered with captive-bolt fastened steel plates having
formed edges all around. Front plates shall be sectionalized and removable. All
plates shall be fabricated from 12 gage steel and shall have die-formed edges
all around. The switchboard frame shall be suitable for use as floor sills in indoor
installations. Corners shall be reinforced with rigged gussets internal and
external to the structural members. Provide ventilators located on the roof of the
switchboard over the overcurrent protective device and bus compartments to
ensure adequate ventilation within the enclosure.
2.2.1.2. Switchboards shall have depth as required to house all equipment contained
within it. Switchboard shall be constructed so that the back and front of all
sections align. Construction of the board shall allow maintenance of incoming
line terminations, device connections and all bus bolted connections.
2.2.1.3. All devices shall be accessible and removable from the front unless rear access
is indicated on the Drawings.
2.2.1.4. Provide necessary hardware to permit locking every overcurrent protective
device handle in the "OFF" position.
2.2.1.5. Provide hinged access doors to all termination, meter and relay compartments
with knurled and slotted large head captive-bolts. The design shall allow access
to compartments without tools and without removing any panels.

JKA #15-100 262413 - 3
2.2.1.6. Furnish cable pull sections or top cable pull boxes where indicated on the
Drawings complete with cable tie down supports.
2.2.1.7. Switchboard shall be suitable for use as service entrance equipment and be
labeled in accordance with UL requirements.
2.2.1.8. Utility metering compartment section shall be fabricated to meet all utility
company requirements. Where separate vertical section is required for utility
metering, match and align with switchboard enclosure.
2.2.2. Bus assembly and terminations:
2.2.2.1. Switchboard bus bars and connections shall consist of high conductivity silver-
plated copper (1000 amps per square inch maximum)tin-plated aluminum (750
amps per square inch maximum) mounted on heavy duty glass polyester
supports. Bolted connections using Belleville washers are required for all
internal connections, including those between protective devices and bus.
2.2.2.2. Bus arrangement shall be Phase A-B-C-N left-to-right, top-to-bottom and front-
to-rear as viewed from the front. Horizontal and vertical bus ampere rating shall
be uniform from end-to-end.
2.2.2.3. All bussing to and from an overcurrent protective device shall be rated to the
frame sizing, not the trip rating.
2.2.2.4. Where "SPACE" is indicated in the switchboards, cross connectors and
mounting hardware shall be installed to match the frame size ampere rating
noted on the Electrical Drawings. All "SPACES" shall be ready for installation of
overcurrent protective devices at a future time.
2.2.2.5. Shipping splits and provisions for future bus extension shall be provided with
necessary bus splices.
2.2.2.6. Each switchboard shall contain a full length, bottom/front located copper ground
bus that is securely connected to each vertical section. Ground bus shall be
sized in accordance with UL 891, Table 25.1.
2.2.2.7. Termination lugs: High compression circumference crimped type rated for use
with aluminum/copper conductors.
2.2.2.8. Switchboards shall be fully rated for a minimum of 65,000 AIC.
2.2.2.9. Neutral bus shall be 100 percent rated unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
2.2.2.10. Main service switchboards:
2.2.2.10.1. Removable neutral link: Provide removable bolted bus section for the
purpose of disconnecting the ground circuit conductor from the premises
wiring at the supply side of the service in accordance with NEC article
230-75.
2.2.2.10.2. Main bonding jumper: Connection between the grounded circuit
conductor and the equipment ground conductor at the supply side of the
service. Size in accordance with NEC table 250-94 or 12-1/2% of the
area of the largest phase conductor in accordance with NEC article 250-
79(c).
2.2.3. Switching and overcurrent protective devices:
2.2.3.1. Refer to Section 262816: Overcurrent Protective Devices.
2.2.3.2. Main overcurrent protective devices(s) shall be fixed mounted molded case
breaker with interrupting rating and frame and trip ratings as indicated on
Drawings.
2.2.3.3. Feeder overcurrent protective device(s) shall be fixed mounted molded case
breaker with frame and trip rating as indicated on Drawings.

JKA #15-100 262413 - 4
2.2.3.4. Devices interrupting rating shall match that of switchboard for which the device
is installed.
2.2.3.5. Series ratings of overcurrent protective devices is not acceptable unless
specifically noted on the Drawings.
2.2.3.6. Devices shall be manually operated unless shunt trip and/or electrically operated
devices are indicated on Drawings.
2.2.4. Refer to Electrical Drawings for the following:
2.2.4.1. Mounting style; voltage; terminal lug size, location and quantity; bus ampacity;
interrupting capacity of bus and overcurrent protective devices, quantity, poles
and rating of overcurrent protective devices. Note that the AIC value noted on
the Drawings for distribution equipment is the minimum rating of all components;
values are in RMS symmetrical amps.
2.2.5. Miscellaneous requirements:
2.2.5.1. Circuit numbering: Starting at the top, odd numbered circuits in sequence down
the left hand side and even numbered circuits down the right hand side.
2.2.5.2. Nameplates: Engraved nameplates shall be provided for each device and all
"SPACES" located in the switchboard. An engraved nameplate shall also be
provided indicating the switchboard designation. See Section 260553:
Electrical Identification for requirements.
2.2.5.3. All control wires shall be labeled with wire markers and referenced to the control
wiring diagrams. Provide colored wires with colored stripes to facilitate trouble-
shooting and locating both ends of wires. Do not use wires with all the same
wire color. Use fork, crimp type terminations on all control wires.
2.2.5.4. Provide a test block and plugs for voltage and current monitoring at each main
switch. Provide engraved legend plates to indicate function of each test point.
2.2.5.5. Vertically mounted mains shall have the operating handle in the up position
when energized.
2.2.6. Finish:
2.2.6.1. Five step zinc phosphate pre-treatment, one coat of rust inhibiting dichromate
primer and one coat of baked-on enamel finish, ANSI 61 (light gray).
2.2.6.2. A seven step spray wash, electroplate primer with final baked-on enamel finish;
ANSI 61 (light gray) is an acceptable finish alternative.
2.3 INDIVIDUALLY FIXED MOUNTED DEVICE SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCTION
2.3.1. Overcurrent protective devices shall be individually mounted with line and load bus
connections. Devices shall be front removable and load connection rear accessible.
2.3.2. Insulated rigid bus connection shall extend from the load side of individually mounted
overcurrent protective devices into rear compartment where outgoing cable connections may
be made without reaching into or near the main horizontal or vertical bus. Provide molded
removable covers at all joints.
2.3.3. Distribution sections shall be sectionalized to provide a front device section, an intermediate
bus section and a rear feeder cable section. There shall be a vertical barrier of glass
polyester between the device compartment and the bus compartment.
2.3.4. Provide a rear compartment vertical insulating barrier between the cable compartment and
the main bus to protect against inadvertent contact with main or vertical bus bars.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of switchboard
JKA #15-100 262413 - 5
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1. Ensure all conduit stub-ups for bottom entry into switchboard are in place and located as
required per Shop Drawings.
3.2.2. Embed in concrete two (2) 4-inch minimum channel iron sills, front and back edges of
equipment, arranged per Manufacturer's recommendations. Install sills flush in finished
surface in contact with equipment mounting frame.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install switchboards in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on
the Drawings and as specified herein.
3.3.2. Handling, storage, installation and energize of switchboards shall be carried out in
accordance with latest edition of NEMA Publications PB 2.1.
3.3.3. Freestanding switchboards shall be accurately aligned, leveled and bolted in place on full-
length channels securely fastened to concrete floor.
3.3.4. Switchboards shall be anchored and braced to withstand seismic forces as calculated per
Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements.
3.3.5. Provide mounting hardware brackets, bus bar drilling and filler pieces for all unused spaces.
3.3.6. "Train" interior wiring; bundle and clamp, using specified plastic wire wraps specified under
Section 260519: Building Wire and Cable.
3.3.7. Replace any panel pieces, doors or trims having dents, bends, warps or poor fit that may
impede ready access, security or integrity.
3.3.8. Conduits terminating in concentric, eccentric or oversized knockouts at switchboards shall
have ground bushings and bonding jumpers installed interconnecting all such conduits and
the switchboards.
3.3.9. Check and tighten all bolts and connections with a torque wrench using Manufacturer's
recommended values.
3.3.10. Visually inspect switchboards for rust and corrosion if signs of rust and corrosion are
present, board shall be restored to new condition or replaced.
3.4.1. Manufacturer's field service: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of a factory-
authorized service representative to supervise the initial start-up, testing and adjustment of
the switchboard.
Testing Agency to perform all quality control electrical testing, calibration and inspection
required herein. Independent Testing Agency shall meet the requirements as outlined in
Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements. Testing Agencies objectives shall be to:
3.4.2.1. Assure switchboard installation conforms to specified requirements and
operates within specified tolerances.
3.4.2.2. Field test and inspect to ensure operation in accordance with Manufacturer's
recommendations and Specifications.
3.4.2.3. Prepare final test report including results, observations, failures, adjustments
and remedies.
3.4.2.4. Apply label on switchboard upon satisfactory completion of tests and results.
3.4.2.5. Verify ratings and settings and make final adjustments.
3.4.3. At least three weeks prior to any testing, notify the Engineer so that arrangement can be
made for witnessing test, if deemed necessary. All pretesting shall have been tested
satisfactorily prior to the Engineer's witnessed test.
3.4.4. The Contractor shall supply a suitable and stable source of electrical power to each test site.
The Testing Agency shall specify the specific power requirements.
JKA #15-100 262413 - 6
3.4.5. Testing of overcurrent protective devices shall be done only after all devices are installed
and system is energized.
3.4.6.1. Provide Testing Agency with Contract Documents and Manufacturer instructions
for installation and testing.
3.4.6.2.1. Compare nameplate information and connections to Contract
Documents.
3.4.6.2.3. Verify appropriate anchorage, required clearances and correct
alignment.
3.4.6.2.4. Inspect doors, panels and sections for paint, dents, scratches, fit and
missing hardware
3.4.6.2.7. Verify correct barrier installation.
3.4.6.2.8. Verify that relays and overcurrent protective devices meet Drawing,
power system study and specified requirements.
instructions.
3.4.6.2.10. Exercise active components.
3.4.6.2.11. Inspect control power and instrument transformers.
3.4.6.2.12. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated
surfaces.
3.4.6.3.1. Perform resistance tests through bus joints with low-resistance
ohmmeter. Joints that cannot be directly measured due to permanently
installed insulation wrap shall be indirectly measured from closest
accessible connection.
3.4.6.3.2. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground, at 1000V DC for 60 seconds. Investigate
resistance values less than 50 megohms.
3.4.6.3.3. Perform over-potential test on each bus section, each phase-to-ground
with phases not under test grounded, in accordance with Manufacturers
published data. Test voltage shall be applied for 60 seconds.
3.4.6.3.4. Perform insulation-resistance tests at 1000V DC for 60 seconds on
control wiring. Do not perform this test on wiring connected to solid-
state components.
3.4.6.3.5. Perform current injection tests on the entire current circuit in each
section of switchgear.
3.4.6.3.5.1. Perform current tests by primary injection, where
possible, with magnitudes such that minimum of 1.0
amp flows in secondary circuit.
3.4.6.3.5.2. Where primary injection is impractical, utilize secondary
injection with minimum current of 1.0 amp.
3.4.6.3.5.3. Test current at each device.
3.4.6.3.6. Ground resistance:
JKA #15-100 262413 - 7
3.4.6.3.6.1. Measure system neutral-to-ground insulation-resistance
with neutral disconnect link temporarily removed.
Replace neutral disconnect link after test.
3.4.6.3.6.2. Measure insulation-resistance of control wiring at 1000
VDC for 60 seconds. Refer to Manufacturers
instruction for devices with solid-state components
3.4.6.3.7. Calibrate digital meters to 0.5 percent and verify meter multipliers.
3.4.6.3.8. Test overcurrent protection devices per Section 262816: Overcurrent
Protective Devices.
3.4.6.4. Test values:
3.4.6.4.1. Bolt torque levels shall be in accordance with Manufacturers
requirements.
3.4.6.4.2. Compare bus connection resistances to values of similar connections.
3.4.6.4.3. Insulation-resistance values for bus, control wiring and control power
transformers shall be in accordance with Manufacturers published data.
Values of insulation resistance less than Manufacturers minimum levels
should be investigated. Over-potential tests should not proceed until
insulation-resistance levels are raised above minimum values.
3.4.6.4.4. Insulation shall withstand the over-potential test voltage applied.
3.4.6.4.5. Determine contact resistance in microhms. Resistance values shall not
exceed high limit of normal range as indicated in Manufacturers
published data.
3.4.6.4.6. System neutral-to-ground insulation shall be a minimum of one
megohm.
3.4.7. In the event that the system fails to function properly during the testing as a result of
inadequate pretesting or preparation, the Contractor shall bear all costs incurred by the
necessity for retesting including test equipment, transportation, subsistence and the
Engineer's hourly rate.
3.4.8. Contractor shall replace at no costs to the Owner all devices which are found defective or do
not operate within factory specified tolerances.
3.4.9. Contractor shall submit the Testing Agency's final report for review prior to Project closeout
and final acceptance by the Owner. Test report shall indicate test dates, devices tested,
results, observation, deficiencies and remedies. Test report shall be included in the
3.5 CLEANING
3.5.1. Prior to energizing of switchboard the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior of
enclosure of all construction debris, scrap wire, etc. using Manufacturer's approved methods
and materials.
3.5.2. Upon completion of Project prior to final acceptance the Contractor shall thoroughly clean
both the interior and exterior of switchboard per Manufacturers approved methods and
materials. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris.
3.5.3. Touch-up paint any marks, blemishes or other finish damage suffered during installation.
3.6 TRAINING
3.6.1. Factory authorized service representative shall conduct a 4 hour training seminar for
Owner's Representatives upon completion and acceptance of system. Instructions shall
include safe operation, maintenance and testing of equipment with both classroom training
and hands-on instruction.
3.6.2. Contractor shall schedule training with a minimum of 7 days advance notice.

JKA #15-100 262413 - 8
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 262413 - 9
SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Branch circuit panelboards.
1.1.1.2. Distribution panelboards (400 amps to 800 amps).
1.2 REFERENCES
FS W-P-115; Power Distribution Panel.
1.2.1.2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
NEMA AB 1; Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
NEMA PB 1; Panelboards.
NEMA PB 1.1; Instructions for safety instruction, operation and maintenance of
panelboard rated 600 volts or less.
UL 67; Panelboards.
Conductors.
Breaker Enclosures.
UL 870; Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
and electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed standards
application.
1.3.1.3. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, cabinet dimensions, gutter sizes, layout of
contactors, relays, time clocks, lug sizes, bussing diagrams; make, location and
capacity of installed equipment; mounting style; finish and panelboard nameplate
inscription.

DATE PANELBOARDS
JKA #15-100 262416 - 1
1.3.1.7. Warranty.
1.3.2. Dimensions and configurations of panelboards shall conform to the spaces allocated on the
Drawings for their installation. The Contractor shall include with the submittal a layout of the
electrical room if it differs from construction documents for review and approval by the
Engineer prior to release of order.
1.4.1.5. Final testing reports.
1.6.1. Delivery: Panelboard components shall not be delivered to the Project site until protected
storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not
1.6.3. Handling: Handle in accordance with NEMA PB1.1 and Manufacturer's written instructions.
Be careful to prevent internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring.
Damaged units shall not be installed. Replace damaged units and return equipment to
Manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
1.7.1. Units and components offered under this Section shall be covered by a 1 year parts and
1.8 EXTRA MATERIAL
1.8.1. Turn over two (2) sets of panelboard keys to the Owner at completion of Project. All
panelboards shall be keyed alike.
installation.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer.
2.1.1.2. General Electric.

DATE PANELBOARDS
JKA #15-100 262416 - 2
2.1.1.3. Siemens/I-T-E.
2.1.1.4. Square D.
2.2 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL
2.2.1. Enclosure:
2.2.1.1. Cabinets shall be NEMA Type 1 enclosure, door and trim of code gauge galvanized
steel.
2.2.1.2. Panelboard covers shall be door-in-door construction such that inner door exposes the
overcurrent protective devices and the outer door exposes the complete panelboard
interior (i.e. branch circuit conductors, lugs, neutral and ground bus, overcurrent
protective devices, etc.). Outer door shall have full-length piano hinge and inner door
shall have two-point hinges.
2.2.1.3. Provide combination spring catch and lock on inside edge of the inner door trims with
flush fitting joint between door and trim. Locks on all panelboards shall be keyed alike.
Doors 36 inches and over in height shall be provided with three-point catch and lock.
Provide quarter-turn captive bolts on the outer door.
2.2.2. Bus assembly and terminations:
2.2.2.1. Bus shall be bolted copper with taps arranged for distributed phase connections to
branch circuit devices
2.2.2.2. Cross connectors shall be copper, drilled and tapped for bolt-on device connections,
arranged for double row placement of device and designed to permit removal or
addition of overcurrent protection devices without disturbing adjacent devices or
removing main bus connections.
2.2.2.3. Neutral bus shall be 100 percent rated of phase bus bars and shall have lugs for each
outgoing branch circuit or feeder requiring a neutral connection unless otherwise
noted.
2.2.2.4. Ground bus shall be full size with lugs for each outgoing branch circuit and feeder.
2.2.2.5. Refer to panelboard schedules on Drawingsin Specification for bus rating. Bus rating
shall match or be greater than main device or main lug rating.
2.2.2.6. As a minimum, bus bars shall be rated 22,000 AIC for 120/208 volt panelboards.
Unless otherwise noted.
2.2.2.7. Provide full sized bussing in all sections of multi-section panelboards.
2.2.2.8. Termination Lugs: Rated for use with aluminum/copper conductors.
2.2.2.9. All "SPACES" shall be ready for installation of future overcurrent protective device.
2.2.3. Miscellaneous requirements:
2.2.3.1. Circuit numbering: Starting at the top, indicate odd numbered circuits in sequence
down the left hand side and even numbered circuits down the right hand side. Multi-
section panelboards shall have continuous consecutive circuit numbers, i.e. Section 1
(circuit numbers 1-42), Section 2 (circuit numbers 43-84), Section 3 (circuit numbers
85-126). Provide metal embossed circuit identification of panelboards.
2.2.3.2. Directories: A 6" x 8" minimum size circuit directory frame and card with clear plastic
covering shall be provided inside the inner panelboard door to reflect conditions at
completion of Work. Directory shall be typewritten denoting loads served by room
number or area for each circuit.
2.2.3.3. Nameplates: Provide engraved nameplate for each panelboard. See Section 260533:
Electrical Identification for requirements.
2.2.4. Refer to Panelboard Schedules for the following:

DATE PANELBOARDS
JKA #15-100 262416 - 3
2.2.4.1. Mounting style; service voltage; terminal lug size, location and quantity; bus ampacity;
interrupting capacity of bus and breakers; quantity, poles and rating of overcurrent
protective devices.
2.2.5. Overcurrent protective devices:
2.2.5.1. Refer to Section 262816: Overcurrent Protection Devices.
2.2.5.2. Overcurrent protective devices shall be molded case circuit breakers where indicated
on panelboard schedules or Electrical Drawings.
2.2.5.3. Main devices shall be hard bus connected to the panelboard bus bars.
2.2.5.4. In all cases, panelboards fed directly from a transformer shall have a main overcurrent
protective device. If not indicated on the Drawings or Panelboard Schedules, provide
this device sized to provide the full capacity of the transformer rating.
2.2.5.5. Main devices shall be vertically mounted and shall have their operating handle in the
up position when energized. Main devices that are mounted in the same manner as
the branch devices are NOT acceptable; i.e. main devices shall be individually
mounted at the top or bottom of the phase bus bars.
2.2.5.6. Panelboards overcurrent protective devices layout shall conform to the layout indicated
on the panelboard schedules.
2.2.5.7. Provide handle ties for single pole circuit breakers that share a neutral conductor.
2.2.6. Finish: Five step zinc phosphate pre-treatment, one coat of rust inhibiting dichromate primer
and one coat of baked-on enamel finish, ANSI 61 (light gray).
2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
2.3.1. Enclosures shall be sized as required and shall meet the space restriction allocated on
Drawings. Panelboard shall comply with NEMA PS 1 and FS W-P-115.
2.3.2. Provide necessary hardware to permit locking every overcurrent protective device handle in
the "OFF" position.
2.3.3. Where "SPACE" is indicated on panelboard schedules or Drawings, install cross connectors
and mounting hardware to match the frame size ampere rated noted.
2.4 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
2.4.1. Enclosure shall be 20" wide x 5-3/4" deep, surface or flush mounted and shall comply with
NEMA PB 1 and FS W-P-115.
2.4.2. Flush panelboards mounted adjacent to each other shall be same physical size.
2.4.3. Where "SPACE" is indicated on panelboard schedules or Drawings, install minimum 100-
ampere branch circuit cross connectors and mounting hardware. For future device spaces
larger than 100 amps, cross connectors shall match the frame size ampere rated noted.
3. PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of panelboard
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install panelboards in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on
3.2.2. Set panels plumb and symmetrical with building lines in conformance with PB1.1. Furnish
and install all construction channel bolts, angles, etc., required to mount the equipment
3.2.3. Mounting height shall be 6 feet.

DATE PANELBOARDS
JKA #15-100 262416 - 4
3.2.4. Panelboards shall be anchored and braced to withstand seismic forces as calculated per
Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements.
3.2.5. Provide mounting hardware brackets, busbar drillings and filler pieces for all unused spaces.
3.2.6. "Train" interior wiring; bundle and clamp, using specified plastic wire wraps specified under
Section 260519: Building Wire and Cable.
3.2.7. Replace panel pieces, doors or trim exhibiting dents, bends, warps or poor fit that may
impede ready access, security or integrity.
3.2.8. Conduits terminating in concentric, eccentric or oversized knockouts at panelboards shall
have ground bushings and bonding jumpers installed interconnecting all such conduits and
the panelboard.
3.2.9. Check and tighten all bolts and connections with a torque wrench using Manufacturer's
recommended values.
3.2.10. Provide four 3/4" spare conduits stubbed-out of flush mounted panelboards to nearest
accessible ceiling space.
3.2.11. Visually inspect panelboard for rust and corrosion. If signs of rust and corrosion are present,
restore or replace panelboard to new condition.
3.2.12. In damp and wet locations, mount panelboards with a minimum one inch of air space
between cabinet and the wall or other support material.
3.2.13. Provide close up plugs in all unused openings in the cabinet.
3.2.14. Field install handle ties on single pole circuit breakers that share a neutral conductor.
3.2.15. Circuit breakers feeding "Fire Alarm Control Panel(s)" or other fire alarm equipment shall be
red in color.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLS
required herein. Testing Agencies objectives shall be to:
3.3.1.1. Assure panelboard installation conforms to specified requirements and operates within
3.3.1.3. Prepare final test report including results, observations, failures, adjustments and
remedies.
3.3.1.4. Apply label on panelboards upon satisfactory completion of tests and results.
3.3.4. Testing of overcurrent protective devices shall be done only after all devices are installed
and system is energized.
3.3.5.1. Provide Testing Agency with Contract Documents and Manufacturer instructions for
installation and testing.

DATE PANELBOARDS
JKA #15-100 262416 - 5
instructions.
3.3.5.2.4. Check tightness of all power connections.
3.3.5.3.1. Insulation resistance: 1000 volt DC tests for one minute on all 600 volt
and lower rated equipment, components, buses, feeder and branch
circuits and control circuits. Test phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
circuits showing less than 10 megohms resistance to ground shall be
repaired or replaced.
3.3.5.3.2. Circuit continuity: All feeders shall be tested for continuity. All neutrals
shall be tested for improper grounds.
3.3.5.3.3. Ground resistance: Test resistance to ground of system and equipment
ground connection.
Protective Devices.
inadequate pretesting or preparation. The Contractor shall bear all costs incurred by the
results, observation, deficiencies and remedies. Test report shall be included in the
3.4 CLEANING
3.4.1. Prior to energizing of panelboards the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior of
enclosure of all construction debris, scrap wire, etc. using Manufacturer's approved methods
and materials.
both the interior and exterior of panelboards per Manufacturers approved methods and
END OF SECTION

DATE PANELBOARDS
JKA #15-100 262416 - 6
SECTION 262716
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Hinged cover enclosures.
1.1.1.2. Cabinets.
1.1.1.3. Terminal blocks and accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1.1. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):
NEMA ICS 4; Terminal Blocks and Industrial use.
1.2.1.2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
UL 65; Standards for Wired Cabinets.
UL 1059; Terminal Blocks.
UL 1773; Termination Boxes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.3.1.2. Describe Project construction, material, finish and any specific features of each
component.
application.
1.3.1.5. Shop Drawings: Indicating wiring diagrams and equipment arrangement within
cabinets.
County of Tehama CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
JKA #15-100 262716 - 1
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Hoffman Engineering Co.
2.1.1.2. Circle AW Products.
2.2 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
2.2.1. Construction: Shall be code gauge galvanized steel with standard concentric knockouts for
conduit terminations. Size shall be as indicated on Drawings. Cabinet shall be NEMA 250
Type 1.
2.2.2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray baked enamel finish.
2.2.3. Covers: Continuous hinged steel door, lockable and keyed to match panelboard locks.
2.2.4. Mounting:
2.2.4.1. Flush cabinets shall be furnished with concealed trim clamps and shall be not less than
4 inches deep.
2.2.4.2. Surface cabinets shall be furnished with screw cover trim, flush hinged door and shall
not be less than 6 inches deep.
2.3 BACKBOARDS
2.3.1. Furnish cabinet with 3/4-inch fire retardant plywood mounting backboard on interior unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.4 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES
2.4.1. Terminal blocks: NEMA ICS 4; UL listed.
2.4.2. Power terminals: Unit construction type, closed-back with tubular pressure screw
connections, rated 600 volts.
2.4.3. Signal and control terminals: See terminal strips in Section 260519: Building Wire and
Cable.
2.4.4. Identification: Identify terminal strips with permanent numbers.
2.4.5. Wiring diagram: Provide wiring diagram in protective pocket on inside front cover of cabinet.
Diagram shall indicate control wiring, connections and layout of components within
enclosure.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of cabinets and
enclosures installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Set cabinets and enclosures plumb and symmetrical with building lines. Furnish and install
all construction channel bolts, angles, etc. required to mount all equipment furnished under
this Section of the Specifications.
3.2.2. Cabinets and enclosures shall be anchored and braced to withstand seismic forces
calculated in accordance with that referenced in Section 260010: Basic Electrical
Requirement.

JKA #15-100 262716 - 2
3.2.3. "Train" interior wiring, bundle and clamp using specified plastic wire wraps.
3.2.4. Replace doors or trim exhibiting dents, bends, warps or poor fit that may impede ready
access, security or integrity.
3.2.5. Terminate conduit in cabinet with lock nut and grounding bushing.
3.2.6. Terminate wiring on terminal blocks and identify each with heat shrink tags.
3.3 CLEANING
3.3.2. Vacuum clean cabinet on completion of installation.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 262716 - 3
SECTION 262719
SURFACE RACEWAYS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Surface metal raceways.
1.2 REFERENCES
FS W-C-582; Conduit, Raceway, Metal and Fitting; Surface.
UL 5; Standard for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings.
UL 5A Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings.
UL 870; Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
physical and electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed
standards.
1.3.1.2. Clearly mark on each data sheet the specific item(s) being submitted and proposed
application.
1.3.1.3. Submit Manufacturer's installation: Provide written instructions for raceway products
special installation techniques.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Surface metal raceways:
2.1.1.1.1. Legrand/Wiremold

County of Tehama SURFACE RACEWAYS
JKA #15-100 262719 - 1
2.2 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS
2.2.1. Assembly: Single or Double compartment raceway shall be complete to include bases,
covers, end plates, compartment divider, fittings and connections as required. Raceways
shall be UL labeled.
2.2.2. Construction: Raceway base, cover, compartment divider and end plates shall be constructed
of cold rolled steel with 0.094" minimum wall thickness.of extruded aluminum of No. 6063-T5
aluminum alloy extrusion. Corner extrusions shall be identical to linear extrusions.
2.2.3. Size: Raceway size and length shall be as indicated on Drawings.
2.2.4. Fittings: Boxes, extension rings, couplings, elbows and connectors shall be designed for use
with raceway system.
2.2.5. Finish: Gray enamel.Stainless steel.215 R1 clear anodized.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of surface raceway
3.2 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY ASSEMBLY
3.2.1.1. Install raceway in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated
on Drawings and as specified herein.
3.2.1.2. Contractor shall coordinate raceway lengths with building walls, counter and actual
field conditions.
3.2.1.3. Raceways mounted on walls above benches and counters shall align exactly with
each end of bench or counter.
3.2.1.4. Use flat-head screws to fasten channel to surfaces, at heights indicated on
Drawings, per Manufacturer's instructions. Mount plumb and level.
3.2.1.5. Installed complete with all necessary corner connectors, 'T' connectors, feed
connectors, compartment dividers and any other hardware required to provide a
complete system as described in the Drawings.
3.2.1.6. Provide fittings to feed the raceway from the back.
3.2.2. Branch circuiting: Provide connection to pre-wired or field wired assembly as indicated on
Drawings. Install circuit identification tags on pigtails. Receptacles shall be identified with
panel and circuit I.D. above each outlet with gray dymo label.
3.2.3. Grounding: Ground continuity shall be maintained throughout entire raceway length per NEC.
END OF SECTION

County of Tehama SURFACE RACEWAYS
JKA #15-100 262719 - 2
SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Wall switches.
1.1.1.2. Occupancy sensor switches.
1.1.1.3. Receptacles.
1.1.1.4. Floor mounted service boxes.
1.1.1.5. Coverplates.
1.1.2.1. Division 03: Cast-in-place concrete.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1.1. Federal Specification (FS):
FS W-P-455A; Plate, Wall Electrical.
FS W-C-596; Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle and Cable Outlet.
FS W-S-896; Switch, Toggle.
1.2.1.2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):
NEMA WD-1; General-Purpose Wiring Devices.
NEMA WD-5; Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices.
1.2.1.3. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL):
UL 20 General-Use Snap Switches.
UL 231; Power Outlets.
UL 310; Electrical Quick-Connect Terminals.
UL 498; Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.
UL 514A; Metallic Outlet Boxes.
UL 514D; Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices.
UL 943; Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.
UL 1681; Wiring Device Configurations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
listed standards.

County of Tehama WIRING DEVICES
JKA #15-100 262726 - 1
1.3.1.3. Provide color finishes for Architect to select from.
1.3.2. Where inscribed device coverplates are noted on the Drawings or in the Specifications,
conform to the requirements of Section 260553: Electrical Identification.
1.5 WARRANTY
1.5.1. Occupancy sensors offered under this Section shall be covered by a 1 one year parts and
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Switches, receptacles and coverplates:
2.1.1.1.1. Pass & Seymour.
2.1.1.1.2. Leviton.
2.1.1.1.3. Hubbell.
2.1.1.2. Occupancy sensors switches:
2.1.1.2.1. SensorSwitch, Inc.
2.1.1.2.2. WattStopper
2.1.1.2.3. Cooper Controls Greengate
2.1.1.2.4. Leviton
2.1.1.3. Floor mounted service boxes:
2.1.1.3.1. FSR.
2.1.1.3.2. Walker.
2.2 WALL SWITCHES
2.2.1. Standards: Provide general-purpose 120/277 VAC switches that conform to NEMA WD-1
Specifications.
2.2.2. Color: Device color shall be as selected by the Architect, unless otherwise noted.
2.2.3. Wall switches:
2.2.3.1. Provide twenty ampere, 120/277 volt, Specification grade, toggle handled, quick-
make slow-break, quiet type snap switch with silver cadmium alloy contacts, binding
head terminal screws, back and side wired with totally enclosed case.
2.2.3.2. Single pole, single throw switches: Pass & Seymour #20AC1 series or Leviton
#1221 series.
2.2.3.3. Double pole, single throw switches: Pass & Seymour #20AC2 series or Leviton
#1222 series.
JKA #15-100 262726 - 2
2.2.3.4. Three way switches: Pass & Seymour #20AC3 series or Leviton #1223 series.
2.2.3.5. Four way switches: Pass & Seymour #20AC4 series or Leviton #1224 series.
2.3 OCCUPANCY SENSOR SWITCHES
2.3.1. General:
2.3.1.1. Occupancy sensors shall comply with the latest edition of the California Building
Energy Efficiency Standards, California Building Code, Part 6 and be certified by
The California Energy Commission. All sensors shall be listed in the most current
directory of Certified Occupancy Sensing Devices or be on file with the CEC.
2.3.1.2. Occupancy sensors shall be dual-technology type infrared/ultrasonic as specified
herein with voltage and wattage rating equal to the lights being controlled.
2.3.1.3. All sensors shall have an adjustable time delay for turning off lights and a sensitivity
adjustment.
2.3.1.4. Ceiling mounted sensors shall operate on low voltage as supplied by control unit.
Control unit shall contain power supply and relays for switching loads.
2.3.1.5. Units shall be furnished to cover the areas being controlled. No allowance shall be
given for providing sensors improperly sized for the square footage of the controlled
area.
2.3.2. Color: Device color shall be as selected by Architect, unless otherwise noted.
2.3.3. Wall mounted single level control sensors:
2.3.3.1. Sensor shall be dual-technology infrared/ultrasonic type with single level switching
capability and coverage up to 900 square feet.
2.3.3.2. Operation shall be manual "ON" and manual or automatic "OFF".
2.3.3.3. Time delay adjustment from 30 seconds to 30 minutes. Set adjustment at 5
minutes.
2.3.3.4. Load capacity of 0 to 1800 watts at connected voltage.
2.3.3.5. For use in small utility closets where dual level switching is not indicated.
2.3.4. Wall mounted dual level control sensors:
2.3.4.1. Sensor shall be dual-technology infrared/ultrasonic type with dual level switching
capability and coverage up to 1000 square feet.
2.3.4.2. Operation shall be manual (in two levels) "ON" and manual (in two levels) or
automatic (full) "OFF".
minutes. Set sensitivity adjustment at maximum.
2.3.4.4. Load capacity of 50 to 1000 watts at connected voltages.
2.3.4.5. Integral photocell, 2 circuit, compatible with electronic bi-level switching ballast.
Provide with ambient light control adjustment.
2.3.4.6. For use in offices where dual level switching is indicated.
2.3.5. Ceiling mounted omnidirectional sensors:
2.3.5.1. Sensor shall be dual-technology infrared/ultrasonic type omnidirectional with
coverage up to 1000 square feet.
2.3.5.2. Operation shall be automatic "ON" and automatic "OFF". Provide with a manual
override switch.
minutes. Set sensitivity adjustment at maximum.
2.3.5.4. Load capacity of 15 amps per power or slave pack at connected voltage.

JKA #15-100 262726 - 3
2.3.5.5. Power pack consisting of Class 2, 24V output transformer and relay in single
housing, capable of powering up to 2 sensors and mounted inside standard 4-inch
square box.
2.4 RECEPTACLES
2.4.1. Standards:
2.4.1.1. Provide general purpose 20 ampere, 125/250 VAC receptacles that conform to
NEMA WD-1 Specifications. Specialty receptacles shall conform to NEMA WD-5
Specifications as applicable.
2.4.1.2. Provide NEMA 5-20R, industrial (heavy-duty) specification grade as noted herein, 20
amp, 125 VAC, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding type receptacles.
2.4.1.3. Receptacles shall be the standard conventional style device.
2.4.2. Color:
2.4.2.1. Device color shall be as selected by the Architect, unless otherwise noted.
2.4.3. General purpose single outlets:
2.4.3.1. Provide self-grounding back and side wired with binding head staked terminal screw.
2.4.3.2. Use Pass & Seymour #5361 series Leviton #5361 series.
2.4.4. General purpose duplex receptacles:
2.4.4.1. Provide self-grounding, back and side wired with binding head staked terminal
screws and break-off strip for two-circuit wiring.
2.4.4.2. Use Pass & Seymour #5362 series or Leviton #5362 series.
2.4.5. Ground fault circuit interrupting (GFCI) receptacles:
2.4.5.1. Provide 20 amp, 125 VAC, receptacles consisting of NEMA 5-20R duplex device
with integral solid state sensing and signaling circuitry capable of detecting and
interrupting a maximum 5 milli-amp line-to-ground fault current in approximately
1/40th of a second.
2.4.5.2. Provide visual device with trip indication, manual reset and test mechanisms and
with point of use and multi-outlet protection.
2.4.5.3. Use Pass & Seymour #2091-S series, Hubbell GF-5362 series, Leviton #6898
series, for Specification grade GFCI receptacles.
2.4.6. Special purpose receptacles: Provide Specification grade devices with the NEMA
configuration, voltage and current rating, number of poles and ground provisions as noted on
the Drawings.
2.5 FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE BOXES
2.5.1. Multi-service recessed floor box:
2.5.1.1. Combination power and communication cable service floor box with flush cover and
recessed compartment for access to service device(s). Box shall be for installation
concrete floors.
2.5.1.2. Box shall be constructed of formed steel with provisions for adjustments before and
after pour. Access hatch shall be steel and provided with carpet trim and insert.
Make allowances for floor finishes if other then carpet. Furnish with specified
receptacle(s) and accessories called for on Drawings.
2.5.1.3. Use FSR FL-200 series or Legrand 'Resource RFB' series for power only, or power
and data only applications.
2.5.1.4. Use FSF FL-500P series or Legrand Evolution series for AV applications.
2.6 COVERPLATES
2.6.1. General:

JKA #15-100 262726 - 4
2.6.1.1. Provide all coverplates with rounded edges and corners, smooth and free of
grooves, embossing or other embellishment.
2.6.1.2. Provide mounting screws to match the plate finish.
2.6.1.3. Provide gang type coverplates where two or more devices are installed at one
location. Individual gangable coverplates are not acceptable.
2.6.1.4. Provide plates of one design, standard conventional, throughout the Project unless
otherwise specified.
2.6.2. Color: Coverplate color shall be as specified by the Architect, unless otherwise noted.
2.6.3. Plastic coverplates:
2.6.3.1. Provide smooth, high impact, self-extinguishing thermoplastic coverplates and 0.100
inches thick with rounded edges and corners.
2.6.3.2. Provide openings to accommodate the devices indicated on the Drawings and in the
Specifications.
2.6.4. Metal coverplates:
2.6.4.1. Provide smooth, type 430 stainless steel coverplates, 0.035" thick with rounded
edges and corners.
2.6.4.2. Provide openings to accommodate the devices indicated on the Drawings and in the
Specifications.
2.6.4.3. Provide removable plastic film to protect coverplates during installation. Remove
film at time of final acceptance.
2.6.5. Weatherproof coverplates:
2.6.5.1. Non-public areas:
2.6.5.1.1. Provide horizontal mounted, weatherproof in-use coverplate for one duplex
or one GFCI receptacle. Provide gasketed, spring loaded, vertically self-
closing covers suitable for use in damp and wet locations as described in UL
514 and NEC 406. Covers shall allow the use of the device with the cover
closed.
2.6.5.1.2. Furnish base plates, covers, hinge pins, spring and screws of corrosion
resistant type 302 stainless steel.
2.6.5.2. Public area receptacles:
2.6.5.2.1. Provide horizontal mounted weatherproof in-use coverplate for one duplex or
one GFCI receptacle. Provide gasketed, spring loaded, lockable, vertically
self-closing covers suitable for use in damp and wet locations as described in
UL 514 and NEC 406. Covers shall allow the use of the device with the
cover closed.
2.6.5.2.2. Furnish base plates, covers, hinge pins, spring and screws of corrosion
resistant type 302 stainless steel.
2.6.5.2.3. Provide two (2) keys for each locking type coverplate.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of wiring device
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1. Coordinate device heights in vending, kitchen and utility areas with benches and counters.
3.2.2. Coordinate switch mounting location with Architectural details. Unless otherwise noted,
locate switches on latch side of door.
JKA #15-100 262726 - 5
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install wiring devices in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on
3.3.2. Install devices with the vertical centerline plumb and with all edges of the device flush against
the adjacent wall surfaces.
3.3.3. Mount switches at 42 inches above finished floor unless otherwise noted.
3.3.4. Mount receptacles vertically with the centerline 15 inches above finished floor and with
grounding slot at bottom.
3.3.5. Mount receptacles vertically when mounting above counters, mount with grounding slot to the
left.
3.3.6. Mount GFCI receptacles in the following locations, whether indicated as GFCI type or not on
the drawings:
3.3.6.1. In bathrooms.
3.3.6.2. Where receptacles are installed within 60 from edge of sinks.
3.3.6.3. In kitchens above counters.
3.3.6.4. On rooftops.
3.3.6.5. Outdoors.
3.3.6.6. Where serving vending machines.
3.3.6.7. Where serving electric drinking fountains.
3.3.7. Provide coverplates for all outlet boxes, switches, receptacles, etc.
3.3.8. Install blank coverplates on all outlet boxes in which no device is required or installed.
3.3.9. Provide coverplates that completely cover wall opening and seat against wall.
3.3.10. Provide stainless steel coverplates for all devices in kitchen/food service equipment areas.
3.4 OCCUPANCY SENSOR SWITCHES
3.4.1. Set time delays in sensors in accordance with Owner's directions.
3.4.2. Where substituted occupancy sensors are used, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
to place sensors in the proper place and with proper alignment to cover to all the area
intended in the Contract Documents.
3.4.3. Provide one power pack with each ceiling mounted occupancy sensor, whether indicated or
not on plans, unless wiring details or plans indicate otherwise.
3.4.4. Where Drawings indicate ceiling mounted slave units, provide 3 #14 in 1/2" conduit from
power pack to slave unit and connect so that input from either master or slave sensor will turn
lights on.
3.4.5. Install wall mounted devices with the vertical centerline plumb and alleges of device flush
against adjacent wall surfaces. Mount devices at 42 inches above finished floor unless
otherwise noted.
3.5 FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE BOXES
3.5.1.1. Install floor boxes to be level or within 1/16" below screed line.
3.5.1.2. Make conduit connections and anchor box to sub-flooring.
3.5.1.3. Core drill hole in floor (core sized based on Manufacturer's installation instructions)
for insert of poke-through device.
3.5.1.4. Make conduit connection to poke-through box from floor below.

JKA #15-100 262726 - 6
3.5.2. Coordination: Contractor shall mark the location of all floor boxes with paint prior to
installation or core drilling for review and approval by Architect.
3.6.1. Electrical testing:
3.6.1.1. Test proper polarity of all receptacles.
3.6.1.2. Test ground continuity of all wiring devices.
3.6.1.3. Test ground fault interrupting device operation.
3.6.2. Visual and mechanical inspection:
3.6.2.1. Check proper operation of all switches.
3.6.2.2. Visually inspect and replace damaged or defective devices.
3.7 CLEANING
3.7.1. Clean interior of all boxes from dirt and paint prior to installation of devices.
3.7.2. Clean wiring devices and coverplates from dirt and paint over spray.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 262726 - 7
SECTION 262816
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Fuses.
1.1.1.2. Molded case circuit breakers.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1.1. Federal Specification (FS):
FS W-F-870; Fuseholders (for Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses.
UL 248(1-16); Low-Voltage Fuses.
Breaker Enclosures.
UL 977; Fused Power-Circuit Devices.UL 1066; Low Voltage AC and DC
Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures.
NEMA AB 1; Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
standards.
1.3.1.2. Describe product operation, equipment and dimensions and indicate features of each
component.
1.3.1.4. Provide factory certification of trip characteristics for each type and rating of circuit
breaker.
1.3.1.5. Provide current let-through and melting time information for each type and rating of
fuses.
1.3.1.8. Warranty.
County of Tehama OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
JKA 15-100 262816 - 1
1.4.1.3. Parts list and part numbers.
1.6.1. Delivery: Overcurrent Protective Device components shall not be delivered to the Project site
until protected storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is
not acceptable. Equipment damaged during shipment shall be replaced and returned to
1.6.3. Handling: Handle in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. Be careful to
prevent internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Damaged units shall
not be installed. Replace damaged units and return equipment to Manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and workmanship. Warranty
shall begin upon acceptance by the Owner.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIAL
1.8.1. Three (3) spare fuses of each size and type or a minimum of 10 percent of the number
installed, whichever is greater, shall be supplied to the Owner in the specified spare fuse
cabinet(s).
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Fuses:
2.1.1.1.1. Bussmann Division, Cooper Industries.
2.1.1.1.2. Gould Shawmut Co.
2.1.1.2. Circuit breakers:
2.1.1.2.1. Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer.
2.1.1.2.2. General Electric.
2.1.1.2.3. Siemens/I-T-E.
2.1.1.2.4. Square D.
JKA 15-100 262816 - 2
2.2 FUSES
2.2.1. General: All power fuses shall be time-delay, high interrupting (300 K AIC), current limiting
type, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. All fuses shall be the product of a single
Manufacturer and shall be selectively coordinated when applied in 2:1 ratios. Types of fuses
shall be as follows:
2.2.1.1. 0 - 600 amperes: UL Class J, dual element, time delay type fuse with separate
overload and short-circuit elements. The fuse shall hold 500% of rated current for a
minimum of 10 seconds.
2.2.1.2. 601 - 4000 amperes: UL Class L, time delay type fuses with 99.9% pure silver fuse
links and "O-rings" to seal between the end bells and the fuse barrel. Fuses shall
hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds, clear 20 times rated current
in 0.01 seconds or less.
2.2.1.3. Motor branch circuit fuses (0-600 amperes): UL Class J dual element, time delay
type fuse. Motor branch circuit fuses shall be sized for Type 2 coordination for the
motor controller and back-up motor overload protection and shall be coordinated with
motor starter overload relay heaters. See Section 262900: Motor Controls.
2.2.2. Control and instrument fuses shall be suitable for installing in blocks or fuseholders. Exact
type and rating shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer of the equipment being
protected.
2.2.3. Fuses for installation in current limiting circuit breakers or motor circuit protectors shall meet
the specific requirements of the Manufacturers of that equipment to ensure compatibility.
2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2.3.1. Branch and feeder circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt on and trip indicating.
2.3.2. Where stationary molded case circuit breakers are indicated on the Drawings to be current
limiting type, they shall be current limiting as defined by UL 489 and shall not employ any
fusible elements.
2.3.3. Circuit breakers shall have interrupting capacity not less than that indicated on the Drawings
or if not indicated, not less than 22,000 RMS symmetrical amps for 208 volt systems.
2.3.4. Covers shall be sealed on non-interchangeable breakers and trip unit covers shall be sealed
on interchangeable trip breakers to prevent tampering. Circuit breaker ratings shall be clearly
visible after installation or engraved nameplates shall be provided stating the rating. All
ferrous parts shall be plated to minimize corrosion.
2.3.5. Circuit breakers shall be toggle, quick-make and quick-break operating mechanisms with trip-
free feature to prevent contacts being held closed against overcurrent conditions in the
circuit. Trip position of the breakers shall be clearly indicated by operating handles moving to
a center position.
2.3.6. Multipole breakers shall have a single handle to open and close all contacts simultaneously in
both manual operation and under automatic tripping. Interpole barriers shall be provided
inside the breaker to prevent any phase-to-phase flashover. Each pole of the breaker shall
have means for Arc extinguishing.
2.3.7. All terminals shall be rated for aluminum or copper wire.
2.3.8. Circuit breakers with trip ratings 100 amp and smaller shall be ambient temperature
compensated, thermal magnetic type unless otherwise noted. Breakers shall be of full size,
1" per pole type. Panels with more than one branch breaker larger than 100 amps shall be
installed in distribution type panels.
2.3.9. Circuit breakers with trip ratings 101 amps through 400 amps shall have solid state electronic
trips with true RMS reading through the 13th harmonic with 1% accuracy, interchangeable
trip via front accessible current plug, adjustable instantaneous and short time be rated as
indicated on Drawings at the voltage indicated.
2.3.10. Circuit breakers with trip ratings 401 amps through 1200 amps shall have electronic trips with
the following characteristics:
JKA 15-100 262816 - 3
2.3.10.1. Electronic true RMS sensing trip, adjustable via current plug.
2.3.10.2. Adjustable long time setting and delay.
2.3.10.3. Adjustable short time pick-up and delay.
2.3.10.4. Adjustable instantaneous pick-up.
2.3.10.5. Mechanical targets on overload, ground fault and short circuit.
2.3.11. Accessories: Provide accessories as noted on the Drawings, i.e. shunt-trip, auxiliary
contacts, undervoltage trip, alarm switch, etc.
2.3.12. Spaces in the boards shall be able to accept any combination of 1, 2 or 3 pole circuit
breakers as indicated. Provide all necessary bus, device supports and mounting hardware
sized for frame, not trip rating.
2.3.13. Series rated breakers are not acceptable unless specifically noted on the Drawings.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of overcurrent
protective device installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install overcurrent protective devices in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions,
as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
3.2.2. A fuse identification label shall be placed inside the door of each fused switch. Each label
shall show fuse type, ampere rating and Manufacturer.
3.2.3. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals; including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment Manufacturers published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors.
Where Manufacturers torque requirements are not indicated tighten connectors and terminals
to comply with tightening torque specified in UL Standard 486A.
3.2.4. Install overcurrent protective devices and accessories in accordance with Manufacturer's
written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices
comply with requirements. All devices shall be installed in accordance with applicable NEC
and NEMA standards for installation.
3.2.5. Circuit breakers serving "Fire Alarm Control Panel(s)" shall be red in color.
3.3.1.1. Assure overcurrent protective device installation conforms to specified requirements
and operates within specified tolerances.
remedies.

JKA 15-100 262816 - 4
3.3.4. Testing of overcurrent protective devices shall be done only after all devices are installed and
system is energized.
instructions.
Documents.
3.3.5.3.1. Circuit continuity: All feeders shall be tested for continuity. All neutrals
shall be tested for improper grounds.
3.3.5.3.2. Determine that circuit breaker will trip under overcurrent condition, with
tripping time in conformance with NEMA AB 1 requirements.
3.3.5.3.3. Test all circuit breakers with frame size 225 amps and larger and 10
percent of all circuit breakers with frame sizes less than 225 amps in
each panelboard, distribution board, switchboard, etc. unless otherwise
noted.
results, observation, deficiencies and remedies. Test report shall be included in the operation
and maintenance manuals.
3.4 ADJUSTING
3.4.1. Adjust circuit breaker trip settings based on recommendations of Section 260060: Power
System Study.
3.4.2. Adjust circuit breaker trip settings for coordination with other overcurrent protective devices in
system.
3.4.3. Adjust circuit breaker trip settings for adequate protection from overcurrent and fault currents.
3.5 CLEANING
overcurrent protective devices per Manufacturer's approved methods and materials. Remove
paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris.
3.6 TRAINING
3.6.1. Factory authorized service representative shall conduct a 4 hour training seminar for Owner's
Representatives upon completion and acceptance of system. Instructions shall include safe
operation, maintenance and testing of equipment with both classroom training and hands-on
instruction.
END OF SECTION

JKA 15-100 262816 - 5
SECTION 262819
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Disconnect Switches.
1.2 REFERENCES
as otherwise indicated on specified:
FS W-F-870; Fuseholders (for plug and enclosed cartridge fuses).
FS W-S-865; Switch, Box (enclosed), Surface-Mounted.
NEMA KS 1; Enclosed Switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
listed standards.
1.3.1.2. As a minimum the following characteristics shall be indicated:
1.3.1.2.1. NEMA types.
1.3.1.2.2. Current rating.
1.3.1.2.3. Number of poles.
1.3.1.2.4. Fuse provisions.
1.3.1.2.5. Enclosure dimensions.
1.3.1.2.6. Voltage.
1.3.1.2.7. Horsepower rating (if applicable).
1.3.1.2.8. Short circuit rating.

County of Tehama DISCONNECT SWITCHES
JKA #15-100 262819 - 1
2. PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.4. Square D.
2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
2.2.1. Description: Provide NEMA heavy-duty type switches with dead front construction and
padlock provisions for up to three locks in the OFF position.
2.2.2. Switch interior: Provide switch with switchblades that are fully visible in the OFF position
when the door is open. Provide UL listed lugs for copper conductors, lugs to be front
removable. Provide plated current carrying part.
2.2.3. Switch mechanism: Provide switches with a quick-make, quick-break, position indicating,
operating handle and mechanism and a dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening
of the switch door in the ON position or closing of the switch mechanism with the door open.
Furnish an electrical interlock to de-energize control wiring when the disconnect switch is
opened.
2.2.4. Enclosures: Provide switches with hinged cover in NEMA 1 general purpose, sheet steel
enclosure for dry locations and NEMA 3R weatherproof galvanized enclosures for exterior,
damp or wet locations, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Provide an enclosure
treated with a rust-inhibiting phosphate primer and finished in gray baked enamel.
2.2.5. Ratings: Provide switches that are horsepower rated for 240 VAC or 600 VAC as required for
the circuit involved and that meet I-SQUARED-T requirements. Fusible switches to have
provisions for the types of fuses specified in Section 262816: Overcurrent Protective
Devices. UL listed short circuit rating, when equipped with fuses to be 200,000 amperes
RMS symmetrical. Furnish with provisions for RK-1 fuses for switches up to 600 amps. 800
amp switches and larger to have provisions for Class L fuses.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of disconnects
switch installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances. Do
not commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1. Coordinate locations of switches and equipment in the field to provide code required
clearances in front of switches and to ensure that switches are insight of the controller as
described in NEC Article 430.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install disconnect switches where indicated on the Drawings.
3.3.2. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
3.3.3. Include construction channel and mounting hardware as required to support disconnect
switch.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
JKA #15-100 262819 - 2
3.4.1. Provide engraved, machine screw retained type 'NP' nameplate on each disconnect switch.
See Section 260553: Electrical Identification.
3.5 CLEANING
both the interior and exterior of enclosure of all construction debris, scrap wire, paint
splatters, dirt, etc.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 262819 - 3
SECTION 262900
MOTOR CONTROLS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1. Work included: Labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the
installation required for the item specified under this Division, including but not
limited to:
1.1.1.1. Manual motor starters.
1.2 REFERENCES
FS W-S-865; Switch, Box, (Enclosed) Surface-Mounted.
Conductors.
Breaker Enclosures.
UL 508; Industrial Control Equipment.
UL 508A; Industrial Control Panels.
NEMA ICS 2; Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.
NEMA KS 1; Enclosed Switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
and electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed
standards.
component.

County of Tehama MOTOR CONTROLS
JKA #15-100 262900 - 1
1.6.1. Delivery: Motor control components shall not be delivered to the Project site until protected
storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not acceptable.
Equipment damaged during shipment shall be replaced and returned to Manufacturer at no
cost to Owner.
prevent internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Damaged units shall
not be installed. Replace damaged units and return equipment to Manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and workmanship. Warranty
shall begin upon acceptance by the Owner.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIAL
installation.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.4. Square D.
2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
2.2.1. Manual motor starter: AC general purpose Class A manually operated reversing full-voltage
controller for induction motors rated in horsepower, with overload relay, red pilot light,
auxiliary contacts when indicated on Drawings and pushbutton operator. Starter size and
number of poles shall be as required for connections indicated on Drawings. Furnish in
conformance with NEMA ICS 2.
2.2.2. Fractional horsepower manual starters: AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-
voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit and
toggle operator. Starter size and number of poles shall be as required for connections
indicated on Drawings. Furnish in conformance with NEMA ICS 2.
2.2.3. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 or 3R.

JKA #15-100 262900 - 2
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of motor control
3.2 GENERAL
3.2.1. Install motor control equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions, as indicated
on the Drawings and as specified herein.
3.2.2. Install equipment where indicated on the Drawings.
3.3 MOUNTING
3.3.1. Include construction channel and mounting hardware as required to support motor control
equipment.
3.3.2. Coordinate locations of control equipment in the field to provide code clearances in front of
devices.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
3.4.1. Provide engraved, machine screw-retained type 'NP' nameplate on each motor control
device. Refer to Section 260553: Electrical Identification.
3.5.1.1. Assure motor controls installation conforms to specified requirements and operates
within specified tolerances.
remedies.
3.5.1.4. Verify ratings and settings and make final adjustments to overcurrent protective
devices.
3.5.3. Testing of overcurrent protective devices shall be done only after all devices are installed and
system is energized.
instructions.
3.5.4.2.6. Verify that motor controls meet specified requirements.

JKA #15-100 262900 - 3
3.5.4.3.1. Insulation resistance: 1000 volt DC tests for one minute on all 600 volt and
lower rated equipment, components, buses, feeder and branch circuits and
control circuits. Test phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground circuits showing
less than 10 megohms resistance to ground shall be repaired or replaced.
3.5.4.3.2. Circuit continuity: All feeders shall be tested for continuity. All neutrals shall
be tested for improper grounds.
3.5.4.3.3. Ground resistance: Test resistance to ground of system and equipment
ground connection.
Protective Devices.
results, observation, deficiencies and remedies. Test report shall be included in the operation
and maintenance manuals.
3.6 CLEANING
3.6.1. Prior to energizing of motor controls the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior of
enclosure of all construction debris, scrap wire, etc. using Manufacturers approved methods
and materials.
both the interior and exterior of motor controls per Manufacturers approved methods and
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 262900 - 4
SECTION 264313
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD)

1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Surge protective devices (SPD).
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1.1. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
ANSI/IEEE C62.1; Standard for Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power
Circuits.
ANSI/IEEE C62.11; Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arrestors for AC Power
Circuits.
ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1; Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000V
and Less) AC Power Circuits.
ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2; Recommended Practices on Characterization of Surges in
Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits.
ANSI/IEEE C62.45; Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment
Connected to Low-Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power
Circuits.
1.2.1.2. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL):
UL 1283 Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
UL 1449; Surge Protective Devices, 3rd Edition.
1.2.1.3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
NEMA LS1; Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices.
NEMA PB1.1; Instructions for Safety Instruction Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or less.
1.3.1. Provide surge protective device (SPD) equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings,
and modifications as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. To maximize
performance and reliability and to obtain the lowest possible let-through voltages, the ac surge
protection shall be integrated into electrical distribution equipment such as switchboards and
panelboards.
1.3.2. SPD units and all components shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance
with the latest applicable UL standard (ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition).
1.3.3. SPD units shall be furnished in two Types. Type 1 and Type 2 as outlined below:

County of Tehama SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
JKA #15-100 264313 - 1
1.3.3.1. Type 1: Permanently connected SPDs installed on the line or load side of main
disconnect device(s), at main switchboard. This type closely relates to the devices
previously referred to as secondary surge arrestors. These Type 1 SPDs should be
specially suited to conduct the high energy impulses from lightning strikes.
1.3.3.2. Type 2: Permanently connected SPD installed on the load side of the service panel
main disconnect device(s). This type most closely relates to devices that were
previously classified as Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS). These Type 2
SPDs are specially suited for distribution boards and panelboard applications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
standards.
component.
1.4.1.4. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, cabinet dimensions, complete component listing
and layout within cabinet, amperage ratings and capacities, system characteristics
and wiring diagrams.
1.4.1.7. Warranty.
260010: Basic Electrical Requirements, to include the following.
1.5.1.2. Instruments for routine maintenance.
1.7.1. Delivery: SPD components shall not be delivered to the Project site until protected storage
space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not acceptable.
cost to Owner.
1.7.3. Handling: Handle in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions. Be careful to
prevent internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Damaged units shall not
be installed. Replace damaged units and return equipment to Manufacturer.

JKA #15-100 264313 - 2
1.8 WARRANTY
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Clipper Power System (Cutler-Hammer).
2.1.1.2. Square D Surgelogic/EFI.
2.2 GENERAL
2.2.1. All Specification noted herein apply to the switchboard and panelboard units, unless otherwise
noted.
2.2.2. The SPD system utilizes diversion modules to suppress and divert transient voltage and surge
currents. The system is designed to provide protection for sensitive electronic devices against
the effects of surges, transients and electrical line noise.
2.2.3. Environmental requirements:
2.2.3.1. Operating temperature: -40c to 60c.
2.2.3.2. Relative humidity: 0 - 95%.
2.2.3.3. Operating altitude: 0 - 12,000 feet.
2.2.3.4. Audible noise: Less than 35 dB.
2.2.4. Electrical requirements:
2.2.4.1. Unit operating voltage: The SPD system voltage shall be as indicated on the
Drawings.
2.2.4.2. Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV): The MVOC shall not be less than
125% of the nominal system operating voltage.
2.2.4.3. The suppression system shall incorporate thermally protected metal-oxide varistors
(MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the service entrance and all
other distribution levels. The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes,
selenium cells, air gaps, or other components that may crowbar the system voltage
leading to system upset or create any environmental hazards.
2.2.4.4. Protection modes: The SPD must protect all modes of the electrical system being
utilized. The required protection modes are indicated by bullets in the following table:
PROTECTION MODES TABLE
Configuration L-N L-G L-L N-G
WYE
Delta N/A N/A
Single Split Phase
High Leg Delta
2.2.4.5. Nominal discharge current (In): All SPDs applied to the distribution system shall have
a 20kA In rating regardless of their SPD Type (includes Types 1 and 2) or operating
voltage. SPDs having an In less than 20kA shall be rejected.

JKA #15-100 264313 - 3
2.2.4.6. Voltage protection rating (VPR): The maximum ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition VPR for
the device shall not exceed the following:
VOLTAGE PROTECTION RATING TABLE
System Voltage L-N L-G L-L N-G
120/208 700V 700V 1200V 700V
277/480 1200V 1200V 2000V 1200V
346/600 1500V 1500V 3000V 1500V
2.2.5. SPD design:
2.2.5.1. The SPD shall be maintenance free and shall not require any user intervention
throughout its life. SPDs containing items such as replaceable modules, replaceable
fuses, or replaceable batteries shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring any
maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections shall not be
accepted. SPDs requiring user intervention to test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or
similar device shall not be accepted.
2.2.5.2. The surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal
stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide
equal impedance paths to each matched MOV.
2.2.5.3. Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise
attenuation for electric line noise shall be up to 50dB from 10kHz to 100MHz using
the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method.
2.2.5.4. No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be used as surge
current conductors. All internal components shall be soldered, hardwired with
connections utilizing low impedance conductors.
2.2.5.5. SPD shall provide the following integral monitoring options:
2.2.5.5.1. Each unit shall have a green/red solid-state indicator light that reports the
status of the protection on each phase:
2.2.5.5.1.1. For WYE configured units, the indicator lights must report the
status of all protection elements and circuitry in the L-N and L-
G modes. WYE configured units shall also contain an
additional green/red solid-state indicator light that reports the
status of the protection elements and circuitry in the N-G
mode.
2.2.5.5.1.2. For delta configured units, the indicator lights must report the
status of all protection elements and circuitry in the L-G and L-
L modes.
2.2.5.5.1.3. The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light
shall indicate that damage has occurred on the respective
phase or mode. All protection status indicators shall indicate
the actual status of the protection on each phase or mode. If
power is removed from any one phase, the indicator lights
shall continue to indicate the status of the protection on all
other phases and protection modes.
2.2.5.5.2. The SPD must include Form C dry contacts (one NO and one NC) for
remote annunciation of its status. Both the NO and NC contacts shall
change state under any fault condition.
2.2.5.5.3. The SPD shall contain an audible alarm that will be activated under any
fault condition. There shall also be an audible alarm silence button used
to silence the audible alarm after it has been activated.
2.2.5.5.4. Surge counter:
2.2.5.5.4.1. The SPD shall be equipped with an LCD display that indicates
to the user how many surges have occurred at the location.

JKA #15-100 264313 - 4
2.2.5.5.4.2. The surge counter shall trigger each time a surge event with a
peak current magnitude of a minimum of 50 20A occurs.
2.2.5.5.4.3. A reset pushbutton shall also be standard, allowing the surge
counter to be zeroed. The reset button shall contain a
mechanism to prevent accidental resetting of the counter via a
single, short-duration button press. In order to prevent
accidental resetting, the surge counter reset button shall be
depressed for a minimum of 2 seconds in order to clear the
surge count total.
2.2.5.5.4.4. The ongoing surge count shall be stored in non-volatile
memory. If power to the SPD is completely interrupted, the
ongoing count indicated on the surge counters display prior to
the interruption shall be stored in non-volatile memory and
displayed after power is restored. The surge counters
memory shall not require a backup battery in order to achieve
this functionality.
2.2.5.6. The unit shall contain thermally protected MOVs. These thermally protected MOVs
shall have a thermal protection element packaged together with the MOV in order to
achieve overcurrent protection of the MOV. The thermal protection element shall
disconnect the MOV(s) from the system in a fail-safe manner should a condition
occur that would cause them to enter a thermal runaway condition.
2.2.5.7. All of the SPDs components and diagnostics shall be contained within one discrete
assembly. SPDs or individual SPD modules that must be ganged together in order to
achieve higher surge current ratings or other functionality shall not be accepted.
2.2.5.8. Safety requirements:
2.2.5.8.1. The SPD shall minimize potential arc flash hazards by containing no user
serviceable or replaceable parts and shall be maintenance free. SPDs
requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of
connections shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring user intervention to
test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar device shall not be
accepted.
2.2.5.8.2. SPDs designed to interface with the electrical assembly via conductors
shall require no user contact with the inside of the unit. Such units shall
have any required conductors be factory installed.
2.3 SYSTEM APPLICATION
2.3.1. The SPD applications covered under this section include switchboards panelboard
assemblies. All SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C, B, and A environments.
2.3.2. The minimum surge current capacity the device is capable of withstanding shall be as shown
in the following table:
MINIMUM SURGE CURRENT CAPACITY TABLE
Category Application Per Phase Per Mode
C Service Entrance Locations (Switchboards) 250kA 125kA
B High Exposure Roof Top Locations 160kA 80kA
(Switchboards and Panelboards)
A Branch Locations (Panelboards) 120kA 60kA
2.3.3. All SPDs installed on the line side of the service entrance disconnect shall be Type 1 SPDs.
All SPDs installed on the load side of the service entrance disconnect shall be Type 1 or Type
2 SPDs.
2.4 PANELBOARDS

JKA #15-100 264313 - 5
2.4.1. The SPD application covered under this section includes lighting and outlet panelboards. The
SPD units shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41
Category A or B environments.
2.4.2. The SPD shall not limit the use of through-feed lugs, sub-feed lugs, and sub-feed breaker
options.
2.4.3. SPDs shall be installed immediately following the load side of the main breaker. SPDs
installed in main lug only panelboards shall be installed immediately following the incoming
main lugs.
2.4.4. The panelboard shall be capable of re-energizing upon removal of the SPD.
2.4.5. The SPD shall be interfaced to the panelboard via a direct bus bar connection.
2.4.6. The SPD shall be included and mounted within the panelboard by the manufacturer of the
panelboard.
2.4.7. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard.
2.4.8. The complete panelboard including the SPD shall be UL67 listed.
2.5 SWITCHBOARDS
2.5.1. The SPD application covered under this section is for switchboard locations. Service entrance
located SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE
C62.41 Category C environments.
2.5.2. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the switchboard.
2.5.3. The SPD shall be factory installed inside the switchboard at the assembly point by the original
equipment manufacturer.
2.5.4. Locate the SPD on the load side of the main disconnect device, as close as possible to the
phase conductors and the ground/neutral bar.
2.5.5. The SPD shall be connected through a disconnect (30A circuit breaker). The disconnect shall
be located in immediate proximity to the SPD. Connection shall be made via bus, conductors,
or other connections originating in the SPD and shall be kept as short as possible.
2.5.6. The SPD shall be integral to switchboard as a factory standardized design.
2.5.7. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment.
2.6 ENCLOSURES
2.6.1. All enclosed equipment shall have NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures, unless otherwise
noted. Provide enclosures suitable for locations as indicated on the drawings and as
described below:
2.6.1.1. NEMA 1: Constructed of a polymer (units integrated within electrical assemblies),
intended for indoor use to provide a degree of protection to personal access to
hazardous parts and provide a degree of protection against the ingress of solid
foreign objects (falling dirt).
2.6.1.2. NEMA 4: Constructed of steel, intended for either indoor or outdoor use, to provide a
degree of protection from the following:
2.6.1.2.1. Against access to hazardous parts.
2.6.1.2.2. Of equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign objects
(dirt and windblown dust).
2.6.1.2.3. With respect to the harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of
water (rain, sleet, snow, splashing water, and hose directed water).
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
2.7.1. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this section. All tests shall
be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards.
JKA #15-100 264313 - 6
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of SPD installation
to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances. Do not commence with
installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Install SPD in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
3.2.2. Set cabinets plumb and symmetrical with building lines in conformance with PB1.2. Furnish
and install all construction channel bolts, angles, etc., required to mount the equipment
3.2.3. Provide SPDs on all 120/208 volt distribution switchboards and 120/208 volt panelboards.
3.2.4. Conductors originating from direct bus bar connections shall be individually wrapped with
electric tape in half-lapped increments for added protection of the un-protected conductors.
Tie-wrap the conductors away from the bus bars without any sharp bends. All holes that the
conductors pass through shall be grommets.
3.2.5. Cabinets shall be anchored and braced to withstand seismic forces as calculated per Section
3.3.1.1.1. Inspect for physical damage, defects, alignment and fit.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 264313 - 7
SECTION 265100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Interior lighting fixtures.
1.1.1.2. LEDs.
1.1.1.3. LED drivers.
1.1.1.4. Diffusers.
1.1.1.5. Pole Standards
1.1.2.1. Division 03: Cast-in-place concrete. Light pole foundations and backboxes.
1.1.2.2. Division 05: Miscellaneous. Fittings, brackets, backing supports, rods, etc. as
required for support and bracing of lighting fixtures.
1.1.2.3. Division 09: Acoustical treatment. Slack fixture support wires.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1.2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
UL 66; Fixture Wire.
UL 924; Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment.
UL 1598; Luminaires.
UL 2108; Low Voltage Lighting Systems.
1.2.1.5. Illumination Engineering Society of North America (IESNA):
IESNA LM-79-2008; Approved Method for Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products.
IESNA LM-80-2008; Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED
Light Sources.
1.2.1.6. Restriction of Hazardous Substances in LED (RoHS):
EU RoHS; Directive 2002/95/EC Restriction of Hazardous Materials.
1.3.1. Provide and install a fully functional and operating lighting fixture system as indicated,
complete with lamps, wiring, control and securely attached to support system to meet all
seismic code requirements.

County of Tehama INTERIOR LIGHTING
JKA #15-100 265100 - 1
1.3.2. Where catalog number and narrative or pictorial descriptions are provided, the written
description shall take precedence and prevail.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
listed standards.
1.4.1.3. Independent Testing Laboratories, Inc. or equal, photometric test report for each
luminaire type and lamp combination listed on the fixture schedule. Test reports
shall be based on Illuminating Engineering Society published test procedures and
shall contain candlepower distribution curves in five lateral planes for fixtures with
asymmetric distributions and fixture luminance data for vertical angles above 45
degrees from nadir.
1.4.1.4.1. Suspension details for fixtures recessed in, mounted on or suspended
from hung ceilings. Details shall clearly illustrate proposed methods for
complying with the requirements of CAC Title 24 and UBC Standard No.
47-18 requiring support independent of the suspended ceiling system.
1.4.1.4.2. Where noted in the Fixture Schedule, submit Shop Drawings of special
mounting details, including fixture support, junction box supports,
attachment methods, etc. Shop Drawings shall include plan and section
views indicating all structural members being used for support. Coordinate
Drawing with the mechanical Contractor and show any mechanical
equipment to verify clearances, if applicable.
1.4.1.4.3. Where noted in the Fixture Schedule, submit Shop Drawings from
Manufacturer detailing custom lighting fixtures indicating dimensions,
weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, accessories,
methods of support, etc.
1.4.1.5. Mock-ups: Provide mock-up lighting fixture samples where FIXTURE MOCK-UP is
indicated on the Fixture Schedule. Refer to Part 3 Execution for requirements.
1.4.1.7. Complete bill of material listing all lighting fixtures, lamps and other components.
1.4.1.8. Warranty.
1.4.1.9. In addition to the requirements for Substitutions, under Section 260010: Basic
Electrical Requirements, all requests for approval of non-specified products must be
accompanied by the following:
1.4.1.9.1. A list of comparable buildings where the product is currently installed and
can be observed. Buildings shall be within a 100 mile radius of Lighting
Consultants office.
1.4.1.9.2. Furnish a working sample complete with housing, trim, 8 cord and plug,
and specified lamp.
1.5.1. Supply operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of in
accordance with the requirements of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements, to
include the following:
1.5.1.1. A detailed description and catalog cut of each lighting fixture type.

JKA #15-100 265100 - 2
1.7.1. Delivery: Lighting fixtures shall not be delivered to the Project site until protected storage
space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not acceptable.
cost to Owner.
prevent internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Damaged units shall not
be installed. Replace damaged units and return equipment to Manufacturer.
1.8 WARRANTY
1.8.2. Ballast for fluorescent and high intensity discharge fixtures offered under this Section shall be
covered by a 2 year parts and labor warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in
materials and workmanship. Warranty shall begin upon acceptance by the Owner.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. LEDs:
2.1.1.1.1. Nichia
2.1.1.1.2. Xicato
2.1.1.1.3. Cree
2.1.1.1.4. Lumi-leds
2.1.1.2. LED drivers:
2.1.1.2.1. Osram Sylvania
2.1.1.2.2. North American Philips Lighting Co. (NAPLC)
2.1.1.3. Lighting fixtures: Refer to Fixture Schedule on Drawings.
2.1.1.4. Emergency LED driver:
2.1.1.4.1. Bodine.
2.2 GENERAL

JKA #15-100 265100 - 3
2.2.1. Ferrous mounting hardware and accessories shall be finished using either a galvanic or
phosphate primer/baked enamel process to prevent corrosion and discoloration of adjacent
materials.
2.2.2. Fasteners shall be manufactured of galvanized steel.
2.2.3. Fixtures shall be free of light leaks and shall be designed to provide sufficient ventilation of
lamps and ballasts, including vent holes where required.
2.2.4. All sheet metal Work shall be free from tool marks and dents and shall have accurate angles
bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal. All intersections and joints
shall be formed true and of adequate strength and structural rigidity to prevent any distortion
after assembly. All surfaces shall be finished so as to eliminate all exposed sharp edges. All
mitered corners or joints shall be accurately aligned with abutting intersecting members.
Sheet metal Work shall be properly fabricated so that planes will not deform (i.e. become
concave or convex) due to normal expected ambient and operating conditions.
2.2.5. Wiring channels and lampholder mountings shall be rigid and accurately constructed.
2.2.6. Light emitting diodes (LED):
2.2.6.1. Refer to the Fixture Schedule for size and type of LED lamps required.
2.2.6.2. All diodes shall come from the same manufacturer and carry the same bin number.
2.2.6.3. All diodes shall be tested and tuned for the optimal Kelvin color point.
2.2.6.4. Color correlated temperature: Interior 3500K; Exterior 3000K.
2.2.6.5. Minimum CRI (Color Rendering Index): Interior 80; Exterior 70.
2.2.6.6. LED fixture components shall be free of all toxic materials to include lead, cadmium
and mercury, and shall be RoHS compliant.
2.2.6.7. Groups of three or more diodes in a single housing shall be tested for even
distribution.
2.2.6.8. Standard lumen output shall meet or exceed the State of California Title 24 Energy
Code for high efficiency luminaries.
2.2.6.9. All LED fixtures shall have an IES formatted electronic photometric report.
2.2.6.10. Diodes shall have a minimum life of 50,000 hours and maintain at least 70% of initial
lamp lumens throughout this period.
2.2.7. LED Drivers:
2.2.7.1. LED drivers shall be integral to fixture housing or remotely located, when specified,
within 15 feet of diode assembly.
2.2.7.2. Drivers shall have a minimum life of 50,000 hours and maintain at least 70% of initial
lamp lumens for that period.
2.3 LENSES
2.3.1. Fresnel:
2.3.1.1. Lenses shall have uniform brightness throughout the entire visible area at angles
from 45 to 90 degrees vertical, without bright spots or striations.
2.3.1.2. Lenses shall have opaque risers in colors as specified under the Fixture Schedule.
2.3.1.3. The same Manufacturer, unless otherwise specified, shall furnish all fixtures with
fresnel lenses.
2.3.2. Glass:
2.3.2.1. Flat glass lenses shall be heat tempered borosilicate glass unless otherwise noted.
2.3.2.2. Glass finishes (i.e. sandblasted, etching, polishing) shall be performed as described
in the fixture description.
2.3.3. Acrylic:
JKA #15-100 265100 - 4
2.3.3.1. Lenses shall be injection molded crystal clear 100% virgin acrylic (except as
indicated otherwise in the Fixture Schedule). For lenses with male pattern of
pyramids or cones, specified minimum thickness refers to distance from flat surface
to base of pyramids (cones) or thickness of undisturbed material. For lenses with
female pattern, specified minimum thickness refers to overall thickness of material.
2.3.3.2. Lenses shall fully eliminate lamp images when viewed from all directions within 45 to
90 degree angles from vertical, where the ratio of lamp spacing to the distance from
lamp underside to top of lens does not exceed 1.50. Within the viewing angle from 0
to 45 degrees the ratio of maximum brightness (under a lamp) to minimum
brightness (between lamps) shall not exceed 3 to 1.
2.3.3.3. Finishes (i.e. sandblasting, etching, polishing) shall be performed as described in the
Fixture Schedule.
2.3.3.4. Plastic electrical light diffusers must meet the requirements of Section 2-5209, CAC,
Flame Spread Rating.
2.4 REFLECTOR CONES
2.4.1. Provide 45-degree lamp and lamp imaging cut-off unless otherwise specified in the Fixture
Schedule. In fixtures where upper reflector is separated from cone, cut-off shall be 45-
degrees unless otherwise noted.
2.4.2. Plastic materials shall to be used for reflector cones or aperture plate materials.
2.4.3. Fixture in which reflector cones are riveted or welded to the housing or where removal of the
cone requires pressure to be applied to the finished surface of the reflector shall not be
acceptable.
2.4.4. Cone flange shall be formed as an integral part of the cone and shall have identical color and
finish as the cone, except when specified otherwise in the Fixture Schedule. The flange major
surface shall be perpendicular to the cone axis. The width of the flange shall adequately
cover the ceiling opening without light leaks. No fixture parts (housing, mounting frame, etc.)
shall be visible between the ceiling surface and the edge of the cone flange. The same
requirement shall be applicable to fixtures where the main reflector extends down to the
bottom edge of the fixture without a separate cone. In such cases, the flange shall be formed
as an integral part of the main reflector.
2.4.5. Reflector cones shall be manufactured of uniform gauge, not less than 0.032 thick, high purity
aluminum, Alcoa 3002 alloy, free of spin marks or other defects or blemishes caused during
manufacturing.
2.4.6. The finish on the inner surface of the reflector shall be as described in the Fixture Schedule
and as produced by the Alzak process. The reflector shall have an anodic coating of not less
than four mils thick. The reflector inner surface shall be free of water spotting and shall
maintain a reflectivity ratio of not less than 83% on clear specular finishes. The reflectors shall
have a low iridescence finish.
2.4.7. Reflector cone retention devices shall not deform the cone in any manner.
2.5 FIXTURES
2.5.1. Refer to the Fixture Schedule.
2.5.2. The finish of all fixtures and trim shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect prior to
ordering.
2.5.3. All standard fixtures must bear UL label. Attaching of labels after delivery of fixtures is not
acceptable.
2.5.4. All labels affixed to the fixture shall be in a location not visible from normal viewing angles.
2.6 ARCHITECTURAL COORDINATION
2.6.1. Consult Architectural Drawings for details of ceiling construction, finish, reflected ceiling plans
and other applicable details and provide lighting fixtures suitable for the particular type of
ceiling at each location.

JKA #15-100 265100 - 5
2.6.2. Where fixtures are mounted in architectural coves, soffits, valances or cabinets and are given
an overall length, the Contractor shall verify all lengths in the field prior to releasing fixture
order.
2.6.3. Where fixtures are surface mounted or suspended to match the length of walls or other
architectural elements, the Contractor shall verify all lengths in the field prior to releasing
fixture order.
2.7 FIXTURE TRANSFORMERS
2.7.1. Low voltage transformers:
2.7.1.1. Low voltage transformers shall be core and coil construction, unless otherwise
noted.
2.7.1.2. Primary voltage shall be as noted in Fixture Schedule, secondary voltage 12 VAC,
unless otherwise noted.
2.7.1.3. Where transformers are integral to the fixture, they shall be accessible from below.
2.7.1.4. Sound rating shall be the lowest available. Replace excessively noisy transformers
at no cost to the Owner.
2.8 POLES
2.8.1. Wind-load strength: 80 mph and 1.3 gust factor for total support assembly, including pole,
base and anchorage, where used, to carry the fixtures, supports and appurtenances at the
indicated heights above grade without deflection or whipping.
2.8.2. Arm, bracket and tenon mount materials: Match the poles.
2.8.3. Mountings, fastenings and appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant components compatible with
the poles and fixtures that will not cause galvanic action at contact points. Provide
mountings that will correctly position the luminaire to provide the indicated light distribution.
2.8.4. Pole shafts: Square straight.
2.8.5. Handhole: Provide handhole and cover near base of pole shaft for access to wiring
compartment.
2.8.6. Grounding lug: Provide grounding lug where accessible from the ground for grounding
conductor with access through handhole.
2.8.7. Pole bases: Anchor type with galvanized steel hold-down or anchor bolts, leveling nuts and
bolt covers.
2.8.8. Steel poles: Steel tubing conforming to ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum
yield of 46,000 psi. Poles are 1-piece construction up to 40 feet in length and have access
handhole in wall.
2.8.9. Pole-top tenons: Fabricated to support the fixture indicated and securely fastened to the
pole top.
2.9 EMERGENCY LED DRIVER
2.9.1. Internal type: Self-contained, modular, battery inverter unit factory mounted within the fixture
body.
2.9.1.1. Test switch and LED indicator light: Visible and accessible without entering ceiling
space.
2.9.1.2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type, with a minimum nominal
10-year life.
2.9.1.3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid state, constant-current type.
2.9.1.4. Operation: Relay automatically turns 1 lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to
80 percent of nominal or below. Relay disconnects lamp and battery automatically
recharges when normal voltage is restored.
2.9.1.5. The product shall meet the U.L. Standard #924 "Emergency Lighting Equipment".

JKA #15-100 265100 - 6
2.9.1.6. The minimum lumen output: 1400 lumens.
2.9.1.7. Warranty: Five-year minimum.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of lighting fixture
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1. Architectural Plans shall govern exact ceiling construction and mounting conditions for all
fixtures. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of fixture mounting and compatibility
with ceiling construction.
3.2.2. Fixtures in areas where exposed or concealed pipe and ductwork prevents direct access to
the structural ceiling, shall be provided with appropriate support system to suspend fixture
below obstructions to avoid conflicts with same.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Install lighting fixtures in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated on
3.3.2. Contractor shall be responsible for all supports, hangers and hardware necessary for a
3.3.3. Fixtures shall be plumb, level, square, in straight lines and without distortion. Remedy light
leaks that may develop after installation of recessed or enclosed fixtures.
3.3.4. Turn over Project with all lamps in new and operating condition. Lamps that are burned less
than 100 hours at Project closeout are considered new.
3.4 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
3.4.1. Physical supports:
3.4.1.1. Recessed fixtures in wood frame ceilings shall be supported by 2" x 4" hangers
fastened to adjacent ceiling joists.
3.4.1.2. Recessed downlights in wood frame ceilings shall be supported with Manufacturers
supplied bar hangers and shall be installed according to the Manufacturers
instructions.
3.4.1.3. Surface mounted fixtures solely supported by recessed boxes in a gypsum board
ceiling shall have a 1 1/8" steel bar screwed or welded to the back of the box. This
steel bar must be long enough to span two ceiling support channels and shall be
attached to the channels by twisting wire around the bar and the support channel.
For fixtures weighing over 50 pounds, provide fixture studs in recessed box.
3.4.1.4. Support surface mounted fixtures more than 18" wide at or near each corner or
edge, in addition to support from outlet box.
3.4.1.5. Twisting wire around the bracket and two adjacent ceiling support channel runners
on either side of fixture shall support recessed downlights manufactured with built-in
brackets.
3.4.1.6. Where ceiling and/or wall construction or pipe and/or ductwork is such that mounting
channels, strong-backs, trapezes, brackets, etc., are required to properly support
fixtures, provide these supports under this Section, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4.1.7. Support outlet boxes as specified in Section 260533: Boxes. Provide all boxes with
grounding pigtail.
3.4.1.8. On concrete ceilings, use one of the following for supporting fixtures other than by
outlet box:

JKA #15-100 265100 - 7
3.4.1.8.1. Preset concrete inserts, provided inserts are completely covered by the
fixture canopy.
3.4.1.8.2. 1/4" by appropriate length wedge type anchor.
3.4.2. Seismic supports:
3.4.2.1. Recessed fluorescent fixtures in suspended ceilings shall be supported by
connecting two fixture support wires to the fixture at diagonal opposite corners for
fixtures weighing 56 pounds or less. Connect four wires, one at each corner for
fixtures weighing more than 56 pounds.
3.4.2.2. Surface mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings shall be attached to the main
ceiling runner with at least two positive clamping devices and shall have a fixture
support wire attached to each clamping device and to the structure above.
3.4.2.3. Recessed downlight fixtures in suspended ceilings shall be supported by connecting
one fixture support wire to the fixture housing.
3.4.2.4. All suspended fixtures shall be able to swing 45 degrees from vertical in any
direction without obstruction. Furnish suspended fluorescent fixtures with universal
joint type hanger canopy and longitudinal sway adapter at each stem, to permit 45-
degree swivel on 360-degree circle at canopy and 45 degree longitudinal movement
at sway adapter. Submit Drawings of hanger assembly for review prior to ordering.
If suspended fixture is not free to swing 45 degrees in any direction, without
obstructions, provide fixture seismic restraint to prevent contact in conform to
California Uniform Building Code, Section 2330, Seismic Design.
3.4.2.5. Unless fixtures are cable hung, Contractor shall, provide for all suspended fixtures a
safety wire or cable attached to the fixture and structure at each support capable of
supporting four times the supported load.
3.4.2.6. All recessed fluorescent fixtures shall be furnished with earthquake clips where
installed in tee bar ceiling.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
3.5.1. All junction box coverplates for the lighting branch circuit system shall be clearly marked with a
permanent black ink felt pen identifying the branch circuit (both panel designation and circuit
number) contained in the box.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF POLES
3.6.1. General: Store poles on decay-resistant treated skids at least 1 ft. above grade and
vegetation. Support pole to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
3.6.2. Metal poles: Retain factory-applied pole wrappings until just before pole installation. For
poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.
3.6.3. Pole installation: Use fabric web slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set poles.
3.7 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS
3.7.1. Construct concrete foundations with 3000 pound, 28 day concrete conforming to Division 03,
Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete." Comply with details and Manufacturer's
recommendations for reinforcing, anchor bolts, nuts and washers.
3.8.1. Visual and mechanical inspection.
3.8.1.1. Inspect for physical damage, defects, alignment and fit.
3.8.1.2. Perform operational test of each lighting fixture after installed, circuited and
energized.
3.8.1.3. Perform emergency operational test of all lighting fixtures connected to emergency
circuiting by interrupting normal power source.

JKA #15-100 265100 - 8
3.8.2. Contractor shall replace at no cost to the Owner all equipment which is found defective or do
3.8.3. Mock-ups:
3.8.3.1. Where noted in the Fixture Schedule, the Contractor shall provide sample(s) for use
in full-size field mockup of specific lighting fixtures. The Contractor shall allow time
in the bid and be responsible for installing a sample fixture on the Project for review,
prior to acceptance and final installation of lighting fixture. This mock-up will be
required to be coordinated and reviewed with the Owner's Representative and the
Architect or Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the labor
and materials for the field mock-up including, but not limited to, special rigging or
scaffolding and adjusting fixtures in field, as directed by the Architect or Engineer.
3.8.3.2. The mock-up installation shall closely conform to the conditions of the actual final
installation as to: height, distance from adjacent surfaces, number and type of
lamps, material, color, etc. The Contractor shall submit a written description of each
proposed mock-up with Drawings in order to obtain Architects approval prior to
commencement of each mock-up.
3.8.3.3. The purpose of the mock-up is to study the general appearance and performance of
and to make comparisons between the various lighting systems. At that time,
certain minimal test variations may be requested as to lamp location, lamp type,
reflector shape, color, etc. Final modifications, if any, shall be considered a part of
these Specifications and shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner.
3.9 ADJUSTING
3.9.1. Field aiming: Where noted in the Fixture Schedule, the Contractor shall allow time in the bid
and be responsible upon the installation of the light fixtures, for aiming and lamping fixtures as
described in the fixture schedule. This aiming will occur at night under the direction of the
Owner's Representative and the Architect or Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible
for providing the labor and materials for field aiming. This shall include, but not limited to,
special rigging or scaffolding, adjusting fixtures in field, testing of various lamps with each
fixture and/or testing of various lenses or louvers with fixtures, as directed by the Architect or
Engineer.
3.10 CLEANING
3.10.1. Clean lighting fixtures prior to Project closeout in accordance with Manufacturer's
recommended materials and methods.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 265100 - 9
SECTION 266113
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1. Work included: Labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation required for
the item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:
1.1.1.1. Fire alarm control panel (FACP).
1.1.1.2. Initiating devices.
1.1.1.3. Notification devices.
1.1.1.4. Fireman's remote annunciator panel (FRAP).
1.1.1.5. Fire alarm auxiliary equipment control.
1.1.1.6. Record Drawings.
1.1.1.7. Pretesting and final testing.
1.1.2. Work furnish and installed under another Section, but connected under this Section:
1.1.2.1. Fire sprinkler alarm system flow switches, valve monitors and post indicating valves.
1.1.2.2. Door hold-open/closure devices withwithout integral smoke detectors.
1.1.2.3. Fire barrier roll-down doors and shutters.
1.1.2.4. Fire/smoke dampers.
1.1.3. Work furnished and connected to alarm system under this Section, but installed and connected to
HVAC system under another Section:
1.1.3.1. Duct mounted smoke detectors at supply air equipment 2000 cfm and larger.
1.1.3.2. In-duct mounted smoke detectors at ducted fire/smoke damper. Except that wiring for
damper power, control and monitoring shall be under this contract.
1.1.4. Work furnished and installed under another Section: HVAC shutdown wiring via dry contacts in
remote mounted programmable relays.
1.1.5. Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related Work and
properly coordinate Work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete
installation.
1.1.5.1. Division 08: Roll-Down Doors,Door Hardware.
1.1.5.2. Division 14: Elevators.
1.1.5.3. Division 23: HVAC System.
1.1.5.4. Division 21: Fire Sprinkler System.
1.2 REFERENCES
ANSI C62.41; Guide for Surge Voltage in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
ANSI / ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators (1996 edition).
1.2.1.2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
NFPA 72; National Fire Alarm Code.
County of Tehama FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
JKA #15-100 266113 - 1
UL 38; Manual Signaling Boxes for Fire Alarm Systems.
UL 268; Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Signaling Systems.
UL 268A; Smoke Detectors for Duct Application.
UL 464; Audible Signal Appliances.
UL 497B; Protectors for Data Communications and Fire Alarm Circuits.
UL 521; Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 864; Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems.
UL 1424; Cables for Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits.
UL 1481; Power Supplies for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems.
UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances Standard.
UL 1971 Signal Devices for Hearing Impaired.
1.2.1.4. Factory Mutual System (FM):
FM P7825 Approval Guide.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1. Addressable device: A fire alarm system component with discrete identification that can have its
status individually identified or that is used to individually control other functions.
1.3.2. Alarm signal: A signal indicating an emergency that requires immediate action, such as a signal
indicative of fire.
1.3.3. Annunciator: A unit containing one or more indicator lamps, alphanumeric displays or other
equivalent means in which each indication provides status information about a circuit, condition or
location.
1.3.4. Class B wiring: Circuit that is monitored for integrity such that a single break, a single wire-to-wire
short or a single loss of carrier condition will be indicated by a trouble signal on the FACP no matter
where the break, short or loss of carrier condition occurs, but which would prohibit devices beyond
the fault, short or carrier loss from remaining operational. This would be Style 4 wiring for signaling
line circuits, Class B for initiating device circuits and Style Y for notification device circuits.
1.3.5. Initiating device: A system component that originates transmission of a change-of-state condition,
such as in a smoke detector, manual fire alarm box or supervisory switch.
1.3.6. Initiating device circuit: A circuit to which automatic or manual initiating devices are connected where
the signal received does not identify the individual device operated.
1.3.7. Multiplexing: A signaling method characterized by simultaneous or sequential transmission or both
and reception of multiple signals on a signaling line circuit, a transmission channel or a
communication channel, including means for positively identifying each signal.
1.3.8. Notification appliances: A fire alarm system component such as a bell, horn, speaker, light or text
display that provides audible, tactile or visible outputs or any combination thereof.
1.3.9. Notification appliance circuit: A circuit or path directly connected to a notification appliance(s).
1.3.10. Signaling line circuit: A circuit or path between any combination of circuit interfaces, control units or
transmitters over which multiple system input signals or output signals or both, are carried.
1.3.11. Supervisory signal: A signal indicating the need for action in connection with the supervision of guard
tours, the fire suppression systems or equipment or the maintenance features of related systems.
1.3.12. Trouble signal: A signal initiated by the fire alarm system or device indicative of a fault in a
monitoring circuit or component.
1.4.1. The fire alarm system shall be zone non-coded addressable. It shall be 24 VDC closed circuit,
electronically supervised, common signaling, device indicating, automatic alarm type; operating from
manual pull stations, smoke detectors, and sprinkler system switches. The system shall include all
JKA #15-100 266113 - 2
wiring, raceways, pullboxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment, alarm
and supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm notification devices and all other accessories required
for a complete operating system.
1.4.2. Provide system with the following circuit functions:
1.4.2.1. Class B, Style A for initiating device circuits.
1.4.2.2. Class B, Style Y for notification appliance circuits.
1.4.3. For system description of output controls and monitoring, based on input signals, refer to Sequence
of Operation Matrix on the Drawings.
1.4.4. In addition to the above sequence of operation, the FACP shall perform the following functions:
1.4.4.1. Identify every addressable device by location, priority and device type.
1.4.4.2. Read and display at FACP the sensitivity of addressable smoke and heat detection devices.
1.4.4.3. Remain 100% operational and capable of responding to an alarm condition while in the
routine maintenance mode.
1.4.4.4. Be capable of supporting non-addressable as well as addressable devices.
1.4.4.5. Allow individual programmable control of each connected remote or panel-mounted relay.
1.4.4.6. Provide the user with the field programmability to add or change addressable device types
and custom messages on-site.
1.4.4.7. Display up to 127 alarms and/or up to 127 trouble indications, one at a time, as a list on the
system printer/terminal.
1.4.4.8. Change the status of configured circuits (arming or disarming) and change status of relays.
1.4.4.9. Generate an addressable detector sensitivity report providing a chamber voltage listing
(device testing) for each detector. Non-addressable smoke detectors will require manual
field-testing and adjustment at each location.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1.5.1. Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements, the
following items:
1.5.1.1. Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein, listing all physical and
electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed standards.
component.
application.
1.5.1.4. Shop Drawings shall include:
1.5.1.4.1. Basic:
1.5.1.4.1.1. Name of Owner and occupant.
1.5.1.4.1.2. Address of the building.
1.5.1.4.1.3. Contractors name, address, telephone number and license
number.
1.5.1.4.2. Symbols legend.
1.5.1.4.3. Equipment list showing quantity, make, model and CSFM listing number for
each device.
1.5.1.4.4. Wire and cable schedule.
1.5.1.4.5. Scope of Work with overall system description.
1.5.1.4.6. Sequence of operation matrix with system inputs signals and output
functions.
JKA #15-100 266113 - 3
1.5.1.4.7. Code summary and Building type.
1.5.1.4.8. Assignment of Class and/or Style designation for device circuits.
1.5.1.4.9. Plot plan and floor plans of building with partitions, walls and room
identification, showing locations of each device and control/monitoring
equipment, conduit routing and size and cable/conductor type and quantity.
Field devices shall all have a discrete identification designation located
adjacent to each device on the Drawings.
1.5.1.4.10. Point-to-point wiring diagram in block or riser format showing all fire alarm
components, device designations, conduit, wire types and sizes.
1.5.1.4.11. Provide 1/4" scale plan of equipment layout in main fire control room.
1.5.1.4.12. Include elevations of control panel and remote annunciator panel(s).
1.5.1.4.13. Elevation indicating mounting heights for manual pull stations, audible and
visual devices and combination audible/visual devices.
1.5.1.4.14. Rated penetration details.
1.5.1.4.15. Typical wiring diagram details of field devices.
1.5.1.4.16. Detector mounting details at HVAC ducts.
1.5.1.4.17. Battery standby calculations showing total standby power needed to meet
the specified system requirements.
1.5.1.4.18. Voltage drop calculations for system wiring circuits.
1.5.1.5. Furnish structural calculations for equipment anchorage as described in Section 260010:
Basic Electrical Requirements.
1.5.1.7. Complete bill of materials listing all components.
1.5.1.8. Provide California State Fire Marshal CSFM listing sheet for each device.
1.5.1.9. Warranty.
1.5.2. Contractor shall submit approved Shop Drawings for review by Local Fire Marshal prior to the
purchase and installation of equipment. Provide quantities of Drawing sets as required by jurisdiction.
Drawings shall be wet stamped and signed by a registered professional Engineer.
1.5.3. Record Drawings:
1.5.3.3. Furnish Record Drawings as described in Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements,
utilizing Shop-Drawing submissions with updated field conditions. These Drawings shall
include but not be limited to the following:
1.5.3.3.1. Plot plans and building floor plans, showing point-to-point wiring location of
and conduit routing to all devices.
1.5.3.3.2. Block Diagram/Riser Diagram showing the FACP, system components and
all conduit and wire type/sizes between each.
1.5.3.4. Drawings shall be incorporated into the Record Drawing submission.
1.5.3.5. Final acceptance will not be made until the Engineer has approved the Record Drawings.
1.6.1. Supply operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of Section 260010:
Basic Electrical Requirements, to include the following:

JKA #15-100 266113 - 4
1.6.1.4. Schematic Drawings of wiring system, including all initiation and annunciation devices,
control panel, annunciators, etc.
1.7.1. All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new, unused and
currently under production.
1.7.2. Only products and applications listed in this Section may be used on the Project unless otherwise
submitted.
1.8.1. Delivery: Fire alarm system components shall not be delivered to the Project site until protected
storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not acceptable.
Equipment damaged during shipment shall be replaced and returned to Manufacturer at no cost to
Owner.
1.8.2. Storage: Store in a clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature extremes. Maintain factory
wrapping or provide a heavy canvas/plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris
and traffic. Provide heat where required to prevent condensation.
internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Damaged units shall not be installed.
Replace damaged units and return equipment to Manufacturer.
1.9 WARRANTY
warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and workmanship. Warranty shall begin
upon acceptance by the Owner.
1.9.2. The warranty package shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.9.2.1. Emergency maintenance service.
1.9.2.2. Service by factory trained service representative of system Manufacturer.
1.9.2.3. Replacement of any defective components.
1.10 SYSTEM START-UP
1.10.1. Upon completion of installation, a factory trained dealer service representative shall perform initial
start-up of the fire alarm system. Sufficient time shall be allowed to properly check the system out and
perform required minor adjustments before the Engineer's witnessed test shall begin.
1.11 MAINTENANCE
1.11.1. Extra Material:
1.11.1.1. Provide the following fire alarm system components as extra materials, matching the
products installed and packaged for storing.
1.11.1.1.1. Manual pull station: Furnish a quantity equal to 10 percent of the number
installed.
1.11.1.1.2. Detectors: Furnish a quantity equal to 10 percent, for each type of the
number installed.
1.11.1.1.3. StrobesHorn/strobes: Furnish a quantity equal to 10 percent of the number
installed.
1.11.1.1.4. HornsSpeakers: Furnish a quantity equal to 10 percent of the number
installed.
1.11.2. Maintenance Service:

JKA #15-100 266113 - 5
1.11.2.1. For a period of one year following acceptance the equipment Supplier shall have a
person(s) familiar with this Project attend four quarterly meetings with the Owner's
Representative to review system performance, operation and any system problems. That
person shall provide a written summary of the items discussed in each meeting and a
schedule of when the system problems will be corrected. The report is due within 7 working
days after each meeting.
1.11.2.2. During the eleventh month following system acceptance, on a weekend day, the equipment
Supplier shall perform a complete test of the system, in a manner similar to the acceptance
test. A written report shall be submitted to the Owner certifying that each initiating device
has been tested. A copy of these test forms shall be submitted to the Engineer for review
and acceptance.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Silent Knight
2.1.1.2. Gamewell/FCI (Fire Control Instruments).
2.1.1.3. EST.
2.1.1.4. Notifier.
2.2 CONTROL PANEL (FACP)
2.2.1. Control panel:
2.2.1.1. The panel shall comply with applicable requirements of UL864 and shall provide power,
annunciation, supervision and control for the complete fire alarm system. The panel shall
be modular in construction, installed in a surface mounted steel cabinet with hinged door
and cylinder lock, containing all modules necessary to operate as indicated herein.
2.2.1.2. Addressable devices shall be individually identified by the system and any quantity of
addressable devices may be in alarm at any time up to the total number connected to the
system.
2.2.1.3. The panel annunciator shall be a minimum of an 80 character alphanumeric display, which
shall provide a user definable custom message associated with each detection device or
zone.
2.2.1.4. Dynamic supervision of system electronics, wiring, initiating devices and software shall be
provided by the control system. Failure of system hardware or wiring shall be indicated by
type and location on the alphanumeric annunciator. Software and processor operation shall
be monitored by an independent hardware watchdog, which will indicate their failure. The
panel shall provide failsafe operation, i.e. all incoming alarms shall override all other modes
of operation.
2.2.1.5. Provide a service mode to permit the arming and disarming of individual initiating or output
devices as well as manually operating output devices. Status of these devices shall be
displayed upon command from the control panel. The panel shall automatically return to
the normal mode in the event the panel remains unattended in the service mode.
2.2.1.6. The panel shall be capable of measuring and adjusting the sensitivity of addressable
detectors upon request. An alphanumeric display shall be provided to display custom
messages and give readings of detector sensitivity detector by detector. Each device on an
addressable initiating circuit shall be checked continuously to include the following:
2.2.1.6.1. Sensitivity.
2.2.1.6.2. Response.
2.2.1.6.3. Opens.

JKA #15-100 266113 - 6
2.2.1.6.4. Shorts.
2.2.1.6.5. Ground faults.
2.2.1.6.6. Functionality.
2.2.1.6.7. Status.
2.2.1.7. The panel shall monitor the addressable smoke detectors in such a manner that if the
detectors become dirty and reach and maintain 80% of alarm threshold for five (5)
consecutive hours, a trouble condition indicating exactly which device needs service shall
be automatically annunciated. If the device becomes too insensitive for a period of 10
seconds, the trouble indication will read: "Input device response too low".
2.2.1.8. The panel shall report, by specific device number, any device removed from an addressable
initiating circuit and all other devices shall continue to function.
2.2.1.9. The panel shall automatically indicate the total quantity of alarms and troubles, which have
occurred prior to reset at the control unit.
2.2.1.10. No alarm or trouble indication shall be resettable until it has been acknowledged. It shall
not be possible to reset the system until all alarms have been acknowledged.
2.2.1.11. The panel shall be capable of:
2.2.1.11.1. Counting the number of addressable devices within a designated area or
"zone" which are in alarm.
2.2.1.11.2. Counting "zones" which are in alarm.
2.2.1.11.3. Counting the number of addressable devices, which are in alarm on the
system.
2.2.1.11.4. Differentiating among types of addressable devices such as smoke
detectors, manual stations, waterflow switches, heat detectors, etc.
2.2.1.11.5. Assigning priorities to types of devices, zones or groups of devices.
2.2.1.11.6. Cross-Zoning.
2.2.1.12. Each addressable device shall report its condition to the panel control unit every three (3)
seconds in a manner such that failure of the connections to or internal electronics of the
device will result in a trouble signal that identifies the specific device involved.
2.2.1.13. The panel shall also be capable of operating non-addressable Class A or B initiating
circuits.
2.2.1.14. Alarm and trouble from non-addressable initiating devices shall be annunciated and cause
output functions in the same manner as addressable detection devices including a location
message for each device. Use individual addressable interface modules for each non-
addressable initiating device.
2.2.1.15. Panel output circuits shall be supervised and capable of providing 1.5 amps at 24 VDC.
2.2.1.16. Provision for programmable control relays in panel shall be included having dry contacts
rated 120 VAC, 5 amp inductive.
2.2.1.17. Programmable remote relays shall be controlled in the same manner as panel mounted
relays.
2.2.2. Initiation/notification modules:
2.2.2.1. All modules shall be plug-in, dynamically supervised and easily replaceable. Field wiring
shall be connected to the panel with removable multi-conductor connectors to facilitate
rapid removal and replacement of both the module and wiring for ease of serving the panel.
The modules shall be system interconnected by a card edge connector.
2.2.2.2. Provide input addressable monitoring modules for monitoring non-addressable initiating
circuits.

JKA #15-100 266113 - 7
2.2.2.3. Provide programmable signal modules on output circuits for operation of DC audible
devices.
2.2.2.4. Provide, as needed, programmable supplementary relay modules containing four
independent relays fitted with form "C" contacts, rated at 120 VAC, 5 amps inductive.
2.2.3. Power supply: Adequate to serve FACP modules, initiating devices, annunciating devices, remote
annunciators , door hold-open/closure devicesroll-down fire doors or shutters, fire/smoke dampers.
All power connections whether AC or DC shall be separately fused within panel.
2.2.4. Uninterruptible power supply (batteries):
2.2.4.1. Provide an uninterruptible power source for all volatile system components including control
panel, peripherals and remote annunciators. Power source shall consist of but not be
limited to all necessary conduit, wire, outlets, transformers, panels and connections to each
piece of equipment as required.
2.2.4.2. Uninterruptible power shall be required such that loss of power shall not cause the system
operator to be required to restart the system or any part thereof upon return of power. The
uninterruptible power supply shall be NFPA approved for applications and shall provide a
24 hour backup of the system; an then, at the end of that period, operate all alarm indicating
devices used for evacuation for 5 minutes.
2.2.4.3. Provide a dual rate battery charger capable of recharging batteries to 80% capacity in 8
hours.
2.2.5. Remote station signal transmitter: Electrically supervise, capable of transmitting alarm and trouble
signals over telephone lines to remote monitoring station receiver.
2.2.6. Auxiliary relays: Provide sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay contacts for each initiating device zone to
provide accessory functions specified.
2.3 ADDRESSABLE INITIATING DEVICES
2.3.1. Manual pull stations: Shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 38. Addressable manual
stations shall be connected into addressable initiating circuits. Stations shall be single action type.
Stations shall be finished in red, with raised letter operating instructions of contrasting color. Control
panel shall monitor the station by address and function. The use of a key or wrench shall be required
to reset the station. Stations shall have a separate screw terminal for each conductor and be capable
of field programming for its "address" location on a initiating circuit.
2.3.2. Heat detectors: Shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 521. Addressable detectors shall
be electronic designed for detection of fire by combination fixed temperature and rate-of-rise principle.
Detectors shall be connected into addressable initiating circuits. All electronics and device address
shall be contained within detector head and shall plug-in to terminal base. Detector shall be field
programmable and contain external LED indication that is readily visible. The detector shall be
dynamically supervised and individually identified by FACP, as well as sensitivity adjustable. Rating
for fixed temperature portion shall be F190 degrees F. Detectors shall have screw terminals in base
for making all wiring connection.
2.3.3. Smoke detectors: Shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 268:
2.3.3.1. Ionization detectors: Addressable detectors shall be electronic designed, containing a dual
chamber responsive to both invisible and visible particles of combustion. One chamber
shall be a reference chamber and the second a sampling chamber. Detectors shall not
cause an alarm condition due to anticipated fluctuations in relative humidity. The sensitivity
of the detector shall be adjustable to compensate for operating conditions. Detectors shall
be connected into addressable initiating circuits. All electronics and device address shall be
contained within detector head and shall plug-in to terminal base. Detectors shall be field
programmable and contain external LED indication that is readily visible. The detector shall
be dynamically supervised and individually identified by FACP, as well as sensitivity
adjustable. Detectors shall have screw terminals in base for making all wiring connections.
2.3.3.2. Duct smoke detectors: Addressable smoke detector, as indicated above, mounted within
exterior duct housing with a perforated sampling tube extending across the width of the duct
interior. Activation of the detector shall cause shutdown of the associated air-handling unit

JKA #15-100 266113 - 8
via remote mounted programmable relay module controlled from the FACP. Detectors shall
be rated for the air velocity to be expected.
2.3.3.3. In-duct smoke detector: Addressable smoke detector, as indicated above, mounted within
duct cavity adjacent to FSD access panel for serviceability. Activation of the detector shall
cause associated FSD(s) to close via a remote mounted programmable relay, controlled
from the FACP.
2.3.4. Interface monitoring modules: Addressable interface monitoring module shall be connected into
addressable initiating circuits. This device shall be used for interfacing normally open or normally
closed direct shorting contact devices to an addressable initiating circuit (i.e. waterflow, tamper
switches, non-addressable initiating devices, end switches, etc.). Module shall be dynamically
supervised and individually identified by FACP.
2.3.5. Remote mounted programmable relay modules: Addressable interface module containing a
programmable control relay with contacts rated at 2.0 amps at 30VDC, 0.6 amps at 120 VAC.
2.4 NOTIFICATION DEVICES
2.4.1. Horns, strobes and combination horn/strobes:
2.4.1.1. Shall be flush-mounted in all finished areas and surface mounted in all equipment areas.
2.4.1.2. Horn: Wall mounted, 24 volt DC, minimum 92dB sound level at 10 feet, conforming to the
applicable requirements of UL 464.
2.4.1.3. Strobe: Wall mounted, 24 volt DC, 15, 30, 75 or 110 candela at a rate of 1 flash per
second, white Lexan lens, conforming to UL 1971. Strobe shall have a xenon flash tube.
2.4.1.4. Combination horn/strobes shall operate simultaneously from one power supply.
2.4.2. Synchronization modules: Synchronization modules shall be connected to the notification circuits and
shall be used to synchronize the flash rate of strobe devices where more than one strobe can be
viewed from a given location in the building. Synchronization shall match Code 3 temporal pattern
with a flash rate of 1 Hz, 3 amps at 24 VDC.
2.4.3. Firemans remote LCD annunciator: Shall have a two line by 40-character LCD display. Dedicated
LED lamps shall light upon activation of any alarm, supervisory or trouble condition and a tone-alert
shall sound. The backlit alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LED) shall indicate type of alarm,
number of alarms, supervisory conditions and troubles in the system and a custom location
designation. Annunciator shall include control switches for system acknowledgments, alarm silence
and system reset. Information is transmitted to the annunciator over a single twisted, shielded pair
cable. Annunciator shall be surfaceflush mounted in NEMA 13R enclosure for interiorexterior
applications.
2.5 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT CONTROL AND SUPERVISION
2.5.1. Under this Section, provide connections to the following equipment to activate control sequence of
operation:
2.5.1.1. Fire sprinkler system components: Provide a pair of wires from a remote mounted
addressable interface module (2'-6" maximum wire length) for each of the following devices:
2.5.1.1.1. Each waterflow switch to initiate a alarm signal.
2.5.1.1.2. Each valve monitor switch (tamper switch) to initiate a trouble signal.
2.5.1.1.3. Each P.I.V. to initiate a trouble signal.
2.5.1.2. Door hold-open/closure devices: Provide a pair of wires from a set of dry contacts in the
FACP or remote mounted programmable relays to each door hold-open/closure device for
power to and release of doors.
2.5.1.3. Roll-down fire doors and shutters: Provide a pair of wires from a set of dry contacts in the
FACP or remote mounted programmable relays to each roll-down fire door or shutter for
release of door.

JKA #15-100 266113 - 9
2.5.1.4. Fire/smoke dampers (FSDs): Provide a pair of wires from a set of dry contacts in the
remote mounted programmable relays to each fire/smoke damper for automatic closure of
dampers.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of fire alarm system
installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances. Do not commence
with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1. General:
3.2.1.1. Install fire alarm system in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as indicated
on the Drawings and as specified herein.
3.2.1.2. The 120/208-volt, 3 wire, 60 cycles AC two-20A circuit supply required to power the system
shall be connected as indicated on the Drawings. Connect to red colored circuit breaker(s)
in panelboard. Identify circuit as "Fire Alarm Circuit Control."
3.2.2. Wiring:
3.2.2.1. Refer to Section 260519: Building Wire and Cable.
3.2.2.2. Individual input and output device addressability as well as remote sensitivity measurement,
supervision and power shall all be performed on the same pair of wires. Wiring shall be
Class B.
3.2.2.3. Each Class B initiating circuit shall consist of a two wire circuit, allowing multiple T-taps and
not requiring any end-of-line device for supervision. Each initiating circuit shall
accommodate up to thirty (30) addressable programmable initiating devices. On the initial
installation, only 21 devices are to be allowed per circuit to allow for future expansion.
3.2.2.4. Wiring for shielding certain conductors from others or routing in separate raceways, shall be
as recommended by the Manufacturer's current requirements.
3.2.2.5. All wiring shall be installed in a continuous steel conduit system and shall be of the size
recommended by the equipment Supplier. Refer to Section 260546: Signal Systems
Raceway.
3.2.2.6. Wire color-coding shall remain the same throughout the system.
3.2.2.7. No wiring other than that directly associated with fire alarm detection, alarms or auxiliary fire
protection functions (no 120 VAC), shall be permitted in fire alarm conduits.
3.2.2.8. Make conduit and wiring connections to sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve monitors,
P.I.V., door hold-open/closure devices, fire/smoke damper, etc.
3.2.2.9. All wiring shall be checked and tested to ensure that there are no grounds, opens or shorts.
3.2.2.10. All fire alarm junction boxes shall be color-coded and marked per Section 260553:
Electrical Identification.
3.2.2.11. Wire nut splices are not allowed.
3.2.2.12. Wires shall be numbered at each connection, termination and junction point. Wire
numbering tags shall be Brady Perma-Code, Westline or equal wire makers. Each group of
wires shall be tagged with its destination at each panel, terminal box or junction box.
3.3.1. Manufacturer's field service: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized
service representative to supervise the initial start-up, pretesting and adjustment of the fire alarm
system.
3.3.2. Independent testing: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of an independent Testing
Agency to perform all quality control electrical testing, calibration and inspection required herein.
Testing Agencies objectives shall be to:
JKA #15-100 266113 - 10
3.3.2.1. Assure fire alarm system installation conforms to specified requirements and operates
within specified tolerances.
3.3.2.3. Prepare final test report including results, observations, failures, adjustments and remedies.
3.3.2.4. Apply label on fire alarm system control panel upon satisfactory completion of tests and
results.
3.3.2.5. Verify settings and make final adjustments.
3.3.3. At least three weeks prior to any testing, notify the Engineer so that arrangement can be made for
witnessing test, if deemed necessary. All pretesting shall have been tested satisfactorily prior to the
Engineer's witnessed test.
instructions.
3.3.4.3.1. The system shall be completely tested prior to final acceptance testing. All
points shall be tested from point of initiation to the final point or points of
annunciation. All circuits shall be tested for continuity and ability to transmit
the required signal correctly to the FACP. Any problem due to wrong wire
type, wire twist, impedance, mismatches, noise filtering or shielding shall be
completely corrected during pretesting and prior to any final acceptance
tests.
3.3.4.3.2. Testing shall include each and every device in the system. Coordinate with
other trades as necessary for testing.
3.3.4.3.2.1. Sprinkler flow switches: Record time delay from water flow to
alarm and adjust as necessary for a 30-50 second delay.
3.3.4.3.2.2. Tamper switches: Verify "trouble "signal is received and
alarmed on closing of each valve.
3.3.4.3.2.3. Smoke detectors , in-duct smoke detectors and duct mounted
smoke detectors: Test with actual or approved artificial smoke.
Verify that reset does not occur when devices are cleared of
smoke. Verify supervisory circuit function. Perform pressure
differential test on all duct mounted smoke detectors.
3.3.4.3.2.4. Door release: Verify that proper alarm activates every held-
open door, roll-down doors and shutters, that doors close
completely to the closed position.
3.3.4.3.2.5. Elevator recall: Verify that elevators recall to designated floor
by testing elevator lobby detectors with smoke. This is
necessary on the ground floor and one other only.

JKA #15-100 266113 - 11
3.3.4.3.2.6. Audible/visual notification: Activate by means of an alarm-
initiating device that audible and visual devices are clearly
audible and/or visual throughout.
3.3.4.3.2.7. Central station notification: Verify that one set of conductors in
the terminal cabinet becomes a short circuit on any "trouble"
condition and that the other set becomes a short circuit on any
"alarm" condition. Verify that the conductor groups are labeled
properly.
3.3.4.3.3. Test report:
3.3.4.3.3.1. Provide a complete report listing every device, the date it was
tested, the results and the date retested (if failure occurred
during the previous test). The test report shall indicate that
every device tested successfully.
3.3.4.3.3.2. Submit two typed copies of the test report in a neatly bound
folder for review and approval. Failure to comply with this will
result in a delay of final testing and acceptance.
3.3.5. Functional performance testing:
3.3.5.1. After the approval of the test report, provide a schedule of final testing to be done in the
presence of the Owner's Representative. The schedule must be received by the Engineer a
minimum of 2 weeks prior to the Final Test Date and must list the dates and time slots in
which the various systems can be tested.
3.3.5.2. Coordination of the Final Test dates with all parties (General Contractor, Mechanical
Contractor, Elevator Contractor, Owner and others) shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor. If a party is required to be present during any phase of testing to activate a
device, ensure that the party or a qualified representative of the party is present throughout
that phase of the testing.
3.3.6. In the event that the system fails to function properly during the testing, as a result of inadequate
pretesting or preparation, the Contractor shall bear all costs incurred by the necessity for retesting
including test equipment, transportation, subsistence and the Engineer's hourly rate.
3.3.8. Contractor shall submit the Testing Agency's final report for review prior to Project closeout and final
acceptance by the Owner. Test report shall indicate test dates, devices tested, results, observation,
deficiencies and remedies. Test report shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals.
3.4 TRAINING
Representatives upon completion and acceptance of system. Instructions shall include safe
operation, maintenance and testing of equipment with both classroom training and hands-on
instruction.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 266113 - 12
SECTION 266516
SECURITY ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM

1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1. Work included: Labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation required for the
item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:
1.1.1.1. Main controller/communicator panel.
1.1.1.2. Passive infrared detector PIR.
1.1.1.3. Door position contact switches.
1.1.1.4. Digital keypad arming/disarming stations.
1.1.1.5. Remote terminal cabinets.
1.1.1.6. System printer.
1.1.2. Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related Work and
properly coordinate Work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete
installation.
1.1.2.1. Division 08: Door Hardware.
1.2 REFERENCES
UL 13; Power-Limited Circuit Cables.
UL 294; Access Control System Units.
UL 603; Power Supplies for Use with Burglar-Alarm Systems.
UL 639; Intrusion-Detection Units.
UL 1076: Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems.
1.2.1.2. Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA):
EIA: Testing standards.
1.3.1. General requirements:
1.3.1.1. Provide a complete security alarm monitoring/keypad access control system as described
herein.
1.3.1.2. The system shall comprise all necessary supervision, processing, display and printout
circuitry and/or devices.
1.3.1.3. The system shall comprise redundant circuitry to ensure that no single independent failure of
any component or component group shall cause consequential failure of the system.
1.3.2. System overview:
1.3.2.1. Passive infrared detectors shall be installed in all interior spaces indicated on the Drawings.
1.3.2.2. Flush mounted magnetic contact switches will be provided on all exterior doors to monitor
and annunciate open, closed, forced, and held positions.
1.3.2.3. Both passive infrared detectors and door position switches shall transmit an alarm condition
when the buildings are "armed" and system is violated.

County of Tehama SECURITY ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM
JKA #15-100 266516 - 1
1.3.2.4. Keypads shall be installed at each common building to provide individual zone control of a
building. Keypads shall allow access to programmed zones via a 1 to 5 digit access code. They
shall be capable of "disarming" or "arming" functions. A delay feature shall be built into the system
to provide personnel sufficient time to disarm system upon entering a building prior to activation of an
alarm sequence.
1.3.2.5. The monitoring and control panel shall include a programmable microprocessor and related
circuitry capable of interpreting signals from the detection circuits and initiating appropriate alarms.
1.3.2.6. Activation of an intrusion alarm sensor shall cause a signal to be transmitted to a Central
Station via telephone lines. A built-in dialer unit shall initiate signal transmission. In addition to alarm
reporting, system shall report trouble, low battery and shunted zone indications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements, the
following items:
1.4.1.1. Data/catalog cuts for each product and component specified herein, listing all physical and
electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with all listed standards.
component.
application.
1.4.1.4.1. Plot plans and building floor plans, showing location of and conduit routing to all
devices.
1.4.1.4.2. Point-to-point wiring diagram in block or riser formats showing all components,
conduit and wire types and sizes with cable legend.
1.4.1.4.3. Include elevations of control panel and remote terminal cabinet(s).
1.4.1.8. Warranty.
1.5.1. Supply operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of Section 260010:
Basic Electrical Requirements, to include the following:
1.5.1.4. Schematic Drawings of wiring system, including all devices, control panel, terminal cabinets,
etc.
1.6.2. Only products and applications listed in this Section may be used on the Project unless otherwise
submitted.
JKA #15-100 266516 - 2
1.7.1. Delivery: Security monitoring and control system components shall not be delivered to the Project site
until protected storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not
acceptable. Equipment damaged during shipment shall be replaced and returned to Manufacturer at
no cost to Owner.
1.7.2. Storage: Store in a clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature extremes. Maintain factory
wrapping or provide a heavy canvas/plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris
and traffic. Provide heat where required to prevent condensation.
internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Damaged units shall not be installed.
Replace damaged units and return equipment to Manufacturer.
1.8 WARRANTY
warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and workmanship. Warranty shall begin
upon acceptance by the Owner.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Detection Systems, Inc.
2.1.1.2. Radonics.
2.1.1.3. Sentrol.
2.2 MAIN CONTROLLER/COMMUNICATOR PANEL
2.2.1. Control Panel: Control Panel shall be surface mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure, having a key operated
locking, hinged door. Opening the main door shall expose all components for inspection or
adjustment without further dismantling of the cabinet, control units or wiring. Unit shall be complete
with the following features:
2.2.2. Sixty (60) alarm zones, hardwired to devices including zone expander modules.
2.2.2.1. All functions keypad programmable. One hundred (100) user codes, 1 - 5 digits.
2.2.2.2. 12 Volt, 6 amp/hour emergency back-up battery.
2.2.2.3. System shall be programmable remotely using an IBM PC compatible computer with
standard modem.
2.2.2.4. System shall have programmable auto-arm feature at a preset time of day.
2.2.2.5. System shall be capable of custom arming configurations.
2.2.2.6. Automatic zone verification.
2.2.2.7. 96 event history and reporting.
2.2.2.8. Programmable exit and entrance delay times.
2.2.2.9. Digital communicator:
2.2.2.9.1. Transmit all major formats.
2.2.2.9.2. DPDT line seizure.
2.2.2.9.3. Pulse or touch-tone dialing.
2.2.2.9.4. Anti-jam feature.
2.2.2.9.5. Hexadecimal reporting.
2.2.2.9.6. Dial two (2) different 30 digit telephone numbers for reporting.

JKA #15-100 266516 - 3
2.2.2.9.7. Report by zone.
2.2.2.9.8. Expanded or single line reporting.
2.2.2.9.9. Open and close reports by user code.
2.2.2.9.10. Exception opening report.
2.2.2.9.11. Restore reporting.
2.2.2.9.12. Cancel reporting.
2.2.2.9.13. Trouble reporting.
2.2.2.9.14. Low battery reporting.
2.2.2.9.15. Stunted-zone reporting.
2.2.3. EEPROM (non-volatile) memory. Will not lose programmed features during total loss of power.
2.2.3.1. Restore to previous arm/disarm status after total loss of power.
2.2.3.2. Lightning/transient protection.
2.2.3.3. Heavy-duty 1.5 amp power supply:
2.2.3.3.1. Regulated 10.2 - 14.0 volts DC.
2.2.3.3.2. 2 amps available for powering auxiliary devices.
2.2.3.3.3. Battery float-charge circuit.
2.2.4. 12 volt 6 AH sealed lead-acid batteries.
2.2.4.1. One (1) general-purpose 2 amp SPDT relays.
2.2.4.2. Operating temperature range of 32 to 120 degrees F. (0 to +48.8 degrees C.)
2.2.4.3. Install one keypad in panel door.
2.2.4.4. Provide additional power supplies and batteries to power quantity of infrared detectors as
required.
2.2.4.5. Include system printer to document all system activities.
2.2.5. Remote station signal transmitter: Furnish with auto-dialer/modem device capable of transmitting
alarm signals over telephone lines to remote monitoring station receiver.
2.3 PASSIVE INFRARED DETECTOR PIR
2.3.1. Wall mounted wide-angle infrared detector with dual element pyro-electric sensor and directional pulse
count.
2.3.2. Tamper switch shall protect against removal of front cover or unit from wall and shall alarm upon loss
of power.
2.4 DIGITAL KEYPAD
2.4.1. Wall mounted keypad to interface with controller to remotely "arm" and "disarm" designated alarm
zones of the security monitoring system.
2.5 DOOR POSITION CONTACT SWITCH
2.5.1. Concealed, flush mounting, magnetic contact switch, with self-locking housing, six-inch wire leads and
single-pole/double-throw contacts. Sentrol Model #1706 series.
2.6 TERMINAL CABINETS
2.6.1. Provide 18" X 18" X 6" deep hinged door lockable terminal cabinet in NEMA 1 enclosure. All conduits
for security system shall terminate in these boxes. Provide engraved nameplate on each box marked
"Security System Wiring".
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

JKA #15-100 266516 - 4
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of the security system
installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and Specification tolerances. Do not commence
with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.
3.2 COORDINATION
3.2.1. Coordinate all installation requirements for door contacts with other trades prior to ordering of doors
and frames.
3.2.2. Install contacts, boxes, conduits and connections to doors and frames for complete operating
installation. All connections shall be concealed.
3.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.3.1. Alarm circuits shall be terminated on screw terminals. Terminal blocks shall be Allen-Bradley with 600
volt screw terminals for #22 to #10 conductors, mounted to type M22 channel or approved equal.
Submittal shall show internal elevation of terminal cabinets with equipment laid out.
3.3.2. All cables shall be run through fanning strip to terminals on terminal blocks.
3.3.3. All cables entering terminal cabinet shall be identified with Brady or E-Z code wire markers. Upon
completion of installation, six (6) copies of one-line "as-built" wiring diagram shall be furnished to the
Owner.
3.3.4. Each cable run on wiring diagram shall be identified with exact wire marker code (numerical or
alphabetical) as appears in terminal cabinets.
3.3.5. Station locations shall be identified by architectural room numbers and in all ways one-line wiring
diagram shall relate as closely as possible to architectural Drawings.
3.3.6. No splices shall occur in underground pullboxes. System wiring shall be continuous, without splices,
from terminal cabinet to terminal cabinet and control panel to devices. All interior junction boxes shall
be accessible and locations shall be recorded or "As-Built" Drawings.
3.3.7. Door contacts shall be located 6" from hinge side of door and both the switch and magnet shall be
epoxy in place.
3.3.8. After all equipment is installed and operational, Contractor shall set angle settings, sensitivity settings,
etc., of each detector to ensure optimum performance and minimal false alarms. Mask out areas, of
each detector, to remove sources of false alarms (windows, heaters, air diffusers, etc.), from detection
zones.
3.4 WIRING
3.4.1. Wiring from devices in building to terminal block at the same building shall be West Penn #241 or
approved equal.
3.4.2. Wiring from each building terminal block to the control panel shall be West Penn #244 or approved
equal.
3.4.3. Wiring from each keypad to the control panel shall be West Penn #244 or approved equal.
3.4.4. Low voltage AC Power wiring shall not run close to or parallel to fluorescent lighting fixtures. If
necessary run conduit perpendicular to the lighting conduit with as much separation as possible.
3.5.1. Manufacturer's field service: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized
service representative to supervise the initial start-up, pretesting and adjustment of the security
system.
3.5.2. Pretesting objectives shall be to:
3.5.2.1. Assure security system installation conforms to specified requirements and operates within
3.5.2.3. Prepare final test report including results, observations, failures, adjustments and remedies.

JKA #15-100 266516 - 5
3.5.2.4. Apply label on security system control panel upon satisfactory completion of tests and
results.
3.5.2.5. Verify settings and make final adjustments.
3.5.3. At least three weeks prior to any testing, notify the Engineer so that arrangement can be made for
witnessing test, if deemed necessary. All pretesting shall have been tested satisfactorily prior to the
Engineer's witnessed test.
instructions.
3.5.4.2.1. The system shall be completely tested prior to final acceptance testing. All points
shall be tested from point of initiation to the final point or points of annunciation.
All circuits shall be tested for continuity and ability to transmit the required signal
correctly to the controller. Any problem due to wrong wire type, wire twist,
impedance, mismatches, noise filtering or shielding shall be completely corrected
during pretesting and prior to any final acceptance tests.
3.5.4.2.2. Testing shall include each and every device in the system. Coordinate with other
trades as necessary for testing.
3.5.4.2.2.1. Door contact switches: Verify alarm signal received and
annunciated at control panel.
3.5.4.2.2.2. PIR detection devices: Adjust device sensitivity as required for
coverage and location. Verify alarm signal received and
annunciated at control panel.
3.5.4.2.2.3. Keypads: Ensure that keypads function properly to arm and
disarm the system.
3.5.4.2.2.4. Remote station monitoring: Verify that the alarm condition is
transmitted via telephone lines to remote monitoring station from
auto-dialer/modem device within the control panel.
3.5.4.2.3. Test report:
3.5.4.2.3.1. Provide a complete report listing every device, the date it was
tested, the results and the date retested (if failure occurred during
the previous test). The test report shall indicate that every device
tested successfully.
3.5.4.2.3.2. Submit two typed copies of the test report in a neatly bound folder
for review and approval. Failure to comply with this will result in a
delay of final testing and acceptance.
3.5.5. In the event that the system fails to function properly during the testing, as a result of inadequate
pretesting or preparation, the Contractor shall bear all costs incurred by the necessity for retesting
including test equipment, transportation, subsistence and the Engineer's hourly rate.

JKA #15-100 266516 - 6
3.5.7. Contractor shall submit the Testing Agency's final report for review prior to Project closeout and final
acceptance by the Owner. Test report shall indicate test dates, devices tested, results, observation,
deficiencies and remedies. Test report shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals.
3.6 TRAINING
Representatives upon completion and acceptance of system. Instructions shall include safe operation,
maintenance and testing of equipment with both classroom training and hands-on instruction.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 266516 - 7
SECTION 26 7113
TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING SYSTEMS
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1. Work included: Labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation required
for the item specified under this Division, including but not limited to:
1.1.1.1. Equipment rooms.
1.1.1.2. Equipment bonding.
1.1.1.3. Backbone fiber optic cabling.
1.1.1.4. Backbone twisted pair cabling.
1.1.1.5. Horizontal twisted pair cabling.
1.1.1.6. Telecommunication testing.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1.1. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Regulations:
FCC Part 15; Radio Frequency Devices & Radiation Limits.
FCC Part 68; Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network.
1.2.1.2. Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA):
EIA; Testing Standards.
American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) / Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) /
Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA):
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B; Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards, including the
following:
Part 1: General Requirements.
Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components.
TIA SP 3-4426 (12/28/06 or latest version): Transmission Performance
Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Augmented Category 6 Cable (to be
published as TIA-568-C.2-10).
Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A; Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces, including the following:
TIA/EIA-569-A-1: Perimeter Pathway Addendum.
TIA/EIA-569-A-2: Furniture Pathway Fill Addendum.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B; Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A; Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure.
ANSI/J-STD-607-A; Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-758; Customer-Owner Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard
(TIA/EIA-758-1: Addendum No. 1).
County of Tehama TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING SYSTEMS
JKA #15-100 267113 - 1
TIA TSB-155; Guidelines for the Assessment and Mitigation of Installed Category 6
Cabling to Support 10GBase-T.
1.2.1.3. Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc. (BICSI):
BICSI (TDMM); Telecommunication Distribution Methods Manual.
BICSI; Customer-Owner Outside Plant Design Manual.
BICSI (NDRM); Network Design Reference Manual.
1.2.1.4. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):
ICEA S-80-576-2002; Category 1 & 2 Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables for Use
in Communications Wiring Systems.
ICEA S-83-596-1994; Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable.
ICEA S-87-640-1999; Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable.
ICEA S-90-661-2002; Category 3, 5 & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cable for
Use in General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems.
ICEA S-104-696-2001; Standard for Indoor-Outdoor Optical Cable.
UL 444; Communication Cables.
UL 497; Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communication Circuits.
UL 1651; Optical Fiber Cable.
UL 1690; Data-Processing Cable.
UL 1963; Communications-Circuit Accessories.
UL 2024A; Optical Fiber Cable Routing Assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1. Adapter: Shall mean a connecting device joining two fiber connectors, either like or unlike.
1.3.2. Cabling: A system comprised of cables, wires, cords, and connecting hardware.
1.3.3. Channel: End-to-end transmission path, i.e. the entire portion of the horizontal cabling to each
outlet consisting of the Permanent Link, line cord (at the workstation), patch cord, and, if a full
crossconnection is implemented, the crossconnect termination/connecting apparatus and
equipment cord.
1.3.4. Connect: To install required patch cords, equipment cords, cross-connect wires, etc. to complete
an electrical or optical circuit.
1.3.5. Cord: Shall mean length of cordage having connectors at each end. The term cord is
synonymous with the term jumper and lead.
1.3.6. Identifier: A unique code assigned to an element of the telecommunication infrastructure that links
it to its corresponding record.
1.3.7. Passive link segment: Shall mean the cable, connectors, couplings, and splices between two fiber
optic termination units.
1.3.8. Permanent link: Test configuration for a horizontal cabling link excluding test cords, connections
at the ends of the test cords, patch cords, equipment cords, line cords, etc. The permanent
portion of the horizontal cabling to each outlet consisting of cable, consolidation point (if used),
termination/connecting apparatus in equipment rooms, and the connectors at outlets.
JKA #15-100 267113 - 2
1.3.9. Abbreviations:
1.3.9.1. BEP: Building Entrance Protection, for termination of OSP twisted pair cabling.
1.3.9.2. CAT: Category, used when identifying the performance characteristics of twisted pair
cabling.
1.3.9.3. CMP: Communication Media Plenum, rating applied to ISP twisted pair cable.
1.3.9.4. CMR: Communication Media Riser, rating applied to ISP twisted pair cable.
1.3.9.5. IDF: Intermediate Distribution Facilities, telecommunication equipment rooms housing
network equipment and containing termination fields for backbone cabling from MDF and
horizontal cabling from outlet devices.
1.3.9.6. ISP: Inside Plant, cable installation within building.
1.3.9.7. MDF: Main Distribution Facilities, telecommunication equipment room housing possible
service entrance facilities for interbuilding backbone cabling, network equipment, house
voice system equipment headend, backbone cabling distribution headend, termination
fields for backbone and horizontal cabling.
1.3.9.8. MM: Multimode, fiber cable.
1.3.9.9. MPOE: Minimum Point of Entry, for serving telecommunications utility terminations.
Houses service providers termination field(s) and interfaces between utilitys facilities
and premises facilities.
1.3.9.10. NAM: Network Access Module, workstations.
1.3.9.11. OFN: Optical Fiber Non-conductive, general purpose indoor non-plenum rated.
1.3.9.12. OFNP: Optical Fiber Non-conductive Plenum, plenum rated cable.
1.3.9.13. OFNR: Optical Fiber Non-conductive Riser, non-plenum rated riser cable.
1.3.9.14. OSP: Outside Plant, cable installation outside of building.
1.3.9.15. PIC: Plastic Insulated Conductors.
1.3.9.16. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride.
1.3.9.17. SM: Singlemode, fiber cable.
1.3.9.18. UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair, copper cable type.
1.4.1. Provide a complete telecommunication cabling system installation as specified herein and as
shown on the Drawings. In general, system shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.4.1.1. OSP backbone fiber optic cabling:
1.4.1.1.1. Backbone fiber optic cable shall route underground between each buildings
main distribution facility (MDF), in a star topology, and shall consist of one 12-
strand multimode OM4 and one 12-strand singlemode, OSP, fiber optic
cable(s).
1.4.1.1.2. OSP backbone fiber optic cables shall terminate on full height rack in MDF
rooms for cable interface with ISP backbone fiber optic cables. Terminate
cables on backside of rack mounted 24-port patch panels at each IDF.
1.4.1.1.3. Include full height rack(s) at MDF room(s) for fiber termination with 96-port
patch panels as required and patch cord management placed above and below
each patch panel.
1.4.1.1.4. OSP backbone fiber optic patch panel field shall interface with ISP backbone
fiber optic patch panel field at MDF via fiber patch cords between modular
connectors on front side of patch panels.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 3
1.4.1.1.5. Fiber optic cable connector standard shall be Type LC. Connectors shall be
duplex type.
1.4.1.2. OSP backbone twisted pair cabling:
1.4.1.2.1. Backbone twisted pair cable shall route underground between each buildings
main distribution facility (MDF), in a star topology, and shall consist of one
multi-conductor 25-pair, Category 3, UTP, OSP, filled copper cable.
1.4.1.2.2. Terminate backbone twisted pair cables on Category 3, wall-mounted, 110
style, BEP blocks at each MDF. BEP shall include a splice chamber.
1.4.1.3. Horizontal twisted pair cabling:
1.4.1.3.1. Horizontal twisted pair cables shall route between MDF or IDFs and
workstation outlets, and shall consists of two Category 6A, 4-pair, UTP, plenum
rated copper cables.
1.4.1.3.2. Horizontal twisted pair cables shall terminate on back of rack mounted,
Category 6A, 48-port, 19 wide patch panels with modular 8-pin connector front
for interface with Owner furnished routers/switches or voice patch panel field
via Category 6A patch cords. Patch panels shall have 110 type terminations at
rear for horizontal cable terminations.
1.4.1.3.3. Wire management shall be provided above and below, 2 RU, for each 48-port
patch panel.
1.4.1.3.4. Copper jack standard is Category 6A, RJ-45 connectors at patch panels and
workstation outlets.
1.4.1.4. Patch cords:
1.4.1.4.1. Patch cords shall match the physical and performance criteria of the specified
horizontal twisted pair cable and be terminated at each end with 8-position
modular plugs.
1.4.1.4.2. Patch cords shall be furnished in varying lengths as required.
1.4.1.4.3. Patch cord quantities shall match the following:
1.4.1.4.3.1. One patch cord for data field per every standard workstation outlet.
1.4.1.4.3.2. One patch cord for voice field per every standard workstation
outlet.
1.4.1.4.3.3. One parch cord for voice field per every telephone only outlet.
1.4.2. Workstation outlets:
1.4.2.1. Standard telecommunication outlets shall consist of the following, unless otherwise noted
on the Drawings:
1.4.2.1.1. Four horizontal twisted pair cable(s) per outlet.
1.4.2.1.2. Single-gang coverplate with 4-ports.
1.4.2.1.3. Four RJ-45 connector jacks for twisted pair terminations.
1.4.2.2. Telecommunication outlets denoted for Wireless Access Points shall consist of the
following, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings:
1.4.2.2.1. Two horizontal twisted pair cable(s) per outlet.
1.4.2.2.2. Single-gang coverplate with 4-ports.
1.4.2.2.3. Two RJ-45 connector jacks for twisted pair terminations.
1.4.2.3. Wall mounted telephone outlets shall consist of the following, unless otherwise noted on
the Drawings:
1.4.2.3.1. One horizontal twisted pair cable per outlet.
1.4.2.3.2. Single-gang metal coverplate with 1-port and two support studs.
1.4.2.3.3. One RJ-45 connector jack for twisted pair terminations.
1.4.2.4. Wall mounted pay telephone outlets shall consist of the following, unless otherwise noted
on the Drawings:
JKA #15-100 267113 - 4
1.4.2.4.1. One horizontal twisted pair cable per outlet.
1.4.2.4.2. Single-gang metal coverplate with 1-port.
1.4.2.4.3. One RJ-45 connector jack for twisted pair terminations.
1.4.3. Required System Colors
1.4.3.1.1. Cat 6A Horizontal Cable Colors
1.4.3.1.1.1. Blue -- Wireless Access Points
1.4.3.1.1.2. Blue -- Data
1.4.3.1.1.3. Red - Critical Connections (UpLink/DownLink Connections)
1.4.3.1.1.4. White - Phone VOIP/Digital/
1.4.3.1.1.5. Blue - HVAC/ Alarms, ect...
1.4.3.1.1.6. Blue - Security Cameras / Access Control
1.4.3.1.1.7. All wall plates - White
1.4.3.1.2. CAT 6A Patch Cord Colors
1.4.3.1.2.2. Yellow -- Data
1.4.3.1.2.3. Red - Critical Connections
1.4.3.1.2.4. White - Phone VOIP/Digital/ HVAC/ ect...
1.4.3.1.2.5. Green - Security Cameras / Access Control
1.4.3.1.3. Cat 6A Jack Colors (Rack and Workstation)
1.4.3.1.3.2. Yellow -- Data
1.4.3.1.3.3. Red - Critical Connections
1.4.3.1.3.4. White - Phone VOIP/Digital/ HVAC/ ect...
1.4.3.1.3.5. Green - Security Cameras / Access Control
1.4.4. Refer to Drawings for complete documentation of above requirements and all additional
requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1.5.1. Submit in accordance with the requirements of Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements,
the following items:
1.5.1.2. Describe system operation, equipment, dimensions and indicate features of each
component.
application.
1.5.1.4. Shop Drawings prepare in AutoCAD Release 2012 or later, to include the following:
1.5.1.4.1. Building floor plans showing location of all outlets, raceways, cable trays,
conduits and cable routing to each device at same scale as construction
documents.
1.5.1.4.2. Riser diagram(s) indicating all major components of system with required cable
interties and backbone cable identification labels.
JKA #15-100 267113 - 5
1.5.1.4.3. Provide 1/4" scale plans of equipment layout in MPOE, MDF and IDF rooms.
1.5.1.4.4. Provide wall elevations of MPOE, MDF and IDF rooms at scale.
1.5.1.4.5. Provide equipment rack elevations at 1 scale.
1.5.1.4.6. Use identical symbols as those used in construction documents.
1.5.1.4.7. Text shall be a minimum of 3/32 high when plotted at full scale.
1.5.1.4.8. Screen all background information.
1.5.1.7. Warranty.
1.5.2. Installer's qualifications: Furnish satisfactory proof of required experience specified herein for
system installer.
1.5.3. Record Drawings:

1.5.3.1. Furnish Record Drawings as described in Section 260010: Basic Electrical
Requirements, utilizing Shop-Drawing submissions with updated field conditions. These
Drawings shall include but not be limited to the following:
1.5.3.1.1. Plot plans and building floor plans, showing point-to-point wiring location of all
devices.
1.5.3.1.2. Block Diagram/Riser Diagram showing the system components and all conduit
and wire type/sizes between each.
1.5.3.2. Drawings shall be incorporated into the Record Drawing submission.
1.5.3.3. Final acceptance will not be made until the Engineer has approved the Record Drawings.
1.6.1.3. Schematic wiring diagrams.
1.6.1.4. Telephone numbers for the authorized parts and service distributor.
1.7.2. Only products and applications listed in this section may be used on the Project unless otherwise
submitted.
1.7.3. Manufacturer qualifications: Manufacturer must have a minimum 5 continuous years of

experience in design and manufacturing of the materials and equipment specified herein.
1.7.4. Installer's qualifications:

JKA #15-100 267113 - 6
1.7.4.1. Installer must have a minimum 5 continuous years of experience in satisfactory
completion for Projects similar in scope and cost. Provide backup information on 5 such
Projects.
1.7.4.2. Installer shall possess a current, active and valid C7 or C10 California State Contractors
License.
1.7.4.3. The installer shall be the Manufacturer's certified reseller/installer of the
telecommunication equipment provided. Provide evidence of this certification.
1.8.1. Delivery: Telecommunication system components shall not be delivered to the Project site until
protected storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not
acceptable. Equipment damaged during shipping shall be replaced and returned to Manufacturer
at no cost to Owner.
1.8.2. Storage: Store in clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature extremes. Maintain factory
wrapping or provide a heavy canvas/plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction
debris and traffic.
internal components damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Damaged units shall not be
installed. Replace damaged units and return equipment to Manufacturer.
1.9 WARRANTY
1.9.1. Units and components offered under this Section shall be covered by a 15 year product and
application warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and workmanship.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
1.10.1. Maintenance services:

1.10.1.1. Distributor of the major system components shall maintain a replacement parts
department and provide testing equipment when needed. A complete parts department
shall be located close enough to supply replacement parts within a 4 hour period.
1.10.1.2. Service must be rendered within 4 hours of system failure notification.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Equipment racks and cable runways:
2.1.1.1.1. Chatsworth Product Inc. CPI.
2.1.1.1.2. Cooper/B-Line.
2.1.1.1.3. Panduit.
2.1.1.2. Bonding strap:
2.1.1.2.1. Chatsworth Product Inc. CPI.
2.1.1.2.2. Cooper/B-Line.
2.1.1.2.3. Thomas & Betts.
JKA #15-100 267113 - 7
2.1.1.3. Bonding connectors and lugs:
2.1.1.3.1. Panduit.
2.1.1.3.2. Thomas & Betts.
2.1.1.3.3. O-Z/Gedney.
2.1.1.4. Backbone fiber optic cable:
2.1.1.4.2. Corning Cable Systems.
2.1.1.4.3. Berk-Tek.
2.1.1.4.4. Superior Essex
2.1.1.5. Backbone fiber optic terminations:
2.1.1.5.2. Corning Cable Systems.
2.1.1.5.3. Leviton Corp
2.1.1.5.4. Ortronics.
2.1.1.5.5. Panduit
2.1.1.6. Backbone twisted pair cable:
2.1.1.6.2. Superior Essex.
2.1.1.6.3. General Cable.
2.1.1.7. Backbone twisted pair terminations:
2.1.1.7.2. Porta Systems (OSP).
2.1.1.7.3. Circa (OSP).
2.1.1.8. Horizontal twisted pair and modular patch cord cable:
2.1.1.8.2. Leviton
2.1.1.8.3. Ortronics
2.1.1.8.4. Panduit
2.1.1.9. Horizontal twisted pair and modular patch cord terminations:
2.1.1.9.2. Leviton
2.1.1.9.3. Ortronics.
2.1.1.9.4. Panduit.
2.1.1.10. Innerduct and duct plugs:
2.1.1.10.1. TVC Communications.
2.1.1.10.2. Tyco Allied Electrical Group.
2.1.1.10.3. MaxCell
2.1.1.11. Test equipment:
2.1.1.11.1. Corning Cable Systems
JKA #15-100 267113 - 8
2.1.1.11.2. Fluke Networks.
2.1.1.11.3. Agilent Technologies WireScope 350 Test Set.
2.1.1.11.4. Laser Precision.
2.1.1.11.5. Tektronix.
2.2 EQUIPMENT ROOMS
2.2.1. Equipment racks, 2-channel type:

2.2.1.1. Application: Suitable for the support of termination apparatus, cable and cord
management apparatus, network equipment, and other similar equipment within a
telecommunication room.
2.2.1.2. Material: High-strength, lightweight, #6061-T6 extruded aluminum construction11 Ga.
ASTM A570 steel uprights and ASTM A36 steel angles.
2.2.1.3. Channel:
2.2.1.3.1. Size: 3 deep with flanges on each side (double sided).
2.2.1.3.2. Flange: 1.265 wide by 0.25 thick with mounting holes.
2.2.1.3.3. Mounting holes: Threaded mounting holes at #12-24 rolled and spaced 5/8
5/81/2, compatible with ANSI/EIA-310-D.
2.2.1.3.4. RMU markings: The RMU markings shall be permanently stamped on the
outside of both flanges on both channels.
2.2.1.4. Assembled rack: Rack shall be complete with two mounting channels, two base angles
(3.5 high by 6 deep by 0.375 thick), two top angles (1.5 high by 1.5 deep by 0.375
thick). Rack shall be 7-0 high (overall) by 19 mounting width (20.25 width overall) and
shall contain 45 EIA mounting spaces (1.75 on center).
2.2.1.5. Load rating: 1000 lbs, when evenly distributed for the height of rack.
2.2.1.6. Finish: Powder coat, black.
2.2.1.7. Accessories: Include required accessories, such as floor installation kits, mounting
hardware, etc. for a complete installation.
2.2.2. Equipment racks, 4-post Frame, Open

2.2.2.1. Frames shall be manufactured from aluminum and/or steel extrusion and sheet.
2.2.2.2. Each frame will have two L-shaped top angles, two L-shaped base angles, a top and
bottom pan, and four C-shaped equipment-mounting channels (a front and rear pair). The
rack will assemble with nut and bolt hardware. The base angles and bottom pan will be
pre-punched for attachment to the floor. The top pan will be pre-punched for attaching
ladder rack with J-bolts.
2.2.2.3. Equipment mounting channels will be 3 deep and punched on the front and rear flange
with the EIA-310-D Universal hole pattern to provide 45 rack-mount spaces for
equipment. Each mounting space will be marked and numbered on the mounting
channel.
2.2.2.4. When assembled with top and bottom pans and angles, equipment-mounting channels
will be spaced to allow attachment of 19 EIA rack-mount equipment. Attachment points
will be threaded with 12-24 roll-formed threads. The frame will include assembly and
equipment-mounting hardware. Frames will include 100 each combination pan head, pilot
point, mounting screws.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 9
2.2.2.5. The assembled frame will measure 7 (84) high, 20.3 wide and 41 deep. There will be
29 between the front and rear mounting surfaces of the two pairs of mounting channels.
The sides (webs) of the equipment-mounting channels will be punched to allow
attachment of vertical cable managers along the sides of the frame or for frame-to-frame
or frame-to-rack baying (frames must be able to bay with a 2-post relay rack).
2.2.2.6. The frame will be rated for 2,000 lb. of equipment.
2.2.2.7. Finish shall be epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat, black.
2.2.3. Vertical management sections:

2.2.3.1. Application: Suitable for cable routing (back) and cord slack storage (front) vertically
within a rack bay, from bottom of rack to the top.
2.2.3.2. Configuration: The vertical management sections shall be double-sided having covered
cable guides on the front and flip-retainers on the rear.
2.2.3.3. Size and capacity: 8-0 high by 10" wide, having at least 7 deep cable storage capacity
in back and 7 deep cord storage capacity in front.
2.2.3.4. Mounting: The vertical management sections shall have matching bolt holes for
attachment to equipment rack.
2.2.3.5. Finish: Black, guide and cover.
2.2.4. Horizontal cable support bar:

2.2.4.1. Application: Suitable to horizontally support cables at termination points on back of patch
panels.
2.2.4.2. Finish: Shall match the rack.
2.2.5. Horizontal management panels:

2.2.5.1. Application: Suitable to horizontally support cord management within rack bay on front of
patch panels.
2.2.5.2. Configuration: The horizontal management panels shall be single-sided.
2.2.5.3. Size: 2U high by 19 mounting width.
2.2.5.4. Finish: Black, guide and cover.
2.2.6. Cable runway:
2.2.6.1. Application: Suitable for the support and management of cabling, either overhead or
mounted vertically on walls, within equipment rooms. Also, provides overhead equipment
rack bracing.
2.2.6.2. Construction:
2.2.6.2.1. Runway shall be constructed of two longitudinal side elements known as
stringers and crossing members known as rungs. Rungs are spaced 9 on
center and are welded to stringers on both sides.
2.2.6.2.2. Stringers and rungs are constructed of rectangular tube steel, 1-1/2 by 3/8 by
0.65 wall thickness.
2.2.6.2.3. Size: 10-0 straight section by 12 wide.
2.2.6.3. Accessories: Provide accessories for a complete installation as shown on the drawings
to include 45 and 90 junctions, T junctions, butt splices, swivel butt splices, end caps,
end closing kits, vertical wall brackets, wall angle supports, triangle supports, rack-to-
runway attachments, drop-out kits, bonding straps, etc.
2.2.7. Label plates for equipment racks:

2.2.7.1. Label plates shall be suitable to affix onto top angle of equipment rack.
2.2.7.2. Label plate shall be engraved-able stock melamine plastic laminate substrate.
2.2.7.3. Size: 1/2 high by 6 long by 1/16 thick.
2.2.7.4. Lettering shall be white, engraved, 1/8 high.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 10
2.3 EQUIPMENT BONDING
2.3.1. General:
2.3.1.1. The telecommunication system grounding backbone is covered under Section 260526:
Grounding and Bonding and shown on the drawings in Riser Diagram format. It includes
grounding bus bars, grounding riser conductors, connections to main service ground
system, ground lugs and clamps, etc.
2.3.1.2. The work outlined in this Section covers the bonding of all telecommunication equipment
and apparatus in the equipment rooms to the telecommunication system grounding
backbone.
2.3.2. Bonding conductor:

2.3.2.2. Conductor: #6 AWG (or larger), copper, stranded.
2.3.2.3. Insulation: THHN/THWN, green in color.
2.3.3. Cable runway bonding straps:

2.3.3.1. Refer to Section 260526: Grounding and Bonding.
2.3.3.2. Conductor: Flexible braided copper strap with factory installed termination connectors.
2.3.4. Connectors and lugs:

2.3.4.1. Conductor to conductor connector: C-type copper compression tap, heavy-wall, for
tapping into unbroken continuous conductors as a splice, wire joint, T tap, or making
parallel wire connections. Connector can be used with stranded or solid conductors.
2.3.4.2. Conductor to busbar, racks, cabinets, or other equipment/component connector: Two-
hole, copper, compression type lugs for #6 AWG conductors.
2.3.4.3. Conductor to cable runway connector: Cable tray ground clamp, Extruded aluminum/tin-
plated, mechanical type connector with set screws for tightening both tray and bonding
conductor.
2.4 BACKBONE FIBER OPTIC CABLING
2.4.1. OSP backbone fiber optic cable:

2.4.1.1. Application:
2.4.1.1.1. Suitable for outdoors, in underground PVC conduit installations where
protection against water and moisture entry is required.
2.4.1.1.2. Optical transmission performance is not significantly affected by environmental
fluctuations, installation or aging.
2.4.1.1.3. Materials do not evolve hydrogen in quantities that will increase light
attenuation.
2.4.1.2. Multimode OM4, 50/125m fiber strands shall meet or exceed the following physical
criteria:
2.4.1.2.1. Core diameter: 50m, 2.5m.
2.4.1.2.2. Cladding diameter: 125m, 1.0m.
2.4.1.2.3. Core/cladding offset: 1.5m.
2.4.1.2.4. Coating diameter: 254m, 7.0m.
2.4.1.2.5. Coating/cladding concentricity: 6.0m.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 11
2.4.1.2.6. Minimum tensile strength: 100,000psi.
2.4.1.3. Multimode OM4, 50/125m fiber strands shall meet or exceed the following performance
criteria:
2.4.1.3.1. Fiber Type: 850-nm 10G Laser Optimized 50 micron (OM4)
2.4.1.3.2. Attenuation: 3.0dB/km at 850nm and 1.0dB/km at 1300nm wavelengths,
maximum.
2.4.1.3.3. Overfilled bandwidth: 3,500MHzkm at 850nm and 500MHzkm at 1300nm
wavelengths, minimum.
2.4.1.3.4. Laser bandwidth: 4,700MHzkm at 850nm and 500MHzkm at 1300nm
wavelengths, minimum.
2.4.1.4. Singlemode fiber strands shall meet or exceed the following physical criteria:
2.4.1.4.1. Core diameter: 8.3m.
2.4.1.4.2. Cladding diameter: 125m, 0.7m.
2.4.1.4.3. Core/cladding offset: 0.5m.
2.4.1.4.4. Coating diameter: 254m, 7.0m.
2.4.1.4.5. Coating/cladding concentricity: 12.0m.
2.4.1.4.6. Minimum tensile strength: 100,000psi.
2.4.1.5. Singlemode fiber strands shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria:
2.4.1.5.1. Attenuation: 0.45dB/km at 1310nm and 0.25dB/km at 1550nm wavelengths,
maximum.
2.4.1.5.2. Mode field diameter: 8.4m 0.6m at 1310nm and 8.9m 0.6m at 1550nm.
2.4.1.5.3. Cutoff wavelength: 1260nm.
2.4.1.5.4. Dispersion: 8.0ps/nmkm at 1310nm and 2.6-6.0ps/nmkm at 1530-1565nm.
2.4.1.6. Buffering:
2.4.1.6.1. Fibers shall be loosely buffered, either in a core tube or in multiple tubes
around central member.
2.4.1.6.2. Buffering tube(s) shall be filled with compound to protect against moisture
penetration. Filling compound shall be non-hygroscopic and non-nutritive to
fungus (FLEXGEL, or equivalent). The compound shall be easily removed
with conventional nontoxic solvents.
2.4.1.6.3. Fibers and buffer tube(s) shall be individually color-coded to meet the
requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-A-1995 (also reference ANSI/ICEA S-83-
596-1994 and EIA-230).
2.4.1.7. Cable and sheath:
2.4.1.7.1. Central member: Dielectric rod (glass-reinforced plastic, GRP).
2.4.1.7.2. Fillers (where required to maintain circularity): Plastic rods matched to buffer
tube diameter.
2.4.1.7.3. Water blocking tape: Applied longitudinally over the central member/buffer
tube(s)/filler core.
2.4.1.7.4. Strength element: The cable shall have an internal strength element such as
aramid yarn.
2.4.1.7.5. Rip cord: Nylon or similar (to aid splitting the outer jacket).
2.4.1.7.6. Outer jacket: The cable shall have a seamless outer jacket, high or medium
density polyethylene or equal, applied to and completely covering the internal
JKA #15-100 267113 - 12
components (central member, buffer tube(s), fillers, strength element, etc.).
The outer jacket shall contain UV inhibitors for stable performance in direct
sunlight. The outer jacket shall be non-hygroscopic and non-nutritive to fungus.
2.4.1.7.7. Printing: The jacket shall be printed/permanently marked with the
manufacturer, sequential length (feet), fiber type, month and year or quarter
and year of manufacture.
2.4.1.8. Tensile strength: The cable shall have a 600 lb minimum rated load.
2.4.1.9. Operating temperature range: -40 to 158F.
2.4.2. Backbone fiber optic terminations:
2.4.2.1. Fiber optic patch panels:
2.4.2.1.1. Patch panels shall be an enclosed housing for protecting, storing and
organizing the termination of fiber cables and fiber strands. Shall also contain
facilities to store fiber slack and provide patch cord management.
2.4.2.1.2. Patch panels shall be passive physical equipment and apparatus used in
terminating, interconnecting and cross-connecting fiber optic cabling. Panel
shall possess a minimum fire resistant rating of UL94V-1 and shall conform to
existing OSHA Health and Safety Laws.
2.4.2.1.3. Patch panels shall come equipped with safety labels such as laser identification
or warning labels as required by system considerations.
2.4.2.1.4. Panels shall be 2U and/or 4U high, 19" rack mountable, accepting up to 8
and/or 12 adapter panels with 12-ports in each panel. Panels shall contain rear
fiber entry slots, wire retainers and fiber storage drums. Furnish with slide out
rails for front access and jumper troughs for cable management. Panels shall
be suitable for multimode or singlemode fiber cable terminations.
2.4.2.1.5. Panels shall be provided with LC couplings for termination of fiber cables with
matching connectors.
2.4.2.1.6. Provide patch panel and port quantities as required for cable terminations.
2.4.2.2. Fiber optic connectors:
2.4.2.2.1. Multimode:
2.4.2.2.1.1. Materials:
2.4.2.2.1.1.1. Ferrule ceramic with pre-radiused finish/face.
2.4.2.2.1.1.2. Connector housing: Plastic.
2.4.2.2.1.2. Connector shall have an integral strain relief feature, including a
bend limiting rear boot.
2.4.2.2.1.3. Connector shall be installable via either epoxy or anaerobic
method.
2.4.2.2.1.4. Connector type shall be LC
2.4.2.2.2. Singlemode:
2.4.2.2.2.1. Materials:
2.4.2.2.2.1.1. Ferrule ceramic (zirconia or alumina) with pre-
radiused finish/face.
2.4.2.2.2.1.2. Connector housing: Plastic.
2.4.2.2.2.2. Connector shall meet or exceed Ultra PC performance.
2.4.2.2.2.3. Connector shall have an integral strain relief feature, including a
bend limiting rear boot.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 13
2.4.2.2.2.4. Connector shall be installable via either epoxy or anaerobic
method.
2.4.2.2.2.5. Connector type shall be LC.
2.4.3. Fiber optic patch cords:

2.4.3.1. Suitable for indoor installations within equipment rooms.
2.4.3.2. Cords shall be factory-assembled from a single, continuous length of cordage,
homogenous in nature, and terminated at both ends via connectors as required. Splices
are not permitted anywhere.
2.4.3.3. Cordage:
2.4.3.3.1. Conductors: 2 optical conductors/strands, matching physical and optical
performance parameters of the multimode and singlemode cable plant
specified above.
2.4.3.3.2. Construction: Mini Zipcord type with strength member (aramid yarn) and
jacket of PVC.
2.4.3.3.3. Flame rating: NEC OFN rated or higher, and UL Listed as such.
2.4.3.4. Connectors:
2.4.3.4.1. Multimode patch cords shall be terminated with either duplex LC connectors at
both ends or with duplex LC connectors at one end for connection with the
cable plant and via connector type as required for connection to equipment at
other end.
2.4.3.4.2. Singlemode patch cords shall be terminated with either duplex LC Ultra PC
connectors at both ends or with duplex LC Ultra PC connectors at one end for
connection with the cable plant and via connector type as required for
connection to equipment at other end.
2.4.4. Labels:
2.4.4.1. Label type shall be a durable plastic tag, suitable for indoor and/or outdoor use, and shall
contain UV inhibitors. The tag shall attach to the cable via a separate steel or plastic tie
wrap.
2.4.4.2. Labels shall have a self-laminating feature.
2.4.4.3. Printable area shall be 3.5 x 2, minimum.
2.4.4.4. Color shall be yellow with black legend test.
2.4.5. Innerduct:
2.4.5.1. Suitable for outdoor installations within underground duct banks to create multiple cells
within a single conduit for fiber optic cables installed during the same phase of
construction or for future installations of cables.
2.4.5.2. Innerduct shall be manufactured from internally processed polyester and nylon resins,
factory lubricated. Materials shall be halogen-free.
2.4.5.3. Innerduct shall be flexible engineered fabric sub-ducting, stitched into multi-cell a design.
Cells shall come equipped with pulling tape/rope and shall be color-coded via printing
and/or stitching.
2.4.6. Duct plugs:

2.4.6.1. Suitable for installation within exterior conduits at terminations within inground
vaults/pullboxes and where entering buildings from underground at equipment rooms.
Duct plugs shall provide a watertight (up to 20 psi) seal around innerducts and cables.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 14
2.4.6.2. Duct plugs shall be sized per conduit trade/actual size, per innerduct trade/actual size,
and per cable outside diameter, as required per instance.
2.4.6.3. Duct plugs shall be re-enterable and re-usable.
2.4.7. Miscellaneous:
2.4.7.1. Fiber slack storage reel.
2.4.7.2. Velcro cable ties:
2.4.7.2.1. Width: 0.75.
2.4.7.2.2. Color: Same color as the cable to which it is being applied.
2.5 BACKBONE TWISTED PAIR CABLING
2.5.1. ISP backbone twisted pair cable:

2.5.1.1.1. Suitable for indoor installations, between floors exposed in equipment rooms as
vertical risers, or above suspended ceilings and below raised floors exposed in
cable trays, hangers or on deck. If space is used as an air plenum, cable shall
either be plenum rated or installed in EMT conduit.
2.5.1.1.2. Each cable run shall be continuous single cable, homogenous in nature,
without splices.
2.5.1.1.3. Twisted pair PIC type cable, air core, with an ALVYN sheath, compatible with
Bell System type ARMM.
2.5.1.1.4. Multipair cable shall be non-plenum rated.
2.5.1.2. Conductors:
2.5.1.2.1. Annealed solid copper, 24 AWG.
2.5.1.2.2. Fully insulated conductors consisting of an inner layer of expanded polyolefin
and covered with an outer layer (skin) of solid PVC.
2.5.1.2.3. Conductors shall be twisted into pairs. Twisted pairs shall be stranded into 25-
pair bundles and into larger units of 25-pair increments, to make up the
specified pair count, as well as supper units (if required by pair count).
2.5.1.2.4. Twisted pairs and units shall be color-coded to industry standards, ANSI/ICEA
Publication S-80-576 and EIA-230.
2.5.1.3. Core and sheath:
2.5.1.3.1. Cable core (twisted pairs) shall have a tape applied longitudinally, wrapped
around its entirety. Tape material shall be non-hydroscopic polypropylene film
or equivalent.
2.5.1.3.2. Sheath type shall be ALVYN consisting of an inner shield and an outer jacket:
2.5.1.3.2.1. Shield: 0.008 aluminum corrugated tape applied longitudinally
with an overlap.
2.5.1.3.2.2. Jacket: Flame-retardant PVC, adhesively bonded to shield.
2.5.1.4. Cable shall be NEC rated as CMR cable and UL listed as such.
2.5.1.5. Electrical performance of the twisted pairs and overall cable shall comply with TIA/EIA-
568-B Part 2 requirements for Category 3 UTP cabling, minimum.
2.5.2. OSP backbone twisted pair cable:


JKA #15-100 267113 - 15
2.5.2.1.1. Suitable for outdoors, in underground PVC conduit installations where
protection against water and moisture entry is required.
without splices.
2.5.2.1.3. Twisted pair PIC type cable, filled core, with an ASP sheath, compatible with
Bell System type ANMW or Rural Utilities Service type PE89.
2.5.2.2.1. Annealed solid copper, 24 AWG.
2.5.2.2.2. Fully insulated conductors consisting of an inner layer of expanded polyolefin
and covered with an outer layer (skin) of solid polyolefin.
2.5.2.2.3. Conductors shall be twisted into pairs. Twisted pairs shall be stranded into 25-
pair bundles and into larger units of 25-pair increments, to make up the
specified pair count, as well as supper units (if required by pair count).
2.5.2.2.4. Twisted pairs and units shall be color-coded to industry standards, ANSI/ICEA
Publication S-80-576 and EIA-230.
2.5.2.3. Core and sheath:
2.5.2.3.1. Cable core (twisted pairs) shall have a tape applied longitudinally, wrapped
around its entirety. Tape material shall be non-hydroscopic polypropylene film
or equivalent.
2.5.2.3.2. Cable core and sheath shall be flooded with filling compound FLEXGEL, or
equal, to protect against moisture penetration.
2.5.2.3.3. Sheath type shall be ASP consisting of a two layer inner shield and an outer
jacket:
2.5.2.3.3.1. Shield:
2.5.2.3.3.1.1. 0.008 corrugated aluminum tape applied
longitudinally over the core wrap.
2.5.2.3.3.1.2. 0.006 corrugated steel tape applied longitudinally
over the aluminum tape with an overlap.
2.5.2.3.3.2. Jacket: Black, linear low density polyethylene, bonded to shield.
2.5.3. Backbone twisted pair terminations:

2.5.3.1. Inside plant:
2.5.3.1.1. Suitable for installation within equipment rooms for termination of twisted pair
backbone cables, either wall or rack mounted, vertically oriented in wall mount
column configuration.
2.5.3.1.2. 110 block type. Provide kits as required for 100, 300 or 900-pair, 5-pair based.
2.5.3.1.3. Insulated displacement connector blocks consisting of oxygen free mechanical
fastening system, arranged in a flame-retardant molded plastic, and fastened to
a mounting bracket.
2.5.3.1.4. Tower mounting construction with legless 110 blocks mounted to steel riser
trough.
2.5.3.1.5. Termination apparatus accompanied by the quantity of management panels for
routing of both horizontal and vertical cords or cross-connect wires. Horizontal
wiring management between block sections and crossconnect trough at
bottom.
2.5.3.1.6. Blocks shall meet Category 3 and conform to REA PE-87.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 16
2.5.3.1.7. Include both standard blocks and pre-wired blocks as noted on drawings. Pre-
wired terminal blocks shall be wired to an RJ-21C (50 Pin) connector either on
block or on end of pigtail stub cable.
2.5.3.2. Outside plant:
2.5.3.2.1. Termination of outside plant cables with building entrance protection BEP:
2.5.3.2.1.1. BEP terminals:
2.5.3.2.1.1.1. Suitable for indoor installations, within equipment
rooms (such as MPOE). BEP terminals shall provide
termination of outside plant twisted pair backbone
cables, shall protect premise equipment against
induced voltages and stray currents, and shall accept
5-pin protector modules.
2.5.3.2.1.1.2. BEP terminals shall be designed for wall mounted
configurations and shall have the capacity to accept
50 to 100-pair incoming and/or outgoing cable pairs.
2.5.3.2.1.1.3. 710-type input splice modules.
2.5.3.2.1.1.4. 110-type output punch down blocks.
2.5.3.2.1.2. BEP modules:
2.5.3.2.1.2.1. Standard 5-pin type BEP, suitable for installation into
BEP terminals.
2.5.3.2.1.2.2. Gas tube overvoltage device with DC breakdown
voltage of 230-350V.
2.5.3.2.1.2.3. Heat coil sneak current device with 1 amp of sneak
current and response time less than 15 seconds.
2.5.4. Labels:
2.5.4.1. Labels type shall be durable plastic (PE or equal) tags, suitable for indoor and/or outdoor
use, and shall contain UV inhibitors. The tags shall attach to the cable via an integrated
tie or via a separate steel or plastic tie wrap.
2.5.4.2. Printable area shall be 1.50 by 2.62, minimum.
2.5.4.3. Tags shall be gray. Tie wraps for indoor locations shall be white. Tie wraps for outdoor
locations shall be black.
2.6 HORIZONTAL TWISTED PAIR CABLING

2.6.1. Horizontal cables:
2.6.1.1.1. Suitable for indoor installations, exposed within equipment rooms, above
suspended ceilings and below raised floors in cable trays, hangers or on deck,
or within walls. If space is used as an air plenum, cable shall either be plenum
rated or installed in EMT conduit.
without splices.
2.6.1.1.3. Cables shall meet CAT6A performance criteria.
2.6.1.1.4. Cables shall be plenum rated.
2.6.1.2.1. Insulated conductors: Eight #23 AWG, solid copper wire insulated with
fluorinated-ethylene-propylene (FEP) for plenum rated applications.
JKA #15-100 267113 - 17
2.6.1.2.2. Twisted pairs: Two insulated conductors twisted together to form a pair and
four such paired cables to form a unit with individually color-coded pairs to
conform to industry standards (ANSI/ICEA Publication S-80-576-1994 and EIA-
230).
2.6.1.3. Cable sheath:
2.6.1.3.1. Outer jacket: Seamless outer jacket, flame-retardant PVC (low smoke for
plenum application), applied to and completely covering the internal
components (twisted pairs).
2.6.1.3.2. Flame rating: CMP according to NEC Article 800, tested to NFPA 262 and UL
Listed as such.
2.6.1.4. Electrical performance: Meet or exceed TIA/EIA-568-C .2-10 Augmented and ISO 11801
Edition 2.1 Class E specifications for CAT6A UTP cabling.
2.6.2. Modular patch cords:
2.6.2.1. Application: Suitable for indoor installations within equipment rooms or workstation
environments.
2.6.2.2. Cords assembled from a single, continuous length of cordage, homogenous in nature
and terminated at both ends via 8-position modular plugs. Splices are not permitted
anywhere.
2.6.2.3. Cordage:
2.6.2.3.1. Insulated conductors: Eight solid copper wire insulated with thermoplastic
polyethylene or high-density polyolefin for non-plenum rated applications.
2.6.2.3.2. Twisted pairs: Two insulated conductors twisted together to form a pair and
four such paired cables to form a unit with individually color-coded pairs to
conform to industry standards (ANSI/ICEA Publication S-80-576-1994 and EIA-
230).
2.6.2.4. Cable sheath:
2.6.2.4.1. Outer jacket: Seamless outer jacket, flame-retardant PVC, applied to and
completely covering the internal components (twisted pairs).
2.6.2.4.2. Flame rating: CM according to NEC Article 800, tested to UL listed as such.
2.6.2.5. Electrical performance: Meet or exceed TIA/EIA-568-C.2-10 Augmented and ISO 11801
2.6.3. Crossconnect wires:
2.6.3.1. Crossconnect wires shall be suitable for installation within equipment rooms and fully
compatible with the termination apparatus specified within this Section.
2.6.3.2. Crossconnect wires shall be manufactured from a single, continuous length of insulated
wire, homogenous in nature. Splices are not permitted anywhere.
2.6.3.3.1. Insulated conductors: #24 AWG, solid copper wire insulated with thermoplastic
polyethylene or high-density polyolefin for non-plenum rated applications.
2.6.3.3.2. Twisted pairs: Two insulated conductors twisted together to form a pair with
individually color-coded pairs to conform to industry standards (ANSI/ICEA
Publication S-80-576-1994 and EIA-230).
2.6.4. Modular patch panels:
2.6.4.1.1. Modular patch panels shall be suitable for installation within a equipment room
for the terminations of horizontal cables specified within this Section.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 18
2.6.4.1.2. Patch panels shall be horizontally oriented for rack-mounted configuration
within a 19 rack.
2.6.4.1.3. Patch panels shall be capable of supporting, organizing, labeling and
patching/crossconnecting between the horizontal termination field and the
equipment termination field.
2.6.4.2. Modular patch panels shall have 110-type terminations on back for horizontal cabling.
2.6.4.3. Patch panels shall have 24 or 48 ports on front and each port shall be an 8-position
modular jack, compliant to TIA/EIA 568-C.2 Chapter 5.
2.6.4.4. Each port shall be T568A wired.
2.6.4.6. Also, include 24 or 48 port modular patch panels with pre-wired RJ-21C (50 Pin)
connectors. Panels shall conform to all above requirements, except performance shall
meet TIA/EIA-568-B.2 for CAT3 UTP cabling.
2.6.5. Modular connectors:
2.6.5.1. Modular connectors shall be 8-position jacks, compliant to TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Addendum
10, and shall be compatible with the specified cable within this Section, both electrically
and physically
2.6.5.2. Modular connectors shall be T568A wired.
2.6.6. Outlets:
2.6.6.1.1. Outlet faceplates and mounting frames shall be suitable for indoor installations
to standard single or double-gang flush wall mounted outlet box plaster rings,
furniture partition outlets and floor boxes.
2.6.6.1.2. Refer to Specification Section 262726: Wiring Devices for device coverplate
finish.
2.6.6.2. Standard wall mounted faceplates:
2.6.6.2.1. Modular faceplates shall have 4-ports and shall include required accessories,
such as icons, blank inserts, label windows and labels.
2.6.6.2.2. Faceplates shall be single-ganged.
2.6.6.2.3. Faceplates shall be flush mounted.
2.6.6.2.4. Faceplates shall be single-gang decora-style to match power wiring devices.
2.6.6.3. Modular outlet frame:
2.6.6.3.1. Modular outlet frame shall have 234-ports and shall include required
accessories, such as icons, blank inserts, label windows and labels.
2.6.6.3.2. Outlet frame shall be decora-style.
2.6.6.3.3. Outlet frame shall attach like a duplex receptacle strap attaches to a box.
2.6.6.4. Wall mounted phone faceplates:
2.6.6.4.1. Faceplate shall be single-gang, flush mounted with 1 port and shall include
required accessories.
2.6.6.4.2. Faceplate shall include two mounting studs for standard wall phone instrument.
2.6.6.4.3. Faceplate shall be stainless steel.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 19
2.6.6.5. Surface mounted outlets:
2.6.6.5.1. Surface outlets shall be fully compatible with the specified modular
connector/jacks.
2.6.6.5.2. Surface outlets shall have 4-ports.
2.6.6.6. Partition furniture mounted faceplates:
2.6.6.6.1. Faceplates shall be single-gang type with 2346-ports and shall include required
accessories, such as icons, blank inserts, label windows and labels.
2.6.6.6.2. Faceplates shall be black.
2.6.7. Labels:
2.6.7.1. Labels shall be machine printable with a laser printer, ink jet printer, thermal transfer
printer or hand-held printer.
2.6.7.2. Labels for horizontal cables:
2.6.7.2.1. Adhesive backed labels and self-laminating feature.
2.6.7.2.2. Fit the horizontal cables specified herein by fully wrapping around the cable
jacket.
2.6.7.2.3. Size: 2 x .05 printable area, minimum.
2.6.7.2.4. Color: White.
2.6.8. Miscellaneous components:
2.6.8.1. Velcro cable ties:
2.6.8.1.1. Width: 0.75.
2.6.8.1.2. Color: Velcro cable ties the same color as the cable to which it is applied.
2.6.8.2. Plenum cable ties:
2.6.8.2.1. Suitable for use in plenums or air handling spaces.
2.6.8.2.2. Color: Maroon or other distinctive non-white color.
2.7 CABLE TESTING EQUIPMENT

2.7.1. Fiber optic cabling:
2.7.1.1. Fiber optic light source:
2.7.1.1.1. Connection interfaces shall be factory installed.
2.7.1.1.2. Output shall be continuous wavelengths.
2.7.1.1.3. The light sources may contain internal lenses, pigtails, and modal conditioners,
provided they meet the launch conditions as described in Post-Installation
Passive Link Attenuation Testing Procedures.
2.7.1.1.4. LASER-based light source for multimode fiber testing shall have the following:
2.7.1.1.4.1. Center wavelength of 850nm 30nm and 1300nm 20nm
2.7.1.1.4.2. Special width (FWHM) of 50nm at 850nm and 150nm at
1300nm.
2.7.1.1.4.3. Minimum output power level of 20dBm.
2.7.1.1.5. LASER-based light source foe singlemode fiber testing shall have the following:
2.7.1.1.5.1. Center wavelength of 1320nm 20nm and 1550nm 20nm
2.7.1.1.5.2. Special width (FWHM) of 5nm at 1310nm and 5nm at 1550nm.
2.7.1.1.5.3. Minimum output power level of 3dBm.
JKA #15-100 267113 - 20
2.7.1.2. Fiber optic power meter:
2.7.1.2.1. Power meter for multimode and singlemode testing shall be capable of
measuring relative of absolute power (or both) and must be independent of
modal distribution.
2.7.1.2.2. Power meters used must be calibrated and traceable to the National Bureau of
Standards.
2.7.1.2.3. Power meter used shall have the following:
2.7.1.2.3.1. Dynamic range of 0dBm to -40dBm minimum.
2.7.1.2.3.2. Accuracy of 0.2dBm.
2.7.1.3. Fiber optic mandrel:
2.7.1.3.1. Mandrel diameter for 50/125m jacketed (3.0mm) fiber shall be 22mm.
2.7.1.3.2. Mandrel diameter for 50/125m unjacketed (0.9mm) fiber shall be 25mm.
2.7.1.4. Fiber optic OTDR:
2.7.1.4.1. Multimode source module:
Wavelength Dynamic Attenuation Reflective Loss Distance
Range Deadzone Deadzone Resolution Accuracy
850nm 24dB 6.5mt 3.0mt 0.001dB 0.1mt
1300nm 27dB 7.0mt 3.0mt 0.001dB 0.1mt
2.7.1.4.2. Singlemode source module:
Wavelength Dynamic Attenuation Reflective Loss Distance
Range Deadzone Deadzone Resolution Accuracy
1310nm 40dB 6.0mt 3.5mt 0.001dB 0.1mt
1550nm 28dB 12.0mt 3.5mt 0.001dB 0.1mt
2.7.1.4.3. Reader software: Windows-based software capable of reading stored traces

and is fully functional with the testing equipment.
2.7.1.5. Fiber optic test cords:
2.7.1.5.1. Multimode fiber optic test cords:
2.7.1.5.1.1. The fiber of the multimode test cords shall have the core diameter
and numerical aperture nominally equal to that of the multimode
fiber optic passive link.
2.7.1.5.1.2. Test cord length for testing insertion loss: 1m to 5m.
2.7.1.5.1.3. Connectors of the test cords shall be compatible with the connector
types of the light source and the power meter, and with the cabling
plant.
2.7.1.5.1.4. The connectors shall exhibit 0.5dB loss per connection @ both
850nm and 1300nm, as measured per FOTP-171 D2.
2.7.1.5.2. Singlemode fiber optic test cords:
2.7.1.5.2.1. The fiber of the singlemode test cords shall have the core diameter
and numerical aperture nominally equal to that of the singlemode
fiber optic passive link.
2.7.1.5.2.2. Test cord length for testing insertion loss: 1m to 5m.
2.7.1.5.2.3. Connectors of the test cords shall be compatible with the connector
types of the light source and the power meter, and with the cabling
plant.
JKA #15-100 267113 - 21
2.7.1.5.2.4. The connectors shall exhibit 0.5 dB loss per connection @ both
1300 nm and 1550 nm, as measured per FOTP-171 D3. The
connectors shall inhibit Fresnel reflections (i.e. have a PC finish).
2.7.2. Twisted pair cabling:

2.7.2.1. Backbone cable tester: Areas of test measurement shall be Wire Map for continuity,
opens, shorts, crossed pairs and split pairs, as a minimum.
2.7.2.2. Horizontal cable tester:
2.7.2.2.1. Equipment shall meet TIA/EIA-568B.2 Addendum 1 requirements for Level III
accuracy, as applicable for cable type specified herein.
2.7.2.2.2. Test standards: ISO/IEC 11801 Class C and D; ISO/IEC 11801-2000 Class C
and D, 1000Base-Y, 100Base-TX; IEEE 802.3 10Base-T; ANSI TP-PMD; IEEE
802.5.
2.7.2.2.3. Areas of test measurement (minimum):
2.7.2.2.3.1. Wire Map.
2.7.2.2.3.2. Length.
2.7.2.2.3.3. Insertion Loss.
2.7.2.2.3.4. The following at both master unit and remote unit:
2.7.2.2.3.4.1. Near End Crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
2.7.2.2.3.4.2. Power Sum NEXT (PSNEXT) loss.
2.7.2.2.3.4.3. Equal Level Far End Crosstalk (ELFEXT).
2.7.2.2.3.4.4. Power Sum ELFEXT.
2.7.2.2.3.4.5. Return Loss (RL).
2.7.2.2.3.4.6. Attenuation-to-Crosstalk Ratio (ACR).
2.7.2.2.3.4.7. Power Sum ACR (PSACR).
2.7.2.2.3.5. Propagation Delay and Delay Skew.
2.7.2.2.3.6. Characteristic Impedance.
2.7.2.2.3.7. DC Loop Resistance.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of the
telecommunication cabling system installation to verify conformance with manufacturer and
specification tolerances. Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made
satisfactory.
3.1.2. Verify that pathways and supporting devices are properly and completely installed prior to cable
installation.
3.1.3. Verify dimensions of pathways to include length, i.e. true tape conduit runs.
3.1.4. Prior to installation, verify that equipment rooms are ready to accept cables and terminations.
3.2 INSTALLATION

JKA #15-100 267113 - 22
3.2.1. Equipment rooms:
3.2.1.1. Rack bays:
3.2.1.1.1. Equipment racks:
3.2.1.1.1.1. Provide parts and accessories required to complete each rack per
manufacturers instructions and as detailed on drawings.
3.2.1.1.1.2. Anchoring and bracing:
3.2.1.1.1.2.1. Anchor racks to the floor using structural engineer
approved concrete anchors.
3.2.1.1.1.2.2. Each rack must be attached to the floor at four points.
3.2.1.1.1.2.3. If required for seismic bracing, provide bracing
devices (i.e. brackets, threaded rod with strut, etc.)
attached to wall or structure above using appropriate
fasteners.
3.2.1.1.1.3. Tolerances:
3.2.1.1.1.3.1. Verify dimensions to establish proper clearances as
follows:
(1) Front: 40 clearance from channel front mounting flange.
(2) Back: 57 clearance from channel back mounting flange.
3.2.1.1.1.3.2. Provide the correct amount of space between each
rack for proper installation (according to
manufacturers written instructions) of the vertical
management sections.
3.2.1.1.2. Vertical management sections:
3.2.1.1.2.1. Provide vertical management sections mounted to racks with one
between each rack and one on both ends.
3.2.1.1.2.2. Bolt sections to the racks at the points designed by the
manufacturer and per the manufacturers instructions.
3.2.1.1.3. Horizontal management panels:
3.2.1.1.3.1. Provide the horizontal management panels mounted to racks with
one above each patch panel and one below the bottom patch panel
in each rack bay where patch panels occur.
3.2.1.1.3.2. Provide fasteners and parts required to complete the installation.
3.2.1.1.4. Accessories: Provide all accessories as required for a complete installation.
Include one bag of rack mounting screws, as come packaged with rack product.
Attach the screws directly to the rack, which shall constitute turn-over to the
Owner.
3.2.1.2. Overhead cable runway support:
3.2.1.2.1. Provide support devices (i.e. brackets, threaded rod with strut, etc.) attached to
wall or structure above using appropriate fasteners. Installation shall meet
manufacturers instructions and layout on the drawings.
3.2.1.2.2. Provide all parts and accessories required for a complete installation.
3.2.1.2.3. Cable runway support shall be centered over equipment racks where shown
running parallel.
3.2.1.2.4. Coordinate the installation of the overhead cable runway support with other
trades having Work in same area.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 23
3.2.1.3. Vertical cable runway support:
3.2.1.3.1. Install cable runway vertically on walls where noted and/or shown on the
drawings. Runway shall be for the support of cables routed vertically on walls
within the equipment rooms.
3.2.1.3.2. Provide parts and accessories as required for a complete installation.
3.2.1.3.3. Install the cable runway such that the rungs are facing outward (the greater
distance from the rung to the stringer edge is facing inward).
3.2.2. Equipment bonding:
3.2.2.1. Provide telecommunication bonding conductor and appropriate hardware between the
telecommunication system grounding backbone bus in each equipment room and the
equipment racks/rack bays, overhead cable support, vertical cable support,
telecommunication conduits, primary pathways that exit/enter the rooms (if applicable),
and all other metallic telecommunication infrastructure components.
3.2.2.2. Telecommunication bonding conductor:
3.2.2.2.1. The minimum size for the bonding conductor shall be #6 AWG THHN/THWN.
3.2.2.2.2. Install the bonding conductors in a manner that will protect them from physical
and mechanical damage.
3.2.2.2.3. Route the bonding conductors in the shortest possible path, using right angles
for turns and routed parallel to building lines.
3.2.2.2.4. Utilize a minimum of 1-0 bending radius.
3.2.2.2.5. At the backbone ground busbar:
3.2.2.2.5.1. Thoroughly clean the busbar prior to attaching connectors and
terminating conductors.
3.2.2.2.5.2. Attach connectors to the busbar with appropriate size cadmium
bronze bolt, flat washer and Belleville washer.
3.2.2.2.5.3. Torque all connectors.
3.2.2.3. Rack bays:
3.2.2.3.1. Bond equipment racks, frames, frame bays, cabinets, server racks, and all
other similar support systems located within the same equipment room or
space to the backbone ground busbar in same room.
3.2.2.3.2. Rack bays may be bonded in series using either of the following configurations:
3.2.2.3.2.1. Provide a bonding conductor from the backbone busbar to the
closest rack and route through ground lug connected to rack,
extending the conductor the full length of the rack bay. Each
individual rack shall have a ground lug attached that the bonding
conductor passes through. Insulation on bonding conductor, where
it passes through the lug, shall be removed prior to tightening
connection around conductor.
3.2.2.3.2.2. Provide a bonding conductor from the backbone busbar to the
closest rack and then along the entire length of rack bay. T tap a
pigtail, sized the same as the bonding conductor, from the bonding
conductor to each individual rack and terminate on ground lug
connected to rack.
3.2.2.4. Overhead and vertical cable runway support:
3.2.2.4.1. Bond cable runway located within the same equipment room or space to the
backbone ground busbar in same room.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 24
3.2.2.4.2. Provide a ground kit (straps and connectors) to bond sections of the runway
for ground continuity. This requirement applies to runway sections and
junctions within the same equipment room.
3.2.3. ISP backbone fiber optic cabling:
3.2.3.1. Cabling:
3.2.3.1.1. Cable runs shall have continuous sheath continuity, homogenous in nature,
without any splices.
3.2.3.1.2. Maximum cable length of 1,600 feet (500m) between the terminations at
MPOE, MDFs and IDFs.
3.2.3.1.3. Placement:
3.2.3.1.3.1. Place cables within designated pathways.
3.2.3.1.3.2. Maintain a minimum bend radius of 20 times the cable diameter
during installation and a minimum bending radius of 10 times the
cable diameter after installation.
3.2.3.1.3.3. Maintain pulling tension within manufacturers limits.
3.2.3.1.3.4. Place and suspend cables in a manner to protect them from
physical interference or damage. Place cables with no kinks,
twists, or impact damage to the sheath. Replace cables damaged
during installation.
3.2.3.1.3.5. Do not use cable-pulling compounds for indoor installations.
3.2.3.1.3.6. Provide 20 to 30 feet minimum sheath cable slack at each end of
the run within the equipment rooms. Store cable slack in the fiber
slack storage reel mounted on wall.
3.2.3.1.3.7. Place a pull rope along with cables where run in conduit and spare
capacity still exists in the conduit. Tie off ends of pull rope.
3.2.3.1.4. Routing:
3.2.3.1.4.1. Within equipment rooms, neatly dress and organize cables on
designated cable routing facilities and fasten cables to routing
facilities via tie wraps or Velcro type straps.
3.2.3.1.4.2. When routing horizontally within equipment rooms, utilize the
overhead cable support system. When routing vertically within
equipment rooms, utilize the vertical cable support system and
provide approved cable straps at 24 intervals.
3.2.3.1.5. Terminations:
3.2.3.1.5.1. Properly relieve strain from cables at termination points, at or within
the fiber optic termination panels) per manufacturers instructions.
3.2.3.1.5.2. Provide breakout kits to furcated fibers from buffer tubes. Provide
required accessories and consumables for the complete
termination of fiber strands.
3.2.3.1.5.3. Terminate fiber strands at both ends using the specified finer optic
connectors appropriate for the mode type of the fiber. Perform
termination in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3.2.3.1.5.4. Provide 3 feet of unsheathed fiber (tight buffer) slack within the
patch panel/termination enclosure at each end of the link. Properly
store fiber slack in rear of patch panel into the routing rings, per
3.2.3.2. Termination apparatus:

JKA #15-100 267113 - 25
3.2.3.2.1. Provide fully assembled termination patch panels in designated equipment
racks, located a top of rack. Fully assembled includes installation and
mounting components and accessories such as adapter panels, coupling
adapters, etc. required for operation.
3.2.3.2.2. Provide accessories required for proper installation of each termination patch
panel, including connector panels and adapters.
3.2.3.2.3. Termination sequence:
3.2.3.2.3.1. Rack-mount panels: Terminate singlemode fibers first (upper left-
most position), then multimode fibers, all in sequential strand order.
3.2.4. OSP backbone fiber optic cabling:
3.2.4.1. Innerduct:
3.2.4.1.1. Provide innerduct and accessories for all conduits containing outside plant fiber
optic cables. Innerducts shall consist of either three 1.25 or four 1 innerducts
per 4 conduit. Assume the latter unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
3.2.4.1.2. Install innerduct per manufacturers instructions. Use pulling equipment and
consumables (such as lubricants) allowed by the manufacturer. Place multiple
innerduct using pulling harness designed specifically for the use and also using
pulling swivel.
3.2.4.1.3. At each vault or pullbox, building entrance, and equipment room, secure
innerducts with triplex (for use with three 1.25 innerducts) or quadplex (for use
with four 1 innerducts) duct plugs.
3.2.4.2. Cabling:
between either termination points or designated splice points. Only splices as
noted on the Construction Documents are permitted.
3.2.4.2.2. Maximum cable length of 4,900 feet (1,500m) between the terminations at
MPOE or MDFs.
during installation and a minimum bend radius of 10 times the
cable diameter after installation.
3.2.4.2.3.3. Maintain pulling tension within manufacturers limits.
3.2.4.2.3.5. Only use UL approved cable-pulling compounds when necessary
to reduce pulling tension.
3.2.4.2.3.6. Provide 20 to 30 feet minimum sheath cable slack at each end of
the run within the equipment rooms. Store cable slack in the fiber
slack storage reel mounted on wall.
3.2.4.2.4. Routing:
3.2.4.2.4.1. Route cables in innerduct between points of termination throughout
entire length, except at the fiber take up reel.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 26
3.2.4.2.4.2. Within equipment rooms, neatly dress and organize cables on
designated cable routing facilities and fasten cables to routing
facilities via tie wraps or Velcro type straps.
overhead cable support system. When routing vertically within
equipment rooms, utilize the vertical cable support system and
provide approved cable straps at 24 intervals.
3.2.4.2.5.1. Properly relieve strain from cables at termination points, at or within
the fiber optic termination panels) per manufacturers instructions.
3.2.4.2.5.2. Provide breakout kits to furcated fibers from buffer tubes. Provide
required accessories and consumables for the complete
termination of fiber strands.
3.2.4.2.5.3. Terminate fiber strands at both ends using the specified finer optic
connectors appropriate for the mode type of the fiber. Perform
termination in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3.2.4.2.5.4. Provide 3 feet of unsheathed fiber (tight buffer) slack within the
patch panel/termination enclosure at each end of the link. Properly
store fiber slack in rear of patch panel into the routing rings, per
3.2.4.3. Duct plugs:
3.2.4.3.1. Install plugs per manufacturers instructions.
3.2.4.3.2. Provide duct plugs at conduit ends, both within inground vaults/pullboxes and at
building entrances. Provide fillers in each used duct port.
3.2.4.4. Termination apparatus:
3.2.4.4.1. Provide fully assembled termination patch panels in designated equipment
racks, located a top of rack. Fully assembled includes installation and
mounting components and accessories such as adapter panels, coupling
adapters, etc. required for operation.
3.2.4.4.2. Provide accessories required for proper installation of each termination patch
panel, including connector panels and adapters.
3.2.4.4.3. Termination sequence:
3.2.4.4.3.1. Rack-mount panels: Terminate singlemode fibers first (upper left-
most position), then multimode fibers, all in sequential strand order.
3.2.5. OSP backbone twisted pair cabling:
3.2.5.1. Cabling:
between either termination points or designated splice points. Only splices as
noted on the Construction Documents are permitted.
3.2.5.1.2. Maximum cable length of 4,900 feet between the terminations at MPOE or
MDFs.
during and after installation.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 27
3.2.5.1.3.3. Maintain pulling tension within manufacturers limits. Only use UL
approved cable pulling compounds when necessary to reduce
pulling tensions.
3.2.5.1.3.5. Neatly dress and organize cables in the cable routing facilities and
fasten to support devices via tie wraps.
3.2.5.1.4. Routing:
overhead cable support system. Within overhead cable support,
route backbone cables to avoid crossing over horizontal cabling or
horizontal cabling crossing over backbone cables. When routing
vertically within equipment rooms, utilize the vertical cable support
system and provide approved cable straps at 24 intervals.
3.2.5.1.4.2. Route cables a minimum of 6 away from power sources to reduce
interference from EMI.
3.2.5.1.5.1. Provide 15 feet cable slack loop at each end of the cable run.
Store slack in overhead cable support system or on backboard.
3.2.5.1.5.2. Properly relieve strain from cables at termination points per
manufacturers recommendations.
3.2.5.1.5.3. Bond metallic components of the cable sheath (i.e. shield) to the
telecommunication ground system in accordance with the NEC and
3.2.5.1.5.4. Terminate twisted pairs at both ends onto the specified BEP
terminals. Perform terminations in accordance with manufacturers
latest instructions and TIA/EIA-568-B standard installation
practices.
3.2.5.2. Building entrance protection:
3.2.5.2.1. Provide BEP system to include terminals, modules and accessories required for
a complete installation. Install BEP per manufacturers written instructions.
3.2.5.2.2. Install BEP terminals plumb and square with building lines. Install such that the
bottom row of terminations is no lower than 24 above finished floor and the top
row of terminations is no higher than 60 above finished floor.
3.2.5.2.3. Grounding and bonding:
3.2.5.2.3.1. Bond BEP terminals to the telecommunication ground system in
accordance with the NEC and per the manufacturers instructions.
3.2.5.2.3.2. Provide #6 AWG bonding conductor.
3.2.5.2.4. Provide quantity of protector modules to completely populate terminals.
3.2.6. Horizontal twisted pair cabling:
3.2.6.1. Horizontal cable installation and routing:
3.2.6.1.1. Cable runs shall have continuous sheath continuity, homogenous in nature with
no splicing.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 28
3.2.6.1.2. No cabling shall exceed a cable length of 295 (90m) from the termination point
at the equipment room to the termination at the workstation outlet, including
service slack, when measured using test equipment.
3.2.6.1.3. Place cables within the designated pathways, such as cable tray or basket tray,
cable runway, cable hangers, etc. Do not fasten, support or attach cables to
other building infrastructures (i.e. ducts, pipes, conduits, etc.), other systems
(i.e. ceiling support wires, wall studs, etc.), or to the outside of conduits, cable
trays and non0approved pathway systems.
3.2.6.1.4. Place and suspend cables during installation and termination in a manner to
protect them from physical damage or interference. Place cables with no kinks,
twists, or impact damage to the sheath. Replace cables damaged during
installation or termination at no additional cost.
3.2.6.1.5. Route cables at 90 angles, allowing for bending radius.
3.2.6.1.6. Do not exceed pulling tension of 25 lbs.
3.2.6.1.7. Do not use cable-pulling compounds.
3.2.6.1.8. Do not exceed a minimum bend radius of 6 times the cable diameter during and
after installation.
3.2.6.1.9. Route cables beneath other building infrastructures (i.e. ducts, pipes, conduits,
etc.) in above ceiling applications. Do not route cables over building
infrastructures. The installation shall result in easy accessibility to the cables in
the future.
3.2.6.1.10. Place cables 6 minimum away from power sources to reduce interference
from EMI.
3.2.6.1.11. Do not set 360 service loops in place for slack storage. Instead, set slack
as forward-and-back or as figure eights.
3.2.6.1.12. Place a pull string along with cables where run in conduits and spare
capacity in conduit remains. Tie off ends of the pull string to prevent the string
from falling onto the conduit.
3.2.6.1.13. When exiting the primary pathway, such as cable or basket tray, to the
workstation outlets, exit via the top of the pathway. Secure the cables to the
pathway using an approved cable tie.
3.2.6.2. Cable routing and dressing within equipment rooms:
3.2.6.2.1. Within equipment rooms, only use Velcro type straps.
3.2.6.2.2. Place cables within the overhead cable support system. When routing
vertically on walls, fasten the cables onto vertical supports every 24 on center.
3.2.6.2.3. Provide 12 minimum sheath cable slack, length not to exceed permanent link
maximum length requirement. Place the slack in the overhead cable support
system.
3.2.6.2.4. At the rack bay, route and neatly dress cables from the overhead cable support
system into the back of the vertical management sections. Divide the cables
equally between both sides of an equipment rack such that a cable does not
travel past the midpoint of the rack prior to termination. Fasten the cables to
the cable support bar at the back of the patch panel using approved ties.
3.2.6.3. Termination in the equipment rooms:
3.2.6.3.1. Provide termination apparatus and accessories required for a complete
installation. Install and assemble termination apparatus, accessories and
associated management apparatus according to the manufacturers
instructions.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 29
3.2.6.3.2. Properly relieve strain from the cables to and at termination points per
manufacturers instructions. Provide a strain relief bar at the back of the
modular patch panels for proper strain relief.
3.2.6.3.3. Terminate cables and twisted pairs in accordance with manufacturers latest
installation requirements and TIA/EIA-568-B standard installation practices.
Terminate cable pairs onto the termination apparatus compliant to T568A
wiring.
3.2.6.3.4. Modular patch panels and horizontal management panels:
3.2.6.3.4.1. Provide quantity of modular patch panels to support the
terminations of cables served from respective IDF. Provide
quantity of horizontal management panels based on the quantity of
patch panels.
3.2.6.3.4.2. Install and assemble modular patch panels and horizontal
management panels according to the manufacturers instructions.
3.2.6.3.4.3. Install the patch panels and the horizontal management panels as
shown on the Drawings.
3.2.6.3.4.4. Terminate cables in sequential order using the links identifier
starting at the top left and completing a panel before moving to the
next panel below.
3.2.6.4. Cable routing and dressing at workstations:
3.2.6.4.1. Provide 12 to 18 cable slack at each workstation outlet, length not to exceed
permanent link maximum length requirement. Place the slack within ceiling
space neatly on a cable hanger or other approved cable support device.
3.2.6.4.2. Route to partition furniture mounted faceplates:
3.2.6.4.2.1. Route cables from primary or secondary pathway within ceiling
through the furniture partition feed pathway (stub from wall or floor
box) into opening at bottom of furniture system. Exercise caution
to prevent scraping, cutting or other damage to cable jacket.
3.2.6.4.2.2. Provide spiral wrap around cables from furniture-feed pathway to
point where cables enter furniture.
3.2.6.5. Termination at the workstation outlets:
3.2.6.5.1. Provide device components, connectors, and accessories required for a
complete installation. Install and assemble connectors, jacks, adapters,
termination apparatus, accessories and associated management apparatus
according to the manufacturers instructions.
3.2.6.5.2. Connector color shall match the faceplate.
3.2.6.5.3. Provide fog white connectors for data links and dark blue connectors for
voice links.
3.2.6.5.4. Wall mounted standard devices:
3.2.6.5.4.1. Install devices at heights indicated on drawings.
3.2.6.5.4.2. Mount faceplates plumb, square and at the same level as adjacent
power receptacles.
3.2.6.5.4.3. Patch gaps around faceplates so that faceplate covers the entire
wall opening.
3.2.6.5.5. Partition furniture mounted devices:
3.2.6.5.5.1. Coordinate installation of the faceplate adapters with the furniture
contractor, including color.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 30
3.2.6.5.5.2. Mount faceplate adapters into the designated openings for
horizontal cables.
3.2.6.5.6. Terminate cables and twisted pairs in accordance with the manufacturers latest
installation requirements and TIA/EIA-568-B standard installation practices.
Terminate cable pairs onto the connector compliant to T568A wiring.
3.2.6.6. Patching and crossconnecting:
3.2.6.6.1. In equipment rooms, provide one modular patch cord for the first data
connector in each workstation outlet. Install from the horizontal termination
field to the network switches/equipment. Neatly dress patch cords within the
horizontal and vertical cable management components.
3.2.6.6.2. In equipment rooms, provide one modular patch cord for the first voice
connector in each workstation outlet. Install from the horizontal termination
field to the voice field. Neatly dress patch cords within the horizontal and
vertical cable management components.
3.2.6.6.3. Provide one 1-pair crossconnect for each workstation outlet. Install from
backbone twisted pair 110 terminal blocks to the pre-wired 110 terminal blocks.
Neatly dress patch cords within the horizontal and vertical cable management
components.
3.3 LABELING
3.3.1. General requirements:
3.3.1.1. Labeling, label colors, and identifier assignments shall conform to EIA/EIA-606-A
Administration Standards and as approved by the Owner.
3.3.1.2. Provide permanent and machine-generated labels. Hand written labels will not be
accepted.
3.3.2. Equipment room labeling:
3.3.2.1. Equipment rack: Provide one label plate per rack and cabinet/frame. Permanently affix
label plate centered on the racks top angle or the cabinets top front frame.
3.3.2.2. Identifier assignment for equipment racks:
3.3.2.2.1. Prefix: RACK
3.3.2.2.2. First field: The IDF identity.
3.3.2.2.3. Second field: The rack number.
3.3.3. Backbone fiber optic cable labeling:
3.3.3.1. Cables:
3.3.3.1.1. Text color shall be black with #10 font size.
3.3.3.1.2. Identifier assignment:
3.3.3.1.2.1. First field: Type of cable.
3.3.3.1.2.2. Second field: Total strand count.
3.3.3.1.2.3. Third field: Cable number.
3.3.3.1.2.4. Fourth field: Strands in use and dead strands.
3.3.3.1.2.5. Fifth field: Source and destination.
3.3.3.1.2.6. Sixth field: Terminal number (MPOE, MDF, IDF).
3.3.3.1.3. Label installation:
3.3.3.1.3.1. Provide labels on both ends of cables.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 31
3.3.3.1.3.2. Install such that they are visible by a technician from normal
stance.
3.3.3.1.3.3. Fully wrap label around the cable jacket (self lamination).
3.3.3.1.3.4. Provide one label within 12 of the termination apparatus.
3.3.3.1.3.5. Provide one label at the point where the cable enters/exits the
equipment room.
3.3.3.1.3.6. Provide one label at the approximate mid-point between where the
cable enters/exits the room and the termination apparatus.
3.3.3.2. Fiber patch panels:
3.3.3.2.1. Text color shall be black, #10 font size.
3.3.3.2.2.1. Provide labels at each port.
3.3.3.2.2.2. Install labels into label window.
3.3.4. Backbone twisted pair cable labeling:
3.3.4.1. Cables:
3.3.4.1.2.1. First field: Type of cable.
3.3.4.1.2.2. Second field: Total number of pairs.
3.3.4.1.2.3. Third field: Cable number.
3.3.4.1.2.4. Fourth field: Active cable count and dead pairs.
3.3.4.1.2.5. Fifth field: Source and destination.
3.3.4.1.2.6. Sixth field: Terminal number (MPOE, MDF, IDF).
3.3.4.1.3.1. Provide labels on both ends of cables.
3.3.4.1.3.2. Install such that they are visible by a technician from normal
stance.
3.3.4.1.3.5. Provide one label at the point where the cable enters/exits the
equipment room.
3.3.4.1.3.6. Provide one label at the approximate mid-point between where the
cable enters/exits the room and the termination apparatus.
3.3.4.2. BEP terminals:
3.3.4.2.2.1. First field: Building identifier.
3.3.4.2.2.2. Second field: Building zone identifier.
3.3.4.2.2.3. Third field: Incoming cable pair identifier.
3.3.4.2.2.4. Fourth field: Outgoing cable pair identifier.
JKA #15-100 267113 - 32
3.3.4.2.3.1. Install labels such that they are visible by technician form normal
stance.
3.3.4.2.3.2. Provide one label on the terminal cover or housing.
3.3.4.3. Modular patch panels:
3.3.4.4. Label installation in manholes/vaults/pullboxes:
3.3.4.4.1. Provide at least one label within the manholes/vaults/pullboxes.
3.3.4.4.2. Install labels such that they are visible by technician from above grade.
3.3.4.5. Label installation at splice points:
3.3.4.5.1. Provide one label on each side of splice case.
3.3.4.5.2. Install labels such that they are visible by technician from above grade.
3.3.5. Horizontal twisted pair labeling:
3.3.5.1. Cables:
3.3.5.1.2.1. Provide labels on both ends of cable.
3.3.5.1.2.2. Install labels such that they are visible by technician from a normal
stance.
3.3.5.2. Modular patch panels:
3.3.5.3. Outlets:
3.3.5.3.2.1. At faceplates, provide labels above and below jacks.
3.3.5.3.2.2. At surface boxes, provide labels on the top of the box.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING
3.4.1. General:
3.4.1.1. Calibrate test sets and associated equipment per the manufacturers instructions at the
beginning of each days testing and after each battery charge. Fully charge the test sets
prior to each days testing to ensure proper operation.
3.4.1.2. Ensure test equipment and test cords are clean and undamaged during testing activities.
Per the Engineers discretion, halt testing activity and clean testing equipment, test cords
and related apparatus.
JKA #15-100 267113 - 33
3.4.1.3. Permanently record test results electronically within test equipment at the time of testing.
3.4.2. Fiber optic testing:

3.4.2.1. Test fiber optic passive links as follows:
TESTS FOR FIBER OPTIC CABLING TABLE
Subsystem Type Test Direction Wavelength
OSP backbone Multimode Characterizatio Both 850nm and

n, passive link 1300nm
insertion loss
OSP backbone Singlemode Characterizatio Both 1310nm and
n, passive link 1550nm
insertion loss
ISP backbone Multimode Passive link Both 850nm and
insertion loss 1300nm
ISP backbone Singlemode Passive link Both 13100nm and
insertion loss 1550nm
3.4.2.2. Precautions:
3.4.2.2.1. Adhere to the equipment manufacturers instructions during testing.
3.4.2.2.2. Prior to testing activity or measurements taken, complete the following
activities:
3.4.2.2.2.1. Ensure the test equipment is at room temperature, approximately
70F.
3.4.2.2.2.2. Turn the light source and power meter power on for at least 5
minutes.
3.4.2.2.2.3. Clean test/launch cords and system cords, if applicable, connectors
and the cabling system adapters with a lint-free wipe and 90% (or
higher) isopropyl alcohol.
3.4.2.2.3. Do not power off OTDRs light source during testing activity.
3.4.2.2.4. Do not remove launch cord from the OTDRs light source at any time (unless
the testing is complete or the equipment is being put away for the evening or
during trouble shooting).
3.4.2.2.5. Do not bend the launch cord smaller than 20 times the cord diameter during
testing activities, as this may induce loss into the cord reducing the accuracy of
the measurements).
3.4.3. Fiber optic characterization testing:
3.4.3.1. Equipment settings/measurement parameters:
3.4.3.1.1. Index of refraction: Match cable-under-test fiber parameters, default settings as
follows:
3.4.3.1.1.1. Multimode: 1.481 1.483 @ 850nm and 1.476-1.478 @ 1300nm.
3.4.3.1.1.2. Singlemode: 1.466-1.467 @ 1310nm and 1.467-1.4677 @
1559nm.
3.4.3.1.2. Pulse width (20ns for multimode and 50ns for singlemode):
3.4.3.1.2.1. Multimode: 4ns for cable lengths up to 980 feet (300m); 20ns for
cable lengths between 980 feet (300m) and 6,560 feet (2,000m).

JKA #15-100 267113 - 34
3.4.3.1.2.2. Singlemode: 10ns for cable lengths up to 6,560 feet (2,000m);
50ns for cable lengths between 6,560 feet (2,000m) and 32,800
feet (10,000m).
3.4.3.1.3. Backscatter:
3.4.3.1.3.1. Multimode: -67dB @ 850nm, -74dB @ 1300nm.
3.4.3.1.3.2. Singlemode: -74dB @ 1310nm and 1550nm.
3.4.3.1.4. Event threshold: 0.05dB.
3.4.3.1.5. Reflection threshold:
3.4.3.1.5.1. Multimode: -45dB.
3.4.3.1.5.2. Singlemode: -60dB.
3.4.3.1.6. Fiber break/end-of-fiber: 3dB.
3.4.3.2. Waveform: The waveform shall be real-time and normal density.
3.4.3.3. Obtain measurements using a launch cord connected to the test instrument and the
cable under test.
3.4.3.3.1. The fiber of the launch cord shall match the fiber of the cable under test in
physical and performance parameters (i.e. type, core/cladding size, index of
reflection, refraction profile, etc.). The fiber of the launch cord should match the
fiber of the cable under test in manufacturer and product.
3.4.3.3.2. Use launch cord length between 25 and 100 meters.
3.4.4. Fiber optic passive link insertion loss testing:
3.4.4.1. Test cords performance verification:
3.4.4.1.1. Connect test cord #1 between the light source and the power meter.
3.4.4.1.2. The value displayed on the power meter is the Reference Power (Pref)
measurement. If the power meter has a Relative Power Measurement Mode,
enter this Reference Power Measurement (Pref) value into the meter. If it does
not, hand-write Pref onto the record document for future reference.
3.4.4.1.3. Disconnect test cord #1 form the power meter. Do not disconnect test cord #1
from the light source.
3.4.4.1.4. Connect the open end of test cord #1 to an adapter of matching connector
type. Connect one end of test cord #2 to the adapter and the other end to the
power meter.
3.4.4.1.5. The value displayed on the power meter is the Power Measurement (Psum). If
the power meter is in Relative Power Measurement Mode, the meter reading
represents the test cord #2 connection attenuation. If the meter does not have
a Relative Power Measurement Mode, perform the following calculation to
determine the connection attenuation:
3.4.4.1.5.1. If Psum and Pref are in the same logarithmic units (dBm, dBu, etc.):
Connection attenuation (dB) = (Psum - Pref)
3.4.4.1.5.2. If Psum and Pref are in watts: Connection attenuation (dB) = [10 x
log10 (Psum/Pref)]
3.4.4.1.5.3. The measured connection attenuation must be less than or equal
to the value found in the Table below.
3.4.4.1.6. Flip the ends of test cord #2, so that the end connected to the power meter is
now connected to the adapter, and the end connected to the adapter is now
connected to the power meter.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 35
3.4.4.1.7. The meter reading is the reversed Power Measurement (Psum). Perform the
proper calculations if not using Relative Power Measurement Mode.
3.4.4.1.8. Verify that both connection attenuation measurements are less than or equal to
the value found in the following Table:
ACCEPTABLE TEST CORD CONNECTION ATTENUATION
Cable Type LC (or other Mini-Connector) Cord
Multimode 0.20dB maximum
Singlemode 0.30dB maximum
3.4.4.1.9. If both measurements are found to be less than or equal to the values found in
the Table, then test cord #1 is acceptable for testing purposes. Unacceptable
attenuation measurements may be attributable to test cord #1 or #2. Examine
each cord with a portable microscope and clean, polish or replace as
necessary.
3.4.4.1.10. Repeat this test procedure from the beginning, reversing the test cords in
order to verify the performance of test cord #2.
3.4.4.2. Test equipment set-up:
3.4.4.2.1. Follow the test equipment manufacturers initial adjustment and set-up
instructions.
3.4.4.2.2. If the meter has a Relative Power Measurement Mode, select this mode.
3.4.4.2.3. If the meter can display power levels in dBm, select this unit of measurement to
simplify subsequent calculations.
3.4.4.2.4. Set the light source and power meter to the same wavelength.
3.4.4.3. Multimode passive link insertion loss testing procedure:
3.4.4.3.1. Determine launch conditions (from the light source as Category 1 per OFSTP-
14):
3.4.4.3.1.1. General: The launch category of a light source can be determined
by measuring its Coupled Power Ratio CPR. The CPR is a
measurement of the modal power distribution launched into a
multimode fiber. A light source that launches a higher percentage
of its power into the higher order modes of a multimode fiber
produces a more over-filled condition and is classified as a lower
Category than a light source that launches more of its power into
just the lower order modes producing an under-filled condition.
Under-filled conditions result in lower link attenuation, while over-
filled conditions produce higher attenuation. Therefore, adjusting
the acceptable link attenuation to compensate for a light sources
launch characteristic increases the accuracy of the test procedure.
3.4.4.3.1.2. Provide two test cords, one multimode (test cord #1) and one
singlemode (test cord #2). Directly terminate both cords on
connectors that are compatible with the light source and power
meter.
3.4.4.3.1.2.1. The fiber of the multimode test cord shall have the
core diameter and numerical aperture nominally
equal to those of the permanent link.
3.4.4.3.1.2.2. The fiber of the singlemode test cord shall contain
Class IVa singlemode fiber with a mode field
diameter of 5.0m 0.5m for 850nm tests and
9.0m 1.0m for 1300nm tests.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 36
3.4.4.3.1.3. Connect test cord #1 between the light source and the power
meter. Avoid placing bends in the cord that are less than 4 in
diameter.
3.4.4.3.1.4. The meter reading is the Reference Power Measurement (Pref). If
the power meter has a Relative Power Measurement Mode, enter
the Pref value into the meter. If it does not have this mode, then
hand-write the Pref for future reference.
3.4.4.3.1.5. Disconnect test cord #1 from the power meter. Do not disconnect
test cord #1 from the light source.
3.4.4.3.1.6. Connect test cord #2 between the power meter and test cord #1,
using an appropriate adapter between the test cords. Test cord #2,
the singlemode cord, shall include a high order mode filter. This
can be accomplished by twice wrapping the cord around a 1.2
diameter (30mm) mandrel.
3.4.4.3.1.7. The meter reading is the Power Measurement (Psum). If the power
meter is in Relative Power Measurement Mode, the meter reading
represents the CPR. If the meter does not have this mode, perform
the following calculation to determine the CPR:
3.4.4.3.1.7.1. If Psum and Pref are in the same logarithmic units
(dBm, dBu, etc.): CPR (dB) = (Psum - Pref)
3.4.4.3.1.7.2. If Psum and Pref are in watts: CPR (dB) = [10 x log10
(Psum/Pref)]
COUPLED POWER RATIO (CPR) TABLE
Cat-1 Cat-2 Cat-3 Cat-4 Cat-5
Overfilled Underfilled
850nm source 20 - 24 16 19.9 11 15.9 7 10.9 0 5.9
3.4.4.3.2. Test method: Perform the passive link insertion loss testing of multimode fibers
according to the Test Method B: One Jumper Reference, per OFSTP-14, for
permanent links, and perform according to the Test Method C: Three Jumper
Reference, per OFSTP-14, for channel links.
3.4.4.3.2.1. After setting up the test equipment, verifying the performance of the
test cords and determining the light sources CPR, the insertion
loss of the passive link segments can be measured.
meter.
hand-write the Pref for future reference.
3.4.4.3.2.5. Connect test cord #1 to the passive link segment input.
3.4.4.3.2.6. At the opposite end of the passive link segment, connect test cord
#2 to the link segment input and the power meter.
3.4.4.3.2.7. The meter reading is the Power Measurement (Psum). If the power
meter is in Relative Power Measurement Mode, the meter reading
represents the insertion loss. If the meter does not have this mode,
perform the following calculation to determine the insertion loss:

JKA #15-100 267113 - 37
(dBm, dBu, etc.): Link segment attenuation (dB) =
(Psum - Pref)
3.4.4.3.2.7.2. If Psum and Pref are in watts: Link segment
attenuation (dB) = [10 x log10 (Psum/Pref)]
3.4.4.3.2.8. Record Psum for inclusion into the record documents.
3.4.4.4. Singlemode passive link insertion loss testing procedure:
3.4.4.4.1. Determine the launch conditions:
3.4.4.4.1.1. Use the launch conditions as described in FOTP-78.
3.4.4.4.1.2. Employ a method to remove high-order propagating modes as
described in FOTP-77.
3.4.4.4.2. Test method: Perform the passive link insertion loss testing of singlemode
fibers according to the Test Method A.1: One Jumper Reference, per OFSTP-
7.
3.4.4.4.2.1. After setting up the test equipment and verifying the performance of
the test cords, the insertion loss of the passive link segments can
be measured.
meter.
hand-write the Pref for future reference and to be included in the
Record Documents.
3.4.4.4.2.5. Connect test cord #1 to the passive link segment input.
3.4.4.4.2.6. At the opposite end of the passive link segment, connect test cord
#2 to the link segment input and the power meter.
3.4.4.4.2.7. The meter reading is the Power Measurement (Psum). If the
power meter is in Relative Power Measurement Mode, the meter
reading represents the insertion loss. If the meter does not have
this mode, perform the following calculation to determine the
insertion loss:
(dBm, dBu, etc.): Link segment attenuation (dB) =
(Psum - Pref)
3.4.4.4.2.7.2. If Psum and Pref are in watts: Link segment
attenuation (dB) = [10 x log10 (Psum/Pref)]
3.4.4.4.2.8. Record Psum for inclusion into the record documents.
3.4.4.5. Acceptable measurement values:
3.4.4.5.1. Remove and replace any cabling links failing to meet the criteria described in
this Specification, at no cost to the Owner, with cables that prove to meet the
minimum requirements.
3.4.4.5.2. The general insertion loss equation for any link segment is as follows:
3.4.4.5.2.1. Insertion loss = cable loss + connection loss + splice loss + CPR
adjustment.

JKA #15-100 267113 - 38
3.4.4.5.2.2. Note: A connection is defined as the joint made by two mating
fibers terminated with remateable connectors.
3.4.4.5.3. 50/125m multimode attenuation coefficients:
3.4.4.5.3.1. Cable loss = Cable length (km) x (3.0dB/km @ 850nm) or
(1.0dB/km @ 1300nm).
3.4.4.5.3.2. Connection loss = (Connections x 0.14dB) + 0.24dB.
3.4.4.5.3.3. Splice loss = Splice x 0.05dB.
3.4.4.5.3.4. CPR adjustment = See Table below.
MULTIMODE LIGHT SOURCE CPR ADJUSTMENT TABLE
Cat-1 Cat-2 Cat-3 Cat-4 Cat-5
Links w/ LC +0.25 0.00 -0.10 -0.20 -0.30
connectors
3.4.4.5.4. Singlemode attenuation coefficients:
3.4.4.5.4.1. OSP cable loss = Cable length (km) x (0.40dB/km @ 1310nm) or
(0.30dB/km @1550nm).
3.4.4.5.4.2. ISP cable loss = Cable length (km) x (0.650dB/km @ 1310nm) or
(0.50dB/km @1550nm).
3.4.4.5.4.3. Connection loss = (Connection x 0.24dB) + 0.24dB.
3.4.4.5.4.4. Splice loss = Splices x 0.07dB.
3.4.4.5.4.5. CPR adjustment = Not applicable for singlemode.
3.4.5. Twisted pair testing:
3.4.5.1. Test for UTP cabling as follows:
TESTS FOR FIBER OPTIC CABLING TABLE
Subsystem Type Test Configuration Notes

Backbone OSP See Notes - Wire map &
length
Backbone ISP/Riser See Notes - Wire map &
length
Horizontal CAT6A Category 6A Permanent Per TIA/EIA-
Link 568-C.2
3.4.5.2. Precautions:
3.4.5.2.1. Adhere to the equipment manufacturers instructions during all testing.
3.4.5.2.2. Prior to any testing activity or any measurements taken, ensure the test
equipment is at room temperature, approximately 70F.
3.4.5.2.3. Fully charge power sources before each days testing activity.
3.4.5.3. Backbone twisted pair testing:
3.4.5.3.1. The installation will be accepted when testing has indicated availability of 100%
terminated pairs.
3.4.5.3.2. Test continuity and wire map for all pairs.
3.4.5.3.3. Test length for 2% of pairs of each cable. Pairs shall be from different 25 pair
binder groups.
3.4.5.4. Horizontal twisted pair testing:

JKA #15-100 267113 - 39
3.4.5.4.1. Test equipment set-up:
3.4.5.4.1.1. Set-up the tester to perform a full CAT6A test, as a Permanent Link
configuration.
3.4.5.4.1.2. If the tester has the capability, set the cable type as product
specific setting. If not, set as generic CAT6A cable.
3.4.5.4.1.3. Set the tester to save the full test results (all test points, graphs,
etc.).
3.4.5.4.1.4. Save the test results with associated cable link identifier.
3.4.5.4.1.5. Calibrate the test set per the manufacturers instructions.
3.4.5.4.2. Acceptable test results measurements:
3.4.5.4.2.1. Overall test results:
3.4.5.4.2.1.1. Links which report a Fail, Fail or Pass for any of the
individual tests shall result in an overall link Fail. All
individual test results must result in a Pass to achieve
an overall Pass.
3.4.5.4.2.1.2. Any reconfiguration of link components required as a
result of a test Fail, must be re-tested for
conformance.
3.4.5.4.2.1.3. Remove and replace any cabling links failing to meet
the criteria described in this Specification, at no cost
to the Owner, with cables that prove to meet the
minimum requirements.
3.4.5.4.2.2. Wire map: Provide continuous pairs and terminate all of the
cabling links correctly at both ends, no exceptions taken.
3.4.5.4.2.3. Length: Ninety-four meters (308 feet) is the maximum acceptable
electrical length measurements for any cabling link measured
under a Permanent Link configuration, including test cords.
3.4.5.4.2.4. Insertion loss: The acceptable insertion loss measurements for
any horizontal cabling link is that which is no greater than that listed
in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
3.4.5.4.2.5. Worst pair-to-pair near end crosstalk (NEXT) loss: The acceptable
worst pair-to-pair NEXT loss for any horizontal cable is that which
is no greater than that listed in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
3.4.5.4.2.6. Power sum NEXT loss: The acceptable power sum PS-NEXT loss
for any horizontal cable is that which is no greater than that listed in
TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
3.4.5.4.2.7. Worst pair-to-pair ELFEXT and FEXT loss: The acceptable worst
pair-to-pair ELFEXT and FEXT loss for any horizontal cable is that
which is no greater than that listed in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
3.4.5.4.2.8. Power sum ELFEXT and FEXT loss: The acceptable PS-ELFEXT
and PS-FEXT loss for any horizontal cable is that which is no
greater than that listed in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
3.4.5.4.2.9. Return loss: The acceptable return loss measurements for any
horizontal cabling link is that which is no greater than that listed in
TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
3.4.5.4.2.10. Propagation delay and delay skew: The acceptable
propagation delay and delay skew measurements for any
horizontal cabling link is that which is no greater than that listed in
TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
JKA #15-100 267113 - 40
3.4.6. Record documents:
3.4.6.1. Permanently record all test results.
3.4.6.2. Export test results numerical values to a single Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
3.4.6.3. Submit test results in a format acceptable to the Owner, Owners Representative and the
Engineer before system acceptance.
3.4.6.4. Cable, fiber and pair identifiers of the test reports shall match the identifiers as labeled in
the field, i.e. use the same ID on the cable/termination label as what appears on the test
report.
3.4.6.5. Measurements shall carry a precision through one significant decimal place, minimum.
3.4.6.6. Use feet for the units for measurements shown on the print of the test measurements.
3.4.6.7. Print report such that fiber strands of a given cabling link have matching axis scales. The
X and the Y axis shall be the same from report-to-report.
3.4.6.8. The trace of the printed test report shall show the launch cord.
3.4.6.9. For each fiber optic backbone cable test, report shall contain the following information:
3.4.6.9.1. Project name and address.
3.4.6.9.2. Test companys and Operators name.
3.4.6.9.3. Date measurements were taken.
3.4.6.9.4. Test equipment type to include model and serial numbers.
3.4.6.9.5. Cable identification number, fiber/strand number and fiber type (i.e. multimode,
singlemode, etc).
3.4.6.9.6. Measurement direction.
3.4.6.9.7. Set-up parameters (i.e. wavelength, pulse width, refractive index, event
threshold, etc.)
3.4.6.9.8. OTDR trace.
3.4.6.9.9. Length of fiber.
3.4.6.9.10. Overall link loss.
3.4.6.9.11. Passive link insertion loss testing:
3.4.6.9.11.1. Wavelength.
3.4.6.9.11.2. Loss measurement.
3.4.6.10. For each cabling link, include either a schematic graphic or a brief narrative accurately
describing the test set-up. The description shall include test/launch cord (with length),
expected events (connectors, slices, etc.) with expected distances, etc. This information
will eliminate many questions the Engineer will have while reviewing the reports.
3.4.6.11. For each twisted pair backbone and horizontal cable test, report shall contain the
following information:
3.4.6.11.1. Project name and address.
3.4.6.11.2. Test companys and Operators name.
3.4.6.11.3. Date measurements were taken.
3.4.6.11.4. Test equipment type to include model and serial numbers.
3.4.6.11.5. Cable identification number and pair number.
3.4.6.11.6. Measurement results.
3.5 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS

JKA #15-100 267113 - 41
3.5.1. Contractor shall inspect all installed Work in conjunction with the General Contractor and develop
a "punchlist" for all items needing correction. Provide punchlist to the Engineer prior to their final
walk of Project.
3.5.2. Punchlist work and the required remediation shall be performed prior to system final acceptance.
3.5.3. Replace or repair work completed by others that was defaced or destroyed during the installation
of the telecommunication cabling system by this contractor.
3.5.4. Make changes to adjust the system to optimum operation for final use. Contractor is responsible
for making changes to the system such that any defects in workmanship are correct and all cables
and the associated termination hardware passes the minimum test requirements.
3.6 CLEANING
3.6.1. Remove all unused, excess and left over products, to include debris, spills, and installation
equipment.
3.6.2. Leave finished work and adjacent surfaces in neat, clean conditions with no evidence of damage.
3.6.3. Legally dispose of debris.
3.6.4. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturers instructions prior to final punchlist.
3.7 TRAINING
3.7.2. At the completion of all Work, a period of not less than 16 hours shall be allocated by the
Contractor for instruction and training for the Owner Representative. The Cabling Contractor will
need to describe how the cable from each coverplate is separated between different patch panels,
how cross-connects are made and other basic cable plant management skills.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 267113 - 42
SECTION 267319
ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM

1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1.1. Transmitter.
1.1.1.2. Receivers.
1.1.1.3. Antenna and cabling.
1.1.2. Related Work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of
related Work and properly coordinate Work specified herein with that specified
elsewhere to produce a complete installation.
1.2 REFERENCES
1.2.1.1. Electronic Industries Association (EIA):
EIA REC 127-49; Power Supplies.
EIA RS 160-51 Sound Systems.
EIA SE 101-A--49; Amplifiers for Sound Equipment.
EIA SE 103-49; Speakers for Sound Equipment.
1.3.1. Assistive listening system for meeting room and activity center, including wireless FM
base station transmitter, antenna, personal receivers, earbuds, neck loops, wall
placques, and miscellaneous accessories required for a complete system.
1.3.2. Digital audio processing and direct digital synthesis for superior FM transmission,
sound clarity and channel flexibility; wide-band and narrow-band compatible; bass cut
adjustment; line, microphone and speaker level inputs; lightweight and comfortable
receivers; easy to install and operate.
1.3.3. Include suitcase for housing portable system components.
1.3.4. Transmitter shall be rack-mountable base station with input from house sound system,
microphone or speaker. Must have terminal block speaker level input, flexible
connection options (XLR microphone/line input), VFD display, level control, customized
output, overload warning light, RF fault indicator, frequency agility and lock out feature
to prevent transmitter settings from being changed.
1.3.5. Personal receivers shall be body-worn and furnished with pouch and belt clips.
Receiver models shall be narrow-band, 72 to 76 MHz frequency with 6-channels.
1.3.6. Range shall be 700,000 square feet of unobstructed coverage with standard antenna
or higher as required to cover the entire floor area per UBC.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Items specified under this Section are Priority 1. Refer to Section 260010: Basic
Electrical Requirements for specific Priority 1 requirements.

County of Tehama ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM
JKA #15-100 267319 - 1
physical and electrical characteristics and ratings indicating compliance with
all listed standards.
1.4.2.2. Describe system operation, equipment, dimensions and indicate features of
each component.
1.4.2.4. Total number of personal receivers and accessories including pouch with belt
clip to be provided (minimum of 1% of the total number of seats for
Auditorium and Gymnasium).
1.4.2.5. Proposed antenna location and mounting detail.
1.4.2.6. Local frequency usage, from frequency scanning survey with proposed
frequency for this Project.
1.4.2.8. Complete Bill of Materials listing all components.
1.4.2.9. Warranty.
1.5.1. Supply operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of
Section 260010: Basic Electrical Requirements, to include the following:
1.5.1.4. Schematic wiring diagrams.
1.5.1.5. Telephone numbers for the authorized parts and service distributor.
1.7.1. Delivery: Assistive listening system components shall not be delivered to the Project
site until protected storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof
material is not acceptable. Equipment damaged during shipping shall be replaced and
returned to Manufacturer at no cost to Owner. Components shall be properly
packaged in factory-fabricated containers.
1.7.2. Storage: Store in clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature extremes.
Maintain factory wrapping or provide a heavy canvas/plastic cover to protect units from
dirt, water, construction debris and traffic. Provide heat where required to prevent
condensation.
prevent internal components damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Damaged units
shall not be installed. Replace damaged units and return equipment to Manufacturer.
1.8 WARRANTY

JKA #15-100 267319 - 2
1.8.1. Units and components offered under this Section shall be covered by a 1 year parts
and labor warranty for malfunctions resulting from defects in materials and
workmanship. Warranty shall begin upon acceptance by the Owner.
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1.1. Williams Sound, Corp.
2.1.1.2. Gentner.
2.1.1.3. Comtek.
2.2 TRANSMITTER
2.2.1. The transmitter shall operate in the Auditory Assistance Band as approved by the FCC.
The transmitted field strength shall not exceed 80mV per meter at three meters and
transmit to an area of more than 700,000 square feet. The operating frequency shall
be digitally selectable by rear panel thumb wheel switches to any of 37 frequencies in
the approved band.
2.2.2. Transmitter shall have XLR balanced and RCA unbalanced input jacks selectable as
balanced mic, balanced and unbalanced line, and unbalanced speaker audio signals.
Front panel control to adjust the audio input level with and LED audio level display.
Switchable high-pass filter providing a 6dB/octave roll off at 180Hz. Included is an
audio processing chain that consists of wide-band AGC, multi-band compression,
Aphex Aural Exciter, and peak limiting. Also, front panel control to regulate the overall
amount of audio processing and switchable 1kHz test tone to aid setup and receiver
tuning.
2.2.3. Transmitter shall be powered by an external AC line to 12VDC power adapter. The
front panel shall have a power switch with LED and an LED to indicate proper RF
carrier operation. Included shall be a stereo monitor jack with volume control.
Transmitter shall be rack mountable in a standard 1 RU rack space.
2.2.4. Transmitter shall be supplied with remote mounted flex antenna and 50 feet of RG174
coaxial type cable.
2.2.5. Technical specifications:
2.2.5.1. Audio inputs:
2.2.5.1.1. Mic: 600 balanced, 10mV
2.2.5.1.2. Line: 600 balanced, 1V
2.2.5.1.3. Line: 10 unbalanced, 1V
2.2.5.1.4. Speaker: unbalanced
2.2.5.2. Automatic gain control range: 40dB
2.2.5.3. Manual input level control: 20dB
2.2.5.4. Signal to noise ratio: 60dB
2.2.5.5. Transmission type: FM modulation
2.2.5.6. Max. deviation: 25kHz, 50kHz total
2.2.5.7. Max. radiated power: 8000uV/m at 30M 100mW
2.2.5.8. RF level adjust: , and full power
2.2.5.9. Frequency control: Digitally synthesized, crystal controlled
2.2.5.10. Frequency stability: 0.005% from 0-50C
JKA #15-100 267319 - 3
2.2.5.11. Selectable frequencies: 37 channels between 72-76MHz
2.2.5.12. Power requirements: 9-15VDC at 500mA
2.3 RECEIVER
2.3.1. The receiver shall operate in the Auditory Assistance Band as approved by the FCC. It
shall be digitally tunable to one of 37 frequencies within that band by concealed rotary
switches.
2.3.2. The receiver shall be housed in a high-strength, plastic case with integral pocket clip.
The on/off/volume control shall be properly marked and the only control that is
exposed. There shall be a standard 1/8 mono headphone jack for audio output. The
jack shall be recessed to provide stress protection for the headphone plug.
2.3.3. The receiver shall operate on two standard AA batteries, and contain built-in
recharging contacts for operation with rechargeable batteries and a suitable drop-in
recharger.
2.3.4. Technical Specifications:
2.3.4.1. Type: FM, medium bandwidth (60kHz)
2.3.4.2. Audio frequency range: 100Hz-10kHz
2.3.4.3. Audio output level: 140mW into 32
2.3.4.4. Signal-to-noise ratio: >55dB
2.3.4.5. Distortion: <2%
2.3.4.6. RF frequency range: 37 channels, 72-76MHz
2.3.4.7. Sensitivity: 0.8uV typical, 1mV max for 12dB SINAD
2.3.4.8. Controls: On/off/volume, channel selector (hidden)
2.3.4.9. Earphone jack: Standard 3.5mm mono
2.3.4.10. Power requirements: 2 x AA batteries
2.3.4.11. Battery life: 40 hours with alkaline types
2.3.5. Provide a total of six (6) receivers for this project.
2.4 ANTENNA CABLE EXTENDER
2.4.1. Coaxial cable:
2.4.1.1. Cable <200: RG58A/U, Belden #8219 with 4dB loss over 100ft. or Belden
#9311 with 3dB loss over 100ft.
2.4.1.2. Cable <500: VHF/UHF, Belden #9913 with 1dB loss over 100ft.
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1. Contractor shall thoroughly examine Project site conditions for acceptance of the
assistive listening system installation to verify conformance with Manufacturer and
Specification tolerances. Do not commence with installation until all conditions are
made satisfactory.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1. General:
3.2.1.1. Install system in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions, as
indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.
3.2.1.2. Carefully match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal
interfaces. Provide matching networks where required.

JKA #15-100 267319 - 4
3.2.2. Transmitter: Install transmitter in sound rack or on top of sound rack. Coordinate
exact location with sound system Sub-contractor.
3.2.3. Antenna and ground plane: Install antenna and ground plane on the ceiling in
accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on the Drawings.
3.2.4. Wiring:
3.2.4.2. Route wiring continuously between devices without splices.
3.2.4.3. Size wiring to conform to the equipment Manufacturer's requirements.
3.2.4.4. All wiring shall be installed in a continuous steel conduit system and shall be
of the size recommended by the equipment Supplier.
3.2.4.5. Make splices, taps and terminations on numbered terminal strips in junction,
pull and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment enclosures.
Identification of conductors and cables: use color coding of conductors and
apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so all
media are identified in coordination with system wiring diagrams.
3.2.5. Receivers: Deliver the receivers to the Owner after system has been installed and
tested.
3.3.2. Manufacturer's field service: Contractor shall arrange and pay for the services of a
factory-authorized service representative to supervise the initial start-up, pretesting and
adjustment of the system. Testing Agencies objectives shall be to:
3.3.2.1. Assure assistive listening system installation conforms to specified
requirements and operates within specified tolerances.
3.3.2.3. Verify settings and make final adjustments. Settings and adjustments shall
be performed on the transmitters and all the receivers.
3.3.3.1.2. Perform mechanical operational tests in accordance with
Manufacturer's instructions.
Documents.
3.3.3.1.4. Check tightness of all connections.
3.3.3.2.1. Perform complete testing to determine conformance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.3.3.2.1. Operational test: Perform an operational test to verify conformance
of system performance and conditions to Contract Document within
Manufacturer's tolerances.
necessity for retesting including test equipment, transportation, subsistence and
JKA #15-100 267319 - 5
3.3.5. Contractor shall replace at no cost to the Owner all devices which are found defective
or do not operate within factory specified tolerances.
3.3.6. Contractor shall submit the testing final report to the Engineer for review prior to
Project closeout and final acceptance by the Owner. Test report shall indicate test
dates, devices tested, results, observations, deficiencies and remedies. Include a
copy of the test report in the Owners operation and maintenance manuals.
3.4 CLEANING
3.4.1. Upon completion of Project prior to final acceptance the Contractor shall thoroughly
clean the system components per Manufacturer's approved methods and materials.
Remove all paint splatters spots, dirt and debris.
3.5 TRAINING
3.5.2. Factory authorized service representative shall conduct a 4 hour training seminar for
Owner's representative upon completion and acceptance of system. Instructions shall
include safe operation, maintenance and testing of equipment.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Equipment for amplifying, transmitting and receiving sound signals for the hard
of hearing, using FM signal technology.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330.

B. Product Data: For each specific piece of equipment.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location of each field connection.
D. Closeout Submittals: Submit following in accordance with Section 01780.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment.

A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced installer who is authorized representative of equipment
manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of equipment required for this Section.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Comply with UL 50.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Warrant products in system to be free of defects in operation for 1 year, including parts and labor.
Warranty for cords, antennas, power supply, and accessories is 90 days.
JKA #15-100 267319 - 6
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Williams Sound, Eden Prairie, MN.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS

A. Transmitters:
1. PPA T45NET
2. PPA T46
3. PPA T27
B. Receivers:
1. PPA R38
2. PPA R37
C. Accessories:
1. Earphones
a. EAR 008
b. EAR 013
c. EAR 014
d. EAR 022
e. EAR 042
2. Headphones
a. HED 021
b. HED 026
c. HED 027
c. HED 040
3. Neckloops
a. NKL 001
4. Batteries
a. BAT 001-2
b. BAT 026-2
5. Carry Cases
a. CCS 029
b. CCS 030 35
6. Rack Mount Kits
JKA #15-100 267319 - 7
a. RPK 005
b. RPK 006
7. Antennas
a. ANT 005
8. Chargers
a. CHG 3512
2.3 COMPONENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A1. Stationary Transmitter (PPA T45NET): [select as needed]
1. Dimensions: 8.45 W x 8.25 D x 1.72H (21.5 cm x 21 cm x 4.4 cm)

2. Mounting: One EIA rack space high; rack space chassis wide.
3. Power Input: 100-240 VAC, 60 Hz.
4. Power Output: 24 VAC, 750 mA, 18W.
5. Operating Temperature: +32 F to +104 F (0 C to 40 C)
6. Operating Frequencies: 72.1 75.9 MHz, 17 wide band channels (selectable)
7. Frequency Accuracy: 2 ppm stability, 0-50 C.
8. Deviation: +/- 75 kHz maximum.
9. Pre-Emphasis: 75 sec
10. RF Field Strength: Max 80 mV/m at 3 m.
11. Nominal Range: Up to 1000 feet (using ANT 005 coaxial antenna).
12. Frequency Response: 31 Hz 16 kHz 3 dB (Music Audio Preset)
13. Signal to Noise Ratio: 74 dB Transmitted RF
14. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 0.25% @ 1 kHz (RF output)
15. Common Mode Rejection: >57 dB @ 1 kHz, Mic or Line
16. Audio Inputs: (1x) Combination 3-pin XLR, 1/4 TRS jack for Mic or Line Level Analog Audio.
Balanced or Unbalanced Line Level, or Microphone with Selectable Phantom Power; (1x) XLR for
Digital Audio, AES3/EBU, supported sample rates 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz; (1x) RCA for Digital Audio,
S/PDIF, supported sample rates 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz.
17. Audio Input Gain Adjust: In menu, adjustable to 0 to -50 dB, in 1dB steps
18. Phantom power: 14.4 VDC applied through 2.2 k resistors to analog combo jack: Pin 2 and Pin
3 on XLR jack, or tip and ring on 1/4 TRS jack.
19. Audio Level Indicators: 10-LED array that reads -18 to +9 dB at 3 dB intervals. 7 Green, 2 Amber,
and 1 red LED. Green LEDS indicate normal operating audio level peaks, Amber LEDS indicate
close to overload peaks, Red LED indicates overload peaks.
20. Audio Level Warning Lights: Mic 55dBV, -15dBV, +20dBV; Line -25dBV, +16dBV, +20dBV.
21. Headphone Output: 1/4 TRS stereo jack, mono signal, 15.7 mW, maximum in 33 (level
adjustable in menu 0 to -40 dB in 2 dB steps)
22. Line Output: RCA jack (black), -10 dBV (.32 VRMS). Output impedance 100 .
23. Ethernet: RJ-45 on back of unit

JKA #15-100 267319 - 8
24. Approvals: FCC, RoHS2, WEEE, Industry Canada
25. Warranty: Lifetime PLUS Limited Warranty
A2. Portable Transmitter (PPA T46): [select as needed]
1. Dimensions: 4.1 L x 2.8 W x 1.1 D (104 mm x 71 mm x 28 mm)

2. Weight: 2.6 oz (74 g), no batteries
3: Color: Black/Silver
4. Enclosure Material: Shatter-resistant PC/ABS plastic with textured scratch-resistant aluminum
faceplate
5. Battery Type options: Two (2) AA 1.5 V non-rechargeable Alkaline batteries (BAT 001-2), 75 mA
nominal current drain, up to 30 hours battery life, or two (2) AA 1.5 V NiMH rechargeable batteries
(BAT 026-2), 75 mA nominal current drain, up to 20 hours battery life per charge, recharges in 1416
hours, uses CHG 3502 or CHG 3512 Charger
6. Operating Frequencies: Selectable, 17 channels, 72.1 75.9 MHz*. Switchable 8 or 17 Channel
Mode. (8-channel mode setting allows only the 8 non-interfering simultaneous-use channels to be
selected)
7. Stability: .005%, frequency synthesized, crystal reference, PLL
8. Modulation: Wide-band FM, 75 kHz peak, 75 S pre-emphasis
9. RF Output: Max 80 mV/m at 3m
10. Freq Response: 180 Hz - 13 kHz, 3 dB at 1% max. THD
11. SNR: 65 dB (typical) transmitted
12. Transmit Antenna: Integral with mic cord
13. Microphone: Electret type, 3.5 mm mono plug
14. Display: OLED for status and menu info
a. Status: Ch/Freq, Mic Audio Level, Auxiliary Input Audio Level, Battery Status, Mic Mute,
Channel Lock, Dual-Preset mode.
b. Menu: Ch/Freq display mode select, Volume, Aux Input, Compression,
17 or 8-channel mode, screen time out, screen brightness, restore default settings
15. External Controls: Momentary push button: push and hold 3 seconds for power On/Off, push and
release for microphone mute On/Off.
Left, Right and Menu buttons for accessing and changing transmitter settings. Battery type switch
(Alkaline or NiMH) located behind the battery compartment door.
16. External Indicators: Power LED - Green, flashes when battery is low
17. Mic Input: 3.5 mm mono jack with electret mic bias, adjustable gain with 25 dB range
18. Aux Input: 2.5 mm stereo jack, adjustable gain with 60 dB range
19. Audio Compression: 1:1 (off) or 2:1 (on) selectable in menu
A3. Stationary Transmitter (PPA T27): [select as needed]
1. Dimensions: 4.1 W x 6.1 L x 1.3 H (104.1 mm x 154.9 mm x 33 mm)

JKA #15-100 267319 - 9
2. Weight: 7.8 oz. (221 g)
3. Color: Black
4. Power (U.S./Canada): 105-130 VAC, 50-60 Hz, 3.2 W at 120 VAC
5. Operating Frequencies: 72-76 MHz*: 72.1 (CH A), 72.2 (CH K), 72.3 (CH B), 72.4 (CH N), 72.5
(CH C), 72.6 (CH O), 72.7 (CH D), 72.8 (CH P), 72.9 (CH E), 74.7 (CH I), 75.3 (CH J), 75.4 (CH R),
75.5 (CH F), 75.6 (CH S), 75.7 (CH G), 75.8 (CH T), 75.9 (CH H)
6. Frequency Selector: External switches, 17 channels (lockable)
7. RF Field Strength: Does not exceed 80mV/m @ 3m
8. Nominal Range: Up to 1000 feet (305 m) w/standard ANT 021 rubber duckie antenna or optional
ANT 005 coaxial antenna.
9. Modulation: FM, 75 kHz deviation (wideband) max.
10. Stability: .005% over 0-50C
11. Pre-Emphasis: 75 S
12. Frequency Response: 85Hz - 14kHz 3dB
13. Distortion: 1% Max. THD
14. Signal to Noise Ratio: 65 dB with R35 Receiver
15. Microphone Input: 3.5mm mini phone jack, supplies +DC for electret mics
16. Mic Input Level: 110 mV, nominal
17. Line-Level Input: RCA Jack, Hi Z, unbal.
18. Line Input Level: 0.11.0 Vrms, nominal
19. Input Attenuator: Pot, screwdriver-adjustable
20. Antenna Outputs: Thread mount for ANT 021 rubber duckie antenna or ANT 025 telescoping
antenna RF connector for ANT 024 dipole or ANT 005 coaxial antenna
21. Approvals: FCC, IC, RoHS, WEEE
B1. Receiver (PPA R38): [select as needed]
1. Dimensions: 4.1 x 2.85 x 1.38 (104 x 72 x 35mm)

2. Weight: 4.6oz (130g) with batteries. 2.6oz (73g) without batteries
3. Color: Black/Silver. Black ABS Plastic case with Aluminum faceplate.
4. Battery Type: (2) AA Alkaline or (2) AA NiMH Rechargeable
5. Battery Life: (2) AA non-rechargeable alkaline batteries (BAT 001-2), approx. 50 hrs. (2) AA
rechargeable NiMH batteries (BAT 026-2), 1500mAh, approx. 32 hrs.
6. Current Consumption: 52mA nominal
7. Operating Temp. Range: 32 122F (0 to 50C)
8. Channels: 17 Wideband, accessed via menu
9. Operating Frequencies:
72.1, 72.2, 72.3, 72.4, 72.5, 72.6, 72.7, 72.8, 72.9, 74.7, 75.3, 75.4, 75.5, 75.6, 75.7, 75.8, 75.9
MHz*
JKA #15-100 267319 - 10
10. FM Deviation: 75 kHz
11. De-Emphasis: 75 S
12. Display Screen: 1" OLED
13. Power Indication: Power button, backlit green.
14. Good battery strength - glows solid. Low battery - flashes.
15. Sensitivity: 2 V at 12 dB Sinad with squelch defeated
16. Input Overload: 100 mV
17. Freq Response 200 Hz 15 kHz, 3dB
18. Modulation: FM, +/- 75 kHz peak deviation
19. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: Min 65 dB @ 1.0V
20. Receive Antenna: Integral with earphone/headphone cord
21. Audio Output: 35 mW max at 16
22. Headphone Connector: 3.5 mm stereo jack, mono output for stereo or mono earphones or
headphones
23. Supplied Earphone: Stereo, earbud-type with foam cushion, 3.5 mm plug, 32
24. Power Save Mode: Enters sleep mode after approximately 3 minutes of no RF signal
B2. Receiver (PPA R37): [select as needed]
1. Dimensions: 4.1 x 2.85 x 1.38 (104 x 72 x 35mm)

2. Weight: 4.6oz (130g) with batteries; 2.6oz (73g) without batteries
3. Color: Black
4. Battery Type: (2) AA Alkaline or 2 x AA NiMH
5. Battery Life: Two (2) AA non-rechargeable alkaline batteries (BAT 001), approx. 50 hrs; or (2) AA
rechargeable NiMH batteries (BAT 026), 1500 mAh, approx. 32 hrs
6. Current Consumption: 52mA nominal
7. Temperature Range: 0 to 50C
8. Channels: 17, accessed via seek button in battery compartment
9. Operating Freq.: 72.1, 72.2, 72.3, 72.4, 72.5, 72.6, 72.7, 72.8, 72.9, 74.7, 75.3, 75.4, 75.5,
75.6, 75.7, 75.8, 75.9 MHz*
10. Intermediate Freq.: 75 kHz
11. FM Deviation: 75 kHz
12. De-Emphasis: 75 S
13. LED Indicator: Power: Green; Low Battery: Flashes Green
14. AFC Range: 120 kHz
15. Sensitivity: 2 V at 12 dB Sinad with squelch defeated
16. Input Overload: 100 mV
17. Frequency Response: 200 15 kHz
JKA #15-100 267319 - 11
18. Modulation: FM, +/- 75 kHz peak deviation
19. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 65 dB min @ 100 uV
20. Receive Antenna: Integral with earphone/headphone cord
21. Audio Output: 35 mW peak into 16
22. Output Connector: 3.5 mm stereo/mono jack
23. Earphone: Earbud-type with foam cushion, 3.5 mm plug, 32
24. Auto Shut-off Enters sleep mode after approx 6 mins of no RF signal
C. Accessories: [select as needed]

1. Earphones
a. [Wide Range Earphone: Model EAR 008]
b. [Single Mini Earbud: Model EAR 013]
c. [Dual Mini Earbud: Model EAR 014]
d. [Surround Earphone: Model EAR 022]
e. [Dual, in-ear, isolation: Model EAR 042]
2. Headphones
a. [Deluxe Folding: Model HED 021]
b. [Rear-wear, Mono: Model HED 026]
c. [Heavy-duty, Folding, Mono: Model HED 027]
d. [Protector, Dual-Earmuff: Model HED 040]
3. Neckloop
a. [18in cord, 3.5mm plug): Model NKL 001]
4. Batteries
a. [AA Alkaline: Model BAT 001-2]
b. [AA NiMH: Model BAT 026-2]
5. Carry Cases
a. [Small Briefcase for accessories: CCS 029]
b. [Large 35-slot Case: Model CCS 030 35]
6. Rack Mounts
a. [Single Rack Mount Kit for Half Rack Space Products: Model RPK 005]
b. [Dual Rack Mount Kit for Half Rack Space Products: Model RPK 006]
7. Antennas
a. [Remote Coaxial Antenna for 72-76 MHz PPA Transmitters: Model ANT 005]
8. Chargers
a. [12 Units, R37 or R38: Model CHG 3512]

JKA #15-100 267319 - 12
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment to comply with manufacturers recommendations.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with typical service
loops, no excess. Use lacing bars in cabinets.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops,
common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

A. Operational Test: Perform tests that confirm proper operation of system and proper coverage in
area where equipment will be used.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstration and Instruction of Owners Personnel: Provide in accordance with Section 01800.
Engage factory-authorized service representative to train Owners maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain equipment as specified.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 267319 - 13
SECTION 31 10 00
SITE CLEARING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.1.1. Protecting existing trees, vegetation, and structures to remain.
1.1.2. Removing trees and other vegetation.
1.1.3. Clearing and grubbing.
1.1.4. Topsoil stripping.
1.1.5. Removing above-grade site improvements, concrete, landscape rock.
1.1.6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place.
1.1.7. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.
1.1.8. Removing site structures as identified on plans monument sign
1.2. DEFINITIONS
1.2.1. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt,
and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red
than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects
more than 1 in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials.
1.3. MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
1.3.1. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. Asphalt,
base rock, and concrete demoed from the site may be reused in fill under proposed
asphalt or reused as recycled base rock (as long as material is not contaminated and
meets Caltrans Class II base rock requirements ). Stockpile and test prior to re-use on
site.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and

plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as
damage caused by site clearing.
1.4.2. Record drawings
1.4.2.1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural,
electrical, sewer, storm, gas, irrigation, water, and mechanical conditions.
County of Tehama SITE CLEARING
JKA #15-100 31 10 00 - 1
1.5.1. Clearing Firm: Company specializing in the type of work required with a minimum of 3
years experience.
1.6.1. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1.6.1.1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6.1.2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6.2. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing indicated removal and
alteration work on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before
award of Contract.
1.6.3. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. (U.S.A).
1.6.4. Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations; do not use water if that will result
in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm drains, or other pollution.
1.6.5. Asphalt, base rock, and concrete demoed from the site may be reused in fill under
proposed asphalt or reused as recycled base rock (as long as material is not contaminated
and meets Caltrans Class II base rock requirements ). Stockpile and test prior to re-use
on site.
1.6.6. The existing chain link fences around the project site and all utilities serving the building
are to remain. Protect during demolition and construction.
1.6.7. Oleanders along the north side of the site are to be removed. Oleanders along the south
side of the property are to be pruned according to the Owners specifications.
2.1. SOIL MATERIALS
2.1.1. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when
satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site.
3.1. PREPARATION
3.1.1. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
3.1.2. Provide erosion-control measures in accordance with approved SWPPP documents to

prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent
properties, walkways, and storm drainage system.
3.1.3. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

JKA #15-100 31 10 00 - 2
3.1.4. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. If damage
occurs restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner
3.2. UTILITIES
3.2.1. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. Arrange
to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies
3.2.2. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
3.2.2.1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
3.2.2.2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
3.2.2.3. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
3.3. CLEARING AND GRUBBING
3.3.1. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of
new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing
roots.
3.3.1.1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to
be relocated.
3.3.1.2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and
careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new
construction.
3.3.1.3. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a

depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade.
3.3.1.4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of any trees to remain.
3.3.2. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material,
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
3.3.2.1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch loose depth, and
compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.3.3. No vegetation waste shall be dumped at the landfill, burned, buried, or left on site. Trees
to be removed shall be chipped and either used in the project landscape or removed to a
composting facility or re-used offsite. Other vegetative waste shall be composted at an
offsite facility.
3.4. TOPSOIL STRIPPING
3.4.1. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
3.4.2. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

JKA #15-100 31 10 00 - 3
3.4.2.1. Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots,
and other waste materials.
3.4.3. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil.
Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3.4.3.1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.
3.4.3.2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees.
3.4.3.3. Dispose of excess topsoil not needed for later grading of the site
3.5. SITE IMPROVEMENTS
3.5.1. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary
to facilitate new construction.
3.5.2. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. Stockpile,
recycle, or dispose as designated in the plans.
3.5.2.1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-
cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement.
Saw-cut faces vertically.
3.5.2.2. Asphalt, base rock, and concrete demoed from the site may be reused in fill
under proposed asphalt or reused as recycled base rock (as long as material
is not contaminated and meets Caltrans Class II base rock requirements ).
Stockpile and test prior to re-use on site.
3.6. DISPOSAL
3.6.1. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished
materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off
Owner's property.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 31 10 00 - 4
SECTION 31 22 00
SITE GRADING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SECTION INCLUDES:
Description of the requirements for earthwork which includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the
following:
1.1.1. All excavating, filling and grading to elevations indicated on the Drawings.
1.1.2. Preparation of subgrade for sidewalk and parking areas.
1.1.3. Cutting, filling and finish grading of areas to extent shown and specified herein.
1.2.1. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1.2.1.1. Safety Regulations: Work shall comply with all Federal, state and municipal
regulations regarding safety, including the requirements of the following:
1.2.1.1.1. William-Steiger Occupational Safety & Health Act of 1970
1.2.1.2. All trenching work shall conform to Trench Construction Safety Orders of
California State Industrial Accident Commission (CSIAC).
1.2.2. References and Standards:
1.2.2.1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.2.2.1.1. D422-72- Test for Maximum Particle Size.
1.2.2.1.2. D1557-78 - "Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using 10-lb

(4.5 kg) Rammer and 18-in. (457 mm) Drop."
1.2.2.1.3. D4318-84 - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils.
1.2.3. Observation and Testing: Refer to Soils report prepared for project.
1.3. PROTECTION
1.3.1. Adjacent Facilities: Protect adjacent public and private property, both above and below
grade, from damage resulting from work of this section. Assume all responsibility for
damage to adjoining properties and restore property to its original condition, should
damage occur.
1.3.2. Bulkheading and Shoring: Provide shoring, sheeting and bracing to prevent caving,
erosion or gullying of sides of excavations.

County of Tehama SITE GRADING
JKA #15-100 31 22 00 - 1
1.3.3. Surface Drainage: Provide for surface drainage during period of construction in a manner
to prevent water from running into excavated areas, and to avoid creating a nuisance to
adjacent areas.
1.3.4. Pumping: Keep all excavations free from water during entire progress of work, regardless
of cause, source or nature of water. Any water which accumulates in excavations shall
be drained promptly by means of pumps, if necessary.
1.3.5. Dust Control: Precaution shall be exercised at all times to control dust created and to
avoid creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area as a result of the demolition and
removal work and the excavating and grading operations. Keep ground wet as may be
required to control dust.
1.4. JOB CONDITIONS
1.4.1. Seasonal Limits: No fill shall be placed during weather conditions which will alter the
moisture content of the fill materials sufficiently to make adequate compaction impossible.
1.4.2. Existing Site Conditions: Contractor shall acquaint himself with all site conditions. Should
any utilities or other subsurface items not shown on the drawings be found during
excavations, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect for instructions as to further
action. Failure to do so will make the Contractor liable for any and all damage thereto
arising from his operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities and other subsurface
items not shown on Drawings.
1.4.3. Geotechnical Engineering Report: No soils report has been prepared for this project.
1.5. CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL
1.5.1. Clean-up: The Contractor shall maintain cleanliness on roadways and other public areas
used by the equipment and will be held responsible for immediate removal of all spillage.
The Contractor shall remove from the site all rubbish and debris found thereon, and all
materials and debris resulting from demolition, leaving the site in a safe and clean
condition.
1.5.2. Disposal: All items and materials not indicated or specified to be reused or to become the
Owner's property shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the
premises. The Contractor shall make all arrangements for the disposal of materials and
pay all costs involved.
2.1. MATERIALS
2.1.1. Fill shall be free from concentrations of organics, rubble, and other deleterious materials.
Clods, rocks or hard lumps exceeding four inches (4") in final size shall not be allowed in
the upper two feet (2') of any fill supporting pavements or buildings.
2.1.1.1. Asphalt, base rock, and concrete demoed from the site may be reused in fill
under proposed asphalt or reused as recycled base rock (as long as material
is not contaminated and meets Caltrans Class II base rock requirements ).
Stockpile and test prior to re-use on site.
2.1.2. Fill materials should be granular in nature and shall be approved by the Architect prior to
placement.

JKA #15-100 31 22 00 - 2
2.1.3. Asphalt concrete, aggregate base and other paving products shall comply with the
appropriate provisions of the State of California (Caltrans) Standard Specifications.
2.1.4. Topsoil material for landscaped areas shall be loose and friable soil equal to existing
surface soils found on the site.
2.1.5. Water: Contractor is required to furnish all water, equipment, & labor required for water
application for construction purposes, including compaction and dust control.
3.1. LAYOUT AND PREPARATION
3.1.1. Prior to the beginning of any grading, excavation or trenching operations, layout all work,
establish grades, locate existing underground utilities, set necessary markers and stakes,
establish all corners of building, set up necessary barricades and protection facilities as
outlined herein, and as required by any governing agencies, and be responsible for their
correctness and adequacy.
3.2. CLEARING, GRUBBING AND SITE PREPARATION
3.2.1. Materials removed which are suitable for fill or backfill as specified herein may be
stockpiled on site.
3.2.2. All vegetation to be removed; oversized rubble and debris from clearing operations;
uncompacted fill, loose and/or saturated materials; underground utilities to be relocated
or abandoned, and utility trench backfill shall be removed and disposed of so as to leave
the areas that have been disturbed with a neat and finished appearance, free from
unsightly debris. Excavations and depressions resulting from the removal of such items,
as well as any existing excavations or loose soil deposits, shall be cleaned out to firm,
undisturbed soil and backfilled with suitable materials in accordance with these
specifications.
3.3. PLACING, SPREADING AND COMPACTING FILL MATERIAL
3.3.1. The selected fill material shall be placed in layers which when compacted shall not exceed
six inches (6") in thickness. Each layer shall be spread evenly and be thoroughly mixed
during the spreading to promote uniformity of material in each layer.
3.3.1.1. When the moisture content of the fill material is less than two percent (2%)
above the optimum moisture content, water shall be added until the proper
moisture content is achieved.
3.3.1.2. When the moisture content of the fill material is too high to permit the specified
degree of compaction to be achieved, the fill material shall be aerated by
blading or other methods until the moisture content is satisfactory.
3.3.2. After each layer has been placed, mixed and spread evenly, it shall be thoroughly
compacted to at least ninety percent (90%) of the ASTM Specification D1557-91
Compaction Test. Compaction shall be undertaken with equipment capable of achieving
the specified density and shall be accomplished while the fill material is at the required
moisture content. Each layer shall be compacted over its entire area until the desired
density has been obtained.
3.3.3. The filling operation shall be continued until the fills have been brought to the finished
slopes and grades as shown on the accepted drawings.
JKA #15-100 31 22 00 - 3
3.4. FINAL SUBGRADE PREPARATION
3.4.1. The upper twelve inches (12") of all final subgrades supporting pavement sections and
the upper six inches (6) in sidewalk areas shall be brought to a uniform moisture content,
and shall be uniformly compacted to not less than:
3.4.1.1. Sidewalk Areas 95% - Upper 6 & all Fill
3.4.1.2. Landscape Areas Light compaction in top 18
or as determined by the ASTM D1557-91 Compaction Test, regardless of whether final

subgrade elevations are attained by filling, excavation or are left at existing grades.
3.5. EXCAVATIONS
3.5.1. Excavate for all work below grade to dimensions and elevations indicated or deeper if
required to obtain firm bearing. Do not excavate or disturb earth below footing elevations
without prior authorization in writing by the Architect. Claims for extra costs involved in
such changes shall be made as set forth in the Conditions of the Contract.
3.5.2. Excess excavations under slabs or footings shall be restored to the proper excavations by
the procedure specified for "Placing and Compacting." Where excess excavations have
taken place under footings, footings shall be carried down to the bottom of the excavation
at no increase in cost to the Owner.
3.5.3. Steps in footings shall be as indicated. Care shall be exercised in excavating for lower
footings so as not to disturb bearing under any adjacent higher footings.
3.5.4. Excavations shall be sufficient to allow for construction and removal of forms, except
where feasible to place concrete directly against cut ground when the Architect's approval
for same is obtained.
3.5.4.1. Conditions for trench footings without forms which the Architect will require
before issuing an approval are:
3.5.4.1.1. Sides of trenches must be able to stand without caving.
3.5.4.1.2. No sluffage will be permitted.
3.5.4.1.3. Footings must be increased 2 inches in width.
3.5.5. Excavated on-site materials which meet requirements hereinbefore specified under Part
2 are suitable for all fill and backfill. All excess excavated on-site materials shall be
removed from the site.
3.6. GRADING FOR CONCRETE SLABS AND PAVING
3.6.1. Grading for Exterior Concrete Slabs: Grade to elevations required to receive concrete
slabs, aprons, walks, and pads. Slope subgrade to drain as indicated.
3.6.2. Grading for Asphalt Paving: Grade to elevations required to receive paving and aggregate
base. Subgrade shall be uniform and true to grade.
3.7. SITE FINISH GRADING
3.7.1. Finish grading shall be accomplished to the grades shown except as otherwise directed.
JKA #15-100 31 22 00 - 4
3.7.2. The material beneath all fills shall be firm, dense and thoroughly compacted and shall be
free from mud and muck.
3.7.3. All earth slopes shall be finished to reasonably smooth surfaces in substantial accordance
with the lines and slopes shown on Drawings.
3.7.4. The degree of finish for grading or slopes shall be that ordinarily obtainable either from
blade grader or scraper operations. The nicety of finish ordinarily associated with template
and string line or hand-raking methods will not be required.
3.7.5. Grading Tolerances: Except as may otherwise be directed in the field by the Architect,
grading shall be within tolerances of one-tenth foot above grade, but in no case below
grade indicated.
3.8. MISCELLANEOUS WORK
3.8.1. Perform all other site earthwork shown on the Drawings and not otherwise specified.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 31 22 00 - 5
SECTION 31 23 33
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SECTION INCLUDES:
1.1.1. Description of requirements for materials, equipment and services necessary to complete
trenching, excavation, backfilling and compaction as shown and specified for utilities and
related structures and thrust blocks.
1.1.1.1. Utilities companies' requirements where applicable will take precedence over
these specifications.
1.2.1. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies.
1.2.2. Safety Regulations: Work shall comply with all Federal, state and municipal regulations
regarding safety, including the requirements of the following:
1.2.2.1. William-Steiger Occupational Safety & Health Act of 1970.
1.2.2.2. All trenching work shall conform to Trench Construction Safety Orders of
California State Industrial Accident Commission.
1.2.3. References and Standards:
1.2.3.1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.2.3.1.1. D1557-78- "Moisture-Density Relations of soils Using 10 lb.

(4.5 kg) Rammer and 18-in. (457 mm) Drop."
1.2.4. Observations and Inspections: A Geotechnical Engineer will observe and respective
utilities agencies' representative will inspect utilities trenching, excavation, backfilling and
compaction as appropriate. Contractor shall appropriately schedule all inspections prior to
commencing trenching and backfilling operations. All installations are subject to
satisfactory inspection by appropriate agency.
1.2.5. Testing:
1.2.5.1. Backfill material compaction inspection and other tests will be performed as
deemed necessary by a Geotechnical Engineer and utilities agencies'
representative.
2.1. MATERIALS
2.1.1. Pipe bedding and initial backfill (storm drain pipes & block leveling pad): Crushed rock
graded in accordance with ASTM D448 #67, and within the following limits:
2.1.1.1. 1 inch sieve: 100% passing.

County of Tehama TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
JKA #15-100 31 23 33 - 1
2.1.1.2. inch sieve: 90% to 100% passing.
2.1.1.3. 3/8 inch sieve: 20% to 55% passing.
2.1.1.4. No. 4 sieve: 0% to 5% passing.
2.1.1.5. No. 8 sieve: 0% to 3% passing.
2.1.2. Pipe bedding and initial backfill (water, gas, electric conduits): Sand graded in accordance
with ASTM D448 #67, and within the following limits:
2.1.2.1. inch sieve: 100% passing.
2.1.2.2. Sand equivalent to be 50 minimum.
2.1.3. Pipe bedding and backfill material used in trenches containing utilities owned by utility
companies shall meet all requirements of that utility company
2.1.4. Trench Backfill material for backfilling trenches, above the pipe bedding and initial backfill
material, shall be well-graded on-site native fill, less than 2 inches in greatest dimension,
2.1.5. Trench "capping" material for use above trench backfill material shall be on-site native fill
material judged suitable by a Geotechnical Engineer.
3.1. TRENCHING
3.1.1. Make all trenches open vertical or sloped construction, as recommended by the
manufacturer of the pipe, and with sufficient width to provide free working space at both
sides of trench and around installed item as required for caulking, joining, backfilling, and
compacting. Where no manufacturer's recommendations are available, trenches shall be
not less than 8 inches nor more than 16 inches wider than pipe or conduit diameter.
3.1.1.1. Where recommended trench widths are exceeded redesign shall be

performed at no extra cost to the Owner, using stronger pipe or special
installation procedures.
3.1.1.2. Restore all surfaces damaged or cut during excavation to original condition.
3.1.2. Excavate trench straight and true to line and grade and to a depth below the bottom of the
pipe sufficient to provide for pipe bedding material as required. Trenches over-excavated
in depth shall be re-filled with suitable materials and compacted to 90 percent (90%)
relative compaction.
3.1.3. Excavations for utilities related structures and appurtenances, manholes, drop inlets or
similar structures shall be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches clear between the outer
structure surface and face of the excavations. When concrete is to be placed in an
excavated area, special care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation.
3.1.4. Hand excavate final 3 inches to accurate grade to provide firm and uniform bearing for
conduits, or excavate additional 4 inches and provide 4 inch bed of sand to proper grade.
3.1.5. Unsatisfactory material, shall be removed and replaced with suitable material compacted
to 90 percent (90%) relative compaction.

JKA #15-100 31 23 33 - 2
3.1.6. Where depths are not shown, trench to sufficient depth to give minimum fill above top of
installed item measured from adjacent finished grade as follows: (unless shown differently
by electrical or telecom engineer or as required by local utility)
3.1.6.1. Low Voltage electrical conduit: 24 inches
3.1.6.2. Domestic & Fire pipe: 36 inches
3.1.6.3. Communications Conduit: 24 inches
3.1.6.4. Pressure gas pipe: 36 inches
3.2. CONTROL OF GROUND WATER
3.2.1. The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials for dewatering trenches
and excavations and subsequent control of ground water.
3.3. BRACING AND SHORING
3.3.1. The Contractor shall furnish, place, and maintain such bracing and shoring as necessary
for the safety of workers, protection of adjacent facilities and utilities, and proper
installation of pipe, in conformance with legal requirements.
3.4. PIPE BEDDING PLACEMENT
3.4.1. A four-inch (4) layer of pipe bedding material compacted to 90 percent (90%) relative
compaction (per ASTM D1557) shall be placed and accurately shaped as required for the
indicated pipe elevations and grades.
3.5. BACKFILLING
3.5.1. Initial Backfill Placement: Initial backfill material shall be placed and compacted to 90
percent (90%) relative compaction (per ASTM D1557) on both sides of the pipe
simultaneously to avoid displacement of the pipe, four inches (4") above pipe.
3.5.2. Trench Backfill Placement: Subsequent trench backfill material shall be placed in layers
not exceeding six inches thick, and compacted to 90 percent (90%) relative compaction
(per ASTM D1557) up to six inches from finish surface or subgrade.
3.5.3. Trench "Capping" Material: The trench shall be "capped" above the trench backfill with
trench "capping" material compacted to 95 percent (95%) relative compaction (per ASTM
D1557) to subgrade or finish surface.
3.5.4. Backfill for utility related or similar structures shall be placed as specified above and in
such a manner that the structure will not be damaged.
3.5.5. Remove excess earth from site or deposit on site if so directed by Architect.
3.5.6. Requirements from material manufacturers shall take precedence over minimum
requirements listed in this section.

JKA #15-100 31 23 33 - 3
3.6. COMPACTION METHODS
3.6.1. Mechanically compacted backfill: Backfill shall be mechanically compacted by means of

tamping rollers, sheep foot rollers, pneumatic tire rollers, vibrating rollers, or other
mechanical tampers. Jetting shall not be allowed, except where prior approval has been
given obtained from the owner and/or a geotechnical engineer.
3.6.2. Permission to use specific compaction equipment shall not be construed as guaranteeing
or implying that the use of such equipment will achieve the required compaction results or
will not result in damage to adjacent ground, existing improvements, or improvements
installed under contract. The contractor shall make his own determination in this regard.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 31 23 33 - 4
SECTION 32 11 23
AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY
1.1.1. This Section includes the following:
1.1.1.1. Preparation of aggregate base rock.
1.1.1.2. Proof rolling of prepared subbase is included in this Section.
1.1.2. Reference:
1.1.2.1. Standard Specifications for the Department of Transportation, State of

California (Caltrans), 2010 Section 26, Aggregate Bases.
1.1.2.2. ASTM D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN
m/m3)); 2002.
1.2. SUBMITTALS
1.2.1. Material Certificates signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that each
material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements.
1.2.2. Aggregate Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual
materials.
1.2.3. Compaction Density Test Reports.
2.1. MATERIALS
2.1.1. General: Use locally available materials and gradations that exhibit a satisfactory record
of previous installations.
2.1.2. Aggregate Base: Use recycled material if available and meeting the following
requirements. Aggregate base shall be in accordance with State of California Department
of Transportation Standard Specifications Section 26. All aggregate base shall be class
2, maximum.
2.1.3. Asphalt, base rock, and concrete demoed from the site may be reused in fill under
proposed asphalt or reused as recycled base rock (as long as material is not contaminated
and meets Caltrans Class II base rock requirements maximum). Stockpile and test
prior to re-use on site.

County of Tehama AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
JKA #15-100 32 11 23 - 1
3.1. SURFACE PREPARATION
3.1.1. General: Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before
placing concrete.
3.1.2. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring
additional compaction.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Spread aggregate base over prepared subgrade to a total compacted thickness as
indicated on the Drawings. Place aggregate in maximum 6 inch layers and roller compact
to specified density.
3.2.2. Level and contour surfaces to elevation and gradients indicated.
3.2.3. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate
to reduce moisture content.
3.2.4. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.
3.3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
3.3.1. General: Testing in-place aggregate base courses for compliance with requirements for
thickness and surface smoothness will be done by Owner's testing laboratory. Repair or
remove and replace unacceptable aggregate base courses as directed by Owner's
Representative.
3.3.2. Tolerances.
3.3.2.1. Flatness: Maximum variation of inch measured with a 10 straight edge.
3.3.2.2. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
3.3.2.3. Variation from Design Elevation: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3.3.3. Compaction density testing will be performed on compacted aggregate base course in
accordance with ASTM D 1557 (modified Proctor). Results will be evaluated in relation
to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with
ASTM D 1557 (modified Proctor). If tests indicate work does not meet specified
requirements, remove work, replace and retest.
3.4. CLEAN-UP
3.4.1. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade
stockpile areas to prevent standing surface water.
3.4.2. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface
water.
END OF SECTION
County of Tehama AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
JKA #15-100 32 11 23 - 2
SECTION 32 12 16
ASPHALT PAVING, STRIPING, SIGNAGE
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY
1.1.1. This Section includes the following:
1.1.1.1. Provisions for hot-mixed asphalt paving over prepared subbase.
1.1.1.2. Asphalt overlay paving and fabric.
1.1.1.3. Pavement marking paint.
1.1.1.4. Curb marking paint.
1.1.1.5. Project signage.
1.1.2. References:
1.1.2.1. Standard Specifications for the Department of Transportation, State of

California (Caltrans), May 2006 Sections 39, 92, 84, and 94.
1.1.2.2. California Administrative Code, Title 24, Part 2, Handicap Accessibility

Regulations.
1.1.2.3. ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)
1.2. SUBMITTALS
1.2.1. Material Certificates signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that each
material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements.
1.3. SITE CONDITIONS
1.3.1. Weather Limitations: Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 50
deg F (10 deg C) and when temperature has not been below 35 deg F (1 deg C) for 12
hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains an
excess of moisture.
1.3.2. Construct hot-mixed asphalt surface course when atmospheric temperature is above 40
deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry. Base course may be placed when air temperature
is above 40 deg F (minus 1 deg C) and rising.
1.3.3. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations.
2.1. MATERIALS

County of Tehama ASPHALT PAVING, STRIPING, SIGNAGE
JKA #15-100 32 12 16 - 1
2.1.1. General: Use locally available materials and gradations that exhibit a satisfactory record
of previous installations.
2.1.2. Asphalt: In accordance with State of California Department of Transportation Standard

Specifications Sections 39 and 92. Asphalt concrete shall be PG 64-10.
2.1.3. Aggregate: In accordance with State of California Department of Transportation Standard

Specifications Sections 39 and 92. Aggregate shall be Type A, inch maximum, medium
grading.
2.1.4. Tack Coat: In accordance with State of California Department of Transportation Standard
Specifications Sections 94. Tack coat shall be Grade SS-1.
2.1.5. Seal Coat: In accordance with State of California Department of Transportation Standard
Specifications Sections 39 and 92.
2.1.6. Paint Schedule: Alkyd-resin type, ready-mixed complying with AASHTO M 248, Type I.
Apply 2-coat pavement and curb markings as scheduled below and indicated on the
drawings.
2.1.6.1. Contractor shall verify striping layout and curb colors comply with owner and
local fire authority requirements prior to application.
2.1.6.1.1. Parking Stripes - Color: White.
2.1.6.1.2. ADA Markings & Stripes - Color: Blue with first coat white.
2.1.6.1.3. Fire Lane Curb Painting - Color: Red with first coat white.
2.1.7. Sign Schedule: All signs shall conform to City of Chico Requirements.
2.1.7.1.1. Backboards: Painted fiberglass or aluminum.
2.1.7.1.2. Poles: 2 inch diameter galvanized steel pole with top closure
caps.
2.1.7.1.3. Signs: 20 gauge painted galvanized steel per CSS Section

56.
2.1.7.1.4. Concrete: Minor Concrete per May 2006 Caltrans Std.

Specs section 90.
2.1.7.2. Text Style: Helvetica Medium upper and lower case letters and numerals.
Normal spacing.
2.1.7.3. ADA Signage Color:
2.1.7.3.1. Sign Field Color: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings,

color should match Federal Spec. 595a No. 15090 (similar to
Royal Blue).
2.1.7.3.2. Accent and Edging Color: Unless otherwise indicated on the

drawings, White.
2.1.7.3.3. Symbol and Lettering Copy: Standard Caltrans CSS and

State of California Title 24 handicap symbols and copy.
JKA #15-100 32 12 16 - 2
2.1.7.3.4. Clear Coating: Manufacturer's standard clear protective
coating.
2.1.7.4. Traffic and Directional Signage Color:
2.1.7.4.1. Sign Field Color: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings,

color should match Federal Specifications for type of sign
indicated.
2.1.7.4.2. Traffic and Directional Signage shall be treated with

Skotchlite or equivalent reflective material.
2.1.7.4.3. Traffic and Directional Sign Accent and Edging Color: Unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings, Black.
2.1.7.5. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Fasteners

shall be of similar metals to sign and mounting materials or noncorrosive.
2.1.8. Paving Fabric: Pavement Reinforcement Fabric shall conform to the requirements of
Section 88-1.02 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
3.1. SURFACE PREPARATION
3.1.1. Proof-roll prepared base surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring
additional compaction.
3.1.2. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving work until deficient base
areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.
3.1.3. Tack Coat: Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or Portland cement
concrete. Distribute at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. per sq. yd. of surface. Allow to dry until at
proper condition to receive paving. Exercise care in applying bituminous materials to avoid
smearing of adjoining concrete surfaces. Remove and clean damaged surfaces.
3.2. PLACING MIX
3.2.1. General: Place hot-mixed asphalt mixture on prepared surface, spread, and strike off.
Spread mixture at minimum temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C). Place areas
inaccessible to equipment by hand. Place each course to required grade, cross-section,
and compacted thickness.
3.2.2. Paver Placing: Place in strips not less than 10 feet wide, unless otherwise acceptable to
Owner's Representative. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding
strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete base course for a section
before placing surface course.
3.2.3. Immediately correct surface irregularities in finish course behind paver. Remove excess
material forming high spots with shovel or lute.
3.2.4. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days' work,
to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have same texture,
density, and smoothness as other sections of hot-mixed asphalt course. Clean contact
surfaces and apply tack coat.
JKA #15-100 32 12 16 - 3
3.3. ROLLING
3.3.1. General: Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement.
3.3.2. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas
inaccessible to rollers.
3.3.3. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling
of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced
areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot material.
3.3.4. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot.
Continue second rolling until mixture has been evenly compacted.
3.3.5. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller
marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained 95
percent laboratory density.
3.3.6. Patching: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective
areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh, hot hot-mixed asphalt. Compact by rolling to
specified surface density and smoothness.
3.3.7. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled
and hardened.
3.3.8. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to
become marked.
3.4. PAVEMENT SEALER (SEAL COAT)
3.4.1. Seal coat emulsion shall not be applied to newly constructed asphalt concrete surfaces
until 30 days after spreading and compacting of the new asphalt concrete.
3.4.2. Surface Preparation: surface shall be clean of all dirt, sand, oil or grease. Broom, blow
or hose down entire area with a strong jet of water to remove all debris.
3.4.3. Remove soft, loose, or otherwise damaged areas of asphalt concrete to full depth of
damage and replace with compacted asphalt concrete as specified herein.
3.4.4. Minor holes and imperfections may be patched using hot mix asphalt or mastic using
sand/SS-1-H.
3.4.5. Use wire brush for removal of oil and grease; prime with shellac or synthetic resin as
recommended by manufacturer of pavement sealer material.
3.4.6. Surfaces that have weathered excessively or are dusted shall be primed with a solution
of 1 to 4 parts cool, clean water and 1 part of SS-1-H. Apply at the rate of 1 gallon per sq.
ft. and allow to dry. If in doubt a test patch shall be tried.
3.4.7. Seal Coat Application:Thoroughly mix materials and apply in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions. A minimum of 2 applications will be required; utilizing
30 gallons of material per 1000 sq. feet.

JKA #15-100 32 12 16 - 4
3.4.8. Clean-Up and Precautions: As recommended by pavement sealer material manufacturer.
3.5. PAVEMENT OVERLAY
3.5.1. Surface Preparation: The pavement surface shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned of all dirt
and oil to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Cracks 1/8 inch (3mm) wide or greater shall be
cleaned and filled with suitable bituminous material or by a method approved by the
Engineer. Crack-filling material shall be allowed to cure prior to placement of paving fabric.
3.5.2. Tack Coat Application: The tack coat shall be applied uniformly to the prepared, clean, dry
pavement surface. The tack coat application rate must be sufficient to saturate the fabric
and to bond the fabric to the existing pavement surface. The tack coat application rate
shall be 0.22 to 0.28 gallons per square yard (1.0 to 1.3 liters per square meter) as required
by the roadway surface and environmental conditions.
3.5.3. Paving Fabric Placement: The paving fabric shall be placed onto the tack coat using
mechanical or manual laydown equipment capable of providing a smooth installation with
a minimum amount of wrinkling or folding. The paving fabric shall be placed before the
asphalt cement tack coat cools and loses its tackiness.
3.5.4. Joints and Overlaps: At joints, fabric rolls shall overlap by 1 inch to 6 inches (25 to 152mm).
End joints and joints from repair of wrinkles should be made to overlap or shingle in the
direction that the pavement overlay will be placed. Additional tack coat shall be applied
between all fabric overlaps.
3.5.5. Overlay Placement: Asphalt overlay construction shall closely follow fabric placement. All
areas in which paving fabric has been placed will be paved during the same day. Excess
tack coat that bleeds through the paving fabric shall be removed by broadcasting sand on
the paving fabric. Excess sand should be removed before beginning the paving operation.
3.6. TRAFFIC AND LANE MARKINGS
3.6.1. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been
verified with Architect.
3.6.2. Applicator shall examine surfaces to receive striping and markings and verify that
substrate is ready for striping. In the event of discrepancies, immediately notify the
owners representative. Do not proceed until all discrepancies have been resolved.
3.6.3. Allow paving to cure for 30 days before starting pavement marking.
3.6.4. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
3.7. APPLICATION OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS
3.7.1. Use proper masking, stencils, and application equipment recommended for the purpose
by the paint manufacturer to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated with
uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a
minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm).
3.7.2. Use proper masking, stencils, and application Apply 2 coats of striping paint as shown on
the drawings. The first coat shall be a contrasting color to the final coat.
3.8. PROTECTION & INSPECTION OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS

JKA #15-100 32 12 16 - 5
3.8.1. Protection: Provide traffic cones, barricades, and other devices needed to protect paint
until it is sufficiently dry to withstand traffic.
3.8.2. When paint is thoroughly dry, visually inspect the entire application. Touchup as required
to provide clean straight lines and surfaces throughout.
3.9. TRAFFIC AND DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE
3.9.1. Provide non-illuminated traffic, directional, and handicap signage to comply with
requirements indicated herein for mounting, materials, finish, and style. Size and message
shall be as indicated on drawings.
3.9.1.1. Provide ADA Lot signs at each ADA parking area entry as indicated on the
Drawings.
3.9.1.2. Provide one ADA Parking space sign and one minimum fine $250 at each
ADA parking space as indicated on the Drawings. Provide van accessible
signs at all spaces marked.
3.9.1.3. Provide Traffic and Directional signs as indicated in the drawings.
3.10.1. General: Testing in-place hot-mixed asphalt courses for compliance with requirements
for thickness and surface smoothness will be done by Owner's testing laboratory. Repair
or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Owner's Representative.
3.10.2. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness tested in accordance with ASTM D 3549 will
not be acceptable if exceeding following allowable variations:
3.10.2.1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3.10.2.2. Surface Course: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
3.10.3. Surface Smoothness: Test finished surface of each hot-mixed asphalt course for
smoothness, using 10-foot straightedge applied parallel with and at right angles to
centerline of paved area. Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the following
tolerances for smoothness:
3.10.3.1. Base Course Surface: 1/4 inch.
3.10.3.2. Wearing Course Surface: 3/16 inch.
3.10.3.3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle
to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.
3.10.4. Check surface areas at intervals as directed by Owner's Representative.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 32 12 16 - 6
SECTION 32 13 13
SITE CONCRETE
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY:
1.1.1. Extent of portland cement concrete work is shown on drawings, including curbs, and
walkways.
1.1.2. Types of Portland Cement Concrete:
1.1.2.1. Concrete with standard gray color.
1.2. SUBMITTALS:
1.2.1. Provide samples, manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials' certifications
for concrete, joint fillers, and sealers.
2.1. MATERIALS:
2.1.1. Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement
during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal.
Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects.
2.1.1.1. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as
required.
2.1.1.2. Coat forms with a nonstaining form release agent that will not discolor or
deface surface of concrete.
2.1.2. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615/A, 615M Grade 60.
2.1.3. Fly Ash, Class F: Fly ash, no more than 15% maximum replacing Portland Cement.
2.1.4. Fabricated Bar Mats: Welded or clip-assembled steel bar or rod mats, ASTM A 184. Use
ASTM A 615, Grade 60 steel bars, unless otherwise indicated.
2.1.5. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with
ends square and free of burrs.
2.1.6. Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of Minor Concrete as specified in State
of California Department of Transportation Section 90 and Section 90-10. Must meet
strength requirements as shown on plans.
2.1.7. Expansion Joint Materials: Expansion and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751,
asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
2.1.8. Liquid-Membrane Forming and Sealing Curing Compound: Comply with ASTM C 309,
Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to Architect. Moisture loss no more than
0.055 gr./sq. cm. when applied at 200 sq. ft. / gal.
County of Tehama SITE CONCRETE
JKA #15-100 32 13 13 - 1
2.1.9. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, re-wettable type.
2.1.10. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, 2-component material suitable for use on dry or damp
surfaces. Provide material "Type", "Grade", and "Class" to suit project requirements.
2.1.11. Backer rod: Should be a closed-cell polyurethane foam rod conforming to the
requirements of ASTM C 1330-96, Type C & ASTM D 5249-92, Type 3. Diameter shall
be approximately 25 percent greater than the width of the joint to ensure a tight fit.
2.1.12. Expansion Joint Sealant: Should be an exterior grade silicone sealant for concrete
expansion joints, meeting the requirements of ASTM D 5893 Type NS. Dow Corning 888
Silicon Joint Sealant or approved equal.
2.1.13. Truncated domes: Cast in place type only, meeting Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA):
Provide detectable/tactile warning surfaces which comply with the detectable warnings on
walking surfaces per section of the Americans with Disabilities Act (Title 49 CFR
TRANSPORTATION, Part 37.9 STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE TRANSPORTATION
FACILITIES, Appendix A, Section 4.29.2 DETECTABLE WARNINGS ON WALKING
SURFACES. In addition products must comply with CALIFORNIA TITLE 24 requirements
regarding patterns, color and sound on cane contact.
2.1.13.1. Color to be Yellow conforming to Federal Color No. 33538.
2.1.13.2. Material to be Vitrified Polymer Composite (VPC).
2.2. CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN, AND TESTING:
2.2.1. Comply with requirements of applicable Caltrans Std. Section 90-10 Minor Concrete, for
concrete mix design, sampling and testing, and quality control and as herein specified.
2.2.2. Design mix to produce normal-weight concrete consisting of portland cement, aggregate,
water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture (super-plasticizer), air-entraining
admixture, and water to produce the following properties: Concrete strength is designated
for durability, no special testing is required.
2.2.2.1. Compressive Strength: 4000 psi, minimum at 28 days.
2.2.2.2. Slump Limit: 4 inches
2.2.2.3. Air Content: 1 to 3 percent.
3.1. SURFACE PREPARATION:
3.1.1. Remove loose material from compacted subgrade and base surface immediately before
placing concrete.
3.1.2. Proof-roll prepared subgrade and base surface to check for unstable areas and need for
additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been
corrected and are ready to receive paving.

JKA #15-100 32 13 13 - 2
3.2. FORM CONSTRUCTION:
3.2.1. Set forms to required grades and lines, braced and secured. Install forms to allow
continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after
concrete placement.
3.2.2. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances:
3.2.2.1. Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
3.2.2.2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
3.2.3. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required ensuring
separation from concrete without damage.
3.2.4. Slope step treads at 1/4 inch per foot maximum, slope to drain at minimum.
3.3. REINFORCEMENT:
3.3.1. Locate, place and support reinforcement as shown in the drawings. Reinforcement should
be centered in concrete section unless shown otherwise.
3.4. TRUNCATED DOME INSTALLATION:
3.4.1. Install cast in place truncated domes per manufactures recommended procedures.
3.5. CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
3.5.1. General: Comply with requirements of Caltrans Std. Section 90-10 Minor Concrete for
mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specified.
3.5.2. Do not place concrete until subgrade and base forms have been checked for line and
grade. Moisten subgrade and base if required to provide a uniform dampened condition
at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes, utility boxes or other
structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.
3.5.3. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along
face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away
from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for
hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of
reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.
3.5.4. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
3.5.5. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far
as possible. If interrupted for more than hour, place a construction joint.
3.5.6. When adjacent pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment
on concrete until pavement has attained sufficient strength to carry loads without damage.
3.5.7. Fabricated Bar Mats: Keep mats clean and free from excessive rust, and handle units to
keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or
replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to
adjacent mats.

JKA #15-100 32 13 13 - 3
3.5.7.1. Place concrete in 2 operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of
placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay fabricated bar
mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and
screed.
3.5.7.2. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been
placed more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer or use
bonding agent if acceptable to Architect.
3.5.8. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement at
Contractor's option. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and
laboratory test results that meet or exceed minimums specified. Machine placement must
produce curbs and gutters to required cross-section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as
specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with
formed concrete as specified.
3.6. JOINTS:
3.6.1. General: Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction joints true
to line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right
angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6.2. When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6.3. Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened-plane (contraction) joints,

sectioning concrete into areas as shown on drawings. Construct weakened-plane joints
for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows.
3.6.3.1. Tooled Joints: Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top
portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer.
3.6.4. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where
placement operations are stopped for more than hour, except where such placements
terminate at expansion joints.
3.6.4.1. Construct joints as shown or, if not shown, use standard metal keyway-
section forms.
3.6.4.2. Where load transfer-slip dowel devices are used, install so that one end of
each dowel bar is free to move.
3.6.5. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete
curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, and other fixed objects, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.6.5.1. Locate expansion joints at 40 feet O.C.typical unless otherwise indicated.
3.6.6. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than inch or more than 1 inch
below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint
filler flush with finished concrete surface. Joint sealer is required at all expansion joints.
3.6.7. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible.
Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.

JKA #15-100 32 13 13 - 4
3.6.8. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other
temporary material. Remove protection after concrete has been placed on both sides of
joint.
3.6.9. Joint Sealants: Final sealant color to closely match adjacent concrete color. Preparation
of joints, materials, and installation shall be per manufacturers recommendations.
Installation of a backer rod to provide consistent joint depth is required. Ensure joint is
clean and dry prior to placement of backer rod or sealant. Sealant shall generally be
installed at a 2:1 width to depth ratio with shape and installation matching manufacturers
recommended installation procedure.
3.7. CONCRETE FINISHING:
3.7.1. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating.
Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to
compact surface and produce uniform texture.
3.7.2. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-ft. straightedge. Distribute concrete as
required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a
continuous smooth finish.
3.7.3. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool,
and round to 1/4-inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete
surface.
3.7.4. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared,
complete troweling and finish surface as follows:
3.7.4.1. Broom finish by drawing a medium-hair concrete broom across concrete

surface perpendicular to line of traffic or in a swirl pattern as indicated on
drawings. Repeat operation if required to provide a medium line texture
acceptable to Architect.
3.7.4.2. On inclined slab surfaces and stairs, provide a coarse, non-slip finish by
scoring surface with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.
3.7.5. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal,
clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace
areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect.
3.8. CURING:
3.8.1. Protect and cure finished concrete paving in compliance with applicable requirements of
Caltrans std. section 90-10 Minor Concrete. Use membrane-forming curing and sealing
compound or approved moist-curing methods.
3.8.2. Apply two coats of curing sealing compound per manufacturers recommendations. Apply
so as to minimize glossy finish.
3.9. REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS:
3.9.1. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, discolored or inconsistent concrete,

concrete surfaces with an inconsistent texture, and concrete with improper or incomplete
jointing as directed by Architect. Repair and replacement work shall be at no additional
cost to the Owner.

JKA #15-100 32 13 13 - 5
3.9.2. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of
cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with
portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
3.9.3. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for
at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain
pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as
they occur.
3.9.4. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign
material just before final inspection.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 32 13 13 - 6
SECTION 32 91 13
SOIL PREPARATION
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SCOPE OF WORK
1.1.1. Provide all labor, materials services and equipment indicated on Drawings and/or herein
specified to complete all Soil Preparation Work.
1.1.1.1. Testing of site and import topsoil
1.1.1.2. Amendment of soil
1.1.1.3. Bioretention Planter soil
1.2. DEFINITIONS
1.2.1. Finish grade/Finish grade: Finish grade shall mean the establishment of grades to 0.04
feet plus or minus.
1.2.2. Grading intent: Spot elevations (grades) and contours are indicated based on the best
available data. The intent is to provide positive drainage throughout the planting areas
while creating gentle, smooth, and naturalistic landforms. If a spot elevation is determined
to be in error, or the difference in elevation between points change contact the Owners
Authorized Representative immediately for field adjustments of spot elevations.
2.1. GENERAL
2.1.1. All materials shall be of standard, approved and first-grade quality and shall be in prime
condition when installed and accepted. Any commercially processed or packaged material
shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened container bearing the manufacturer's
guaranteed analysis.
2.1.2. The Contractor shall supply the Architect with a sample of all supplied materials
accompanied by analytical data from an approved laboratory source illustrating
compliance of bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis.
2.2. MATERIALS
2.2.1. Soil Amendments:
2.2.1.1. Soil Conditioner: Gro-Power Plus: Humus (bacteria included based fertilizer
and soil conditioner with soil penetrant shall consist of the following
percentages by weight:
2.2.1.1.1. 5 %Nitrogen
2.2.1.1.2. 3 % phosphoric acid
2.2.1.1.3. Potash
County of Tehama LANDSCAPE SOIL PREPARATION
JKA #15-100 32 91 13 - 1
2.2.1.1.4. 50 % humus
2.2.1.1.5. 15 % humic acids
2.2.1.2. Organic Compost
2.2.1.2.1. Compost shall be a well decomposed, stable, weed free

organic matter source. It shall be derived from: agricultural,
food, or industrial residuals; biosolids (treated sewage
sludge); yard trimmings; source-separated or mixed solid
waste. The product shall contain no substances toxic to
plants and shall be reasonably free (< .5% by dry weight) of
man-made foreign matter. The compost will possess no
objectionable odors and shall not resemble the raw material
from which it was derived. The product shall be certified
through the U.S. Composting Councils (USCC) Seal of
Testing Assurance (STA) Program.
Parameters Reported as General Range

(units of measure)
pH2 pH units 6.5 - 8
Soluble Salt Concentration2 dS/m (mmhos/cm) Maximum 10
(electrical conductivity)
Moisture Content %, wet weight basis 30 60
Organic Matter Content %, dry weight basis 30 75
Particle Size % passing a selected mesh 99% pass through 1 screen,
size, dry weight basis 90% pass through the
screen, 40% pass through
screen or smaller.
Stability3 mg CO2-C per g OM per day <8
Carbon Dioxide
Evolution Rate
Maturity3 (Bioassay) %, relative to positive control Minimum 80%
Seed Emergence and %, relative to positive control Minimum 80%
Seedling Vigor
Physical Contaminants %, dry weight basis < .5
(inerts)
Chemical Contaminants4 mg/kg (ppm) Meet or exceed US EPA
Class A standard, 40 CFR
503.13, Tables 1 and 3
levels
Biological Contaminants5 MPN per gram per dry Meet or exceed US EPA
weight Class A standard, 40 CFR
Select Pathogens
503.32(a) levels
MPN per 4 grams per dry
Fecal Coliform Bacteria, or
weight
Salmonella

JKA #15-100 32 91 13 - 2
2.2.2. On-site topsoil: Existing on site material may be acceptable fill or top soil material, if
approved by the Architect.
2.2.2.1. Submit horticultural soils report and amend site topsoil as necessary to match
criteria specified in this section for import top soil.
2.2.3. Imported Top Soil:
2.2.3.1. Imported soil, if needed, shall be obtained from a local source as approved
by Architect.
2.2.3.2. Imported topsoil shall be of friable sandy-loam texture free of refuse, roots,
heavy or stiff clay, rocks, sticks, brush, noxious weeds, or other deleterious
materials.
2.2.3.3. Topsoil acidity range (pH) shall be between 6.5 and 7.5 and contain a
minimum of 4% and a maximum of 25% organic matter.
2.2.4. Topsoil samples and analysis shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to
delivery of any soil to the project site. Topsoil, if rejected, may be amended to meet
specifications. Submit amended topsoil analysis to the Architect for verification. Rejected
topsoil that has not been amended to meet specification shall be removed immediately at
no cost to the Owner.
2.2.5. Bioretention Planter Soil: shall consist of a mixture of fine sand and compost, of 60%-70%
sand and 30%-40% compost.
2.2.5.1. Sand
Shall be free of wood, waste, coating such as clay, stone dust, carbonate, etc., or any
other deleterious material. All aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve size shall be non-
plastic. Sand shall comply with the ASTM C33 gradation requirements for fine aggregate.
2.2.5.2. Compost
Compost shall conform to the requirements in section 2.2.1.2 above.
3.1. GENERAL
3.1.1. Coordinate installation of Irrigation, if any, with Landscape Grading and Soil Preparation.
3.1.2. Protect work and materials from damage due to construction operations by other
contractors and trades and by vandalism. Maintain protection during installation and
maintenance period.
3.2. INSTALLATION
3.2.1. Soil preparation for in-ground plantings:
3.2.1.1. Rip all planting areas to a depth of 18 prior to installing any irrigation and
prior to placing imported top soil or incorporating soil amendments. Break up
all clods larger than one inch to produce loose, friable soil.
JKA #15-100 32 91 13 - 3
3.2.1.2. Adjust depth of ripping as required to protect existing underground utilities at
actual location of said utilities only.
3.2.1.3. Rough grade to generally conform to grades and contours indicated on

Engineers plans
3.2.1.4. Soil amendment: thoroughly mix soil conditioner and 3 depth of compost into
top 12 of ripped site soil in all planting areas except Biorentenion Areas.
3.2.1.4.1. Soil conditioner per manufacturers specified rates and

application method.
3.2.1.5. Following amendment of soil, all soil areas shall be compacted and settled by
application of heavy irrigation to a minimum depth of twelve (12) inches.
3.2.2. Bioretention Planter Soil
3.2.2.1. Rip subgrade below planting area within the planter, to allow for installation
of subdrain and gravel layer. Backfill with soil mix as specified in Section 2.2.7.
3.2.3. Landscape Finish Grading
3.2.3.1. Fine grade all planting areas to a smooth, loose and uniform surface. The top
six (6) inches of all areas to be planted shall be free of stones, clods,
vegetation, or other deleterious matter one (1) inch in diameter or larger, and
shall be free from man-made objects that would be a hindrance to planting
and maintenance. All rocks larger than 1 inch to be removed by mechanical
means, either by sieve for loose rock and by heavy equipment if solid bedrock.
3.2.3.2. Finish grades shall slope to drain, without water pockets or irregularities
(humps or hollows).
3.2.3.3. In areas where county will be completing their own landscaping leave finished
surface down 3 from elevation shown on plans to allow for the placement of
mulch or rock topper. In areas where sod will be placed, leave finished surface
down 1-1/2 from elevation shown on plans.
3.3. CLEAN UP
3.3.1. After all landscaping operations have been completed; remove all trash, excess soil,
empty plant containers or rubbish from the property. All scars, ruts or other marks in the
ground caused by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a neat and orderly
condition throughout the site.
3.3.2. The Contractor shall pick-up all trash resulting from this work no less frequently than each
Friday before leaving the site, once a week, and/or the last working day of each week. All
trash shall be removed completely from the site.
3.3.3. The Contractor shall leave the site area broom-clean and shall wash down all paved areas
within the Contract area, leaving the premises in a clean condition acceptable to the
Owners Authorized Representative.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 32 91 13 - 4
SECTION 33 11 16
SITE WATER SYSTEM
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.1.1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
1.1.2. City of Red Bluff, Standard Details for Water Services
1.2. SUMMARY
1.2.1. This Section includes water systems piping for potable water service and fire protection
service outside the building.
1.2.1.1. Pipe and fittings for site water lines including domestic water lines and fire
water lines.
1.2.1.2. Valves, Fire Hydrants, check valves, and fire department connections.
1.3. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1. Minimum Working Pressure Ratings: Except where otherwise indicated, the following are
minimum pressure requirements for water system piping.
1.3.1.1. Underground piping domestic water lines: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
1.3.1.2. Underground piping fire water lines: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
1.4. SUBMITTALS
1.4.1. Product data, including pressure rating, rated capacity, and settings of selected models
for the following:
1.4.1.1. Valve boxes
1.4.1.2. Backflow preventers
1.4.1.3. Valves
1.4.1.4. Fire hydrants
1.4.1.5. Identification materials and devices
1.4.1.6. Fire Department Connections
1.4.1.7. Pipe materials & pipe fittings
1.4.2. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3.

County of Tehama SITE WATER SYSTEM
JKA #15-100 33 11 16 - 1
1.4.3. Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in
Division 1 Section 01700. Include data for the following:
1.4.3.1. Backflow preventers.
1.4.3.2. Valves.
1.5.1. Comply with requirements of City of Red Bluff Public Works Department including
connecting to water service lines and backflow prevention.
1.5.2. Comply with standards of City of Red Bluff Public Works Department for fire protection
systems. Include materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
1.5.3. Comply with NFPA 24 "Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and
Their Appurtenances" for materials, installations, tests, and flushing.
1.5.4. Comply with 2013 California Electrical Code for electrical connections between wiring and
electrically operated devices.
1.5.5. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified
standards.
1.5.6. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories that are listed and labeled.
1.5.6.1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in 2013 California Electrical
Code, Article 100.
1.5.6.2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
1.6.1. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, for shipping as follows:
1.6.1.1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
1.6.1.2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and weld
ends.
1.6.1.3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
1.6.2. Storage: Use the following precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, during storage:
1.6.2.1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall
for storage.
1.6.2.2. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors and maintain temperature
higher than ambient dew point temperature. Support valves off ground or
pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.
1.6.3. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants whose size requires handling by
crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels
or stems as lifting or rigging points.

JKA #15-100 33 11 16 - 2
1.6.4. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of
dirt, debris, and moisture.
1.6.5. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not
exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside.
1.6.6. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
1.6.7. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7.1. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.
Contact utility locating service (USA) for area where Project is located.
1.7.2. Site Information: No soils report on subsurface condition investigations were made for this
Project.
1.8.1. Coordinate connection to water main with the local utility company.
1.8.2. Coordinate with pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of fire
hydrant and piping.
1.8.3. Coordinate with other utility work.
1.8.4. Coordinate electrical requirements of actual equipment furnished.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include are limited to the following
or approved equal as accepted by the City of Red Bluff:
2.1.1.1. Gate Valves:
2.1.1.1.1. Mueller Co.
2.1.1.1.2. Crane
2.1.1.2. OS&Y Valves: (must be approved by City of Red Bluff)
2.1.1.2.1. Febco
2.1.1.2.2. Watts
2.1.1.2.3. Ames
2.1.1.2.4. Wilkins
2.1.1.3. Reduced Pressure Backflow Prevention: (must be approved by City of Red

Bluff)
JKA #15-100 33 11 16 - 3
2.1.1.3.1. Febco
2.1.1.3.2. Watts
2.1.1.3.3. Ames
2.1.1.3.4. Wilkins
2.1.1.4. Valve Boxes:
2.1.1.4.1. Christy Concrete
2.1.1.4.2. Cooks Concrete
2.1.1.5. Fire Hydrants
2.1.1.5.1. Clow
2.1.1.5.2. James Jones Company
2.2. PIPES
2.2.1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (Main Line): All pipe shall be Class 150, D.R. 18, unless
otherwise specified (Fire lines shall be Class 200) and shall comply with the latest revision
of AWWA Standard C-900. The pipe shall have ductile-iron pipe equivalent outside
diameter dimensions and shall have Push-on Joint ends complete with gaskets.
2.2.2. Ductile Iron (DI) Pipe (Main Line): All Ductile Iron pipe shall comply with the latest revision
of AWWA Standard C151 and shall be cement mortar lined in conformance with the latest
revision of AWWA Standard C104. All pipe shall have Push-on Joint ends complete with
gasket unless specified otherwise and shall be Pressure Class 350 in all sizes from 6" to
12" unless specified otherwise. Pipe shall be furnished with polyethylene encasement
complying with the latest revision of AWWA Standard C105.
2.2.3. Water service pipe can either be the same as main lines or copper tubing C800 Type K
soft temper tubing for up to 1.5 inch tubing and Type K hard temper for greater than 2 inch
and up to 4 inch tubing. All copper connections shall be sil-fos.
2.3. PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
2.3.1. Pipe Fittings: All fittings shall be Ductile Iron complying with the latest revision of AWWA
Standard C153 for push-on and mechanical joints fittings and C110 for flanged fittings. All
fittings shall either be cement mortar lined in conformance with the latest revision of
AWWA Standard C104 or coated with fusion-bonded epoxy inside and outside in
conformance with the latest revision of AWWA Standard C116.
2.3.2. Flanged Coupling Adapters and Flexible Couplings - Flanged coupling adapters (FCA),
Romac Style FCA501 or equal. and flexible couplings, Romac Style 501 or equal shall
conform to the AWWA Standard C219.
2.4. PIPING SPECIALTIES (VERIFY USE WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO PROPOSING)
2.4.1. Flexible Pipe Connectors for Non Ferrous Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire
braid; with copper tube, pressure type, solder joint ends or bronze flanged ends; brazed
to hose.

JKA #15-100 33 11 16 - 4
2.4.2. Flexible Pipe Connectors for Ferrous Piping: Stainless steel hose covered with stainless
steel wire braid; with ASME B1.20.1 threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16.5 steel pipe
flanges; welded to hose.
2.4.3. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar
metals to prevent galvanic action and corrosion.
2.4.3.1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain,
and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials.
2.4.3.2. Dielectric Unions: Factory fabricated union assembly, designed for 250 psig
(1725 kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). Include
insulating material isolating dissimilar metals and ends with inside threads
according to ASME B1.20.1.
2.4.3.3. Dielectric Flanges: Factory fabricated companion flange assembly, for 150
psig (1035 kPa) or 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum pressure to suit system
pressures.
2.4.3.4. Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits: Field assembled companion flange

assembly, full face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic
gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel
backing washers.
2.4.4. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel couplings having inert and noncorrosive
thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300 psig (2070 kPa) minimum working
pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
2.4.5. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic
lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300 psig (2070 kPa)
working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
2.5. VALVES
2.5.1. In Ground Valves: UL 262, FM approved, iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator
post, bronze seating material, inside screw, 250 psig (1200 kPa) working pressure,
mechanical joint ends. Provide with flanged ends for pit installation. Buried valves shall
have a 2 inch square operating nut. The interior and exterior of the body and bonnet shall
be coated with fusion bonded epoxy. The body to bonnet bolts and nuts shall be stainless
steel.
2.5.2. Valve Boxes: Concrete valve box having a cast iron traffic lid with inset lettering "WATER,"
bottom section with base of size to fit over valve and barrel approximately 5 inches (124
mm) in diameter, and adjustable cast iron extension of length required for depth of bury
of valve.
2.5.2.1. Provide a steel tee handle operating wrench with each valve box to the
Owner. Wrench shall have tee handle with one pointed end, stem of length to
operate valve, and socket fitting valve operating nut.
2.5.2.2. Set access boxes in 4 thick concrete pad, trowel smooth and edge, set flush
with finish grade.
2.5.3. Curb Stops: Bronze body, ground key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet
to match service piping material. (by others)

JKA #15-100 33 11 16 - 5
2.6. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
2.6.1. General: ASSE standard backflow preventers of size indicated by safety engineer for
maximum flow rate and maximum pressure loss indicated.
2.6.1.1. Working Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum except where indicated
otherwise.
2.6.1.2. 2 1/2 Inches (65 mm) and Larger: Bronze, cast iron, steel, or stainless steel
body with flanged ends. Interior Lining: FDA approved epoxy coating for
backflow preventers having cast iron or steel body.
2.6.1.3. Interior Components: Corrosion resistant materials.
2.6.1.4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate when used in chrome plated piping
system.
2.6.1.5. Strainer on inlet where strainer is indicated.
2.6.2. Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventer: ASSE 1013, with OS&Y gate valves on
inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks and pressure differential relief
valve having ASME A112.1.2 air gap fitting located between 2 positive seating check
valves for continuous pressure application.
2.6.2.1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum through middle third of flow range.
2.6.3. Tamper Switch: Shall be UL/FM approved, water and tamper resistant, single pole double
throw switch. Wire to internal fire control systems as required by code.
2.7. ANCHORAGES
2.7.1. Clamps, Straps, and Washers: ASTM A 506, steel.
2.7.2. Rods: ASTM A 575, steel.
2.7.3. Rod Couplings: ASTM A 197, malleable iron.
2.7.4. Bolts: ASTM A 307, steel.
2.7.5. Cast Iron Washers: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
2.7.6. Concrete Reaction Backing (thrust blocks)
2.8. IDENTIFICATION
2.8.1. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 3 inches (150 mm) wide
by 4 mils (1 mm) thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters
"CAUTION WATER LINE BURIED BELOW." Locate 12 above pipe, directly over piping
with imprinted side up.
2.8.2. Toning Wire: All runs of non-metallic water pipe shall have a No. 10 gauge solid soft
drawn copper locator wire taped on top of the pipe to facilitate locating the pipe at a later
date. The wire shall be stubbed up inside each valve box. Continuity test shall be
conducted on each splice at all locations.

JKA #15-100 33 11 16 - 6
3.1. JOINT CONSTRUCTION
3.1.1. Flanged Joints: Align flanges and install gaskets. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt
tightening. Use lubricant on bolt threads.
3.1.2. Threaded Joints: Thread pipes with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1,
apply tape or joint compound, and apply wrench to valve ends into which pipes are being
threaded.
3.1.3. Grooved End Pipe and Fitting Joints: Cut groove pipes. Assemble joints with grooved
couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.1.4. AWWA Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping Gasketed Joints: Use AWWA C900 joining
materials. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774
or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.1.5. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Construct joints using adapters that are compatible
with both piping materials, outside diameters, and system working pressure. Refer to
"Piping Systems Common Requirements" Article for joining piping of dissimilar metals.
3.2. PIPING SYSTEMS COMMON REQUIREMENTS
3.2.1. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate general location and
arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size
pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.
Install piping as indicated except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination
drawings.
3.2.2. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
3.2.3. Install piping free of sags and bends.
3.2.4. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
3.2.5. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
3.2.6. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified
below.
3.2.6.1. Install flanges, in piping 2 1/2 inches (65 mm) and larger, adjacent to flanged
valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe
connection.
3.2.6.2. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals.
3.3. PIPING INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Comply with requirements of NFPA 24 for materials and installation.
3.3.2. Install AWWA polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe according to AWWA M23 or ASTM
D2774.

JKA #15-100 33 11 16 - 7
3.3.3. Bury piping at minimum depth of 36 inches (1 m) below finished grade and not less than
18 inches (0.5 m) below average local frost depth.
3.4. ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION
3.4.1. Anchorages: Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and
hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems:
3.4.1.1. Gasketed Joint, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping: According to AWWA M23.
3.4.1.2. Fire Service Piping: According to NFPA 24.
3.4.2. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion retarding material to surfaces of
installed ferrous anchorage devices.
3.5. VALVE INSTALLATION
3.5.1. General Application: Use mechanical joint end valves for 3 inch (80 mm) and larger buried
installation. Use threaded and flanged end valves for installation in pits and inside building.
Use nonrising stem UL/FM gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use bronze
corporation stops and valves, with ends compatible with piping, for 2 inch (50 mm) and
smaller installation.
3.5.2. AWWA Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried valves with stem
pointing up and with cast iron valve box.
3.5.3. UL/FM Type Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.
3.5.3.1. Install buried valves and valves in pits with stem pointing up and with vertical
cast iron indicator post where shown.
3.6. BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION
3.6.1. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated where shown. Include
valves and test cocks. Install according to plumbing and health department authorities
having jurisdiction.
3.6.2. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer.
3.6.3. Do not install reduced pressure principle type in pit.
3.7. TAPPING WATER MAIN
3.7.1. For the Fire Hydrant connection, the Contractor will coordinate with the City Water
Department and hot tap the existing City water line for the valve and hydrant installation.
The Contractor is responsible for coordinating with the City for inspections, pressure
testing, and bacteriological testing prior to putting hydrant into service.
3.8.1. Piping Tests: Contractor is responsible for coordinating with the City Water Department
for pipe tests before joints are covered and after any thrust blocks have hardened
sufficiently.

JKA #15-100 33 11 16 - 8
3.9. CLEANING
3.9.1. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:
3.9.1.1. Purge new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems
that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use.
3.9.1.2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having

jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by that authority, use procedure
described in AWWA C651 or as described below:
3.9.1.2.1. Comply with NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping

system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at points of outlet. Flushing shall be verified by a
Deputy State Fire Marshall and / or the inspector of record.
3.9.1.2.2. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution

containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate
(valve off) system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24
hours.
3.9.1.2.3. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill

with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per
million of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
3.9.1.2.4. Following allowed standing time, flush system with clean,

potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming
from system.
3.9.1.2.5. Contractor is responsible for coordinating with the City Water

Department for bacteriological testing.
3.9.1.3. Contractor to meet all other disinfection standards of the local utility from
which water service is being supplied prior to placing anything into service.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 33 11 16 - 9
SECTION 33 40 00
SITE STORM DRAINAGE
1. PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY
1.1.1. This Section includes storm drainage system piping and appurtenances on site.
1.1.1.1. Storm Drainage piping, fittings, and accessories.
1.1.1.2. Catch basins, paved area drainage, and site surface drainage.
1.2. SUBMITTALS
1.2.1. Product data for drainage piping specialties.
1.2.2. Shop drawings for precast concrete storm drainage manholes and catch basins, including
frames, covers, and grates.
1.3.1. Environmental Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of local environmental

agency regulations pertaining to storm drainage systems.
1.3.2. Utility Compliance: Comply with the standard specifications for Public Works construction
regulations and standards pertaining to storm drainage systems.
1.4.1. Site Information: Verify that storm drainage system piping may be installed in compliance
with original design and referenced standards.
1.4.1.1. Locate existing storm drainage system piping and structures that are to be
abandoned and closed.
1.4.1.2. Locate connection points for storm drainage and verify that the connections
as shown on the plans will work.
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
2.1.1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the
following:
2.1.1.1. Drop Inlets:
2.1.1.1.1. Nyloplast
2.1.1.1.2. Cooks Concrete Products, Inc

County of Tehama SITE STORM DRAINAGE
JKA #15-100 33 40 00 - 1
2.1.1.1.3. North Valley Precast
2.1.1.1.4. Oldcastle Precast
2.2. PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.2.1. General: Provide pipe and pipe fitting materials compatible with each other. Where more
than one type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
2.2.2. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for solvent cement or
elastomeric gasket joints.
2.2.2.1. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
2.2.2.2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
2.2.3. High-density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings (HDPE) Type S (smooth interior): AASHTO
M252, AASHTO M294, AASHTO M96, ASTM F405, ASTM 667, ASTM F810.
2.2.4. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Pipe: ASTM D 2680, SDR 35, for solvent cement
sealed joint end.
2.3. DRAIN INLETS
2.3.1. Plastic Drain Inlets: shall be as shown on drawings. All inlets within pavement areas shall
have an ADA & heel rating.
3.1. PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
3.1.1. Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free foundation,
throughout the length of the pipe.
3.1.2. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to
be laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level.
3.1.3. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill.
Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to ensure continuous
bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
3.2. INSTALLATION, GENERAL
3.2.1. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general
location and arrangement of the underground storm drainage system piping. Location and
arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install the
piping as indicated, to the extent practical. Notify the Architect if deviation is required.
3.2.2. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated
with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install
gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.

JKA #15-100 33 40 00 - 2
3.2.3. Use manholes or catch basins for changes in direction, except where a fitting is indicated.
Use fittings for branch connections, except where direct tap into existing storm drain pipe
is indicated.
3.2.4. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different size or material of
pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the direction of flow is
prohibited.
3.2.5. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at slope indicated. Begin installation at the
downstream end and lay pipe continuously up gradient.
3.2.6. Adjust to final finished grades all drop inlets, manholes, cleanouts and appurtenances new
or existing to provide smooth connections.
3.2.7. Backfill & Bedding per spec section 31 23 33 Trenching and Backfilling.
3.3. PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
3.3.1. Join and install PVC pipe as follows:
3.3.1.1. Solvent cement joint pipe and fittings, joining with solvent cement in
accordance with ASTM D 2855 and ASTM F 402.
3.3.1.2. Pipe and gasketed fittings, joining with elastomeric seals in accordance with
ASTM D 3212.
3.3.1.3. Installation in accordance with ASTM D 2321.
3.3.2. Join concrete pipe and fittings with rubber gaskets in accordance with ASTM C 443, and
install piping in accordance with applicable provisions of ACPA "Concrete Pipe Installation
Manual."
3.3.3. Join different types of pipe with standard manufactured couplings and fittings per
manufacturers specifications.
3.4. DROP INLETS
3.4.1. Construct drop inlets to sizes and shapes indicated on plans.
3.4.2. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated on plans.
3.5. INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION
3.5.1. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back-filling of trench for Storm
Drain piping. Tape shall be 2 wide minimum with metallic toning core, locate 8 inches
below finished grade, directly over piping with imprinted side up. Terminate toning wire at
each drop inlet.
3.6.1. Testing: Perform testing of completed piping (as required) in accordance with the local
city requirements.
3.6.2. Cleaning: Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as
work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is
completed.
JKA #15-100 33 40 00 - 3
3.6.2.1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning.
3.6.2.2. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of day or whenever work
stops.
3.6.2.3. Flush piping between manholes to remove collected debris.
3.6.3. Interior Inspection: Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage
has occurred.
3.6.3.1. Make inspections after pipe between manholes and manhole locations has
been installed and approximately 2 feet of backfill is in place, and again at
completion of project.
3.6.3.2. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration, or

other defects, correct such defects and re-inspect.
END OF SECTION

JKA #15-100 33 40 00 - 4

Attachment 16661

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Attachment 16661

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

PROJECT MANUAL

Tehama County Library

April 18, 2016

DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 31 33 Hazardous Material Survey

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS

DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Tehama County Library

DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION

DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

Tehama County Library

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Tehama County Library

Buehler & Buehler

Capital Engineering Consultants, Inc.

The Engineering Enterprise

Tehama County Library

PROJECT HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SURVEY

1. INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

1.1.1. Document Title:

Tehama County Library

1.1.1. Summary of work under this contract

1.1.2. Regulatory Requirements

1.1.3. Contractor use of site and premises.

1.1.4. Owner occupancy.

1.2. SUMMARY OF WORK

1.2.1.1.1. Demolition includes abatement of asbestos containing

1.2.1.3. Installation of items furnished by owner as shown on the drawings including,

1.3. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS.

Tehama County Library

1.4.1. Limit use of site and premises to allow:

1.4.1.1. Work by Others and Work by Owner.

1.4.2. Access to Site: Coordinate with Owner.

1.4.4. Time and Construction Schedule Considerations:

1.4.4.1. Schedule all construction operations with Owner.

1.4.4.2. Construction operations generating excessive noise, such as use of

1.4.4.4. Schedule replenishing construction materials only during period of 8:00 AM

1.4.4.5. Construction operations, such as material deliveries, debris removal, and

Tehama County Library

TEST LABORATORY SERVICES - AIR MONITORING

1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS:

1.2. DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK

1.3. AIR MONITORING:

1.3.1.2. Failure of filtration or rupture in the differential pressure system,

Tehama County Library

1.4. STOP ACTION LEVELS:

1.4.4.2. Decontaminate the affected area in accordance with Section 01 71 20

Tehama County Library

1.5. ANALYTICAL METHODS:

1.5.1.2. Transmission Electron Microscopy will be performed using the analysis

1.6. SAMPLE VOLUMES:

1.7. SCHEDULE OF AIR SAMPLES:

1.7.1. Before Start of Work:

1.7.1.2.1. PCM: 0.8 micrometer mixed cellulose ester.

1.7.1.2.2. TEM: 0.45 micrometer mixed cellulose ester or 0.40

1.7.1.3. Sampling sensitivity in the table below refers to:

1.7.1.3.2. Analytical Sensitivity for TEM analysis as set forth in the

Location Number Analysis Sampling Minimum Rate

Each Work 1 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10

Each Work 1 hold for TEM 0.005 1,300 1-10

Outside Each 5 PCM 0.01 1,200 1-10